PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives User Manual

PowerFlex 750-Series AC DrivesUser Manual

4 Table of ContentsPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

PrefaceOverviewThe purpose of this manual is to provide you with the basic informationneeded to install, start-up and troubleshoot PowerFlex® 750-SeriesAdjustable Frequency AC Drives.For information on …See page...Who Should Use This Manual P-1What Is Not In This Manual P-1Recommended Documentation P-1Manual Conventions P-3Drive Frame Sizes P-3General Precautions P-4Catalog Number Explanation P-6Who Should Use ThisManualThis manual is intended for qualified personnel. You must be able toprogram and operate Adjustable Frequency AC Drive devices. In addition,you must have an understanding of the parameter settings and functions.What Is Not In This ManualThe PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual is designed to provide only basicstart-up information.RecommendedDocumentationAll the recommended documentation listed in this section is availableonline at www.rockwellautomation.com/literature.The following publications provide general drive information.TitlePublicationWiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives DRIVES-IN001Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State SGI-1.1ControlA Global Reference Guide for Reading Schematic Diagrams 100-2.10Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage 8000-4.5.2PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

P-2 OverviewThe following publications provide specific PowerFlex 750-Series drivefeatures information:TitleEnhanced PowerFlex 7-Class Human Interface Module (HIM) User ManualPowerFlex 750-Series Safe Torque Off User ManualSafe Speed Monitor Option Module for PowerFlex 750-Series AC DrivesReference ManualPowerFlex 7-Class Network Communication Adapter User ManualsDynamic Braking Resistor CalculatorDeviceLogix User ManualPublication20HIM-UM001750-UM002750-RM001750COM-UMPFLEX-AT001RA-UM003The following publications provide necessary information when applyingthe DriveLogix Controller:TitleDriveLogix5730 Controller User ManualPowerFlex 755 Drive & DriveLogix ControllerLogix5000 Controllers Common ProceduresLogix5000 Controllers General InstructionsLogix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives InstructionsRSLogix 5000 Getting ResultsPublication20D-UM00320D-RN0071756-PM0011756-RM0031756-RM0069399-RLD300GRThe following publications provide information that is useful whenplanning and installing communication networks:TitlePublicationContolNet Coax Tap Installation Instructions 1786-5.7ControlNet Cable System Planning and Installation Manual 1786-6.2.1ContolNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation GuideCNET-IN001Obtaining ManualsTo order paper copies of technical documentation, contact your localRockwell Automation distributor or sales representative.To find your local Rockwell Automation distributor, visitwww.rockwellautomation.com/locationsAllen-Bradley DrivesTechnical SupportOnline at… By Email at… By Telephone at…www.ab.com/support/abdrives support@drives.ra.rockwell.com 262-512-8176For Automation and Control Technical Support:TitleRockwell Automation Technical SupportOnline at…http://support.rockwellautomation.com/knowledgebaseProduct CertificationProduct Certifications and Declarations of Conformity are available on theinternet at: www.rockwellautomation.com/products/certificationPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Overview P-3Manual Conventions • In this manual we refer to PowerFlex 750-Series Adjustable FrequencyAC Drives as: drive, PowerFlex 750, PowerFlex 750 drive or PowerFlex750 AC drive.• Specific drives within the PowerFlex 750-Series may be referred to as:– PowerFlex 753, PowerFlex 753 drive or PowerFlex 753 AC drive– PowerFlex 755, PowerFlex 755 drive or PowerFlex 755 AC drive• To help differentiate parameter names and LCD display text from othertext, the following conventions will be used:– Parameter Names will appear in [brackets] after the ParameterNumber.For example: parameter 308 [Direction Mode].– Display text will appear in “quotes.” For example: “Enabled.”• The following words are used throughout the manual to describe anaction:WordCanCannotMayMustShallShouldShould NotMeaningPossible, able to do somethingNot possible, not able to do somethingPermitted, allowedUnavoidable, you must do thisRequired and necessaryRecommendedNot recommendedDrive Frame SizesSimilar PowerFlex 750-Series drive sizes are grouped into frame sizes tosimplify spare parts ordering, dimensioning, etc. A cross reference of drivecatalog numbers and their respective frame size is provided in Appendix A.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

P-4 OverviewGeneral PrecautionsQualified Personnel!ATTENTION: Only qualified personnel familiar withadjustable frequency AC drives and associated machinery shouldplan or implement the installation, start-up and subsequentmaintenance of the system. Failure to comply may result inpersonal injury and/or equipment damage.Personal Safety!!!!!ATTENTION: To avoid an electric shock hazard, verify that thevoltage on the bus capacitors has discharged completely beforeservicing. Check the DC bus voltage at the Power TerminalBlock by measuring between the +DC and -DC terminals (referto Chapter 1 for location), between the +DC terminal and thechassis, and between the -DC terminal and the chassis. Thevoltage must be zero for all three measurements.ATTENTION: Hazard of personal injury or equipment damageexists when using bipolar input sources. Noise and drift insensitive input circuits can cause unpredictable changes in motorspeed and direction. Use speed command parameters to helpreduce input source sensitivity.ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. DPIor SCANport host products must not be directly connectedtogether via 1202 cables. Unpredictable behavior can result iftwo or more devices are connected in this manner.ATTENTION: The drive start/stop/enable control circuitryincludes solid state components. If hazards due to accidentalcontact with moving machinery or unintentional flow of liquid,gas or solids exists, an additional hardwired stop circuit may berequired to remove the AC line to the drive. An auxiliary brakingmethod may be required.ATTENTION: Hazard of personal injury or equipment damagedue to unexpected machine operation exists if the drive isconfigured to automatically issue a Start or Run command. Donot use these functions without considering applicable local,national and international codes, standards, regulations orindustry guidelines.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Overview P-5Product Safety!!!!ATTENTION: An incorrectly applied or installed drive canresult in component damage or a reduction in product life.Wiring or application errors such as under sizing the motor,incorrect or inadequate AC supply, or excessive surrounding airtemperatures may result in malfunction of the system.ATTENTION: This drive contains ESD (ElectrostaticDischarge) sensitive parts and assemblies. Static controlprecautions are required when installing, testing, servicing orrepairing this assembly. Component damage may result if ESDcontrol procedures are not followed. If you are not familiar withstatic control procedures, reference Guarding AgainstElectrostatic Damage, publication 8000-4.5.2 or any otherapplicable ESD protection handbook.ATTENTION: Configuring an analog input for 0-20 mAoperation and driving it from a voltage source could causecomponent damage. Verify proper configuration prior toapplying input signals.ATTENTION: A contactor or other device that routinelydisconnects and reapplies the AC line to the drive to start andstop the motor can cause drive hardware damage. The drive isdesigned to use control input signals that will start and stop themotor. If an input device is used, operation must not exceed onecycle per minute or drive damage will occur.Class 1 LED Product!ATTENTION: Hazard of permanent eye damage exists whenusing optical transmission equipment. This product emits intenselight and invisible radiation. Do not look into module ports orfiber optic cable connectors.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

P-6 OverviewCatalog Number ExplanationPosition1…3 4 5 6 7 8…10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1820F 1 1 N D 248 A A 0 N N N N Na b c d e f g hDriveCodeType20F PowerFlex 75320G PowerFlex 755abFuture UsecInput TypeCode Description Frames1 6 Pulse, w/DC Terminals 2…74DC Common Bus withPrecharge5…7A 6 Pulse, w/o DC Terminals 6, 7For Frames 2…4, Code 1 also provides thefunctionality of DC Common Bus withPrecharge. For Frames 5 and larger, Code 4 isrequired for DC Common Bus with Precharge.dEnclosureCodeDescriptionF Flange (NEMA/UL Type 4X back) § ‡G IP54, NEMA/UL Type 12 §N IP20/IP00, NEMA/UL Type Open‡ For Frames 6…7 a User Installed Flange Kit isavailable to convert a Code N drive thatprovides a NEMA/UL Type 4X back.§ Frames 2…5 only.Frames 2…5 are IP20, Frames 6…7 are IP00.CodeCDeVoltage RatingVoltage400V AC480V ACCode Amps kW2P1 2.1 0.753P5 3.5 1.55P0 5.0 2.28P7 8.7 4011 11.5 5.5015 15.4 7.5022 22 11f1ND Rating400V, 50 Hz InputFrameEnclosure CodeN F G2 2 2030 30 15037 37 18.5 3 3 3043 43 22060 60 3044 4072 72 375085 85 455 5104 104 55140 140 756170 170 906205 205 110260 260 132‡302 302 160367 367 200 77456 456 250‡ For Frames 6…7 a User Installed Flange Kit isavailable to convert a Code N drive thatprovides a NEMA/UL Type 4X back.Code Amps Hp2P1 2.1 13P4 3.4 25P0 5.0 38P0 8.0 5011 11 7.5014 14 10022 22 15f2ND Rating480V, 60 Hz InputgFrameEnclosure CodeN F G2 2 2027 27 20034 34 25 3 3 3040 40 30052 52 4044 4065 65 505077 77 605 5096 96 75125 125 1006156 156 1256186 186 150248 248 200‡302 302 250361 361 300 77415 415 350‡ For Frames 6…7 a User Installed Flange Kit isavailable to convert a Code N drive thatprovides a NEMA/UL Type 4X back.Filtering and CM Cap ConfigurationCode FilteringDefault CM CapConnectionA Yes Jumper RemovedJ Yes Jumper InstalledIn all cases, jumpers are included for fieldreconfiguration as desired.CodehDynamic BrakingInternal Resistor Internal TransistorA No YesB Yes YesN No NoFrame 2 only.Standard on Frames 2…5, Optional onFrames 6…7.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Chapter 1Installation/WiringChapter ObjectivesThis chapter provides the information needed to mount and wirePowerFlex ® 750-Series AC drives, frames 2…7.For Information on …See Page …Lifting the Drive 1-2Opening the Cover 1-5Mounting Considerations 1-7AC Supply Source Considerations 1-8Grounding Requirements 1-9Fuses and Circuit Breakers 1-11Power Wiring 1-11Common Bus Power Wiring 1-18IP65, NEMA Type 12 Installations 1-21Using Input/Output Contactors 1-22Using PowerFlex 750-Series Drives with Regenerative Power Units 1-23Drive Power Jumper Configuration 1-23I/O Wiring 1-28Option Module Installation 1-36Option Module Parameter Access 1-36750-Series I/O Module 1-37I/O Wiring Examples 1-38Relay Wiring Examples 1-43Safe Torque Off Option Module 1-44Safe Speed Monitor Option Module 1-45Auxiliary Power Supply Option Module 1-46DeviceNet Option Module 1-4720-COMM Carrier 1-49CE Conformity 1-50Most start-up difficulties are the result of incorrect wiring. Every precautionmust be taken to assure that the wiring is done as instructed. All items mustbe read and understood before the actual installation begins.!ATTENTION: The following information is merely a guide forproper installation. Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assumeresponsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to anycode, national, local or otherwise for the proper installation of thisdrive or associated equipment. A hazard of personal injury and/orequipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

1-2 Installation/WiringLifting the DriveThe dimensions and weights specified must be taken into considerationwhen mounting the drive. All lifting equipment and lifting components(hooks, bolts, lifts, slings, chains, etc.) must be properly sized and rated tosafely lift and hold the weight of the drive while mounting.!Figure 1.1ATTENTION: To guard against possible personal injury and/orequipment damage…• Inspect all lifting hardware for proper attachment beforelifting drive.• Do not allow any part of the drive or lifting mechanism tomake contact with electrically charged conductors orcomponents.• Do not subject the drive to high rates of acceleration ordeceleration while transporting to the mounting location orwhen lifting.• Do not allow personnel or their limbs directly underneath thedrive when it is being lifted and mounted.Frame 6 Open Type and Flange Mount: Weight: 38.6 kg (85.0 lb)>1/2 A1/2 A

Installation/Wiring 1-3IP00, NEMA/UL Open TypeFrame 6 Lifting Points – 6 PlacesFrame 7 Lifting Points – 8 PlacesFlange Mount (Back/Heatsink: IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X/12)Frame 6 Lifting Points – 2 PlacesFrame 7 Lifting Points – 4 PlacesPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

1-4 Installation/WiringIP54, NEMA/UL Type 12Frame 6 and 7 Lifting Points – 4 PlacesPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Installation/Wiring 1-5Opening the Cover Figure 1.3 IP20, NEMA/UL Open Type, Frames 2…5Figure 1.4 IP54, NEMA/UL Type 12, Frames 2…52x:M4 X 0.7When cover is replaced:• Recommended torque (screws and nuts) = 0.68 N•m (6.0 lb•in)• Recommended screwdriver = 6.4 mm (0.25 in.) flat orT20 Hexalobular• Recommended hex socket = 7 mmPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

1-6 Installation/WiringFigure 1.5 IP00, NEMA/UL Open Type, Frames 6 & 790°When cover is replaced:• Recommended screwdriver = 6.4 mm (0.25 in.) flatFigure 1.6IP00, NEMA/UL Open Type, Frames 6 & 7 Access DoorWhen door is replaced:• Recommended screwdriver = 6.4 mm (0.25 in.) flat or T20 HexalobularPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Installation/Wiring 1-7Mounting ConsiderationsOperating Conditions and TemperaturesPowerFlex 750-Series drives are designed to operate at the following airtemperatures without derating.Table 1.A Acceptable Surrounding Air TemperatureEnclosure Rating Temperature Range DriveIP20, NEMA/UL Open Type 0…50 °C (32…122 °F) Frames 2…5, All RatingsIP00, NEMA/UL Open Type 0…50 °C (32…122 °F) Frames 6…7, All RatingsIP20, NEMA/UL Type 1 (with Debris Hood) 0…40 °C (32…104 °F) Frames 2…5, All RatingsIP20, NEMA/UL Type 1 (with Debris Label) 0…40 °C (32…104 °F) Frames 6…7, All RatingsFlange Mount -Front:IP20, NEMA/UL Open TypeIP00, NEMA/UL Open TypeBack/Heat Sink:IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X0…50 °C (32…122 °F)0…50 °C (32…122 °F)Frames 2…5, All RatingsFrames 6…7, All Ratings0…40 °C (32…104 °F) All Frames, All RatingsStand-alone/Wall Mount -IP54, NEMA/UL Type 12 0…40 °C (32…104 °F) All Frames, All Ratings76.2 mm (3.0 in.)76.2 mm (3.0 in.)Airflow through the drivemust not be impeded.Minimum Mounting ClearancesSpecified vertical clearance requirements are intended to be from drive todrive. Other objects can occupy this space; however, reduced airflow maycause protection circuits to fault the drive. The drive must be mounted in avertical orientation as shown. In addition, inlet air temperature must notexceed the product specification.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

1-8 Installation/WiringAC Supply SourceConsiderationsPowerFlex 750-Series drives are suitable for use on a circuit capable ofdelivering up to a maximum of 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes, 480 voltswith recommended fuses/circuit breakers.!ATTENTION: To guard against personal injury and/orequipment damage caused by improper fusing or circuit breakerselection, use only the recommended line fuses/circuit breakersspecified in Appendix A.If a Residual Current Detector (RCD) is used as a system ground faultmonitor, only Type B (adjustable) devices should be used to avoid nuisancetripping.Unbalanced, Ungrounded, Impedance or Phase Grounded DistributionSystemsIf phase to ground voltage will exceed 125% of normal line to line voltageor the supply system is ungrounded, refer to Wiring and GroundingGuidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives, publicationDRIVES-IN001.!ATTENTION: PowerFlex 750-Series drives contain protectiveMOVs and common mode capacitors that are referenced toground. To guard against drive damage, these devices must beconfigured according to the recommendations in Table 1.J onpage 1-24. See pages 1-25…1-26 for jumper locations.Input Power ConditioningCertain events on the power system supplying a drive can cause componentdamage or shortened product life. These conditions are divided into 2 basiccategories:1. All Drives– The power system has power factor correction capacitors switched inand out of the system, either by the user or by the power company.– The power source has intermittent voltage spikes in excess of 6000volts. These spikes could be caused by other equipment on the line orby events such as lightning strikes.– The power source has frequent interruptions.2. 5 Hp or Less Drives (in addition to “1” above)– The supply transformer is larger than 100 kVA or the available shortcircuit (fault) current is greater than 100,000A.– The impedance on the input side of the drive is less than 0.5%.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Installation/Wiring 1-9If any of these conditions exist, additional source impedance is required.The total input impedance is a function of all transformers, cabling, andreactors (if used) that supply power to the drive. The impedance can becalculated using the information supplied in Wiring and GroundingGuidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives, publicationDRIVES-IN001.Grounding RequirementsThe drive Safety Ground-PE must be connected to system ground.Ground impedance must conform to the requirements of national and localindustrial safety regulations and/or electrical codes. The integrity of allground connections should be periodically checked.Recommended Grounding SchemeA single point (PE only) grounding scheme should be used. Someapplications may require alternate grounding schemes, refer to Wiring andGrounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives,publication DRIVES-IN001, for more information. These applicationsinclude installations with long distances between drives or drive line-ups,which could cause large potential differences between the drive or line-upgrounds.For installations within a cabinet, a single safety ground point or ground busbar connected directly to building steel should be used. All circuitsincluding the AC input ground conductor should be groundedindependently and directly to this point/bar.Figure 1.7Typical GroundingR (L1)S (L2)T (L3)U (T1)V (T2)W (T3)PESHLDShield Termination - SHLDThe Shield terminal (see page 1-15) provides a grounding point for themotor cable shield. It must be connected to an earth ground by a separatecontinuous lead. The motor cable shield should be connected to thisterminal on the drive (drive end) and the motor frame (motor end). Use ashield terminating or EMI clamp to connect shield to this terminal.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

1-10 Installation/WiringRFI Filter GroundingUsing an optional RFI filter may result in relatively high ground leakagecurrents. Therefore, the filter must only be used in installations withgrounded AC supply systems and be permanently installed and solidlygrounded (bonded) to the building power distribution ground. Ensure thatthe incoming supply neutral is solidly connected (bonded) to the samebuilding power distribution ground. Grounding must not rely on flexiblecables and should not include any form of plug or socket that would permitinadvertent disconnection. Some local codes may require redundant groundconnections. The integrity of all connections should be periodicallychecked. Refer to the instructions supplied with the filter.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

1-12 Installation/WiringTable 1.B Recommended Cable DesignRating/Type600V75 °C (167 °F)Description• Four tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation.• Copper braid/aluminum foil combination shield and tinnedcopper drain wire.• PVC jacket.UnshieldedTHHN, THWN or similar wire is acceptable for drive installation in dryenvironments provided adequate free air space and/or conduit fill rateslimits are provided. Do not use THHN or similarly coated wire in wetareas. Any wire chosen must have a minimum insulation thickness of 15Mils and should not have large variations in insulation concentricity.Shielded/Armored CableShielded cable contains all of the general benefits of multi-conductor cablewith the added benefit of a copper braided shield that can contain much ofthe noise generated by a typical AC Drive. Strong consideration for shieldedcable should be given in installations with sensitive equipment such asweigh scales, capacitive proximity switches and other devices that may beaffected by electrical noise in the distribution system. Applications withlarge numbers of drives in a similar location, imposed EMC regulations or ahigh degree of communications/networking are also good candidates forshielded cable.Shielded cable may also help reduce shaft voltage and induced bearingcurrents for some applications. In addition, the increased impedance ofshielded cable may help extend the distance the motor can be located fromthe drive without the addition of motor protective devices such as terminatornetworks. Refer to “Reflected Wave” in Wiring and Grounding Guidelinesfor Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives, publicationDRIVES-IN001.Consideration should be given to all of the general specifications dictated bythe environment of the installation, including temperature, flexibility,moisture characteristics and chemical resistance. In addition, a braidedshield should be included and specified by the cable manufacturer as havingcoverage of at least 75%. An additional foil shield can be greatly improvenoise containment.A good example of recommended cable is Belden® 295xx (xx determinesgauge). This cable has 4 XLPE insulated conductors with a 100% coveragefoil and an 85% coverage copper braided shield (with drain wire)surrounded by a PVC jacket.Other types of shielded cable are available, but the selection of these typesmay limit the allowable cable length. Particularly, some of the newer cablestwist 4 conductors of THHN wire and wrap them tightly with a foil shield.This construction can greatly increase the cable charging current requiredand reduce the overall drive performance. Unless specified in the individualPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Installation/Wiring 1-13distance tables as tested with the drive, these cables are not recommendedand their performance against the lead length limits supplied is not known.EMC ComplianceRefer to CE Conformity on page 1-50 for details.Cable Trays and ConduitIf cable trays or large conduits are to be used, refer to guidelines presentedin Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM)AC Drives, publication DRIVES-IN001.!ATTENTION: To avoid a possible shock hazard caused byinduced voltages, unused wires in the conduit must be groundedat both ends. For the same reason, if a drive sharing a conduit isbeing serviced or installed, all drives using this conduit should bedisabled. This will help minimize the possible shock hazard from“cross coupled” motor leads.Motor Cable LengthsTypically, motor lead lengths less than 30 meters (100 feet) are acceptable.However, if your application dictates longer lengths, refer to Wiring andGrounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives,publication DRIVES-IN001 for details.Motor ConsiderationsDue to the operational characteristics of AC variable frequency drives,motors with inverter grade insulation systems designed to meet or exceedNEMA MG1 Part 31.40.4.2 standards for resistance to spikes of 1600 voltsare recommended.Guidelines must be followed when using non-inverter grade motors to avoidpremature motor failures. Refer to Wiring and Grounding Guidelines forPulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives, publication DRIVES-IN001 forrecommendations.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

1-14 Installation/WiringSingle-Phase Input PowerThe PowerFlex 750-Series drive is typically used with a three-phase inputsupply. Single-phase operation of the drive is not currently rated underUL508C listing. Rockwell Automation has verified that single-phaseoperation with output current derated by 50% of the three-phase ratingsidentified on page A-11 will meet all safety requirements.Power Terminal BlocksTable 1.C Frames 2…5 Power Terminal Block(1) (2)Wire Size RangeFrame Maximum Minimum2 4.0 mm 2 0.2 mm 2(10 AWG) (24 AWG)3 16.0 mm 2 0.5 mm 2(6 AWG) (20 AWG)4 25.0 mm 2 2.5 mm 2(3 AWG) (14 AWG)5 35.0 mm 2(1 AWG)10.0 mm 2(8 AWG)Strip Length8.0 mm(0.31 in.)10.0 mm(0.39 in.)10.0 mm(0.39 in.)12.0 mm(0.5 in.)RecommendedTorque Recommended Tool(s)0.5 N•m #1 Flat Screwdriver(4.4 lb•in)1.2 N•m #2 Flat Screwdriver(10.6 lb•in)2.7 N•m #2 Pozidrive®(24 lb•in) 492-C Phillips®0.25 in. Flat Screwdriver4.0 N•m #2 Pozidrive®(35 lb•in) 492-C Phillips®0.25 in. Flat Screwdriver(1) Maximum/minimum wire sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations.(2) Terminal blocks are designed to accept a single wire.Table 1.D Frames 6 & 7 Power Terminal BlockMaximum LugFrame Width6 34.6 mm(1.36 in.)7 43.5 mm(1.71 in.)RecommendedTorque11.3 N•m(100 lb•in)11.3 N•m(100 lb•in)Terminal BoltSizeM8 x 1.25M8 x 1.25RecommendedTool13 mm HexSocket13 mm HexSocketTable 1.E Frames 2…7 PE Grounding StudRecommendedFrame Torque2 1.36 N•m(12 lb•in)3 3.4 N•m(30 lb•in)4 3.4 N•m(30 lb•in)5 3.4 N•m(30 lb•in)6 11.3 N•m(100 lb•in)7 11.3 N•m(100 lb•in)Terminal BoltSizeM4M6M6M6M8M8RecommendedTool7 mm Hex DeepSocket10 mm Hex DeepSocket10 mm Hex DeepSocket10 mm Hex DeepSocket13 mm HexSocket13 mm HexSocketPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Installation/Wiring 1-15Figure 1.8Typical Terminal Block Location and Termination Points➍➌➌➎➊➋Frame 2➋Frame 3➊➌➌➊➋Frame 4➊Table 1.F Frames 2…5➋Frame 5No. Name Description➊ Power Terminal Block R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, BR1, BR2, +DC, -DC, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3➋ PE Grounding Studs Terminating point to chassis ground for incoming AC line andmotor shields.➌ PE-A and PE-B MOV and CMC Jumper Screws➍ Optional NEMA/UL Type 1Conduit BoxTerminating point to chassis ground for incoming AC line,motor shields, and control wire shields.➎ Optional EMC Plate Terminating point to chassis ground for incoming AC line,motor shields, and control wire shields.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

1-16 Installation/WiringFigure 1.9Typical Terminal Block Location and Termination Points (continued)➍➎➍➌➊➋Frame 6➍➎➌➊➋Frame 7Table 1.G Frames 6…7No. Name Description➊ Power Terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3➋ PE Grounding Studs Terminating point to chassis ground for incoming AC line andmotor shield.➌ DC Bus and Brake Terminals +DC, -DC, BR1, BR2➍ PE-A and PE-B MOV and CMC Jumper Wires➎ DC+ and DC- Bus Voltage Test PointsPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Installation/Wiring 1-17Power Terminal BlocksFrame Power Terminal Blocks2L1R3L1R456 (1)7 (1)L2SL2SL3TBR1L3TBR2BR1+ -DC DCBR2T1U+DCT2V-DCT3WT1UT2VT3W(1) DC Bus Terminals are optional on Frame 6 and 7 drives: catalog number position 5.Dynamic Brake Resistor Terminals are optional on Frame 6 and 7 drives: catalog number position 12.Refer to Catalog Number Explanation on page P-6.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

1-18 Installation/WiringTerminal Description Notes+DC DC Bus (+) DC Input Power or Dynamic Brake Chopper-DC DC Bus (–) DC Input Power or Dynamic Brake ChopperBR1 DC Brake (+) Dynamic Brake Resistor Connection (+)BR2 DC Brake (–) Dynamic Brake Resistor Connection (–)U U (T1) Motor Connections (1)V V (T2)W W (T3)R R (L1) AC Line Input PowerS S (L2)T T (L3)PE / PE Ground Terminating point to chassis ground for incoming AC lineand motor shield.(1) Important: Motors with NEMA MG1 Part 31.40.4.2 inverter grade insulation systems are recommended. If youintend to connect a motor that is not rated inverter grade, refer to Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PulseWidth Modulated (PWM) AC Drives, publication DRIVES-IN001 for recommendations.Common Bus Power WiringFigure 1.10 Common Bus Terminal Block Location and Termination Points➍➎➌➋➋➊Frame 5Table 1.H Frame 5 Common BusNo. Name Description➊ Power Terminal Connections +DC, -DC, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3➋ PE Grounding Studs Terminating point to chassis ground for incoming DC line andmotor shields.➌ PE-B CMC Jumper Screw➍ Optional NEMA/UL Type 1 Terminating point to chassis ground for incoming AC line,Conduit Boxmotor shields, and control wire shields.➎ Optional EMC Plate Terminating point to chassis ground for incoming AC line,motor shields, and control wire shields.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Installation/Wiring 1-19Figure 1.11 Common Bus Terminal Block Location and Termination Points (continued)➍➎➍➊➋Frame 6➌➊➎➋Frame 7➌Table 1.I Frames 6…7 Common BusNo. Name Description➊ Power Terminals +DC, -DC, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3➋ PE Grounding Studs Terminating point to chassis ground for incoming DC line andmotor shield.➌ DC Bus and Brake Terminals +DC, -DC, BR1, BR2➍ PE-B CMC Jumper Wire➎ DC+ and DC- Bus Voltage Test PointsPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

1-20 Installation/WiringCommon Bus Power Terminal BlocksFrame Power Terminal Blocks56 (1)7 (1)(1) Dynamic Brake Resistor Terminals are optional on Frame 6 and 7 drives: catalog number position 12.Refer to Catalog Number Explanation on page P-6.Terminal Description Notes+DC DC Bus (+) DC Input Power-DC DC Bus (–) DC Input PowerBR1 DC Brake (+) Dynamic Brake Resistor Connection (+)BR2 DC Brake (–) Dynamic Brake Resistor Connection (–)U U (T1) Motor Connections (1)V V (T2)W W (T3)PE / PE Ground Terminating point to chassis ground for incoming DC lineand motor shield.(1) Important: Motors with NEMA MG1 Part 31.40.4.2 inverter grade insulation systems are recommended. If youintend to connect a motor that is not rated inverter grade, refer to Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PulseWidth Modulated (PWM) AC Drives, publication DRIVES-IN001 for recommendations.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Installation/Wiring 1-21IP65, NEMA Type 12InstallationsUse the plugs supplied with IP65 (NEMA Type 12) rated drives to sealunused holes in the conduit entry plate.Important: Completely seat the plug inner rim for the best seal.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

1-22 Installation/WiringUsing Input/OutputContactorsInput Contactor Precautions!!ATTENTION: A contactor or other device that routinelydisconnects and reapplies the AC line to the drive to start andstop the motor can cause drive hardware damage. The drive isdesigned to use control input signals that will start and stop themotor. If an input device is used, operation must not exceed onecycle per minute or drive damage will occur.ATTENTION: The drive start/stop/enable control circuitryincludes solid state components. If hazards due to accidentalcontact with moving machinery or unintentional flow of liquid,gas or solids exist, an additional hardwired stop circuit may berequired to remove the AC line to the drive. An auxiliary brakingmethod may be required.Output Contactor Precautions!ATTENTION: To guard against drive damage when usingoutput contactors, the following information must be read andunderstood. One or more output contactors may be installedbetween the drive and motor(s) for the purpose of disconnectingor isolating certain motors/loads. If a contactor is opened whilethe drive is operating, power will be removed from the respectivemotor, but the drive will continue to produce voltage at the outputterminals. In addition, reconnecting a motor to an active drive (byclosing the contactor) could produce excessive current that maycause the drive to fault. If any of these conditions are determinedto be undesirable or unsafe, an auxiliary contact on the outputcontactor should be wired to a drive digital input that isprogrammed as “Enable.” This will cause the drive to execute acoast-to-stop (cease output) whenever an output contactor isopened.Dynamic Brake Resistor Considerations!ATTENTION: The drive does not offer protection forexternally mounted brake resistors. A risk of fire exists ifexternal braking resistors are not protected. External resistorpackages must be self-protected from over temperature or acircuit equivalent to Figure C.1 on page C-2 must be supplied.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Installation/Wiring 1-23Using PowerFlex 750-SeriesDrives with RegenerativePower UnitsIf a Regenerative unit (i.e., 1336 REGEN) is used as a bus supply or a brake,the common mode capacitors should be disconnected (see Drive PowerJumper Configuration).Regenerative Unit to Drive ConnectionsRegenerative Brake ModeTerminalsFrame(s) 1336 Regen PowerFlex 750-Series Drive2…7 DC+ & DC- +DC & -DCRegenerative Bus Supply ModeTerminalsFrame(s) 1336 Regen PowerFlex 750-Series Drive2…7 DC+ & DC- +DC & -DCRefer to 1336 REGEN Line Regeneration Package User Manual,publication 1336-REGEN-5.0, for more information.Drive Power JumperConfigurationPowerFlex 750-Series drives contain protective MOVs and common modecapacitors that are referenced to ground. To guard against drive damageand/or operation problems, these devices must be properly configuredaccording to Table 1.J.MOV, AC EMI Capacitor, and Common Mode Capacitor CircuitsFigure 1.12 MOV and AC EMI Capacitor Phase to GroundR/L1S/L2T/L32 3 42 3 411PE–AFigure 1.13 Common Mode Capacitors to GroundDC+DC–PE–BPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

1-24 Installation/Wiring!!ATTENTION: PE-A and PE-B jumpers must be configuredaccording to the recommendations in Table 1.J.ATTENTION: To avoid an electric shock hazard, verify that thevoltage on the bus capacitors has discharged completely beforeremoving/installing jumpers. Check the DC bus voltage at thePower Terminal Block by measuring between the +DC and -DCterminals (refer to Figure 1.8 and Figure 1.9 for location),between the +DC terminal and the chassis, and between the -DCterminal and the chassis. The voltage must be zero for all threemeasurements.Table 1.J Recommended Power Jumper ConfigurationsDC BusCommonMode CapsDefaultConfiguration(Cat. No.MOV / InputFilter CapsPower Source Type (1) (PE-A) (2) (PE-B) Position 11)Unknown Connected Disconnected A See below.• AC fed SolidlyGrounded• DC fed from passiverectifier which has aSolidly Grounded ACsource• AC fed Ungrounded• Impedance Grounded• DC fed from an activeconverterBenefits Of CorrectConfiguration on PowerSource TypeConnected Connected J UL compliance,Reduced electrical noise,Most stable operation,EMC compliance,Reduced voltage stresson components andmotor bearingsDisconnected Disconnected N/A Helps avoid severeequipment damage whenground fault occurs(1) It is highly recommended to accurately determine the power source type and then configure appropriately.(2) When MOVs are disconnected, the power system must have its own transient protection to insure known andcontrolled voltages.To connect or disconnect these devices, refer to the jumper locations shownin Figure 1.15, Figure 1.16 and Figure 1.17.In addition, on an ungrounded distribution system where the line-to-groundvoltages on any phase could exceed 125% of the nominal line-to-linevoltage, an isolation transformer should be installed. See Wiring andGrounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives,publication DRIVES-IN001 at www.rockwellautomation.com/literature formore information on impedance grounded and ungrounded systems.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Installation/Wiring 1-25Power Jumper Screw Removal and StorageFrames 2…5 use jumper screws to complete an electrical connection wheninstalled. Install or remove jumper screws according to therecommendations in Table 1.J.!ATTENTION: Hazard of equipment damage exists if jumpersare not properly disconnected. For Frames 2…5, completelyremove the jumper screw from the circuit board.When power Jumper screws are not used, they are stored on the left interiorchassis wall as shown.Figure 1.14 Typical Frame 2…5 Jumper Screw Storage Location (Frame 4 shown)When screws are installed:• Recommended torque = 1.36 N•m (12.0 lb•in) +/- 0.14 N•m (1.2 lb•in)• Recommended screwdriver = 6.4 mm (0.25 in.) flat orT15 HexalobularFigure 1.15 Typical Frame 2…5 Jumper Screw Installation Locations (Frame 4 shown)ConnectedDisconnectedPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

1-26 Installation/WiringPower Jumper Wire Removal and StorageFrames 6…7 use jumper wires to complete an electrical connection wheninstalled. Install or remove jumper wires according to the recommendationsin Table 1.J.!ATTENTION: Hazard of equipment damage exists if jumpersare not properly disconnected. For Frames 6…7, secure thedisconnected jumper wire to the standoff provided.Figure 1.16 Frame 6 Jumper Wire LocationsConnectedDisconnectedCommon ModeMOVWhen jumper wires are connected:• Recommended torque (screws and nuts) = 1.36 N•m (12.0 lb•in)• Recommended hex socket = 7 mm• Recommended screwdriver = T20 HexalobularPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Installation/Wiring 1-27Figure 1.17 Frame 7 Jumper Wire LocationsConnectedDisconnectedCommon ModeMOVWhen jumper wires are connected:• Recommended torque (screws and nuts) = 1.36 N•m (12.0 lb•in)• Recommended hex socket = 7 mm• Recommended screwdriver = T20 HexalobularPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

1-28 Installation/WiringI/O WiringImportant points to remember about I/O wiring:• Always use copper wire.• Wire with an insulation rating of 600V or greater is recommended.• Control and signal wires should be separated from power wires by atleast 0.3 meters (1 foot).• In order to maintain electrical safety for all user-accessible low voltagecircuits (ELV and PELV circuits), I/O terminals designated for 24V orlower voltage must not be connected to a circuit of higher voltage or acircuit which is not adequately insulated from dangerous voltages withdouble or reinforced insulation within other connected equipment orwiring.• In order to provide electrical safety for user-accessible low voltage I/Ocircuits which are referenced to earth (PELV circuits) and which may betouched simultaneously, care should be taken to provide a common earthreference for all equipment connected to the drive.Important: I/O terminals labeled “(–)” or “Common” are not referenced toearth ground and are designed to greatly reduce common modeinterference. Grounding these terminals can cause signal noise.!ATTENTION: Hazard of personal injury or equipment damageexists when using bipolar input sources. Noise and drift insensitive input circuits can cause unpredictable changes in motorspeed and direction. Use speed command parameters to helpreduce input source sensitivity.I/O Terminal BlocksTable 1.K I/O Terminal Block SpecificationsWire Size Range Torque StripNameMaximum Minimum Maximum Recommended Length753 Control Module TB2 2.5 mm 2 0.3 mm 2 0.25 N•m 0.2 N•m 6 mm(14 AWG) (28 AWG) (2.2 lb•in) (1.8 lb•in) (0.24 in.)753 Control Module TB1 and 2.5 mm 2 0.3 mm 2 0.25 N•m 0.2 N•m 6 mmTB3(14 AWG) (28 AWG) (2.2 lb•in) (1.8 lb•in) (0.24 in.)755 Control Module TB1 2.5 mm 2 0.3 mm 2 0.25 N•m 0.2 N•m 6 mm(14 AWG) (28 AWG) (2.2 lb•in) (1.8 lb•in) (0.24 in.)755 I/O Module TB1 2.5 mm 2 0.3 mm 2 0.25 N•m 0.2 N•m 6 mm(14 AWG) (28 AWG) (2.2 lb•in) (1.8 lb•in) (0.24 in.)755 I/O Module TB2 4.0 mm 2 0.25 mm 2 0.5 N•m 0.4 N•m 7 mm(12 AWG) (24 AWG) (4.4 lb•in) (3.5 lb•in) (0.28 in.)Safe Torque Off 0.8 mm 2 0.3 mm 2 N/A10 mm(18 AWG) (28 AWG)(0.39 in.)Single Incremental Encoder 0.8 mm 2 0.3 mm 2 N/A10 mm(18 AWG) (28 AWG)(0.39 in.)Safe Speed Monitor TB1 and 2.5 mm 2 0.25 mm 2 0.25 N•m 0.2 N•m 6 mmTB2(14 AWG) (24 AWG) (2.2 lb•in) (1.8 lb•in) (0.24 in.)Dual Incremental Encoder 0.8 mm 2 0.3 mm 2 N/A10 mm(18 AWG) (28 AWG)(0.39 in.)Universal Feedback Module 0.8 mm 2 0.3 mm 2 N/A10 mm(18 AWG) (28 AWG)(0.39 in.)Auxiliary Power Supply TB1 2.5 mm 2 0.3 mm 2 0.25 N•m 0.2 N•m 6 mm(14 AWG) (28 AWG) (2.2 lb•in) (1.8 lb•in) (0.24 in.)PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Installation/Wiring 1-29Access Drive Control Pod1. Remove drive coverFrames 2…5– Squeeze locking tabs and pull out bottom of cover.– Pull cover down and away from the chassis.Frames 6…7– Loosen door screws.– Gently pry the door open to remove.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

1-30 Installation/Wiring2. Lift the Human Interface Module (HIM) cradle.All Frames– Loosen the retention screw.– Lift the cradle until the latch engages.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Installation/Wiring 1-31PowerFlex 753 Main Control Board➊➋➌➍➎➏➐➑➒➓Table 1.L 753 Main Control Board DetailsNo. NameDescription➊ HIM Connector DPI Port 1 (HIM Cradle) connection.➋ Fan Connector Power supply for internal cooling fan (Frames 2 & 3).➌ Battery Receptacle User installed CR1220 lithium coin cell battery providespower to the Real Time Clock (Optional, not supplied).➍ Jumper J1 ENABLE Hardware enable jumper. Removed when a hardware enableconfiguration is utilized.➎ Jumper J2 SAFETY Safety enable jumper. Removed when safety option isinstalled.➏ Jumper J4 Input Mode Input mode jumper. Select voltage mode or current mode.➐ TB1 I/O terminal block.➑ DPI Port 2 Cable connection for handheld and remote HIM options.➒ TB3 Digital input power terminal block.➓ TB2 Relay terminal block.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

1-32 Installation/WiringTable 1.M J4 Input Mode JumperJumper Position Voltage Mode Current Mode3 1J44 23 1J44 2Table 1.N TB1 Terminal DesignationsAo0-Ao0+10VC+10VAi0-Ai0+Ptc-Ptc+To024VC+24VDi CDi 1Di 2Terminal NameDescriptionAo0– Analog Out 0 (–) Bipolar, ±10V, 11 bit & sign, 2 k ohmAo0+ Analog Out 0 (+) minimum load.4-20 mA, 11 bit & sign, 400 ohmmaximum load.10VC 10 Volt Common For (+) 10 Volt references.+10V +10 Volt Reference 2k ohm minimum.Ai0– Analog Input 0 (–) Isolated (1) , bipolar, differential, ±10V,Ai0+ Analog Input 0 (+) 11 bit & sign, 88k ohm inputimpedance.Ptc– Motor PTC (–) Motor protection devicePtc+ Motor PTC (+) (Positive Temperature Coefficient).T0 Transistor Output 0 Open drain output, 48V DC 250 mAmaximum load.24VC 24 Volt Common Drive supplied logic input power.+24V +24 Volt DC150 mA maximumDi C Digital Input Common 24V DC - Opto isolatedDi 1 Digital Input 1 Low State: less than 5V DCDi 2 Digital Input 2High State: greater than 20V DCNote: 753 Main Control Board I/O TB1 wiring examples begin onpage 1-38.RelatedParam(1) Differential Isolation - External source must be maintained at less than 160V with respect to PE. Input provideshigh common mode immunity.Table 1.O TB2 Terminal DesignationsFixed I/O Terminal Name DescriptionR0NC Relay 0 N.C. Output Relay 0 normally closed contact.R0C Relay 0 Common Output Relay 0 commonR0NCR0NO Relay 0 N.O. Output Relay 0 normally open contact.R0CR0NOTable 1.P TB3 Terminal DesignationsPower Block Terminal Name DescriptionDi 0dc Digital Input 24V DC Connections for DC power supply.Di 0dcDi C Digital Input Common Digital input commonDi CDi 0acDi 0ac Digital Input 120V AC Connections for AC power supply.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009Important: Wiring to pluggable terminal block connectors should besupported by wire ties or other means to help preventunintentional disconnection.

Installation/Wiring 1-33PowerFlex 755 Main Control Board➊➋➌➍➎➏➐➑➒Table 1.Q 755 Main Control Board DetailsNo. NameDescription➊ HIM Connector DPI Port 1 (HIM Cradle) connection.➋ Fan Connector Power supply for internal cooling fan (Frames 2 & 3).➌ Battery Receptacle User installed CR1220 lithium coin cell battery providespower to the Real Time Clock (Optional, not supplied).➍ DPI Port 2 Cable connection for handheld and remote HIM options.➎ Embedded EtherNet/IP (1) Rotary switches for setting lowest octet of EtherNet addressAddress Selectors(forces address to 192.168.1.xxx). Refer to page 2-5 forinstructions on setting the IP address.➏ Embedded EtherNet/IP (1) Network cable connection.Connector➐ Jumper J2 SAFETY Safety enable jumper. Removed when safety option isinstalled.➑ Jumper J1 ENABLE Hardware enable jumper. Removed when a hardware enableconfiguration is utilized.➒ TB1 I/O terminal block.(1) Refer to the PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual, publication 750COM-UM001.Table 1.R TB1 I/O Terminal DesignationsFixed I/O Terminal Name DescriptionDi 0ac Digital Input 120V AC Connections for AC power supply.Di C Digital Input Common Digital input commonDi 0acDi 0dc Digital Input 24V DC Connections for DC power supply.Di C+24V +24 Volt Power Connections for drive supplied 24V power.Di 0dc+24V24VC 24 Volt Common24VCImportant: Wiring to pluggable terminal block connectors should besupported by wire ties or other means to help preventunintentional disconnection.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

1-34 Installation/WiringHardware Enable CircuitryThe main control board has one digital input that can be used as a generalpurpose programmable input, or by removal of a jumper, configured as adedicated hardware enable, which is unaffected by parameter settings. Toconfigure the input as a dedicated hardware enable, complete the followingsteps.1. Access the control pod as described beginning on page 1-29.2. Locate and remove Jumper J1 ENABLE on the main control board (seediagram).PowerFlex 753 - J1 Jumper LocationJ1PowerFlex 755 - J1 Jumper LocationJ1PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Installation/Wiring 1-35Safety Enable CircuitryThe drive ships with the safety enable jumper (J2 SAFETY) installed. Thisjumper must be removed when using the safe torque off or speed monitoringsafety options.Important: Failure to remove the jumper will cause the drive to fault whena start command is issued.PowerFlex 753 - J2 Jumper LocationJ2PowerFlex 755 - J2 Jumper LocationJ2PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

1-36 Installation/WiringOption Module InstallationCompatible port locations may be restricted for each module. Anicon with position number(s) is provided to indicate which optionmodule ports are compatible. For example, the icon to the rightindicates that the option module is only compatible with port 4.!ATTENTION: Hazard of equipment damage exists if an optionmodule is installed or removed while the drive is powered. Toavoid damaging the drive, verify that the voltage on the buscapacitors has discharged completely and all control power isremoved before performing any work on the drive. Check the DCbus voltage at the Power Terminal Block by measuring betweenthe +DC and -DC terminals (refer to page 1-17 for location),between the +DC terminal and the chassis, and between the -DCterminal and the chassis. The voltage must be zero for all threemeasurements.To install an option module:1. Firmly press the module edge connector into the desired port.2. Tighten the top and bottom retaining screws.– Recommended torque = 0.45 N•m (4.0 lb•in)– Recommended screwdriver = T15 HexalobularImportant: Do not over-tighten retaining screws.Option Module ParameterAccessRefer to Select A Device on page D-5 for instructions on how to accessparameters on an option module.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Installation/Wiring 1-37750-Series I/O Module20-750-2262C-2R20-750-2262D-2R20-750-2263C-1R2TTable 1.S Input Mode JumpersJumperPosition Voltage Mode Current ModeAi1Ai0Ai1Ai0Table 1.T TB1 Terminal DesignationsRelatedTerminal NameDescriptionParamSh Shield Terminating point for wiring shieldsShwhen an EMC plate or conduit box isnot installed.Ptc– Motor PTC (–) Motor protection device (Positive 40Ptc+ Motor PTC (+) Temperature Coefficient).Ao0– Analog Out 0 (–) Bipolar, ±10V, 11 bit & sign, 2 k ohm 75Ao0+ Analog Out 0 (+) minimum load.Ao1– Analog Out 1 (–)4-20 mA, 11 bit & sign, 400 ohmmaximum load.Ao1+ Analog Out 1 (+)85ShShPtc–Ptc+Ao0–Ao0+–10V –10 Volt Reference 2k ohm minimum.Ao1–Ao1+–10V10VC 10 Volt Common For (–) and (+) 10 Volt references.10VC+10VAi0–+10V +10 Volt Reference 2k ohm minimum.Ai0+Ai1–Ai0– Analog Input 0 (–) Isolated (2) , bipolar, differential, ±10V, 50, 70Ai1+24VC+24VAi0+ Analog Input 0 (+) 11 bit & sign, 88k ohm inputAi1– Analog Input 1 (–)impedance.60, 70Di CDi 0Di 1Di 2Di 3Di 4Ai1+ Analog Input 1 (+)Di 524VC 24 Volt Common Drive supplied logic input power.+24V +24 Volt DC200 mA max.Di C Digital Input Common Common for Digital Inputs 0…5Di 0 Digital Input 0 (1)Di 1 Digital Input 1 (1)Di 2 Digital Input 2 (1)Di 3 Digital Input 3 (1)Di 4 Digital Input 4 (1)Di 5 Digital Input 5 (1)24V DC - Opto isolatedLow State: less than 5V DCHigh State: greater than 20V DC 11.2mA DC115V AC, 50/60 Hz - Opto isolatedLow State: less than 30V ACHigh State: greater than 100V AC(1) Digital Inputs are either 24 Volts DC (2262C) or 115 Volts AC (2262D) based on module catalog number.Ensure applied voltage is correct for I/O module.(2) Differential Isolation - External source must be maintained at less than 160V with respect to PE. Input provideshigh common mode immunity.Note: 750-Series I/O Module TB1 wiring examples begin on page 1-41.Table 1.U TB2 Terminal Designations (2 Relay Outputs: 2R)RelatedRelay Out Terminal Name DescriptionParamR0NO Relay 0 N.O. Relay contact output10R0C Relay 0 Common Rating: 240V AC or 24V DC = 2 A max.R0NC Relay 0 N.C.Inductive/ResistiveR0NOR0CR0NCR1NO Relay 1 N.O. 20R1NOR1CR1C Relay 1 CommonR1NCR1NC Relay 1 N.C.1PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

1-38 Installation/WiringTable 1.V TB2 Terminal Designations (1 Relay and 2 Transistor Outputs: IR2T)Relay Out Terminal Name DescriptionR0NO Relay 0 N.O. Relay contact outputR0NO R0C Relay 0 Common Rating: 240V AC or 24V DC = 2 A max.R0CR0NC Relay 0 N.C.Inductive/ResistiveR0NCT0TC T0 Transistor Output 0 Transistor outputT1TC Transistor Output Rating: 24V DC = 1 A max.CommonResistiveParameter DescriptionsT1 Transistor Output 1 30I/O option module parameter descriptions begin on page 3-137.RelatedParam1020I/O Wiring ExamplesImportant: Wiring to pluggable terminal block connectors should besupported by wire ties or other means to help preventunintentional disconnection.753 Main Control Board TB1 Wiring ExamplesInput/Output Connection Example Required Parameter ChangesPotentiometer UnipolarSpeed Reference10k Ohm Pot.Recommended(2k Ohm Minimum)Analog Input BipolarSpeed Reference±10V InputAnalog Voltage InputUnipolar SpeedReference0 to +10V InputJ43 14 2Common+Common+10VC+10VAi0–Ai0+Ai0–Ai0+Ai0–Ai0+• Set Direction ModePort 0: P308 [Direction Mode] = 0 “Unipolar”• Set SelectionPort 0: P545 [Spd Ref A Sel] = Port 0: P260 [Anlg In0 Value]• Adjust ScalingPort 0: P261 [Anlg In0 Hi] = 10 VoltPort 0: P262 [Anlg In0 Lo] = 0 VoltPort 0: P547 [Spd Ref A AnlgHi] = 60 HzPort 0: P548 [Spd Ref A AnlgLo] = 0 Hz• View ResultsPort 0: P260 [Anlg In0 Value]Port 0: P592 [Selected Spd Ref]• Set Direction ModePort 0: P308 [Direction Mode] = 1 “Bipolar”• Set SelectionPort 0: P545 [Spd Ref A Sel] = Port 0: P260 [Anlg In0 Value]• Adjust ScalingPort 0: P261 [Anlg In0 Hi] = +10 VoltPort 0: P262 [Anlg In0 Lo] = -10 VoltPort 0: P547 [Spd Ref A AnlgHi] = +60 HzPort 0: P548 [Spd Ref A AnlgLo] = -60 Hz• View ResultsPort 0: P260 [Anlg In0 Value]Port 0: P592 [Selected Spd Ref]• Set Direction ModePort 0: P308 [Direction Mode] = 0 “Unipolar”• Set SelectionPort 0: P545 [Spd Ref A Sel] = Port 0: P260 [Anlg In0 Value]• Adjust ScalingPort 0: P261 [Anlg In0 Hi] = 10 VoltPort 0: P262 [Anlg In0 Lo] = 0 VoltPort 0: P547 [Spd Ref A AnlgHi] = 60 HzPort 0: P548 [Spd Ref A AnlgLo] = 0 Hz• View ResultsPort 0: P260 [Anlg In0 Value]Port 0: P592 [Selected Spd Ref]PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Installation/Wiring 1-39Input/Output Connection Example Required Parameter ChangesAnalog Current InputUnipolar SpeedReferenceCommonAi0–+Ai0+0-20 mA Input3 1J44 2• Set Direction ModePort 0: P308 [Direction Mode] = 0 “Unipolar”• Set SelectionPort 0: P545 [Spd Ref A Sel] = Port 0: P260 [Anlg In0 Value]• Adjust ScalingPort 0: P261 [Anlg In0 Hi] = 20 mAPort 0: P262 [Anlg In0 Lo] = 0 mAPort 0: P547 [Spd Ref A AnlgHi] = 60 HzPort 0: P548 [Spd Ref A AnlgLo] = 0 Hz• View ResultsPort 0: P260 [Anlg In0 Value]Port 0: P592 [Selected Spd Ref]HW Input PTCPTC Nominal = 1.8 k OhmPTC Trip = 3.1k OhmPTC Reset = 2.2 k Ohm1.8kPTCPtc–Ptc+• ConfigurationPort 0: P250 [PTC Cfg] = 0 “Ignore,” 1 “Alarm,” 2 “Flt Minor,”3 “FltCoastStop,” 4 “Flt RampStop,” or 5 “Flt CL Stop”• View ResultsPort 0: P251 [PTC Status]!Analog Voltage Output±10V, 0…20 mA Bipolar+10V Unipolar2-Wire ControlNon-Reversing24V DC internal supply2-Wire ControlReversingExternal supplyATTENTION: To avoid an electric shock hazard, theconnection of the motor temperature sensor requires double orreinforced insulation between motor live parts and the PTC.+Stop-Run+24V CommonRun FwdRun Rev–Ao0–Ao0+24VC+24VDi CDi 1Di CDi 1Di 2• ConfigurationPort 0: P270 [Anlg Out Type], bit 0 = 0• Set SelectionPort 0: P275 [Anlg Out0 Sel] = Port 0: P3 [Mtr Vel Fdbk]• Adjust ScalingPort 0: P278 [Anlg Out0 DataHi] = 60 HzPort 0: P279 [Anlg Out0 DataLo] = 0 HzPort 0: P280 [Anlg Out0 Hi] =10V/20 mAPort 0: P281 [Anlg Out0 Lo] = 0V/0 mA• View ResultsPort 0: P277 [Anlg Out0 Data]Port 0: P282 [Anlg Out0 Val]• Set Direction ModePort 0: P308 [Direction Mode] = 2 “Rev Disable”• ConfigurationPort 0: P150 [Digital In Cfg] = 1 “Run Level”• Set SelectionPort 0: P163 [DI Run] = Port 0: P220 [Digital In Sts], bit 1 = Digital In 1• View ResultsPort 0: P220 [Digital In Sts]Port 0: P935 [Drive Status 1]• Set Direction ModePort 0: P308 [Direction Mode] = 0 “Unipolar”• ConfigurationPort 0: P150 [Digital In Cfg] = 1 “Run Level”• Set SelectionPort 0: P164 [DI Run Forward] = Port 0: P220 [Digital In Sts], bit 1 = DigitalIn 1Port 0: P165 [DI Run Reverse] = Port 0: P220 [Digital In Sts], bit 2 = DigitalIn 2• View ResultsPort 0: P220 [Digital In Sts]Port 0: P935 [Drive Status 1]PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

1-40 Installation/WiringInput/Output Connection Example Required Parameter Changes3-Wire ControlInternal supplyStopStart24VC+24VDi CDi 1Di 2• Set SelectionPort 0: P158 [DI Stop] = Port 0: P220 [Digital In Sts], bit 1 = Digital In 1Port 0: P161 [DI Start] = Port 0: P220 [Digital In Sts], bit 2 = Digital In 2• View ResultsPort 0: P220 [Digital In Sts]Port 0: P935 [Drive Status 1]3-Wire ControlExternal supply+24V CommonStopStartDi CDi 1Di 2• Set SelectionPort 0: P158 [DI Stop] = Port 0: P220 [Digital In Sts], bit 1 = Digital In 1Port 0: P161 [DI Start] = Port 0: P220 [Digital In Sts], bit 2 = Digital In 2• View ResultsPort 0: P220 [Digital In Sts]Port 0: P935 [Drive Status 1]Digital InputPLC Output ModuleNeutral/Common10k Ohm, 2 WattControl fromProg. ControllerDiCDi1Di2• Set SelectionPort 0: P158 [DI Stop] = Port 0: P220 [Digital In Sts], bit 1 = Digital In 1Port 0: P161 [DI Start] = Port 0: P220 [Digital In Sts], bit 2 = Digital In 2• View ResultsPort 0: P220 [Digital In Sts]Port 0: P935 [Drive Status 1]Digital OutputInternal supplyTo0+24V• Set SelectionPort 0: P240 [TO0 Sel] = Port 0: P935 [Drive Status 1], bit 7 = Faulted• View ResultsPort 0: P225 [Dig Out Sts]Digital OutputExternal supply+24V CommonORPLCTo024VC5k Ohm2 Watt+24V CommonTo024VCPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Installation/Wiring 1-41750-Series I/O Module TB1 Wiring ExamplesInput/Output Connection Example Required Parameter ChangesPotentiometer UnipolarSpeed Reference10k Ohm Pot.Recommended(2k Ohm Minimum)Joystick Bipolar SpeedReference±10V InputAnalog Input BipolarSpeed Reference±10V InputAnalog Voltage InputUnipolar SpeedReference0 to +10V InputAnalog Current InputUnipolar SpeedReference0-20 mA InputCommon+Common+Common+10VC+10VAi0–Ai0+Ai0–Ai0+Ai0–Ai0+–10V10VC+10VAi0–Ai0+Ai1Ai0Ai0–Ai0+Ai1Ai0• Set Direction ModePort 0: P308 [Direction Mode] = 0 “Unipolar”• Set SelectionPort 0: P545 [Spd Ref A Sel] = Port X (I/O Module): P50 [Anlg In0 Value]• Adjust ScalingPort X (I/O Module): P51 [Anlg In0 Hi] = 10 VoltPort X (I/O Module): P52 [Anlg In0 Lo] = 0 VoltPort 0: P547 [Spd Ref A AnlgHi] = 60 HzPort 0: P548 [Spd Ref A AnlgLo] = 0 Hz• View ResultsPort X (I/O Module): P50 [Anlg In0 Value]Port 0: P592 [Selected Spd Ref]• Set Direction ModePort 0: P308 [Direction Mode] = 1 “Bipolar”• Set SelectionPort 0: P545 [Spd Ref A Sel] = Port X (I/O Module): P50 [Anlg In0 Value]• Adjust ScalingPort X (I/O Module): P51 [Anlg In0 Hi] = +10 VoltPort X (I/O Module): P52 [Anlg In0 Lo] = -10 VoltPort 0: P547 [Spd Ref A AnlgHi] = +60 HzPort 0: P548 [Spd Ref A AnlgLo] = -60 Hz• View ResultsPort X (I/O Module): P50 [Anlg In0 Value]Port 0: P592 [Selected Spd Ref]• Set Direction ModePort 0: P308 [Direction Mode] = 1 “Bipolar”• Set SelectionPort 0: P545 [Spd Ref A Sel] = Port X (I/O Module): P50 [Anlg In0 Value]• Adjust ScalingPort X (I/O Module): P51 [Anlg In0 Hi] = +10 VoltPort X (I/O Module): P52 [Anlg In0 Lo] = -10 VoltPort 0: P547 [Spd Ref A AnlgHi] = +60 HzPort 0: P548 [Spd Ref A AnlgLo] = -60 Hz• View ResultsPort X (I/O Module): P50 [Anlg In0 Value]Port 0: P592 [Selected Spd Ref]• Set Direction ModePort 0: P308 [Direction Mode] = 0 “Unipolar”• Set SelectionPort 0: P545 [Spd Ref A Sel] = Port X (I/O Module): P50 [Anlg In0 Value]• Adjust ScalingPort X (I/O Module): P51 [Anlg In0 Hi] = 10 VoltPort X (I/O Module): P52 [Anlg In0 Lo] = 0 VoltPort 0: P547 [Spd Ref A AnlgHi] = 60 HzPort 0: P548 [Spd Ref A AnlgLo] = 0 Hz• View ResultsPort X (I/O Module): P50 [Anlg In0 Value]Port 0: P592 [Selected Spd Ref]• Set Direction ModePort 0: P308 [Direction Mode] = 0 “Unipolar”• Set SelectionPort 0: P545 [Spd Ref A Sel] = Port X (I/O Module): P50 [Anlg In0 Value]• Adjust ScalingPort X (I/O Module): P51 [Anlg In0 Hi] = 20 mAPort X (I/O Module): P52 [Anlg In0 Lo] = 0 mAPort 0: P547 [Spd Ref A AnlgHi] = 60 HzPort 0: P548 [Spd Ref A AnlgLo] = 0 Hz• View ResultsPort X (I/O Module): P50 [Anlg In0 Value]Port 0: P592 [Selected Spd Ref]PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

1-42 Installation/WiringInput/Output Connection Example Required Parameter ChangesHW Input PTCPTC Nominal = 1.8 k Ohm• ConfigurationPort X (I/O Module): P40 [PTC Cfg] = 0 “Ignore,” 1 “Alarm,” 2 “Flt Minor,”PTC Trip = 3.1k Ohm1.8kPtc– 3 “Flt CoastStop,” 4 “Flt RampStop,” or 5 “Flt CL Stop”PTCPTC Reset = 2.2 kOhmPtc+• View ResultsPort X (I/O Module): P41 [PTC Sts]Port X (I/O Module): P42 [PTC Raw Value]!Analog Voltage Output±10V, 0…20 mA Bipolar+10V Unipolar2-Wire ControlNon-Reversing24V DC internal supply2-Wire ControlReversingExternal supply3-Wire ControlInternal supplyATTENTION: To avoid an electric shock hazard, theconnection of the motor temperature sensor requires double orreinforced insulation between motor live parts and the PTC.+Stop-Run+24V CommonRun FwdRun RevStopStart–Ao0–Ao0+24VC+24VDi CDi 0Di CDi 0Di 124VC+24VDi CDi 0Di 1• ConfigurationPort X (I/O Module): P70 [Anlg Out Type], bit 0 = 0• Set SelectionPort X (I/O Module): P75 [Anlg Out0 Sel] = Port 0: P3 [Mtr Vel Fdbk]• Adjust ScalingPort X (I/O Module): P78 [Anlg Out0 DataHi] = 60 HzPort X (I/O Module): P79 [Anlg Out0 DataLo] = 0 HzPort X (I/O Module): P80 [Anlg Out0 Hi] =10V/20 mAPort X (I/O Module): P81 [Anlg Out0 Lo] = 0V/0 mA• View ResultsPort X (I/O Module): P77 [Anlg Out0 Data]Port X (I/O Module): P82 [Anlg Out0 Val]• Set Direction ModePort 0: P308 [Direction Mode] = 2 “Rev Disable”• ConfigurationPort 0: P150 [Digital In Cfg] = 1 “Run Level”• Set SelectionPort 0: P163 [DI Run] = Port X (I/O Module): P1 [Dig In Sts], bit 0 = Input 0• View ResultsPort X (I/O Module): P1 [Dig In Sts]Port 0: P935 [Drive Status 1]• Set Direction ModePort 0: P308 [Direction Mode] = 0 “Unipolar”• ConfigurationPort 0: P150 [Digital In Cfg] = 1 “Run Level”• Set SelectionPort 0: P164 [DI Run Forward] = Port X (I/O Module): P1 [Dig In Sts], bit 0 =Input 0Port 0: P165 [DI Run Reverse] = Port X (I/O Module): P1 [Dig In Sts], bit 1 =Input 1• View ResultsPort X (I/O Module): P1 [Dig In Sts]Port 0: P935 [Drive Status 1]• Set SelectionPort 0: P158 [DI Stop] = Port X (I/O Module): P1 [Dig In Sts], bit 0 = Input 0Port 0: P161 [DI Start] = Port X (I/O Module): P1 [Dig In Sts], bit 1 = Input 1• View ResultsPort X (I/O Module): P1 [Dig In Sts]Port 0: P935 [Drive Status 1]3-Wire ControlExternal supply+24V CommonStopStartDi CDi 0Di 1• Set SelectionPort 0: P158 [DI Stop] = Port X (I/O Module): P1 [Dig In Sts], bit 0 = Input 0Port 0: P161 [DI Start] = Port X (I/O Module): P1 [Dig In Sts], bit 1 = Input 1• View ResultsPort X (I/O Module): P1 [Dig In Sts]Port 0: P935 [Drive Status 1]PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Installation/Wiring 1-43Input/Output Connection Example Required Parameter ChangesDigital InputPLC Output ModuleNeutral/Common10k Ohm, 2 WattControl fromProg. ControllerDiCDi0Di1• Set SelectionPort 0: P158 [DI Stop] = Port X (I/O Module): P1 [Dig In Sts], bit 0 = Input 0Port 0: P161 [DI Start] = Port X (I/O Module): P1 [Dig In Sts], bit 1 = Input 1• View ResultsPort X (I/O Module): P1 [Dig In Sts]Port 0: P935 [Drive Status 1]Digital OutputInternal supply24VC+24V• Set SelectionPort X (I/O Module): P20 [TO0 Sel] = Port 0: P935 [Drive Status 1], bit 7 =Faulted• View ResultsPort X (I/O Module): P5 [Dig Out Sts]Digital OutputExternal supplyT0TCT1+24V CommonT0TCT1ORPLC5k Ohm2 Watt+24V CommonT0TCT1Relay Wiring ExamplesInput/Output Connection Example Required Parameter ChangesRelay OutputExternal supply753 Main Control Board • Set SelectionPowerSourcePort 0: P230 [RO0 Sel] = Port 0: P935 [Drive Status 1], bit 7 = Faulted• View ResultsPort 0: P225 [Dig Out Sts]750-Series I/O Module • Set SelectionPort X (I/O Module): P10 [RO0 Sel] = Port 0: P935 [Drive Status 1], bit 7 =FaultedR1NOR1CR1NCR0NCR0CR0NO• View ResultsPort X (I/O Module): P5 [Dig Out Sts]orPowerSourceR0NOR0CR0NCPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

1-44 Installation/WiringSafe Torque Off OptionModule20-750-SThe safe torque off option is just one component in a safety control system.Components in the system must be chosen and applied appropriately toachieve the desired level of operational safety. For detailed information onapplying this option, refer to the PowerFlex 750-Series Safe Torque OffUser Manual, publication 750-UM002.Table 1.W TB2 Terminal DesignationsSP+SE+SdSP-SE-SdTerminal NameDescriptionSP+ +24 Volt Safety Power User-supplied 24 volt power.SP- Safety Power Common45 mA typicalSE+ +24 Volt Safety Enable User-supplied 24 volt power.SE- Safety Enable Common25 mA typicalSd Shield Terminating point for wire shields when anSd ShieldEMC plate or conduit box is not installed.Safety InputPower SupplySE-Connection ExampleCommonSP-+24VSP+SdSE+SdCommon+24VInstallation Notes1. Ensure the safety enable jumper (J2 SAFETY) is removed.2. Ensure the hardware enable jumper (J1 ENABLE) is installed. If notinstalled, the drive will fault when a start command is issued.Universal FeedbackEncoder Option ModuleSee Appendix E.Incremental Encoder OptionModulesSee Appendix F.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Installation/Wiring 1-45Safe Speed Monitor OptionModuleThe Safe Speed Monitor option is just one component in a safety controlsystem. Components in the system must be chosen and appliedappropriately to achieve the desired level of operational safety. For detailedinformation on applying this option, refer to the Safe Speed Monitor OptionModule for PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives Safety Reference Manual,publication 750-RM001.20-750-S120-750-S120-750-DENC-1Table 1.X TB1 Terminal DesignationsS11S11S11S21S21S21Table 1.Y TB2 Terminal DesignationsS34525178684434X42X32S42S32S62S52S82S72S22S12A2A1Installation NotesTerminal Name Signal Name DescriptionS11 Pto0 TEST_OUT_0 Pulse test source for safety inputs.S11S11S21 Pto1 TEST_OUT_1 Pulse test source for safety inputs.S21S21Terminal NameDescriptionRelatedParamS34 Res0 Reset52 Dco1 Door Control Output.7451 Dco0Enables pulse testing.78 Slo1 Safe Limited Speed Output.7368 Slo0Enables pulse testing.44 Sso1 Safe Stop Output.7234 Sso0Enables pulse testing.X42 Lmi1 Lock Monitoring Input 60X32 Lmi0S42 Dmi1 Door Monitoring Input 58S32 Dmi0S62 Sli1 Safe Limited Speed Input 52S52 Sli0S82 Esm1 Enabling Switch Monitoring Input 54S72 Esm0S22 Ssi1 Safe Stop Input 44S12 Ssi0A2 24VC Customer supplied 24V DC. Module isA1 +24Vnot functional without theseconnections.1. Ensure the safety enable jumper (J2 SAFETY) is removed.2. Ensure the hardware enable jumper (J1 ENABLE) is installed. If notinstalled, the drive will fault when a start command is issued.Important: When the Safe Speed Monitor option is used with the DualIncremental Encoder option (Appendix F), both modules mustbe installed on the same backplane (ports 6, 5, 4).Parameter DescriptionsSafe Speed Monitor option module parameter descriptions begin on pagepage 3-148.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

1-46 Installation/WiringAuxiliary Power SupplyOption ModuleTable 1.Z TB1 Terminal Designations20-750-APS Terminal Name DescriptionAP+AP–ShAP+ +24 Volt Auxiliary Power Connections for customer supplied 24V/3Apower supply.AP–Auxiliary Power CommonAP+AP-ShSh Shield Terminating point for wire shields when anEMC plate or conduit box is not installed.Important: The Auxiliary Power Supply option module may be installed inany option port. Due to its size, the module will extend over andblock an adjacent port. Therefore, installation in Port 8 isrecommended.A connector cable is provided with Auxiliary Power Supply option modulesfor use in PowerFlex 753 drives. The cable is used to connect a module tothe backplane when installed on the upper control pod brackets. Theconnector cable is not used with PowerFlex 755 drives.Figure 1.18 Auxiliary Power Supply Installation in 753 DrivesPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Installation/Wiring 1-47DeviceNet Option ModuleFor complete information on the DeviceNet Option Module, refer to thePowerFlex 750-Series Drive DeviceNet Option Module User Manual,publication 750COM-UM002.Table 1.AA DeviceNet Option Module LED Indication20-750-DNET LED Name Description➊ Port DPI Connection Status➋ MOD Option Module Status➌ NET A DeviceNet StatusTable 1.AB DeviceNet Option Module Rotary Switches➊➋➊➋➌Switch Name Description➊ Data RateSwitchSets the DeviceNet data rate at which the optionmodule communicates.➋ Node AddressSwitchesSets the node address of the option module.Table 1.AC TB1 Terminal Designations54321Terminal Color Signal Function5 Red V+ Power Supply4 White CAN_H Signal High3 Bare SHIELD Shield2 Blue CAN_L Signal Low1 Black V- CommonPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

1-48 Installation/WiringControlNet Option ModuleFor complete information on the ControlNet Option Module, refer to thePowerFlex 20-750-CNETC Coaxial ControlNet Option Module UserManual, publication 750COM-UM003.Table 1.AD ControlNet Option Module LED Indication20-750-CNETC LED Name DescriptionTable 1.AE ControlNet Option Module Rotary Switches➊➋➊➋➌➍➊ Port DPI Connection Status➋ MOD Option Module Status➌ NET A ControlNet Channel A Status➍ NET B ControlNet Channel B StatusTable 1.AF Coax Receptacles➊Switch Name Description➊ TENS Switch Sets the node address of the option module.➋ ONES SwitchReceptacle Name Description➊ Channel A Channel A BNC connection to the network.➋ Channel B Channel B (redundant) BNC connection to thenetwork➋PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Installation/Wiring 1-4920-COMM Carrier20-750-20COMMEnables use of some 20-COMM adapters with PowerFlex 750-Series drives.See Table 1.AG.Refer to publication 750COM-IN001 for instructions on installing a20-COMM adapter on the 20-COMM Carrier.Table 1.AG 20-COMM-* Network Adapter Compatibility with 750-Series DrivesAccesses Ports 2, 3, and 6 for Accesses Port 7Adapter TypeI/O Connections (Implicit andExplicit Messaging)through 14Devices20-COMM-B BACnet MS/TP No20-COMM-C ControlNet (Coax) ✓ (1)✓ v3.001 (3)Supports DriveAdd On ProfilesSupportsAsian-Languages (5)20-COMM-D DeviceNet ✓ v2.005 (3) No20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP ✓ v4.001 (3) ✓ (4) ✓ v4.001 (3)20-COMM-H RS-485 HVAC ✓ (2)No20-COMM-I Interbus ✓ (1)20-COMM-K CANopen20-COMM-L LonWorksNo20-COMM-M Modbus/TCP ✓ (1) ✓ v2.001 (3) No ✓ v2.001 (3)20-COMM-P Profibus DPNo20-COMM-Q ControlNet (Fiber) ✓ v3.001 (3) ✓ (4) ✓ v3.001 (3)20-COMM-R Remote I/ONo20-COMM-S RS-485 DF1(1) Controller must be capable of reading/writing 32-bit floating point (REAL) values.(2) Only works in the Modbus RTU mode.(3) Requires this adapter firmware version or higher.(4) Requires firmware version v1.05 or higher of the drive Add On Profiles for RSLogix 5000 version v16 or higher.(5) Chinese, Japanese, and Korean languages are supported at the time of publication.✓ (4)✓ v3.001 (3)PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

1-50 Installation/WiringCE ConformityCompliance with the Low Voltage Directive and ElectromagneticCompatibility Directive has been demonstrated using harmonized EuropeanNorm (EN) standards published in the Official Journal of the EuropeanCommunities. PowerFlex 750-Series drives comply with the EN standardslisted below when installed according to the PowerFlex 750-Series ACDrive Installation Instructions and this PowerFlex 750-Series AC DriveUser Manual.CE Declarations of Conformity are available online at:www.rockwellautomation.com/products/certification/Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC)• EN 61800-5-1 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems – Part5-1: Safety requirements – Electrical, thermal and energy.EMC Directive (2004/108/EC)• EN 61800-3 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems – Part 3:EMC product standard including specific test methods.General Considerations• For CE compliance, drives must satisfy installation requirements relatedto both EN 61800-5-1 and EN 61800-3 provided in this document.• PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives comply with the EMC requirements ofEN 61800-3 when installed according to good EMC practices and theinstructions provided in this document. However, many factors caninfluence the EMC compliance of an entire machine or installation, andcompliance of the drive itself does not ensure compliance of allapplications.• PowerFlex 750-Series drives are not intended to be used on publiclow-voltage networks which supply domestic premises. Withoutadditional mitigation, radio frequency interference is expected if used onsuch a network. The installer is responsible to take measures such assupplementary line filters and enclosures to prevent interference, inaddition to the installation requirements of this document.• Requirements for supplementary mitigation related to specific highfrequency emission limits are provided in Table 1.AH.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Installation/Wiring 1-51• PowerFlex 750-Series drives generate harmonic current emissions on theAC supply system. When operated on a public low-voltage network it isthe responsibility of the installer or user to ensure that applicablerequirements of the distribution network operator have been met.Consultation with the network operator and Rockwell Automation maybe necessary.!ATTENTION: PowerFlex 750-Series drives produce DCcurrent in the protective earthing conductor which may reducethe ability of RCD’s (residual current-operated protectivedevices) or RCM’s (residual current-operated monitoringdevices) of type A or AC to provide protection for otherequipment in the installation.Installation Requirements Related to EN 61800-5-1 and the Low VoltageDirective• 600V and 690V class PowerFlex 750-Series drives are designed to be CEcompliant only if they are NOT connected to “corner-earthed” supplysystems where one of the three phases of the supply system has beenearthed.• Voltage classes up to 480V PowerFlex 750-Series drives are compliantwith the CE LV Directive when used on a “corner-earthed” supplysystem as well as all other common supply systems for altitudes up toand including 2000 m (6562 ft).• When used at altitudes above 2000 m (6562 ft) up to a maximum of4865 m (15,961 ft), PowerFlex 750-Series drives of voltage classes up to480V may not be powered from a “corner-earthed” supply system inorder to maintain compliance with the CE LV Directive.• Drives provided in the IP54, NEMA/UL Type 12 enclosure arecompliant with the CE LV Directive when installed in pollution degree1…4 environments. All other enclosure types must be installed in apollution degree 1 or 2 environment to be compliant with the CE LVDirective. Characteristics of the different pollution degree ratings areprovided on page A-7.• NEMA/UL Open Type and Flange Mount drives must either be installedin a supplementary enclosure or equipped with a “NEMA Type 1 Kit” tobe CE compliant with respect to protection against electrical shock.• PowerFlex 750-Series drives produce leakage current in the protectiveearthing conductor which exceeds 3.5 mA AC and/or 10 mA DC. Theminimum size of the protective earthing (grounding) conductor used inthe application must comply with local safety regulations for highprotective earthing conductor current equipment.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

1-52 Installation/WiringInstallation Requirements Related to EN 61800-3 and the EMC Directive• The drive must be earthed (grounded) as described in the PowerFlex750-Series User Manual, publication 750-UM001.• Output power wiring to the motor must employ cable with a braidedshield providing 75% or greater coverage, or the cables must be housedin metal conduit, or equivalent shielding must be provided. Continuousshielding must be provided from the drive enclosure to the motorenclosure. Both ends of the motor cable shield (or conduit) mustterminate with a low-impedance connection to earth. At the drive end ofthe motor cable, eithera) The cable shield must be clamped to a properly-installed “EMCplate” for the drive. Kit number 20-750-EMC1-Fx.orb) The cable shield or conduit must terminate in a shielded connectorused in conjunction with a properly-installed conduit plate or conduitbox provided in the “NEMA Type 1 Kit” for the drive. Kit number20-750-NEMA1-Fx.• At the motor end, the motor cable shield or conduit must terminate in ashielded connector which must be properly installed in an earthed motorwiring box attached to the motor. The motor wiring box cover must beinstalled and earthed.• All control (I/O) and signal wiring to the drive must use cable with abraided shield providing 75% or greater coverage, or the cables must behoused in metal conduit, or equivalent shielding must be provided. Whenshielded cable is used, only the drive end of the cable shield should beterminated with a low-impedance connection to earth. The cable shieldmay be terminated either by using a shielded connector in conjunctionwith a conduit plate or conduit box, or the shield may be clamped to an“EMC plate.”• Motor cabling must be separated from control and signal wiringwherever possible.• Maximum motor cable length must not exceed the maximum lengthindicated in Table 1.AH for compliance with radio frequency emissionlimits for the specific standard and installation environment.• EMC cores must be applied to input power and motor cabling for somemodels of the PowerFlex 750-Series drives as indicated in Table 1.AH.• The drive must be powered from an earthed supply system such as a TNor TT system and the PE-A and PE-B jumpers in the drive must beinstalled (see Drive Power Jumper Configuration starting on page 1-23).PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Installation/Wiring 1-53Drive FrameCatalog NumberFrame 220F11xx2P1…20F11xx02220G11xx2P1…20G11xx022Frame 320F11xx030…20F11xx04320G11xx030…20G11xx043Frame 420F11xx060…20F11xx07220G11xx060…20G11xx072Frame 520F11xx085…20F11xx10420G11xx085…20G11xx104Frame 620F11xx140…20F11xx26020G11xx140…20G11xx260Frame 720F11xx302…20F11xx47720G11xx302…20G11xx477Table 1.AH PowerFlex 750-Series RF Emission Compliance and InstallationRequirementsStandard / LimitsEN61800-3 Cat. C1EN61000-6-3CISPR11 Group 1 Class BCompliance possible withsupplementary mitigation(Consult factory)Compliance possible withsupplementary mitigation(Consult factory)Compliance possible withsupplementary mitigation(Consult factory)Compliance possible withsupplementary mitigation(Consult factory)Compliance possible withsupplementary mitigation(Consult factory)Compliance possible withsupplementary mitigation(Consult factory)More Stringent LimitsEN61800-3 Cat. C2EN61000-6-4CISPR11 Group 1 Class A(input power ≤ 20 kVA)30 m motor cable limit withinput core (1)30 m motor cable limit withinput core (1)30 m motor cable limit withinput and output cores (1)30 m motor cable limit withinput and output cores (1)Compliance possible withsupplementary mitigation(Consult factory)Compliance possible withsupplementary mitigation(Consult factory)(1) Rating-specific EMC cores are part of EMC kit numbers 20-750-EMC1-xx and 20-750-EMC2-xx.EN61800-3 Cat. C3(I ≤ 100 A)CISPR11 Group 1 Class A(Input power > 20 kVA)30 m motor cable limit withinput core (1)30 m motor cable limit withinput core (1)30 m motor cable limit withinput and output cores (1)30 m motor cable limit withinput and output cores (1)EN61800-3 Cat. C3I > 100 AN/AN/AN/A30 m motor cable limit withinput and output cores (1)30 m motor cable limit 30 m motor cable limit30 m motor cable limit 30 m motor cable limitLess Stringent LimitsPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

1-54 Installation/WiringNotes:PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Chapter 2Start UpThis chapter provides the information needed to start up the PowerFlex750-Series drive.For Information on … See Page ...Establishing A Connection With EtherNet/IP 2-5Prepare For Initial Drive Start-Up 2-1Start-Up Menu 2-3Drive Status Indicators 2-4Start-Up Check List • This check list supports the Start-Up menu option.• A Human Interface Module (HIM) is required to run the Start-Uproutine.Important: Appendix D provides an overview of Human InterfaceModule (HIM) display elements and menu navigation.• The Start-Up routine may modify parameter values for Analog andDigital I/O.!ATTENTION: Power must be applied to the drive to performthe following start-up procedure. Some of the voltages presentare at incoming line potential. To avoid electric shock hazard ordamage to equipment, only qualified service personnel shouldperform the following procedure. Thoroughly read andunderstand the procedure before beginning.Prepare For Initial Drive Start-Up❏❏❏1. Confirm that all inputs are connected to the correct terminals and aresecure.2. Verify that AC line power at the disconnect device is within the ratedvalue of the drive.3. Verify that control power voltage is correct.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

2-2 Start Up❏4. The remainder of this procedure requires that a Human Interface Module(HIM) is connected to DPI Port 1 or 2.Figure 2.1 DPI Ports ➊ and ➋❏5. Apply AC power and control voltages to the drive.If any digital inputs are configured to Stop – CF, Run, or Enable,verify that signals are present or the drive will not start. Refer toChapter 4 for a list of potential digital input conflicts.If the STS LED is not flashing green at this point, refer to Drive StatusIndicators on page 2-4.❏6. When prompted, select a display language. The Start-Up Screen willautomatically display for drives that have not been previouslyconfigured.If the Start-Up screen is not displayed press the Enter key.❏❏❏7. Press the Enter key to display the Start-Up Menu.8. Use the Up/Down Arrow keys to highlight “2. Basic”.9. Press the Enter key. Follow the menu using the Enter key which will stepyou through the Start-Up routine.The Start-Up routine asks simple questions and prompts you to inputrequired information.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Start Up 2-3Start-Up MenuThe Human Interface Module (HIM) displays the General Start-Up menuby default upon initial power up of the drive. To navigate to the Start-Upmenu after the initial power up of the drive, follow the steps in Navigate toStart-Up Menu Using the HIM on page D-4General StartupStart-Up Main MenuComplete these steps inorder:Motor ControlMotor DataFeedbackLimitsTestsRef, Ramp, StopI/ODoneMotor Control Motor Data Feedback Limits Tests Reference I/O DoneMotor CtrlMotor DataFeedbackConfigLimitsTestsRef, Ramp,StopI/OReturn toMain MenuMotor CtrlReturnMotor DataReturnFdbk CnfgReturnLimitsReturnTestsReturnRef, Ramp,StopReturnI/OReturnReturn toMain MenuPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

87 94 5 612 0387 94 5 6132 02-4 Start UpDrive Status IndicatorsTable 2.A PowerFlex 753 Status Indicator DescriptionsName Color State DescriptionSTS Green Flashing Drive ready but not running, and no faults are present.(Status)Steady Drive running, no faults are present.Yellow Flashing Drive is not running, a type 2 (non-configurable) alarm conditionexists and the drive cannot be started.Steady Drive is not running, a type 1 (user configurable) alarm conditionexists and the drive continues to run.Red Flashing A major fault has occurred. Drive will stop. Drive cannot be starteduntil fault condition is cleared.Steady A non-resettable fault has occurred.Red /YellowFlashingAlternatelyA minor fault has occurred. When running, the drive continues to run.System is brought to a stop under system control. Fault must becleared to continue. Use parameter 950 [Minor Flt Config] to enable.If not enabled, acts like a major fault.Yellow /GreenFlashingAlternatelyWhen running, a type 1 alarm exists.Green /RedFlashingAlternatelyDrive is flash updating.Table 2.B PowerFlex 755 Status Indicator DescriptionsName Color State DescriptionSTS Green Flashing Drive ready but not running, and no faults are present.(Status)Steady Drive running, no faults are present.Yellow Flashing Drive is not running, a type 2 (non-configurable) alarm conditionexists and the drive cannot be started.Steady Drive is not running, a type 1 (user configurable) alarm conditionexists and the drive continues to run.Red Flashing A major fault has occurred. Drive will stop. Drive cannot be starteduntil fault condition is cleared.Steady A non-resettable fault has occurred.Red / Flashing A minor fault has occurred. When running, the drive continues to run.Yellow Alternately System is brought to a stop under system control. Fault must becleared to continue. Use parameter 950 [Minor Flt Config] to enable.If not enabled, acts like a major fault.Yellow / Flashing When running, a type 1 alarm exists.Green AlternatelyGreen / Flashing Drive is flash updating.Red AlternatelyENET Unlit Off Adapter and/or network is not powered, adapter is not properlyconnected to the network, or adapter needs an IP address.Red Flashing An EtherNet/IP connection has timed out.Steady Adapter failed the duplicate IP address detection test.Red / Flashing Adapter is performing a self-test.Green AlternatelyGreen Flashing Adapter is properly connected but is not communicating with anydevices on the network.Steady Adapter is properly connected and communicating on the network.LINK Unlit Off Adapter is not powered or is not transmitting on the network.Green Flashing Adapter is properly connected and transmitting data packets on thenetwork.Steady Adapter is properly connected but is not transmitting on the network.Important: The Status Indicator LEDs on the HIM cradle do not indicatethe current status of an installed Communication Adapteroption. If an optional Communication Adapter is installed, referto that option’s user manual for a description of LED locationand indication.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Start Up 2-5Establishing A ConnectionWith EtherNet/IPThere are three methods for configuring the embedded EtherNet/IPadapter’s IP address:• Adapter Rotary Switches – Use the switches when working on asimple, isolated network (for example, 192.168.1.xxx) that has otherproducts with switches to set their IP addresses, does not need to beaccessed from outside the network, and you prefer a simplified nodeaddressing method. The three adapter switches are read when the drivepowers up, and represent three decimal digits from top to bottom (seeFigure 2.2). If set to a valid address (001-254), the adapter will use thatvalue as the lower octet of its IP address (192.168.1.xxx, where xxx =rotary switch settings), along with a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0 andthere will be no gateway configured. Also, the setting for adapter P36[BOOTP] is automatically ignored.See Figure 2.2 and its accompanying table for all possible switch settingsand their related descriptions.Important: When using the adapter rotary switches, set the IP addressbefore power is applied because the adapter uses the IPaddress it detects when it first receives power.• BOOTP Server – Use BOOTP if you prefer to control the IP addressesof devices using a server. The IP address, subnet mask, and gatewayaddresses will then be provided by the BOOTP server.• Adapter Parameters – Use adapter parameters when you want moreflexibility in setting up the IP address, or need to communicate outsidethe control network using a gateway. The IP address, subnet mask, andgateway addresses will then come from the adapter parameters you set.Important: Regardless of the method used to set the adapter’s IP address,each node on the EtherNet/IP network must have a unique IPaddress. To change an IP address, you must set the new valueand then remove and reapply power to (or reset) the adapter.Figure 2.2 Setting the IP Address SwitchesHundredsPositionTensPositionOnesPosition323241324141505050696796798878PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

2-6 Start UpPossible Settings Description000 Adapter will use, depending on P36 [BOOTP], the BOOTP setting or theadapter parameter settings for the IP address.001…254 Adapter will use the rotary switch settings for the IP address(192.168.1.xxx, where xxx = rotary switch settings).255…887 Adapter will use, depending on P6 [BOOTP], the BOOTP setting or theadapter parameter settings for the IP address.888 Resets the adapter IP address function to factory defaults. Thereafter, thedrive must be powered down, the switches set to a setting other than 888,and then the drive must be powered up again to accept the new address.889…998 Adapter will use, depending on P36 [BOOTP], the BOOTP setting or theadapter parameter settings for the IP address.999Disables the rotary switches. Adapter will use, depending on P36(default settings) [BOOTP], the BOOTP setting or the adapter parameter settings for the IPaddress.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Chapter 3Programming and ParametersThis chapter provides a complete listing and description of the PowerFlex750-Series drive parameters. The parameters can be programmed (viewed/edited) using a Human Interface Module (HIM). Refer to Appendix B forinformation on using the HIM to view and edit parameters. As analternative, programming can also be performed using DriveToolssoftware and a personal computer.For information on...See pageAbout Parameters 3-1How Drive Parameters are Organized 3-3How Option Module Parameters are Organized 3-15Drive Monitor File 3-19Drive Motor Control File 3-20Drive Feedback & I/O File 3-28Drive Cfg File 3-42Drive Protection File 3-54Drive Speed Control File 3-62Drive Torque Control File 3-78Drive Position Control File 3-83Drive Communication File 3-95Drive Diagnostics File 3-100Drive Applications File 3-109Drive Parameter Cross Reference By Name 3-131I/O Module Parameters 3-137Single Incremental Encoder Module Parameters 3-159Safe Speed Monitor Module Parameters 3-148Dual Incremental Encoder Module Parameters 3-161Universal Feedback Module Parameters 3-166Embedded EtherNet/IP Parameters 3-178About ParametersTo configure a drive module to operate in a specific way, certain driveparameters may have to be configured appropriately. Three types ofparameters exist:• ENUM ParametersThese parameters allow a selection from 2 or more items. The LCD HIMwill display a text message for each item.• Bit ParametersThese parameters have individual bits associated with features orconditions. If the bit is 0, the feature is off or the condition is false. If thebit is 1, the feature is on or the condition is true.• Numeric ParametersThese parameters have a single numeric value (i.e. 0.1 Volts).PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-2 Programming and ParametersThe following table shows how each parameter type is presented in thismanual.Table 3.A Table Explanation➊ ➋ ➌MOTOR CONTROLVector Regulator Motor DataNameNo. Description28 Motor NP RPMMotor Nameplate Revolutions Per MinuteRated RPM shown on the motor nameplate.107 Trq Adapt EnTorque Adaption EnableEnables or disables the adaptive torque calculation. This selection is active onlyin motor control mode flux vector induction (P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode] = 3 “InductionFV”).ValuesUnits: RPMDefault: 1750.0Min/Max: 1.0 / 40000.0Default:Options:1 = “Enabled”0 = “Disabled”1 = “Enabled”Read-WriteData TypeRW RealRW 32-bitIntegerFEEDBACK & I/OControl Board IO Digin Functions158 DI StopDigital Input StopAssigns a digital input used to issue a stop command.220 Digital In StsDigital Input StatusStatus of the digital input(s) resident on the main control board (Port 0).OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedDigital In 0Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.150 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueRW 32-bitIntegerNo.➊NameDescriptionFile and Group organizationNo. - Parameter NumberParameter value cannot be changed until the drive is stopped.Read-WriteData Type➋➌Name - Parameter name as it appears in the DriveExecutive software.Description - Brief description of parameter function. The first line is the full text parameter name.753755= Parameter is specific to PowerFlex 753 drives only.= Parameter is specific to PowerFlex 755 drives only.Values - Define the various operating characteristics of the parameter. There are 3 types of Values.ENUM Default: Lists the value assigned at the factory.Options:Displays the selections available.Bit Default: Lists the value assigned at the factory.Options:Displays the selections available.Numeric Default Lists the value assigned at the factory.Min/Max.Displays lowest possible setting/Displays highest possible setting.Indicates if parameter is read-write or read-only.RW=Read-WriteRO=Read OnlyIndicates parameter data type (i.e. integer, floating point, boolean).RWRO32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-3How Drive Parameters areOrganizedDriveExecutive programming software displays parameters in “Linear List”or “File Group Parameter” format. Viewing the parameters in “File GroupParameter” format simplifies programming by grouping parameters that areused for similar functions. There are eleven files. Each file is divided intomultiple groups of parameters.Parameter descriptions begin on page 3-19.Basic Parameter ViewParameter 301 [Access Level] set to option 0 “Basic.”File Group ParametersMonitor Metering Output Frequency 1Commanded SpdRef 2Mtr Vel Fdbk 3Commanded Trq 4MonitorTorque Cur Fdbk 5Flux Cur Fdbk 6Output Current 7Output Voltage 8Output Power 9DC Bus Volts 11Drive Data Rated Volts 20 Rated Amps 21 Rated kW 22Motor Control Motor Data Motor NP Volts 25Motor NP Amps 26Motor ControlMotor NP Hertz 27Motor NP RPM 28Mtr Ctrl Options Motor Ctrl Mode 35 Maximum Voltage 36Maximum Freq 37Volts per Hertz VHz Curve 65Autotune Autotune 70 Autotune Torque 71Feedback & I/O Digin Functions Digital In Cfg 150DI Enable 155DI Clear Fault 156DI Aux Fault 157DI Stop 158DI Cur Lmt Stop 159DI Coast Stop 160DI Start 161DI Fwd Reverse 162DI Run 163DI Run Forward 164DI Run Reverse 165Feedback and IODI Jog 1 166DI Jog 1 Forward 167DI Jog 1 Reverse 168DI Jog 2 169DI Jog 2 Forward 170DI Jog 2 Reverse 171DI Manual Ctrl 172DI Speed Sel 0 173DI Speed Sel 1 174DI Speed Sel 2 175Mtr NP Pwr Units 29Motor NP Power 30PWM Frequency 38DI Accel 2 179DI Decel 2 180Digital Inputs Digital In Sts 220 Dig In Filt Mask 753 222 Dig In Filt 753 223Digital Outputs 753 Dig Out Sts 225Dig Out Invert 226Dig Out Setpoint 227RO0 Sel 230RO0 Level Sel 231RO0 Level 232RO0 Level CmpSts 233RO0 On Time 234RO0 Off Time 235Motor PTC 753 PTC Cfg 250 PTC Status 251Analog Inputs 753 Anlg In Type 255Anlg In Sqrt 256Anlg In Loss Sts 257Analog Outputs 753 Anlg Out Type 270Anlg Out Abs 271Anlg In0 Value 260Anlg In0 Hi 261Anlg In0 Lo 262Anlg Out0 Sel 275Anlg Out0 Stpt 276TO0 Sel 240TO0 Level Sel 241TO0 Level 242TO0 Level CmpSts 243TO0 On Time 244TO0 Off Time 245Anlg In0 LssActn 263Anlg In0 Raw Val 264Anlg Out0 Data 277Anlg Out0 DataHi 278Anlg Out0 DataLo 279Motor Poles 31Anlg In0 Filt Gn 265Anlg In0 Filt BW 266Anlg Out0 Hi 280Anlg Out0 Lo 281Anlg Out0 Val 282PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-4 Programming and ParametersFile Group ParametersDrive Cfg Preferences Speed Units 300Access Level 301Language 302Control Cfg Voltage Class 305Duty Rating 306Direction Mode 308Drive ConfigAuto Manual Ctrl Logic Mask 324Auto Mask 325Manual Cmd Mask 326Manual Ref Mask 327Braking Features Stop Mode A 370Stop Mode B 371Bus Reg Mode A 372Bus Reg Mode B 373Protection Motor Overload Motor OL Actn 410Mtr OL at Pwr Up 411Mtr OL Alarm Lvl 412Load Limits Current Lmt Sel 421Current Limit 1 422ProtectionSpdTrqPsn Mode A 309Alt Man Ref Sel 328Alt Man Ref AnHi 329Alt Man Ref AnLo 330DB Resistor Type 382DB Ext Ohms 383DB Ext Watts 384DB ExtPulseWatts 385Mtr OL Factor 413Mtr OL Hertz 414Power Loss Power Loss Actn 449 Pwr Loss Mode A 450Speed Control Speed Limits Max Fwd Speed 520 Min Fwd Speed 522Max Rev Speed 521 Min Rev Speed 523Speed Ramp Rates Accel Time 1 535 Decel Time 1 537Accel Time 2 536 Decel Time 2 538Speed Reference Spd Ref A Sel 545 Jog Speed 1 556Spd Ref A Stpt 546 Jog Speed 2 557Spd Ref A AnlgHi 547Spd Ref A AnlgLo 548Spd Ref B Sel 550Spd Ref B Stpt 551Spd Ref B AnlgHi 552Spd Ref B AnlgLo 553Torque Control Torque Reference Trq Ref A Sel 675 Trq Ref B Sel 680Trq Ref A Stpt 676 Trq Ref B Stpt 681Trq Ref A AnlgHi 677 Trq Ref B AnlgHi 682Trq Ref A AnlgLo 678 Trq Ref B AnlgLo 683Trq Ref A Mult 679 Trq Ref B Mult 684Speed ControlTorque ControlManual Preload 331Dec Inhibit Actn 409Mtr OL Reset Lvl 415MtrOL Reset Time 416Shear Pin Cfg 434Shear Pin 1 Actn 435Shear Pin1 Level 436Shear Pin 1 Time 437Jog Acc Dec Time 539Preset Speed 1 571Preset Speed 2 572Preset Speed 3 573Preset Speed 4 574Preset Speed 5 575Preset Speed 6 576Preset Speed 7 577Selected Trq Ref 685Communication Comm Control Port 1 Reference (1) 871DPI Datalinks Data In A1 895Data In A2 896Data In B1 897Data In B2 898CommunicationData In C1 899Data In C2 900Data In D1 901Data In D2 902Data Out A1 905Data Out A2 906Data Out B1 907Data Out B2 908Data Out C1 909Data Out C2 910Data Out D1 911Data Out D2 912Diagnostics Status Speed Ref Source 930Last StartSource 931Last Stop Source 932Start Inhibits 933Last StrtInhibit 934DiagnosticsFault/Alarm Info Minor Flt Cfg 950Last Fault Code 951Fault Status A 952Fault Status B 953(1) 755 Basic View OnlyDrive Status 1 935Drive Status 2 936Condition Sts 1 937PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-5Advanced Parameter ViewParameter 301 [Access Level] set to option 1 “Advanced.”File Group ParametersMonitor Metering Output Frequency 1 Torque Cur Fdbk 5 Output Power 9Commanded SpdRef 2 Flux Cur Fdbk 6 Output Powr Fctr 10Mtr Vel Fdbk 3 Output Current 7 DC Bus Volts 11Commanded Trq 4 Output Voltage 8 DC Bus Memory 12Drive Data Rated Volts 20 Rated Amps 21 Rated kW 22MonitorElapsed MWH 13Elapsed kWH 14Elapsed Run Time 15Motor Control Motor Data Motor NP Volts 25Motor NP Amps 26Mtr Ctrl Options Motor Ctrl Mode 35Maximum Voltage 36Maximum Freq 37PWM Frequency 38Mtr Options Cfg 40Motor ControlVolts per Hertz Start Acc Boost 60Run Boost 61Autotune Autotune 70Autotune Torque 71IR Voltage Drop 73Ixo Voltage Drop 74Flux Current Ref 75Feedback & I/O Digin Functions Digital In Cfg 150DI Enable 155DI Clear Fault 156DI Aux Fault 157DI Stop 158DI Cur Lmt Stop 159DI Coast Stop 160DI Start 161DI Fwd Reverse 162DI Run 163DI Run Forward 164DI Run Reverse 165Feedback and IOMotor NP Hertz 27Motor NP RPM 28Flux Up Enable 43Flux Up Time 44Break Voltage 62Break Frequency 63Total Inertia 76Inertia Test Lmt 77DI Jog 1 166DI Jog 1 Forward 167DI Jog 1 Reverse 168DI Jog 2 169DI Jog 2 Forward 170DI Jog 2 Reverse 171DI Manual Ctrl 172DI Speed Sel 0 173DI Speed Sel 1 174DI Speed Sel 2 175DI MOP Inc 177DI MOP Dec 178Mtr NP Pwr Units 29Motor NP Power 30VHz Curve 65DI Accel 2 179DI Decel 2 180DI SpTqPs Sel 0 181DI SpTqPs Sel 1 182DI Stop Mode B 185DI BusReg Mode B 186DI PwrLoss ModeB 187DI Pwr Loss 188DI Precharge 189DI Prchrg Seal 190DI PID Enable 191DI PID Hold 192Digital Inputs Digital In Sts 220 Dig In Filt Mask 753 222 Dig In Filt 753 223Digital Outputs 753 Dig Out Sts 225Dig Out Invert 226Dig Out Setpoint 227RO0 Sel 230RO0 Level Sel 231RO0 Level 232RO0 Level CmpSts 233RO0 On Time 234RO0 Off Time 235Motor PTC 753 PTC Cfg 250 PTC Status 251Analog Inputs 753 Anlg In Type 255Anlg In Sqrt 256Anlg In Loss Sts 257Analog Outputs 753 Anlg Out Type 270Anlg Out Abs 271R0 Predict Main 753 RO PredMaint Sts 285RO0 Load Type 286Anlg In0 Value 260Anlg In0 Hi 261Anlg In0 Lo 262Anlg Out0 Sel 275Anlg Out0 Stpt 276RO0 Load Amps 287RO0 TotalLife 288TO0 Sel 240TO0 Level Sel 241TO0 Level 242TO0 Level CmpSts 243TO0 On Time 244TO0 Off Time 245Anlg In0 LssActn 263Anlg In0 Raw Val 264Anlg Out0 Data 277Anlg Out0 DataHi 278Anlg Out0 DataLo 279RO0 ElapsedLife 289RO0 RemainLife 290Motor Poles 31DI PID Reset 193DI PID Invert 194DI Torque StptA 195DI Fwd End Limit 196DI Fwd Dec Limit 197DI Rev End Limit 198DI Rev Dec Limit 199DI PHdwr OvrTrvl 200DI NHdwr OvrTrvl 201Anlg In0 Filt Gn 265Anlg In0 Filt BW 266Anlg Out0 Hi 280Anlg Out0 Lo 281Anlg Out0 Val 282RO0 LifeEvntLvl 291RO0 LifeEvntActn 292PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-6 Programming and ParametersFile Group ParametersDrive Cfg Preferences Speed Units 300Access Level 301Language 302Control Cfg Voltage Class 305Duty Rating 306Direction Mode 308Drive ConfigAuto Manual Ctrl Logic Mask 324Auto Mask 325Manual Cmd Mask 326Manual Ref Mask 327Drive Memory Reset Meters 336Start Features Start At PowerUp 345PowerUp Delay 346Auto Retry Fault 347Auto Rstrt Tries 348Auto Rstrt Delay 349Braking Features Stop Mode A 370Stop Mode B 371Bus Reg Mode A 372Bus Reg Mode B 373Bus Reg Lvl Cfg 374Bus Reg Level 375Protection Motor Overload Motor OL Actn 410Mtr OL at Pwr Up 411Mtr OL Alarm Lvl 412Load Limits Drive OL Mode 420Current Lmt Sel 421Current Limit 1 422Current Limit 2 423Active Cur Lmt 424Current Rate Lmt 425Regen Power Lmt 426ProtectionSpdTrqPsn Mode A 309SpdTrqPsn Mode B 310SpdTrqPsn Mode C 311SpdTrqPsn Mode D 312Alt Man Ref Sel 328Alt Man Ref AnHi 329Alt Man Ref AnLo 330Sleep Wake Mode 350SleepWake RefSel 351Sleep Level 352Sleep Time 353Wake Level 354Wake Time 355DB Resistor Type 382DB Ext Ohms 383DB Ext Watts 384DB ExtPulseWatts 385Flux Braking En 388Flux Braking Lmt 389Mtr OL Factor 413Mtr OL Hertz 414Power Loss Power Loss Actn 449 Pwr Loss Mode A 450Pwr Loss A Level 451Pwr Loss A Time 452Ground Fault Ground Warn Actn 466Ground Warn Lvl 467Predictive Main PredMaint Status 469PredMaintAmbTemp 470PredMaint Rst En 471PredMaint Reset 472Actv SpTqPs Mode 313SLAT Err Stpt 314SLAT Dwell Time 315Manual Preload 331FlyingStart Mode 356DC Brake Lvl Sel 393DC Brake Level 394DC Brake Time 395Mtr OL Reset Lvl 415MtrOL Reset Time 416Motor Power Lmt 427 Shear Pin Cfg 434Shear Pin 1 Actn 435Shear Pin1 Level 436Shear Pin 1 Time 437Shear Pin 2 Actn 438Shear Pin2 Level 439Shear Pin 2 Time 440HSFan Derate 488HSFan TotalLife 489HSFan ElpsdLife 490HSFan RemainLife 491HSFan EventLevel 492HSFan EventActn 493HSFan ResetLog 494InFan Derate 495InFan TotalLife 496InFan ElpsdLife 497InFan RemainLife 498InFan EventLevel 499InFan EventActn 500InFan ResetLog 501Pwr Loss Mode B 453Pwr Loss B Level 454Pwr Loss B Time 455MtrBrngTotalLife 502MtrBrngElpsdLife 503MtrBrngRemainLif 504MtrBrngEventLvl 505MtrBrngEventActn 506MtrBrng ResetLog 507MtrLubeElpsdHrs 508MtrLubeEventLvl 509MtrLubeEventActn 510Prchrg Control 321Prchrg Delay 322Prchrg Err Cfg 323Brake Off Adj 1 402Brake Off Adj 2 403Dec Inhibit Actn 409Mtr OL Counts 418Mtr OL Trip Time 419Load Loss Action 441Load Loss Level 442Load Loss Time 443OutPhaseLossActn 444Out PhaseLossLvl 445UnderVltg Action 460UnderVltg Level 461InPhase LossActn 462InPhase Loss Lvl 463DC Bus Mem Reset 464MchBrngTotalLife 511MchBrngElpsdLife 512MchBrngRemainLif 513MchBrngEventLvl 514MchBrngEventActn 515MchBrngResetLog 516MchLubeElpsdHrs 517MchLube EventLvl 518MchLubeEventActn 519PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-7File Group ParametersSpeed Control Speed Limits Max Fwd Speed 520Max Rev Speed 521Speed ControlSpeed Ramp Rates Accel Time 1 535Accel Time 2 536Speed Reference Spd Ref A Sel 545Spd Ref A Stpt 546Spd Ref A AnlgHi 547Spd Ref A AnlgLo 548Spd Ref A Mult 549Spd Ref B Sel 550Spd Ref B Stpt 551Spd Ref B AnlgHi 552Spd Ref B AnlgLo 553Spd Ref B Mult 554Speed Trim Trim Ref A Sel 600Trim Ref A Stpt 601Trim RefA AnlgHi 602Trim RefA AnlgLo 603Slip/Droop Comp Droop RPM at FLA 620Slip RPM at FLA 621Slip Comp BW 622Speed Regulator Spd Options Ctrl 635Speed Reg BW 636Filtered SpdFdbk 640Speed Error 641Speed Comp Speed Comp Sel 665Speed Comp Gain 666Speed Comp Out 667Torque Control Torque Limits Pos Torque Limit 670Neg Torque Limit 671Torque Reference Trq Ref A Sel 675Trq Ref A Stpt 676Trq Ref A AnlgHi 677Trq Ref A AnlgLo 678Trq Ref A Mult 679Torque ControlMin Fwd Speed 522Min Rev Speed 523Decel Time 1 537Decel Time 2 538Spd Ref Scale 555Jog Speed 1 556Jog Speed 2 557MOP Reference 558Save MOP Ref 559MOP Rate 560MOP High Limit 561MOP Low Limit 562DI ManRef Sel 563DI ManRef AnlgHi 564DI ManRef AnlgLo 565Trim Ref B Sel 604Trim Ref B Stpt 605Trim RefB AnlgHi 606Trim RefB AnlgLo 607Speed Reg Kp 645Speed Reg Max Kp 646Speed Reg Ki 647Trq Ref B Sel 680Trq Ref B Stpt 681Trq Ref B AnlgHi 682Trq Ref B AnlgLo 683Trq Ref B Mult 684Inertia Comp 755 Inertia CompMode 695 Inertia Acc Gain 696Inertia Dec Gain 697Friction Comp 755 InAdp LdObs Mode 704Inertia Adapt BW 705InertiaAdaptGain 706Load Estimate 707InertiaTrqAdd 708Overspeed Limit 524Zero Speed Limit 525Skip Speed 1 526Skip Speed 2 527Skip Speed 3 528Skip Speed Band 529Jog Acc Dec Time 539 S Curve Accel 540S Curve Decel 541Preset Speed 1 571Preset Speed 2 572Preset Speed 3 573Preset Speed 4 574Preset Speed 5 575Preset Speed 6 576Preset Speed 7 577TrmPct RefA Sel 608TrmPct RefA Stpt 609TrmPct RefA AnHi 610TrmPct RefA AnLo 611Spd Loop Damping 653Spd Reg Int Out 654Spd Reg Pos Lmt 655Spd Reg Neg Lmt 656SReg Output 660TrmPct RefB Sel 612TrmPct RefB Stpt 613TrmPct RefB AnHi 614TrmPct RefB AnLo 615VHzSV Spd Reg Kp 663VHzSV Spd Reg Ki 664Selected Trq Ref 685 Torque Step 686Filtered Trq Ref 689Limited Trq Ref 690Inert Comp LPFBW 698Inertia Comp Out 699IA LdObs Delay 709InertAdptFltrBW 710Ext Ramped Ref 700Load Observer BW 711PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-8 Programming and ParametersFile Group ParametersPosition Control Position Cfg/Sts PTP PsnRefStatus 720Position Control 721Position Homing Homing Status 730Homing Control 731Position ControlPosition Watch 755 PsnWatch1 Select 745PsnWatch1 DtctIn 746PsnWatch1 Stpt 747Psn Selected Ref 722Psn Command 723DI Find Home 732DI Redefine Psn 733DI OL Home Limit 734PsnWatch2 Select 748PsnWatch2 DtctIn 749PsnWatch2 Stpt 750Direct Psn Ref Select 765 Psn Direct Stpt 766Psn Direct Ref 767Point to Point PTP Control 770PTP Mode 771DI Indx Step 772DI Indx StepRev 773DI Indx StepPrst 774Phase Lock Loop 755 PLL Control 795PLL Ext Spd Sel 796PLL Ext Spd Stpt 797PLL Ext SpdScale 798PTP Ref Sel 775PTP Reference 776PTP Feedback 777PTP Ref Scale 778PTP Index Preset 779PLL Psn Ref Sel 799PLL Psn Stpt 800PLL BW 801PLL LPFilter BW 802PLL Virt Enc RPM 803Electronic Gear Psn Ref EGR Out 815 Psn EGR Mult 816Psn EGR Div 817Position Offset Psn Offset 1 Sel 820Psn Offset 1 821Psn Offset 2 Sel 822Psn Offset 2 823Ld Psn Fdbk Scal 755 LdPsn Fdbk Mult 825 LdPsn Fdbk Div 826Position Reg Psn Error 835Psn Actual 836Psn Load Actual 755 837Psn Reg Ki 838Psn Reg Kp 839Communication Comm Control Port 1 Reference 871 Port 4 Reference 874Port 2 Reference 872 Port 5 Reference 875Port 3 Reference 873 Port 6 Reference 876CommunicationSecurity Port Mask Act 885Logic Mask Act 886DPI Datalinks Data In A1 895Data In A2 896Data In B1 897Data In B2 898Owners Stop Owner 919Start Owner 920Diagnostics Status Speed Ref Source 930Last StartSource 931Last Stop Source 932Start Inhibits 933Last StrtInhibit 934DiagnosticsFault/Alarm Info Minor Flt Cfg 950Last Fault Code 951Fault Status A 952Fault Status B 953Peak Detection 755 PkDtct Stpt Real 1035PkDtct Stpt Dint 1036PkDtct1 In Sel 1037Write Mask Act 887Write Mask Cfg 888Data In C1 899Data In C2 900Data In D1 901Data In D2 902Jog Owner 921Dir Owner 922Drive Status 1 935Drive Status 2 936Condition Sts 1 937Drive OL Count 940Status1 at Fault 954Status2 at Fault 955Fault Frequency 956Fault Amps 957Fault Bus Volts 958PkDtct1PresetSel 1038Peak1 Cfg 1039Peak 1 Change 1040Psn Reg Status 724Zero Position 725Find Home Speed 735Find Home Ramp 736PTP Setpoint 780PTP Accel Time 781PTP Decel Time 782PTP Speed FwdRef 783PTP Command 784PLL EPR Input 804PLL Rvls Input 805PLL Psn Out Fltr 806PLL Speed Out 807PLL Speed OutAdv 808Psn Offset Vel 824PReg Pos Int Lmt 840PReg Neg Int Lmt 841PsnReg IntgrlOut 842PsnReg Spd Out 843Port13 Reference 755 877Port14 Reference 878Data Out A1 905Data Out A2 906Data Out B1 907Data Out B2 908Clear Flt Owner 923Manual Owner 924IGBT Temp Pct 941IGBT Temp C 942Drive Temp Pct 943Drive Temp C 944Alarm Status A 959Alarm Status B 960Type 2 Alarms 961PeakDetect1 Out 1041PkDtct2 In Sel 1042PkDtct2PresetSel 1043In Pos Psn Band 726In Pos Psn Dwell 727Actual Home Psn 737User Home Psn 738PTP Fwd Vel Lmt 785PTP Rev Vel Lmt 786PTP S Curve 787PTP Vel Override 788PTP EGR Mult 789PTP EGR Div 790PLL Enc Out 809PLL Enc Out Adv 810PLL EPR Output 811PLL Rvls Output 812PReg Pos Spd Lmt 844PReg Neg Spd Lmt 845Psn Reg Droop 846Psn Fdbk 847Drive Logic Rslt 879DPI Ref Rslt 880DPI Ramp Rslt 881DPI Logic Rslt 882Drive Ref Rslt 753 883Drive Ramp Rslt 753 884Data Out C1 909Data Out C2 910Data Out D1 911Data Out D2 912Ref Select Owner 925At Limit Status 945Safety Port Sts 946AlarmA at Fault 962AlarmB at Fault 963Peak2 Cfg 1044Peak 2 Change 1045PeakDetect2 Out 1046PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-9File Group ParametersApplications Process PID PID Cfg 1065PID Control 1066PID Ref Sel 1067PID Ref AnlgHi 1068PID Ref AnlgLo 1069PID Setpoint 1070PID Ref Mult 1071ApplicationsTorque Prove 755 Trq Prove Cfg 1100Trq Prove Setup 1101DI FloatMicroPsn 1102Trq Prove Status 1103Fibers Function 753 Fiber Control 1120Fiber Status 1121Sync Time 1122Adjustable Vltg 753 Adj Vltg Config 1131Adj Vltg Select 1133Adj Vltg Ref Hi 1134Adj Vltg Ref Lo 1135Pump Jack 753 Rod Speed 1165Rod Torque 1166Rod Speed Cmd 1167Pump Off 753 Pump Off Config 1187Pump Off Setup 1188Pump Off Action 1189Pump Off Control 1190Pump Off Status 1191Profiling 755 Profile Status 1210Units Traveled 1212Profile Command 1213Counts Per Unit 1215ProfVel Override 1216Prof DI Invert 1217DI Hold Step 1218DI Abort Step 1219DI Abort Profile 1220Camming 755 PCAM Control 1390PCAM Mode 1391PCAM Psn Select 1392PCAM Psn Stpt 1393PCAM Psn Ofst 1394PCAM PsnOfst Eps 1395PID Fdbk Sel 1072PID Fdbk AnlgHi 1073PID Fdbk AnlgLo 1074PID FBLoss SpSel 1075PID FBLoss TqSel 1076PID Fdbk 1077PID Fdbk Mult 1078Trq Lmt SlewRate 1104Speed Dev Band 1105SpdBand Intgrtr 1106Traverse Inc 1123Traverse Dec 1124Max Traverse 1125Adj Vltg TrimSel 1136Adj Vltg Trim Hi 1137Adj Vltg Trim Lo 1138Adj Vltg Command 1139Adj Vltg AccTime 1140Adj Vltg DecTime 1141TorqAlarm Action 1168TorqAlarm Config 1169TorqAlarm Dwell 1170TorqAlarm Level 1171TorqAlm Timeout 1172TorqAlarm TOActn 1173Pump Cycle Store 1192Set Top ofStroke 1193Torque Setpoint 1194Pump Off Level 1195Pump Off Speed 1196Pump Off Time 1197DI Vel Override 1221DI StrtStep Sel0 1222DI StrtStep Sel1 1223DI StrtStep Sel2 1224DI StrtStep Sel3 1225DI StrtStep Sel4 1226PCAM Span X 1396PCAM Scale X 1397PCAM Span Y 1398PCAM ScaleY Sel 1399PCAM ScaleYSetPt 1400PCAM VelScaleSel 1401PCAM VelScaleSP 1402PCAM Slope Begin 1403PCAM Slope End 1404PCAM Main EndPnt 1405PCAM Main Types 1406PID Output Sel 1079PID Output Mult 1080PID Upper Limit 1081PID Lower Limit 1082PID Deadband 1083PID LP Filter BW 1084PID Preload 1085Brk Release Time 1107Brk Set Time 1108Brk Alarm Travel 1109Brk Slip Count 1110PID Prop Gain 1086PID Int Time 1087PID Deriv Time 1088PID Status 1089PID Ref Meter 1090PID Fdbk Meter 1091PID Error Meter 1092PID Output Meter 1093Float Tolerance 1111MicroPsnScalePct 1112ZeroSpdFloatTime 1113P Jump 1126 DI Fiber SyncEna 1129DI Fiber TravDis 1130Adj Vltg Preset1 1142Adj Vltg Preset2 1143Adj Vltg Preset3 1144Adj Vltg Preset4 1145Adj Vltg Preset5 1146Adj Vltg Preset6 1147Adj Vltg Preset7 1148Total Gear Ratio 1174Max Rod Speed 1175Max Rod Torque 1176Min Rod Speed 1177Motor Sheave 1178OilWell Pump Cfg 1179PCP Pump Sheave 1180Pct Cycle Torque 1198Pct Lift Torque 1199Pct Drop Torque 1200Stroke Pos Count 1201Stroke Per Min 1202Adj Vltg RefMult 1149Adj Vltg Scurve 1150Adj Vltg TrimPct 1151Min Adj Voltage 1152Gearbox Limit 1181Gearbox Rating 1182Gearbox Ratio 1183Gearbox Sheave 1184Pump Off Count 1203PumpOff SleepCnt 1204Day Stroke Count 1205DI PumpOff Disbl 1206Pump OffSleepLvl 1207Step 1…16 Type 1230, 1240, 1250…1380Step 1…16 Velocity 1231, 1241, 1251…1381Step 1…16 Accel 1232, 1242, 1252…1382Step 1…16 Decel 1233, 1243, 1253…1383Step 1…16 Value 1234, 1244, 1254…1384Step 1…16 Dwell 1235, 1245, 1255…1385Step 1…16 Batch 1236, 1246, 1256…1386Step 1…16 Next 1237, 1247, 1257…1387Step 1…16 Action 1238, 1248, 1258…1388Step 1…16 Dig In 1239, 1249, 1259…1389PCAM Main Pt X 0…151407, 1409, 1411…1437PCAM Main Pt Y 0…151408, 1410, 1412…1438PCAM Aux EndPnt 1439PCAM Aux Types 1440PCAM Aux Pt X 1…151441, 1443, 1445…1469PCAM Aux Pt Y 1…151442, 1444, 1446…1470PCAM Status 1471PCAM Vel Out 1472PCAM Psn Out 1473DI PCAM Start 1474PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-10 Programming and ParametersExpert Parameter ViewParameter 301 [Access Level] set to option 2 “Expert.”File Group ParametersMonitor Metering Output Frequency 1 Torque Cur Fdbk 5 Output Power 9Commanded SpdRef 2 Flux Cur Fdbk 6 Output Powr Fctr 10Mtr Vel Fdbk 3 Output Current 7 DC Bus Volts 11Commanded Trq 4 Output Voltage 8 DC Bus Memory 12Drive Data Rated Volts 20 Rated Amps 21 Rated kW 22MonitorElapsed MWH 13Elapsed kWH 14Elapsed Run Time 15Motor Control Motor Data Motor NP Volts 25Motor NP Amps 26Mtr Ctrl Options Motor Ctrl Mode 35Maximum Voltage 36Maximum Freq 37PWM Frequency 38Mtr Options Cfg 40Motor ControlVolts per Hertz Start Acc Boost 60Run Boost 61Autotune Autotune 70Autotune Torque 71IR Voltage Drop 73Ixo Voltage Drop 74Flux Current Ref 75Vector Regulator VCL Cur Reg BW 95VCL Cur Reg Kp 96VCL Cur Reg Ki 97VEncdls FReg Kp 98VEncdls FReg Ki 99Slip Reg Enable 100Feedback & I/O Feedback Pri Vel Fdbk Sel 125Pri Vel FdbkFltr 126Pri Vel Feedback 127Alt Vel Fdbk Sel 128Alt Vel FdbkFltr 129Digin Functions Digital In Cfg 150DI Enable 155DI Clear Fault 156DI Aux Fault 157DI Stop 158DI Cur Lmt Stop 159DI Coast Stop 160DI Start 161DI Fwd Reverse 162DI Run 163DI Run Forward 164DI Run Reverse 165Feedback and IOMotor NP Hertz 27Motor NP RPM 28Bus Utilization 42Flux Up Enable 43Flux Up Time 44Flux Down Ki 45Flux Down Kp 46Break Voltage 62Break Frequency 63Total Inertia 76Inertia Test Lmt 77Encdrlss AngComp 78Encdrlss VltComp 79PM Cfg 755 80Slip Reg Ki 101Slip Reg Kp 102Flux Reg Enable 103Flux Reg Ki 104Flux Reg Kp 105Trq Adapt Speed 106Alt Vel Feedback 130Active Vel Fdbk 131Aux Vel Fdbk Sel 132Aux Vel FdbkFltr 133Aux Vel Feedback 134DI Jog 1 166DI Jog 1 Forward 167DI Jog 1 Reverse 168DI Jog 2 169DI Jog 2 Forward 170DI Jog 2 Reverse 171DI Manual Ctrl 172DI Speed Sel 0 173DI Speed Sel 1 174DI Speed Sel 2 175DI MOP Inc 177DI MOP Dec 178Mtr NP Pwr Units 29Motor NP Power 30Econ At Ref Ki 47Econ AccDec Ki 48Econ AccDec Kp 49Stability Filter 50SVC Boost Filter 64VHz Curve 65PM PriEnc Offset 755 81PM AltEnc Offset 755 82PM OfstTst Cur 755 83PM OfstTst CRamp 755 84PM OfstTst FRamp 755 85PM CEMF Voltage 755 86Trq Adapt En 107Phase Delay Comp 108Trq Comp Mode 109Trq Comp Mtring 110Trq Comp Regen 111Slip Adapt Iqs 112Mtr Psn Fdbk Sel 135Load Psn FdbkSel 755 136Open Loop Fdbk 137Simulator Fdbk 138DI Accel 2 179DI Decel 2 180DI SpTqPs Sel 0 181DI SpTqPs Sel 1 182DI Stop Mode B 185DI BusReg Mode B 186DI PwrLoss ModeB 187DI Pwr Loss 188DI Precharge 189DI Prchrg Seal 190DI PID Enable 191DI PID Hold 192Digital Inputs Digital In Sts 220 Dig In Filt Mask 753 222 Dig In Filt 753 223Digital Outputs 753 Dig Out Sts 225Dig Out Invert 226Dig Out Setpoint 227RO0 Sel 230RO0 Level Sel 231RO0 Level 232RO0 Level CmpSts 233RO0 On Time 234RO0 Off Time 235Motor PTC 753 PTC Cfg 250 PTC Status 251Analog Inputs 753 Anlg In Type 255Anlg In Sqrt 256Anlg In Loss Sts 257Analog Outputs 753 Anlg Out Type 270Anlg Out Abs 271R0 Predict Main 753 RO PredMaint Sts 285RO0 Load Type 286Anlg In0 Value 260Anlg In0 Hi 261Anlg In0 Lo 262Anlg Out0 Sel 275Anlg Out0 Stpt 276RO0 Load Amps 287RO0 TotalLife 288TO0 Sel 240TO0 Level Sel 241TO0 Level 242TO0 Level CmpSts 243TO0 On Time 244TO0 Off Time 245Anlg In0 LssActn 263Anlg In0 Raw Val 264Anlg Out0 Data 277Anlg Out0 DataHi 278Anlg Out0 DataLo 279RO0 ElapsedLife 289RO0 RemainLife 290Motor Poles 31Stab Volt Gain 51Stab Angle Gain 52PM IR Voltage 755 87PM IXq Voltage 755 88PM IXd Voltage 755 89PM Vqs Reg Kp 755 91PM Vqs Reg Ki 755 92PM Dir Test Cur 755 93SFAdapt SlewLmt 113SFAdapt SlewRate 114SFAdapt CnvrgLvl 115SFAdapt CnvrgLmt 116Delayed Spd Ref 755 139Virtual EncDelay 755 140Virtual Enc EPR 755 141Virtual Enc Psn 755 142DI PID Reset 193DI PID Invert 194DI Torque StptA 195DI Fwd End Limit 196DI Fwd Dec Limit 197DI Rev End Limit 198DI Rev Dec Limit 199DI PHdwr OvrTrvl 200DI NHdwr OvrTrvl 201Anlg In0 Filt Gn 265Anlg In0 Filt BW 266Anlg Out0 Hi 280Anlg Out0 Lo 281Anlg Out0 Val 282RO0 LifeEvntLvl 291RO0 LifeEvntActn 292PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-11File Group ParametersDrive Cfg Preferences Speed Units 300Access Level 301Language 302Control Cfg Voltage Class 305Duty Rating 306Direction Mode 308Drive ConfigAuto Manual Ctrl Logic Mask 324Auto Mask 325Manual Cmd Mask 326Manual Ref Mask 327Drive Memory Reset Meters 336Start Features Start At PowerUp 345PowerUp Delay 346Auto Retry Fault 347Auto Rstrt Tries 348Auto Rstrt Delay 349Braking Features Stop Mode A 370Stop Mode B 371Bus Reg Mode A 372Bus Reg Mode B 373Bus Reg Lvl Cfg 374Bus Reg Level 375Bus Limit Kp 376Bus Limit Kd 377Bus Limit ACR Ki 378Bus Limit ACR Kp 379Protection Motor Overload Motor OL Actn 410Mtr OL at Pwr Up 411Mtr OL Alarm Lvl 412Load Limits Drive OL Mode 420Current Lmt Sel 421Current Limit 1 422Current Limit 2 423Active Cur Lmt 424Current Rate Lmt 425Regen Power Lmt 426ProtectionPower Loss Power Loss Actn 449Pwr Loss Mode A 450Pwr Loss A Level 451Pwr Loss A Time 452Ground Fault Ground Warn Actn 466Ground Warn Lvl 467Predictive Main PredMaint Status 469PredMaintAmbTemp 470PredMaint Rst En 471PredMaint Reset 472SpdTrqPsn Mode A 309SpdTrqPsn Mode B 310SpdTrqPsn Mode C 311SpdTrqPsn Mode D 312Alt Man Ref Sel 328Alt Man Ref AnHi 329Alt Man Ref AnLo 330Sleep Wake Mode 350SleepWake RefSel 351Sleep Level 352Sleep Time 353Wake Level 354Wake Time 355Bus Reg Ki 380Bus Reg Kp 381DB Resistor Type 382DB Ext Ohms 383DB Ext Watts 384DB ExtPulseWatts 385Flux Braking En 388Flux Braking Lmt 389Mtr OL Factor 413Mtr OL Hertz 414Motor Power Lmt 427Current Limit Kd 428Current Limit Ki 429Current Limit Kp 430Id Lo FreqCur Kp 431Iq Lo FreqCur Kp 432Jerk Gain 433Pwr Loss Mode B 453Pwr Loss B Level 454Pwr Loss B Time 455HSFan Derate 488HSFan TotalLife 489HSFan ElpsdLife 490HSFan RemainLife 491HSFan EventLevel 492HSFan EventActn 493HSFan ResetLog 494InFan Derate 495InFan TotalLife 496InFan ElpsdLife 497InFan RemainLife 498InFan EventLevel 499InFan EventActn 500InFan ResetLog 501Actv SpTqPs Mode 313SLAT Err Stpt 314SLAT Dwell Time 315Manual Preload 331FlyingStart Mode 356FS Gain 357FS Ki 358FS Speed Reg Ki 359FS Speed Reg Kp 360Flux Braking Ki 390Flux Braking Kp 391DC Brake Lvl Sel 393DC Brake Level 394DC Brake Time 395DC Brake Ki 396DC Brake Kp 397Mtr OL Reset Lvl 415MtrOL Reset Time 416Shear Pin Cfg 434Shear Pin 1 Actn 435Shear Pin1 Level 436Shear Pin 1 Time 437Shear Pin 2 Actn 438Shear Pin2 Level 439Shear Pin 2 Time 440PwrLoss RT BusKp 456PwrLoss RT BusKd 457PwrLoss RT ACRKp 458PwrLoss RT ACRKi 459MtrBrngTotalLife 502MtrBrngElpsdLife 503MtrBrngRemainLif 504MtrBrngEventLvl 505MtrBrngEventActn 506MtrBrng ResetLog 507MtrLubeElpsdHrs 508MtrLubeEventLvl 509MtrLubeEventActn 510Prchrg Control 321Prchrg Delay 322Prchrg Err Cfg 323FS Excitation Ki 361FS Excitation Kp 362FS Reconnect Dly 363FS Msrmnt CurLvl 364DC Brk Vq Fltr 398DC Brk Vd Fltr 399Fast Braking Ki 755 400Fast Braking Kp 401Brake Off Adj 1 402Brake Off Adj 2 403Dec Inhibit Actn 409Mtr OL Counts 418Mtr OL Trip Time 419Load Loss Action 441Load Loss Level 442Load Loss Time 443OutPhaseLossActn 444Out PhaseLossLvl 445UnderVltg Action 460UnderVltg Level 461InPhase LossActn 462InPhase Loss Lvl 463DC Bus Mem Reset 464MchBrngTotalLife 511MchBrngElpsdLife 512MchBrngRemainLif 513MchBrngEventLvl 514MchBrngEventActn 515MchBrngResetLog 516MchLubeElpsdHrs 517MchLube EventLvl 518MchLubeEventActn 519PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-12 Programming and ParametersFile Group ParametersSpeed Control Speed Limits Max Fwd Speed 520Max Rev Speed 521Speed ControlSpeed Ramp Rates Accel Time 1 535Accel Time 2 536Speed Reference Spd Ref A Sel 545Spd Ref A Stpt 546Spd Ref A AnlgHi 547Spd Ref A AnlgLo 548Spd Ref A Mult 549Spd Ref B Sel 550Spd Ref B Stpt 551Spd Ref B AnlgHi 552Spd Ref B AnlgLo 553Spd Ref B Mult 554Speed Trim Trim Ref A Sel 600Trim Ref A Stpt 601Trim RefA AnlgHi 602Trim RefA AnlgLo 603Slip/Droop Comp Droop RPM at FLA 620Slip RPM at FLA 621Slip Comp BW 622VHzSV SpdTrimReg 623Speed Regulator Spd Options Ctrl 635Speed Reg BW 636SReg FB Fltr Sel 637SReg FB FltrGain 638SReg FB Fltr BW 639Filtered SpdFdbk 640Speed Error 641Servo Lock Gain 755 642SpdReg AntiBckup 643Spd Err Fltr BW 644Speed Comp Speed Comp Sel 665Speed Comp Gain 666Speed Comp Out 667Torque Control Torque Limits Pos Torque Limit 670Neg Torque Limit 671Torque Reference Trq Ref A Sel 675Trq Ref A Stpt 676Trq Ref A AnlgHi 677Trq Ref A AnlgLo 678Trq Ref A Mult 679Torque ControlMin Fwd Speed 522Min Rev Speed 523Decel Time 1 537Decel Time 2 538Spd Ref Scale 555Jog Speed 1 556Jog Speed 2 557MOP Reference 558Save MOP Ref 559MOP Rate 560MOP High Limit 561MOP Low Limit 562DI ManRef Sel 563DI ManRef AnlgHi 564DI ManRef AnlgLo 565Trim Ref B Sel 604Trim Ref B Stpt 605Trim RefB AnlgHi 606Trim RefB AnlgLo 607Speed Reg Kp 645Speed Reg Max Kp 646Speed Reg Ki 647Alt Speed Reg BW 648Alt Speed Reg Kp 649Alt Speed Reg Ki 650AltSpdErr FltrBW 651Trq Ref B Sel 680Trq Ref B Stpt 681Trq Ref B AnlgHi 682Trq Ref B AnlgLo 683Trq Ref B Mult 684Inertia Comp 755 Inertia CompMode 695 Inertia Acc Gain 696Inertia Dec Gain 697Friction Comp 755 InAdp LdObs Mode 704Inertia Adapt BW 705InertiaAdaptGain 706Load Estimate 707InertiaTrqAdd 708Overspeed Limit 524Zero Speed Limit 525Skip Speed 1 526Skip Speed 2 527Skip Speed 3 528Skip Speed Band 529Jog Acc Dec Time 539 S Curve Accel 540S Curve Decel 541Preset Speed 1 571Preset Speed 2 572Preset Speed 3 573Preset Speed 4 574Preset Speed 5 575Preset Speed 6 576Preset Speed 7 577Spd Ref Filter 588Spd Ref Fltr BW 589Spd Ref FltrGain 590Spd Ref Sel Sts 591TrmPct RefA Sel 608TrmPct RefA Stpt 609TrmPct RefA AnHi 610TrmPct RefA AnLo 611SReg Trq Preset 652Spd Loop Damping 653Spd Reg Int Out 654Spd Reg Pos Lmt 655Spd Reg Neg Lmt 656SReg OutFltr Sel 657SReg OutFltrGain 658SReg OutFltr BW 659SReg Output 660Selected Spd Ref 592Limited Spd Ref 593Ramped Spd Ref 594Filtered Spd Ref 595Speed Rate Ref 596Final Speed Ref 597TrmPct RefB Sel 612TrmPct RefB Stpt 613TrmPct RefB AnHi 614TrmPct RefB AnLo 615SpdTrimPrcRefSrc 616Spd Trim Source 617VHzSV Spd Reg Kp 663VHzSV Spd Reg Ki 664Selected Trq Ref 685 Torque Step 686Notch Fltr Freq 687Notch Fltr Atten 688Filtered Trq Ref 689Limited Trq Ref 690Inert Comp LPFBW 698Inertia Comp Out 699IA LdObs Delay 709InertAdptFltrBW 710Ext Ramped Ref 700Load Observer BW 711PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-13File Group ParametersPosition Control Position Cfg/Sts PTP PsnRefStatus 720Position Control 721Position Homing Homing Status 730Homing Control 731Position ControlPosition Watch 755 PsnWatch1 Select 745PsnWatch1 DtctIn 746PsnWatch1 Stpt 747Psn Selected Ref 722Psn Command 723DI Find Home 732DI Redefine Psn 733DI OL Home Limit 734PsnWatch2 Select 748PsnWatch2 DtctIn 749PsnWatch2 Stpt 750Direct Psn Ref Select 765 Psn Direct Stpt 766Psn Direct Ref 767Point to Point PTP Control 770PTP Mode 771DI Indx Step 772DI Indx StepRev 773DI Indx StepPrst 774Phase Lock Loop 755 PLL Control 795PLL Ext Spd Sel 796PLL Ext Spd Stpt 797PLL Ext SpdScale 798PTP Ref Sel 775PTP Reference 776PTP Feedback 777PTP Ref Scale 778PTP Index Preset 779PLL Psn Ref Sel 799PLL Psn Stpt 800PLL BW 801PLL LPFilter BW 802PLL Virt Enc RPM 803Electronic Gear Psn Ref EGR Out 815 Psn EGR Mult 816Psn EGR Div 817Position Offset Psn Offset 1 Sel 820Psn Offset 1 821Psn Offset 2 Sel 822Psn Offset 2 823Ld Psn Fdbk Scal 755 LdPsn Fdbk Mult 825 LdPsn Fdbk Div 826Position Reg PsnNtchFltrFreq 830 Psn Error 835PsnNtchFltrDepth 831 Psn Actual 836Psn Out Fltr Sel 832 Psn Load Actual 755 837Psn Out FltrGain 833 Psn Reg Ki 838Psn Out Fltr BW 834 Psn Reg Kp 839Communication Comm Control Port 1 Reference 871 Port 4 Reference 874Port 2 Reference 872 Port 5 Reference 875Port 3 Reference 873 Port 6 Reference 876CommunicationSecurity Port Mask Act 885Logic Mask Act 886DPI Datalinks Data In A1 895Data In A2 896Data In B1 897Data In B2 898Owners Stop Owner 919Start Owner 920Diagnostics Status Speed Ref Source 930Last StartSource 931Last Stop Source 932Start Inhibits 933Last StrtInhibit 934DiagnosticsFault/Alarm Info Minor Flt Cfg 950Last Fault Code 951Fault Status A 952Fault Status B 953Testpoints Testpoint Sel 1 970Testpoint Fval 1 971Testpoint Lval 1 972Peak Detection 755 PkDtct Stpt Real 1035PkDtct Stpt Dint 1036PkDtct1 In Sel 1037Write Mask Act 887Write Mask Cfg 888Data In C1 899Data In C2 900Data In D1 901Data In D2 902Jog Owner 921Dir Owner 922Drive Status 1 935Drive Status 2 936Condition Sts 1 937Drive OL Count 940Status1 at Fault 954Status2 at Fault 955Fault Frequency 956Fault Amps 957Fault Bus Volts 958Testpoint Sel 2 974Testpoint Fval 2 975Testpoint Lval 2 976PkDtct1PresetSel 1038Peak1 Cfg 1039Peak 1 Change 1040Psn Reg Status 724Zero Position 725Find Home Speed 735Find Home Ramp 736PTP Setpoint 780PTP Accel Time 781PTP Decel Time 782PTP Speed FwdRef 783PTP Command 784PLL EPR Input 804PLL Rvls Input 805PLL Psn Out Fltr 806PLL Speed Out 807PLL Speed OutAdv 808Psn Offset Vel 824PReg Pos Int Lmt 840PReg Neg Int Lmt 841PsnReg IntgrlOut 842PsnReg Spd Out 843Port13 Reference 755 877Port14 Reference 878Data Out A1 905Data Out A2 906Data Out B1 907Data Out B2 908Clear Flt Owner 923Manual Owner 924IGBT Temp Pct 941IGBT Temp C 942Drive Temp Pct 943Drive Temp C 944Alarm Status A 959Alarm Status B 960Type 2 Alarms 961Testpoint Sel 3 978Testpoint Fval 3 979Testpoint Lval 3 980PeakDetect1 Out 1041PkDtct2 In Sel 1042PkDtct2PresetSel 1043In Pos Psn Band 726In Pos Psn Dwell 727Actual Home Psn 737User Home Psn 738PTP Fwd Vel Lmt 785PTP Rev Vel Lmt 786PTP S Curve 787PTP Vel Override 788PTP EGR Mult 789PTP EGR Div 790PLL Enc Out 809PLL Enc Out Adv 810PLL EPR Output 811PLL Rvls Output 812PReg Pos Spd Lmt 844PReg Neg Spd Lmt 845Psn Reg Droop 846Psn Fdbk 847Drive Logic Rslt 879DPI Ref Rslt 880DPI Ramp Rslt 881DPI Logic Rslt 882Drive Ref Rslt 753 883Drive Ramp Rslt 753 884Data Out C1 909Data Out C2 910Data Out D1 911Data Out D2 912Ref Select Owner 925At Limit Status 945Safety Port Sts 946AlarmA at Fault 962AlarmB at Fault 963Testpoint Sel 4 982Testpoint Fval 4 983Testpoint Lval 4 984Peak2 Cfg 1044Peak 2 Change 1045PeakDetect2 Out 1046PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-14 Programming and ParametersFile Group ParametersApplications Process PID PID Cfg 1065PID Control 1066PID Ref Sel 1067PID Ref AnlgHi 1068PID Ref AnlgLo 1069PID Setpoint 1070PID Ref Mult 1071ApplicationsTorque Prove 755 Trq Prove Cfg 1100Trq Prove Setup 1101DI FloatMicroPsn 1102Trq Prove Status 1103Fibers Function 753 Fiber Control 1120Fiber Status 1121Sync Time 1122Adjustable Vltg 753 Adj Vltg Config 1131Adj Vltg Select 1133Adj Vltg Ref Hi 1134Adj Vltg Ref Lo 1135Pump Jack 753 Rod Speed 1165Rod Torque 1166Rod Speed Cmd 1167Pump Off 753 Pump Off Config 1187Pump Off Setup 1188Pump Off Action 1189Pump Off Control 1190Pump Off Status 1191Profiling 755 Profile Status 1210Units Traveled 1212Profile Command 1213Counts Per Unit 1215ProfVel Override 1216Prof DI Invert 1217DI Hold Step 1218DI Abort Step 1219DI Abort Profile 1220Camming 755 PCAM Control 1390PCAM Mode 1391PCAM Psn Select 1392PCAM Psn Stpt 1393PCAM Psn Ofst 1394PCAM PsnOfst Eps 1395PID Fdbk Sel 1072PID Fdbk AnlgHi 1073PID Fdbk AnlgLo 1074PID FBLoss SpSel 1075PID FBLoss TqSel 1076PID Fdbk 1077PID Fdbk Mult 1078Trq Lmt SlewRate 1104Speed Dev Band 1105SpdBand Intgrtr 1106Traverse Inc 1123Traverse Dec 1124Max Traverse 1125Adj Vltg TrimSel 1136Adj Vltg Trim Hi 1137Adj Vltg Trim Lo 1138Adj Vltg Command 1139Adj Vltg AccTime 1140Adj Vltg DecTime 1141TorqAlarm Action 1168TorqAlarm Config 1169TorqAlarm Dwell 1170TorqAlarm Level 1171TorqAlm Timeout 1172TorqAlarm TOActn 1173Pump Cycle Store 1192Set Top ofStroke 1193Torque Setpoint 1194Pump Off Level 1195Pump Off Speed 1196Pump Off Time 1197DI Vel Override 1221DI StrtStep Sel0 1222DI StrtStep Sel1 1223DI StrtStep Sel2 1224DI StrtStep Sel3 1225DI StrtStep Sel4 1226PCAM Span X 1396PCAM Scale X 1397PCAM Span Y 1398PCAM ScaleY Sel 1399PCAM ScaleYSetPt 1400PCAM VelScaleSel 1401PCAM VelScaleSP 1402PCAM Slope Begin 1403PCAM Slope End 1404PCAM Main EndPnt 1405PCAM Main Types 1406PID Output Sel 1079PID Output Mult 1080PID Upper Limit 1081PID Lower Limit 1082PID Deadband 1083PID LP Filter BW 1084PID Preload 1085Brk Release Time 1107Brk Set Time 1108Brk Alarm Travel 1109Brk Slip Count 1110PID Prop Gain 1086PID Int Time 1087PID Deriv Time 1088PID Status 1089PID Ref Meter 1090PID Fdbk Meter 1091PID Error Meter 1092PID Output Meter 1093Float Tolerance 1111MicroPsnScalePct 1112ZeroSpdFloatTime 1113P Jump 1126 DI Fiber SyncEna 1129DI Fiber TravDis 1130Adj Vltg Preset1 1142Adj Vltg Preset2 1143Adj Vltg Preset3 1144Adj Vltg Preset4 1145Adj Vltg Preset5 1146Adj Vltg Preset6 1147Adj Vltg Preset7 1148Total Gear Ratio 1174Max Rod Speed 1175Max Rod Torque 1176Min Rod Speed 1177Motor Sheave 1178OilWell Pump Cfg 1179PCP Pump Sheave 1180Pct Cycle Torque 1198Pct Lift Torque 1199Pct Drop Torque 1200Stroke Pos Count 1201Stroke Per Min 1202Adj Vltg RefMult 1149Adj Vltg Scurve 1150Adj Vltg TrimPct 1151Min Adj Voltage 1152Gearbox Limit 1181Gearbox Rating 1182Gearbox Ratio 1183Gearbox Sheave 1184Pump Off Count 1203PumpOff SleepCnt 1204Day Stroke Count 1205DI PumpOff Disbl 1206Pump OffSleepLvl 1207Step 1…16 Type 1230, 1240, 1250…1380Step 1…16 Velocity 1231, 1241, 1251…1381Step 1…16 Accel 1232, 1242, 1252…1382Step 1…16 Decel 1233, 1243, 1253…1383Step 1…16 Value 1234, 1244, 1254…1384Step 1…16 Dwell 1235, 1245, 1255…1385Step 1…16 Batch 1236, 1246, 1256…1386Step 1…16 Next 1237, 1247, 1257…1387Step 1…16 Action 1238, 1248, 1258…1388Step 1…16 Dig In 1239, 1249, 1259…1389PCAM Main Pt X 0…151407, 1409, 1411…1437PCAM Main Pt Y 0…151408, 1410, 1412…1438PCAM Aux EndPnt 1439PCAM Aux Types 1440PCAM Aux Pt X 1…151441, 1443, 1445…1469PCAM Aux Pt Y 1…151442, 1444, 1446…1470PCAM Status 1471PCAM Vel Out 1472PCAM Psn Out 1473DI PCAM Start 1474PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-15How Option ModuleParameters are OrganizedOption module parameters are only available when that option is installed ina host drive. To view and edit option module parameters, select the portnumber of the device you want to access. See Select A Device on page D-5for instructions.I/O ModulesParameter descriptions begin on page 3-137.File Group ParametersHost Groups Digital Inputs Dig In Sts 1 Dig In Filt Mask 2 Dig In Filt 3Host GroupsDigital Outputs Dig Out Sts 5Dig Out Invert 6Dig Out Setpoint 7RO0 Sel 10RO0 Level Sel 11RO0 Level 12RO0 Level CmpSts 13RO0 On Time 14RO0 Off Time 15RO1 Sel 20TO0 Sel 20RO1 Level Sel 21RO1 Level 22RO1 Level CmpSts 23RO1 On Time 24RO1 Off Time 25Motor PTC PTC Cfg 40 PTC Sts 41 PTC Raw Value 42Analog Inputs Anlg In Type 45Anlg In Sqrt 46Anlg In Loss Sts 47Analog Outpts Anlg Out Type 70Anlg Out Abs 71Anlg In0 Value 50Anlg In0 Hi 51Anlg In0 Lo 52Anlg In0 LssActn 53Anlg In0 Raw Val 54Anlg In0 Filt Gn 55Anlg In0 Filt BW 56Anlg Out0 Sel 75Anlg Out0 Stpt 76Anlg Out0 Data 77Anlg Out0 DataHi 78Anlg Out0 DataLo 79Anlg Out0 Hi 80Anlg Out0 Lo 81Anlg Out0 Val 82Predictive Main PredMaint Sts 99 RO0 Load Type 100RO0 Load Amps 101RO0 TotalLife 102RO0 ElapsedLife 103RO0 RemainLife 104RO0 LifeEvntLvl 105RO0 LifeEvntActn 106Anlg In1 Value 60Anlg In1 Hi 61Anlg In1 Lo 62Anlg In1 LssActn 63Anlg In1 Raw Val 64Anlg In1 Filt Gn 65Anlg In1 Filt BW 66Anlg Out1 Sel 85Anlg Out1 Stpt 86Anlg Out1 Data 87Anlg Out1 DataHi 88Anlg Out1 DataLo 89Anlg Out1 Hi 90Anlg Out1 Lo 91Anlg Out1 Val 92RO1 Load Type 110RO1 Load Amps 111RO1 TotalLife 112RO1 ElapsedLife 113RO1 RemainLife 114RO1 LifeEvntLvl 115RO1 LifeEvntActn 116TO1 Sel 30TO1 Level Sel 31TO1 Level 32TO1 Level CmpSts 33TO1 On Time 34TO1 Off Time 35PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-16 Programming and ParametersFile Group ParametersHost Groups Security Password 1Lock State 5Operating Mode 6Host GroupsGeneral Cascaded Config 20Safety Mode 21Safe Speed Monitor ModuleParameter descriptions begin on page 3-148.Reset Defaults 7Signature ID 10New Password 13Reset Type 22OverSpd Response 24Feedback Fbk Mode 27 Fbk 1 Type 28Fbk 1 Units 29Fbk 1 Polarity 30Fdk 1 Resolution 31Fbk 1 Volt Mon 32Fbk 1 Speed 33Stop Safe Stop Input 44Safe Stop Type 45Limited Speed Lim Speed Input 52LimSpd Mon Delay 53Stop Mon Delay 46Max Stop Time 47Password Command 17Security Code 18Vendor Password 19SS Out Mode 72SLS Out Mode 73Fbk 2 Units 34Fbk 2 Polarity 35Fbk 2 Resolution 36Fbk 2 Volt Mon 37Fbk 2 Speed 38Standstill Speed 48Standstill Pos 49Config Flt Code 70Fbk Speed Ratio 39Fbk Speed Tol 40Fbk Pos Tol 41Direction Mon 42Direction Tol 43Decel Ref Speed 50Stop Decel Tol 51Enable SW Input 54 Safe Speed Limit 55 Speed Hysteresis 56Door Control Door Out Type 57 DM Input 58 Lock Mon Enable 59Lock Mon Input 60Max Speed Max Speed Enable 61Safe Max Speed 62Max Spd Stop Typ 63Max Accel Enable 64Safe Accel Limit 65Max Acc Stop Typ 66Door Out Mode 74Faults Fault Status 67 Guard Status 68 IO Diag Status 69 Config Flt Code 70Single Incremental Encoder ModuleParameter descriptions begin on page 3-159.File Group ParametersHost Groups N/A Encoder Cfg 1Encoder PPR 2Host GroupsFdbk Loss Cfg 3Encoder Feedback 4Encoder Status 5Error Status 6Phase Loss Count 7Quad Loss Count 8Dual Incremental Encoder ModuleParameter descriptions begin on page 3-161.File Group ParametersHost Groups Encoder 0 Enc 0 Cfg 1Enc 0 PPR 2Encoder 1 Enc 1 Cfg 11Enc 1 PPR 12Homing Cfg Homing Cfg 20Module Status Module Sts 21Host GroupsEnc 0 FB Lss Cfg 3Enc 0 FB 4Enc 1 FB Lss Cfg 13Enc 1 FB 14Enc 0 Sts 5Enc 0 Error Sts 6Enc 1 Sts 15Enc 1 Error Sts 16Enc 0 PhsLss Cnt 7Enc 0 QuadLssCnt 8Enc 1 PhsLss Cnt 17Enc 1 QuadLssCnt 18PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-17Universal Feedback ModuleParameter descriptions begin on page 3-166.File Group ParametersHost Groups Module Module Sts 1Module Err Reset 2Feedback 0 FB0 Position 5FB0 Device Sel 6FB0 Identify 7Host GroupsFeedback 1 FB1 Position 35FB1 Device Sel 36FB1 Identify 37Encoder Out Enc Out Sel 80Enc Out Mode 81Registration Rgsn Arm 90Rgsn In 0 Filter 91Rgsn In 1 Filter 92Rgsn HmIn Filter 93Rgsn Sts 94FB0 Cfg 8FB0 Loss Cfg 9FB0 Sts 10FB0 IncAndSC PPR 15FB1 Cfg 38FB1 Loss Cfg 39FB1 Sts 40FB1 IncAndSC PPR 45FB0 Inc Cfg 16FB0 Inc Sts 17FB0 SSI Cfg 20FB0 SSI Resol 21FB1 Inc Cfg 46FB1 Inc Sts 47FB1 SSI Cfg 50FB1 SSI Resol 51Enc Out FD PPR 82 Enc Out Z Offset 83Enc Out Z PPR 84Rgsn Latch1 Cfg 100Rgsn Latch2 Cfg 103Rgsn Latch3 Cfg 106Rgsn Latch4 Cfg 109Rgsn Latch5 Cfg 112Rgsn Latch6 Cfg 115Rgsn Latch7 Cfg 118Rgsn Latch8 Cfg 121Rgsn Latch9 Cfg 124Rgsn Latch10 Cfg 127Rgsn Latch1 Psn 101Rgsn Latch2 Psn 104Rgsn Latch3 Psn 107Rgsn Latch4 Psn 110Rgsn Latch5 Psn 113Rgsn Latch6 Psn 116Rgsn Latch7 Psn 119Rgsn Latch8 Psn 122Rgsn Latch9 Psn 125Rgsn Latch10 Psn 128FB0 SSI Turns 22FB0 Lin CPR 25FB0 Lin Upd Rate 26Fdbk0 LinStahl Sts 27FB1 SSI Turns 52FB1 Lin CPR 55FB1 Lin Upd Rate 56Fdbk1 LinStahl Sts 57Rgsn Latch1 Time 102Rgsn Latch2 Time 105Rgsn Latch3 Time 108Rgsn Latch4 Time 111Rgsn Latch5 Time 114Rgsn Latch6 Time 117Rgsn Latch7 Time 120Rgsn Latch8 Time 123Rgsn Latch9 Time 126Rgsn Latch10 Time 129Embedded EtherNet/IPParameter descriptions begin on page 3-178.File Group ParametersHost Groups N/A DL From Net 01 1DL From Net 02 2DL From Net 03 3DL From Net 04 4DL From Net 05 5DL From Net 06 6DL From Net 07 7DL From Net 08 8DL From Net 09 9DL From Net 10 10DL From Net 11 11DL From Net 12 12DL From Net 13 13DL From Net 14 14DL From Net 15 15DL From Net 16 16DL To Net 01 17DL To Net 02 18DL To Net 03 19DL To Net 04 20DL To Net 05 21DL To Net 06 22DL To Net 07 23DL To Net 08 24DL To Net 09 25DL To Net 10 26DL To Net 11 27DL To Net 12 28DL To Net 13 29DL To Net 14 30DL To Net 15 31DL To Net 16 32Host GroupsPort Number 33DLs From Net Act 34DLs To Net Act 35BOOTP 36Net Addr Src 37IP Addr Cfg 1 38IP Addr Cfg 2 39IP Addr Cfg 3 40IP Addr Cfg 4 41Subnet Cfg 1 42Subnet Cfg 2 43Subnet Cfg 3 44Subnet Cfg 4 45Gateway Cfg 1 46Gateway Cfg 2 47Gateway Cfg 3 48Gateway Cfg 4 49Net Rate Cfg 50Net Rate Act 51Web Enable 52Web Features 53Comm Flt Action 54Idle Flt Action 55Peer Flt Action 56Msg Flt Action 57Flt Cfg Logic 58Flt Cfg Ref 59Flt Cfg DL 01 60Flt Cfg DL 02 61Flt Cfg DL 03 62Flt Cfg DL 04 63Flt Cfg DL 05 64Flt Cfg DL 06 65Flt Cfg DL 07 66Flt Cfg DL 08 67Flt Cfg DL 09 68Flt Cfg DL 10 69Flt Cfg DL 11 70Flt Cfg DL 12 71Flt Cfg DL 13 72Flt Cfg DL 14 73Flt Cfg DL 15 74Flt Cfg DL 16 75DLs Fr Peer Cfg 76DLs Fr Peer Act 77Logic Src Cfg 78Ref Src Cfg 79Fr Peer Timeout 80Fr Peer Addr 1 81Fr Peer Addr 2 82Fr Peer Addr 3 83Fr Peer Addr 4 84Fr Peer Enable 85Fr Peer Status 86DLs To Peer Cfg 87DLs To Peer Act 88To Peer Period 89To Peer Skip 90To Peer Enable 91PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-18 Programming and ParametersEmbedded DeviceLogixParameter descriptions begin on page G-3.File Group ParametersHost Groups Analog Outputs DLX Out 01 1DLX Out 02 2DLX Out 03 3DLX Out 04 4Analog Inputs DLX In 01 17DLX In 02 18DLX In 03 19DLX In 04 20Digital Inputs DLX DIP 01 33DLX DIP 02 34DLX DIP 03 35DLX DIP 04 36Host GroupsDLX Out 05 5DLX Out 06 6DLX Out 07 7DLX Out 08 8DLX In 05 21DLX In 06 22DLX In 07 23DLX In 08 24DLX DIP 05 37DLX DIP 06 38DLX DIP 07 39DLX DIP 08 40Status & Cntl DLX DigIn Sts 49 DLX DigOut Sts 50DLX DigOut Sts2 51Internal Regs DLX Real SP1 54DLX Real SP2 55DLX Real SP3 56DLX Real SP4 57DLX Real SP5 58DLX Real SP6 59DLX Real SP7 60DLX Real SP8 61DLX Real SP9 62DLX Real SP10 63DLX Real SP11 64DLX Real SP12 65DLX Real SP13 66DLX Real SP14 67DLX Real SP15 68DLX Real SP16 69DLX DINT SP1 70DLX DINT SP2 71DLX DINT SP3 72DLX DINT SP4 73DLX DINT SP5 74DLX DINT SP6 75DLX DINT SP7 76DLX DINT SP8 77DLX Bool SP1 78DLX Bool SP2 79DLX Bool SP3 80DLX Bool SP4 81DLX Out 09 9DLX Out 10 10DLX Out 11 11DLX Out 12 12DLX In 09 25DLX In 10 26DLX In 11 27DLX In 12 28DLX DIP 09 41DLX DIP 10 42DLX DIP 11 43DLX DIP 12 44DLX Out 13 13DLX Out 14 14DLX Out 15 15DLX Out 16 16DLX In 13 29DLX In 14 30DLX In 15 31DLX In 16 32DLX DIP 13 45DLX DIP 14 46DLX DIP 15 47DLX DIP 16 48DLX Prog Cond 52 DLX Operation 53DLX Real InSP1 82DLX Real InSP2 83DLX Real InSP3 84DLX Real InSP4 85DLX Real InSP5 86DLX Real InSP6 87DLX Real InSP7 88DLX Real InSP8 89DLX Real OutSP1 90DLX Real OutSP2 91DLX Real OutSP3 92DLX Real OutSP4 93DLX Real OutSP5 94DLX Real OutSP6 95DLX Real OutSP7 96DLX Real OutSP1 97DLX DINT InSP1 98DLX DINT InSP2 99DLX DINT InSP3 100DLX DINT InSP4 101DLX DINT OutSP1 102DLX DINT OutSP2 103DLX DINT OutSP3 104DLX DINT OutSP4 105PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-19Drive Monitor FileFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type1 Output FrequencyOutput FrequencyOutput frequency present at terminals T1, T2, and T3 (U, V & W)Units: HzDefault: 0.00Min/Max: –/+650.00ROReal2 Commanded SpdRefCommanded Speed ReferenceValue of the active Speed/Frequency Reference. Displayed in Hz or RPM,depending on the value of P300 [Speed Units].Units:Default:Min/Max:HzRPM0.00–/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 8–/+P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 8ROReal3 Mtr Vel FdbkMotor Velocity FeedbackEstimated or actual motor speed, with feedback. Displayed in Hz or RPM,depending on the value of P300 [Speed Units].Units:Default:Min/Max:HzRPM0.00–/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 8–/+P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 8ROReal4 Commanded TrqCommanded TorqueFinal torque reference value after limits and filtering are applied. Percent of motorrated torque.Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+800.00ROReal5 Torque Cur FdbkTorque Current FeedbackBased on the motor, the amount of current that is in phase with the fundamentalvoltage component.Units: AmpsDefault: Based on Drive RatingMin/Max: –/+P21 [Rated Amps] x 2ROReal6 Flux Cur FdbkFlux Current FeedbackAmount of current that is out of phase with the fundamental voltage component.Units: AmpsDefault: Based on Drive RatingMin/Max: –/+P21 [Rated Amps] x 2RORealMONITORMetering7 Output CurrentOutput CurrentThe total output current present at terminals T1, T2, and T3 (U, V & W).8 Output VoltageOutput VoltageOutput voltage present at terminals T1, T2, and T3 (U, V & W).Units: AmpsDefault: Based on Drive RatingMin/Max: 0.00 / P21 [Rated Amps] x 2Units: VACDefault: Based on Drive RatingMin/Max: 0.00 / P20 [Rated Volts] x 1.15RORORealReal9 Output PowerOutput PowerOutput power present at terminals T1, T2, and T3 (U, V & W).Units: kWDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00/100.00ROReal10 Output Powr FctrOutput Power FactorOutput power factor.Default: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00/1.00ROReal11 DC Bus VoltsDirect Current Bus VoltsDC bus voltage.Units: VDCDefault: Based on Drive RatingMin/Max: 0.00 / P20 [Rated Volts] x 2ROReal12 DC Bus MemoryDirect Current Bus MemoryA six-minute average of P11 [DC Bus Volts] used to estimate the DC equivalentof the input voltage. Automatically initialized upon power-up, continually updatedduring normal operation, and is used to trigger a power loss condition.Units: VDCDefault: Based on Drive RatingMin/Max: 0.00 / P20 [Rated Volts] x 2ROReal13 Elapsed MWHElapsed Megawatt HourAccumulated output energy of the drive.Units: MWhDefault: 0.000Min/Max: 0.000 / 4294967295.000ROReal14 Elapsed kWHElapsed Kilowatt HourAccumulated output energy of the drive.Units: kWhDefault: 0.000Min/Max: 0.000 / 4294967295.000ROReal15 Elapsed Run TimeElapsed Run TimeAccumulated time drive is outputting power.Units: HrsDefault: 0.000Min/Max: 0.000 / 220000000.000RORealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-20 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type20 Rated VoltsRated VoltageInput voltage class (208, 240, 400 etc.) of the drive.Units: VACDefault: Based on Drive RatingMin/Max: 0.00 / 690.00RORealMONITORDrive Data21 Rated AmpsRated AmperageContinuous current rating of drive.22 Rated kWRated KilowattsContinuous power rating of drive.Units: AmpsDefault: Based on Drive RatingMin/Max: 0.00 / 500.00Units: kWDefault: Based on Drive RatingMin/Max: 0.00 / 400.00RORORealRealDrive Motor Control FileFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type25 Motor NP VoltsMotor Nameplate VoltsRated volts shown on the motor nameplate.Units:Default:Min/Max:VACP20 [Rated Volts] x 0.39130.10 / P20 [Rated Volts] (P305 = 0)0.10 / 1.5 x P20 [Rated Volts] (P305 = 1)RW Real26 Motor NP AmpsMotor Nameplate AmpsRated full load amps shown on the motor nameplate.Units: AmpsDefault: Based on Drive RatingMin/Max: 0.01 / 3200.00RW RealMOTOR CONTROLMotor Data27 Motor NP HertzMotor Nameplate HertzRated frequency shown on the motor nameplate.28 Motor NP RPMMotor Nameplate Revolutions Per MinuteRated RPM shown on the motor nameplate.29 Mtr NP Pwr UnitsMotor Nameplate Power UnitsPower units shown on the motor nameplate.Units: HzDefault: Based on Drive RatingMin/Max: 2.00 / 650.00Units: RPMDefault: Based on Drive RatingMin/Max: 1.0 / 40000.0Default:Options:Based on Drive Rating0 = “HP”1 = “kW”RW RealRW RealRW 32-bitInteger30 Motor NP PowerMotor Nameplate PowerRated power shown on the motor nameplate.Units: HPDefault: Based on Drive RatingMin/Max: 0.01 / 2000.00RW Real31 Motor PolesMotor PolesNumber of poles in the motor.Units: PoleDefault: 4Min/Max: 2 / 100RW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-21FileGroupNameNo. Description35 Motor Ctrl ModeMotor Control ModeMotor type and motor control mode.ValuesRead-WriteData TypeDefault:Options:1 = “Induction SV”0 = “InductionVHz”1 = “Induction SV”2 = “Induct Econ”3 = “Induction FV”4 = “PM VHz”5 = “PM SV”6 = “PM FV”7 = “SyncRel VHz”8 = “SyncRel SV”9 = “Adj Voltage”RW 32-bitInteger36 Maximum VoltageMaximum VoltageThe highest voltage the drive will output.37 Maximum FreqMaximum FrequencyThe frequency the drive will output at P36 [Maximum Voltage] when a “VHz”mode is selected by P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode]. Refer to diagram for P524[Overspeed Limit].38 PWM FrequencyPulse Width Modulation FrequencyPulse Width Modulated frequency (power transistor switching frequency). Drivederating may occur with increased values.40 Mtr Options CnfgMotor Options ConfigurationConfiguration of motor control-related functions.Units: VACDefault: Based on Drive RatingMin/Max: Based on Drive RatingRW RealUnits: HzDefault: P27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 2 + 10 HzMin/Max: P27 [Motor NP Hertz] + 10 Hz / 420.00RW RealUnits: kHzDefault: Based on Drive RatingMin/Max: Based on Drive RatingRW RealMOTOR CONTROLMtr Ctrl OptionsOptionsJerk SelectReservedReservedXsistor DiagElect StabDB WhileStopPWM FreqLockAsyncPWMLockPWM Type SelRS AdaptionReflect WaveMtr Lead RevEnclsTrqProv (1)Trq ModeJogTrq ModeStopZero TrqStopDefault 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition True(1) 755 drives only.Bit 0 “Zero TrqStop” – Configures stopped condition when in torque mode. 0 = wait for zero speed before shutting off drive output, 1 = wait for zerotorque before shutting off drive output.Bit 1 “Trq ModeStop” – Configures stopping behavior when in torque mode. 0 = remain in torque mode, 1 = switch to speed modeBit 2 “Trq ModeJog” – Configures jogging behavior when in torque mode. 0 = remain in torque mode, 1 = switch to speed modeBit 3 “EnclsTrqProv” – Enables encoderless mode when using the torque prove function. 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled. Bits 0 and 1 of P1100 [Trq ProveCfg] must also be set to use this mode.Bit 4 “Mtr Lead Rev” – Reverses the phase rotation of the applied voltage, effectively reversing the motor leads. 0 = Not Reversed, 1 = ReversedBit 5 “Reflect Wave” – Enables reflected wave voltage protection for long motor cables. 0 = Disabled, 1 = EnabledBit 6 “RS Adaption” – Adapts for changes in motor stator resistance due to motor temperature. Active only in FV motor control mode with feedback.0 = Disabled, 1 = EnabledBit 7 “PWM Type Sel” – Configures 3 Phase / 2 Phase switching of the power devices. 0 = 3 Phase modulation with auto switchover to 2 phasemodulation. 1 = Full time 3 phase modulation (no switchover)Bit 8 “AsyncPWMLock” – Configures Synchronous / Asynchronous switching of the power devices. 0 = Automatically changes between synchronousand asynchronous. 1 = Synchronous switching only.Bit 9 “PWM FreqLock” – Configures switching frequency of the power devices while in FV motor control mode without feedback. 0 = switchingfrequency automatically reduces to 2 kHz at low speeds (best performance), 1 = switching frequency does not reduce (setting used when switchingfrequency reduction is undesirable)Bit 10 “DB WhileStop” – Enables operation of the dynamic brake transistor while the drive is stopped. 0 = Disabled, 1 = EnabledBit 11 “Elect Stab” – Enables stability control for Sensorless Vector and V/Hz motor control modes. 0 = Disabled, 1 = EnabledBit 12 “Xsistor Diag” – Enables power transistor diagnostic test at each start command. 0 = Disabled, 1 = EnabledBit 15 “Jerk Select” – Limits the rate of change to the velocity reference for improved current limiting. This setting applies only to Sensorless Vectorand V/Hz motor control modes. 0 = Disabled (0.0 second ramp time achievable), 1 = Enabled (0.0 second ramp time prevented)PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-22 Programming and ParametersFileGroupValuesRead-WriteData TypeNameNo. Description42 Bus UtilizationBus UtilizationThe maximum allowed bus voltage utilization for the Motor Control.Do not change this value without consulting Technical Support. Higher valuesmay result in control instability or over-current faults.Units: %Default: 95.00Min/Max: 85.00 / 100.00RW Real43 Flux Up EnableFlux Up Enable“Manual” (0) – Flux is established for P44 [Flux Up Time] before acceleration.“Automatic” (1) – Flux is established for a calculated time period based on motornameplate data before acceleration. P44 [Flux Up Time] is not used.Default:Options:1 = “Automatic”0 = “Manual”1 = “Automatic”RW 32-bitInteger44 Flux Up TimeFlux Up TimeThe amount of time the drive will use to try to achieve full motor stator flux. Whena Start command is issued, DC current at P26 [Motor NP Amps] level is used tobuild stator flux before accelerating.Units: SecsDefault: 0.0000Min/Max: 0.0000 / 5.0000RW Real45 Flux Down KiFlux Down KiThe integral term used in the voltage regulator which controls the removal of fluxin the motor.Default: 0.20Min/Max: 0.00 / 100.00RW RealMOTOR CONTROLMtr Ctrl Options46 Flux Down KpFlux Down KpThe proportional term used in the voltage regulator which controls the removal offlux in the motor.47 Econ At Ref KiEconomize At Reference KiIntegral gain that determines the response of the output voltage when P35 [MotorCtrl Mode] option 2 “Induct Econ” is selected and the output frequency is at itsreference.Default: 150.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 10000.0Default: 305.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 100000.0RW RealRW Real48 Econ AccDec KiEconomize Acceleration/Deceleration KiIntegral gain that determines the response of the output voltage when P35 [MotorCtrl Mode] option 2 “Induct Econ” is selected and the output frequency is eitheraccelerating or decelerating to a reference.Default: 200.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 100000.0RW Real49 Econ AccDec KpEconomize Acceleration/Deceleration KpProportional gain that determines the response of the output voltage when P35[Motor Ctrl Mode] option 2 “Induct Econ” is selected and the output frequency iseither accelerating or decelerating to a reference.50 Stability FilterStability FilterThe filter time constant for the angle and voltage stability control.51 Stab Volt GainStability Voltage GainThe gain of the voltage stability control function. Not active when any FV motorcontrol mode is selected with speed feedback.Units: V/ADefault: 100.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 1000000.0RW RealUnits: SecsDefault: 5162.22Min/Max: 0.00 / 1000000.00RW RealDefault: 5322.22Min/Max: 0.00 / 10000000.00RW Real52 Stab Angle GainStability Angle GainThe gain of the electrical angle stability control function. Not active when any FVmotor control mode is selected in P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode] with speed feedback.Default: 790.43Min/Max: 0.00 / 10000000.00RW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-23FileGroupNameNo. Description60 Start Acc BoostStart/Acceleration BoostThe voltage boost level for starting and acceleration when a “VHz” mode isselected, according to P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode]. Refer to diagram for P524[Overspeed Limit].ValuesRead-WriteData TypeUnits: VACDefault: Based on Drive RatingMin/Max: 0.00 / Based on Drive RatingRW Real61 Run BoostRun BoostUnits:Default:VACBased on Drive RatingThe boost level for steady state and deceleration when a “VHz” mode is selected, Min/Max: 0.00 / Based on Drive Ratingaccording to P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode]. Refer to diagram for P524 [Overspeed Limit].RW RealMOTOR CONTROLVolts per Hertz62 Break VoltageBreak VoltageThe voltage the drive will output at P63 [Break Frequency] when a “VHz” mode isselected, according to P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode]. Refer to diagram for P524[Overspeed Limit].63 Break FrequencyBreak FrequencyThe frequency the drive will output at P62 [Break Voltage] when a “VHz” mode isselected, according to P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode]. Refer to diagram for P524[Overspeed Limit].Units: VACDefault: Based on Drive RatingMin/Max: 0.00 / P25 [Motor NP Volts] x 1.5Units: HzDefault: P27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 0.25Min/Max: 0.00 / P27 [Motor NP Hertz]RW RealRW Real64 SVC Boost FilterSVC Boost FilterThe voltage boost filter time constant when a “SVC” mode is selected, accordingto P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode].Units: SecsDefault: 0.1000Min/Max: 0.0001 / 1000.0000RW Real65 VHz CurveVHz CurveSelects either a predefined curve (e.g. Fan/Pump), or a custom curve when a“VHz” mode is selected, according to P35 [Motor Cntl Mode]. Refer to diagram forP524 [Overspeed Limit].Default:Options:0 = “Custom V/Hz”0 = “Custom V/Hz”1 = “Fan/Pump”RW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-24 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type70 AutotuneAutotuneProvides a manual or automatic method for setting P73 [IR Voltage Drop], P74[Ixo Voltage Drop] and P75 [Flux Current Ref]. Valid only when parameter P35[Motor Ctrl Mode] is set to 1 “Induction SV”, 2 “Induct Econ”, or 3 “Induction FV”.“Ready” (0) – Parameter returns to this setting following a “Static Tune” or “RotateTune”, at which time another start transition is required to operate the drive innormal mode. It also permits manually setting P73 [IR Voltage Drop], P74 [IxoVoltage Drop] and P75 [Flux Current Ref].“Calculate” (1) – Uses motor nameplate data to automatically set P73 [IR VoltageDrop], P74 [Ixo Voltage Drop], P75 [Flux Current Ref] and P621 [Slip RPM @FLA].“Static Tune” (2) – A temporary command that initiates a non-rotational motorstator resistance test for the best possible automatic setting of P73 [IR VoltageDrop] in all valid modes and a non-rotational motor leakage inductance test forthe best possible automatic setting of P74 [Ixo Voltage Drop] in a Flux Vector (FV)mode. A start command is required following initiation of this setting. Used whenmotor cannot be rotated.“Rotate Tune” (3) – A temporary command that initiates a “Static Tune” followedby a rotational test for the best possible automatic setting of P75 [Flux CurrentRef]. In Flux Vector (FV) mode, with encoder feedback, a test for the bestpossible automatic setting of P621 [Slip RPM @ FLA] is also run. A startcommand is required following initiation of this setting. Important: If using rotatetune for a Sensorless Vector (SV) mode, the motor should be uncoupled from theload or results may not be valid. With a Flux Vector (FV) mode, either a coupledor uncoupled load will produce valid results.Default:Options:1 = “Calculate”0 = “Ready”1 = “Calculate”2 = “Static Tune”3 = “Rotate Tune”4 = “Inertia Tune”RW 32-bitIntegerMOTOR CONTROLAutotune!ATTENTION: Rotation of the motor in an undesireddirection can occur during this procedure. To guard againstpossible injury and/or equipment damage, it is recommendedthat the motor be disconnected from the load beforeproceeding.“Inertia Tune” (4) – A temporary command that initiates an inertia test of themotor/load combination. The motor will ramp up and down while the drivemeasures the amount of inertia.71 Autotune TorqueAutotune TorqueThe motor torque applied to the motor during the flux current and inertia tests.73 IR Voltage DropIR Voltage DropValue of voltage drop across the resistance of the motor stator at rated motorcurrent. Used only when P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode] is set to 1 “Induction SV”, 2“Induct Econ”, or 3 “Induction FV”.Units: %Default: 50.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 200.00RW RealUnits: VACDefault: Based on Drive RatingMin/Max: 0.00 / Based on Drive RatingRW Real74 Ixo Voltage DropIxo Voltage DropValue of voltage drop across the leakage inductance of the motor at rated motorcurrent. Used only when P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode] is set to 1 “Induction SV”, 2“Induct Econ”, or 3 “Induction FV”.Units: VACDefault: P25 [Motor NP Volts] x 0.25Min/Max: 0.00 / P25 [Motor NP Volts]RW Real75 Flux Current RefFlux Current ReferenceValue of amps for full motor flux.76 Total InertiaTotal InertiaTime in seconds for a motor coupled to a load to accelerate from zero to basespeed at rated motor torque. Calculated during auto-tune.77 Inertia Test LmtInertia Test LimitMaximum number of revolutions the motor rotates during the Inertia AutoTunetest. When the value is zero, the limit is not active.Units: AmpsDefault: P26 [Motor NP Amps] x 0.35Min/Max: 0.00 / P26 [Motor NP Amps] x 0.995RW RealUnits: SecsDefault: 2.00Min/Max: 0.01 / 600.00RW RealUnits: RevsDefault: 0.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 65535.0RW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-25FileGroupNameNo. Description78 Encdrlss AngCompEncoderless Angle CompensationRepresents electrical angle compensation dependent on motor cable and PWMFrequency. Determined during autotuning when P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode] is set toone of the FV modes without speed feedback.79 Encdrlss VltCompEncoderless Voltage CompensationRepresents voltage compensation dependent on motor cable and PWMFrequency. Determined during autotuning when P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode] is set toone of the FV modes without speed feedback.ValuesUnits: RadDefault: 0.0000Min/Max: –/+6.2831.0000Units: VACDefault: Based on Drive RatingMin/Max: 0.00 / P25 [Motor NP Volts] x 0.2580 755 PM CfgPermanent Magnet Motor ConfigurationThis parameter includes two options for PM FV mode selected by P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode].When Bit 0 = 1 - PM Offset test will be executed before the drive runs normal operation only after a power cycle or drive reset.When Bit 1 = 1 - Vqs regulator will be enabled.Read-WriteData TypeRW RealRW RealOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedVqs Reg EnAutoOfstTestDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueMOTOR CONTROLAutotune81 755 PM PriEnc OffsetPermanent Magnet Motor Primary Encoder OffsetThe amount of offset between the primary feedback encoder counts, and therotor flux center position of the PM motor. A value of 1024 is equal to 360electrical degrees. This parameter is updated during the PM Offset test whichruns at the first start after a power cycle/ system reset (P80 [PM Cfg] Bit 0 = 1)and during autotune in PM FV mode.82 755 PM AltEnc OffsetPermanent Magnet Motor Alternate Encoder OffsetThe amount of offset between the alternate feedback encoder counts, and therotor flux center position of the PM motor. A value of 1024 is equal to 360electrical degrees. This parameter is updated during the PM Offset test whichruns at the first start after a power cycle/ system reset (P80 [PM Cfg] Bit 0 = 1)and during autotune in PM FV mode. Active only when Alternate VelocityFeedback is being used during Auto Tach Loss Switchover (see P635 [SpdOptions Ctrl]).83 755 PM OfstTst CurPermanent Magnet Motor Offset Test CurrentAmplitude of the current command in per unit of the motor rated current duringthe PM Offset Test, which is one of the auto tune tests in PM FV mode.84 755 PM OfstTst CRampPermanent Magnet Motor Offset Test Current RampRamp time of the current command during the PM Offset Test in PM FV mode,which is defined as ramp time to reach the P80 [PM Cfg] current commandamplitude.85 755 PM OfstTst FRampPermanent Magnet Motor Offset Test Frequency RampDefines the frequency ramp time of the current command during the PM OffsetTest in PM FV mode, which is defined as ramp time in seconds from 0 to 3 Hz.86 755 PM CEMF VoltagePermanent Magnet Motor Counter Electro Motive ForceCounter electromotive force (CEMF) voltage displayed in line-to-line rms value,which is normalized to the base motor speed. Updated after the completion of theauto tune in PM FV mode.Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 1023Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 1023Units: %Default: 40.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 200.00Units: SecsDefault: 3.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 100.00Units: SecsDefault: 60.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 1000.00Units: VACDefault: P25 [Motor NP Volts] x 0.0675Min/Max: 0.00 / P25 [Motor NP Volts] x 1.5RW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW RealRW RealRW RealRW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-26 Programming and ParametersFileGroupMOTOR CONTROLAutotuneNameNo. Description87 755 PM IR VoltagePermanent Magnet Motor Stator Voltage DropVoltage across the stator resistance of the PM motor at the rated motor currentdisplayed in line-to-line rms value. Updated after the completion of the auto tunein PM FV mode.88 755 PM IXq VoltagePermanent Magnet Motor Q-Axis Stator Inductance Voltage DropVoltage across the q-axis stator inductance of the PM motor at the rated motorcurrent and the rated motor frequency displayed in line-to-line rms value. Thisparameter is updated after the completion of the auto tune in PM FV mode.89 755 PM IXd VoltagePermanent Magnet Motor D-Axis Stator Inductance Voltage DropVoltage across the d-axis stator inductance of the PM motor at the rated motorcurrent and the rated motor frequency displayed in line-to-line rms value.Updated after the completion of the auto tune in PM FV mode.91 755 PM Vqs Reg KpPermanent Magnet Motor Vqs Regulator Proportional GainProportional gain of the vqs regulator in PM FV mode. When P80 [PM Cfg] Bit 1= 1, the vqs regulator will be active either when the motor voltage exceeds thevoltage limited by the DC bus voltage or when the motor voltage exceeds thevalue set by P36 [Maximum Voltage].92 755 PM Vqs Reg KiPermanent Magnet Motor Vqs Regulator Integral GainIntegral gain of the vqs regulator in PM FV mode.93 755 PM Dir Test CurPermanent Magnet Motor Direction Test CurrentAmount of current commanded during the direction test when P35 [Motor CtrlMode] option 6 “PM FV” is selected. When the Start-Up feature is used, this valueis automatically set to 10% of the motor rated current.ValuesUnits: VACDefault: Based on Drive RatingMin/Max: 0.00 / P25 [Motor NP Volts] x 0.25Units: VACDefault: P25 [Motor NP Volts] x 0.0435Min/Max: 0.00 / P25 [Motor NP Volts] x 1.5Units: VACDefault: P25 [Motor NP Volts] x 0.0435Min/Max: 0.00 / P25 [Motor NP Volts] x 1.5Default: 2.50Min/Max: 0.00 / 1000.00Default: 0.50Min/Max: 0.00 / 1000.00Units: AmpsDefault: P26 [Motor NP Amps]/10Min/Max: 0.00 / P26 [Motor NP Amps]Read-WriteData TypeRW RealRW RealRW RealRW RealRW RealRW RealFileGroupMOTOR CONTROLVector RegulatorNo.NameDescription95 VCL Cur Reg BWVector Closed Loop Current Regulator BandwidthSets the bandwidth of the current regulator by automatically adjusting the gains(P96 and P97) based on motor autotune results. When the value of bandwidth iszero (default) the current regulator gains can be manually adjusted. The defaultvalues for P95, P96, and P97 typically provide excellent performance, and do notnormally need to be adjusted.96 VCL Cur Reg KpVector Closed Loop Current Regulator Proportional GainProportional gain of the current regulator. Can be adjusted when P95 is set tozero. The default values for P95, P96, and P97 typically provide excellentperformance, and do not normally need to be adjusted.97 VCL Cur Reg KiVector Closed Loop Current Regulator Integral GainIntegral gain of the current regulator. Can be adjusted when P95 is set to zero.The default values for P95, P96, and P97 typically provide excellent performance,and do not normally need to be adjusted.98 VEncdls FReg KpEncoderless Vector Frequency Regulator Proportional GainRepresents electrical angle compensation dependent on motor cable and PWMFrequency. Determined during autotuning when P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode] is set toone of the FV modes without speed feedback.ValuesUnits: R/SDefault: 0.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 9999.0Default: 1250.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 10000.0Default: 60.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 10000.0Units: Hz/ADefault: 524.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 100000.0Read-WriteData TypeRW RealRW RealRW RealRW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-27FileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type99 VEncdls FReg KiEncoderless Vector, Frequency Regulator Integral GainDetermined during autotuning when P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode] is set to one of the FVmodes without speed feedback. Represents voltage compensation dependent onmotor cable and PWM Frequency.Units: Hz/ADefault: 9080.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 100000.0RW Real100 Slip Reg EnableSlip Regulator EnableEnables or disables the slip frequency regulator. This selection is active only inmotor control mode flux vector induction (P35 [Motor Cntl Mode] = 3 “InductionFV”) and encoder feedback is used.101 Slip Reg KiSlip Regulator Integral GainIntegral gain for the slip frequency regulator.102 Slip Reg KpSlip Regulator Proportional GainProportional gain for the slip frequency regulator.103 Flux Reg EnableFlux Regulator EnableEnables or disables the flux regulator. This selection is active only in motorcontrol mode flux vector induction (P35 [Motor Cntl Mode] = 3 “Induction FV”).104 Flux Reg KiFlux Regulator Integral GainIntegral gain for the flux regulator.105 Flux Reg KpFlux Regulator Proportional GainProportional gain for the flux regulator.Default:Options:1 = “Enabled”0 = “Disabled”1 = “Enabled”RW 32-bitIntegerDefault: 10.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 10000.00RW RealDefault: 0.50Min/Max: 0.00 / 10000.00RW RealDefault:Options:1 = “Enabled”0 = “Disabled”1 = “Enabled”RW 32-bitIntegerDefault: 30.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 10000.00RW RealMOTOR CONTROLVector Regulator106 Trq Adapt SpeedTorque Adaption SpeedOperating frequency (speed) at which the adaptive torque control regulatorsbecome active as a percent of motor nameplate frequency. This selection isactive only in motor control mode flux vector induction (P35 [Motor Cntl Mode] = 3“Induction FV”).Default: 1.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 10000.00Units: %Default: 10.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 100.00RW RealRW Real107 Trq Adapt EnTorque Adaption EnableEnables or disables the adaptive torque control. This selection is active only inmotor control mode flux vector induction (P35 [Motor Cntl Mode] = 3 “InductionFV”).Default:Options:1 = “Enabled”0 = “Disabled”1 = “Enabled”RW 32-bitInteger108 Phase Delay CompPhase Delay CompensationUsed to adjust the sample delay compensation gain for the current feedback. Thegain compensation is scaled to the sample time (for example, +1.0 would be acompensation of positive 1 sample time).Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+100.00RW Real109 Trq Comp ModeTorque Compensation ModeAutomatic: Updates the torque compensation gains (P110 [Trq Comp Mtring] andP111 [Torque Comp Regen]) after autotune.Default:Options:1 = “Auto”0 = “Manual”1 = “Auto”RW 32-bitInteger110 Trq Comp MtringTorque Compensation MotoringMotor torque compensation applied to the torque command for motoring power.This parameter can be set manually or determined automatically during autotune.(See P109 [Trq Comp Mode].) In manual mode, a value of 5% will increase thecommanded torque by 5% (gain of 1.05). This is used for flux vector motor controlmode (P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode] = 3 “Induction FV”).Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+50.00RW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-28 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type111 Trq Comp RegenTorque Compensation RegenerationMotor torque compensation applied to the torque command for regeneratingtorque. This parameter can be set manually or determined automatically duringautotune. (See P109 [Trq Comp Mode].) In manual mode, a value of -3% willdecrease the commanded torque by 3% (gain of 0.97). This is used for flux vectormotor control modes (P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode]).Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+50.00RW RealMOTOR CONTROLVector Regulator112 Slip Adapt IqsSlip Adaption IqsLevel of per unit Iqs at which the adaptive slip frequency regulator becomesactive. Active only in motor control mode flux vector induction (P35 [Motor CtrlMode] = 3 “Induction FV”).113 SFAdapt SlewLmtSlip and Flux Adaption Slew LimitTime that the slip, flux, and torque regulators are allowed to converge before theregulators are turned on after the motor speed reaches the level set in P106 [TrqAdapt Speed].114 SFAdapt SlewRateSlip and Flux Adaption Slew RateRate that the slip and flux regulators can converge before the regulators areenabled.115 SFAdapt CnvrgLvlSlip and Flux Adaption Converge LevelSlip and flux regulator error level that indicates convergence.116 SFAdapt CnvrgLmtSlip and Flux Adaption Converge LimitDuration of convergence before the adaption regulators are enabled after theerror has decreased below the level set in P115 [SFAdapt CnvrgLvl].Default: 0.05Min/Max: 0.00 / 1.00Units: SecsDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 60.00Default: 0.005000Min/Max: 0.000010 / 1.000000RW RealRW RealRW RealDefault: 0.010000Min/Max: 0.000010 / 1.000000RW RealDefault: 0.500Min/Max: 0.000 / 5.000RW RealDrive Feedback & I/O FileFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData TypeFEEDBACK & I/OFeedback125 Pri Vel Fdbk SelPrimary Velocity Feedback SelectSelects the source of the P3 [Mtr Vel Fdbk] and P131 [Active Vel Fdbk] that willbe used when the drive is in operation without an Auto Tach Loss Switchover.Possible selections include: Port 0 – Open Loop Fdbk, Port 0 – Simulator Fdbk,and any Port that contains a feedback module (for example, Encoder).The Disabled and Open Loop Fdbk selections are functionally equivalent, withOpen Loop being the default setting. Open Loop velocity feedback is estimatedbased on P1 [Output Frequency] and P5 [Torque Cur Fdbk], adjusted using P621[Slip RPM @ FLA].Simulator Fdbk is available in the Flux Vector selections for P35 [Motor CtrlMode]. Simulator velocity feedback is calculated based on P690 [Limited Trq Ref]and P76 [Total Inertia]. This selection is useful for drive operational checkout andtest when motor movement is undesired. In simulation mode, gating of the powerinverter section of the drive is disabled.Selection of any option module port that contains an encoder module results inP3 [Mtr Vel Fdbk] based on a measured value. Data obtained from the selectedfeedback module will be used to determine motor velocity feedback.Default: 137Min/Max: 0 / 159999RW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-29FileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type126 Pri Vel FdbkFltrPrimary Velocity Feedback FilterAdjusts a filter setting that is applied to the motor velocity feedback source that isselected by P125 [Pri Vel Fdbk Sel]. The purpose of this filter is to reduce thelevel of noise in the feedback signal.This is moving average type filter that has a delay setting of N, where N is aninteger number (0, 1, 2 …). A setting of zero provides no filtering and no delay.Larger values of N result in more filtering and more delay. The best setting for thisfilter depends on the level of noise in the feedback signal and the bandwidthsetting of the velocity regulator.In the Flux Vector selections for P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode], setting P636 [Speed RegBW] to a non-zero setting places the drive in an automatic gain/filter adjustmentmode. When the drive is in this automatic adjustment mode, the value of P666[Speed Comp Gain] and possibly P644 [Spd Err Filt BW] are adjusted, based onthe setting of P126 [Pri Vel FdbkFltr]. The automatic setting of P644 [Spd Err FiltBW] becomes independent of the feedback filter setting when P704 [InAdpLdObs Mode] is set to 1 “InertiaAdapt.”Default:Options:3 = “50R/S Noise”0 = “190R/S Noise”1 = “160R/S Noise”2 = “100R/S Noise”3 = “50R/S Noise”4 = “25R/S Noise”5 = “12R/S Noise”6 = “6R/S Noise”7 = “3R/S Noise”RW 32-bitInteger127 Pri Vel FeedbackPrimary Velocity FeedbackOutput of the Primary Velocity Feedback Delay filter, in units of Hz or RPM,depending on the value of P300 [Speed Units]. Adjustment of the delay filter ismade using P126 [Pri Vel FdbkFltr]. The Primary Velocity Feedback is used whenthe drive is operating without an auto Tach Loss Switchover.Units:Default:Min/Max:HzRPM0.00–/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 8–/+P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 8RORealFEEDBACK & I/OFeedback128 Alt Vel Fdbk SelAlternate Velocity Feedback SelectSelects the source of the P3 [Mtr Vel Fdbk] and P131 [Active Vel Fdbk] to be usedwhen the drive is in operation with an auto Tach Loss Switchover.129 Alt Vel FdbkFltrAlternate Velocity Feedback FilterAdjusts a filter setting that is applied to the motor velocity feedback source that isselected by P128 [Alt Vel Fdbk Sel]. The purpose of this filter is to reduce thelevel of noise in the feedback signal. Filter adjustment and operation is similar toP126 [Pri Vel FdbkFltr].Default: 137Min/Max: 0 / 159999Default:Options:3 = “50R/S Noise”0 = “190R/S Noise”1 = “160R/S Noise”2 = “100R/S Noise”3 = “50R/S Noise”4 = “25R/S Noise”5 = “12R/S Noise”6 = “6R/S Noise”7 = “3R/S Noise”RW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitInteger130 Alt Vel FeedbackAlternate Velocity FeedbackOutput of the Alternate Velocity Feedback Delay filter, displayed in units of Hz orRPM, depending on the value of P300 [Speed Units]. Adjustment of the delayfilter is made using P126 [Pri Vel FdbkFltr]. The Alternate Velocity Feedback isused when the drive is operating with an auto Tach Loss Switchover.Units:Default:Min/Max:HzRPM0.00–/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 8–/+P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 8ROReal131 Active Vel FdbkActive Velocity FeedbackActive motor velocity feedback value that used by the Flux Vector control’svelocity regulator. This value in use is the result of the Primary/Alternatefeedback selection. When the drive is operating without an auto Tach LossSwitchover, then P127 [Pri Vel Feedback] is selected. When the drive is operatingwith an auto Tach Loss Switchover, then the P130 [Alt Vel Feedback] will beselected. Status Bit 5 “FdbkLoss SwO” will become set in P936 [Drive Status 2]when an Auto Tach Switchover has occurred.Units:Default:Min/Max:HzRPM0.00–/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 8–/+P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 8ROReal132 Aux Vel Fdbk SelAuxiliary Velocity Feedback SelectSelects the source of the drive’s P134 [Aux Vel Feedback]. Possible selectionsare the same as for P125 [Pri Vel Fdbk Sel].Default: 137Min/Max: 0 / 159999RW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-30 Programming and ParametersFileGroupFEEDBACK & I/OFeedbackNameNo. Description133 Aux Vel FdbkFltrAuxiliary Velocity Feedback FilterAdjusts a filter setting that is applied to the P134 [Aux Vel Feedback] that isselected by P132 [Aux Vel Fdbk Sel]. The purpose of this filter is to reduce thelevel of noise present in the feedback signal. Filter adjustment and operation issimilar to P126 [Pri Vel FdbkFltr].134 Aux Vel FeedbackAuxiliary Velocity FeedbackOutput of the Auxiliary Velocity Feedback Delay filter, in units of Hz or RPM,depending on the value of P300 [Speed Units]. Adjustment of the delay filter ismade using P126 [Pri Vel FdbkFltr]. Typically used as a speed reference source.This selection is available in P545 [Spd Ref A Sel] and P550 [Spd Ref B Sel].Default:Options:Units:Default:Min/Max:3 = “50R/S Noise”0 = “190R/S Noise”1 = “160R/S Noise”2 = “100R/S Noise”3 = “50R/S Noise”4 = “25R/S Noise”5 = “12R/S Noise”6 = “6R/S Noise”7 = “3R/S Noise”135 Mtr Psn Fdbk SelMotor Position Feedback SelectSelects the source of P847 [Psn Fdbk]. Possible selections include: Port 0 –Simulator Fdbk, and any Port that contains a feedback module (for example,Encoder). Open Loop Feedback is not available as a Position feedback source.The default setting is P138 [Simulator Fdbk]. This is a test mode where positionfeedback is calculated based on P690 [Limited Trq Ref] and P76 [Total Inertia].When position control is used, a valid position feedback source must be selected.Default:Min/Max:1380 / 159999136 755 Load Psn FdbkSelDefault: 137Load Position Feedback SelectMin/Max: 0 / 159999Selects a position load feedback source for the position control. The position loadfeedback P847 [Psn Fdbk] indicates the selected position feedback value. Thevalue forms the primary feedback for the position regulator integration channel.137 Open Loop FdbkOpen Loop FeedbackAn estimated motor feedback source that is available to any of the VelocityFeedback Selection parameters – P125 [Pri Vel Fdbk Sel], P128 [Alt Vel FdbkSel], and P132 [Aux Vel Fdbk Sel]. Open Loop Feedback is not available as aPosition feedback source.The Open Loop Feedback’s parameter value has units of encoder counts asestablished by P141 [Virtual Enc EPR]. Open Loop feedback is estimated basedon P1 [Output Frequency] and P5 [Torque Cur Fdbk], adjusted using P621 [SlipRPM @ FLA].138 Simulator FdbkSimulator FeedbackSimulator Feedback is a calculated motor feedback source. It can be used whenoperating in any of the Flux Vector control modes that are selected in P35 [MotorCtrl Mode]. Simulator Feedback is available to any of the Velocity FeedbackSelection parameters: P125 [Pri Vel Fdbk Sel], P128 [Alt Vel Fdbk Sel], and P132[Aux Vel Fdbk Sel]. Simulator Feedback is also available as a Position feedbacksource as selected by P135 [Mtr Psn Fdbk Sel].The Simulator Feedback’s parameter value has units of encoder counts, asestablished by P141 [Virtual Enc EPR]. Simulator velocity feedback is calculatedbased on P690 [Limited Trq Ref] and P76 [Total Inertia]. This selection is usefulfor drive operational checkout and test when motor movement is undesired. Insimulation mode, gating of the power inverter section of the drive is disabled.ValuesDefault:Options:Default:Options:139 755 Delayed Spd RefUnits:Delayed Speed ReferenceOne sample period delayed output of P594 [Ramped Spd Ref]. Used in someapplications to synchronize the speed reference value when controlling multipledrives. In these applications, the drive that supplies the master speed referencewould use the [Delayed Spd Ref] value. Setting P635 [Spd Options Ctrl] Bit 8“Delayed Ref” will select the delayed reference in the master drive. P594[Ramped Spd Ref] would then be transmitted to the slave drives over acommunication link.Default:Min/Max:HzRPM0.00–/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 8–/+P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 80–2147483648 / 21474836470–2147483648 / 2147483647HzRPM0.00–/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 8–/+P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 8Read-WriteRW 32-bitIntegerRORealRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRORORO32-bitInteger32-bitIntegerRealData TypePowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-31FileGroupFEEDBACK & I/OFeedbackNameDescriptionNo.140 755 Virtual EncDelayVirtual Encoder DelayOne sample period delayed output of P142 [Virtual Enc Psn]. Used in someapplications to phase synchronize position reference though a drivecommunications link. The master is delayed one sample while the downstreamdrives update their position references – then all drives sample positionsimultaneously. The downstream drives do not select a delay. The selection of thedelayed or non-delayed position reference is made by choosing the desiredparameter in P766 [Psn Direct Stpt].141 755 Virtual Enc EPRVirtual Encoder Edges Per RevolutionEquivalent Edges Per Revolution (EPR) or line count of a virtual encoder. Avirtual encoder is a position reference whose input is derived from the speedreference. It accumulates pulses at the same rate as a real encoder of identicalPulses Per Revolution (PPR). Enter the equivalent PPR. For example, enter 1024PPR to match an encoder with 1024 EPR.142 755 Virtual Enc PsnVirtual Encoder PositionA 32 bit pulse accumulator of the virtual encoder. The accumulated pulse count isequivalent to the hardware accumulator of a real encoder. It accumulates at arate of 4x the value placed in P141 [Virtual Enc EPR]. The accumulator starts atzero upon position enable.ValuesDefault:Options:0–2147483648 / 2147483647Default: 4096Min/Max: 10 / 67108864Default: 0Min/Max: –/+32767Read-WriteRO32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerROData Type32-bitIntegerFileGroupNo.NameDescription150 Digital In CfgDigital Input ConfigureDefines operation for DI Run type parameters.“Run Edge” (0) – Control function requires a rising edge (open to close transition)in order for the drive to run.“Run Level” (1) – As long as a separate “Stop” command is not issued, the levelalone (no rising edge required) determines whether or not the drive will run.ValuesDefault:Options:0 = “Run Edge”0 = “Run Edge”1 = “Run Level”Read-WriteData TypeRW 32-bitIntegerFEEDBACK & I/ODigin Functions!ATTENTION: Equipment damage and/or personal injury may result if this parameter is used in aninappropriate application. Do not use this function without considering applicable local, national andinternational codes, standards, regulations, or industry guidelines.155 DI EnableDigital Input EnableAssigns a digital input used to enable the drive.156 DI Clear FaultDigital Input Clear FaultAssigns a digital input used to clear faults.157 DI Aux FaultDigital Input Auxiliary FaultAssigns a digital input used to force an external auxiliary fault.158 DI StopDigital Input StopAssigns a digital input used to issue a stop command.159 DI Cur Lmt StopDigital Input Current Limit StopAssigns a digital input used to perform a current limited stop.Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15RW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-32 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type160 DI Coast StopDigital Input Coast StopAssigns a digital input used to perform a coast-to-stop.Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15RW 32-bitInteger161 DI StartDigital Input StartAssigns a digital input used to start the drive (3-wire control).Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15RW 32-bitInteger162 DI Fwd ReverseDigital Input Forward ReverseAssigns a digital input used to command reverse direction.Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15RW 32-bitInteger163 DI RunDigital Input RunAssigns a digital input used to run the drive (2-wire control).Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15RW 32-bitInteger164 DI Run ForwardDigital Input Run ForwardAssigns a digital input used to run the drive (2 wire control) and commandforward direction.Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15RW 32-bitInteger165 DI Run ReverseDigital Input Run ReverseAssigns a digital input used to run the drive (2 wire control) and commandreverse direction.Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15RW 32-bitIntegerFEEDBACK & I/ODigin Functions166 DI Jog 1Digital Input Jog 1Assigns a digital input used to jog the drive at the speed of P556 [Jog Speed 1].167 DI Jog 1 ForwardDigital Input Jog 1 ForwardAssigns a digital input used to jog the drive in the forward direction at the speedof P556 [Jog Speed 1].Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15RW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitInteger168 DI Jog 1 ReverseDigital Input Jog 1 ReverseAssigns a digital input used to jog the drive in the reverse direction at the speedof P556 [Jog Speed 1].Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15RW 32-bitInteger169 DI Jog 2Digital Input Jog 2Assigns a digital input used to jog the drive at the speed of P557 [Jog Speed 2].Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15RW 32-bitInteger170 DI Jog 2 ForwardDigital Input Jog 2 ForwardAssigns a digital input used to jog the drive in the forward direction at the speedof P557 [Jog Speed 2].Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15RW 32-bitInteger171 DI Jog 2 ReverseDigital Input Jog 2 ReverseAssigns a digital input used to jog the drive in the reverse direction at the speedof P557 [Jog Speed 2].Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15RW 32-bitInteger172 DI Manual CtrlDigital Input Manual ControlAssigns a digital input used to command manual control.Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15RW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-33FileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type173174175DI Speed Sel 0DI Speed Sel 1DI Speed Sel 2Digital Input Speed Select 0, 1, 2Assigns digital inputs used to select between speed references as follows:Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15RW 32-bitIntegerInput Status (1 = Input Actuated)DI Speed Sel 2 DI Speed Sel 1 DI Speed Sel 0Auto ReferenceSource0 0 0 Reference A0 0 1 Reference A0 1 0 Reference B0 1 1 Preset Speed 31 0 0 Preset Speed 41 0 1 Preset Speed 51 1 0 Preset Speed 61 1 1 Preset Speed 7FEEDBACK & I/ODigin Functions177 DI MOP IncDigital Input Motor Operated Potentiometer IncrementAssigns a digital input used to increment the MOP speed reference.178 DI MOP DecDigital Input Motor Operated Potentiometer DecrementAssigns a digital input used to decrement the MOP speed reference.179 DI Accel 2Digital Input Acceleration 2Assigns a digital input used to activate P536 [Accel Time 2].180 DI Decel 2Digital Input Deceleration 2Assigns a digital input used to activate P538 [Decel Time 2].181182Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15DI SpTqPs Sel 0Default: 0DI SpTqPs Sel 1Digital Input Speed Torque Position Select 0, 1Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15Assigns digital inputs used to select between speed, torque, and position modes.185 DI Stop Mode BDigital Input Stop Mode BAssigns a digital input used to activate P371 [Stop Mode B].186 DI BusReg Mode BDigital Input Bus Regulation Mode BAssigns a digital input used to activate P373 [Bus Reg Mode B].187 DI PwrLoss ModeBDigital Input Power Loss Mode BAssigns a digital input used to activate P453 [Pwr Loss Mode B].188 DI Pwr LossDigital Input Power LossAssigns a digital input used to force a power loss condition.189 DI PrechargeDigital Input PrechargeAssigns a digital input used to force the drive into precharge (normally only usedin common bus applications).190 DI Prchrg SealDigital Input Precharge SealAssigns a digital input used to force a unique fault when an external prechargecircuit opens.Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15RW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-34 Programming and ParametersFileGroupValuesRead-WriteData TypeNameNo. Description191 DI PID EnableDigital Input Proportional Integral Derivative EnableAssigns a digital input used to activate the Process PID control.192 DI PID HoldDigital Input Proportional Integral Derivative HoldAssigns a digital input used to hold the Process PID integrator.193 DI PID ResetDigital Input Proportional Integral Derivative ResetAssigns a digital input used to reset the Process PID integrator.194 DI PID InvertDigital Input Proportional Integral Derivative InvertAssigns a digital input used to invert the output of the Process PID control.Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15RW 32-bitIntegerDefault: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15RW 32-bitIntegerDefault: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15RW 32-bitIntegerDefault: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15RW 32-bitInteger195 DI Torque StptADigital Input Torque Setpoint AAssigns a digital input used to force P676 [Trq Ref A Stpt] as the source forTorque Reference A, regardless of the setting in P675 [Trq Ref A Sel]. Used whenthe drive is in a mode that is commanding torque (see P309…P312).Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15RW 32-bitInteger196 DI Fwd End LimitDigital Input Forward End LimitAssigns a digital input used to trigger a Forward End Limit. The resulting action isto execute a “Fast Stop” command. After the drive stops in this case, it will onlyrestart in the opposite direction. This function is usually used with a limit switchnear the point at which the drive should stop.Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15RW 32-bitIntegerFEEDBACK & I/ODigin Functions197 DI Fwd Dec LimitDigital Input Forward Deceleration LimitAssigns a digital input used to trigger a Forward Decel Limit. The resulting actionis to override the speed reference and decelerate to Preset Speed 1. Thisfunction is usually used with a limit switch and initiates the slowing down processprior to encountering the End Limit.198 DI Rev End LimitDigital Input Reverse End LimitAssigns a digital input used to trigger a Reverse End Limit. The resulting action isto execute a “Fast Stop” command. After the drive stops in this case, it will onlyrestart in the opposite direction. This function is usually used with a limit switchnear the point at which the drive should stop.Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15RW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitInteger199 DI Rev Dec LimitDigital Input Reverse Deceleration LimitAssigns a digital input used to trigger a Reverse Decel Limit. The resulting actionis to override the speed reference and decelerate to Preset Speed 1. Thisfunction is usually used with a limit switch and initiates the slowing down processprior to encountering the End Limit.Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15RW 32-bitInteger200 DI PHdwr OvrTrvlDigital Input Positive Hardware Over TravelAssigns a digital input used to trigger a Positive Hardware Over-travel. Theresulting action is to immediately fault and produce zero torque. After the drivestops in this case, the fault will need to be reset, and the drive will only restart inthe opposite direction. This function is usually used with a limit switch in aposition beyond the “End Limit,” as an extra safety limit to prevent torque fromdamaging the machine in an over-travel situation.201 DI NHdwr OvrTrvlDigital Input Negative Hardware Over TravelAssigns a digital input used to trigger a Negative Hardware Over-travel. Theresulting action is to immediately fault and produce zero torque. After the drivestops in this case, the fault will need to be reset, and the drive will only restart inthe opposite direction. This function is usually used with a limit switch in aposition beyond the “End Limit,” as an extra safety limit to prevent torque fromdamaging the machine in an over-travel situation.Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15RW 32-bitIntegerDefault: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15RW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-35FileGroupNameNo. Description220 Digital In StsDigital Input StatusStatus of the digital input(s) resident on the main control board (Port 0).ValuesRead-WriteData TypeOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedDigital In 2 (1)Digital In 1 (1)Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0Digital In 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueFEEDBACK & I/ODigital Inputs(1) 755 drives only.222 753 Dig In Fltr MaskDigital Input Filter MaskFilters the selected digital input.Important: Only used by the PowerFlex 753 main control board.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedInput 2Input 1ReservedDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition True223 753 Dig In FiltDigital Input FilterSets the amount of filtering on the digital inputs.Important: Only used by the PowerFlex 753 main control board.Units: mSDefault: 4Min/Max: 2 / 10RW RealFileGroupNameNo. Description225 753 Dig Out StsDigital Output StatusStatus of the digital outputs.ValuesRead-WriteData TypeFEEDBACK & I/ODigital OutputsOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedTrans Out 0Relay Out 0Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0226 753 Dig Out InvertDigital Output InvertInverts the selected digital output.0 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedTrans Out 0Relay Out 0Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TruePowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-36 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNameNo. DescriptionValues227 753 Dig Out SetpointDigital Output SetpointControls Relay or Transistor Outputs when chosen as the source. Can be used to control outputs from a communication device using DataLinks.Read-WriteData TypeOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedTrans Out 0Relay Out 0Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueFEEDBACK & I/ODigital Outputs230 753 RO0 SelDefault: 0RW 32-bitRelay Output 0 SelectMin/Max: 0 / 159999.15IntegerSelects the source that will energize the relay output.Any status parameter bit can be used as an output source. For example P935[Drive Status 1] bit 7 “Faulted”.231 753 RO0 Level SelDefault: 0RW 32-bitRelay Output 0 Level SelectMin/Max: 0 / 159999IntegerSelects the source of the level that will be compared.232 753 RO0 LevelDefault: 0.0RW RealRelay Output 0 LevelSets the level compare value.Min/Max: –/+1000000.0233 753 RO0 Lvl CmpStsRelay Output 0 Level Compensation StatusStatus of the level compare, and a possible source for a relay or transistor output. Relay Output X Select or Transistor Output X Select must have thisselected to energize the output. Can be used without a physical output as status information only.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedGrt Than EquLess ThanDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition True234 753 RO0 On TimeRelay Output 0 On TimeSets the “ON Delay” time for the digital outputs. This is the time between theoccurrence of a condition and activation of the relay.235 753 RO0 Off TimeRelay Output 0 Off TimeSets the “OFF Delay” time for the digital outputs. This is the time between thedisappearance of a condition and de-activation of the relay.240 753 TO0 SelTransistor Output 0 SelectSelects the source that will energize the relay or transistor output.Any status parameter bit can be used as an output source. For example P935[Drive Status 1] bit 7 “Faulted”.241 753 TO0 Level SelTransistor Output 0 Level SelectSelects the source of the level that will be compared.242 753 TO0 LevelTransistor Output 0 LevelSets the level compare value.Units: SecsDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 600.00Units: SecsDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 600.00Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999Default: 0.0Min/Max: –/+1000000.0RW RealRW RealRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-37FileGroupNameNo. DescriptionValues243 753 TO0 Level CmpStsTransistor Output 0 Level Compensation StatusStatus of the level compare, and a possible source for the transistor output. Transistor Output 0 Select must have this selected to energize the output.Can be used without a physical output as status information only.Read-WriteData TypeFEEDBACK & I/ODigital OutputsOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedGrt Than EquLess ThanDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0244 753 TO0 On TimeTransistor Output 0 On TimeSets the “ON Delay” time for the digital outputs. This is the time between theoccurrence of a condition and activation of the relay or transistor.245 753 TO0 Off TimeTransistor Output 0 Off TimeSets the “OFF Delay” time for the digital outputs. This is the time between thedisappearance of a condition and de-activation of the relay or transistor.0 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueDefault: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999Default: 0.0Min/Max: –/+1000000.0RW 32-bitIntegerRW RealFileGroupFEEDBACK & I/OMotor PTCNameNo. Description250 753 PTC CfgPositive Temperature Coefficient ConfigurationSets the action that will be taken when the PTC is not Ok.“Ignore” (0) – No action is taken“Alarm” (1) – Alarm occurs“Flt Minor” (2) – Minor Fault occurs if enabled, otherwise Fault Coast Stop“FltCoastStop” (3) – Fault Coast Stop occurs“Flt RampStop” (4) – Fault Ramp Stop occurs“Flt CL Stop” (5) – Fault Current Limit Stop occurs251 753 PTC StatusPositive Temperature Coefficient StatusStatus of the PTC.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedOver TempReservedPTC OkDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0ValuesDefault:Options:0 = Condition False1 = Condition True0 = “Ignore”0 = “Ignore”1 = “Alarm”2 = “Flt Minor”3 = “FltCoastStop”4 = “Flt RampStop”5 = “Flt CL Stop”Read-WriteData TypeRW 32-bitIntegerBit 0 “PTC Ok” – PTC is OKBit 2 “Over Temp” – PTC is indicating over temperaturePowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-38 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNameNo. Description255 753 Anlg In TypeAnalog Input TypeStatus of the analog input mode set by Jumper J4 on the main control board.ValuesRead-WriteData TypeOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedAnalog 0Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition True256 753 Anlg In SqrtAnalog Input Square RootEnables/disables the square root function for each input.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedAnalog 0Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueFEEDBACK & I/OAnalog Inputs257 753 Anlg In Loss StsAnalog Input Loss StatusStatus of the analog input loss.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedLoss 0ReservedDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition True260 753 Anlg In0 ValueAnalog Input 0 ValueValue of the Analog input after filter, square root, and loss action.261 753 Anlg In0 HiAnalog Input 0 HighSets the highest input value to the analog input scaling block.262 753 Anlg In0 LoAnalog Input 0 LowSets the lowest input value to the analog input scaling block.Units:Default:Min/Max:Units:Default:Min/Max:Units:Default:Min/Max:VoltsmA0.000 Volts0.000 mA–/+10.000 Volts0.000 / 20.000 mAVoltsmA0.000 Volts0.000 mA–/+10.000 Volts0.000 / 20.000 mAVoltsmA0.000 Volts0.000 mA–/+10.000 Volts0.000 / 20.000 mARO RealRW RealRW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-39FileGroupFEEDBACK & I/OAnalog InputsNameDescriptionNo.263 753 Anlg In0 LssActnAnalog Input 0 Loss ActionSelects drive action when an analog signal loss is detected. Signal loss is definedas an analog signal less than 1V or 2mA. The signal loss event ends and normaloperation resumes when the input signal level is greater than or equal to 1.5V or3mA.“Ignore” (0) – No action is taken“Alarm” (1) – Alarm occurs“Flt Minor“ (2) – Minor Fault occurs if enabled, otherwise Fault Coast Stop“FltCoastStop“ (3) – Fault Coast Stop occurs“Flt RampStop“ (4) – Fault Ramp Stop occurs“Flt CL Stop“ (5) – Fault Current Limit Stop occurs“Hold Input” (6) – Holds input at last value“Set Input Lo” (7) – Sets input to P262 [Anlg In0 Lo]“Set Input Hi” (8) – Sets input to P261 [Anlg In0 Hi]264 753 Anlg In0 Raw ValAnalog Input 0 Raw ValueRaw Value of the analog input.265 753 Anlg In0 Filt GnAnalog Input 0 Filter GainSets the analog input filter gain.266 753 Anlg In0 Filt BWAnalog Input 0 Filter BandwidthSets the analog input filter bandwidth.ValuesDefault:Options:Units:Default:Min/Max:Default: 1.00Min/Max: –/+5.000 = “Ignore”0 = “Ignore”1 = “Alarm”2 = “Flt Minor”3 = “FltCoastStop”4 = “Flt RampStop”5 = “Flt CL Stop”6 = “Hold Input”7 = “Set Input Lo”8 = “Set Input Hi”VoltsmA0.000 Volts0.000 mA–/+10.000 Volts0.000 / 20.000 mADefault: 0.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 500.0Read-WriteRW 32-bitIntegerRORealRW RealRW RealData TypeFileGroupNameNo. Description270 753 Anlg Out TypeAnalog Output TypeSelect the analog output mode for each analog output.ValuesRead-WriteData TypeFEEDBACK & I/OAnalog OutputsOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedAnalog Out 0Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Voltage Mode1 = Current Mode271 753 Anlg Out AbsAnalog Output AbsoluteSelects whether the signed value or absolute value of a parameter is used before being scaled to drive the analog output.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedAnalog Out 0Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Voltage Mode1 = Current Mode275 753 Anlg Out0 SelAnalog Output 0 SelectSelects the source for the analog output.Default: 3Min/Max: 0 / 159999RW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-40 Programming and ParametersFileGroupFEEDBACK & I/OAnalog OutputsNameNo. Description276 753 Anlg Out0 StptAnalog Output 0 SetpointA possible source for an analog output. Can be used to control an analog outputfrom a communication device using a DataLink. Not affected by analog outputscaling.277 753 Anlg Out0 DataAnalog Output 0 DataDisplays the value of the source selected by P275 [Anlg Out0 Sel].278 753 Anlg Out0 DataHiAnalog Output 0 Data HighSets the high value for the data range of analog out scale.279 753 Anlg Out0 DataLoAnalog Output 0 Data LowSets the low value for the data range of analog out scale.280 753 Anlg Out0 HiAnalog Output 0 HighSets the high value for the analog output value when the data value is at itsmaximum.281 753 Anlg Out0 LoAnalog Output 0 LowSets the low value for the analog output value when the data value is at itsminimum.282 753 Anlg Out0 ValAnalog Output 0 ValueDisplays the analog output value.ValuesUnits: VACDefault: 0Min/Max: –10/20Default: 0Min/Max: –/+100000Default: 1Min/Max: –/+214748000Default: 1Min/Max: –/+214748000Units:Default:Min/Max:Units:Default:Min/Max:Units:Default:Min/Max:VoltsmA10.000 Volts20.000 mA–/+10.000 Volts0.000 / 20.000 mAVoltsmA0.000 Volts0.000 mA–/+10.000 Volts0.000 / 20.000 mAVoltsmA10.000 Volts20.000 mA–/+10.000 Volts0.000 / 20.000 mARead-WriteData TypeRW RealRO RealRW RealRW RealRW RealRW RealRO RealFileGroupNameNo. Description285 753 RO PredMaint StsRelay Output Predictive Maintenance StatusStatus of relay 0 predictive maintenance.ValuesRead-WriteData TypeFEEDBACK & I/OR0 Predict MainOptionsMasterReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedRelay Out 0Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0286 753 RO0 Load TypeRelay Output 0 Load TypeSets the type of load that will be applied to the relay. Must be properly set for thePredictive Maintenance function to predict the relay life.Default:Options:1 = “DC Inductive”0 = “DC Resistive”1 = “DC Inductive”2 = “AC Resistive”3 = “AC Inductive”287 753 RO0 Load AmpsUnits: AmpsRelay Output 0 Load AmpsDefault: 2.000Load current that will be applied to the relay contacts. Must be properly set for the Min/Max: 0.000 / 2.000Predictive Maintenance function to approximate the relay life.288 753 RO0 TotalLifeRelay Output 0 Total LifeTotal life cycles of the relay based on programmed load type and amps.0 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueUnits: CyclDefault: 0Min/Max: 0 / 2147483647RW 32-bitIntegerRW RealRO32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-41FileGroupFEEDBACK & I/OR0 Predict MainNameNo. Description289 753 RO0 ElapsedLifeRelay Output 0 Elapsed LifeNon-resettable, total accumulated cycles of the relay.290 753 RO0 RemainLifeRelay Output 0 Remaining LifeThe difference between the Total Life and the Elapsed Life.291 753 RO0 LifeEvntLvlRelay Output 0 Life Event LevelSets the percentage of relay life cycles before action is taken.292 753 RO0 LifeEvntActnRelay Output 0 Life Event ActionSets the action that will be taken when the percentage of relay life cycles hasbeen reached.“Ignore” (0) – No action is taken“Alarm” (1) – Alarm occurs“Flt Minor” (2) – Minor Fault occurs if enabled, otherwise Fault Coast Stop“FltCoastStop” (3) – Fault Coast Stop occurs“Flt RampStop” (4) – Fault Ramp Stop occurs“Flt CL Stop” (5) – Fault Current Limit Stop occursValuesUnits: CyclDefault: 0Min/Max: 0 / 2147483647Units: CyclDefault: 0Min/Max: –/+2147483647Units: %Default: 80.000Min/Max: 0.000 / 100.000Default:Options:1 = “Alarm”0 = “Ignore”1 = “Alarm”2 = “Flt Minor”3 = “FltCoastStop”4 = “Flt RampStop”5 = “Flt CL Stop”Read-WriteRORO32-bitInteger32-bitIntegerRW RealData TypeRW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-42 Programming and ParametersDrive Cfg FileFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type300 Speed UnitsSpeed UnitsSelects the units to be used for all speed related parameters. Options 0 and 1 donot convert other parameter values (e.g. a 60 Hz reference becomes 60 rpm).Options 2 and 3 perform an automatic conversion of other parameter values (e.g.a 60 Hz reference becomes 1800 rpm, based on motor nameplate settings).This parameter is only reset when Set Defaults “All” (not recommended) isexecuted.Default:Options:Current Selection0 = “Hz”1 = “RPM”RW 32-bitIntegerDRIVE CFGPreferences301 Access LevelAccess LevelSets the access level for parameters and option choices.“Basic” (0) – Provides the smallest, simplest, and most user friendly view.“Advanced” (1) – May be required to use advanced features.“Expert” (2) – Not normally recommended (makes the list very long), and showsextra parameters that should rarely be required.When the access level is changed, PC-based tools (e.g. Drive Tools and DriveExplorer) will require a reconnect.This parameter is only reset when Set Defaults “All” (not recommended) isexecuted.302 LanguageLanguageSelect display language.This parameter is only reset when Set Defaults “All” (not recommended) isexecuted.Default:Options:Current Selection0 = “Basic”1 = “Advanced”2 = “Expert”RW 32-bitIntegerDefault:Options:0 = “Not Used”0 = “Not Used”1 = “English”2 = “French”3 = “Spanish”4 = “Italian”5 = “German”6 = “Japanese”7 = “Portuguese”8 = “Chinese”9 = “Reserved”10 = “Reserved”10 = “Korean”RW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-43FileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type305 Voltage ClassVoltage ClassSelects the voltage class operation of the drive (e.g. for 400 / 480V drives, “LowVoltage” = 400V, “High Voltage” = 480V). This setting affects how the drive willappear as a node on a system (e.g. 400V or 480V), and also affects the drive'scurrent rating (Rated Amps).This parameter is only reset (to original factory setting) when Set Defaults “All”(not recommended) is executed.Default:Options:0 = Based on Factory Setting0 = “Low Voltage”1 = “High Voltage”RW 32-bitIntegerDRIVE CFGControl Cfg306 Duty RatingDuty RatingSelects the continuous and overload capacity of the drive. “Normal Duty”provides the highest continuous rating, but smaller overload ratings (110% for 60sec, 150% for 3 sec). “Heavy Duty” provides a smaller continuous rating, butlarger overload ratings (150% for 60 sec, 180% for 3 sec).This parameter is only reset when Set Defaults “All” (not recommended) isexecuted.308 Direction ModeDirection ModeSelects method for changing direction.Mode Direction ChangeDefault:Options:Default:Options:0 = “Normal Duty”0 = “Normal Duty”1 = “Heavy Duty”0 = “Unipolar”0 = “Unipolar”1 = “Bipolar”2 = “Rev Disable”RW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerUnipolarDrive LogicBipolarSign of ReferenceRev DisableNot Changeable!ATTENTION: Enabling the Bipolar Direction Mode can cause unexpected direction changes. Equipmentdamage and/or personal injury can result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application. Do Not usethis function without considering all applicable local, national, and international codes standards, regulations,or industry guidelines.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-44 Programming and ParametersFileGroupDRIVE CFGControl CfgNo.309310311312NameDescriptionValuesSpdTrqPsn Mode ADefault:SpdTrqPsn Mode BOptions:SpdTrqPsn Mode CSpdTrqPsn Mode DSpeed Torque Position Mode AApplies only to the Flux Vector control modes in P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode]. It selectsbetween speed regulation, torque regulation, or position regulation operation ofthe drive. The source of P685 [Selected Trq Ref] will be determined by theselection in this parameter when P181 [DI SpTqPs Sel 0] and P182 [DI SpTqPsSel 1] have selected “Disabled” or selected bits that are logic low.In P935 [Drive Status 1] three bits are provided that indicate the regulation modeof the drive when it is running. Bit 21 “Speed Mode” will become set when thedrive is running with the speed regulator active. Similarly, Bit 22 “PositionMode”and Bit 23 “Torque Mode” indicate when their respective regulation modes areactive.Under some conditions, the active torque mode may be forced into speed moderegardless of the setting of Speed/Torque/Position. The P313 [Actv SpTqPsMode] parameter will indicate this and will reflect the mode selection that is inuse.Possible selections for Speed/Torque/Position are:“Zero Torque” (0) – Drive operates as a torque regulator with P685 [Selected TrqRef] forced to a constant value of zero torque.“Speed Reg” (1) – Drive operates as a speed regulator. P685 [Selected Trq Ref]comes from P660 [SReg Output] plus P699 [Inertia Comp Out].“Torq Ref” (2) – Drive operates as a torque regulator. P685 [Selected Trq Ref]comes from P4 [Commanded Trq]. Under some conditions such as jogging orperforming a ramp to stop operation, the drive will automatically bypass thisselection and temporarily switch to speed regulation mode.“SLAT Min” (3) – Drive operates in “Speed Limited Adjustable Torque – Minimumselect” mode. This is a special mode of operation used primarily in winderapplications. The drive will typically operate as a torque regulator, provided thatthe P4 [Commanded Trq] value is algebraically smaller in value than the speedregulator’s output. The drive may automatically enter speed regulation mode,based on conditions within the speed regulator and the magnitude of the speedregulator’s output relative to the torque reference.“SLAT Max” (4) – Drive operates in “Speed Limited Adjustable Torque –Maximum select” mode. This is a special mode of operation used primarily inwinder applications. The drive will typically operate as a torque regulator,provided that the P4 [Commanded Trq] value is algebraically larger in value thanthe speed regulator’s output. The drive may automatically enter speed regulationmode, based on conditions within the speed regulator and the magnitude of thespeed regulator’s output relative to the torque reference.“Sum” (5) – Drive operates as a speed regulator. P685 [Selected Trq Ref] comesfrom P660 [SReg Output] plus torque adders summed with P4 [Commanded Trq].“Profilier” (6) – Drive uses the Speed Profiler / Position Indexer function. The driveoperates as either a speed or position regulator. Mode of operation will dependon the configuration of the Step Types in the Profiler / Indexer table.“Psn PTP” (7) – Drive operates as a position regulator. P685 [Selected Trq Ref]has the same source as in Sum mode. The position control is active inPoint-to-Point mode and uses its Point-to-point position reference.“Psn Camming” (8) – Drive operates as a position regulator. P685 [Selected TrqRef] has the same source as in Sum mode. The position control is active inPosition CAM mode and uses its PCAM Planner position and speed reference.“Psn PLL” (9) – Drive operates as a position regulator. P685 [Selected Trq Ref]has the same source as in Sum mode. The position control is active in PositionPhase Lock Loop mode and uses its PLL Planner position and speed reference.“Psn Direct” (10) – Drive operates as a position regulator. P685 [Selected TrqRef] has the same source as in Sum mode. The position control is active in Directmode and uses its Direct Position Reference.1 = “Speed Reg”0 = “Zero Torque”1 = “Speed Reg”2 = “Torque Reg”3 = “SLAT Min”4 = “SLAT Max”5 = “Sum”6 = “Profilier” 7557 = “Psn PTP”8 = “Psn Camming”9 = “Psn PLL”10 = “Psn Direct”755755Read-WriteData TypeRW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-45FileGroupDRIVE CFGControl CfgNo.NameDescription313 Actv SpTqPs ModeActive Speed Torque Position ModeDisplays the Speed, Torque, Position Mode that is active, based on the dynamicselection of modes A, B, C, and D, per P309…P312, and digital input conditionsprogrammed via P181 and P182. In some cases, such as operation in the SLATmin/max modes, the final regulation mode may be forced into Speed Regulation.Refer to the Speed, Torque, and Position mode bits in P935 [Drive Status 1] thatindicate the final regulation mode of the drive when it is running.314 SLAT Err StptSpeed Limited Adjustable Torque, Error SetpointSets the magnitude of P641 [Speed Error] at which the SLAT function will releaseits Forced Speed Mode signal. This condition must exist for the time specified byP315 [SLAT Dwell Time]. Once released, the drive can operate as a torqueregulator, depending on the relative levels of P660 [SReg Output] and P4[Commanded Trq]. This parameter will be entered in units of Hz or RPM,depending on the value of P300 [Speed Units].315 SLAT Dwell TimeSpeed Limited Adjustable Torque, Dwell TimeSets the time period that P641 [Speed Error] must exceed the P314 [SLAT ErrStpt] magnitude in order to return to min/max torque mode.321 Prchrg ControlPrecharge ControlWhen disabled, the drive will stay in the precharge mode and will not be able torun. When enabled, the normal precharge operation is run. This parameterallows programmable control of the completion of the precharge function andmay be used to coordinate the precharge of a system of drives or to reset P12[DC Bus Memory] in the drive.322 Prchrg DelayPrecharge DelayAdjustable delay between the time all other precharge conditions have been metand the time the drive leaves the precharge state. This can be used to control thesequences of precharge completion in a drive system.323 Prchrg Err CfgPrecharge Error ConfirgurationSelects the action to take when P190 [DI Prchrg Seal] is used to indicate that anexternal precharge circuit has opened.ValuesDefault:Options:Units:Default:Min/Max:1 = “Speed Reg”0 = “Zero Torque”1 = “Speed Reg”2 = “Torque Reg”3 = “SLAT Min”4 = “SLAT Max”5 = “Sum”6 = “Profilier” 7557 = “Psn PTP”8 = “Psn Camming”9 = “Psn PLL” 75510 = “Psn Direct”HzRPM0.000.00 / P27 [Motor NP Hertz]0.00 / P28 [Motor NP RPM]Units: SecsDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 2.00Default:Options:1 = “Enabled”0 = “Disabled”1 = “Enabled”Units: SecsDefault: 0.50Min/Max: 0.10 / 30.00Default:Options:3 = “FltCoastStop”3 = “FltCoastStop”4 = “Flt RampStop”5 = “Flt CL Stop”755Read-WriteRO32-bitIntegerRW RealRW RealRW 32-bitIntegerRW RealData TypeRW 32-bitIntegerFileGroupDRIVE CFGAuto Manual CtrlNo.NameDescriptionValues324 Logic MaskLogic MaskEnables/disables ports to control the logic command (such as start and direction).OptionsReservedPort 14Port 13ReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedPort 6Port 5Port 4Port 3Port 2Port 1Digital InDefault 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueRead-WriteData TypePowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-46 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type325 Auto MaskAutomatic MaskEnables/disables ports to control the logic command (such as start and direction), while in Auto mode.OptionsReservedPort 14Port 13ReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedPort 6Port 5Port 4Port 3Port 2Port 1Digital InDefault 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition True326 Manual Cmd MaskManual Command MaskEnables/disables ports to control the logic command (such as start and direction), while in Manual Mode.OptionsReservedPort 14Port 13ReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedPort 6Port 5Port 4Port 3Port 2Port 1Digital InDefault 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition True327 Manual Ref MaskManual Reference MaskEnables/disables ports to control the speed reference while in Manual Mode. When a port is commanding manual mode, the reference is forced tothe commanding port (or alternate source selected by P328 [Alt Man Ref Sel]), if the respective bit in this parameter is set.DRIVE CFGAuto Manual CtrlOptionsReservedPort 14Port 13ReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedPort 6Port 5Port 4Port 3Port 2Port 1Digital InDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition True328 Alt Man Ref SelAlternate Manual Reference SelectProvides a way to select a speed reference source when in manual mode, that isdifferent than the port which is actuating the manual request. Specifies the port tobe used for the reference. The default setting (0) results in the actuating portbeing the one that is used for the manual reference.329 Alt Man Ref AnHiAlternate Manual Reference Analog HighHi scale for the alternate manual speed reference when P328 [Alt Man Ref Sel] isconnected to an Analog Input.330 Alt Man Ref AnLoAlternate Manual Reference Analog LowLo scale for the alternate manual speed reference when P328 [Alt Man Ref Sel] isconnected to an Analog Input.Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999Units:Default:Min/Max:Units:Default:Min/Max:HzRPMP520P521 / P520HzRPM0P521 / P520331 Manual PreloadManual PreloadEnables/disables automatic preloading of the “Auto” speed reference into a HIM when the HIM has been granted Manual control.RW 32-bitIntegerRW RealRW RealOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedPort 3Port 2Port 1ReservedDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TruePowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-47FileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData TypeDRIVE CFGDrive Memory336 Reset MetersReset MetersResets selected meters to zero. The value will automatically be returned to 0.Default:Options:0 = “Ready”0 = “Ready”1 = “MWH and kWh”2 = “Elapsed Time”RW 32-bitIntegerFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type345 Start At PowerUpStart At Power UpEnables/disables a feature to issue a Start or Run command and automaticallyresume running at commanded speed after drive input power is restored.Requires a digital input configured for Run or Start and a valid start contact.Default:Options:0 = “Disabled”0 = “Disabled”1 = “Enabled”RW 32-bitInteger!ATTENTION: Equipment damage and/or personal injury may result if this parameter is used in aninappropriate application. Do not use this function without considering applicable local, national andinternational codes, standards, regulations or industry guidelines.346 PowerUp DelayPower Up DelayDefines the programmed delay time, in seconds, before a start commend isaccepted after power up.Units: SecsDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 10800.00RW RealDRIVE CFGStart Features347 Auto Retry FaultAutomatic Retry FaultEnables Retries Exhausted fault action.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedAttmpsExhstdDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition True348 Auto Rstrt TriesDefault: 0Automatic Restart TriesMin/Max: 0 / 9Sets the maximum number of times the drive attempts to reset a fault and restart.RW 32-bitInteger!ATTENTION: Equipment damage and/or personal injury may result if this parameter is used in aninappropriate application. Do not use this function without considering applicable local, national andinternational codes, standards, regulations or industry guidelines.349 Auto Rstrt DelayAutomatic Restart DelaySets the time between restart attempts when 348 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is set to avalue other than zero.Units: SecsDefault: 1.00Min/Max: 0.50 / 30.00RW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-48 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNo.NameDescription350 Sleep Wake ModeSleep Wake ModeEnables/disables the Sleep/Wake function.Important: When enabled, the following conditions must be met:• A proper value must be programmed for 352 [Sleep Level] and 354 [WakeLevel].• A sleep / wake reference must be selected in 351 [SleepWake RefSel].• At least one of the following must be programmed (and input closed) in P155[DI Enable], P158 [DI Stop], P163 [DI Run], P164 [DI Run Forward], or P165[DI Run Reverse].ValuesDefault:Options:Read-WriteData Type0 = “Disabled”RW 32-bit0 = “Disabled”Integer1 = “Direct” (Enabled)2 = “Invert” (Enabled) (7)!ATTENTION: Enabling the Sleep/Wake function can cause unexpected machine operation during the Wakemode. Equipment damage and/or personal injury can result if this parameter is used in an inappropriateapplication. Do Not use this function without considering the information below. In addition, all applicablelocal, national, and international codes, standards, regulations, or industry guidelines must be considered.DRIVE CFGStart FeaturesInputStopEnableAfter Power-Up After a Drive Fault After a Stop CommandReset by Stop-CF,HIM or TBStop ClosedStop ClosedWake SignalWake SignalNew Start or Run Cmd. (4)Enable ClosedWake Signal (4)Run Run ClosedRun For. Wake SignalRun Rev.Reset by ClearFaults (TB)HIM or TBStop Closed Stop ClosedWake Signal Direct ModeNew Start or Run Cmd. (4) Analog Sig. > Sleep Level (6)Invert ModeAnalog Sig. < Sleep Level (6)New Start or Run Cmd. (4)Enable Closed Enable Closed Enable ClosedWake SignalWake Signal Direct ModeNew Start or Run Cmd. (4) Analog Sig. > Sleep Level (6)Invert ModeAnalog Sig. < Sleep Level (6)New Start or Run Cmd. (4)New Run Cmd. (5)Wake SignalRun ClosedWake SignalNew Run Cmd. (5)Wake Signal(1)When power is cycled, if all of the above conditions are present after power is restored, restart will occur.(2)If all of the above conditions are present when [Sleep-Wake Mode] is “enabled,” the drive will start.(3)The active speed reference. The Sleep/Wake function and the speed reference may be assigned to the same input.(4)Command must be issued from HIM, TB, or network.(5)Run Command must be cycled.(6)Signal does not need to be greater than wake level.(7)For Invert function, refer to P53/63 [Anlg InX LssActn] on the I/O module.351 SleepWake RefSelSleep Wake Reference SelectSelects the source of the input controlling the Sleep-Wake function.Default:Min/Max:0 (Disabled)0 / 159999352 Sleep LevelSleep LevelDefines the analog input level that will stop the drive.Units:Default:Min/Max:353 Sleep TimeSleep TimeUnits:Default:Secs0.00Defines the amount of time at or below 352 [Sleep Level] before a Stop is issued. Min/Max: 0.00 / 1000.00VAC, P351 = 0 (Disabled)VAC or mA, P351 = not 0 (Port X DeviceJumper Setting)5.00 VAC (P351 = 0)5.00 VAC / 0.00 mA (Port X DeviceJumper Setting)0.00 / 10.00 VAC0.00 / 20.00 mARW 32-bitIntegerRW RealRW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-49FileDRIVE CFGGroupStart FeaturesNameNo. Description354 Wake LevelWake LevelDefines the analog input level that will start the drive.Units:Default:Min/Max:355 Wake TimeWake TimeUnits:Default:Secs0.00Defines the amount of time at or above 354 [Wake Level] before a Start is issued. Min/Max: 0.00 / 1000.0356 FlyingStart ModeFlying Start ModeEnables/disables the function which reconnects to a spinning motor at actualRPM when a start command is issued.357 FS GainFlying Start GainP356 [FlyingStart Mode] = 1 “Enhanced”: Proportional term used in the currentregulator which controls the reconnect function.P356 [FlyingStart Mode] = 2 “Sweep”: Time required for the speed detectionsignal to remain at the programmed level (P360). Units of 50 µs.358 FS KiFlying Start Intergal GainP356 [FlyingStart Mode] = 1 “Enhanced”: Integral term used in the currentregulator which controls the reconnect function.P356 [FlyingStart Mode] = 2 “Sweep”: Integral term used in the voltage recoveryto the normal V/Hz level.359 FS Speed Reg KiFlying Start Speed Regulator Intergal GainP356 [FlyingStart Mode] = 1 “Enhanced”: Integral term used in the speedregulator which controls the reconnect function.P356 [FlyingStart Mode] = 2 “Sweep”: Time to sweep frequency in one direction.Units of 10 µs.360 FS Speed Reg KpFlying Start Speed Regulator Proportional GainP356 [FlyingStart Mode] = 1 “Enhanced”: Proportional term used in the speedregulator which controls the reconnect function.P356 [FlyingStart Mode] = 2 “Sweep”: Programmed level for the speed detectionsignal. The monitored signal needs to drop below this level to indicate motorspeed.361 FS Excitation KiFlying Start Excitation Intergal GainP356 [FlyingStart Mode] = 1 “Enhanced”: Integral term used in the currentregulator which controls the excitation function when the need is determined bythe reconnect function.P356 [FlyingStart Mode] = 2 “Sweep”: Integral term used to control initial outputvoltage.362 FS Excitation KpFlying Start Excitation Proportional GainP356 [FlyingStart Mode] = 1 “Enhanced”: Proportional term used in the currentregulator which controls the excitation function when the need is determined bythe reconnect function.P356 [FlyingStart Mode] = 2 “Sweep”: Proportional term used to control initialoutput voltage.ValuesDefault:Options:VAC, P351 = 0 (Disabled)VAC or mA, P351 = not 0 (Port X DeviceJumper Setting)6.00 VAC (P351 = 0)6.00 VAC / 12.00 mA (Port X DeviceJumper Setting)0.00 / 10.00 VAC0.00 / 20.00 mA0 = “Disabled”0 = “Disabled”1 = “Enhanced”2 = “Sweep”Default: 1200.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 10000.0Default: 60.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 1000.0Default: 100.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 10000.0Default: 75.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 100000.0Default: 60.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 32767.0Default: 1200.00Min/Max: 0.0 / 32767.0Read-WriteRW RealRW RealRW 32-bitIntegerRW RealRW RealRW RealRW RealRW RealRW RealData TypePowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-50 Programming and ParametersFileGroupValuesRead-WriteData TypeDRIVE CFGStart FeaturesNameNo. Description363 FS Reconnect DlyFlying Start Reconnect DelayDelay time used between the issued start command and the start of thereconnect function.364 FS Msrmnt CurLvlFlying Start Measurement Current LevelP356 [FlyingStart Mode] = 1 “Enhanced”: Level of the current used during themeasurement stage of the reconnect function.P356 [FlyingStart Mode] = 2 “Sweep”: Adjustment for the V/Hz end point. Used tochange the slope of the V/Hz curve during the frequency sweep.Units: SecsDefault: 50.00Min/Max: 0.10 / 10000.00Default: 44.97Min/Max: 0.00 / 4096.00RW RealRW RealFileGroupNo.370371NameDescriptionStop Mode AStop Mode BStop Mode A, BMethod of stopping the drive when a stop command is given. Normal Stopcommand and the RUN input changing from true to false will command a NormalStop.ValuesRead-WriteData Type“Coast” (0) – Power removed from motor, motor coasts to zero.“Ramp” (1) – Decelerates to zero speed at the decel rate.“Ramp to Hold” (2) – Decelerates to zero speed at the decel rate, followed by DCbraking until the next start sequence.“DC Brake” (3) – DC braking is immediately applied (does not follow programmeddecel ramp).“DCBrkAutoOff” (4) – Applies DC braking until zero speed is reached or DC braketime is reached, whichever is shorter.“Current Lmt” (5) – Max torque / current applied until zero speed“Fast Brake” (6) – High slip braking for maximum braking performance abovebase speed.Bus Reg Mode ABus Reg Mode BBus Regulation Mode A, BMethod and sequence of the DC bus regulator voltage. Choices are dynamicbrake, frequency adjust or both. Sequence is determined by programming ordigital input to the terminal block.Dynamic Brake SetupIf a dynamic brake resistor is connected to the drive, both of these parametersmust be set to either option 2, 3 or 4.DefaultOptions:1 = “Ramp”0 = “Coast”0 = “Coast”1 = “Ramp”2 = “Ramp to Hold”3 = “DC Brake”4 = “DCBrkAutoOff”5 = “Current Lmt”6 = “Fast Brake”RW 32-bitIntegerDRIVE CFGBraking Features372373Default:Options:1 = “Adjust Freq”4 = “Both-Frq 1st”0 = “Disabled”1 = “Adjust Freq”2 = “Dyn Brake”3 = “Both-DB 1st”4 = “Both-Frq 1st”RW 32-bitInteger!ATTENTION: The drive does not offer protection for externally-mounted brake resistors. A risk of fireexists if external braking resistors are not protected. External resistor packages must be self-protected fromover-temperature or the protective circuit shown in Figure C.1 on page C-2 (or equivalent) must be supplied.374 Bus Reg Lvl CfgBus Regulation Level ConfigurationSelects the reference used to determine the bus voltage regulation level for thebus voltage regulator and the reference used for the dynamic brake.“Bus Memory” (0) – References are determined based on P12 [DC Bus Memory].“BusReg Level” (1) – References are determined based on the voltage set in thebus regulator level parameter P375 [Bus Reg Level]. If coordinated operation ofthe dynamic brakes of a common bus system is desired, use this selection andset the P375 [Bus Reg Level] to coordinate the brake operation of the commonbus drives.Default:Options:0 = “Bus Memory”0 = “Bus Memory”1 = “BusReg Level”RW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-51FileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type375 Bus Reg LevelBus Regulation LevelSets the “turn-on” bus voltage level for the bus voltage regulator and the dynamicbrake.Units:Default:Min/Max:VDCP20 < 252V DC: 375P20 = 252…503V DC: 750P20 = 504…629V DC: 937P20 > 629V DC: 1076P20 < 252V DC: 375/389P20 = 252…503V DC: 750/779P20 = 504…629V DC: 937/974P20 > 629V DC: 1076/1118RW Real376 Bus Limit KpBus Limit Proportional GainNot functional when any of the FV motor control modes are selected.377 Bus Limit KdBus Limit Derivative GainNot functional when any of the FV motor control modes are selected.378 Bus Limit ACR KiBus Limit Active Current Regulator Integral GainNot functional when any of the FV motor control modes are selected.379 Bus Limit ACR KpBus Limit Active Current Regulator Proportional GainNot functional when any of the FV motor control modes are selected.380 Bus Reg KiBus Regulator Integral GainIntegral gain for the bus voltage regulator. Sets the responsiveness of the busvoltage regulator.381 Bus Reg KpBus Regulator Proportional GainProportional gain for the bus voltage regulator. Sets the responsiveness of thebus voltage regulator.Units: A/VDefault: 1170.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 1000000.0RW RealUnits: SecsDefault: 152.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 1000000.0RW RealDefault: 2045.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 50000.0RW RealUnits: Hz/ADefault: 524.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 100000.0RW RealDefault: 100.000Min/Max: 0.000 / 65535.000RW RealDRIVE CFGBraking Features382 DB Resistor TypeDynamic Brake Resistor TypeSelects whether the internal or external DB protection will be used.Important: Only one DB resistor can be connected to Frame 2 drives. If anexternal dynamic brake is used with a Frame 2 drive, the internal dynamic brakeresistor must be disconnected. Connecting both an internal and external resistoris likely to cause drive damage. If a dynamic brake resistor is connected to thedrive, P372 [Bus Reg Mode A] and P373 [Bus Reg Mode B] must be set to eitheroption 2, 3, or 4; otherwise the dynamic brake will not turn on.Default: 10.000Min/Max: 0.000 / 65535.000Default:Options:0 = “Internal”0 = “Internal”1 = “External”RW RealRW 32-bitInteger!ATTENTION: Equipment damage may result if a drive mounted (internal) resistor is installed and thisparameter is set to “External.” Thermal protection for the internal resistor will be disabled, resulting inpossible device damage.ATTENTION: The drive does not offer protection for externally-mounted brake resistors. A risk of fireexists if external braking resistors are not protected. External resistor packages must be self-protected fromover-temperature or the protective circuit shown in Figure C.1 on page C-2 (or equivalent) must be supplied.383 DB Ext OhmsDynamic Brake External OhmsCalculates the maximum negative torque available from the dynamic brake and isused for the external resistor dynamic brake protection.384 DB Ext WattsDynamic Brake External WattsSets the continuous rated power reference for the external dynamic brakeresistor. Only valid when an external dynamic brake resistor is selected (P382[DB Resistor Type] = 1 “External”). The DB continuous watts are used in thedynamic brake thermal protection algorithm.Important: If customer-supplied protection is to be used in place of the drive’scalculated resistor thermal protection, set the [DB Ext Watts] to its maximumvalue.Units: OhmsDefault: Based on Drive RatingMin/Max: Internal / 10000Units: WattDefault: 100.00Min/Max: 1.00 / 500000.00RW RealRW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-52 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type385 DB ExtPulseWattsDynamic Brake External Pulse WattsSets the thermal transient response of the external dynamic brake resistordefined by the maximum allowable power to the dynamic brake resistor for 1second without exceeding the resistor’s element temperature. This parameter isonly valid when an external dynamic brake resistor is selected (P382 [DBResistor Type] = 1 “External”). If this value is not available from the resistorvendor it can be approximated by 1 or 2 below:1. [DB ExtPulseWatts] = 75,000 x weight (lbs), where weight is the weight of theresistor wire in pounds (not the weight of the entire resistor).2. [DB ExtPulseWatts] = Time Constant x Brake Watts, where the Time Constantequals the amount of time to reach 63% of its rated temperature while themaximum power is applied to the resistor and Brake Watts is the maximumcontinuous power rating of the resistor.Important: If customer supplied protection is to be used in place of the drive’scalculated resistor thermal protection, set the [DB ExtPulse Watts] to itsmaximum value.Units: WattDefault: 2000.00Min/Max: 1.00 / 100000000.00RW Real388 Flux Braking EnFlux Braking EnableDisplays a value of 1 when flux braking is active and 0 when flux braking is notactive.Default:Options:0 = “Disabled”0 = “Disabled”1 = “Enabled”RW 32-bitInteger389 Flux Braking LmtFlux Braking LimitSets the limit on the desired motor voltage during flux braking as a percent of P25[Motor NP Volts].Units: %Default: 125.00Min/Max: 100.00 / 250.00RW RealDRIVE CFGBraking Features390 Flux Braking KiFlux Braking Integral GainFlux braking controller integral gain.391 Flux Braking KpFlux Braking Proportional GainFlux braking controller proportional gain.393 DC Brake Lvl SelDC Brake Level SelectSets link to source used for P394 [DC Brake Level].Default: 10000.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 1000000.0Default: 100.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 1000000.0Default: 394Min/Max: 1 / 159999RW RealRW RealRW 32-bitInteger394 DC Brake LevelDC Brake LevelDefines the DC brake current level injected into the motor when [Stop Mode x] =3 “DC Brake.” This also sets the braking current level when 6 “Fast Stop” isselected.The DC braking voltage used in this function is created by a PWM algorithm andmay not generate the smooth holding force needed for some applications.Units: AmpsDefault: [Rated Amps]Min/Max: P21 [Rated Amps] x 0.01 / Based onDrive RatingRW Real!ATTENTION: If a hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or material exists, an auxiliarymechanical braking device must be used.ATTENTION: This feature should not be used with synchronous or permanent magnet motors. Motors maybe demagnetized during braking.395 DC Brake TimeDC Brake TimeSets the amount of time DC brake current is “injected” into the motor.When the active stop mode, P370/371 [Stop Mode X] = 2 “Ramp to Hold,” thisparameter is ignored and DC braking is applied continuously.396 DC Brake KiDC Brake Integral GainSets the integral term used in the current regulator which controls the DC Brakefunction.Units: SecsDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 90.00Default: 10.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 1000.0RW RealRW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-53FileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type397 DC Brake KpDC Brake Proportional GainSets the proportional term used in the current regulator which controls the DCBrake function.Default: 1000.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 10000.0RW Real398 DC Brk Vq FltrDC Brake Vq FilterSets the level of filtering used on the Vq signal when the active stop mode P370/371 [Stop Mode X] = 4 “DCBrkAutoOff.”Default: 250.0Min/Max: 50.0 / 2000.0RW Real399 DC Brk Vd FltrDC Brake Vd FilterSets the level of filtering used on the Vd signal when the active stop mode P370/371 [Stop Mode X] = 4 “DCBrkAutoOff.”Default: 250.0Min/Max: 50.0 / 2000.0RW RealDRIVE CFGBraking Features400 Fast Braking KiFast Braking Integral GainSets the integral term used in the speed regulator which controls the Fast Brakingfunction.401 Fast Braking KpFast Braking Proportional GainSets the proportional term used in the speed regulator which controls the FastBraking function.402 Brake Off Adj 1Brake Off Adjustment 1When Fast Braking is the selected Stop Mode, this parameter sets the powersensitivity to transition from Fast Braking to DC Brake. When DC Brake w/AutoShutOff is selected, this parameter sets the level sensitivity for shut off.Default: 0.10Min/Max: 0.00 / 10.00Default: 0.0015Min/Max: 0.0000 / 10.0000Default: 1.00Min/Max: 0.01 / 5.00RW RealRW RealRW Real403 Brake Off Adj 2Brake Off Adjustment 2When Fast Braking is the selected Stop Mode, this parameter sets the frequencysensitivity to transition from Fast Braking to DC Brake. When DC Brake w/AutoShutOff is selected, this parameter sets the time sensitivity for shut off.Default: 1.00Min/Max: 0.01 / 5.00RW Real409 Dec Inhibit ActnDeceleration Inhibit ActionConfigures the response to a Decel Inhibit condition, which occurs when the driveis not decelerating due to bus voltage regulation.Default:Options:3 = “FltCoastStop”0 = “Ignore”1 = “Alarm”2 = “Flt Minor”3 = “FltCoastStop”RW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-54 Programming and ParametersDrive Protection FileFileGroupNameNo. Description410 Motor OL ActnMotor Overload ActionConfigures the response to a motor overload condition.ValuesRead-WriteData TypeDefault:Options:3 = “FltCoastStop”0 = “Ignore”1 = “Alarm”2 = “Flt Minor”3 = “FltCoastStop”4 = “Flt RampStop”5 = “Flt CL Stop”RW 32-bitInteger411 Mtr OL at Pwr UpMotor Overload At Power UpSelects the mode to use for initial value of the motor overload counter, upon drivepower-up.Default:Options:0 = “Assume Cold”0 = “Assume Cold”1 = “UseLastValue”2 = “RealTimeClk”RW 32-bitInteger412 Mtr OL Alarm LvlMotor Overload Alarm LevelSets the level of P418 [Mtr OL Counts] for which a motor overload alarm willoccur. Useful to provide warning prior to the drive taking action that is selected byP410 [Motor OL Actn]. This alarm level is different than , and independent of, the“Alarm” action selected by P410 [Motor OL Actn].Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 100.00RW RealPROTECTIONMotor Overload413 Mtr OL FactorMotor Overload FactorSets the minimum level of current (in percent or P26 [Motor NP Amps]) thatcauses the motor overload counter to increment. Current levels below this valuewill decrement the overload counter. For example, a service factor of 1.15 impliescontinuous operation up to 115% of nameplate motor current.414 Mtr OL HertzMotor Overload HertzSelects the output frequency below which the motor operating current is derated(more sensitive) to account for the reduced self-cooling capability of typicalmotors, operating at slower speeds. For motors with extra low speed coolingcapacity (e.g. 10:1 or blower cooled), reduce this setting to take full advantage ofthe motor being used.Default: 1.00Min/Max: 0.20 / 2.00Units: HzDefault: 20.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 4096RW RealRW Real415 Mtr OL Reset LvlMotor Overload Reset LevelSets the level that resets a motor overload condition, and allows a fault (ifselected as the motor overload action) to be manually reset.416 MtrOL Reset TimeMotor Overload Reset TimeDisplays the time it will take to restart the drive after a motor overload fault hasoccurred and the value in P418 [Mtr OL Counts] is less than the P415 [Mtr OLReset Lvl].418 Mtr OL CountsMotor Overload CountsAccumulated percentage of motor overload. Continuously operating the motorover 100% of the motor overload setting will increase this value to 100% andcause the action selected in P410 [Motor OL Actn] to be taken.Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 100.00RW RealUnits: SecsDefault: 0.00Min/Max: –/+99999.00RW RealUnits: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: 0.0 / 100.00ROReal419 Mtr OL Trip TimeMotor Overload Trip timeDisplays the inverse of the motor overload time, equal to the number of secondsbefore P418 [Mtr OL Counts] reaches 100%, and the motor overload action istaken.Units: SecsDefault: 99999Min/Max: 0 / 99999RO32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-55FileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type420 Drive OL ModeDrive Overload ModeSelects the action to take when the drive detects that it is being overloaded.Reducing current limit and / or PWM frequency may allow the drive to continuerunning without faulting. When using a sine wave output filter, set this parameterto 1 “Reduce CLmt” or 0 “Disabled.”Default:Options:3 = “Both-PWM1rst”0 = “Disabled”1 = “Reduce CLmt”2 = “Reduce PWM”3 = “Both-PWM1rst”RW 32-bitInteger421 Current Lmt SelCurrent Limit SelectSelects the source for the current limit value. When the load is large enough tocause current that equals or exceeds this value, the output frequency willautomatically adjust (increase or decrease, as required) to attempt limiting theoutput current to this value.Default:Options:4221 / 159999RW 32-bitIntegerPROTECTIONLoad Limits422423Current Limit 1Current Limit 2Current Limit 1, 2Constant values that can be used as sources for P421 [Current Lmt Sel].424 Active Cur LmtActive Current LimitDisplays the current that is actively being used, including the automatic foldbackeffect from the drive overload function (see P420 [Drive OL Mode]).Units: AmpsDefault: Based on Drive RatingMin/Max: Based on Drive RatingUnits: AmpsDefault: 0.00Min/Max: –/+P26 [Motor NP Amps] x 8RW RealROReal425 Current Rate LmtCurrent Rate LimitSets the largest allowable rate of change for the torque producing currentreference (Iq). This number is scaled in percent of rated motor current for every250 microseconds.Units: %Default: 400.00Min/Max: 1.00 / 800.00RW Real426 Regen Power LmtRegenerative Power LimitSets the limit for power flow from the motor to the drive (regenerating).Units: %Default: –50.00Min/Max: –800.00 / 0.00RW Real427 Motor Power LmtMotor Power LimitSets the limit for power flow from the drive to the motor (motoring).Units: %Default: 200.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 800.00RW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-56 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type428 Current Limit KdCurrent Limit Derivative GainDerivative gain for the current limit function. This parameter is not functionalwhen any of the FV motor control modes are selected.Units: SecsDefault: 760.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 1000000.0RW Real429 Current Limit KiCurrent Limit Integral GainIntegral gain for the current limit function. This parameter is not functional whenany of the FV motor control modes are selected.Default: 680.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 10000.0RW Real430 Current Limit KpCurrent Limit Proportional GainProportional gain for the current limit function. This parameter is not functionalwhen any of the FV motor control modes are selected.Units: Hz/ADefault: 290.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 1000000.0RW Real431 Id Lo FreqCur KpId Low Frequency Current KpCurrent limit proportional gain active at very low operating frequencies. Thisparameter is not functional when any of the FV motor control modes are selected.Units:Default:Min/Max:V/A50.00.0 / 100000.0RW Real432 Iq Lo FreqCur KpIq Low Frequency Current KpCurrent limit proportional gain active at very low operating frequencies. Thisparameter is not functional when any of the FV motor control modes are selected.Units:Default:Min/Max:V/A50.00.0 / 100000.0RW Real433 Jerk GainJerk GainAllows you to adjust the amount of S Curve or “Jerk” applied to the Accel/Decelrate.Default: 5200.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 1000000000.0RW RealPROTECTIONLoad Limits434 Shear Pin CfgShear Pin ConfigureConfigures operation of the shear pin function.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedShear2NoAccShear1NoAccDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition True435438436439437440Bit 0 “Shear1NoAcc” – 0 = Active during acceleration, 1 = Ignore during accelerationBit 1 “Shear2NoAcc” – 0 = Active during acceleration, 1 = Ignore during accelerationShear Pin 1 ActnShear Pin 2 ActnShear Pin 1 ActionShear Pin 2 ActionConfigures the action to take when the output current is greater than or equal to[Shear PinX Level] for the amount of time set in [Shear Pin X Time]. These twoindependent shear pin functions can be set up to achieve the equivalent ofexternal overloads that have “stall” and “jam” indication.Shear Pin1 LevelShear Pin2 LevelShear Pin 1 LevelShear Pin 2 LevelSets the value of current which will activate the shear pin function (see [Shear PinX Actn]).Shear Pin 1 TimeShear Pin 2 TimeShear Pin 1 TimeShear Pin 2 TimeSets the time associated with activation of the shear pin function (see [Shear PinX Actn]).Default:Options:0 = “Ignore”0 = “Ignore”1 = “Alarm”2 = “Flt Minor”3 = “FltCoastStop”4 = “Flt RampStop”5 = “Flt CL Stop”Units: AmpsDefault: P21 [Rated Amps]Min/Max: 0.0 / P21 [Rated Amps] x 1.5Units: SecsDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 30.00RW 32-bitIntegerRW RealRW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-57FileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type441 Load Loss ActionLoad Loss ActionConfigures the action to take when the load is less than or equal to P442 [LoadLoss Level] for the amount of time set in P443 [Load Loss Time].Default:Options:0 = “Ignore”0 = “Ignore”1 = “Alarm”2 = “Flt Minor”3 = “FltCoastStop”4 = “Flt RampStop”5 = “Flt CL Stop”RW 32-bitInteger442 Load Loss LevelLoad Loss LevelSets the percentage of motor nameplate torque (absolute value) associated withactivation of the load loss function (see P441 [Load Loss Action]).Units: %Default: 200.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 800.00RW RealPROTECTIONLoad Limits443 Load Loss TimeLoad Loss TimeSets the time associated with activation of the load loss function (see P441 [LoadLoss Action]).444 OutPhaseLossActnOutput Phase Loss ActionSelects action to take if output phase loss is detected.Units: SecsDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 300.00Default:Options:0 = “Ignore”0 = “Ignore”1 = “Alarm”2 = “Flt Minor”3 = “FltCoastStop”4 = “Flt RampStop”5 = “Flt CL Stop”RW RealRW 32-bitInteger445 Out PhaseLossLvlOutput Phase Loss LevelSets the threshold level which is used to determine an output phase losscondition.Default: 200Min/Max: 0 / 1000RW 32-bitIntegerFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type449 Power Loss ActnPower Loss ActionConfigures the drive’s response to a power loss timeout condition.Default:Options:1 = “Alarm”0 = “Ignore”1 = “Alarm”2 = “Flt Minor”3 = “FltCoastStop”RW 32-bitInteger450453Pwr Loss Mode APwr Loss Mode BPower Loss Mode A, BConfigures the drive’s response to a loss of input power as sensed by a drop inbus voltage. The bus voltage drop is specified in [Pwr Loss X Level] andcompared to the bus voltage memory P12 [DC Bus Memory].Default:Options:0 = “Coast”0 = “Coast”1 = “Decel”2 = “Continue”RW 32-bitIntegerPROTECTIONPower Loss451454Pwr Loss A LevelPwr Loss B LevelPower Loss Mode A, B LevelSets the bus voltage level at which ride-through begins and modulation ends.When bus voltage falls below this level, the drive prepares for an automaticrestart. Enter a percentage of the bus voltage derived from the high voltagesetting for the voltage class.For example: on a 400/480V drive,Units: VDCDefault: P20 [Rated Volts] x 0.3913Min/Max: 0.0 / P20 [Rated Volts] x 1.41RW Real0.221 × 480VAC × 2 = 150VDC452455Pwr Loss A TimePwr Loss B TimePower Loss Mode A, B TimeSets the time that the drive will remain in power loss mode before a fault isdetected.Units: SecsDefault: 2.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 60.00RW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-58 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type456 PwrLoss RT BusKpPower Loss Ride Through Bus KpProportional gain that adjusts the response of the bus regulator when power lossride through is enabled and detected. This parameter is not functional when anyof the FV motor control modes are selected.Units: A/VDefault: 585.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 1000000.0RW Real457 PwrLoss RT BusKdPower Loss Ride Through Bus KdDerivative gain that adjusts the response of the bus regulator when power lossride through is enabled and detected. This parameter is not functional when anyof the FV motor control modes are selected.Units: SecsDefault: 50.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 1000000.0RW Real458 PwrLoss RT ACRKpPower Loss Ride Through Active Current Regulator KpUnits:Default:Hz/A524.0Proportional gain that adjusts the response of the active current regulator portion Min/Max: 0.0 / 1000000.0of the bus regulator when power loss ride through is enabled and detected. Thisparameter is not functional when any of the FV motor control modes are selected.459 PwrLoss RT ACRKiUnits: Hz/APower Loss Ride Through Active Current Regulator KiDefault: 2045.0Integral gain that adjusts the response of the active current regulator portion of Min/Max: 0.0 / 50000.0the bus regulator when power loss ride through is enabled and detected. Thisparameter is not functional when any of the FV motor control modes are selected.RW RealRW RealPROTECTIONPower Loss460 UnderVltg ActionUnder Voltage ActionConfigures the drive’s response to an under voltage event.Default:Options:3 = “FltCoastStop”0 = “Ignore”1 = “Alarm”2 = “Flt Minor”3 = “FltCoastStop”4 = “Flt RampStop”5 = “Flt CL Stop”RW 32-bitInteger461 UnderVltg LevelUnder Voltage LevelAC line voltage level below which an undervoltage event occurs.462 InPhase LossActnIn Phase Loss ActionSelects action to take if an Input Phase loss is detected.Units: VACDefault: P20 [Rated Volts] x 0.625Min/Max: 0.00 / P20 [Rated Volts] x 1.41RW RealDefault:Options:3 = “FltCoastStop”0 = “Ignore”1 = “Alarm”2 = “Flt Minor”3 = “FltCoastStop”4 = “Flt RampStop”5 = “Flt CL Stop”RW 32-bitInteger463 InPhase Loss LvlDefault: 325In Phase Loss LevelMin/Max: 10 / 32767Sets the threshold level which is used to determine an Input phase loss condition.RW 32-bitInteger464 DC Bus Mem ResetDirect Current Bus Memory ResetForces a manual update to P12 [DC Bus Memory], which is automaticallyinitialized upon power-up and continually updated during normal operation. Amanual reset is rarely required, but may occur when input voltage is abnormallyhigh or low for an extended period of time followed by a fast return to a nominalvalue. A transition from 0 to 1 will cause an update, only if the drive is notregenerating and not firing the dynamic brake. The update will be ignored of notcompleted with 30 seconds of the command.Default:Options:0 = “Disabled”0 = “Disabled”1 = “Enabled”RW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-59FileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData TypePROTECTIONGround Fault466 Ground Warn ActnGround Warning ActionSelects ground current event configuration.467 Ground Warn LvlGround Warning LevelSets the level at which a ground warning alarm will occur.Default:Options:Units: AmpsDefault: 3.0Min/Max: 1.0 / 5.00 = “Ignore”0 = “Ignore”1 = “Alarm”2 = “Flt Minor”3 = “FltCoastStop”4 = “Flt RampStop”5 = “Flt CL Stop”RW 32-bitIntegerRW RealFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValues469 PredMaint StatusPredictive Maintenance StatusStatus of predictive maintenance elapsed life relative to the programmed event level. A value of 1 = event level has been exceeded. Bit 15 is a masterbit which = 1 when 1 or more individual bits = 1.Read-WriteData TypeOptionsMasterReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedMch LubeMch BearingMtr LubeMtr BearingInternal FanHeatsink FanDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = False1 = True470 PredMaintAmbTempPredictive Maintenance Ambient TemperatureUsed to predict cooling fan life, and possibly the life of other temperaturedependent components in the future. Changes to this parameter affect the totallife and remaining life, meaning that only one temperature can be programmedfor the entire life of the drive.Units: Degrees CDefault: 50.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 50.00RW RealPROTECTIONPredictive Main471 PredMaint Rst EnPredictive Maintenance Reset EnableEnables [PredMaint Reset] to execute a reset of the selected elapsed lifeparameter. Any single reset in [PredMaint Reset] will force this parameter back to0 (disabled), so that only one elapsed life parameter can be reset at a time.This parameter is only reset when Set Defaults “All” (not recommended) isexecuted.Default:Options:Current Selection0 = “Disable”1 = “Enable”RW 32-bitInteger472 PredMaint ResetPredictive Maintenance ResetResets predictive maintenance elapsed life parameters, one at a time. Enabledby P471 [PredMaint Rst En].This parameter is only reset when Set Defaults “All” (not recommended) isexecuted.Default:Options:Current Selection0 = “Ready”1 = “HS Fan Life”2 = “InFan Life”3 = “MtrBrng Life”4 = “MtrLube Hrs”5 = “MchBrng Life”6 = “MchLube Hrs”RW 32-bitInteger488 HSFan DerateHeatsink Fan DerateDerating factor applied to P489 [HSFan TotalLife]. Used to adjust total fan life forpoor air quality or vibration.Default: 1.00Min/Max: 0.01 / 1.00RW Real489 HSFan TotalLifeHeatsink Fan Total LifeTotal number of hours expected over the life of the heatsink fans. Calculated as afunction of fan manufacturer's life data (from frame rating table), P470[PredMaintAmbTemp], and P488 [HSFan Derate].Units: HrsDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 21,474,836.47 (31 bits)RO32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-60 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type490 HSFan ElpsdLifeHeatsink Fan Elapsed LifeAccumulated hours of heatsink fan run time.Units: HrsDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 21,474,836.47 (31 bits)RO32-bitInteger491 HSFan RemainLifeHeatsink Fan Remaining LifeRemaining number of hours until estimated end of life for heatsink fans, and is thedifference between P489 [HSFan TotalLife] and P490 [HSFan ElpsdLife]. Allnegative values of this parameter need to be treated as excessive use (> 100%),and trigger the appropriate action chosen by P493 [HSFan EventActn].Units: HrsDefault: 0.00Min/Max: –21,474,836.48 / 21,474,836.47RO32-bitInteger492 HSFan EventLevelHeatsink Fan Event LevelPercent of total expected heatsink fan life for which an early warning alarm orfault can be programmed.Units: %Default: 80.000Min/Max: 0.000 / 100.000RW Real493 HSFan EventActnHeatsink Fan Event ActionConfigures the response to a heatsink fan event, which occurs when P492[HSFan EventLevel] is met or exceeded.Default:Options:0 = “Ignore”0 = “Ignore”1 = “Alarm”2 = “Flt Minor”3 = “FltCoastStop”4 = “Flt RampStop”5 = “Flt CL Stop”RW 32-bitInteger494 HSFan ResetLogHeatsink Fan Reset LogTotal number of resets performed on the P490 [HSFan ElpsdLife] parameter.Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 255 (unsigned 8 bits)RO32-bitInteger495 InFan DerateInternal Fan DerateDerating factor applied to P496 [InFan TotalLife]. Used to adjust total fan life forpoor air quality or vibration.Default: 1.00Min/Max: 0.01 / 1.00RW RealPROTECTIONPredictive Main496 InFan TotalLifeInternal Fan Total LifeTotal number of hours expected over the life of the internal stirring fan(s).Calculated as a function of fan manufacturer's life data (from frame rating table)and P470 [PredMaintAmbTemp].497 InFan ElpsdLifeInternal Fan Elapsed LifeAccumulated hours of internal stirring fan run time (Note that frames 6 and 7 runcontinuously. Frames 2 through 5 are controlled by firmware).Units: HrsDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 21,474,836.47 (31 bits)Units: HrsDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 21,474,836.47 (31 bits)RORO32-bitInteger32-bitInteger498 InFan RemainLifeInternal Fan Remaining LifeRemaining number of hours until estimated end of life for internal stirring fans,and is the difference between P496 [InFan TotalLife] and P497 [InFan ElpsdLife].All negative values of this parameter need to be treated as excessive use (>100%), and trigger the appropriate action chosen by P500 [InFan EventActn].Units: HrsDefault: 0.00Min/Max: –21,474,836.48 / 21,474,836.47RO32-bitInteger499 InFan EventLevelInternal Fan Event LevelPercent of total expected internal stirring fan life for which an early warning alarmor fault can be programmed.Units: %Default: 80.000Min/Max: 0.000 / 100.000RW Real500 InFan EventActnInternal Fan Event ActionConfigures the response to an internal stirring fan event, which occurs whenP499 [InFan EventLevel] is met or exceeded.Default:Options:0 = “Ignore”0 = “Ignore”1 = “Alarm”2 = “Flt Minor”3 = “FltCoastStop”4 = “Flt RampStop”5 = “Flt CL Stop”RW 32-bitInteger501 InFan ResetLogInternal Fan Reset LogTotal number of resets performed on the P497 [InFan ElpsdLife] parameter.Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 255 (unsigned 8 bits)RO32-bitInteger502 MtrBrngTotalLifeMotor Bearing Total LifeTotal number of hours expected over the life of the motor bearings.Units: HrsDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 21,474,836.47 (31 bits)RW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-61FileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type503 MtrBrngElpsdLifeMotor Bearing Elapsed LifeAccumulated hours of motor bearing run time. Hours are accumulated any timedrive is running greater than zero speed.Units: HrsDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 21,474,836.47 (31 bits)RO32-bitInteger504 MtrBrngRemainLifMotor Bearing Remaining LifeRemaining number of hours until estimated end of life for motor bearings, and isthe difference between P502 [MtrBrngTotalLife] and P503 [MtrBrngElpsdLife].Units: HrsDefault: 0.00Min/Max: –21,474,836.48 / 21,474,836.47RO32-bitInteger505 MtrBrngEventLvlMotor Bearing Event LevelPercent of total expected motor bearing life for which an early warning alarm orfault can be programmed.Units: %Default: 80.000Min/Max: 0 / 100.000RW Real506 MtrBrngEventActnMotor Bearing Event ActionConfigures the response to a motor bearing event, which occurs when P505[MtrBrngEventLvl] is met or exceeded.Default:Options:0 = “Ignore”0 = “Ignore”1 = “Alarm”2 = “Flt Minor”3 = “FltCoastStop”4 = “Flt RampStop”5 = “Flt CL Stop”RW 32-bitInteger507 MtrBrng ResetLogMotor Bearing Reset LogTotal number of resets performed on the P503 [MtrBrngElpsdLife] parameter.Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 255 (unsigned 8 bits)RO32-bitIntegerPROTECTIONPredictive Main508 MtrLubeElpsdHrsMotor Lubricant Elapsed HoursAccumulated hours since the most recent lubrication of the motor bearings. Canbe reset without restriction.509 MtrLubeEventLvlMotor Lubricant Event LevelNumber of hours between scheduled lubrications of the motor bearings. Used foran early warning alarm or fault according to P510 [MtrLubeEventActn]. Event isdisabled when set to 0.Units: HrsDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 21,474,836.47Units: HrsDefault: 0.000Min/Max: 0.000 / 220000000.000RO32-bitIntegerRW Real510 MtrLubeEventActnMotor Lubricant Event ActionConfigures the response to a motor bearing lubrication event, which occurs whenP509 [MtrLubeEventLvl] is met or exceeded.Default:Options:0 = “Ignore”0 = “Ignore”1 = “Alarm”2 = “Flt Minor”3 = “FltCoastStop”4 = “Flt RampStop”5 = “Flt CL Stop”RW 32-bitInteger511 MchBrngTotalLifeMachine Bearing Total LifeTotal number of hours expected over the life of the machine bearings.Units: HrsDefault: Current ValueMin/Max: 0 / 21,474,836.47RW 32-bitInteger512 MchBrngElpsdLifeMachine Bearing Elapsed LifeAccumulated hours of machine bearing run time.Units: HoursDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0 / 21,474,836.47RO32-bitInteger513 MchBrngRemainLifMachine Bearing Remaining LifeRemaining number of hours until estimated end of life for machine bearings, andis the difference between Machine Bearing Total Life and Machine BearingElapsed Life.Units: HrsDefault: 0.00Min/Max: –21,474,836.48 / 21,474,836.47RO32-bitInteger514 MchBrngEventLvlMachine Bearing Event LevelPercent of total expected machine bearing life for which an early warning alarm orfault can be programmed.Units: %Default: 80.000Min/Max: 0.000 / 100.000RW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-62 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type515 MtrBrngEventActnMachine Bearing Event ActionConfigures the response to a machine bearing event, which occurs when P518[MchBrngEventLvl] is met or exceeded.Default:Options:0 = “Ignore”0 = “Ignore”1 = “Alarm”2 = “Flt Minor”3 = “FltCoastStop”4 = “Flt RampStop”5 = “Flt CL Stop”RW 32-bitInteger516 MchBrngResetLogMachine Bearing Reset LogTotal number of resets performed on the P512 [MchBrngElpsdLife] parameter.Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 255RO32-bitIntegerPROTECTIONPredictive Main517 MchLubeElpsdHrsMachine Lubricant Elapsed HoursAccumulated machine hours since the most recent lubrication of the machinebearings. Can be reset without restriction.518 MchLube EventLvlMachine Lubricant Event LevelNumber of hours between scheduled lubrications of the machine bearings. Usedfor an early warning alarm or fault according to P519 [MchLubeEventActn]. Eventis disabled when set to 0.Units: HrsDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 21,474,836.47.00Units: HrsDefault: 0.000Min/Max: 0.000 / 220000000.000RO32-bitIntegerRW Real519 MchLubeEventActnMachine Lubricant Event ActionConfigures the response to a machine bearing lubrication event, which occurswhen P518 [MchLube EventLvl] is met or exceeded.Default:Options:0 = “Ignore”0 = “Ignore”1 = “Alarm”2 = “Flt Minor”3 = “FltCoastStop”4 = “Flt RampStop”5 = “Flt CL Stop”RW 32-bitIntegerDrive Speed Control FileFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type520 Max Fwd SpeedMaximum Forward SpeedSets the forward speed high limit. Refer to P524 [Overspeed Limit]. When usingan analog input for the speed reference, this parameter is scaled to P51/61 [AnlgInX Hi] on the I/O module.Units:Default:Min/Max:HzRPMP27 [Motor NP Hertz]P28 [Motor NP RPM][Motor NP Hertz] x 0.05 /[Motor NP Hertz] x 16.00[Motor NP RPM] x 0.05 /[Motor NP RPM] x 16.00RW RealSPEED CONTROLSpeed Limits521 Max Rev SpeedMaximum Reverse SpeedSets the reverse speed high limit. Refer to P524 [Overspeed Limit]. When usingan analog input for the speed reference, this parameter is scaled to P51/61 [AnlgIn X Hi] on the I/O module.522 Min Fwd SpeedMinimum Forward SpeedSets the low limit for speed reference after scaling is applied. Refer to P524[Overspeed Limit]. When using an analog input for the speed reference, thisparameter is scaled to P52/62 [Anlg InX Lo] on the I/O module.Units:Default:Min/Max:Units:Default:Min/Max:HzRPMP27 [Motor NP Hertz] x –1.00P28 [Motor NP RPM] x –1.00[Motor NP Hertz] x –16.00 / 0.00[Motor NP RPM] x –16.00 / 0.00HzRPM0.000.00 / [Motor NP Hertz] x 16.000.00 / [Motor NP RPM] x 16.00RW RealRW Real523 Min Rev SpeedMinimum Reverse SpeedSets the low limit for speed reference after scaling is applied. Refer to P524[Overspeed Limit]. When using an analog input for the speed reference, thisparameter is scaled to P52/62 [Anlg InX Lo] on the I/O module.Units:Default:Min/Max:HzRPM0.00[Motor NP Hertz] x –16.00 / 0.00[Motor NP RPM] x –16.00 / 0.00RW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-63FileGroupNameNo. Description524 Overspeed LimitOverspeed LimitSets the incremental amount of the output frequency (above maximum speed:either P520 [Max Fwd Speed] or P521 [Max Rev Speed]) allowable for functionssuch as slip compensation.Maximum speed + P524 [Overspeed Limit] must be ≤ P37 [Maximum Freq]ValuesUnits:Default:Min/Max:HzRPMP27 [Motor NP Hertz] / 6P28 [Motor NP RPM] / 60.00 / (P27 [Motor NP Hertz] / 3)0.00 / (P28 [Motor NP RPM] / 6)Read-WriteData TypeRW RealSPEED CONTROLSpeed Limits525 Zero Speed LimitZero Speed LimitEstablishes a band around zero speed that is used to determine when the driveconsiders the motor to be at zero speed.526527528VoltageMax VoltsMotor VoltsBreak VoltsStart BoostRun0 MinSpeedAllowable Output Frequency RangeBus Regulation or Current LimitAllowable Output Frequency RangeNormal OperationAllowable Reference Frequency RangeFrequency Trim due toSpeed Control ModeBreakFrequencyMotorHzFrequencyOverspeedLimitMaxSpeedOutputFreq LimitMaxFreqSkip Speed 1Skip Speed 2Skip Speed 3Skip Speed 1, 2, 3Sets a frequency at which the drive will not operate. [Skip Speed X] and P529[Skip Speed Band] must not equal 0.529 Skip Speed BandSkip Speed BandSets the bandwidth around a skip speed. [Skip Speed Band] is split, applying 1/2above and 1/2 below the skip speed. The same bandwidth applies to all skipspeeds.Units:Default:Min/Max:HzRPMP27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 0.001P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 0.0010.00 / P27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 0.50.00 / P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 0.5Units: HzDefault: 0.00Min/Max: P521 [Max Rev Speed] / P520 [Max FwdSpeed]Units:Default:Min/Max:HzRPM0.000.00 / P27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 0.50.00 / P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 0.5RW RealRW RealRW RealFileGroupSPEED CONTROLSpeed Ramp RatesNo.535536537538NameDescriptionAccel Time 1Accel Time 2Acceleration Time 1, 2Sets the acceleration rate for all speed changes. Defined as the time toaccelerate from 0 to P27 [Motor NP Hertz] or P28 [Motor NP RPM], according tothe setting in P300 [Speed Units]. Selection between Acceleration Time 1 andAcceleration Time 2 is controlled by a digital input function (see Digin Functions)or by Logic Command (sent over a communication network).Decel Time 1Decel Time 2Deceleration Time 1, 2Sets the deceleration rate for all speed changes. Defined as the time todecelerate from P27 [Motor NP Hertz] or P28 [Motor NP RPM] to 0, according tothe setting in P300 [Speed Units]. Selection between Deceleration Time 1 andDeceleration Time 2 is controlled by a digital input function (see Digin Functions)or by Logic Command (sent over a communication network). Some stop modes(see P370 and P371) will cause the programmed decel time to be ignored duringa stop command.ValuesUnits: SecsDefault: 10.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 3600.00Units: SecsDefault: 10.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 3600.00Read-WriteData TypeRW RealRW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-64 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type539 Jog Acc Dec TimeJog Acceleration Deceleration TimeAcceleration and deceleration rates while commanding jog (uses a jog speedreference).Units: SecsDefault: 10.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 3600.00RW Real540 S Curve AccelS Curve AccelerationSets the percentage of accel time applied to the ramp to soften (reduce jerk) theacceleration. Time is added, 1/2 at the beginning and 1/2 at the end of the ramp.Units: %Default: 0.000Min/Max: 0.000 / 100.000RW RealSPEED CONTROLSpeed Ramp RatesHz70.060.050.040.030.020.010.00.00.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0Seconds541 S Curve DecelS Curve DecelerationSets the percentage of decel time applied to the ramp to soften (reduce jerk) thedeceleration. Time is added, 1/2 at the beginning and 1/2 at the end of the ramp.Units: %Default: 0.000Min/Max: 0.000 / 100.000RW RealFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type545550Spd Ref A SelSpd Ref B SelSpeed Reference A SelectSpeed Reference B SelectSelects the source for speed references while in “Auto” (typical) mode. When thedrive is in “Manual” mode, these sources are overridden (see P327). [Spd Ref ASel] is the drive's main speed reference. [Spd Ref B Sel] is an alternate speedreference. Selecting between Reference A and Reference B is controlled by adigital input function (see Digin Functions) or by Logic Command (sent over acommunication network).Default:Min/Max:8715510 / 159999RW 32-bitIntegerSPEED CONTROLSpeed Reference546551547552Spd Ref A StptSpd Ref B StptSpeed Reference A SetpointSpeed Reference B SetpointA constant speed value (similar to a preset speed) to be used a possible sourcefor P545 and P550.Spd Ref A AnlgHiSpd Ref B AnlgHiSpeed Reference A Analog HighSpeed Reference B Analog HighUsed only when an analog input is selected as a speed reference according toP546 or P551. Sets the speed that corresponds to [Anlg InX Hi] on an I/Omodule. This establishes scaling throughout the range.Units:Default:Min/Max:HzRPM0.0000 Hz–/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 8–/+P27 [Motor NP RPM] x 8Units: HzDefault: P520 [Max Fwd Speed]Min/Max: P521 [Max Rev Speed] / P520 [Max FwdSpeed]RW RealRW Real548553Spd Ref A AnlgLoSpd Ref B AnlgLoSpeed Reference A Analog LowSpeed Reference B Analog LowUsed only when an analog input is selected as a speed reference according toP546 or P551. Sets the speed that corresponds to [Anlg InX Lo] on an I/Omodule. This establishes scaling throughout the range.Units: HzDefault: 0.00Min/Max: P521 [Max Rev Speed] / P520 [Max FwdSpeed]RW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-65FileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type549554Spd Ref A MultSpd Ref B MultSpeed Reference A MultiplierSpeed Reference B MultiplierApplies multipliers to speed references A and B respectively.Default: 1.00Min/Max: –/+22000.00RW Real555 Spd Ref ScaleSpeed Reference ScaleApplies only in Flux Vector (FV) modes according to P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode].Applies a multiplier to P595 [Filtered Spd Ref] after it has been offset by the PIDfunction (P1093 [PID Output Meter]). The scaled result, once limited, will becomethe primary component of the value of P597 [Final Speed Ref].Default: 1.000Min/Max: 0.000 / 1000.000RW Real556557Jog Speed 1Jog Speed 2Jog Speed 1, 2The speed used for jogging when the Jog 1 or Jog 2 function (respectively) isactivated by a digital input function or by Logic Command (sent over acommunication network).Units:Default:Min/Max:HzP27 [Motor NP Hertz] / 6P27 [Motor NP RPM] / 6–/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 8–/+P27 [Motor NP RPM] x 8RW Real558 MOP ReferenceMotor Operated Potentiometer ReferenceValue of the MOP (Motor Operated Potentiometer) Reference to be used as apossible source for P545 and P550. The MOP Reference is activated(incremented or decremented) by digital input functions.Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+800.00RORealSPEED CONTROLSpeed Reference559 Save MOP RefSave Motor Operated Potentiometer ReferenceEnables/disables the feature that saves the present MOP Ref value at power down or stop.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedAt StopAt Pwr DownDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = False1 = True560 MOP RateMotor Operated Potentiometer RateSets the rate of change of the MOP reference when an increasing or decreasingMOP signal is present.561 MOP High LimitMotor Operated Potentiometer High LimitSets the upper limit for the MOP Reference.562 MOP Low LimitMotor Operated Potentiometer low LimitSets the lower limit for the MOP Reference.563 DI ManRef SelDigital Input Manual Reference SelectSelects a speed reference to be used when a digital input activates Manualcontrol, according to the operation described by P172 [DI Manual Ctrl].564 DI ManRef AnlgHiDigital Input Manual Reference Analog HighHi scale for the manual speed reference that is activated by a digital input whenP563 [DI ManRef Sel] is connected to an Analog Input.Units: %/SecsDefault: 1.0000Min/Max: 0.0100 / 100.0000Units: %Default: 100.000Min/Max: 0.000 / 800.000Units: %Default: –100.000Min/Max: –800.000 / 0.000Default: 872Min/Max: 1 / 159999Units:Default:Min/Max:HzRPMP520 [Max Fwd Speed]P521 [Max Rev Speed] / P520 [Max FwdSpeed]RW RealRW RealRW RealRW 32-bitIntegerRW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-66 Programming and ParametersFileGroupSPEED CONTROLSpeed ReferenceNo.565 DI ManRef AnlgLoDigital Input Manual Reference Analog LowUsed only when P563 [DI ManRef Sel] has selected an analog input as thesource of the speed reference. Specifies the speed reference value that will beassociated with the Analog In Lo parameter for the I/O Module. Example, P563[DI ManRef Sel] has selected P50 [Anlg In0 Value] on an I/O Module. The P51[Anlg In0 Hi] parameter on the I/O Module is set to -10 volts. P564 [DI ManRefAnlgHi] will specify the speed reference value that will correspond with a -10 voltanalog input signal.571572573574575576577NameDescriptionPreset Speed 1Preset Speed 2Preset Speed 3Preset Speed 4Preset Speed 5Preset Speed 6Preset Speed 7Preset Speed 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7Discrete speed references that are activated by a digital input function (see DiginFunctions) or by Logic Command (sent over a communication network).588 Spd Ref FilterSpeed Reference FilterSelects the amount of filtering applied to the ramped speed reference (P594),and is only active in FV motor control modes (P35). When set to any of thecustom settings (3, 4, or 5) the filter is configured using the values set in P589[Spd Ref Fltr BW] and P590 [Spd Ref FltrGain]. Settings 4 and 5 initialize thevalues for light and heavy respectively.589 Spd Ref Fltr BWSpeed Reference Filter BandwidthSets the bandwidth of the speed reference filter when P588 [Spd Ref Filter] is setto one of the “Custom” settings (3, 4, or 5)A value of zero will disable (bypass) the filter.ValuesUnits:Default:Min/Max:Units:Default:Min/Max:Default:Options:HzRPM0.000P521 [Max Rev Speed] / P520 [Max FwdSpeed]HzRPM1/12 x P27 or P28 (Preset Speed 1)1/6 x P27 or P28 (Preset Speed 2)1/3 x P27 or P28 (Preset Speed 3)1/2 x P27 or P28 (Preset Speed 4)2/3 x P27 or P28 (Preset Speed 5)5/6 x P27 or P28 (Preset Speed 6)P27 or P28 (Preset Speed 7)P521 [Max Rev Speed] / P520 [Max FwdSpeed]0 = “Off”0 = “Off”1 = “Light”2 = “Heavy”3 = “Custom”4 = “SetCustLight”5 = “SetCustHeavy”Units: R/SDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 500.00590 Spd Ref FltrGainSpeed Reference Filter GainSets the gain (kn) of the speed reference filter when P588 [Spd Ref Filter] is setto one of the “Custom” settings (3, 4, or 5).A gain value of zero results in a filter characteristic that behaves as a first orderlow pass. A gain value ranging between zero and one results in a lag type filter. Again value greater than one results in a lead type filter. A gain value of one willdisable (bypass) the filter. This is the default setting. This parameter has no units.Default:Min/Max:1.000–/+5.000Read-WriteData TypeRW RealRW RealRW 32-bitIntegerRW RealRW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-67FileGroupValuesRead-WriteData TypeNameNo. Description591 Spd Ref Sel StsSpeed Reference Select StatusOptionsSkip BandEnd Lmt SwDecel Lmt SwUnipolar RefRev DisableBipolar RefSel OverrideManualPreset AutoTrim RefTrim Pct RefMicroPsnMultRef B MultRef A MultRef B AutoRef A AutoDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = False1 = TrueSPEED CONTROLSpeed ReferenceDisplays the operating status of the speed referencing section of the drive. Individual bits are provided to represent the following conditions:Bit 0 “Ref A Auto” – When set, the Reference A Auto path is active.Control Logic has selected the Speed Reference source A. The exact origin of this speed reference is determined by the parameter specified in P545[Spd Ref A Sel]. This parameter should also be reported in P930 [Speed Ref Source].Bit 1 “Ref B Auto” – When set, the Reference B Auto path is active.Control Logic has selected the Speed Reference source B. The exact origin of this speed reference is determined by the value specified in P550 [SpdRef B Sel]. This parameter should also be reported in P930 [Speed Ref Source].Bit 2 “Ref A Mult” – When set, speed reference A is being modified by P549 [Spd Ref A Mult]. When clear, either the multiplier is 1 or is not affectingthe speed reference because the Ref A Auto path is inactive.Bit 3 “Ref B Mult” – When set, the speed reference B is being modified by P554 [Spd Ref B Mult]. When clear, either the multiplier is 1 or is notaffecting the speed reference because the “Ref B Auto” path is inactive.Bit 4 “MicroPsnMult” – When set, P592 [Selected Spd Ref] is being multiplied by P1112 [MicroPsnScalePct].Bit 5 “Trim Pct Ref” – When set, the speed reference is being multiplied by one plus the value of the parameter indicated in P616 [SpdTrimPrcRefSrc].Bit 6 “Trim Ref” – When set, the speed reference is being offset by the value of the parameter indicated in P617 [Spd Trim Source].Bit 7 “Preset Auto” – When set, Control Logic has selected a preset auto speed reference. The P930 [Speed Ref Source] parameter will indicate thesource of this reference.Bit 8 “Manual” –Bit 9 “Sel Override” – The Selected Speed Reference parameter has been overridden by another reference. Refer to P930 [Speed Ref Source] for thecause of the override.Bit 10 “Bipolar Ref” – When set, P308 [Direction Mode] = 1 “Bipolar.” When in bipolar mode, the sign of the speed reference value will determine thedirection of motor rotation.Bit 11 “Rev Disable” – When set, P308 [Direction Mode] = 2 “Rev Disable.” When in reverse disable mode, negative speed reference values arerejected and a zero speed value is used in their place.Bit 12 “Unipolar Ref” – When set, P308 [Direction Mode] = 0 “Unipolar.” When in unipolar mode, the sign of the speed reference value (and thereforedirection of motor rotation) is determined by P879 [Drive Logic Rslt] Bit 4 “Forward” and Bit 5 “Reverse.”Bit 13 “Decel Lmt Sw” – When set, the Torque Proving function's control logic has detected a decel limit switch active and has selected P571 [PresetSpeed 1] for the speed reference value.Bit 14 “End Lim Sw” – When set, the Torque Proving function's control logic has detected an end limit switch active and has selected zero speed forthe speed reference value.Bit 15 “Skip Band” – When set, the Skip Band function has modified P2 [Commanded SpdRef]. When clear, the Skip Band function has not changedP2 [Commanded SpdRef].592 Selected Spd RefSelected Speed ReferenceDisplays the value of the active speed reference.593 Limited Spd RefLimited Speed ReferenceDisplays the value of the speed reference after the following limits have beenapplied: P520 [Max Fwd Speed], P521 [Max Rev Speed], P522 [Min Fwd Speed]and P523 [Min Rev Speed].Units:Default:Min/Max:HzRPM0.00–/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz]–/+P28 [Motor NP RPM]Units: HzDefault: RPMMin/Max: 0.00–/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz]–/+P28 [Motor NP RPM]RORORealRealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-68 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type594 Ramped Spd RefRamped Speed ReferenceDisplays the output of the speed reference ramp and S-curve functions, but priorto any corrections added by slip comp, PI, etc.Units: HzDefault: RPMMin/Max: 0.00–/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz]–/+P28 [Motor NP RPM]RO Real595 Filtered Spd RefFiltered Speed ReferenceDisplays the output of the filter that is applied by P588.Units: HzDefault: RPMMin/Max: 0.00–/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz]–/+P28 [Motor NP RPM]RO RealSPEED CONTROLSpeed Reference596 Speed Rate RefSpeed Rate ReferenceThis parameter is shared by both the Inertia Compensation and SpeedCompensation functions. These functions are only available in the Flux Vectorselections for P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode].A value shared by both the Inertia Compensation and Speed Compensationfunctions (active only in FV motor control modes), typically supplied by anexternal controller that is also providing a rate limited speed reference. TheSpeed Rate Reference corresponds to the derivative with respect to time of thespeed reference signal. Units of time are in seconds.For example, if the controller provides a 10 second reference ramp, the controllerwould also supply a Speed Rate Ref value of 1 pu / 10 sec = 0.1 sec-1 while thereference is accelerating. When the reference is constant, Speed Rate Refshould be zero.Units: HzDefault: RPMMin/Max: 0.00–/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz]–/+P28 [Motor NP RPM]RW Real597 Final Speed RefFinal Speed ReferenceDisplays the speed reference value, after all reference modifications (includingramps), that is used as a final reference by the speed regulator. In Open Loop,Sensorless Vector mode, then this value represents the anticipated motoroperating speed, and may differ slightly from the output frequency value due toslip compensation.Units: HzDefault: RPMMin/Max: 0.00–/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz]–/+P28 [Motor NP RPM]RO RealFileGroupNo.600604NameDescriptionTrim Ref A SelTrim Ref B SelTrim Reference A SelectTrim Reference B SelectSelects a trim source (in Hz or RPM) for Speed Reference A or Speed ReferenceB, respectively. For trim in % instead of Hz or RPM, use P608 and P612 (TrimPctRefX Sel).ValuesRead-WriteData TypeDefault:Min/Max:P601 [Trim Ref A Sel]P605 [Trim Ref B Stpt]0 / 159999RW 32-bitIntegerSPEED CONTROLSpeed Trim601605602606Trim Ref A StptTrim Ref B StptTrim Reference A SetpointTrim Reference B SetpointA digital value to be used as a possible trim source for P600 or P604, respectivelyUnits:Default:Min/Max:HzRPM0.00–/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz]–/+P28 [Motor NP RPM]Trim RefA AnlgHiTrim RefB AnlgHiTrim Reference A Analog HighTrim Reference B Analog HighUsed only when an analog input is selected as a trim source according to P600or P604. Sets the amount of trim that corresponds to [Anlg InX Hi] on an I/Omodule or on the main control (product dependent). This establishes scalingthroughout the range.Units:Default:Min/Max:HzRPMP520 [Max Fwd Speed]P521 [Max Rev Speed] / P520 [Max FwdSpeed]RW RealRW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-69FileGroupSPEED CONTROLSpeed TrimNo.603607608612609613610614611615NameDescriptionTrim RefA AnlgLoTrim RefB AnlgLoTrim Reference A Analog LowTrim Reference B Analog LowUsed only when an analog input is selected as a trim source according to P600or P604. Sets the amount of trim that corresponds to [Anlg InX Lo] on an I/Omodule or on the main control (product dependent). This establishes scalingthroughout the range.TrmPct RefA SelTrmPct RefB SelTrim Percent Reference A SelectTrim Percent Reference B SelectSelects a trim source (in %) for Speed Reference A or Speed Reference B,respectively. For trim in Hz or RPM instead of %, use P600 and P604 (Trim Ref XSel).TrmPct RefA StptTrmPct RefB StptTrim Percent Reference A SetpointTrim Percent Reference B SetpointA digital value to be used a possible trim source for P608 or P612, respectively.TrmPct RefA AnHiTrmPct RefB AnHiTrim Percent Reference A Analog HighTrim Percent Reference B Analog HighUsed only when an analog input is selected as a percent trim source according toP608 or P612. Sets the amount of trim that corresponds to [Anlg InX Hi] on an I/Omodule or on the main control (product dependent). This establishes scalingthroughout the range.TrmPct RefA AnLoTrmPct RefB AnLoTrim Percent Reference A Analog LowTrim Percent Reference B Analog LowUsed only when an analog input is selected as a percent trim source according toP608 or P612. Sets the amount of trim that corresponds to [Anlg InX Lo] on an I/O module or on the main control (product dependent). This establishes scalingthroughout the range.616 SpdTrimPrcRefSrcSpeed Trim Percent Reference SourceDisplays the source of Motor Speed Reference Trim Percent, in the formatSSPPPP, where SS indicates the source port number (if non-zero) and PPPPindicates the source parameter number. A value of zero indicates that a sourcehas not been assigned.617 Spd Trim SourceSpeed Trim SourceDisplays the source of Motor Speed Reference Trim, in the format SSPPPP,where SS indicates the source port number (if non-zero) and PPPP indicates thesource parameter number. A value of zero indicates that a source has not beenassigned.ValuesUnits:Default:Min/Max:Default:Min/Max:HzRPM0.00P521 [Max Rev Speed] / P520 [Max FwdSpeed]P609 [TrmPct RefA Stpt]P613 [TrmPct RefB Stpt]0 / 159999Units: %Default: 0.000Min/Max: –/+800.000Units: %Default: 100.00Min/Max: –/+800.00Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+800.00Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999Read-WriteData TypeRW RealRW 32-bitIntegerRW RealRW RealRW RealRORO32-bitInteger32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-70 Programming and ParametersFileSPEED CONTROLGroupSlip/Droop CompNameNo. Description620 Droop RPM at FLADroop Revolutions Per Minute at Full Load AmpsSelects amount of droop that the speed reference is reduced when at full loadtorque. Zero disables the droop function.621 Slip RPM at FLASlip Revolutions Per Minute at Full Load AmpsFor open loop modes, this parameter sets the amount of slip (in rpm) that themotor is expected to experience at full load. A setting of zero disables slipcompensation (not used in closed loop modes with encoder feedback). If thevalue of P70 [Autotune] is set to “Calculate”, this value (in addition to others) isautomatically calculated, and cannot be manually adjusted.ValuesUnits: RPMDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00/900.00Units:Default:Min/Max:622 Slip Comp BWSlip Compensation BandwidthAdjusts the bandwidth of a low pass filter used for slip compensation. Theresponse time of slip compensation will vary inversely with the setting of this filter.Units:Default:Min/Max:R/S10.001.00 / 50.00623 VHzSV SpdTrimRegVolts per Hertz Sensorless Vector Speed Trim RegulatorDisplays the amount of trim that the slip compensation function dynamically adds(based on load) to final speed reference for improved open loop speed control.Units:Default:Min/Max:RPM(P27 [Motor NP Hz] x 120) / (P31 [MotorPoles] – P28 [Motor NP RPM])0.00 / 1200.00HzRPM0.00–/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 8–/+P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 8Read-WriteData TypeRW RealRW RealRW RealRO RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-71FileGroupNameNo. Description635 Spd Options CtrlSpeed Options ControlValuesRead-WriteData TypeOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedDelayed RefAuto Tach SWJog No IntegSpdErrFilterSpdRegIntHldSpdRegIntResStpNoSCrvAccRamp DisableRamp HoldDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = False1 = TrueSPEED CONTROLSpeed RegulatorConfigures options related to Speed Control as follows:Bit 0 “Ramp Hold” – The output of the speed reference ramp will stop changing and hold its output constant while this bit is set. When this bit is clear,the ramp output will be allowed to change. If this bit becomes set while P594 [Ramped Spd Ref] is in the S Curve region, the S Curve will be allowedto complete before the output is held.Bit 1 “Ramp Disable” – When set, the speed reference ramp will become disabled. P594 [Ramped Spd Ref] will track the ramp input.Bit 2 “StpNoSCrvAcc” – There are some conditions where the drive may continue to accelerate briefly following a request to stop. This will occur if thedrive was in the process of accelerating on an S Curve when the stop request occurred. This bit enables an option to discontinue accelerationimmediately when the stop request occurs. The S Curve profile that was in process will then change to a linear decel ramp.Bit 3 “SpdRegIntRes” – When set, the P654 [Spd Reg Int Out] which is the output of the Vector mode speed regulator’s integral term will be forced tozero. The same result can be achieved by setting the regulator’s integral gain to zero.Bit 4 “SpdRegIntHld” – When set, the P654 [Spd Reg Int Out] which is the output of the Vector mode speed regulator’s integral term will stopchanging and be held constant. Other conditions in the drive such as a limit condition in P945 [At Limit Status] may have the same result.Bit 5 “SpdErrFilter” – When set, the speed error filter in the drive’s Vector mode speed regulator will be configured for a single stage low pass filter.When clear, the error filter will be configured for a two stage low pass filter. The two stage configuration is the normal or default setting for the errorfilter.Bit 6 “Jog No Integ” – When set, the P654 [Spd Reg Int Out] which is the output of the Vector mode speed regulator’s integral term will be forced tozero while jogging.Bit 7 “Auto Tach SW” – This bit is used to enable the Automatic Tach Switchover feature. This feature is used to switch motor velocity feedbacksources from the Primary to Alternate source in the event that the primary source fails. This switchover can take place while the drive is running. TheP936 [Drive Status 2] Bit 5 “FdbkLoss SwO” will indicate clear when the Primary source is active and set when the alternate source is active. Clearingthe (Auto Tach SW) bit when the alternate source is active will restore control to the Primary source, provided that the primary source is functioning.If the (Auto Tach SW) bit remains off, then the Automatic Tach Switchover feature will be disabled.Bit 8 “Delayed Ref” – When this bit is set, an additional processor scan delay period is inserted between the P594 [Ramped Spd Ref] and the input tothe Speed Reference filter. This delay is intended to be used in applications where multiple, coordinated drives are used. A drive that supplies thespeed reference for use by other drives to follow would typically use this delay. The delay would allow time for the speed reference to reach the otherunits before it is acted upon by the sourcing unit, thereby synchronizing the speed reference among all units. When this bit is clear, no speedreference delay is inserted.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-72 Programming and ParametersFileGroupRead-WriteData TypeNameNo. DescriptionValues636 Speed Reg BWSpeed Regulator BandwidthSets the speed loop bandwidth and determines the dynamic behavior of thespeed loop. As bandwidth increases, the speed loop becomes more responsiveand can track a faster changing speed reference. A change to this parameter willcause an automatic update of P645 [Speed Reg Kp], P647 [Speed Reg Ki] andP644 [Spd Err Filt BW]. The configuration settings for Inertia Adaption (productdependent) will also be automatically selected when this feature is enabled. Todisable the automatic gain and filter update, set this parameter to a value of zero.The maximum allowable value of this parameter will be limited by the ratio ofP646 [Spd Reg Max Kp] to P76 [Total Inertia], and the type of speed feedbacksource in use (encoder vs. open loop). For operation following an automatic tachswitchover, the bandwidth specified in P648 [Alt Speed Reg BW] will be used.Units:Default:Min/Max:R/SCalculated0.00 / CalculatedRW RealSPEED CONTROLSpeed Regulator637 SReg FB Fltr SelSpeed Regulator Feedback Filter SelectSelects the amount of filtering applied to the feedback channel of the speedregulator, and is only active in FV motor control modes (P35). When set to any ofthe custom settings (3, 4, or 5) the filter is configured using the values set in P638[Spd Ref Fltr BW] and P639 [Spd Ref FltrGain]. Settings 4 and 5 initialize thevalues for light and heavy respectively.638 SReg FB FltrGainSpeed Regulator Feedback Filter GainSets the gain of the speed regulator feedback filter when P637 [SReg FB Fltr Sel]is set to one of the “Custom” settings (3, 4, or 5).A gain value of zero results in a filter characteristic that behaves as a first orderlow pass. A gain value ranging between zero and one results in a lag type filter. Again value greater than one results in a lead type filter. A gain value of one willdisable (bypass) the filter.Default:Options:0 = “Off”0 = “Off”1 = “Light”2 = “Heavy”3 = “Custom”4 = “SetCustLight”5 = “SetCustHeavy”Default: 0.700Min/Max: –5.000 / 20.000RW 32-bitIntegerRW Real639 SReg FB Fltr BWSpeed Regulator Feedback Filter BandwidthSets the bandwidth of the speed regulator feedback filter when P637 [SReg FBFltr Sel] is set to one of the “Custom” settings (3, 4, or 5).A value of zero will disable (bypass) the filter.640 Filtered SpdFdbkFiltered Speed FeedbackDisplays the output of the filter that is applied by P637.Units: R/SDefault: 35.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 3760.00RW RealUnits:Default:Min/Max:HzRPM0.00–/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 8–/+P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 8ROReal641 Speed ErrorSpeed ErrorDisplays the error (difference) between the P597 [Final Speed Ref] (+) and theP640 [Filtered SpdFdbk] (–). This error signal is the primary input for the Vectorcontrol mode speed regulator.Units: HzDefault: RPMMin/Max: 0.00–/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 8–/+P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 8RORealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-73FileGroupNameDescriptionNo.642 755 Servo Lock GainServo Lock GainSets the gain of an additional integrator in the Vector control mode speedregulator. The effect of Servo Lock is to increase stiffness of the speed responseto a load disturbance. It behaves like a position regulator with velocity feedforward, but without the pulse accuracy of a true position regulator. Gain shouldnormally be set to less than 1/3 speed regulator bandwidth, or for the desiredresponse. A value of zero disables this feature.643 SpdReg AntiBckupSpeed Regulator Anti-backupAllows control of over-shoot/under-shoot in the step response of the Vectorcontrol mode speed regulator. Over-shoot/under-shoot can be effectivelyeliminated with a setting of 0.3, which will remove backup of the motor shaft whenzero speed is reached. This parameter has no affect on the drive's response toload changes. A value of zero disables this feature.Over-ShootValuesUnits: /SecDefault: 0.000Min/Max: 0.000 / 300.000Default: 0.0000Min/Max: 0.0000 / 0.5000Read-WriteData TypeRW RealRW RealErrorOver-ShootSPEED CONTROLSpeed RegulatorReferenceFeedback, SpdReg AntiBckup = 0.0Feedback, SpdReg AntiBckup = 0.3Under-ShootErrorUnder-Shoot644 Spd Err Fltr BWSpeed Error Filter BandwidthSets the bandwidth of a 2nd order Butterworth low pass filter that is located in theproportional gain section of the speed regulator (in FV motor control modes). Itfilters a signal that is derived from P641 [Speed Error]. The purpose of this filter isto reduce quantization noise.When P636 [Speed Reg BW] is set to a non-zero value, this filter will beautomatically set. If P636 [Speed Reg BW] is set to zero, this filter setting mustbe manually adjusted. It is normally set to at least 3 to 5 times the value of P636[Speed Reg BW]. A value of zero disables the filter.The rules that are used to set the error filter bandwidth in automatic mode are asfollows:1. If the primary motor velocity feedback is Open Loop, then the error filter is setto 5 times P636 [Speed Reg BW].2. If a primary motor velocity feedback device has been selected and P704[InAdp LdObs Mode] = 1 “InertiaAdapt,” then the error filter is set to 3 timesP636 [Speed Reg BW].3. If a primary motor velocity feedback device has been selected and P704[InAdp LdObs Mode] = 0 “Disabled” or 2 “LoadObserver” then the error filter isusing a table look up value determined by the setting of P126 [Pri VelFdbkFltr].Important: When Auto Tach Switchover is enabled through P635 [Spd OptionsCntl], this filter adjustment applies only to the primary feedback source. The filtersetting P651 [AltSpdErr FltrBW] is used for the alternate feedback source.645 Speed Reg KpSpeed Regulator KpSets the proportional gain of the speed regulator (in FV motor control modes).This value is automatically calculated based on the bandwidth setting in P636[Speed Reg BW] and P76 [Total Inertia]. The proportional gain may be manuallyadjusted by setting P636 [Speed Reg BW] to a value of zero. Proportional gainhas effective scaling of (per unit torque) / (per unit speed). The maximumallowable value of this parameter is limited by P76 [Total Inertia] and P646 [SpdReg Max Kp].646 Speed Reg Max KpSpeed Regulator Maximum KpLimits the maximum value of P645 [Speed Reg Kp] and P649 [Alt Speed RegKp]. When gains are automatically calculated, this parameter is necessary to limitthe amplification of noise with increased inertia.Units: R/SDefault: 50.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 8000.00Default: 20.00Min/Max: 0.00 / P646 [Speed Reg Max Kp]Default: 3000.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 3000.00RW RealRW RealRW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-74 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type647 Speed Reg KiSpeed Regulator KiSets the integral gain of the speed regulator (in FV motor control modes). Thisvalue is automatically calculated based on the bandwidth setting in P636 [SpeedReg BW], P645 [Speed Reg Kp] and P653 [Spd Loop Damping]. Integral gainmay be manually adjusted by setting P636 [Speed Reg BW] to a value of zero.Integral gain has effective scaling of (per unit torque/sec) / (per unit speed).Units: /SecDefault: 50.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 100000.00RW RealSPEED CONTROLSpeed Regulator648 Alt Speed Reg BWAlternate Speed Regulator BandwidthProvides an independent setting for the same function as P636 [Speed Reg BW],but is active only when Automatic Feedback Loss Switchover occurs (indicated bybit 5 of P936 [Drive Status 2]). A change to this parameter will cause anautomatic update of P649 [Alt Speed Reg Kp], P650 [Alt Speed Reg Ki] and P651[Alt Spd Err Filt BW]. See P636 for additional information regarding speedregulator bandwidth. Also see P635 [Spd Options Ctrl] to enable the Auto TachSwitchover feature.649 Alt Speed Reg KpAlternate Speed Regulator KpProvides an independent setting for the same function as P645 [Speed Reg Kp],but is active only when Automatic Feedback Loss Switchover occurs (indicated bybit 5 of P936 [Drive Status 2]). This value is automatically calculated based onthe bandwidth setting in P648 [Alt Speed Reg BW] and P76 [Total Inertia]. Theproportional gain may be manually adjusted by setting P648 [Alt Speed Reg BW]to a value of zero.Units: R/SDefault: 10.00Min/Max: 0.00 / CalculatedDefault: 20.00Min/Max: 0.00 / CalculatedRW RealRW Real650 Alt Speed Reg KiAlternate Speed Regulator KiProvides an independent setting for the same function as P647 [Speed Reg Ki],but is active only when Automatic Feedback Loss Switchover occurs (indicated bybit 5 of P936 [Drive Status 2]). This value is automatically calculated based onthe bandwidth setting in P648 [Alt Speed Reg BW], P649 [Alt Speed Reg Kp] andP653 [Spd Loop Damping]. Integral gain may be manually adjusted by settingP648 [Alt Speed Reg BW] to a value of zero.Default: 50.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 100000.00RW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-75FileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type651 AltSpdErr FltrBWAlternate Speed Error Filter BandwidthProvides an independent setting for the same function as P644 [Spd Err Filt BW],but is active only when Automatic Feedback Loss Switchover occurs (indicated bybit 5 of P936 [Drive Status 2])When P648 [Alt Speed Reg BW] is set to a non-zero value, this filter setting willbe automatically selected. If P648 [Alt Speed Reg BW] is set to zero, then thisfilter setting must be manually adjusted. An error filter value of 0 will disable thefilter. This filter is normally set to at least 3 to 5 times the value of P648 [Alt SpeedReg BW]. Units for the error filter are rad/sec (R/S).The rules that are used to set the error filter bandwidth in automatic mode are asfollows:1. If the alternate motor velocity feedback is Open Loop, then the error filter is setto 5 times P648 [Alt Speed Reg BW].2. If an alternate motor velocity feedback device has been selected and P704[InAdp LdObs Mode] = 1 “InertiaAdapt,” then the error filter is set to 3 timesP648 [Alt Speed Reg BW].3. If an alternate motor velocity feedback device has been selected and P704[InAdp LdObs Mode] 0 “Disabled” or 2 “LoadObserver” then the error filter isusing a table look up value determined by the setting of P129 [Alt VelFdbkFltr].Units: R/SDefault: 50.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 8000.00RW RealSPEED CONTROLSpeed Regulator652 SReg Trq PresetSpeed Regulator Torque PresetSets the initial value of P654 [Spd Reg Int Out]. This is the output of the vectorspeed regulator’s integral channel, and. will be present in P654 [Spd Reg Int Out]when the regulator is first enabled (for example, upon rise of start or jog). Thenormal, default setting for this parameter is zero. In some applications, it may benecessary to preset the speed regulator integrator to a non-zero setting. This willresult in the regulator’s output reaching its final steady state value sooner than itwould if the integrator started from zero.Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+800.00RW Real653 Spd Loop DampingSpeed Loop DampingSets the damping factor of the vector speed loop’s characteristic equation.Damping will affect the integral gain when a non-zero bandwidth has beenentered. A damping factor of 1.0 is considered critical damping. Lowering thedamping will produce faster load disturbance rejection, but may cause a moreoscillatory response. When the speed regulator bandwidth is zero, gains are setmanually and damping factor has no effect.654 Spd Reg Int OutSpeed Regulator Integrator OutputDisplays the current value of the vector speed regulator’s integral channel.655 Spd Reg Pos LmtSpeed Regulator Positive LimitAdjusts the upper limit of the vector speed regulator’s output.656 Spd Reg Neg LmtSpeed Regulator Negative LimitAdjusts the lower limit of the vector speed regulator’s output.Default: 1.0000Min/Max: 0.5000 / 65.0000RW RealUnits: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+800.00RO RealUnits: %Default: 300.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 600.00RW RealUnits: %Default: –300.00Min/Max: –600.00 / 0.00RW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-76 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type657 SReg OutFltr SelSpeed Regulator Output Filter SelectSelects the amount of filtering applied to the vector speed regulator’s output.When set to any of the custom settings (3, 4, or 5) the filter is configured usingthe values set in P658 [SReg OutFltrGain] and P659 [SReg Out FltrBW]. Settings4 and 5 initialize the values for light and heavy respectively.Default:Options:0 = “Disabled”0 = “Disabled”1 = “Light”2 = “Heavy”3 = “Custom”4 = “SetCustLight”5 = “SetCustHeavy”RW 32-bitInteger658 SReg OutFltrGainSpeed Regulator Output Filter GainSets the gain of the vector speed regulator’s output filter when P657 [SReg OutFltr Sel] is set to one of the “Custom” settings (3, 4, or 5).A gain value of zero results in a filter characteristic that behaves as a first orderlow pass. A gain value ranging between zero and one results in a lag type filter. Again value greater than one results in a lead type filter. A gain value of one willdisable (bypass) the filter.Default: 1.000Min/Max: –/+5.000RW RealSPEED CONTROLSpeed Regulator659 SReg OutFltr BWSpeed Regulator Output Filter BandwidthSets the bandwidth of the speed regulator’s output filter when P657 [SReg OutFltr Sel] is set to one of the “Custom” settings (3, 4, or 5).A value of zero will disable (bypass) the filter.660 SReg OutputSpeed Regulator OutputDisplays the output of the vector speed regulator. This signal will be routed to theP685 [Selected TorqRef] when P313 [Actv SpTqPs Mode] has selected theoutput of the speed regulator.Units: R/SDefault: 35.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 3760.00Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+ 800.00RW RealROReal663 VHzSV Spd Reg KpVolts per Hertz Sensorless Vector Speed Regulator Proportional GainAdjusts the proportional gain of the Speed Regulator used in non-vector modesaccording to P35 [Motor Cntl Mode]. The output of this regulator will adjust P623[VHzSV SpdTrimReg] when P131 [Active Vel Fdbk] originates from a feedbackdevice.Default: 20.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 3000.00RW Real664 VHzSV Spd Reg KiVolts per Hertz Sensorless Vector Speed Regulator Integral GainAdjusts the integral gain of the Speed Regulator used in non-vector modesaccording to P35 [Motor Cntl Mode]. The output of this regulator will adjust P623[VHzSV SpdTrimReg] when P131 [Active Vel Fdbk] originates from a feedbackdevice.Units: /SecDefault: 50.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 100000.00RW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-77FileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData TypeSPEED CONTROLSpeed Comp665 Speed Comp SelSpeed Compensation SelectConfigures the Speed Compensation function, which is used in Vector Controlmodes to create a feedforward compensation that is added into the speedreference. This helps compensate for position tracking errors during acceleration.These tracking errors are caused by the sample and hold process and delayscaused by the position to velocity FIR filter. Speed Compensation will help reduceposition error in position follower applications.Available settings for this parameter are:“Disabled” (0) – Function is disabled, speed compensation does not affect thespeed reference.“Ramped Ref” (1) – Speed compensation function is enabled and uses aninternally generated ramped speed reference signal. The rate of change(derivative) of the speed reference becomes the input to the SpeedCompensation function. This is the most common setting when speedcompensation is in use.“Rate Ref” (2) – Speed compensation function is enabled and uses an externallygenerated speed rate signal. The rate of change or derivative of the speedreference is supplied by P596 [Speed Rate Ref]. This signal is typically suppliedby an external controller when the speed reference ramp is generated external tothe drive.666 Speed Comp GainSpeed Compensation GainThe Speed Compensation Gain adjusts the magnitude of P667 [Speed CompOut]. This gain can be either manually set or automatically determined as part ofautomatic gain mode for Vector speed control. Automatic mode can be activatedby selecting a motor speed feedback device in P125 [Pri Vel Fdbk Sel] andsetting a non-zero speed regulator bandwidth in P636 [Speed Reg BW]. Inautomatic mode, the gain is calculated internally using a table lookup from theinterrupt times and delays of the speed feedback FIR filter. For any other case –non-vector control, open loop speed feedback, or zero bandwidth setting, thespeed compensation gain must be manually adjusted.Default:Options:0 = “Disabled”0 = “Disabled”1 = “Ramped Ref”2 = “Rate Ref”Default: –2.50Min/Max: –/+32767.00RW 32-bitIntegerRW Real667 Speed Comp OutSpeed Compensation OutputDisplays the output of the Speed Compensation function. This value will besummed with the speed reference, following the application of P555 [Spd RefScale].Units: HzDefault: RPMMin/Max: 0.00–/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 8–/+P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 8RO RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-78 Programming and ParametersDrive Torque Control FileFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData TypeTORQUE CONTROLTorque Limits670 Pos Torque LimitPositive Torque LimitDefines the torque limit for the positive torque reference value. The reference willnot be allowed to exceed this value.671 Neg Torque LimitNegative Torque LimitDefines the torque limit for the negative torque reference value. The reference willnot be allowed to exceed this value.Units: %Default: 200.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 800.00Units: %Default: –200.00Min/Max: –800.00 / 0.00RW RealRW RealFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type675680Trq Ref A SelTrq Ref B SelTorque Reference A SelectTorque Reference B SelectSelects the source for a torque reference, used when the drive is configured tocommand torque according to P309-312 [SpdTrqPsn Mode X]. The values of thetorque reference sources are added together to provide a single torquereference.Default:Min/Max:6766810 / 159999RW 32-bitInteger676681Trq Ref A StptTrq Ref B StptTorque Reference A SetpointTorque Reference B SetpointA digital torque value to be used as a possible source for P675 and P680respectively.Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+800.00RW RealTORQUE CONTROLTorque Reference677682678683Trq Ref A AnlgHiTrq Ref B AnlgHiTorque Reference A Analog HighTorque Reference B Analog HighUsed only when an analog input is selected as a torque reference according toP676 or P681. Sets the torque value that corresponds to [Anlg InX Hi] on an I/Omodule or on the main control (product dependent). This establishes scalingthroughout the range.Trq Ref A AnlgLoTrq Ref B AnlgLoTorque Reference A Analog LowTorque Reference B Analog LowUsed only when an analog input is selected as a torque reference according toP676 or P681. Sets the torque value that corresponds to [Anlg InX Lo] on an I/Omodule or on the main control (product dependent). This establishes scalingthroughout the range.Units: %Default: 100.00Min/Max: –/+800.00Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+800.00RW RealRW Real679684Trq Ref A MultTrq Ref B MultTorque Reference A MultiplierTorque Reference B MultiplierA multiplier that is applied to the values referenced by P675 and P680respectively. A value of 1 leaves the reference unaffected. Negative values invertthe reference.Default: 1.000Min/Max: –/+1000.000RW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-79FileGroupValuesRead-WriteData TypeNameNo. Description685 Selected Trq RefSelected Torque ReferenceDisplays the torque value of the selected torque reference (dynamic selectionaccording to P313 [Actv SpTqPs Mode]). This value will be summed with P686[Torque Step]. The result is then applied to the input of the notch filter located inthe Vector torque reference section.686 Torque StepTorque StepDefines the amount of torque reference step change to simulate a loaddisturbance, used to test the response. This value is added to the main torquereference P685 [Selected Torq Ref], and then applied to the input of the notchfilter located in the Vector control torque reference section.687 Notch Fltr FreqNotch Filter FrequencyThe center frequency for the Notch filter located in the Vector control torquereference section. To disable, set to zero (0).688 Notch Fltr AttenNotch Filter AttenuationSets the attenuation of the notch filter located in the Vector control torquereference section. Attenuation is the ratio of the notch filter input signal to itsoutput at the P687 [Notch Fltr Freq]. An attenuation of 30 means that the notchoutput is 1/30th of the input at the specified frequency.Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+800.00RO RealUnits: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+800.00RW RealUnits: HzDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 500.00RW RealTORQUE CONTROLTorque ReferenceAttenuationDefault: 50.000Min/Max: 0.000 / 500.000RW RealFreq (Hz)689 Filtered Trq RefFiltered Torque ReferenceDisplays the output of the notch filter defined by P687 and P688. If P704 [InAdpLdObs Mode] indicates that either the Inertia Adaption or Load Estimatefunctions are active, then the filtered torque reference will also be modified bythese functions.690 Limited Trq RefLimited Torque ReferenceDisplays the torque reference value after filtering (P689), power limits, torquelimits, and current limits have been applied.Motor power limits are set by P426 [Regen Power Lmt] and P427 [Motor PowerLmt]. Motor torque limits are set by P670 [Pos Torque Limit] and P671 [NegTorque Limit]. Motor current limit is set by P422 [Current Limit 1] or P423 [CurrentLimit 2].Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+800.00Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+800.00RORORealRealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-80 Programming and ParametersFileGroupTORQUE CONTROLInertia CompNameNo. Description695 755 Inertia CompModeInertia Compensation ModeThe inertia compensation function calculates a feed forward torque signal P699[Inertia Comp Out]. Inertia compensation attempts to predict the motor torquerequired to accelerate and decelerate an inertial load. The P699 [Inertia CompOut] signal is summed with P660 [SReg Output] and becomes an input availableto the P313 [Actv SpTqPs Mode] selector. The inputs to the inertia comp functionare the rate of change of motor speed reference and P76 [Total Inertia].This parameter enables the inertia comp function and selects possible sources ofmotor speed reference as follows:“Disabled” (0) – Inertia compensation function is disabled. P699 [Inertia CompOut] is zero so the motor torque reference is not affected.“Int Ramp Ref” (1) – Inertia compensation is enabled. The function is configuredto use the rate of change of P595 [Filtered Spd Ref]. This is the typical settingthat should be used for inertia compensation on a stand-alone drive.“Ext Ramp Ref” (2) – Inertia compensation is enabled. The function is configuredto use the rate of change of P700 [Ext Ramped Ref]. This setting is available forapplications that supply a ramped speed reference external to the drive.“Spd Rate Ref” (3) – Inertia compensation is enabled. The function is configuredto use the P596 [Speed Rate Ref]. This parameter should contain a value thatrepresents the rate of change of the motor speed reference. This setting isavailable for applications that supply a ramped speed reference external to thedrive.696 755 Inertia Acc GainInertia Acceleration GainSets the acceleration gain for the inertia compensation function. A value of 1produces 100% compensation.697 755 Inertia Dec GainInertia Deceleration GainSets the deceleration gain for the inertia compensation function. A value of 1produces 100% compensation.698 755 Inert Comp LPFBWInertia Compensation Low Pass Filter BandwidthSets the bandwidth of a low pass filter for the inertia compensation function. Theoutput of this filter supplies P699 [Inertia Comp Out].ValuesDefault:Options:0 = “Disabled”0 = “Disabled”1 = “Int Ramp Ref”2 = “Ext Ramp Ref”3 = “Spd Rate Ref”Default: 1.0000Min/Max: 0.0000 / 2.0000Default: 1.0000Min/Max: 0.0000 / 2.0000Units: R/SDefault: 35.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 2000.00699 755 Inertia Comp OutUnits: %Inertia Compensation OutputDefault: 0.00Displays the output of the inertia compensation function. The P699 [Inertia Comp Min/Max: –/+800.00Out] signal is summed with P660 [Spd Reg Out] and becomes an input availableto the P313 [Actv SpTqPs Mode] selector. Inertia compensation provides atorque feed forward signal during changes in motor speed reference.700 755 Ext Ramped RefExternal Ramped ReferenceThis parameter is meant for an external motor speed ramp input signal. Thissignal will be used by the inertia compensation function when P695 [InertiaCompMode] = 2 “Ext Ramp Ref”. This parameter will be entered in units of Hz or RPM,depending on the value of P300 [Speed Units].Units: HzDefault: RPMMin/Max: 0.00–/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 8–/+P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 8Read-WriteData TypeRW 32-bitIntegerRW RealRW RealRW RealRORealRW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-81FileGroupTORQUE CONTROLFriction CompNameNo. Description704 755 InAdp LdObs ModeInertia Adaption Load Observer ModeUsed to enable operation of either Inertia Adaption or Load Observer.These System Control modes are only available in Vector Control mode whenusing a motor speed feedback device. The value of P76 [Total Inertia] must bevalid in order for these features to work correctly. The P70 [Autotune] setting 4“Inertia Tune” can be used to measure the System Inertia. Regardless of the SysControl mode used, the parameter P707 [Load Estimate] is updated formonitoring purposes.The possible settings for Sys Control Sel are:“Disabled” (0) – Both Inertia Adaption and Load Observer functions are disabled.P708 [InertiaTrqAdd] is zero so the motor torque reference is not affected. P707[Load Estimate] is still valid, provided that the drive is in Vector Mode, using amotor speed feedback device, and a valid P76 [Total Inertia] is used.“InertiaAdapt” (1) – Inertia Adaption function is enabled. The Inertia Adaptionfunction will provide enhanced stability, higher bandwidths and dynamic stiffness.Inertia Adaption is especially useful in systems with a gear-box that become, ineffect, disconnected from the load. Inertia Adaption may also be used for motorswith very little inertia that otherwise would lack dynamic stiffness, even at highbandwidths. The output of the Inertia Adaption function P708 [InertiaTrqAdd], willsubtract from the motor torque reference.“LoadObserver” (2) – Load Observer function is enabled. The Load Observerfunction removes or greatly reduces the effects of load disturbances and providesquicker system response. The output of the Load Observer function is similar toP707 [Load Estimate], but has a filter setting determined by P711 [Load ObserverBW]. The Load Observer’s output signal will add to the motor torque reference.ValuesDefault:Options:0 = “Disabled”0 = “Disabled”1 = “InertiaAdapt”2 = “LoadObserver”705 755 Inertia Adapt BWUnits: R/SInertia Adapt BandwidthSets the bandwidth of a low pass filter located in the output of the InertiaAdaption function. This parameter should typically be set to match the bandwidthof the drive’s speed regulator. This matching setting is automatically made whenthe Inertia Adaption function is active and the speed regulator bandwidth (P636[Speed Reg BW]), is set to a non-zero value. If the speed regulator bandwidth isset to zero, then this filter setting must be manually adjusted.Default:Min/Max:10.001.00 / 1000.00706 755 InertiaAdaptGainDefault: 0.500Inertia Adaption GainSets a multiplier of system inertia used when the Inertia Adaption function isselected P704 [InAdp LdObs Mode] = 1 “InertiaAdapt.” This gain has no effect onthe parameter P707 [Load Estimate]. Higher gain values may cause highfrequency ringing, while smaller values may cause fundamental load instability.This gain should typically range from 0.3 to 1.0 with 0.5 nominal best. The gainsetting of 0.5 is automatically made when the speed regulator bandwidth (P636[Speed Reg BW]), is set to a non-zero value. If the speed regulator bandwidth isset to zero, then this gain setting must be manually adjusted.Min/Max: 0.300 / 1.000707 755 Load EstimateLoad EstimateDisplays an estimated load torque value for the drive. This value is only availablein Vector Control mode when using a motor speed feedback device. The loadestimate does not include any torque required to accelerate or decelerate themotor. In order to be accurate, the parameter P76 [Total Inertia] must contain areasonably accurate value.708 755 InertiaTrqAddInertia Torque AdaptionDisplays the output of the Inertia Adaption function. This value will be subtractedfrom the motor torque reference, with the result displayed as P689 [Filtered TrqRef]. The inertia adaption function will be active when operating in Vector Controlmode with a motor speed feedback device and P704 [InAdp LdObs Mode] = 1“InertiaAdapt.” A value of 100% represents rated motor torque.Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+800.00Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+800.00Read-WriteData TypeRW 32-bitIntegerRW RealRW RealRORORealRealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-82 Programming and ParametersFileGroupTORQUE CONTROLFriction CompNameNo. Description709 755 IA LdObs DelayInertia Adaption Load Observer DelayAdjusts a filter setting that is applied to the active motor velocity feedback source.The purpose of this filter is to reduce the level of noise present in the feedbacksignal. Note that this filter is the same type but separate from the filters used toprovide P127 [Pri Vel Feedback] and P130 [Alt Vel Feedback]. The derivative ofthe Sys Control Delay filtered motor velocity signal will be a Motor AccelerationFeedback signal. The Motor Acceleration Feedback is applied to the InertiaAdaption and Load Observer/ Load Estimate functions.This is moving average type filter that has a delay setting of N, where N is aninteger number (0, 1, 2 …). A setting of zero provides no filtering and no delay.Larger values of N result in more filtering and more delay. The best setting for thisfilter will depend on the level of noise present in the feedback signal and thebandwidth setting of the velocity regulator.710 755 InertAdptFiltBWInertia Adaption Filter BandwidthSets the bandwidth of a low pass filter located in the output of the vector controlspeed regulator and used in connection with the Inertia Adaption function. Thebandwidth of this filter should typically be set to five times the bandwidth of thespeed regulator. This setting is automatically made when the Inertia Adaptionfunction is active and the speed regulator bandwidth (P636 [Speed Reg BW]), isset to a non-zero value. If the speed regulator bandwidth is set to zero, then thisfilter setting must be manually adjusted.ValuesDefault:Options:3 = “50R/S Noise”0 = “190R/S Noise”1 = “160R/S Noise”2 = “100R/S Noise”3 = “50R/S Noise”4 = “25R/S Noise”5 = “12R/S Noise”6 = “6R/S Noise”7 = “3R/S Noise”Units: R/SDefault: 50.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 1000.00711 755 Load Observer BWUnits: R/SLoad Observer BandwidthDefault: 40.00Sets the bandwidth of a low pass filter located in the output of the Load Observer Min/Max: 1.00 / 1000.00function. Typical filter settings range from 10 radians/sec to 150 radians/sec withthe higher values being more responsive to disturbances but with increasedsystem noise. There is no nominal best setting, but 40 rad/sec is a suggestedstarting point. This selection may not function well in sloppy geared systems.Read-WriteData TypeRW 32-bitIntegerRW RealRW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-83Drive Position Control FileFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValues720 PTP PsnRefStatusPoint-To-Point Position Reference StatusDisplays the current operating status of the Point-To-Point Position Planner in the Position Referencing.Read-WriteData TypeOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedSpdFFRef EnPTP Int HoldRef CompleteZeroFFSpdRefDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = False1 = TrueBit 0 “ZeroFFSpdRef” – Indicates the speed feed forward reference P783 [PTP Speed FwdRef] is zero.Bit 1 “Ref Complete” – Indicates the position point-to-point feedback P777 [PTP Feedback] reaches the position point-to-point reference P784 [PTPCommand], and the speed forward reference P783 [PTP Speed FwdRef] reaches zero.Bit 2 “P2P Int Hold” – Indicates the position point-to-point planner integrator is holding. Read back of the point-to-point integral hold bit P770 [PTPControl] Bit 4 “Intgrtr Hold”.Bit 3 “SpdFFRef En” – Indicates the speed feed forward reference P783 [PTP Speed FwdRef] is active.721 Position ControlPosition ControlSets bits to enable various position control functions.POSITION CONTROLPosition Cfg/StsOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedAdd Spd RefPsnWatch2Dir (1)PsnWtch2Arm (1)PsnWatch1Dir (1)PsnWtch1Arm (1)Intgrtr HoldZero PsnOffsetVel EnOffset ReRefIntgrtr EnReservedDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0(1) 755 drives only.Bit 1 “Intgrtr En” – Enables integrator operation. Resetting it resets the integrator.Bit 2 “Offset ReRef” – Permits changing the value of position offsets without changing actual position.Bit 3 “OffsetVel En” – Uses the offset velocity P824 [Psn Offset Vel] for the position offset integrator. Sets the offset integrator bit, P724 [Psn RegStatus] Bit 0 “OffsetIntgtr” when this bit is on.Bit 4 “Zero Psn” – Puts P836 [Psn Actual] in absolute mode with zero position offset. P836 [Psn Actual] sets value of P847 [Psn Fdbk] - the positionP725 [Zero Position].Bit 5 “Intgrtr Hold” – Holds the position integrator in present state.Bit 6 “PsnWtch1Arm” – Enables the position watch 1. Resetting this bit clears the position watch 1 detection P724 [Psn Reg Status] Bit 9“PsnW1Detect”.Bit 7 “PsnWatch1Dir” – Causes the position watch 1 output to be set when P746 [PsnWatch 1 DtctIn] is greater than a set-point selected by theposition watch 1 selection P745 [PsnWatch1 Select]. Resetting this bit causes the position watch 1 output to be set when P746 [PsnWatch 1 DtctIn]is less than a set-point selected by the position watch 1 selection P745 [PsnWatch1 Select].Bit 8 “PsnWtch2Arm” – Enables the position watch 2. Resetting this bit clears the position watch 2 detection P724 [Psn Reg Status] Bit 10“PsnW2Detect”.Bit 9 “PsnWatch2Dir” – Causes the position watch 2 output to be set when P749 [PsnWatch2 DtctIn] is greater than a set-point selected by theposition watch 2 selection P748 [PsnWatch2 DtctIn]. Resetting this bit causes the position watch 2 output to be set when P749 [PsnWatch2 DtctIn] isless than a set-point selected by the position watch 2 selection P748 [PsnWatch2 DtctIn].Bit 10 “Add Spd Ref” – Adds the speed reference to the output of the position control, when in position control mode.722 Psn Selected RefPosition Selected ReferenceIndicates output of the position referencing. When the Spd/Torq/Pos mode P313[Actv SpTqPs Mode] is the position direct mode (Option 10), the value of theposition direct reference P767 [Psn Direct Ref] appears on this parameter. Whenthe Spd/Torq/Pos mode P313 [Actv SpTqPs Mode] is the position point-to-pointmode (Option 7) or the speed/position profiler mode (Option 6), the positionpoint-to-point reference P776 [PTP Reference] appears on this parameter.0 = False1 = TrueDefault: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647RO32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-84 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNo.NameDescription723 Psn CommandPosition CommandIndicates final accumulated command to the position regulator. When the positionregulator is not active, this parameter is initialized to P836 [Psn Actual].724 Psn Reg StatusPosition Regulator StatusIndicates status of position control logic.ValuesDefault: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647Read-WriteData TypeRO32-bitIntegerOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedInPsn DetectPsnW2Detect (1)PsnW1Detect (1)Intgrtr HoldPsn Reg ActvSpd Lmt HiSpd Lmt LoInteg Lmt HiInteg Lmt LoPsn IntgrtrOffset ReRefOffsetIntgtrDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0(1) 755 drives only.0 = False1 = TruePOSITION CONTROLPosition Cfg/StsBit 0 “OffsetIntgtr” – Indicates the position offset Integrator is active with the position offset integrator bit P721 [Position Control] Bit 3 “OffsetVel En” ison.Bit 1 “Offset ReRef” – Indicates the position offset re-referencing is active with the position offset re-referencing bit P721 [Position Control] Bit 2“Offset ReRef” is on.Bit 2 “Psn Intgrtr” – Indicates the position integrator is active with the position integrator bit P721 [Position Control] Bit 1 “Intgrtr En” is on.Bit 3 “Integ Lmt Lo” – Indicates the position integrator is at the low limit.Bit 4 “Integ Lmt Hi” – Indicates the position integrator is at the high limit.Bit 5 “Spd Lmt Lo” – Indicates the position regulator output (speed) is at the low limit.Bit 6 “Spd Lmt Hi” – Indicates the position regulator output (speed) is at the high limit.Bit 7 “Psn Reg Actv” – Indicates the position regulator is activeBit 8 “Intgrtr Hold” – Indicates the position Integrator is held in present stateBit 9 “PsnW1Detect” – Indicates the position watch 1 has detected motor position equal to its setpoint, from the proper direction.Bit 10 “PsnW2Detect” – Indicates the position watch 2 has detected motor position equal to its setpoint, from the proper direction.Bit 11 “InPsn Detect” – Indicates P835 [Psn Error] is within the position band specified by the in-position band P726 [In Pos Psn Band]725 Zero PositionZero PositionSets the absolute user zero position. When the zero position bit P721 [PositionControl] Bit 4 “Zero Psn” is set, P836 [Psn Actual] accumulates the value of P847[Psn Fdbk] - the P725 [Zero Position], and P836 [Psn Actual] becomes zero whenP847 [Psn Fdbk] is at the zero position. The homing function also sets the valueafter homing process is completed.726 In Pos Psn BandIn Positive Position BandwidthSets the overall bandwidth of the in position detector. The detector sets thein-position detect bit P724 [Psn Reg Status] Bit 11 “InPsn Detect” when P835[Psn Error] is within this position band for a sufficient time specified by thein-position dwell time P727 [In Pos Psn Dwell]. A modest hysteresis count isadded to the position bandwidth after the position error is within specified limits.727 In Pos Psn DwellIn Positive Position DwellSets dwell time for the in position detector. Position error must be within the valuespecified by the in-position band P726 [In Pos Psn Band] for this amount of timebefore the in-position detector sets the in-position detect bit P724 [Psn RegStatus] Bit 11 “InPsn Detect”. A momentary out-of-position indication will resetthe internal timer and clear the in-position detect bit P724 [Psn Reg Status] Bit 11“InPsn Detect”.Default: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 214748364700 / 2147483647Default: 0.0040Min/Max: 0.0001 / 10.0000RW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-85FileGroupNameNo. Description730 Homing StatusHoming StatusIndicates status of position control logic.ValuesRead-WriteData TypeOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedAt HomeHomingHome EnabledHome RequestDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Disabled1 = EnabledBit 0 “Home Request” – Indicates the homing function is requested. The homing function is requested by the homing configuration bits P731 [HomingControl].Bit 1 “Home Enabled” – Indicates the homing function is enabled. This bit is set when the homing function is requested and the drive starts.Bit 2 “Homing” – Indicates the drive is heading to home position.Bit 3 “At Home” – Indicates the drive is at home position.731 Homing ControlHoming ControlSets bits to configure the homing function.POSITION CONTROLPosition HomingOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedHold At HomeHome DI InvHoming AlarmPsn RedefineReturn HomeHome MarkerHome DIFind HomeDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0Bit 0 “Find Home” – Puts the drive in the homing mode. Setting this bit requests the homing function and sets homing request bit P730 [HomingStatus] Bit 0 “Home Request”. This bit needs a toggle to reset the the homing function.Bit 1 “Home DI” – Configures the homing function to use a switch (digital input). When this bit is on and Bit 2 “Home Marker” is off, the homingfunction is configured as home switch mode. When this bit is on and Bit 2 “Home Marker” is on, the homing function is configured as homemarker-switch mode.Bit 2 “Home Marker” – Configures the homing function to use a marker input. When this bit is on and Bit 1 “Home DI” is off, the homing function isconfigured as home marker mode. When this bit is on and Bit 1 “Home DI” is on, the homing function is configured as home marker-switch mode.Bit 3 “Return Home” – Configures the homing function as return home mode. The drive returns to the actual home position P737 [Actual Home Psn].Bit 4 “Psn Redefine” – Sets the position feedback P847 [Psn Fdbk] to the actual home position P737 [Actual Home Psn].Bit 5 “Homing Alarm” – Enables the home running alarm when the homing function is active.Bit 6 “Home DI Inv” – Changes polarity of the switch input (digital input).Bit 7 “Hold At Home” – Configures the drive to return to the home position after completing the homing function. A start command is required for thedrive to run again.732 DI Find HomeDigital Input Find HomeSets a digital input port for the “Find Home” function.733 DI Redefine PsnDigital Input Redefine PositionSets a digital input port for the redefine position function. The digital inputassigned by this parameter is equivalent to P731 [Homing Control] Bit 4 “PsnRedefine”.734 DI OL Home LimitDigital Input Open Loop Home LimitSets a digital input port for the limit switch of open loop homing function. Polarityof digital input (rising or falling edge) is specified by P731 [Homing Control] Bit 6“Home DI Inv.”735 Find Home SpeedFind Home SpeedSets the speed and direction that are active when P731 [Homing Control] Bit 0“Find Home” is active. The sign of the value defines direction (“+” = Forward, “–” =Reverse).0 = Disabled1 = EnabledDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 159999.15Units: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 159999.15Units: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 159999.15Units:Default:Min/Max:HzRPMP27 [Motor NP Hz] x 0.1P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 0.1P27 [Motor NP Hz] x 0.5P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 0.5RW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-86 Programming and ParametersFileGroupPOSITION CONTROLPosition HomingNameNo. Description736 Find Home RampFind Home RampSets the rate of acceleration and deceleration of the Find Home moves.737 Actual Home PsnActual Home PositionIndicates actual home position after the homing function is complete. The value inthis parameter displays the raw position feedback data at home position.738 User Home PsnUser Home PositionSets user-defined home position. After the homing function is completed, thefollowing parameters are updated with this parameter value; P723 [PsnCommand], P815 [Psn Ref EGR Out], P836 [Psn Actual], P837 [Psn LoadActual].ValuesUnits: SecsDefault: 10.00Min/Max: 0.01 / 6554.00Default: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647Default: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647Read-WriteData TypeRW RealRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerFileGroupPOSITION CONTROLPosition WatchNo.745748746749747750NameDescription755 PsnWatch1 Select755 PsnWatch2 SelectPosition Watch 1 SelectPosition Watch 2 SelectSelects a position feedback source that is compared to the position watchdetect-input P746 [PsnWatch1 DtctIn], P749 [PsnWatch2 DtctIn].755PsnWatch1 DtctInPsnWatch2 DtctIn755Position Watch 1 Detect InputPosition Watch 2 Detect InputProvides position feedback source for the position watch function. The positionwatch function is enabled and configured by the position control configurationP721 [Position Control]. The position watch function compares this value to theposition watch set point P747 [PsnWatch1 Stpt], P750 [PsnWatch2 Stpt] whenthis parameter P746, P749 is selected by the position watch select P745[PsnWatch1 Select], P748 [PsnWatch2 Select]. The position detect bit P724 [PsnReg Status] Bit 9 “PsnW1Detect”, Bit 10 “PsnW2Detect” is set when theappropriate condition is satisfied.755 PsnWatch1 Stpt755 PsnWatch2 StptPosition Watch 1 SetpointPosition Watch 2 SetpointProvides set point for the position watch function. The position watch function isenabled and configured by P721 [Position Control]. The position watch functioncompares this value to the position feedback source selected by the positionwatch select P745 [PsnWatch1 Select], P748 [PsnWatch2 Select]. The positiondetect bit P724 [Psn Reg Status] Bit 9 “PsnW1Detect”, Bit 10 “PsnW2Detect” isset when the appropriate condition is satisfied.ValuesDefault: 847Min/Max: 1 / 159999Default: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647Default: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647Read-WriteData TypeRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-87FileGroupNameNo. Description765 Psn Ref SelectPosition Reference SelectSelects a source data for the direct position reference.766 Psn Direct StptPosition Direct SetpointProvides set point for the direct position reference. This parameter providesposition reference to the position regulator when the Spd/Torq/Pos mode P313[Actv SpTqPs Mode] is the position direct mode (Option 10) and the positionreference select P765 [Psn Ref Select] is the set point.ValuesRead-WriteData TypeDefault:Options:7591 / 159999RW 32-bitIntegerPOSITION CONTROLDirect767 Psn Direct RefPosition Direct ReferenceIndicates position direct reference selected by the position reference select P765[Psn Ref Select].Default: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647Default: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647RW 32-bitIntegerRO32-bitIntegerFileGroupNameNo. Description770 PTP ControlPoint-To-Point ControlSets bits to configure the point-to-point position control.ValuesRead-WriteData TypeOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedRef SyncRef PauseIntgrtr HoldPreset PsnReverse MoveMoveVel OverrideDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = False1 = TruePOSITION CONTROLPoint to PointBit 0 “Vel Override” – Applies the velocity overload P788 [PTP Vel Override] to the forward velocity limit P785 [PTP Fwd Vel Lmt] and the reversevelocity limit P786 [PTP Rev Vel Lmt] as a gain. When the velocity overload P788 [PTP Vel Override] is 1.1 and the forward velocity limit P785 [PTPFwd Vel Lmt] is 30 Hz, the bit sets the maximum forward velocity to 33 Hz.Bit 1 “Move” – Sets scaled point-to-point position reference to the point-to-point position command P784 [PTP Command]. When the point-to-pointmode selection P771 [PTP Mode] is absolute mode (Option 0), the absolute position is set to the point-to-point position command P784 when the bitrises. When the point-to-point mode selection P771 [PTP Mode] is index mode (Option 1), the index position is set to the point-to-point positioncommand P784 when the bit rises.Bit 2 “Reverse Move” – Changes direction of the index position when the point-to-point mode selection P771 [PTP Mode] is index mode (Option 1).Bit 3 “Preset Psn” – Sets index preset P779 [PTP Index Preset] to the point-to-point position command P784 [PTP Command] when the point-to-pointmode selection P771 [PTP Mode] is index mode (Option 1).Bit 4 “Intgrtr Hold” – Holds integrator in the velocity control.Bit 5 “Ref Pause” – Pauses functioning of the point-to-point control. The point-to-point speed forward reference becomes zero, and the positionselected reference P722 [Psn Selected Ref] keeps current position.Bit 6 “Ref Sync” – Sets initial value to the point-to-point feedback P777 [PTP Feedback].771 PTP ModePoint-To-Point ModeSelects point-to-point position mode. The point-to-point position control isconfigured with the following selections.“Absolute” (0) – Absolute position mode“Index” (1) – Index position mode“Immediate” (2) – Absolute immediate position mode772 DI Indx StepDigital Input Index StepSets a digital input port for the index position move. The digital input assigned bythis parameter is equivalent to the point-to-point move bit P770 [PTP Control] Bit1 “Move” when the point-to-point mode P771 [PTP Mode] is selected to the indexposition mode (Option 1).Default:Options:0 = “Absolute”0 = “Absolute”1 = “Index”2 = “Immediate”Default: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 159999.15RW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-88 Programming and ParametersFileGroupValuesRead-WriteData TypeNameNo. Description773 DI Indx StepRevDigital Input Index Step ReverseSets a digital input port for the index position reverse move. The digital inputassigned by this parameter is equivalent to the point-to-point reverse move bitP770 [PTP Control] Bit 2 “Reverse Move” when the point-to-point mode P771[PTP Mode] is selected to the index position mode (Option 1).Default: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 159999.15RW 32-bitInteger774 DI Indx StepPrstDigital Input Index Step PresetSets a digital input port for the index preset position. The digital input assigned bythis parameter is equivalent to the point-to-point preset position bit P770 [PTPControl] Bit 3 “Preset Psn” when the point-to-point mode P771 [PTP Mode] isselected to the index position mode (Option 1).Default: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 159999.15RW 32-bitInteger775 PTP Ref SelPoint-To-Point Reference SelectSelects a point-to-point reference source that applies to the point-to-pointposition control.Default: 780Min/Max: 1 / 159999RW 32-bitInteger776 PTP ReferencePoint-To-Point ReferenceIndicates output of the point-to-point position control as a reference of theposition control. When the speed/torque/position mode P313 [Actv SpTqPsMode] is selected to the point-to-point mode (Option 7) or the profiler mode(Option 6), this parameter value appears on the position selected reference P722[Psn Selected Ref].Default: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647RO32-bitInteger777 PTP FeedbackPoint-To-Point FeedbackIndicates position feedback in the point-to-point position control.Default: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647RO32-bitIntegerPOSITION CONTROLPoint to Point778 PTP Ref ScalePoint-To-Point Reference ScaleProvides count per scale value for the point-to-point position reference. The valueis a multiplier for the point-to-point reference source selected by the referenceselection P775 [PTP Ref Sel].779 PTP Index PresetPoint-To-Point Index PresetProvides pre-set index value. The value sets to the point-to-point positioncommand P784 [PTP Command] when the point-to-point mode is index modeP771 [PTP Mode] and the preset position bit P770 [PTP Control] Bit 3 “PresetPsn” is on.Default: 1.00Min/Max: –/+220000000.00Default: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647RW RealRW 32-bitInteger780 PTP SetpointPoint-To-Point SetpointProvides set point for the point-to-point position control. The value applies to thepoint-to-point control when the point-to-point reference selection P775 [PTP RefSel] is P780.Default: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647RW 32-bitInteger781 PTP Accel TimePoint-To-Point Acceleration TimeProvides the ramp time for acceleration (time to go from zero to speed limit).782 PTP Decel TimePoint-To-Point Deceleration TimeProvides the ramp time for deceleration (time to go from speed limit to zero).Units: SecsDefault: 10.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 3600.00RW RealUnits: SecsDefault: 10.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 3600.00RW Real783 PTP Speed FwdRefPoint-To-Point Speed Forward ReferenceIndicates speed reference output from the point-to-point position control. Typicallythis parameter is used by the drive speed loop.Units:Default:Min/Max:HzRPM0.00–/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 8–/+P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 8ROReal784 PTP CommandPoint-To-Point CommandIndicates position command for the point-to-point position control. The source ofthe position command is selected by the speed/torque/position mode P313 [ActvSpTqPs Mode].Default: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647RO32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-89FileGroupPOSITION CONTROLPoint to PointNameNo. Description785 PTP Fwd Vel LmtPoint-To-Point Forward Velocity LimitProvides the maximum forward speed reference limit.786 PTP Rev Vel LmtPoint-To-Point Reverse Velocity LimitProvides the maximum reverse speed reference limit.787 PTP S CurvePoint-To-Point S CurveProvides the amount of time that is applied to the S Curve.788 PTP Vel OverridePoint-To-Point Velocity OverrideProvides multiplier to both forward P785 [PTP Fwd Vel Lmt] and reverse P786[PTP Rev Vel Lmt] speed limits. This parameter applies to the speed limits whenthe override bit P770 [PTP Control] Bit 0 “Vel Override” is on.789 PTP EGR MultPoint-To-Point Electronic Gear Ratio MultiplyEGR multiplier (numerator) for position index output. The output applies to thepoint-to-point command P784 [PTP Command].790 PTP EGR DivPoint-To-Point Electronic Gear Ratio DivideEGR divider (denominator) for position index output. The output applies to thepoint-to-point command P784 [PTP Command].ValuesUnits:Default:Min/Max:Units:Default:Min/Max:HzRPMP27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 0.5P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 0.50.00/P27 [Motor NP Hertz]0.00/P28 [Motor NP RPM]HzRPMP27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 0.5P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 0.50.00/P27 [Motor NP Hertz]0.00/P28 [Motor NP RPM]Units: SecsDefault: 0.500Min/Max: 0.000 / 4.000Default: 1.00Min/Max: 0.20 / 1.50Default: 1Min/Max: –/+2000000Default: 1Min/Max: 1 / 2000000Read-WriteData TypeRW RealRW RealRW RealRW RealRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerFileGroupNameNo. Description795 755 PLL ControlPhase Locked Loop ControlSets bits to configure the phase locked loop control.ValuesRead-WriteData TypePOSITION CONTROLPhase Lock LoopOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedProf EnablePTP EnablePCAM EnableAccel CompExt Vel FFVelocity FFPLL EnableDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0Bit 0 “PLL Enable” – enables the phase locked loop control.Bit 1 “Velocity FF” – enables the velocity feed forward path.Bit 2 “Ext Vel FF” – enables the external velocity feed forward through the PLL external speed reference selected by the PLL external speed selectionP796 [PLL Ext Spd Sel].Bit 3 “Accel Comp” – enables providing an element of acceleration compensation to the feed forward branch. This is not recommended for use withexternal inputs because of increased noise.Bit 4 “PCAM Enable” – enables PCAM function with the PLL function.Bit 5 “PTP Enable” – enables point-to-point function with the PLL function.Bit 6 “Prof Enable” – enables profiler function with the PLL function.Only bits 4, 5, and 6 allow associating with the PLL function.796 755 PLL Ext Spd SelPhase Locked Loop External Speed SelectSelects an external speed reference source.0 = False1 = TrueDefault:Options:7971 / 159999RW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-90 Programming and ParametersFileGroupPOSITION CONTROLPhase Lock LoopNameDescriptionNo.797 755 PLL Ext Spd StptPhase Locked Loop External Speed SetpointProvides external speed reference. This parameter is a velocity feed forwardinput that is selected by the external speed select P796 [PLL Ext Spd Sel].798 755 PLL Ext SpdScalePhase Locked Loop External Speed ScaleSets scale factor to the external speed reference selected by the external speedselect P796 [PLL Ext Spd Sel]. This parameter is used to properly scale thevelocity feed forward. Adjust for zero average at the filtered position output P806[PLL Psn Out Fltr] while running at moderate speed.799 755 PLL Psn Ref SelPhase Locked Loop Position Reference SelectSelects a position reference source.800 755 PLL Psn StptPhase Locked Loop Position SetpointProvides position reference when the position reference select P799 [PLL PsnRef Sel] selects this parameter.801 755 PLL BWPhase Locked Loop BandwidthSets internal bandwidth of the PLL function response. The setting for very noisymechanical systems could range from 1 to 10 (r/s) while well-behaved high linecount input devices could range upwards of 100 (r/s). Higher bandwidths willquickly resolve tracking errors while the lower bandwidths will take longer to settleinto a steady state. Some adjustment will be necessary to effect the bestcompromise between noise and tracking response.802 755 PLL LPFilter BWPhase Locked Loop Low Pass Filter BandwidthSets low pass filter bandwidth. The filter has two functions:• Basic noise reduction of input velocity.• Timed delay of input when feed forward is provided to an external masterreference other than an input encoder.The filter low pass bandwidth should be set for best tracking which occurs whenthe filter output coincides with the loop filter output of PLL. Usually that meanssetting its bandwidth to the bandwidth of the master reference drive.803 755 PLL Virt Enc RPMPhase Locked Loop Virtual Encoder Revolutions Per MinuteSets RPM of the virtual output device. The value determines the 1 P.U. velocityfor the speed out P807 [PLL Speed Out] and does not affect performance.804 755 PLL EPR InputPhase Locked Loop Edges Per Revolution InputSets edges per revolution of the physical input device. Using the highest linecount device possible makes insure the smoother PLL operation.805 755 PLL Rvls InputPhase Locked Loop Revolutions InputSets revolution of the input encoder. This parameter must be coordinated with therevolution of the output encoder P812 [PLL Rvls Output] to resolve the gear-ratiobetween input revolutions and output (virtual) revolutions. The ratio of input tooutput revolutions can always be resolved into integer values and should bereduced to their lowest common factor.806 755 PLL Psn Out FltrPhase Locked Loop Position Output FilterIndicates internal low pass filter output. This parameter is normally used toproperly scale an external velocity reference. See description of the externalspeed scale P798 [PLL Ext SpdScale].ValuesDefault: 0.00Min/Max: –/+220000000.00Default: 1.00Min/Max: –/+220000000.00Default: 800Min/Max: 1 / 159999Default: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647Units: R/SDefault: 20.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 8000.00Units: R/SDefault: 50.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 8000.00Units: RPMDefault: 1750.00Min/Max: 1.00 / 40000.00Default: 1048576Min/Max: 1 / 67108864Default: 1Min/Max: 1 / 1000000Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+220000000.00Read-WriteData TypeRW RealRW RealRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW RealRW RealRW RealRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRORealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-91FileGroupPOSITION CONTROLPhase Lock LoopNameNo. Description807 755 PLL Speed OutPhase Locked Loop Speed OutputIndicates velocity output. This parameter is used as a velocity feed forward. It isprecisely in phase with the physical input device. The virtual encoder RPM P803[PLL Virt Enc RPM] determines the RPM at 1 P.U. of this parameter.808 755 PLL Speed OutAdvPhase Locked Loop Speed Output AdvancedIndicates velocity advanced output. This parameter is one velocity referencesample in advance of the speed output P807 [PLL Speed Out].809 755 PLL Enc OutPhase Locked Loop Encoder OutputIndicates position output. This parameter is precisely in phase with the inputphysical device.810 755 PLL Enc Out AdvPhase Locked Loop Encoder Output AdvancedIndicates position advanced output. This parameter is one position sample inadvance of the position output P809 [PLL Enc Out].811 755 PLL EPR OutputPhase Locked Loop Edges Per Revolution OutputSets edges per revolution of virtual the physical output device.812 755 PLL Rvls OutputPhase Locked Loop Revolutions OutputSets revolution of the output encoder. This parameter must be coordinated withthe revolution of the input encoder P805 [PLL Rvls Input] to resolve the gear-ratiobetween input revolutions and output (virtual) revolutions. The ratio of input tooutput revolutions can always be resolved into integer values and should bereduced to their lowest common factor.ValuesDefault: 0.00Min/Max: –/+220000000.00Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+220000000.00Default: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647Default: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647Default: 1048576Min/Max: 1 / 67108864Default: 1Min/Max: 1 / 2000000Read-WriteData TypeRORORORORealReal32-bitInteger32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerFileGroupPOSITION CONTROLElectronic GearNameNo. Description815 Psn Ref EGR OutPosition Reference Electronic Gear Ratio OutputIndicates accumulated output of the position reference electronic gear ratio(EGR) function. When the position regulator is not enabled, this parameter isinitialized to P836 [Psn Actual].816 Psn EGR MultPosition Electronic Gear Ratio MultiplierSets integer value in the numerator of the EGR function that is precisionmultiplied by the position reference. A negative value will effect a change inpolarity.817 Psn EGR DivPosition Electronic Gear Ratio DivisionSets integer value in the denominator of the EGR function that divides into theproduct of the numerator and the position reference. Remainders areaccumulated and not lost.ValuesDefault: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647Default: 1Min/Max: –/+2000000Default: 1Min/Max: 1 / 2000000Read-WriteData TypeRO32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-92 Programming and ParametersFileGroupPOSITION CONTROLPosition OffsetNameNo. Description820 Psn Offset 1 SelPosition Offset 1 SelectSelects a Position Offset 1 source.821 Psn Offset 1Position Offset 1Provides position reference offset, which is summed after the EGR and used totrim the phase of the position reference. A step in the offset position will beinternally rate limited and added to the reference position. The rate of correctionis set by the offset velocity P824 [Psn Offset Vel]. The initial value of thisparameter is latched upon position enable without causing a change in reference.Subsequent changes to this value will be relative to the latched value. See theoffset re-referencing bit P721 [Position Control] Bit 2 “Offset ReRef”.822 Psn Offset 2 SelPosition Offset 2 SelectSelects a Position Offset 2 source.823 Psn Offset 2Position Offset 2 SelectProvides another position reference offset, which is summed with the positionoffset 1 P821 [Psn Offset 1] and used to trim the phase of the position reference.The rate of correction is set by the offset velocity P824 [Psn Offset Vel].824 Psn Offset VelPosition Offset VelocitySets speed of position offset. A position offset command will not exceed thisspeed. The actual speed of offset is limited to a maximum value of 1/(inertia * posgain) so as not to cause a torque pulse greater than 1 per unit. The speed willchange exponentially.ValuesDefault: 821Min/Max: 1 / 159999Default: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647Default: 823Min/Max: 1 / 159999Default: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647Units:Default:Min/Max:HzRPMP27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 0.005P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 0.0050.00/P27 [Motor NP Hertz]0.00/P28 [Motor NP RPM]Read-WriteData TypeRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW RealFileGroupPOSITION CONTROLLd Psn Fdbk ScalNameNo. Description825 755 LdPsn Fdbk MultLoad Position Feedback MultiplierSets numerator of the load EGR function. It is multiplied by the position loadfeedback selected by the load feedback select P136 [Load Psn FdbkSel] anddivided by the load feedback divider P826 [LdPsn Fdbk Div] to reflect the loadpulse count to the motor (effectively removing the gear box ratio). Theaccumulated position values P836 [Psn Actual] and the position load actual P837[Psn Load Actual] - will be equal if the ratio is set properly. There may be somedifference due to lost motion in the gear train, but there should not be anaccumulated difference. It is often necessary to count gear teeth as gear boxmanufacturers often approximate exact ratios with decimal numbers. Enter anegative value in the numerator to account for reversed motor rotation.826 755 LdPsn Fdbk DivLoad Position Feedback DivisionSets denominator of the load EGR function.ValuesDefault: 1Min/Max: –/+1000000Default: 1Min/Max: 1 / 2000000Read-WriteData TypeRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-93FileGroupNameNo. Description830 PsnNtchFltrFreqPosition Notch Filter FrequencySets the center frequency of the position notch filter.ValuesRead-WriteData TypeUnits: HzDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 500.00RW Real831 PsnNtchFltrDepthPosition Notch Filter DepthSets the depth for the position notch filter. Attenuation is the ratio of the output tothe input at the notch frequency P830 [PsnNtchFltrFreq]. The attenuation of 30means that the notch output is 1/30th of the input at the specified frequency.Calculation: Attenuation = Input / OutputDefault: 50.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 500.00RW RealPOSITION CONTROLPosition Reg832 Psn Out Fltr SelPosition Output Filter SelectSelects a type of lead-lag filter for position regulator speed output. Thisparameter sets filter gain P833 [Psn Out Fltr Sel] and bandwidth P834 [Psn OutFltr BW] according to the selected type.“Off” (0) – P833 = 1.000, P834 = 0.00“Custom” (1) – P833 = user setting, P834 = user setting833 Psn Out FltrGainPosition Output Filter GainSets lead-lag filter gain. A default value is sets when the filter type selection P832[Psn Out Fltr Sel] is not Custom (Option 1). See the filter type selection P832.834 Psn Out Fltr BWPosition Output Filter BandwidthSets lead-lag bandwidth. A default value is sets when the filter type selectionP832 [Psn Out Fltr Sel] is not Custom (Option 1). See the filter type selectionP832.Default:Options:0 = “Off”0 = “Off”1 = “Custom”Default: 3.000Min/Max: –/+5.000Units: R/SDefault: 50.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 500.00RW 32-bitIntegerRW RealRW Real835 Psn ErrorPosition ErrorIndicates actual position error in motor pulse counts as a 32-bit integer. When theposition regulator is not enabled, the value is initialized to zero. When the positionregulator is enabled, the value contains the running value of position errorbetween the position command P723 [Psn Command] and P836 [Psn Actual].Default: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647RO32-bitInteger836 Psn ActualPosition ActualIndicates accumulated motor position as a 32-bit integer. It tracks the positionfeedback P847 [Psn Fdbk]. When P721 [Position Control] Bit 4 “Zero Psn” is set,this parameter accumulates the value of P847 [Psn Fdbk] - the P725 [ZeroPosition]. When P721 [Position Control] Bit 4 “Zero Psn” is off, this parameteraccumulates the value of P847 [Psn Fdbk].Default: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647RO32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-94 Programming and ParametersFileGroupPOSITION CONTROLPosition RegNameDescriptionNo.837 755 Psn Load ActualPosition Load ActualIndicates accumulated output of the load gear ratio as a 32-bit integer and formsthe primary feedback for the position regulator integral channel. It is veryimportant that the load gear ratio be precisely set such that the delta pulse countof one motor revolution equals the delta pulse count of this parameter.838 Psn Reg KiPosition Regulator KiSets position regulator integral gain as measured from position error to velocityreference. The value has gain units of (P.U. velocity/sec) / (P.U. position) and isunit compatible with the position regulator proportional gain P839 [Psn Reg Kp].An integral gain of 25 means that a per unit position error of 0.1 sec will effect a2.5 P.U. speed change per sec.839 Psn Reg KpPosition Regulator KpSets position regulator gain as measured from position error to speed reference.The gain number is identically equal to position regulator bandwidth in rad/sec.For example: A gain of 10 means that a P.U. position error of 0.1 sec. will effect a1.0 P.U. speed change (1 per unit position error is the distance traveled in 1 sec.at base motor speed). The maximum value of this parameter is typically 1/3 of thespeed bandwidth (rad/sec) but may be set considerably higher with careful tuningof the speed regulator output lead/lag filter.840 PReg Pos Int LmtPosition Regulation Positive Integral LimitSets positive limit of the position regulator integral output.841 PReg Neg Int LmtPosition Regulation Negative Integral LimitSets negative limit of the position regulator integral output.842 PsnReg IntgrlOutPosition Regulation Integral OutputIndicates output of the position regulator integral channel after the limit function.843 PsnReg Spd OutPosition Regulation Speed OutputIndicates final output of the position regulator.844 PReg Pos Spd LmtPosition Regulation Positive Speed LimitSets positive speed limit of total position regulator output.845 PReg Neg Spd LmtPosition Regulation Negative Speed LimitSets negative speed limit of total position regulator output.846 Psn Reg DroopPosition Regulation DroopSets position droop which limits the low frequency gain of the position regulatorsintegral channel to a value of (1/droop). This parameter provides a means to finetune the stability for load mounted feedback devices where lost motion maycause a problem. Typically, the position droop will have a value that is less than(1/position gain), perhaps even zero for tightly coupled loads. The position droophas a gain value of (P.U. position) / (P.U. speed). Note: 1 P.U. position is thedistance traveled in 1 sec. at base motor speed.847 Psn FdbkPosition FeedbackIndicates the accumulated pulse count of the position feedback selected by theposition feedback select [P135].ValuesDefault: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647Default: 4.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 1000.00Units: R/SDefault: 4.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 200.00Units: %Default: 100.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 800.00Units: %Default: –100.00Min/Max: –800.00 / 0.00Units:Default:Min/Max:Units:Default:Min/Max:HzRPM0.00–/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 8–/+P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 8HzRPM0.00–/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 8–/+P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 8Units: %Default: 10.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 800.00Units: %Default: –10.00Min/Max: –800.00 / 0.00Units: SecsDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 25.00Default: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647Read-WriteData TypeRO32-bitIntegerRW RealRW RealRW RealRW RealRORORealRealRW RealRW RealRW RealRO32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-95Drive Communication FileFileGroupNo.871872873874875876877878NameDescriptionPort 1 ReferencePort 2 ReferencePort 3 ReferencePort 4 ReferencePort 5 ReferencePort 6 Reference755 Port13 ReferencePort14 ReferencePort 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 13, 14 ReferenceReference value from port devices.ValuesUnits:Default:Min/Max:HzRPM0.00–/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 8–/+P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 8Read-WriteData Type879 Drive Logic RsltDrive Logic ResultThis is the logic output of the logic parser that combines the outputs from the DPI ports and the DriveLogix controller to determine drive control basedon the masks and owners. Used for peer to peer communication with PowerFlex 750-Series communication modules.RORealOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedJog 2RunClimit StopCoast StopReservedSpdRef Sel 2SpdRef Sel 1SpdRef Sel 0Decel Time 2Decel Time 1Accel Time 2Accel Time 1ReservedManualReverseForwardClear FaultsJog 1StartStopDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0COMMUNICATIONComm Control880 DPI Ref RsltDPI Reference ResultPresent frequency reference scaled as a DPI reference for peer to peercommunications. The value shown is the value prior to the accel/decel ramp andthe corrections supplied by slip comp, PI, etc. Used for peer to peercommunication with 20-COMM communication modules.881 DPI Ramp RsltDPI Ramp ResultDisplays the speed reference value, after the limit function. This is the input to theerror calculator and speed regulator. Used for peer-to-peer communication with20-COMM communication modules.Units: Hz / RPMDefault: 0.000Min/Max: –2147483648.000 / 2147483624.000Units: Hz / RPMDefault: 0.000Min/Max: –2147483648.000 / 2147483624.0000 = False1 = TrueRORO32-bitInteger32-bitInteger882 DPI Logic RsltDPI Logic ResultA version of P879 that is used when doing peer-to-peer control with a 20-COMM communication module. (Not for use with a 20-750 communicationmodule).OptionsReservedSpdRef Sel 2SpdRef Sel 1SpdRef Sel 0Decel Time 2Decel Time 1Accel Time 2Accel Time 1ReservedManualReverseForwardClear FaultsJog 1StartStopReservedSpdRef Sel 2SpdRef Sel 1SpdRef Sel 0Decel Time 2Decel Time 1Accel Time 2Accel Time 1ReservedManualReverseForwardClear FaultsJog 1StartStopDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0883 753 Drive Ref RsltDrive Reference ResultPresent frequency reference scaled as a DPI reference for peer to peercommunications. The value shown is the value prior to the accel/decel ramp andthe corrections supplied by slip comp, PI, etc. Used for peer to peercommunication with 20-COMM communication modules.0 = False, 1 = TrueUnits: Hz / RPMDefault: 0.000Min/Max: –2147483648.000 / 2147483624.000884 753 Drive Ramp RsltUnits: Hz / RPMDrive Ramp ResultDefault: 0.000Displays the speed reference value, after the limit function. This is the input to the Min/Max: –2147483648.000 / 2147483624.000error calculator and speed regulator. This number is scaled so that rated motorspeed will read 32768. Used for peer to peer communication with 20-COMMcommunication modules.RORO32-bitInteger32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-96 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type885 Port Mask ActPort Mask ActiveActive status for port communication.OptionsSecurityReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedPort 6Port 5Port 4Port 3Port 2Port 1Digital InDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = False1 = True886 Logic Mask ActLogic Mask ActiveActive status of the logic mask for ports. Bit 15 “Security” determines if network security is controlling the logic mask instead of this parameter.COMMUNICATIONSecurityOptionsSecurityPort 14Port 13ReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedPort 6Port 5Port 4Port 3Port 2Port 1Digital InDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = False1 = True887 Write Mask ActWrite Mask ActiveActive status of write access for ports. Bit 15 “Security” determines if network security is controlling the write mask instead of this parameter.OptionsSecurityPort 14Port 13ReservedReservedReservedPort 9Port 8Port 7Port 6Port 5Port 4Port 3Port 2Port 1ReservedDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = False1 = True888 Write Mask CfgWrite Mask ConfigurationEnables/disables write access (parameters, links, etc.) for DPI ports. Changes to this parameter only become effective when power is cycled, thedrive is reset or bit 15 of P887 [Write Mask Actv], transitions from “1” to “0.”OptionsReservedPort 14Port 13ReservedReservedReservedPort 9Port 8Port 7Port 6Port 5Port 4Port 3Port 2Port 1ReservedDefault 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = False1 = TruePowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-97FileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type895896Data In A1Data In A2Data Input A1, A2Parameter number whose value will be written from a communications devicedata table.Default: 0 (0 = “Disabled”)Min/Max: 0 / 159999RW 32-bitInteger897898Data In B1Data In B2Data Input B1, B2Parameter number whose value will be written from a communications devicedata table.See [Data In A1].899900Data In C1Data In C2Data Input C1, C2Parameter number whose value will be written from a communications devicedata table.See [Data In A1].COMMUNICATIONDPI Datalinks901902905906Data In D1Data In D2Data Input D1, D2Parameter number whose value will be written from a communications devicedata table.Data Out A1Data Out A2Data Output A1, A2Parameter number whose value will be written to a communications device datatable.See [Data In A1].Default: 0 (0 = “Disabled”)Min/Max: 0 / 159999RW 32-bitInteger907908Data Out B1Data Out B2Data Output B1, B2Parameter number whose value will be written from a communications devicedata table.See [Data Out A1].909910Data Out C1Data Out C2Data Output C1, C2Parameter number whose value will be written from a communications devicedata table.See [Data Out A1].911912Data Out D1Data Out D2Data Output D1, D2Parameter number whose value will be written from a communications devicedata table.See [Data Out A1].PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-98 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type919 Stop OwnerStop OwnerIndicates which port is currently issuing a valid stop command.OptionsReservedPort 14Port 13 (1)ReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedPort 6Port 5Port 4Port 3Port 2Port 1Digital InDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = False1 = True(1) 755 drives only.920 Start OwnerStart OwnerIndicates which port is currently issuing a valid start command.OptionsReservedPort 14Port 13 (1)ReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedPort 6Port 5Port 4Port 3Port 2Port 1Digital InDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = False1 = True(1) 755 drives only.921 Jog OwnerJog OwnerIndicates which port is currently issuing a valid jog command.COMMUNICATIONOwnersOptionsReservedPort 14Port 13 (1)ReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedPort 6Port 5Port 4Port 3Port 2Port 1Digital InDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = False1 = True(1) 755 drives only.922 Dir OwnerDirection OwnerIndicates which port is currently has exclusive control of direction changes.OptionsReservedPort 14Port 13 (1)ReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedPort 6Port 5Port 4Port 3Port 2Port 1Digital InDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = False1 = True(1) 755 drives only.923 Clear Flt OwnerClear Fault OwnerIndicates which port is currently clearing a fault.OptionsReservedPort 14Port 13 (1)ReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedPort 6Port 5Port 4Port 3Port 2Port 1Digital InDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = False1 = True(1) 755 drives only.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-99FileGroupRead-WriteData TypeNameNo. DescriptionValues924 Manual OwnerManual OwnerAdapter that has requested manual control of all drive logic and/or reference functions. If an adapter is in manual lockout, all other functions (exceptstop) on all other adapters are locked out and non-functional.COMMUNICATIONOwnersOptionsReservedPort 14Port 13 (1)ReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedPort 6Port 5Port 4Port 3Port 2Port 1Digital InDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0(1) 755 drives only.925 Ref Select OwnerReference Select OwnerIndicates which port is issuing a valid reference select.0 = False1 = TrueOptionsReservedPort 14Port 13 (1)ReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedPort 6Port 5Port 4Port 3Port 2Port 1Digital InDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = False1 = True(1) 755 drives only.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-100 Programming and ParametersDrive Diagnostics FileFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type930 Speed Ref SourceSpeed Reference SourceIndicates the currently selected source for value displayed in P593 [Limited SpdRef]. The Speed Reference Source displays the parameter number that issupplying the speed reference. For example, if Speed Reference Source containsthe value 546, then P546 [Spd Ref A Setpt] is the source of the speed reference.Default:Min/Max:00 / 159999RO32-bitInteger931 Last StartSourceLast Start SourceDisplays the source that initiated the most recent start sequence. All bits in thisparameter are refreshed each time the drive receives a start command.Default:Options:0 = Read Only0 = “Pwr Removed”1-6 = “DPI Port 1-6”7 = “Digital In”8 = “Sleep”9 = “Jog”10 = “Profiling”11 = “AutoRestart”12 = “Pwr Up Start”13 = “Fault”14 = “Enable”15 = “Autotune”16 = “Precharge”17 = “Safety”18 = “Fast Stop”19 = “DPI Port 13”20 = “DPI Port 14”RO32-bitIntegerDIAGNOSTICSStatus932 Last Stop SourceLast Stop SourceDisplays the source that initiated the most recent stop sequence. All bits in thisparameter are refreshed each time the drive receives a stop command.Default:Options:0 = Read Only0 = “Pwr Removed”1-6 = “DPI Port 1-6”7 = “Digital In”8 = “Sleep”9 = “Jog”10 = “Profiling”11 = “AutoRestart”12 = “Pwr Up Start”13 = “Fault”14 = “Enable”15 = “Autotune”16 = “Precharge”17 = “Safety”18 = “Fast Stop”19 = “DPI Port 13”20 = “DPI Port 14”RO32-bitInteger933 Start InhibitsStart InhibitsIndicates which condition is preventing the drive from starting or running.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedProfilier (1)SleepSafetyReservedReservedStopPrechargeEnableAlarmFaultedDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = False1 = True(1) 755 drives only.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-101FileGroupRead-WriteData TypeNameNo. DescriptionValues934 Last StrtInhibitLast Start InhibitDisplays the Inhibit which prevented the last Start signal from starting the drive. Bits will be cleared after the next successful start sequence.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedProfilierSleepSafetyStartupDatabaseStopPrechargeEnableAlarmFaultedDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = False1 = True935 Drive Status 1Drive Status 1Present operating condition of the drive.DIAGNOSTICSStatusOptionsRegenMotor OLEnable OnBus Frq RegCur LimitAt LimitAt HomeAtZero SpeedTorque ModePositionModeSpeed ModeDB ActiveDC BrakingStoppingJoggingRunningReservedSpdRef Bit 4SpdRef Bit 3SpdRef Bit 2SpdRef Bit 1SpdRef Bit 0ManualAt SpeedFaultedAlarmDeceleratingAcceleratingActual DirCommand DirActiveReadyDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0Table 935A: Reference StatusBit 14 13 12 11 10 Reference Source0 0 0 0 1 Auto, Ref A0 0 0 1 0 Auto, Ref B0 0 0 1 1 Auto, Preset 30 0 1 0 0 Auto, Preset 40 0 1 0 1 Auto, Preset 50 0 1 1 0 Auto, Preset 60 0 1 1 1 Auto, Preset 71 0 0 0 0 MAN, Port 0, DIGIN SEL1 0 0 0 1 MAN, Port 11 0 0 1 0 MAN, Port 21 0 0 1 1 MAN, Port 31 0 1 0 0 MAN, Port 41 0 1 0 1 MAN, Port 51 0 1 1 0 MAN, Port 61 1 1 0 1 MAN, Port 13 INT. ENET1 1 1 1 0 MAN, Port 14 DRV LOGIX1 1 1 1 1 ALT MAN REF SEL0 = Condition False1 = Condition True936 Drive Status 2Drive Status 2Present operating condition of the drive.OptionsReservedReservedReservedDecel Rate (1)Accel Rate (1)PID FB LossAutotuningPrchrgClosedAdj VltgMode (1)ReservedFdbkLoss SwOFlux BrakeReservedHS Fan OnAuRstrCntDwnAutoRstr ActDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0(1) 753 drives only.0 = Condition False1 = Condition TruePowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-102 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNameNo. DescriptionValues937 Condition Sts 1Condition Status 1Status of conditions that may or may not result in the drive taking action (faulting), based on configuration of protective functions.Read-WriteData TypeOptionsOW Timeout (1)GndWarningExtPrchrgErrPosFdbkLossAuxFdbkLossAltFdbkLossPriFdbkLossShear Pin 2Shear Pin 1Dec InhibitOutPhaseLossInPhaseLossLoad LossMotor OLUnderVoltagePower LossDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0(1) 753 drives only0 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueDIAGNOSTICSStatus940 Drive OL CountDrive Overload CountIndicates power unit overload (IT) in percentage. When the value reaches 100 %,the power unit overload fault occurs.941 IGBT Temp PctInsulated-Gate Bipolar Transistor Temperature PercentIndicates IGBT junction temperature in percentage of the maximum junctiontemperature.942 IGBT Temp CInsulated-Gate Bipolar Transistor Temperature CelsiusIndicates IGBT junction temperature in centigrade.943 Drive Temp PctDrive Temperature PercentIndicates operating temperature of the drive power section (heat-sink) inpercentage of the maximum heat-sink temperature.944 Drive Temp CDrive Temperature CelsiusPresent operating temperature of the drive power section.Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 200.00Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+200.00Units: DegCDefault: 0.00Min/Max: –/+200.00Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+200.00Units: DegCDefault: 0.00Min/Max: –/+200.00RORORORORORealRealRealRealRealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-103FileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type945 At Limit StatusAt Limit StatusStatus of dynamic conditions within the drive that are either active or a limit is being applied.DIAGNOSTICSStatusOptionsCur Rate LmtTrqPrvNegLmtTrqPrvPosLmtMtr Vltg LkgBusVltgFVLmtTherm RegLmtCur Lmt FVRegen PwrLmtMtrng PwrLmtTrq Neg LmtTrq Pos LmtFlxCurNegLmtFlxCurPosLmtTrqCurNegLmtTrqCurPosLmtPsnReg HiSpdPsnReg LoSpdPsnReg HiLmtPsnReg LoLmtDB Res LimitPWM FreqLmtEconomizeFlux BrakingFreqOSNegLmtFreqOSPosLmtFreq Lo LmtFreq Hi LmtSpd Reg LmtOverSpd LmtMaxSpeed LmtBus Vltg LmtCurrent LmtDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = False1 = TrueBit 0 “Current Lmt” – Scalar current limit is adjusting the output frequencyBit 1 “Bus Vltg Lmt” – Scalar bus voltage limit is adjusting the output frequencyBit 2 “MaxSpeed Lmt” – Motor speed reference is limited to maximum forward speed or maximum reverse speedBit 3 “OverSpd Lmt” – Motor speed reference positive (+) trim is at maximum speed limit plus or minus (+/-) the overspeed limitBit 4 “Spd Reg Lmt” – The output of the drive’s speed regulator has reached limitBit 5 “Freq Hi Lmt” – Scalar control inner ramp high limit is activeBit 6 “Freq Lo Lmt” – Scalar control inner ramp low limit is activeBit 7 “FreqOSPosLmt” – Scalar control inner ramp positive (+) overspeed limit is activeBit 8 “FreqOSNegLmt” – Scalar control inner ramp negative (-) overspeed limit is activeBit 9 “Flux Braking” – Flux braking is activeBit 10 “Economize” – Economize is activeBit 11 “PWM FreqLmt” – PWM frequency is reduced by the thermal regulatorBit 12 “DB Res Limit” – Dynamic brake thermal protection is activeBit 13 “PsnReg LoLmt” – The position integrator low limit is activeBit 14 “PsnReg HiLmt” – The position integrator high limit is activeBit 15 “PsnReg LoSpd” – The position regulator output (speed) is at low limitBit 16 “PsnReg HiSpd” – The position regulator output (speed) is at high limitBit 17 “TrqCurPosLmt” – The torque current positive limit is activeBit 18 “TrqCurNegLmt” – The torque current negative limit is activeBit 19 “FlxCurPosLmt” – The flux current positive limit is activeBit 20 “FlxCurNegLmt” – The flux current negative limit is activeBit 21 “Trq Pos Lmt” – The positive torque limit is activeBit 22 “Trq Neg Lmt” – The negative torque limit is activeBit 23 “Mtrng PwrLmt” – The motoring power limit is activeBit 24 “Regen PwrLmt” – The regeneration power limit is activeBit 25 “Cur Lmt FV” – The current limit parameter or analog Input current limit is activeBit 26 “Therm RegLmt” – The thermal regulator torque limit is activeBit 27 “BusVltgFVLmt” – The bus voltage regulator torque limit is activeBit 28 “Mtr Vltg Lkg” – The Vds motor voltage limit is activeBit 29 “TrqPrvPosLmt” – The torque proving positive torque limit is activeBit 30 “TrqPrvNegLmt” – The torque proving negative torque limit is activeBit 31 “Cur Rate Lmt” – The Iqs rate limit is active946 Safety Port StsSafety Port StatusIndicates the port location of a valid feedback option for use with the Safe Speed Monitoring Option.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedPort 8Port 7Port 6Port 5Port 4ReservedReservedReservedReservedDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TruePowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-104 Programming and ParametersFileGroupRead-WriteData TypeNo.NameDescriptionValues950 Minor Flt CfgMinor Fault ConfigurationEnables / Disables operation of the “Minor Fault” function, which allows the drive to continue running while some types of faults are present. Inaddition to setting this parameter, the “Flt Minor” action must be selected for the condition that is desired to result in a minor fault (see P410 for anexample).OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedEnableDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition True951 Last Fault CodeLast Fault CodeThe fault code of the most recent fault. This parameter is for convenience. Acomprehensive history of fault information is available through the fault que (viaHIM screens and / or software tools such as Drive Explorer).Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 424648720952 Fault Status AFault Status AIndicates the occurrence of conditions that have been configured as faults. These conditions are from 937 [Condition Sts 1].RO32-bitIntegerDIAGNOSTICSFault/Alarm InfoOptionsReservedReservedExtPrchrgErrPosFdbkLossAuxFdbkLossAltFdbkLossPriFdbkLossShear Pin 2Shear Pin 1Dec InhibitOutPhaseLossInPhaseLossLoad LossMotor OLUnderVoltagePower LossDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0953 Fault Status BFault Status BIndicates the occurrence of conditions that have been configured as faults.0 = False1 = TrueOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedOver Travel (1)OW Alarm TO (1)Ground FaultTPEnclsCnfg (2)TrqPrvSpdBnd (2)Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0(1) 753 drives only.0 = False(2) 755 drives only.1 = True954 Status1 at FaultStatus 1 at FaultCaptures and displays P935 [Drive Status 1] bit pattern at the time of the last fault.OptionsHW OverCurSW OverCurAuRstExhaustIXOVoltRangeFluxAmpsRangIRVoltsRangeSafetyBrdFltPrchrg OpenOverspd LmtExcess LoadSinkUnderTmpTransistorOTHeatsink OTDrive OLOverVoltageAux InputFltRegenMotor OLEnable OnBus Frq RegCur LimitAt LimitAt HomeAtZero SpeedTorque ModePositionModeSpeed ModeDB ActiveDC BrakingStoppingJoggingRunningReservedSpdRef Bit 4SpdRef Bit 3SpdRef Bit 2SpdRef Bit 1SpdRef Bit 0ManualAt SpeedFaultedAlarmDeceleratingAcceleratingActual DirCommand DirActiveReadyDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = False1 = TruePowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-105FileGroupNameNo. DescriptionValues955 Status2 at FaultStatus 2 at FaultCaptures and displays P936 [Drive Status 2] bit pattern at the time of the last fault.Read-WriteData TypeOptionsReservedReservedReservedDecel RateAccel RatePID FB LossAutotuningPrchrgClosedReservedReservedFdbkLoss SwOFlux BrakeReservedHS Fan OnAuRstrCntDwnAutoRstr ActDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition True956 Fault FrequencyFault FrequencyCaptures and displays the output speed of the drive at the time of the last fault.957 Fault AmpsFault AmpsCaptures and displays motor amps at the time of the last fault.Default: 0.00Min/Max: –650.00 / 650.00Default: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / P21 [Rated Amps] x 2958 Fault Bus VoltsFault Bus VoltsCaptures and displays the DC bus voltage of the drive at the time of the last fault.Default:Min/Max:0.000.00 / P20 [Rated Volts] x 2959 Alarm Status AAlarm Status AIndicates the occurrence of conditions that have been configured as alarms. These events are from 937 [Condition Sts 1].RORORORealRealRealDIAGNOSTICSFault/Alarm InfoOptionsReservedGnd WarningReservedPosFdbkLossAuxFdbkLossAltFdbkLossPriFdbkLossShear Pin 2Shear Pin 1Dec InhibitOutPhaseLossInPhaseLossLoad LossMotor OLUnderVoltagePower LossDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0960 Alarm Status BAlarm Status BIndicates the occurrence of conditions that have been configured as alarms.0 = False1 = TrueOptionsReservedReservedPumpOff Alrm (1)OW Level TO (1)OW Level (1)Gnd WarningNot Home SetHoming ActvProfile Actv (2)PWMFrq ReducCurLmt ReducDrive OLStartOnPwrUpWakingHeatsink OTIGBT OTDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0(1) 753 drives only.(2) 755 drives only.0 = False1 = True961 Type 2 AlarmsType 2 AlarmsIndicates the occurrence of conditions that have been configured as alarms.OptionsReservedBipolarCflct (1)IXOVoltRangeFluxAmpsRangIRVltg RangeDigIn Cnfg CDigIn Cnfg BAltOpenLoopPriOpenLoopVHz IncmpbleVHzBossLmtVHzNegSlopeFrq CflctTrqProvCflct (2)BrakeSlipped (2)Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0(1) 753 drives only.(2) 755 drives only.Sleep Cfg0 = False1 = TruePowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-106 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNameNo. Description962 AlarmA at FaultAlarm A at FaultCaptures and displays P959 [Alarm Status A] at the time of the last fault.ValuesRead-WriteData TypeDIAGNOSTICSFault/Alarm InfoOptionsReservedGround WarnLoad LossPosFdbkLossAuxFdbkLossAltFdbkLossPriFdbkLossShear Pin 2Shear Pin 1Dec InhibitOutPhaseLossInPhaseLossLoad LossMotor OLUnderVoltagePower LossDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0963 AlarmB at FaultAlarm B at FaultCaptures and displays P960 [Alarm Status B] at the time of the last fault.OptionsReservedReservedReservedOW Level TO (1)OW Level (1)Gnd WarningNot Home SetHoming ActvProfile Actv (2)PWMFrq ReducCurLmt ReducDrive OLStartOnPwrUpWakingHeatsink OTIGBT OTDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = False1 = True0 = False1 = True(1) 753 drives only.(2) 755 drives only.FileGroupDIAGNOSTICSTestpointsNo.970974978982971975979983972976980984NameDescriptionTestpoint Sel 1Testpoint Sel 2Testpoint Sel 3Testpoint Sel 4Testpoint Select 1, 2, 3, 4Selects a source for the testpoint values (“Fval” and “Lval”). Used by the factory,typically for diagnostic purposes.Testpoint Fval 1Testpoint Fval 2Testpoint Fval 3Testpoint Fval 4Testpoint Float Value 1, 2, 3, 4Displays data selected by Testpoint Sel X, if the data type is floating point.Testpoint Lval 1Testpoint Lval 2Testpoint Lval 3Testpoint Lval 4Testpoint Long Value 1, 2, 3, 4Displays data selected by Testpoint Sel X, if the data type is long integer.ValuesDefault: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647Default: 0.000000Min/Max: –/+ 220000000.000000Default: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647Read-WriteData TypeRW 32-bitIntegerRW RealRW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-107FileGroupDIAGNOSTICSPeak DirectionNameNo. Description1035 755 PkDtct Stpt RealPeak Detection Setpoint RealA setpoint value, in the form of a real number. Intended to be used as a potentialdata source for P1038 [PkDtct1PresetSel] and P1043 [PkDtct2PresetSel].1036 755 PkDtct Stpt DintPeak Detection Setpoint D IntegerA setpoint value, in the form of an integer number. Intended to be used as apotential data source for P1038 [PkDtct1PresetSel] and P1043[PkDtct2PresetSel].1037 755 PkDtct1 In SelPeak Detection 1 Input SelectSelects the input data source for the peak detect functions. The functions can beconfigured to sample and hold either the largest (maximum) or smallest(minimum) value of the input signal selected by this parameter.Important: Either real or integer data sources can be selected, but integersources will be internally converted to real and displayed in the peak detectoutput as real numbers.ValuesDefault: 0.000000Min/Max: –/+ 220000000.000000Default: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647Default: 1035Min/Max: 0 / 1599991038 755 PkDtct1PresetSelDefault: 0Peak Detection 1 Preset SelectSelects the preset data source for the peak detect functions. The output of theeach peak detect function can be forced to equal the value of the input signalselected by this parameter by using the 'Peak1 Set' bit in P1039 [Peak1 Cfg]. Thesame integer to real number conversion applies to both the input and the presetsignal.Min/Max: 0 / 1599991039 755 Peak1 CfgPeak 1 ConfigureConfigures operation of each peak detector.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedPeak1 SetPeak1 HoldPeak1 PeakDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0Read-WriteData TypeRW RealRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerBit 0 “Peak1 Peak” – 0 = Capture minimum value of the input signal. 1 = Capture maximum value of the input signal.Bit 1 “Peak1 Hold” – 0 = Monitor input. 1 = Ignore input and hold output at present value. This bit is overridden by Bit 2.Bit 2 “Peak1 Set” – 0 = Resume normal capture of the input signal value (assuming Bit 1 is also = 0). The preset signal will be used as a starting valueto compare against further changes in the input signal level. 1 = Force output of the peak detect function to equal the signal selected by[PkDtctXPresetSel].1040 755 Peak 1 ChangePeak 1 ChangeStatus of the peak detectors.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedPeak1ChangeDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Output value is held or set.1 = Output value has changed.1041 755 PeakDetect1 OutDefault: 0.000000Peak Detection 1 OutputDisplays the output of the peak detector, according to the operation selected bythe configuration bits, and is always displayed as a real number, regardless of theselected signal type.Min/Max: –/+21478000.000000RORealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-108 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNameNo. Description1042 755 PkDtct2 In SelPeak Detection 2 Input SelectSelects the input data source for the peak detect functions. The functions can beconfigured to sample and hold either the largest (maximum) or smallest(minimum) value of the input signal selected by this parameter.Important: Either real or integer data sources can be selected, but integersources will be internally converted to real and displayed in the peak detectoutput as real numbers.1043 755 PkDtct2PresetSelPeak Detection 2 Preset SelectSelects the preset data source for the peak detect functions. The output of theeach peak detect function can be forced to equal the value of the input signalselected by this parameter by using the “Peak1 Set” bit in P1039 [Peak1 Cfg].The same integer to real number conversion applies to both the input and thepreset signal.1044 755 Peak2 CfgPeak 2 ConfigureConfigures operation of each peak detector.ValuesDefault: 1035Min/Max: 0 / 159999Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999Read-WriteData TypeRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerDIAGNOSTICSPeak DirectionOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedPeak1 SetPeak1 HoldPeak1 PeakDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = False1 = TrueBit 0 “Peak1 Peak” – 0 = Capture minimum value of the input signal. 1 = Capture maximum value of the input signal.Bit 1 “Peak1 Hold” – 0 = Monitor input. 1 = Ignore input and hold output at present value. This bit is overridden by Bit 2.Bit 2 “Peak1 Set” – 0 = Resume normal capture of the input signal value (assuming Bit 1 is also = 0). The preset signal will be used as a starting valueto compare against further changes in the input signal level. 1 = Force output of the peak detect function to equal the signal selected by[PkDtctXPresetSel].1045 755 Peak 2 ChangePeak 2 ChangeStatus of the peak detectors.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedPeak1ChangeDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Output value is held or set.1 = Output value has changed.1046 755 PeakDetect2 OutDefault: 0.000000Peak Detection 2 OutputDisplays the output of the peak detector, according to the operation selected bythe configuration bits, and is always displayed as a real number, regardless of theselected signal type.Min/Max: –/+21478000.000000RORealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-109Drive Applications FileFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type1065 PID CfgPID ConfigurationMain configuration of the Process PID controller.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedPercent RefAnti WindupStop ModeFdbk SqrtZero ClampRamp RefPreload IntDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = False1 = True1066 PID ControlPID ControlUsed for dynamically controlling the Process PID controller.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedPID InvErrorPID ResetPID HoldPID EnableDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = False1 = True1067 PID Ref SelPID Reference SelectSelects the source for the PID Reference. A zero sets the Reference to a fixedvalue.Default: 1070Min/Max: 0 / 159999RW 32-bitIntegerAPPLICATIONSProcess PID1068 PID Ref AnlgHiPID Reference Analog HighWhen an analog input is selected for PID Ref this sets high value of scaling.1069 PID Ref AnlgLoPID Reference Analog LowWhen an analog input is selected for PID Ref this sets low value of scaling.Units: %Default: 100.00Min/Max: –/+100.00Units: %Default: 100.00Min/Max: –/+100.00RW RealRW Real1070 PID SetpointPID SetpointProvides an internal fixed value for PID Ref when P1067 [PID Ref Sel] is set tothis parameter.Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+100.00RW Real1071 PID Ref MultPID Reference MultiplierSets the multiplying factor which is applied to the Reference source before theReference is used.Units: %Default: 100.00Min/Max: –/+100.00RW Real1072 PID Fdbk SelPID Feedback SelectSelects the source for the PID Feedback. A zero sets the Feedback to a fixedvalue.Default: 1077Min/Max: 1 / 159999RW 32-bitInteger1073 PID Fdbk AnlgHiPID Feedback Analog HighWhen an analog input is selected for PID Feedback this sets high value ofscaling.Units: %Default: 100.00Min/Max: –/+100.00RW Real1074 PID Fdbk AnlgLoPID Feedback Analog LowUnits:Default:%0.00When an analog input is selected for PID Feedback this sets low value of scaling. Min/Max: –/+100.00RW Real1075 PID FBLoss SpSelPID Feedback Loss Speed SelectWhen an analog input is selected for PID Feedback, P1079 [PID Output Sel] isset to Speed Excl/Speed Trim, and an analog signal loss is detected, sets speedto this source.Default: 546Min/Max: 0 / 159999RW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-110 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type1076 PID FBLoss TqSelPID Feedback Loss Torque SelectWhen an analog input is selected for PID Feedback, P1079 [PID Output Sel] isset to Speed Excl/Speed Trim, and an analog signal loss is detected, sets torqueto this source.Default: 676Min/Max: 0 / 159999RW 32-bitInteger1077 PID FdbkPID FeedbackProvides an internal fixed value for PID Feedback when [PID Fdbk Sel] is set tothis parameter.Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+100.00RW Real1078 PID Fdbk MultPID Feedback MultiplierSets the multiplying factor which is applied to the Feedback source before theFeedback is used.Units: %Default: 100.00Min/Max: –/+100.00RW Real1079 PID Output SelPID Output SelectSelects the target for the PID Output.Default:Options:2 = “Speed Trim”0 = “Not Used”1 = “Speed Excl”2 = “Speed Trim”3 = “Torque Excl”4 = “Torque Trim”5 = “Volt Excl”6 = “Volt Trim”RW 32-bitInteger1080 PID Output MultPID Output MultiplierSets the multiplying factor which is applied to the PID Output before the PIDOutput is used.Units: %Default: 100.00000Min/Max: –/+100.00000RW RealAPPLICATIONSProcess PID1081 PID Upper LimitPID Upper LimitSets the upper limit for the P1093 [PID Output Meter].1082 PID Lower LimitPID Lower LimitSets the lower limit for the P1093 [PID Output Meter].Units: %Default: 100.00Min/Max: –/+800.00Units: %Default: –100.00Min/Max: –/+800.00RW RealRW Real1083 PID DeadbandPID DeadbandDetermines the error (+/-) which will be ignored. Any error which falls within thisband will not change the PID output.Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 100.00RW Real1084 PID LP Filter BWPID Low Pass Filter BandwidthSets the level of filtering applied to the error signal. Zero will disable this filter.Units: R/SDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 100.00RW Real1085 PID PreloadPID PreloadSets the value used to preload PID Integrator when PID is enabled if configuredto use this feature.Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+100.00RW Real1086 PID Prop GainPID Proportional GainSets the value for the PI proportional component.PI Error x PI Prop Gain = PI OutputDefault: 1.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 100.00RW Real1087 PID Int TimePID Integral TimeTime required for the integral component to reach 100% of P1092 [PI ErrorMeter]. Not used when P1066 [PID Control] Bit 1 “PID Hold” = 1 (enabled).Units: SecsDefault: 1.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 100.00RW Real1088 PID Deriv TimePID Derivative TimeRefer to formula below:Units: SecsDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 100.00RW RealPI Out = KD (Sec) xd PI Error (%)d t (Sec)PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-111FileGroupNameNo. Description1089 PID StatusPID StatusStatus of the Process PI regulator.ValuesRead-WriteData TypeAPPLICATIONSProcess PIDOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedPID In LimitPID ResetPID HoldPID EnabledDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 01090 PID Ref MeterPID Reference MeterPresent value of the PI reference signal.1091 PID Fdbk MeterPID Feedback MeterPresent value of the PI feedback signal.1092 PID Error MeterPID Error MeterPresent value of the PI error.1093 PID Output MeterPID Output MeterPresent value of the PI output.0 = False1 = TrueUnits: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+100.00Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+100.00Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+200.00Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+800.00RORORORORealRealRealRealFileGroupRead-WriteData TypeNo.NameDescriptionValues1100 755 Trq Prove CfgTorque Prove ConfigureEnables/disables torque/brake proving feature. When “Enabled,” brake control comes from a digital output relay that is set to select Port 0, P1103[TorqProve Status] bit 4 “Brake Set.”OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedBrkSlipStartBrkSlipEnclsFW LoadLimitPreloadMicro PsnEncoderlessTP EnableDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Disabled1 = EnabledAPPLICATIONSTorque ProveBit 0 “TP Enable” – Enables TorqProve features.Bit 1 “Encoderless” – Enables encoderless operation – Bit 0 must also be enabled.Bit 2 “Micro Psn” – A “1” allows the Micro Position digital input to change the speed command while the drive is running.Bit 3 “Preload” – “0” uses the last torque for preload. “1” uses “TorqRef A” if commanded direction is forward and “TorqRef B” for reverse.Bit 4 “FW LoadLimit” – Enables drive to perform load calculation at base speed. Drive will then limit operation above base speed depending on load.Bit 5 “BrkSlipEncls” – A “1” Disables the partial Brake Slip routine from the drive when encoderless is selected.Bit 6 “BrkSlipStart” – Starts drive if Brake slippage is detected.1101 755 Trq Prove SetupTorque Prove SetupAllows control of specific torque proving functions through a communication device.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedEnd Stop RevDecel RevEnd Stop FwdDecel FwdFloat MicroFast StopDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Disabled1 = EnabledPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-112 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNameNo. Description1102 755 DI FloatMicroPsnDigital Input Float Micro PositionSelects the digital input to be used for the float / micro position functions.1103 755 Trq Prove StatusTorque Prove StatusDisplays the status bits for TorqProve.ValuesDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 159999.15Read-WriteData TypeRW 32-bitIntegerOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedEncoderlessRefLoadLmtedLoadTestActvBrake SetBrkSlip1 AlmMicro PsnDecelLmtActvEndLimitActvDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Disabled1 = EnabledAPPLICATIONSTorque Prove1104 755 Trq Lmt SlewRateTorque Limit Slew RateSets the rate to ramp the torque limits to zero during brake proving.1105 755 Speed Dev BandSpeed Deviation BandThe amount of allowable deviation between the commanded speed and theactual speed (from a feedback device). When this value is exceeded for theamount of time in P1106, a fault will occur.1106 755 SpdBand IntgrtrSpeed Band IntegerThe amount of time for which the actual speed is allowed to exceed P1105[Speed Dev Band] before a fault occurs.1107 755 Brk Release TimeBrake Release TimeSets the time between the brake release command and when the drive begins toaccelerate. In Encoderless mode, this parameter sets the time to release thebrake after drive starts.1108 755 Brk Set TimeBrake Set TimeDefines the amount of delay time between commanding the brake to be set andthe start of brake proving.1109 755 Brk Alarm TravelBrake Alarm TravelSets the number of motor shaft revolutions allowed during the brake slippagetest. Drive torque is reduced to check for brake slippage. When slippage occurs,the drive allows this number of motor shaft revolutions before regaining control.Not used when P1100 [Trq Prove Cfg] Bit 1 “Encoderless” = 1 (enabled).1110 755 Brk Slip CountBrake Slip CountSets the number of encoder counts to define a brake slippage condition. Notused when P1100 [Trq Prove Cfg] Bit 1 “Encoderless” = 1 (enabled).Units: SecsDefault: 10.000Min/Max: 0.500 / 300.000Units:Default:Min/Max:HzRPMP27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 0.0334P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 0.0334P27 x 0.0016 / P27 x 0.25P28 x 0.0016 / P28 x 0.25Units: SecsDefault: 0.060Min/Max: 0.001 / 0.200Units: SecsDefault: 0.100Min/Max: 0.000 / 10.000Units: SecsDefault: 0.100Min/Max: 0.000 / 10.000Default: 1.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 1000.00Default: 250.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 65535.00RW RealRW RealRW RealRW RealRW RealRW RealRW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-113FileGroupAPPLICATIONSTorque ProveNameNo. DescriptionValues1111 755 Float ToleranceUnits:Float ToleranceSets the frequency level where the float timer starts. Also sets the frequency level Default:where the brake will be closed when P1100 [Trq Prove Cfg] Bit 1 “Encoderless” =1 (enabled).Min/Max:HzRPMP27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 0.0334P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 0.0334P27 x 0.0016 / P27 x 0.25P28 x 0.0016 / P28 x 0.251112 755 MicroPsnScalePctUnits: %Micro Position Scale PercentDefault: 10.000Sets the percent of speed reference to be used when micropositioning has been Min/Max: 0.100 / 100.000selected in P1100 [Trq Prove Cfg]. Bit 2 of P1100 [Trq Prove Cfg], determines ifthe motor needs to come to a stop before this setting will take effect.1113 755 ZeroSpdFloatTimeZero Speed Float TimeSets the amount of time the drive is below P1111 [Float Tolerance] before thebrake is set. Not used when P1100 [Trq Prove Cfg] Bit 1 “Encoderless” = 1(enabled).Units: SecsDefault: 5.000Min/Max: 0.100 / 500.000Read-WriteData TypeRW RealRW RealRW RealFileGroupNameNo. Description1120 753 Fiber ControlFiber ControlControls the Sync and Traverse Fiber Application functions.ValuesRead-WriteData TypeOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedTraverse EnaSync EnableDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Disabled1 = EnabledAPPLICATIONSFiber FunctionsBit 0 “Sync Enable” – Used in combination with an optional digital input to begin Synchronous speed change upon the falling edge of enable.Bit 1 “Traverse Ena” – Used in combination with an optional digital input to enable/disable the speed traverse routine.1121 753 Fiber StatusFiber StatusStatus of Sync and Traverse functions.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedTraverse DecTraverse OnSync RampSync HoldDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Disabled1 = EnabledBit 0 “Synch Hold” – Set when the Synchronous Speed change function is holding the speed reference constant. The speed will begin ramping to itssetpoint upon the falling edge of Sync Enable.Bit 1 “Sync Ramp” – Set when the Synchronous Speed change function is ramping to its setpoint.Bit 2 “Traverse On” – Set when the Traverse Speed function is varying the speed, either increasing or decreasing.Bit 3 “Traverse Dec” – Set when the Traverse Speed function is decreasing the motor speed.1122 753 Sync TimeSynchronize TimeThe time in seconds to ramp from the “held speed reference” to the current speedreference, after the Sync input is de-energized.1123 753 Traverse IncTraverse IncrementSets the time period in seconds of increasing speed for the Fiber Traversefunction.Units: SecsDefault: 0.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 3600.0Units: SecsDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 30.00RW RealRW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-114 Programming and ParametersFileGroupAPPLICATIONSFiber FunctionsNameDescriptionNo.1124 753 Traverse DecTraverse DecrementSets the time period in seconds of decreasing speed for the Fiber Traversefunction.1125 753 Max TraverseMaximum TraverseSets the amplitude of the triangle wave speed modulation for the Fiber Traversefunction. The total speed variation will be twice this value, from speed ref plusMax Traverse to speed ref minus Max Traverse.1126 753 P JumpPosition JumpSets the amplitude of the square wave speed modulation for the Fiber Traversefunction. This speed is alternately added to and subtracted from the speedreference together with the [Max Traverse] triangle speed modulation.1129 753 DI Fiber SyncEnaDigital Input Fiber Synchronize EnableSelects a digital input source for the Fiber Application Functions's synchronousspeed change routine. Used in combination with the [Fiber Control] Sync Enablebit.1130 753 DI Fiber TravDisDigital Input Fiber Traverse DisableSelects a digital input source for the Fiber Application Traverse Routine. This isan inverted input, so the Traverse Routine is disabled when the input is active(set). Used in combination with the [Fiber Control] Traverse Ena bit.ValuesUnits: SecsDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 30.00Units: HzDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / P520 [Max Fwd Speed]Units: HzDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / P520 [Max Fwd Speed]Default: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 159999.15Default: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 159999.15Read-WriteData TypeRW RealRW RealRW RealRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerFileGroupNameNo. Description1131 753 Adj Vltg ConfigAdjustable Voltage ConfigurationSelects input voltage phase setting.ValuesRead-WriteData TypeOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedPhaseSettingDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = 3-Phase Operation1 = 1-Phase OperationAPPLICATIONSAdjustable Vltg1133 753 Adj Vltg SelectAdjustable Voltage Reference SelectSelects the source of the voltage reference to the drive.1134 753 Adj Vltg Ref HiAdjustable Voltage Reference HighScales the upper value of the P1133 [Adj Vltg Select] selection when the sourceis an analog input.1135 753 Adj Vltg Ref LoAdjustable Voltage Reference LowScales the lower value of the P1133 [Adj Vltg Select] selection when the source isan analog input.1136 753 Adj Vltg TrimSelAdjustable Voltage Trim SelectSelects the source of the voltage trim that is added to or subtracted from thevoltage reference.1137 753 Adj Vltg Trim HiAdjustable Voltage Trim HighScales the upper value of the P1136 [Adj Vltg TrimSel] selection when the sourceis an analog input.Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+100.00 of Drive Rated VoltsUnits: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+100.00 of Drive Rated VoltsDefault: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+100.00 of Drive Rated VoltsRW 32-bitIntegerRW RealRW RealRW 32-bitIntegerRW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-115FileGroupAPPLICATIONSAdjustable VltgNameNo. Description1138 753 Adj Vltg Trim LoAdjustable Voltage Trim LowScales the lower value of the P1136 [Adj Vltg TrimSel] selection when the sourceis an analog input.1139 753 Adj Vltg CommandAdjustable Voltage CommandDisplays the voltage value of the reference specified in P1133 [Adj Vltg Select].1140 753 Adj Vltg AccTimeAdjustable Voltage Acceleration TimeSets the rate of voltage increase. The value will be the time it takes to ramp thevoltage from P1152 [Min Adj Voltage] to P36 [Maximum Voltage]. An “S” curvecan be applied to the ramp using P1150 [Adj Volt Scurve].1141 753 Adj Vltg DecTimeAdjustable Voltage Deceleration TimeSets the rate of voltage decrease. The value will be the time it takes to ramp thevoltage from P36 [Maximum Voltage] to P1152 [Min Adj Voltage]. An “S” curvecan be applied to the ramp using P1150 [Adj Volt Scurve].Important: This ramp and P142/143 [Decel Time X] must ramp to zero for driveto Stop.1142114311441145114611471148753753753753753753Adj Vltg Preset1Adj Vltg Preset2Adj Vltg Preset3Adj Vltg Preset4Adj Vltg Preset5Adj Vltg Preset6Adj Vltg Preset7753Adjustable Voltage Preset 1…7Provides an internal fixed voltage command value that is available as a selectionfor P1133 [Adj Vltg Select].1149 753 Adj Vltg RefMultAdjustable Voltage Reference MultiplierScales the voltage reference value from the reference source.1150 753 Adj Vltg ScurveAdjustable Voltage S CurveSets the percentage of accel or decel time to be applied to the voltage ramp as“S” curve. Time is added 1/2 at the beginning and 1/2 at the end.1151 753 Adj Vltg TrimPctAdjustable Voltage Trim PercentageScales the total voltage trim value from all sources. Analog In 1 and 2 are scaledseparately with P1137 [Adj Vltg Trim Hi] and P1138 [Adj Vltg Trim Lo] then [AdjVltg TrimPct] sets the trim value. The sign of this value will determine if trim isadded or subtracted from the reference.1152 753 Min Adj VoltageMinimum Adjustable VoltageSets the low limit for the voltage reference when P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode] is set to 9“Adj Voltage.”ValuesUnits: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+100.00 of Drive Rated VoltsUnits: VACDefault: 0.0Min/Max: 0.0 / Drive Rated VoltsUnits: SecsDefault: 0.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 3600.0Units: SecsDefault: 0.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 3600.0Units: VACDefault: 0.0Min/Max: 0.0 / Drive Rated VoltsUnits: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+100.00 of Drive Rated VoltsUnits: %Default: 0.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 100.0Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+100.00 of Drive Rated VoltsUnits: VACDefault: 0.0Min/Max: 0.0 / Drive Rated VoltsRead-WriteData TypeRW RealRO RealRW RealRW RealRW RealRW RealRW RealRW RealRW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-116 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNameNo. Description1165 753 Rod SpeedRod SpeedDisplays the speed in RPMs of the pump rod after the gearbox and sheaves.1166 753 Rod TorqueRod TorqueDisplays the load side torque. P1174 [Total Gear Ratio] must be greater than zeroto activate this display.1167 753 Rod Speed CmdRod Speed CommandDisplays the commanded speed in RPMs of the pump rod after the gearbox andsheaves.1168 753 TorqAlarm ActionTorque Alarm ActionSets the drive action when the Torque Alarm is exceeded. Note: only active withPC pump applications. See P1179 [OilWell Pump Cfg].1169 753 TorqAlarm ConfigTorque Alarm ConfigureEnables the Torque Alarm function.ValuesUnits: RPMDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 10000.00Units: FtLbDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 10000.00Units: RPMDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 10000.00Default:Options:0 = “Ignore”0 = “Ignore”1 = “Preset Spd 1”Read-WriteData TypeRORORORealRealRealRW 32-bitIntegerOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedTorque LevelDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Disabled1 = EnabledAPPLICATIONSPump Jack1170 753 TorqAlarm DwellUnits: SecsTorque Alarm DwellDefault: 0.0Sets the time that the torque must exceed P1171 [TorqAlarm Level] before P1168 Min/Max: 0.0 / 60.0[TorqAlarm Action] takes place.1171 753 TorqAlarm LevelTorque Alarm LevelSets the level at which the Torque Alarm becomes active.1172 753 TorqAlm TimeoutTorque Alarm Time OutSets the amount of time a Torque Alarm can be active until timeout action begins.1173 753 TorqAlarm TOActnTorque Alarm Time Out ActionSets the drive action when P1172 [TorqAlrm Timeout] is exceeded.“Ignore” (0) – No action is taken“Alarm” (1) – Alarm occurs“Flt Minor” (2) – Minor Fault occurs if enabled, otherwise Fault Coast Stop“FltCoastStop” (3) – Fault Coast Stop occurs“Flt RampStop” (4) – Fault Ramp Stop occurs“Flt CL Stop” (5) – Fault Current Limit Stop occurs1174 753 Total Gear RatioTotal Gear RatioDisplays the calculated total gear ratio as follows:(P1184 [Gearbox Sheave] x P1183 [Gearbox Ratio]) / P1178 [Motor Sheave]1175 753 Max Rod SpeedMaximum Rod SpeedSets the maximum speed for the polished rod in a PCP oil well application.1176 753 Max Rod TorqueMaximum Rod TorqueSets the desired maximum torque on the polished rod in a PCP oil wellapplication.Units: FtLbDefault: 0.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 5000.0Units: SecsDefault: 0.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 600.0Default:Options:0 = “Ignore”0 = “Ignore”1 = “Alarm”2 = “Flt Minor”3 = “FltCoastStop”4 = “Flt RampStop”5 = “Flt CL Stop”6 = “Resume”Default: 0.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 32000.0Units: RPMDefault: 300.0Min/Max: 200.0 / 600.0Units: FtLbDefault: 500.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 3000.0RW RealRW RealRW RealRW 32-bitIntegerRORealRW RealRW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-117FileGroupAPPLICATIONSPump JackNameNo. Description1177 753 Min Rod SpeedMinimum Rod SpeedSets the minimum speed for the polished rod in a PCP oil well application.1178 753 Motor SheaveMotor SheaveSets the sheave diameter on the motor.1179 753 OilWell Pump CfgOil Well Pump ConfigureSelects the type of oil well application.“Disable” (0) – Disables oil well parameters.“Pump Jack” (1) – Sets parameters based on Pump Jack type oil well.“PC Oil Well” (2) – Sets parameters based on Progressive Cavity type Pumps.1180 753 PCP Pump SheavePCP Pump SheaveSpecifies the pump sheave diameter.1181 753 Gearbox LimitGearbox LimitSets the gearbox torque limit. This value is used in determining the P670 [PosTorque Limit] and P671 [Neg Torque Limit].1182 753 Gearbox RatingGearbox RatingSets the gearbox rating.1183 753 Gearbox RatioGearbox RatioSpecifies the nameplate gear ratio.1184 753 Gearbox SheaveGearbox SheaveSets the Sheave diameter on the GearboxValuesUnits: RPMDefault: 0.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 199.0Units: InchDefault: 10.0Min/Max: 0.25 / 25.00Default:Options:0 = “Disable”0 = “Disable”1 = “Pump Jack”2 = “PC Oil Well”Units: InchDefault: 20.0Min/Max: 0.25 / 200.00Units: %Default: 100.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 200.0Units: Kin#Default: 640.0Min/Max: 16.0 / 2560.0Default: 1.0Min/Max: 1.0 / 40.0Units: InchDefault: 0.25Min/Max: 0.25 / 100.00Read-WriteData TypeRW RealRW RealRW 32-bitIntegerRW RealRW RealRW RealRW RealRW RealFileGroupAPPLICATIONSPump OffNameNo. Description1187 753 Pump Off ConfigPump Off ConfigureSelects the torque data that will be used for the Pump-Off control.“Automatic” (0) – Auto select.“Position” (1) – Downstroke torque.“Cycle” (2) – Full Stroke torque.1188 753 Pump Off SetupPump Off SetupSelect Pump-Off options.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedCycle PO PosPos Min TrqPos OffsetPos FilterDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0ValuesDefault:Options:0 = Disabled1 = Enabled0 = “Automatic”0 = “Automatic”1 = “Position”2 = “Cycle”Read-WriteData TypeRW 32-bitInteger1189 753 Pump Off ActionPump Off ActionSelects the action to be taken after a Pump-Off condition has been detected.Default:Options:0 = “Change Speed”0 = “Change Speed”1 = “Always Stop”2 = “Stop After 1”3 = “Stop After 2”RW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-118 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNameNo. Description1190 753 Pump Off ControlPump Off ControlEnables/Disable the Pump-Off control or select the source for the torque level.1191 753 Pump Off StatusPump Off StatusDisplays the status of the Pump-Off control.ValuesDefault:Options:0 = “Disable”0 = “Disable”1 = “Baseline Set”2 = “Fixed Setpt”Read-WriteData TypeRW 32-bitIntegerOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedPump StablePumpOff AlrmTopOf StrokeCycle UsedPump StoppedPump SlowedPump OffEnblDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Disabled1 = EnabledAPPLICATIONSPump Off1192 753 Pump Cycle StorePump Cycle StoreStores the torque waveform. The value will automatically be returned to 0.1193 753 Set Top ofStrokeSet Top of StrokeCaptures the position at the top of the pump stroke cycle. The value willautomatically be returned to 0.1194 753 Torque SetpointTorque Set PointSets the torque level for Pump-Off when P1190 [Pump Off Control] is set to 2“Fixed Setpt.”1195 753 Pump Off LevelPump Off LevelSets the percent change in torque from the baseline or setpoint that will indicatethe well is in the pump-off condition.Default:Options:Default:Options:0 = “Disable”0 = “Disable”1 = “Enable”0 = “Disable”0 = “Disable”1 = “Enable”Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 100.00Units: %Default: 5.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 100.001196 753 Pump Off SpeedUnits: %Pump Off SpeedDefault: 20.00Sets the torque level for Pump-Off when P1190 [Pump Off Control] is set to Fixed Min/Max: 0.00 / 100.00Setpt.1197 753 Pump Off TimePump Off TimeSets the time the drive will run at the reduced P1196 [Pump Off Speed] beforereturning to the commanded speed.1198 753 Pct Cycle TorquePercent Cycle TorqueDisplays the average torque for a full pump cycle.1199 753 Pct Lift TorquePercent Lift TorqueDisplays the average rod lift torque.1200 753 Pct Drop TorquePercent Drop TorqueDisplays the average rod dropping torque.1201 753 Stroke Pos CountStroke Position CountDisplays the pump cycle position. The top of stroke should be 0 and rolls over at10,000.1202 753 Stroke Per MinStroke Per MinuteDisplays the strokes per minute.1203 753 Pump Off CountPump Off CountDisplays the number of times a pump-off condition has occurred since thisparameter was reset.Units: SecsDefault: 600.00Min/Max: 120.00 / 60000.00Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: -100.00 / 200.00Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: -100.00 / 200.00Units: %Default: 0.00Min/Max: -100.00 / 200.00Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 15000Default: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 50.00Default: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 60000.00RW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW RealRW RealRW RealRW RealRORORORORORealRealRealRealRealRW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-119FileGroupAPPLICATIONSPump OffNameDescriptionNo.1204 753 Pump Off SleepCntPump Off Sleep CountDisplays the number of times a sleep condition has occurred since this parameterwas reset.1205 753 Day Stroke CountDay Stroke CountDisplays the number of strokes for the past 24 hours. This is a rolling counterupdated every hour.1206 753 DI PumpOff DisblDigital Input Pump Off DisableSelects the digital input source for the Pump Off Disable function.1207 753 Pump OffSleepLvlPump Off Sleep LevelProvides a source for P351 [SleepWake RefSel]. This provides the start/stopcontrol of the drive by the Pump-Off function.ValuesDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 60000.00Default: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 65535.00Default: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 159999.15Units: SecsDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 10.00Read-WriteData TypeRW RealRORealRW 32-bitIntegerRO32-bitIntegerFileGroupNameNo. Description1210 755 Profile StatusProfile StatusIndicates status of speed profile/position indexer control logic.ValuesRead-WriteData TypeAPPLICATIONSProfilingOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedHome Not SetVel OverrideRestart StepResumeStoppedCompleteIn PositionHoldingDwellPositionModeRunningEnabledReservedReservedReservedStep Bit 4Step Bit 3Step Bit 2Step Bit 1Step Bit 0Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = False1 = TrueBit 0 “Step Bit 0” – Bit 0 through Bit 4 indicate executing step number in the move table in binary format.Bit 1 “Step Bit 1”Bit 2 “Step Bit 2”Bit 3 “Step Bit 3”Bit 4 “Step Bit 4”Bit 8 “Enabled” – Indicates that the profile control logic is enabled. When the drive is started with the profiler selection (Option 6) in the speed/torque/position mode P313 [Actv SpTqPs Mode], this bit turns on.Bit 9 “Running” – Indicates that the profile control logic is in running state.Bit 10 “PositionMode” – Indicates that the profile control logic is using position control logic.Bit 11 “Dwell” – Indicates that the profile control logic is in dwell state.Bit 12 “Holding” – Indicates that the profile control logic is in holding statesBit 13 “In Position” – Indicates that the target position has been reached at the completion of a move. The in position bandwidth P726 [In Pos PsnBand] can be adjusted to affect when this bit is set with respect to the target position. This bit will be cleared when a new move is begunBit 14 “Complete” – Indicates that all steps in the move table have been executed and a step with a End action has been reached. The profile controllogic is complete. This bit will be cleared when the profile is first enabled.Bit 15 “Stopped” – Indicates that the profile control logic stops the drive following Bit 14 “Complete” and any additional dwell time specified for the Endstep. This bit will be cleared when a new profile is begun.Bit 16 “Resume” – Indicates that an existing step is to resume execution when the profile is enabled. A previously running step will then be allowed tocomplete. When the bit is clear, the profile will begin at its Starting Step.Bit 17 “Restart Step” – Follows the state of the restart step bit in P1213 [Profile Command] Bit 10 “Restart Step”.Bit 18 “Vel Override” – Follows the state of the velocity override bit in P1213 [Profile Command] Bit 9 “Vel Override”.Bit 19 “Home Not Set” – Indicates that the home position is not defined and the move table contains a position absolute move type. When this bit isset the profile will not be allowed to execute. This bit will be cleared when either a homing function or position redefine function is completed.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-120 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNameNo. Description1212 755 Units TraveledUnits TraveledIndicates total number of units traveled. The relationship between the feedbackedge counts and the position units is determined by the P1215 [Counts Per Unit].Actual motor position is converted from the edge counts to this value using theP1215 [Counts Per Unit].1213 755 Profile CommandProfile CommandSets bits to configure the speed profile/position indexer control logic.ValuesUnits: CntsDefault: Read OnlyMin/Max: –/+ 2200000000.0Read-WriteData TypeRO RealOptionsReservedReservedReservedProf Run AlmHomNotSetAlmRestart StepVel OverrideHold StepReservedReservedReservedStrStepSel4StrStepSel3StrStepSel2StrStepSel1StrStepSel0Default 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Disabled1 = EnabledAPPLICATIONSProfilingBit 0 “StrStepSel0” – Bit 0 through Bit 4 set initial or starting step in the move table in binary format. A starting step value of zero results in no motionwhen the drive is enabled.Bit 1 “StrStepSel1”Bit 2 “StrStepSel2”Bit 3 “StrStepSel3”Bit 4 “StrStepSel4”Bit 8 “Hold Step” – When the drive is enabled with this bit is set, the drive starts and runs at zero velocity. The starting step is not executed until the‘Hold Step’ bit is removed.For non-blended moves, the drive will hold zero speed and/or current position. This does not stop the drive. For blended moves, the drive will continueto run at the step velocity. If the Hold Step bit is removed, then the conditions required to complete the step can be evaluated.Bit 9 “Vel Override” – can be used to rescale all move velocities by the velocity override P1216 [ProfVel Override]. When this bit is off, a scale factor of1 is used.Bit 10 “Restart Step” – can be used to disable a currently executing profile. This bit forces the current step to reset to the starting step value.Bit 11 “HomNotSetAlm” – sets condition to indicate the “home position not set” alarm. The absolute position type will work without home position if thebit is off. Set on as default.Bit 12 “Prof Run Alm” – sets condition to indicate the profile running alarm during the drive is running. Set on as default.1215 755 Counts Per UnitCounts Per UnitSets number of position feedback counts per unit of machine travel (ex, 1024encoder edge counts per inch). This parameter is used to scale position targetsfrom their entered values of units to internal units of encoder edge counts. Thisparameter is also used to convert actual motor position from encoder edgecounts back into the desired units for display in P1212 [Units Traveled].1216 755 ProfVel OverrideProfile Velocity OverrideSets multiplier for all move velocities when the velocity override function isselected P1213 [Profile Command] Bit 9 “Vel Override.” This parameter istypically set to a value less than 1. When the velocity override bit P1213 [ProfileCommand] Bit 9 “Vel Override” is off, a scale factor of 1 is used.Default: 1Min/Max: 1 / 2200000000Units: %Default: 100.00Min/Max: 10.00 / 150.00RW 32-bitIntegerRW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-121FileGroupRead-WriteData TypeNameNo. DescriptionValues1217 755 Prof DI InvertProfile Digital Input InvertSets polarity of the digital inputs. Each bit is assigned to a move table step. Rising edge of the digital input is used when the bit is off, and falling edgeof digital input is used when the bit is on.APPLICATIONSProfilingOptionsBit 0 “Hold Step” – sets polarity of the digital input for the hold step, P1218 [DI Hold Step].Bit 1 “Abort Step” – sets polarity of the digital input for abort step, P1219 [DI Abort Step].Bit 2 “AbortProfile” – sets polarity of the digital input for abort profile, P1220 [DI Abort Profile].Bit 3 “Vel Override” – sets polarity of the digital input for velocity override, P1221 [DI Vel Override].Bit 4 “StrStepSel0” – sets polarity of the digital input for start step 1, P1222 [DI StrtStep Sel0].Bit 5 “StrStepSel1” – sets polarity of the digital input for start step 2, P1223 [DI StrtStep Sel1].Bit 6 “StrStepSel2” – sets polarity of the digital input for start step 3, P1224 [DI StrtStep Sel2].Bit 7 “StrStepSel3” – sets polarity of the digital input for start step 4, P1225 [DI StrtStep Sel3].Bit 8 “StrStepSel4” – sets polarity of the digital input for start step 5, P1226 [DI StrtStep Sel4]Bit 9 “Step 1” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 1, P1230 [Step 1 Type].Bit 10 “Step 2” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 2, P1240 [Step 2 Type].Bit 11 “Step 3” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 3, P1250 [Step 3 Type].Bit 12 “Step 4” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 4, P1260 [Step 4 Type].Bit 13 “Step 5” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 5, P1270 [Step 5 Type].Bit 14 “Step 6” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 6, P1280 [Step 6 Type].Bit 15 “Step 7” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 7, P1290 [Step 7 Type].Bit 16 “Step 8” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 8, P1300 [Step 8 Type].Bit 17 “Step 9” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 9, P1310 [Step 9 Type].Bit 18 “Step 10” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 10, P1320 [Step 10 Type].Bit 19 “Step 11” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 11, P1330 [Step 11 Type].Bit 20 “Step 12” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 12, P1340 [Step 12 Type].Bit 21 “Step 13” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 13, P1350 [Step 13 Type].Bit 22 “Step 14” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 14, P1360 [Step 14 Type].Bit 23 “Step 15” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 15, P1370 [Step 15 Type].Bit 24 “Step 16” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 16, P1380 [Step 16 Type].1218 755 DI Hold StepReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedStep 16Step 15Step 14Step 13Step 12Step 11Step 10Step 9Step 8Step 7Step 6Step 5Step 4Step 3Step 2Step 1StrStepSel4StrStepSel3StrStepSel2StrStepSel1StrStepSel0Vel OverrideAbortProfileAbort StepHold StepDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = False1 = TrueDigital Input Hold StepSets a digital input port for the hold step in profile/indexer control logic. The digitalinput assigned by this parameter is equivalent to P1213 [Profile Command] Bit 8“Hold Step.” Polarity of active state is defined by P1217 [Prof DI Invert] Bit 0 “HoldStep.”1219 755 DI Abort StepDigital Input Abort StepSets a digital input port for the abort step in profile/indexer control logic. Polarityof active state is defined by P1217 [Prof DI Invert] Bit 1 “Abort Step.”1220 755 DI Abort ProfileDigital Input Abort ProfileSets a digital input port for the abort profile in profile/indexer control logic. Polarityof active state is defined by P1217 [Prof DI Invert] Bit 2 “AbortProfile.”1221 755 DI Vel OverrideDigital Input Velocity ProfileSets a digital input port for the velocity override in profile/indexer control logic.The digital input assigned by this parameter is equivalent to P1213 [ProfileCommand] Bit 9 “Vel Override.” Polarity of active state is defined by P1217 [ProfDI Invert] Bit 3 “Vel Override.”Default: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 159999.15Default: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 159999.15Default: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 159999.15Default: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 159999.15RW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-122 Programming and ParametersFileGroupAPPLICATIONSProfilingNo.1222122312241225122612301240125012601270128012901300131013201330134013501360137013801231124112511261127112811291130113111321133113411351136113711381NameDescription755755755755DI StrtStep Sel0DI StrtStep Sel1DI StrtStep Sel2DI StrtStep Sel3DI StrtStep Sel4755Digital Input Start Step Select 0, 1, 2, 3, 4Set digital input ports for the start step in profile/indexer control logic. The digitalinputs assigned by these parameters are equivalent to P1213 [Profile Command]Bit 4 “StrStepSel4.” Polarities of active state are defined by P1217 [Prof DI Invert]Bit 4 “StrStepSel0” to Bit 8 “StrStepSel4.”755755755755755755755755755755755755755755755Step 1 TypeStep 2 TypeStep 3 TypeStep 4 TypeStep 5 TypeStep 6 TypeStep 7 TypeStep 8 TypeStep 9 TypeStep 10 TypeStep 11 TypeStep 12 TypeStep 13 TypeStep 14 TypeStep 15 TypeStep 16 Type755Step 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16 TypeSet type of move for a particular step. The possible step types are:“Speed” (0) = Speed Profile moves in speed mode.“Position Abs” (1) = Position Absolute moves in absolute position mode.“PositionIncr” (2) = Position Incremental moves in position increment mode.The drive must have the direction mode set to the bipolar for the positionregulator to function properly. The current, torque, and regen power limits mustbe set so as not to limit the programmed deceleration time. If the limits occur, theposition regulator may overshoot the position set point.755755755755755755755755755755755755755755755Step 1 VelocityStep 2 VelocityStep 3 VelocityStep 4 VelocityStep 5 VelocityStep 6 VelocityStep 7 VelocityStep 8 VelocityStep 9 VelocityStep 10 VelocityStep 11 VelocityStep 12 VelocityStep 13 VelocityStep 14 VelocityStep 15 VelocityStep 16 Velocity755Step 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16 VelocitySet speed at which a move will take place. The step velocity applies to all threetypes of moves – position absolute, position incremental, and speed profile. Themotor may not achieve the step velocity in all cases. Short distance moves maybegin to decelerate before the step velocity is reached. If the move is sufficientlylong, then the motor speed will be limited to the step velocity. Sign on the stepvelocity is used to determine direction of motor rotation.Cannot be used with most blended moves in Position Absolute type and PositionIncremental type.ValuesDefault: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 159999.15Default:Options:Units:Default:Min/Max:0 = “Speed”0 = “Speed”1 = “Position Abs”2 = “PositionIncr”HzRPM0.00–/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 8–/+P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 8Read-WriteData TypeRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-123FileGroupAPPLICATIONSProfilingNo.12321242125212621272128212921302131213221332134213521362137213821233124312531263127312831293130313131323133313431353136313731383NameDescription755755755755755755755755755755755755755755755Step 1 AccelStep 2 AccelStep 3 AccelStep 4 AccelStep 5 AccelStep 6 AccelStep 7 AccelStep 8 AccelStep 9 AccelStep 10 AccelStep 11 AccelStep 12 AccelStep 13 AccelStep 14 AccelStep 15 AccelStep 16 Accel755Step 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16 AccelerationSet acceleration time between zero and rated motor speed in seconds. Themotor will accelerate towards the step speed using the step velocity parameter.The minimum acceleration rate is determined by the system inertia.Cannot be used with most blended moves in Position Absolute type and PositionIncremental type.755755755755755755755755755755755755755755755Step 1 DecelStep 2 DecelStep 3 DecelStep 4 DecelStep 5 DecelStep 6 DecelStep 7 DecelStep 8 DecelStep 9 DecelStep 10 DecelStep 11 DecelStep 12 DecelStep 13 DecelStep 14 DecelStep 15 DecelStep 16 Decel755Step 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16 DecelerationSet deceleration time between rated motor speed and zero in seconds. Themotor will decelerate towards zero speed. The minimum deceleration rate isdetermined by the system inertia.Cannot be used with most blended moves in Position Absolute type and PositionIncremental type.ValuesUnits: SecsDefault: 10.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 3600.00Units: SecsDefault: 10.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 3600.00Read-WriteData TypeRW RealRW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-124 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNo.1234124412541264127412841294130413141324133413441354136413741384NameDescription755755755755755755755755755755755755755755755Step 1 ValueStep 2 ValueStep 3 ValueStep 4 ValueStep 5 ValueStep 6 ValueStep 7 ValueStep 8 ValueStep 9 ValueStep 10 ValueStep 11 ValueStep 12 ValueStep 13 ValueStep 14 ValueStep 15 ValueStep 16 Value755Step 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16 ValueThese parameters can take on any one of several meanings depending on themove type and action. The possible meanings for these parameters are givenbelow. All other type/action combinations will be ignored.ValuesDefault: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647Read-WriteData TypeRW 32-bitInteger[Type] = Position Absolute[Action] = Posit Blend, Wait Dig-in, or Step to Next[Value] is the Absolute Target Position[Type] = Position Incremental[Action] = Posit Blend, Wait Dig-in, or Step to Next[Value] is the Incremental Target PositionAPPLICATIONSProfiling[Type] = Speed Profile[Action] = Posit Blend[Value] is the Incremental Target Position[Type] = Speed Profile[Action] = Time Blend, Wait Dig-in, or Step to Next[Value] is the Total Time to complete the move. Time is specified in 1/100ths of asecond (1000 = 10.00 sec). Negative values result in time = 0 sec (no move)1235124512551265127512851295130513151325133513451355136513751385[Type] = Speed Profile[Action] = Parameter Blend[Value] is the parameter number to compare against the parameter set-pointspecified in the dwell parameter. Positive numbers will use a greater than check,negative numbers will use a less than check.755755755755755755755755755755755755755755755Step 1 DwellStep 2 DwellStep 3 DwellStep 4 DwellStep 5 DwellStep 6 DwellStep 7 DwellStep 8 DwellStep 9 DwellStep 10 DwellStep 11 DwellStep 12 DwellStep 13 DwellStep 14 DwellStep 15 DwellStep 16 Dwell755Step 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16 DwellSet time delay between moves. P1210 [Profile Status] Bit 11 “Dwell” will be set toindicate that the step dwell period is active and timing. Zero value will disabledwell, negative value will wait forever. Not all steps can use dwell (example, mostblended moves cannot use dwell). When the speed type with the parameterblend action move is used, the step dwell parameter will contain the parameternumber of the set-point value to compare with the parameter selected in thevalue parameter.Units: SecsDefault: 0.00Min/Max: –1.00 / 3600.00RW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-125FileGroupAPPLICATIONSProfilingNo.12361246125612661276128612961306131613261336134613561366137613861237124712571267127712871297130713171327133713471357136713771387NameDescription755755755755755755755755755755755755755755755Step 1 BatchStep 2 BatchStep 3 BatchStep 4 BatchStep 5 BatchStep 6 BatchStep 7 BatchStep 8 BatchStep 9 BatchStep 10 BatchStep 11 BatchStep 12 BatchStep 13 BatchStep 14 BatchStep 15 BatchStep 16 Batch755Step 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16 BatchSet number of times to repeat a step. For example, a batch count of two willcause that step to repeat two times before starting the next step. Theseparameters cannot be used with position absolute moves, since this would implymoving to the same position repeatedly. These parameters cannot be used withmost blended moves (exception dig-in blend), because most blended movesneed to transition to the next step, instead of repeating. The dig-in blend movesuse this parameter to specify the number of digital input transitions required. Azero step batch setting will cause that step to repeat forever.755755755755755755755755755755755755755755755Step 1 NextStep 2 NextStep 3 NextStep 4 NextStep 5 NextStep 6 NextStep 7 NextStep 8 NextStep 9 NextStep 10 NextStep 11 NextStep 12 NextStep 13 NextStep 14 NextStep 15 NextStep 16 Next755Step 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16 NextSet step number that will be executed after the current step is complete. Thecurrent step will be complete after any batch repeat cycles have finished.Typically, steps are executed in ascending order, although this is not arequirement. These parameters do not apply to a step having an End action,since this step is normally used to terminate a sequence of step moves.ValuesDefault: 1Min/Max: 0 / 65535Default: 2Min/Max: 1 / 16Read-WriteData TypeRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-126 Programming and ParametersFileGroupAPPLICATIONSProfilingNo.12381248125812681278128812981308131813281338134813581368137813881239124912591269127912891299130913191329133913491359136913791389NameDescription755755755755755755755755755755755755755755755Step 1 ActionStep 2 ActionStep 3 ActionStep 4 ActionStep 5 ActionStep 6 ActionStep 7 ActionStep 8 ActionStep 9 ActionStep 10 ActionStep 11 ActionStep 12 ActionStep 13 ActionStep 14 ActionStep 15 ActionStep 16 Action755Step 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16 ActionSet what is to be done at the end of a step after the move is complete.End (0) = End stops the move sequence.Step to Next (1) = Step to Next moves to the next step after the speed ramp up/down is completed in the specific total time. The dwell time and the batch can beapplied.Psn Blend (2) = Posit Blend moves to the next step after the actual positionbecomes greater than the position specified in the value parameter.Time Blend (3) = Time Blend moves to the next step after the total running timebecomes greater than the time specified in the value parameter.Param Blend (4) = Param Blend moves to the next step after comparison of twoparameters is satisfied. The parameters for comparison are specified in the valueand dwell parameter.DigIn Blend (5) = DigIn Blend moves to the next step after the specified numberof digital input rising (or falling) edges are applied. The batch parameter specifiesthe number of digital input edges.Wait DigIn (6) = Wait DigIn moves to the next step after the digital input rising (orfalling) edges are applied.755755755755755755755755755755755755755755755Step 1 Dig InStep 2 Dig InStep 3 Dig InStep 4 Dig InStep 5 Dig InStep 6 Dig InStep 7 Dig InStep 8 Dig InStep 9 Dig InStep 10 Dig InStep 11 Dig InStep 12 Dig InStep 13 Dig InStep 14 Dig InStep 15 Dig InStep 16 Dig In755Step 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16 Digital InputSet digital input sources. Not all steps use the digital input for the step move. Thefollowing type and action moves use the dig-in parameters to specify the digitalinput sources. Polarity (rising or falling edges) of digital input is set by P1217[Prof DI Invert].1. [Type] Position Absolute [Action] Wait DigIn2. [Type] Position Incremental [Action] Wait DigIn3. [Type] Speed Profile [Action] DigIn Blend4. [Type] Speed Profile [Action] Wait DigInValuesDefault:Options:1 = “Step to Next”0 = “End”1 = “Step to Next”2 = “Psn Blend”3 = “Time Blend”4 = “Param Blend”5 = “DigIn Blend”6 = “Wait DigIn”Default: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 159999.15Read-WriteData TypeRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-127FileGroupNameNo. Description1390 755 PCAM ControlPosition Camming ControlSets bits to control the position CAM control logic.ValuesRead-WriteData TypeOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedCndtnl HoldUnidirectionReref Psn InOffset EnAlt SlopeAux Cam EnReverseY OutReverseX InStartDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Disabled1 = EnabledAPPLICATIONSCammingBit 0 “Start” – Start the position CAMBit 1 “ReverseX In” – Reverse polarity of x-axis input (P1392 [PCAM Psn Select])Bit 2 “ReverseY Out” – Reverse polarity of y-axis output at beginning of next cycle (P1473 [PCAM Psn Out])Bit 3 “Aux Cam En” – Switch to the auxiliary CAM profile at beginning of next cycleBit 4 “Alt Slope” – Use a different slope calculationBit 5 “Offset En” – Enable input offset function (P1394 [PCAM Psn Ofst])Bit 6 “Reref Psn In” – Permit re-referencing x-axis input (P1392 PCAM Psn Select])Bit 7 “Unidirection” – Use unidirectional operationBit 8 “Cndtnl Hold” – Freeze the speed regulator's integrator if position reference changes. This bit is recommended to be set for point to point motion.1391 755 PCAM ModePosition Camming ModeThe parameter sets type of operational mode.“Off” (0) – Disable position CAM function“Single Step” (1) – At rising edge of Start (P1390 [PCAM Control]), the CAMprofile begins at point 0 and runs until the x-axis has reached the last pointdefined by the end point (P1405 [PCAM Main EndPnt] and P1439 [PCAM AuxEndPnt]) at which point it is completed. If the x-axis then backs up into CAMrange, nothing happens; the profile has already completed and won't restart untilcontrol Start (P1390 [PCAM Control]) is once again set.“Continuous” (2) – At rising edge of Start (P1390 [PCAM Control]), the CAMprofile begins at point 0 and runs to the end point (P1405 [PCAM Main EndPnt]and P1439 [PCAM Aux EndPnt]), and then repeats forever or until the control bitStart (P1390 [PCAM Control]) is cleared.“Persistent” (3) – At rising edge of Start (P1390 [PCAM Control]), the CAM profilebegins at point 0 and runs to the end point (P1405 [PCAM Main EndPnt] andP1439 [PCAM Aux EndPnt]), and remains active until the control bit Start (P1390[PCAM Control]) is cleared.1392 755 PCAM Psn SelectPosition Camming Position SelectThe parameter selects a position reference source for x-axis.1393 755 PCAM Psn StptPosition Camming Position SetpointThe parameter provides position reference for x-axis when the position referenceselect (P1392 [PCAM Psn Select]) selects this parameter.1394 755 PCAM Psn OfstPosition Camming Position OffsetThe parameter provides position offset value to x-axis position when the offsetenable control bit (P1390 [PCAM Control]) is set. The offset value causes aphase shift or position change in x-axis and a momentary change to CAM speed.1395 755 PCAM PsnOfst EpsPosition Camming Position Offset EpsThe parameter provides count of edges per second for virtual encoder function.The value makes a limit on change of x-axis position in change of position offsetinput.1396 755 PCAM Span XPosition Camming Span XThe parameter provides the number of integer counts equivalent to the span orrange of x-axis.Default:Options:Default:Options:0 = “Off”0 = “Off”1 = “Single Step”2 = “Continuous”3 = “Persistent”13931 / 159999Default: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647Default: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647Default: 2000Min/Max: 0 / 2147483647Default: 8192Min/Max: 0 / 2147483647RW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-128 Programming and ParametersFileGroupAPPLICATIONSCammingNameDescriptionNo.1397 755 PCAM Scale XPosition Camming Scale XThe parameter multiplies span x (P1396 [PCAM Span X]) such that the x-axisdimension will expand if this parameter is greater than 1.1398 755 PCAM Span YPosition Camming Span YThe parameter provides the number of edges equivalent to the span of the y-axis.The value is the number of integer counts representing the maximum verticalextent of the profile.1399 755 PCAM ScaleY SelPosition Camming Scale Y SelectThe parameter selects a source for y scale.1400 755 PCAM ScaleYSetPtPosition Camming Scale Y SetpointThe parameter provides y-axis scale when the y scale select (P1399 [PCAMScaleY Sel]) selects this parameter. The y scale multiplies the y span such thatthe y-axis dimension will increase if y scale is greater than 1.1401 755 PCAM VelScaleSelPosition Camming Velocity Scale SelectThe parameter selects a source for velocity scale.1402 755 PCAM VelScaleSPPosition Camming Velocity Scale SetpointThe parameter provides velocity scale when the velocity scale select (P1401[PCAM VelScaleSel]) selects this parameter. The velocity scale multiplies thevelocity output (P1472 [PCAM Vel Out]) such that the velocity output (P1472) willdecrease if the velocity scale is less than 1.ValuesDefault: 1.00Min/Max: 0.01 / 214748000.00Default: 8192Min/Max: 0 / 2147483647Default:Options:14001 / 159999Default: 1.00Min/Max: 0.01 / 214748000.00Default:Options:14021 / 159999Units: MPEDefault: 0.000100Min/Max: 0.000000 / 8.00000Read-WriteData TypeRW RealRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW RealRW 32-bitIntegerRW Real1403 755 PCAM Slope BeginDefault: 0.00RW RealPosition Camming Slope BeginThe parameter provides beginning slope at CAM point 0. The parameter is usedonly if the segment is cubic type curve.Min/Max: –214748000.00 / 214748000.001404 755 PCAM Slope EndDefault: 0.00RW RealPosition Camming Slope EndThe parameter provides ending slope at CAM point 0. The parameter is usedonly if the segment is cubic type curve in both the main and the auxiliary CAMprofile.Min/Max: –214748000.00 / 214748000.001405 755 PCAM Main EndPntDefault: 0RW 32-bitPosition Camming Main End PointOptions: 1 / 15IntegerThe parameter provides a number of the last CAM point used in the main CAMprofile.1406 755 PCAM Main TypesPosition Camming Main TypesEach bit sets curve type for each segment in the main CAM profile. If the bit is clear, the curve is linear at the point of segment in the main CAMprofile. If the bit is set, the curve is cubic at the point of segment in the main CAM profile.OptionsCubicCurve15CubicCurve14CubicCurve13CubicCurve12CubicCurve11CubicCurve10CubicCurve9CubicCurve8CubicCurve7CubicCurve6CubicCurve5CubicCurve4CubicCurve3CubicCurve2CubicCurve1CubicCurve0Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Disabled1 = EnabledPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-129FileGroupAPPLICATIONSCammingNo.14071409141114131415141714191421142314251427142914311433143514371408141014121414141614181420142214241426142814301432143414361438NameDescription755755755755755755755755755755755755755755755PCAM Main Pt X 0PCAM Main Pt X 1PCAM Main Pt X 2PCAM Main Pt X 3PCAM Main Pt X 4PCAM Main Pt X 5PCAM Main Pt X 6PCAM Main Pt X 7PCAM Main Pt X 8PCAM Main Pt X 9PCAM Main PtX 10PCAM Main PtX 11PCAM Main PtX 12PCAM Main PtX 13PCAM Main PtX 14PCAM Main PtX 15755Position Camming Main Point X 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15Provides x-coordinate value for CAM point in the main CAM profile.755755755755755755755755755755755755755755755PCAM Main Pt Y 0PCAM Main Pt Y 1PCAM Main Pt Y 2PCAM Main Pt Y 3PCAM Main Pt Y 4PCAM Main Pt Y 5PCAM Main Pt Y 6PCAM Main Pt Y 7PCAM Main Pt Y 8PCAM Main Pt Y 9PCAM Main PtY 10PCAM Main PtY 11PCAM Main PtY 12PCAM Main PtY 13PCAM Main PtY 14PCAM Main PtY 15755Position Camming Main Point Y 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15Provides y-coordinate value for CAM point in the main CAM profile.ValuesDefault: 0.00Min/Max: –/+220000000.00Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+220000000.00Read-WriteData TypeRW RealRW Real1439 755 PCAM Aux EndPntDefault: 0RW 32-bitPosition Camming Auxiliary End PointOptions: 1 / 15IntegerProvides a number of the last CAM point used in the auxiliary CAM profile.1440 755 PCAM Aux TypesPosition Camming Auxiliary TypesEach bit sets curve type for each segment in the auxiliary CAM profile. If the bit is clear, the curve is linear at the point of segment in the auxiliaryCAM profile. If the bit is set, the curve is cubic at the point of segment in the auxiliary CAM profile.OptionsCubicCurve15CubicCurve14CubicCurve13CubicCurve12CubicCurve11CubicCurve10CubicCurve9CubicCurve8CubicCurve7CubicCurve6CubicCurve5CubicCurve4CubicCurve3CubicCurve2CubicCurve1ReservedDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Disabled1 = Enabled144114431445144714491451145314551457145914611463146514671469755755755755755755755755755755755755755755PCAM Aux Pt X 1PCAM Aux Pt X 2PCAM Aux Pt X 3PCAM Aux Pt X 4PCAM Aux Pt X 5PCAM Aux Pt X 6PCAM Aux Pt X 7PCAM Aux Pt X 8PCAM Aux Pt X 9PCAM Aux PtX 10PCAM Aux PtX 11PCAM Aux PtX 12PCAM Aux PtX 13PCAM Aux PtX 14PCAM Aux PtX 15755Position Camming Auxiliary Point X 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15Provides x-coordinate value for CAM point in the auxiliary CAM profile.Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+220000000.00RW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-130 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNo.144214441446144814501452145414561458146014621464146614681470NameDescription755755755755755755755755755755755755755755PCAM Aux Pt Y 1APCAM Aux Pt Y 2PCAM Aux Pt Y 3PCAM Aux Pt Y 4PCAM Aux Pt Y 5PCAM Aux Pt Y 6PCAM Aux Pt Y 7PCAM Aux Pt Y 8PCAM Aux Pt Y 9PCAM Aux PtY 10PCAM Aux PtY 11PCAM Aux PtY 12PCAM Aux PtY 13PCAM Aux PtY 14PCAM Aux PtY 15755Position Camming Auxiliary Point Y 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15Provides y-coordinate value for CAM point in the auxiliary CAM profile.1471 755 PCAM StatusPosition Camming StatusIndicates status of position CAM logic.ValuesDefault: 0.00Min/Max: –/+220000000.00Read-WriteData TypeRW RealAPPLICATIONSCammingOptionsReservedReservedReservedCndtnl HoldUnidirectionReref Pos InOffset EnAlt SlopeAux Cam EnReverseY OutReverseX InStartIn CamPersist ModeContins ModeSingle ModeDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0Bit 0 “Single Mode” – Position CAM is in single step mode.Bit 1 “Contins Mode” – Position CAM is in continuous mode.Bit 2 “Persist Mode” – Position CAM is in persistent mode.Bit 3 “In Cam” – X-axis is in range of defined profile.Bit 4 “Start” – Position CAM has started.Bit 5 “ReverseX In” – X-axis input is reversed.Bit 6 “ReverseY Out” – Y-axis output is reversed.Bit 7 “Aux Cam En” – Auxiliary CAM profile is in use.Bit 8 “Alt Slope” – Alternated slope is in use.Bit 9 “Offset En” – X-axis offset is enabled.Bit 10 “Reref Pos In” – X-position input is re-referencing.Bit 11 “Unidirection” – Position CAM is in unidirectional mode.Bit 12 “Cndtnl Hold” – Conditional integrator hold is in use.1472 755 PCAM Vel OutPosition Camming Velocity OutputIndicates output velocity in per unit. The value is connected to the speedregulator.1473 755 PCAM Psn OutPosition Camming Position OutputIndicates output position. The value is connected to the position regulator.1474 755 DI PCAM StartDigital Input Position Camming StartSelects the digital input used to start the position camming sequence.0 = Disabled1 = EnabledUnits:Default:Min/Max:HzRPM0.000.00 / P27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 80.00 / P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 8Default: 0.00Min/Max: –/+220000000.00Default: 0.00Min/Max: 0.00 / 159999.15ROROReal32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-131Drive ParameterCross Reference ByNameParam Name Text Parameter #Accel Time 1 535Accel Time 2 536Access Level 301Active Cur Lmt 424Active Vel Fdbk 131Actual Home Psn 737Actv SpTqPs Mode 313Adj Vltg AccTime 753 1140Adj Vltg Command 753 1139Adj Vltg Config 753 1131Adj Vltg DecTime 753 1141Adj Vltg Preset1 753 1142Adj Vltg Preset2 753 1143Adj Vltg Preset3 753 1144Adj Vltg Preset4 753 1145Adj Vltg Preset5 753 1146Adj Vltg Preset6 753 1147Adj Vltg Preset7 753 1148Adj Vltg Ref Hi 753 1134Adj Vltg Ref Lo 753 1135Adj Vltg RefMult 753 1149Adj Vltg Scurve 753 1150Adj Vltg Select 753 1133Adj Vltg Trim Hi 753 1137Adj Vltg Trim Lo 753 1138Adj Vltg TrimPct 753 1151Adj Vltg TrimSel 753 1136Alarm Status A 959Alarm Status B 960AlarmA at Fault 962AlarmB at Fault 963Alt Man Ref AnHi 329Alt Man Ref AnLo 330Alt Man Ref Sel 328Alt Speed Reg BW 648Alt Speed Reg Ki 650Alt Speed Reg Kp 649Alt Vel Fdbk Sel 128Alt Vel FdbkFltr 129Alt Vel Feedback 130AltSpdErr FltrBW 651Anlg In Loss Sts 753 257Anlg In Sqrt 753 256Anlg In Type 753 255Anlg In0 Filt BW 753 266Anlg In0 Filt Gn 753 265Anlg In0 Hi 753 261Anlg In0 Lo 753 262Param Name Text Parameter #Anlg In0 LssActn 753 263Anlg In0 Raw Val 753 264Anlg In0 Value 753 260Anlg Out Abs 753 271Anlg Out Type 753 270Anlg Out0 Data 753 277Anlg Out0 DataHi 753 278Anlg Out0 DataLo 753 279Anlg Out0 Hi 753 280Anlg Out0 Lo 753 281Anlg Out0 Sel 753 275Anlg Out0 Stpt 753 276Anlg Out0 Val 753 282At Limit Status 945Auto Mask 325Auto Retry Fault 347Auto Rstrt Delay 349Auto Rstrt Tries 348Autotune 70Autotune Torque 71Aux Vel Fdbk Sel 132Aux Vel FdbkFltr 133Aux Vel Feedback 134Brake Off Adj 1 402Brake Off Adj 2 403Break Frequency 63Break Voltage 62Brk Alarm Travel 755 1109Brk Release Time 755 1107Brk Set Time 755 1108Brk Slip Count 755 1110Bus Limit ACR Ki 378Bus Limit ACR Kp 379Bus Limit Kd 377Bus Limit Kp 376Bus Reg Ki 380Bus Reg Kp 381Bus Reg Level 375Bus Reg Lvl Cfg 374Bus Reg Mode A 372Bus Reg Mode B 373Bus Utilization 42Clear Flt Owner 923Commanded SpdRef 2Commanded Trq 4Condition Sts 1 937Counts Per Unit 755 1215Current Limit 1 422Current Limit 2 423Current Limit Kd 428Current Limit Ki 429Current Limit Kp 430Param Name Text Parameter #Current Lmt Sel 421Current Rate Lmt 425Data In A1 895Data In A2 896Data In B1 897Data In B2 898Data In C1 899Data In C2 900Data In D1 901Data In D2 902Data Out A1 905Data Out A2 906Data Out B1 907Data Out B2 908Data Out C1 909Data Out C2 910Data Out D1 911Data Out D2 912Day Stroke Count 753 1205DB Ext Ohms 383DB Ext Watts 384DB ExtPulseWatts 385DB Resistor Type 382DC Brake Ki 396DC Brake Kp 397DC Brake Level 394DC Brake Lvl Sel 393DC Brake Time 395DC Brk Vd Fltr 399DC Brk Vq Fltr 398DC Bus Mem Reset 464DC Bus Memory 12DC Bus Volts 11Dec Inhibit Actn 409Decel Time 1 537Decel Time 2 538Delayed Spd Ref 755 139DI Abort Profile 755 1220DI Abort Step 755 1219DI Accel 2 179DI Aux Fault 157DI BusReg Mode B 186DI Clear Fault 156DI Coast Stop 160DI Cur Lmt Stop 159DI Decel 2 180DI Enable 155DI Fiber SyncEna 753 1129DI Fiber TravDis 753 1130DI Find Home 732DI FloatMicroPsn 755 1102DI Fwd Dec Limit 197PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-132 Programming and ParametersParam Name Text Parameter #DI Fwd End Limit 196DI Fwd Reverse 162DI Hold Step 1218DI Indx Step 772DI Indx StepPrst 774DI Indx StepRev 773DI Jog 1 166DI Jog 1 Forward 167DI Jog 1 Reverse 168DI Jog 2 169DI Jog 2 Forward 170DI Jog 2 Reverse 171DI ManRef AnlgHi 564DI ManRef AnlgLo 565DI ManRef Sel 563DI Manual Ctrl 172DI MOP Dec 178DI MOP Inc 177DI NHdwr OvrTrvl 201DI OL Home Limit 734DI PCAM Start 755 1474DI PHdwr OvrTrvl 200DI PID Enable 191DI PID Hold 192DI PID Invert 194DI PID Reset 193DI Prchrg Seal 190DI Precharge 189DI PumpOff Disbl 753 1206DI Pwr Loss 188DI PwrLoss ModeB 187DI Redefine Psn 733DI Rev Dec Limit 199DI Rev End Limit 198DI Run 163DI Run Forward 164DI Run Reverse 165DI Speed Sel 0 173DI Speed Sel 1 174DI Speed Sel 2 175DI SpTqPs Sel 0 181DI SpTqPs Sel 1 182DI Start 161DI Stop 158DI Stop Mode B 185DI StrtStep Sel0 755 1222DI StrtStep Sel1 755 1223DI StrtStep Sel2 755 1224DI StrtStep Sel3 755 1225DI StrtStep Sel4 755 1226DI Torque StptA 195DI Vel Override 755 1221Param Name Text Parameter #Dig In Filt 753 223Dig In Filt Mask 753 222Dig Out Invert 753 226Dig Out Setpoint 753 227Dig Out Sts 753 225Digital In Cfg 753 150Digital In Sts 753 220Dir Owner 922Direction Mode 308DPI Logic Rslt 882DPI Ramp Rslt 881DPI Ref Rslt 880Drive Logic Rslt 879Drive OL Count 940Drive OL Mode 420Drive Ramp Rslt 753 884Drive Ref Rslt 753 883Drive Status 1 935Drive Status 2 936Drive Temp C 944Drive Temp Pct 943Droop RPM at FLA 620Duty Rating 306Econ AccDec Ki 48Econ AccDec Kp 49Econ At Ref Ki 47Elapsed kWH 14Elapsed MWH 13Elapsed Run Time 15Encdrlss AngComp 78Encdrlss VltComp 79Ext Ramped Ref 755 700Fast Braking Ki 400Fast Braking Kp 401Fault Amps 957Fault Bus Volts 958Fault Frequency 956Fault Status A 952Fault Status B 953Fiber Control 753 1120Fiber Status 753 1121Filtered Spd Ref 595Filtered SpdFdbk 640Filtered Trq Ref 689Final Speed Ref 597Find Home Ramp 736Find Home Speed 735Float Tolerance 755 1111Flux Braking En 388Flux Braking Ki 390Flux Braking Kp 391Flux Braking Lmt 389Param Name Text Parameter #Flux Cur Fdbk 6Flux Current Ref 75Flux Down Ki 45Flux Down Kp 46Flux Reg Enable 103Flux Reg Ki 104Flux Reg Kp 105Flux Up Enable 43Flux Up Time 44FlyingStart Mode 356FS Excitation Ki 361FS Excitation Kp 362FS Gain 357FS Ki 358FS Msrmnt CurLvl 364FS Reconnect Dly 363FS Speed Reg Ki 359FS Speed Reg Kp 360Gearbox Limit 753 1181Gearbox Rating 753 1182Gearbox Ratio 753 1183Gearbox Sheave 753 1184Ground Warn Actn 466Ground Warn Lvl 467Homing Control 731Homing Status 730HSFan Derate 488HSFan ElpsdLife 490HSFan EventActn 493HSFan EventLevel 492HSFan RemainLife 491HSFan ResetLog 494HSFan TotalLife 489IA LdObs Delay 755 709Id Lo FreqCur Kp 431IGBT Temp C 942IGBT Temp Pct 941In Pos Psn Band 726In Pos Psn Dwell 727InAdp LdObs Mode 755 704Inert Comp LPFBW 755 698InertAdptFltrBW 755 710Inertia Acc Gain 755 696Inertia Adapt BW 755 705Inertia Comp Out 755 699Inertia CompMode 755 695Inertia Dec Gain 755 697Inertia Test Lmt 77InertiaAdaptGain 755 706InertiaTrqAdd 755 708InFan Derate 495InFan ElpsdLife 497PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-133Param Name Text Parameter #InFan EventActn 500InFan EventLevel 499InFan RemainLife 498InFan ResetLog 501InFan TotalLife 496InPhase Loss Lvl 463InPhase LossActn 462Iq Lo FreqCur Kp 432IR Voltage Drop 73Ixo Voltage Drop 74Jerk Gain 433Jog Acc Dec Time 539Jog Owner 921Jog Speed 1 556Jog Speed 2 557Language 302Last Fault Code 951Last StartSource 931Last Stop Source 932Last StrtInhibit 934LdPsn Fdbk Div 826LdPsn Fdbk Mult 825Limited Spd Ref 593Limited Trq Ref 690Load Estimate 755 707Load Loss Action 441Load Loss Level 442Load Loss Time 443Load Observer BW 755 711Load Psn FdbkSel 755 136Logic Mask 324Logic Mask Act 886Manual Cmd Mask 326Manual Owner 924Manual Preload 331Manual Ref Mask 327Max Fwd Speed 520Max Rev Speed 521Max Rod Speed 753 1175Max Rod Torque 753 1176Max Traverse 753 1125Maximum Freq 37Maximum Voltage 36MchBrngElpsdLife 512MchBrngEventActn 515MchBrngEventLvl 514MchBrngRemainLif 513MchBrngResetLog 516MchBrngTotalLife 511MchLube EventLvl 518MchLubeElpsdHrs 517MchLubeEventActn 519Param Name Text Parameter #MicroPsnScalePct 755 1112Min Adj Voltage 753 1152Min Fwd Speed 522Min Rev Speed 523Min Rod Speed 753 1177Minor Flt Cfg 950MOP High Limit 561MOP Low Limit 562MOP Rate 560MOP Reference 558Motor Ctrl Mode 35Motor NP Amps 26Motor NP Hertz 27Motor NP Power 30Motor NP RPM 28Motor NP Volts 25Motor OL Actn 410Motor Poles 31Motor Power Lmt 427Motor Sheave 753 1178Mtr NP Pwr Units 29Mtr OL Alarm Lvl 412Mtr OL at Pwr Up 411Mtr OL Counts 418Mtr OL Factor 413Mtr OL Hertz 414Mtr OL Reset Lvl 415Mtr OL Trip Time 419Mtr Options Cfg 40Mtr Psn Fdbk Sel 135Mtr Vel Fdbk 3MtrBrng ResetLog 507MtrBrngElpsdLife 503MtrBrngEventActn 506MtrBrngEventLvl 505MtrBrngRemainLif 504MtrBrngTotalLife 502MtrLubeElpsdHrs 508MtrLubeEventActn 510MtrLubeEventLvl 509MtrOL Reset Time 416Neg Torque Limit 671Notch Fltr Atten 688Notch Fltr Freq 687OilWell Pump Cfg 753 1179Open Loop Fdbk 137Out PhaseLossLvl 445OutPhaseLossActn 444Output Current 7Output Frequency 1Output Power 9Output Powr Fctr 10Param Name Text Parameter #Output Voltage 8Overspeed Limit 524P Jump 1126PCAM Aux EndPnt 755 1439PCAM Aux Pt X 1…15 755 1441…1469PCAM Aux Pt Y 1…15 755 1442…1470PCAM Aux Types 755 1440PCAM Control 755 1390PCAM Main EndPnt 755 1405PCAM Main Pt X 0…15 755 1407…1437PCAM Main Pt Y 0…15 755 1408…1438PCAM Main Types 755 1406PCAM Mode 755 1391PCAM Psn Ofst 755 1394PCAM Psn Out 755 1473PCAM Psn Select 755 1392PCAM Psn Stpt 755 1393PCAM PsnOfst Eps 755 1395PCAM Scale X 755 1397PCAM ScaleY Sel 755 1399PCAM ScaleYSetPt 755 1400PCAM Slope Begin 755 1403PCAM Slope End 755 1404PCAM Span X 755 1396PCAM Span Y 755 1398PCAM Status 755 1471PCAM Vel Out 755 1472PCAM VelScaleSel 755 1401PCAM VelScaleSP 755 1402PCP Pump Sheave 753 1180Pct Cycle Torque 753 1198Pct Drop Torque 753 1200Pct Lift Torque 753 1199Peak 1 Change 755 1040Peak 2 Change 755 1045Peak1 Cfg 755 1039Peak2 Cfg 755 1044PeakDetect1 Out 755 1041PeakDetect2 Out 755 1046Phase Delay Comp 108PID Cfg 1065PID Control 1066PID Deadband 1083PID Deriv Time 1088PID Error Meter 1092PID FBLoss SpSel 1075PID FBLoss TqSel 1076PID Fdbk 1077PID Fdbk AnlgHi 1073PID Fdbk AnlgLo 1074PID Fdbk Meter 1091PID Fdbk Mult 1078PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-134 Programming and ParametersParam Name Text Parameter #PID Fdbk Sel 1072PID Int Time 1087PID Lower Limit 1082PID LP Filter BW 1084PID Output Meter 1093PID Output Mult 1080PID Output Sel 1079PID Preload 1085PID Prop Gain 1086PID Ref AnlgHi 1068PID Ref AnlgLo 1069PID Ref Meter 1090PID Ref Mult 1071PID Ref Sel 1067PID Setpoint 1070PID Status 1089PID Upper Limit 1081PkDtct Stpt Dint 755 1036PkDtct Stpt Real 755 1035PkDtct1 In Sel 755 1037PkDtct1PresetSel 755 1038PkDtct2 In Sel 755 1042PkDtct2PresetSel 755 1043PLL BW 755 801PLL Control 755 795PLL Enc Out 755 809PLL Enc Out Adv 755 810PLL EPR Input 755 804PLL EPR Output 755 811PLL Ext Spd Sel 755 796PLL Ext Spd Stpt 755 797PLL Ext SpdScale 755 798PLL LPFilter BW 755 802PLL Psn Out Fltr 755 806PLL Psn Ref Sel 755 799PLL Psn Stpt 755 800PLL Rvls Input 755 805PLL Rvls Output 755 812PLL Speed Out 755 807PLL Speed OutAdv 755 808PLL Virt Enc RPM 755 803PM AltEnc Offset 755 82PM CEMF Voltage 755 86PM Cfg 755 80PM Dir Test Cur 755 93PM IR Voltage 755 87PM IXd Voltage 755 89PM IXq Voltage 755 88PM OfstTst CRamp 755 84PM OfstTst Cur 755 83PM OfstTst FRamp 755 85PM PriEnc Offset 755 81Param Name Text Parameter #PM Vqs Reg Ki 755 92PM Vqs Reg Kp 755 91Port 1 Reference 871Port 2 Reference 872Port 3 Reference 873Port 4 Reference 874Port 5 Reference 875Port 6 Reference 876Port Mask Act 885Port13 Reference 755 877Port14 Reference 878Pos Torque Limit 670Position Control 721Power Loss Actn 449PowerUp Delay 346Prchrg Control 321Prchrg Delay 322Prchrg Err Cfg 323PredMaint Reset 472PredMaint Rst En 471PredMaint Status 469PredMaintAmbTemp 470PReg Neg Int Lmt 841PReg Neg Spd Lmt 845PReg Pos Int Lmt 840PReg Pos Spd Lmt 844Preset Speed 1 571Preset Speed 2 572Preset Speed 3 573Preset Speed 4 574Preset Speed 5 575Preset Speed 6 576Preset Speed 7 577Pri Vel Fdbk Sel 125Pri Vel FdbkFltr 126Pri Vel Feedback 127Prof DI Invert 755 1217Profile Command 755 1213Profile Status 755 1210ProfVel Override 755 1216Psn Actual 836Psn Command 723Psn Direct Ref 767Psn Direct Stpt 766Psn EGR Div 817Psn EGR Mult 816Psn Error 835Psn Fdbk 847Psn Load Actual 755 837Psn Offset 1 821Psn Offset 1 Sel 820Psn Offset 2 823Param Name Text Parameter #Psn Offset 2 Sel 822Psn Offset Vel 824Psn Out Fltr BW 834Psn Out Fltr Sel 832Psn Out FltrGain 833Psn Ref EGR Out 815Psn Ref Select 765Psn Reg Droop 846Psn Reg Ki 838Psn Reg Kp 839Psn Reg Status 724Psn Selected Ref 722PsnNtchFltrDepth 831PsnNtchFltrFreq 830PsnReg IntgrlOut 842PsnReg Spd Out 843PsnWatch1 DtctIn 755 746PsnWatch1 Select 755 745PsnWatch1 Stpt 755 747PsnWatch2 DtctIn 755 749PsnWatch2 Select 755 748PsnWatch2 Stpt 755 750PTC Cfg 753 250PTC Status 753 251PTP Accel Time 781PTP Command 784PTP Control 770PTP Decel Time 782PTP EGR Div 790PTP EGR Mult 789PTP Feedback 777PTP Fwd Vel Lmt 785PTP Index Preset 779PTP Mode 771PTP PsnRefStatus 720PTP Ref Scale 778PTP Ref Sel 775PTP Reference 776PTP Rev Vel Lmt 786PTP S Curve 787PTP Setpoint 780PTP Speed FwdRef 783PTP Vel Override 788Pump Cycle Store 753 1192Pump Off Action 753 1189Pump Off Config 753 1187Pump Off Control 753 1190Pump Off Count 753 1203Pump Off Level 753 1195Pump Off Setup 753 1188Pump Off Speed 753 1196Pump Off Status 753 1191PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-135Param Name Text Parameter #Pump Off Time 753 1197Pump OffSleepLvl 753 1207PumpOff SleepCnt 753 1204PWM Frequency 38Pwr Loss A Level 451Pwr Loss A Time 452Pwr Loss B Level 454Pwr Loss B Time 455Pwr Loss Mode A 450Pwr Loss Mode B 453PwrLoss RT ACRKi 459PwrLoss RT ACRKp 458PwrLoss RT BusKd 457PwrLoss RT BusKp 456Ramped Spd Ref 594Rated Amps 21Rated kW 22Rated Volts 20Ref Select Owner 925Regen Power Lmt 426Reset Meters 336RO PredMaint Sts 753 285RO0 ElapsedLife 753 289RO0 Level 753 232RO0 Level CmpSts 753 233RO0 Level Sel 753 231RO0 LifeEvntActn 753 292RO0 LifeEvntLvl 753 291RO0 Load Amps 753 287RO0 Load Type 753 286RO0 Off Time 753 235RO0 On Time 753 234RO0 RemainLife 753 290RO0 Sel 753 230RO0 TotalLife 753 288Rod Speed 753 1165Rod Speed Cmd 753 1167Rod Torque 753 1166Run Boost 61S Curve Accel 540S Curve Decel 541Safety Port Sts 946Save MOP Ref 559Selected Spd Ref 592Selected Trq Ref 685Servo Lock Gain 755 642Set Top ofStroke 753 1193SFAdapt CnvrgLmt 116SFAdapt CnvrgLvl 115SFAdapt SlewLmt 113SFAdapt SlewRate 114Shear Pin 1 Actn 435Param Name Text Parameter #Shear Pin 1 Time 437Shear Pin 2 Actn 438Shear Pin 2 Time 440Shear Pin Cfg 434Shear Pin1 Level 436Shear Pin2 Level 439Simulator Fdbk 138Skip Speed 1 526Skip Speed 2 527Skip Speed 3 528Skip Speed Band 529SLAT Dwell Time 315SLAT Err Stpt 314Sleep Level 352Sleep Time 353Sleep Wake Mode 350SleepWake RefSel 351Slip Adapt Iqs 112Slip Comp BW 622Slip Reg Enable 100Slip Reg Ki 101Slip Reg Kp 102Slip RPM at FLA 621Spd Err Fltr BW 644Spd Loop Damping 653Spd Options Ctrl 635Spd Ref A AnlgHi 547Spd Ref A AnlgLo 548Spd Ref A Mult 549Spd Ref A Sel 545Spd Ref A Stpt 546Spd Ref B AnlgHi 552Spd Ref B AnlgLo 553Spd Ref B Mult 554Spd Ref B Sel 550Spd Ref B Stpt 551Spd Ref Filter 588Spd Ref Fltr BW 589Spd Ref FltrGain 590Spd Ref Scale 555Spd Ref Sel Sts 591Spd Reg Int Out 654Spd Reg Neg Lmt 656Spd Reg Pos Lmt 655Spd Trim Source 617SpdBand Intgrtr 755 1106SpdReg AntiBckup 643SpdTrimPrcRefSrc 616SpdTrqPsn Mode A 309SpdTrqPsn Mode B 310SpdTrqPsn Mode C 311SpdTrqPsn Mode D 312Param Name Text Parameter #Speed Comp Gain 666Speed Comp Out 667Speed Comp Sel 665Speed Dev Band 755 1105Speed Error 641Speed Rate Ref 596Speed Ref Source 930Speed Reg BW 636Speed Reg Ki 647Speed Reg Kp 645Speed Reg Max Kp 646Speed Units 300SReg FB Fltr BW 639SReg FB Fltr Sel 637SReg FB FltrGain 638SReg OutFltr BW 659SReg OutFltr Sel 657SReg OutFltrGain 658SReg Output 660SReg Trq Preset 652Stab Angle Gain 52Stab Volt Gain 51Stability Filter 50Start Acc Boost 60Start At PowerUp 345Start Inhibits 933Start Owner 920Status1 at Fault 954Status2 at Fault 955Step 1…16 Accel 755 1232…1382Step 1…16 Action 755 1238…1388Step 1…16 Batch 755 1236…1386Step 1…16 Decel 755 1233…1383Step 1…16 Dig In 755 1239…1389Step 1…16 Dwell 755 1235…1385Step 1…16 Next 755 1237…1387Step 1…16 Type 755 1230…1380Step 1…16 Value 755 1234…1384Step 1…16 Velocity 755 1231…1381Stop Mode A 370Stop Mode B 371Stop Owner 919Stroke Per Min 753 1202Stroke Pos Count 753 1201SVC Boost Filter 64Sync Time 753 1122Testpoint Fval 1 971Testpoint Fval 2 975Testpoint Fval 3 979Testpoint Fval 4 983Testpoint Lval 1 972Testpoint Lval 2 976PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-136 Programming and ParametersParam Name Text Parameter #Testpoint Lval 3 980Testpoint Lval 4 984Testpoint Sel 1 970Testpoint Sel 2 974Testpoint Sel 3 978Testpoint Sel 4 982TO0 Level 753 242TO0 Level CmpSts 753 243TO0 Level Sel 753 241TO0 Off Time 753 245TO0 On Time 753 244TO0 Sel 753 240TorqAlarm Action 753 1168TorqAlarm Config 753 1169TorqAlarm Dwell 753 1170TorqAlarm Level 753 1171TorqAlarm TOActn 753 1173TorqAlm Timeout 753 1172Torque Cur Fdbk 5Torque Setpoint 753 1194Torque Step 686Total Gear Ratio 753 1174Total Inertia 76Traverse Dec 1124Traverse Inc 1123Trim Ref A Sel 600Trim Ref A Stpt 601Trim Ref B Sel 604Trim Ref B Stpt 605Trim RefA AnlgHi 602Trim RefA AnlgLo 603Trim RefB AnlgHi 606Trim RefB AnlgLo 607TrmPct RefA AnHi 610TrmPct RefA AnLo 611TrmPct RefA Sel 608TrmPct RefA Stpt 609TrmPct RefB AnHi 614TrmPct RefB AnLo 615TrmPct RefB Sel 612TrmPct RefB Stpt 613Trq Adapt En 107Trq Adapt Speed 106Trq Comp Mode 109Trq Comp Mtring 110Trq Comp Regen 111Trq Lmt SlewRate 755 1104Trq Prove Cfg 755 1100Trq Prove Setup 755 1101Trq Prove Status 755 1103Trq Ref A AnlgHi 677Trq Ref A AnlgLo 678Param Name Text Parameter #Trq Ref A Mult 679Trq Ref A Sel 675Trq Ref A Stpt 676Trq Ref B AnlgHi 682Trq Ref B AnlgLo 683Trq Ref B Mult 684Trq Ref B Sel 680Trq Ref B Stpt 681Type 2 Alarms 961UnderVltg Action 460UnderVltg Level 461Units Traveled 755 1212User Home Psn 738VCL Cur Reg BW 95VCL Cur Reg Ki 97VCL Cur Reg Kp 96VEncdls FReg Ki 99VEncdls FReg Kp 98VHz Curve 65VHzSV Spd Reg Ki 664VHzSV Spd Reg Kp 663VHzSV SpdTrimReg 623Virtual Enc EPR 755 141Virtual Enc Psn 755 142Virtual EncDelay 755 140Voltage Class 305Wake Level 354Wake Time 355Write Mask Act 887Write Mask Cfg 888Zero Position 725Zero Speed Limit 525ZeroSpdFloatTime 755 1113PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-137I/O Module ParametersFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type1 Dig In StsDigital Input StatusStatus of the digital inputs.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedInput 5Input 4Input 3Input 2Input 1Input 0Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Input Not Activated1 = Input ActivatedHOST GROUPSDigital Inputs2 Dig In Filt MaskDigital Input Filter MaskFilters the selected digital input.Important: Only used by I/O Module models 20-750-2263C-1R2T and 20-750-2262C-2R.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedInput 5Input 4Input 3Input 2Input 1Input 0Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Input Not Filtered1 = Input Filtered3 Dig In FiltDigital Input FilterSets the amount of filtering on the digital inputs.Important: Only used by I/O Module models 20-750-2263C-1R2T and20-750-2262C-2R.Units: mSDefault: 4Min/Max: 2 / 10RW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-138 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNameNo. Description5 Dig Out StsDigital Output StatusStatus of the digital outputs.ValuesRead-WriteData TypeOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedTrans Out 1 (2)Trans Out 0 (1)Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0Relay Out 00 = Output De-energized1 = Output Energized(1) Bit 1 = “Trans Out 0” for I/O Module model 20-750-2263C-1R2T= “Relay Out 1” for I/O Module models 20-750-2262C-2R and 20-750-2262D-2R(2) Bit 2 is only used by I/O Module 20-750-2263C-1R2T6 Dig Out InvertDigital Output InvertInverts the selected digital output.HOST GROUPSDigital OutputsOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedTrans Out 1 (2)Trans Out 0 (1)Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0(1) Bit 1 = “Trans Out 0” for I/O Module model 20-750-2263C-1R2T= “Relay Out 1” for I/O Module models 20-750-2262C-2R and 20-750-2262D-2R(2) Bit 2 is only used by I/O Module 20-750-2263C-1R2T7 Dig Out SetpointDigital Output SetpointControls Relay or Transistor Outputs when chosen as the source. Can be used to control outputs from a communication device using DataLinks.Relay Out 00 = Output Not Inverted1 = Output InvertedOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedTrans Out 1 (2)Trans Out 0 (1)Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0Relay Out 00 = Output De-energized1 = Output Energized(1) Bit 1 = “Trans Out 0” for I/O Module model 20-750-2263C-1R2T= “Relay Out 1” for I/O Module models 20-750-2262C-2R and 20-750-2262D-2R(2) Bit 2 is only used by I/O Module 20-750-2263C-1R2T10 RO0 SelRelay Output 0 SelectSelects the source that will energize the relay output.Any status parameter bit can be used as an output source. For example P935[Drive Status 1] bit 7 “Faulted”.11 RO0 Level SelRelay Output 0 Level SelectSelects the source of the level that will be compared.12 RO0 LevelRelay Output 0 LevelSets the level compare value.Default: 0.00 (Disabled)Min/Max: 0.00 / 159999.15Default: 0 (Disabled)Min/Max: 0 / 159999Default: 0.0Min/Max: –/+1000000.0RW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-139FileGroupRead-WriteData TypeNameNo. DescriptionValues13 RO0 Level CmpStsRelay Output 0 Level Compare StatusStatus of the level compare, and a possible source for a relay or transistor output. Relay Output X Select or Transistor Output X Select must have thisselected to energize the output. Can be used without a physical output as status information only.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedGrt Than EquLess ThanDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueHOST GROUPSDigital OutputsBit 0 “Less Than” – Level source is less than the level value.Bit 1 “Grt Than Equ” – Level source is greater than or equal to the level value.14 RO0 On TimeRelay Output 0 On TimeSets the “ON Delay” time for the digital outputs. This is the time between theoccurrence of a condition and activation of the relay.15 RO0 Off TimeRelay Output 0 Off TimeSets the “OFF Delay” time for the digital outputs. This is the time between thedisappearance of a condition and de-activation of the relay.20 RO1 SelRelay Output 1 Select – I/O Module model 20-750-2262C-2R or20-750-2262D-2R is installed.TO0 SelTransistor Output 0 Select – I/O Module model 20-750-2263C-1R2T is installed.Selects the source that will energize the relay or transistor output.Any status parameter bit can be used as an output source. For example P935[Drive Status 1] bit 7 “Faulted”.21 RO1 Level SelRelay Output 1 Level Select – I/O Module model 20-750-2262C-2R or20-750-2262D-2R is installed.TO0 Level SelTransistor Output 0 Level Select – I/O Module model 20-750-2263C-1R2T isinstalled.Selects the source of the level that will be compared.22 RO1 LevelRelay Output 1 Level – I/O Module model 20-750-2262C-2R or20-750-2262D-2R is installed.TO0 LevelTransistor Output 0 Level – I/O Module model 20-750-2263C-1R2T is installed.Sets the level compare value.Units: SecsDefault: 0.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 600.0Units: SecsDefault: 0.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 600.0Default: 0 (Disabled)Min/Max: 0 / 15999915Default: 0 (Disabled)Min/Max: 0 / 159999Default: 0.0Min/Max: –/+1000000.0RW RealRW RealRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW Real23 RO1 Level CmpStsRelay Output 1 Level Compare Status – I/O Module model 20-750-2262C-2R or 20-750-2262D-2R is installed.TO0 Level CmpStsTransistor Output 0 Level Compare Status – I/O Module model 20-750-2263C-1R2T is installed.Status of the level compare, and a possible source for a relay or transistor output. Relay Output X Select or Transistor Output X Select must have thisselected to energize the output. Can be used without a physical output as status information only.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedGrt Than EquLess ThanDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueBit 0 “Less Than” – Level source is less than the level value.Bit 1 “Grt Than Equ” – Level source is greater than or equal to the level value.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-140 Programming and ParametersFileHOST GROUPSGroupDigital OutputsNameNo. Description24 RO1 On TimeRelay Output 1 On Time – I/O Module model 20-750-2262C-2R or20-750-2262D-2R is installed.TO0 On TimeTransistor Output 0 On Time – I/O Module model 20-750-2263C-1R2T isinstalled.Sets the “ON Delay” time for the digital outputs. This is the time between theoccurrence of a condition and activation of the relay or transistor.25 RO1 Off TimeRelay Output 1 Off Time – I/O Module model 20-750-2262C-2R or20-750-2262D-2R is installed.TO0 Off TimeTransistor Output 0 Off Time – I/O Module model 20-750-2263C-1R2T isinstalled.Sets the “OFF Delay” time for the digital outputs. This is the time between thedisappearance of a condition and de-activation of the relay or transistor.30 TO1 SelTransistor Output 1 SelectSelects the source that will energize the transistor output.Any status parameter bit can be used as an output source. For example P935[Drive Status 1] bit 7 “Faulted”.Important: Only used by I/O Module model 20-750-2263C-1R2T.31 TO1 Level SelTransistor Output 1 Level SelectSelects the source of the level that will be compared.Important: Only used by I/O Module model 20-750-2263C-1R2T.32 TO1 LevelTransistor Output 1 LevelSets the level compare value.Important: Only used by I/O Module model 20-750-2263C-1R2T.ValuesUnits: SecsDefault: 0.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 600.0Units: SecsDefault: 0.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 600.0Default: 0 (Disabled)Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15Default: 0 (Disabled)Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15Default: 0.0Min/Max: –/+1000000.0Read-WriteData TypeRW RealRW RealRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW Real33 TO1 Level CmpStsTransistor Output 1 Level Compare StatusStatus of the level compare, and a possible source for a transistor output. Transistor Output X Select must have this selected to energize the output.Can be used without a physical output as status information only.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedGrt Than EquLess ThanDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueBit 0 “Less Than” – Level source is less than the level value.Bit 1 “Grt Than Equ” – Level source is greater than or equal to the level value.Important: Only used by I/O Module model 20-750-2263C-1R2T.34 TO1 On TimeTransistor Output 1 On TimeSets the “ON Delay” time for the digital outputs. This is the time between theoccurrence of a condition and activation of the transistor.Important: Only used by I/O Module model 20-750-2263C-1R2T.35 TO1 Off TimeTransistor Output 1 Off TimeSets the “OFF Delay” time for the digital outputs. This is the time between thedisappearance of a condition and de-activation of the transistor.Important: Only used by I/O Module model 20-750-2263C-1R2T.Units: SecsDefault: 0.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 600.0Units: SecsDefault: 0.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 600.0RW RealRW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-141FileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type40 PTC CfgPositive Temperature Coefficient ConfigurationSets the action that will be taken when the PTC is not Ok.“Ignore” (0) – No action is taken“Alarm” (1) – Alarm occurs“Flt Minor” (2) – Minor Fault occurs if enabled, otherwise Fault Coast Stop“FltCoastStop” (3) – Fault Coast Stop occurs“Flt RampStop” (4) – Fault Ramp Stop occurs“Flt CL Stop” (5) – Fault Current Limit Stop occursDefault:Options:0 = “Ignore”0 = “Ignore”1 = “Alarm”2 = “Flt Minor”3 = “FltCoastStop”4 = “Flt RampStop”5 = “Flt CL Stop”RW 32-bitIntegerHOST GROUPSMotor PTC41 PTC StsPositive Temperature Coefficient StatusStatus of the PTC.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedOver TempPTC ShortPTC OkDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueBit 0 “PTC Ok” – PTC is OKBit 1 “PTC Short” – PTC is ShortedBit 2 “Over Temp” – PTC is indicating over temperature42 PTC Raw ValuePositive Temperature Coefficient Raw ValueDisplays the value of the PTC.Units: VACDefault: 0Min/Max: 0 / 10RORealFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type45 Anlg In TypeAnalog Input TypeStatus of the analog input mode set by the option jumpers.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedAnalog 1Analog 0HOST GROUPSAnalog InputsDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 046 Anlg In SqrtAnalog Input Square RootEnables/disables the square root function for each input.0 = Voltage Mode1 = Current ModeOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedAnalog 1Analog 0Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Square Root Disabled1 = Square Root EnabledPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-142 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type47 Anlg In Loss StsAnalog Input Loss StatusStatus of the analog input loss.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedLoss 1Loss 0LossDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Loss not Present1 = Loss PresentHOST GROUPSAnalog InputsBit 0 “Loss” – Indicates loss of one or both inputs.50 Anlg In0 ValueAnalog Input 0 ValueValue of the Analog input after filter, square root, and loss action.51 Anlg In0 HiAnalog Input 0 HighSets the highest input value to the analog input scaling block.52 Anlg In0 LoAnalog Input 0 LowSets the lowest input value to the analog input scaling block.53 Anlg In0 LssActnAnalog Input 0 Loss ActionSelects drive action when an analog signal loss is detected. Signal loss is definedas an analog signal less than 1V or 2mA. The signal loss event ends and normaloperation resumes when the input signal level is greater than or equal to 1.5V or3mA.“Ignore” (0) – No action is taken“Alarm” (1) – Alarm occurs“Flt Minor” (2) – Minor Fault occurs if enabled, otherwise Fault Coast Stop“FltCoastStop” (3) – Fault Coast Stop occurs“Flt RampStop” (4) – Fault Ramp Stop occurs“Flt CL Stop” (5) – Fault Current Limit Stop occurs“Hold Input” (6) – Holds input at last value“Set Input Lo” (7) – Sets input to P52 [Anlg In0 Lo]“Set Input Hi” (8) – Sets input to P51 [Anlg In0 Hi]Units:Default:Min/Max:Units:Default:Min/Max:Units:Default:Min/Max:Default:Options:VoltsmA0.000 Volts0.000 mA–/+10.000 Volts0.000 / 20.000 mAVoltsmA0.000 Volts0.000 mA–/+10.000 Volts0.000 / 20.000 mAVoltsmA0.000 Volts0.000 mA–/+10.000 Volts0.000 / 20.000 mA0 = “Ignore”0 = “Ignore”1 = “Alarm”2 = “Flt Minor”3 = “FltCoastStop”4 = “Flt RampStop”5 = “Flt CL Stop”6 = “Hold Input”7 = “Set Input Lo”8 = “Set Input Hi”RORealRW RealRW RealRW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-143FileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type54 Anlg In0 Raw ValAnalog Input 0 Raw ValueRaw Value of the analog input.Units:Default:Min/Max:VoltsmA0.000 Volts0.000 mA–/+10.000 Volts0.000 / 20.000 mAROReal55 Anlg In0 Filt GnAnalog Input 0 Filter GainSets the analog input filter gain.Default: 1.00Min/Max: –/+5.00RW Real56 Anlg In0 Filt BWAnalog Input 0 Filter BandwidthSets the analog input filter bandwidth.Default: 0.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 500.0RW Real60 Anlg In1 ValueAnalog Input 1 ValueValue of the Analog input after filter, square root, and loss action.Units:Default:Min/Max:VoltsmA0.000 Volts0.000 mA–/+10.000 Volts0.000 / 20.000 mAROReal61 Anlg In1 HiAnalog Input 1 HighSets the highest input value to the analog input scaling block.Units:Default:Min/Max:VoltsmA0.000 Volts0.000 mA–/+10.000 Volts0.000 / 20.000 mARW RealHOST GROUPSAnalog Inputs62 Anlg In1 LoAnalog Input 1 LowSets the lowest input value to the analog input scaling block.63 Anlg In1 LssActnAnalog Input 1 Loss ActionSelects drive action when an analog signal loss is detected. Signal loss is definedas an analog signal less than 1V or 2mA. The signal loss event ends and normaloperation resumes when the input signal level is greater than or equal to 1.5V or3mA.“Ignore” (0) – No action is taken“Alarm” (1) – Alarm occurs“Flt Minor” (2) – Minor Fault occurs if enabled, otherwise Fault Coast Stop“FltCoastStop” (3) – Fault Coast Stop occurs“Flt RampStop” (4) – Fault Ramp Stop occurs“Flt CL Stop” (5) – Fault Current Limit Stop occurs“Hold Input” (6) – Holds input at last value“Set Input Lo” (7) – Sets input to P62 [Anlg In1 Lo]“Set Input Hi” (8) – Sets input to P61 [Anlg In1 Hi]Units:Default:Min/Max:Default:Options:VoltsmA0.000 Volts0.000 mA–/+10.000 Volts0.000 / 20.000 mA0 = “Ignore”0 = “Ignore”1 = “Alarm”2 = “Flt Minor”3 = “FltCoastStop”4 = “Flt RampStop”5 = “Flt CL Stop”6 = “Hold Input”7 = “Set Input Lo”8 = “Set Input Hi”RW RealRW 32-bitInteger64 Anlg In1 Raw ValAnalog Input 1 Raw ValueRaw Value of the analog input.Units:Default:Min/Max:VoltsmA0.000 Volts0.000 mA–/+10.000 Volts0.000 / 20.000 mAROReal65 Anlg In1 Filt GnAnalog Input 1 Filter GainSets the analog input filter gain.Default: 1.00Min/Max: –/+5.00RW Real66 Anlg In1 Filt BWAnalog Input 1 Filter BandwidthSets the analog input filter bandwidth.Default: 0.0Min/Max: 0.0 / 500.0RW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-144 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type70 Anlg Out TypeAnalog Output TypeSelect the analog output mode for each analog output.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedAnalog 1Analog 0Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Voltage Mode1 = Current Mode71 Anlg Out AbsAnalog Output AbsoluteSelects whether the signed value or absolute value of a parameter is used before being scaled to drive the analog output.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedAnalog 1Analog 0Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition True75 Anlg Out0 SelAnalog Output 0 SelectSelects the source for the analog output.Default: 3Min/Max: 0 / 159999RW 32-bitIntegerHOST GROUPSAnalog Outputs76 Anlg Out0 StptAnalog Output 0 SetpointA possible source for an analog output. Can be used to control an analog outputfrom a communication device using a DataLink. Not affected by analog outputscaling.77 Anlg Out0 DataAnalog Output 0 DataDisplays the value of the source selected by P75 [Anlg Out0 Sel].Units: VACDefault: 0Min/Max: –10/20Default: 0Min/Max: –/+100000RW RealROReal78 Anlg Out0 DataHiAnalog Output 0 Data HighSets the high value for the data range of analog out scale.Default: 1Min/Max: –/+214748000RW Real79 Anlg Out0 DataLoAnalog Output 0 Data LowSets the low value for the data range of analog out scale.Default: 1Min/Max: –/+214748000RW Real80 Anlg Out0 HiAnalog Output 0 HighSets the high value for the analog output value when the data value is at itsmaximum.Units:Default:Min/Max:VoltsmA10.000 Volts20.000 mA–/+10.000 Volts0.000 / 20.000 mARW Real81 Anlg Out0 LoAnalog Output 0 LowSets the low value for the analog output value when the data value is at itsminimum.Units:Default:Min/Max:VoltsmA0.000 Volts0.000 mA–/+10.000 Volts0.000 / 20.000 mARW Real82 Anlg Out0 ValAnalog Output 0 ValueDisplays the analog output value.Units:Default:Min/Max:VoltsmA10.000 Volts20.000 mA–/+10.000 Volts0.000 / 20.000 mARORealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-145FileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type85 Anlg Out1 SelAnalog Output 1 SelectSelects the source for the analog output.Default: 3Min/Max: 0 / 159999RW 32-bitInteger86 Anlg Out1 StptAnalog Output 1 SetpointA possible source for an analog output. Can be used to control an analog outputfrom a communication device using a DataLink. Not affected by analog outputscaling.Units: VACDefault: 0Min/Max: –10 / 20RW Real87 Anlg Out1 DataAnalog Output 1 DataDisplays the value of the source selected by P85 [Anlg Out1 Sel].Default: 0Min/Max: –/+100000ROReal88 Anlg Out1 DataHiAnalog Output 1 Data HighSets the high value for the data range of analog out scale.Default: 1Min/Max: –/+214748000RW RealHOST GROUPSAnalog Outputs89 Anlg Out1 DataLoAnalog Output 1 Data LowSets the low value for the data range of analog out scale.90 Anlg Out1 HiAnalog Output 1 HighSets the high value for the analog output value when the data value is at itsmaximum.Default: 1Min/Max: –/+214748000Units:Default:Min/Max:VoltsmA10.000 Volts20.000 mA–/+10.000 Volts0.000 / 20.000 mARW RealRW Real91 Anlg Out1 LoAnalog Output 1 LowSets the low value for the analog output value when the data value is at itsminimum.Units:Default:Min/Max:VoltsmA0.000 Volts0.000 mA–/+10.000 Volts0.000 / 20.000 mARW Real92 Anlg Out1 ValAnalog Output 1 ValueDisplays the analog output value.Units:Default:Min/Max:VoltsmA10.000 Volts20.000 mA–/+10.000 Volts0.000 / 20.000 mARORealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-146 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type99 PredMaint StsPredictive Maintenance StatusStatus of relay's predictive maintenance.OptionsMasterReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedRelay Out 0 (1)Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0Relay Out 00 = Condition False1 = Condition True(1) Bit 1 = “Relay Out 0” for I/O Module models 20-750-2262C-2R and 20-750-2262D-2R100 RO0 Load TypeRelay Output 0 Load TypeSets the type of load that will be applied to the relay. Must be properly set for thePredictive Maintenance function to predict the relay life.Default:Options:1 = “DC Inductive”0 = “DC Resistive”1 = “DC Inductive”2 = “AC Resistive”3 = “AC Inductive”RW 32-bitIntegerHOST GROUPSPredictive Main101 RO0 Load AmpsRelay Output 0 Load AmpsLoad current that will be applied to the relay contacts. Must be properly set for thePredictive Maintenance function to approximate the relay life.102 RO0 TotalLifeRelay Output 0 Total LifeTotal life cycles of the relay based on programmed load type and amps.103 RO0 ElapsedLifeRelay Output 0 Elapsed LifeNon-resettable, total accumulated cycles of the relay.Units: AmpsDefault: 2.000Min/Max: 0.000 / 2.000Units: CyclDefault: 0Min/Max: 0 / 2147483647Units: CyclDefault: 0Min/Max: 0 / 2147483647RW RealRORO32-bitInteger32-bitInteger104 RO0 RemainLifeRelay Output 0 Remaining LifeThe difference between the Total Life and the Elapsed Life.Units: CyclDefault: 0Min/Max: –/+2147483647RO32-bitInteger105 RO0 LifeEvntLvlRelay Output 0 Life Event LevelSets the percentage of relay life cycles before action is taken.Units: %Default: 80.000Min/Max: 0.000 / 100.000RW Real106 RO0 LifeEvntActnRelay Output 0 Life Event ActionSets the action that will be taken when the percentage of relay life cycles hasbeen reached.“Ignore” (0) – No action is taken“Alarm” (1) – Alarm occurs“Flt Minor” (2) – Minor Fault occurs if enabled, otherwise Fault Coast Stop“FltCoastStop” (3) – Fault Coast Stop occurs“Flt RampStop” (4) – Fault Ramp Stop occurs“Flt CL Stop” (5) – Fault Current Limit Stop occursDefault:Options:1 = “Alarm”0 = “Ignore”1 = “Alarm”2 = “Flt Minor”3 = “FltCoastStop”4 = “Flt RampStop”5 = “Flt CL Stop”RW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-147FileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type110 RO1 Load TypeRelay Output 1 Load TypeSets the type of load that will be applied to the relay. Must be properly set for thePredictive Maintenance function to predict the relay life.Important: Only used by I/O Module models 20-750-2262C-2R and20-750-2262D-2R.Default:Options:1 = “DC Inductive”0 = “DC Resistive”1 = “DC Inductive”2 = “AC Resistive”3 = “AC Inductive”RW 32-bitInteger111 RO1 Load AmpsRelay Output 1 Load AmpsLoad current that will be applied to the relay contacts. Must be properly set for thePredictive Maintenance function to approximate the relay life.Important: Only used by I/O Module models 20-750-2262C-2R and20-750-2262D-2R.Units: AmpsDefault: 2.000Min/Max: 0.000 / 2.000RW Real112 RO1 TotalLifeRelay Output 1 Total LifeTotal life cycles of the relay based on programmed load type and amps.Important: Only used by I/O Module models 20-750-2262C-2R and20-750-2262D-2R.113 RO1 ElapsedLifeRelay Output 1 Elapsed LifeNon-resettable, total accumulated cycles of the relay.Important: Only used by I/O Module models 20-750-2262C-2R and20-750-2262D-2R.114 RO1 RemainLifeRelay Output 1 Remaining LifeThe difference between the Total Life and the Elapsed Life.Important: Only used by I/O Module models 20-750-2262C-2R and20-750-2262D-2R.115 RO1 LifeEvntLvlRelay Output 1 Life Event LevelSets the percentage of relay life cycles before action is taken.Important: Only used by I/O Module models 20-750-2262C-2R and20-750-2262D-2R.116 RO1 LifeEvntActnRelay Output 1 Life Event ActionSets the action that will be taken when the percentage of relay life cycles hasbeen reached.Important: Only used by I/O Module models 20-750-2262C-2R and20-750-2262D-2R.“Ignore” (0) – No action is taken“Alarm” (1) – Alarm occurs“Flt Minor” (2) – Minor Fault occurs if enabled, otherwise Fault Coast Stop“FltCoastStop” (3) – Fault Coast Stop occurs“Flt RampStop” (4) – Fault Ramp Stop occurs“Flt CL Stop” (5) – Fault Current Limit Stop occursUnits: CyclDefault: 0Min/Max: 0 / 2147483647RO32-bitIntegerHOST GROUPSPredictive MainUnits: CyclDefault: 0Min/Max: 0 / 2147483647Units: CyclDefault: 0Min/Max: –/+2147483647RORO32-bitInteger32-bitIntegerUnits: %Default: 80.000Min/Max: 0.000 / 100.000RW RealDefault:Options:1 = “Alarm”0 = “Ignore”1 = “Alarm”2 = “Flt Minor”3 = “FltCoastStop”4 = “Flt RampStop”5 = “Flt CL Stop”RW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-148 Programming and ParametersSafe Speed Monitor ModuleParametersFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type1 PasswordPassword for Lock and Unlock function.Default: N/AMin/Max: 0 / 4,294,967,295ROReal5 Lock StateCommand to lock or unlock the safety option configuration.Default:Options:0 = “Unlock”0 = “Unlock”1 = “Lock”RW Real6 Operating ModeCommand to place the system in Program or Run mode.Default:Options:0 = “Program”0 = “Program”1 = “Run”2 = “Config flt”RW RealHOST GROUPSSecurity7 Reset DefaultsResets safety option to factory defaults.10 Signature IDSafety configuration identifier.13 New Password32-bit configuration password.Default:Options:0 = “No action”0 = “No action”1 = “Reset Fac” (Reset to factorydefaults)Default: N/AMin/Max: 0 / 4,294,967,295Default: N/AMin/Max: 0 / 4,294,967,295RW RealRO RealRW Real17 Password CommandSave new password command.Default:Options:0 = “No action”0 = “No action”1 = “Change PW” (Change Password)2 = “Reset PW” (Reset Password)RW Real18 Security CodeUsed for Reset Password command.Default: N/AMin/Max: 0 / 65,535ROReal19 Vendor PasswordVendor password for Reset Password command.Default: N/AMin/Max: 0 / 65,535RW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-149FileGroupNameNo. Description20 Cascaded ConfigDefines whether the speed monitoring safety option is a single unit or if itoccupies a first, middle, or last position in a multi-axis cascaded system.“Single” (0) - Single Unit System“Milti First” (1) - Cascaded System First Unit“Multi Mid” (2) - Cascaded System Middle Unit“Multi Last” (3) - Cascaded System Last Unit21 Safety ModeDefines the primary operating mode of the speed monitoring safety functions.“Safe Stop” (1) - Master, Safe Stop“Safe Stop DM” (2) - Master, Safe Stop with Door Monitoring“Lim Speed” (3) - Master, Safe Limited Speed“Lim Speed DM” (4) -Master, Safe Limited Speed with Door Monitoring“Lim Speed ES” (5) - Master, Safe Limited Speed with Enabling Switch Control“LimSpd DM ES” (6) - Master, Safe Limited Speed with Door Monitoring andEnabling Switch Control“Lim Spd Stat” (7) - Master, Safe Limited Speed Status Only“Slv Safe Stp” (8) - Slave, Safe Stop“Slv Lim Spd” (9) - Slave, Safe Limited Speed“Slv Spd Stat” (10) - Slave, Safe Limited Speed Status Only22 Reset TypeDefines the type of reset used by the safety option.ValuesRead-WriteData TypeDefault:Options:0 = “Single”0 = “Single”1 = “Multi First”2 = “Multi Mid”3 = “Multi Last”RW RealHOST GROUPSGeneralDefault:Options:1 = “Safe Stop”0 = “Disabled”1 = “Safe Stop”2 = “Safe Stop DM”3 = “Lim Speed”4 = “Lim Speed DM”5 = “Lim Speed ES”6 = “LimSpd DM ES”7 = “Lim Spd Stat”8 = “Slv Safe Stp”9 = “Slv Lim Spd”10 = “Slv Spd Stat”RW RealDefault:Options:2 = “Monitored”0 = “Automatic”1 = “Manual”2 = “Monitored” (Manual Monitored)RW Real24 OverSpd ResponseConfiguration for the feedback interface sampling rate.Default:Options:0 = “42 ms”0 = “42 ms”1 = “48 ms”2 = “60 ms”3 = “84 ms”4 = “132 ms”5 = “228 ms”6 = “420 ms”RW RealFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type27 Fbk ModeSelects the number of feedback devices and the type of discrepancy checking.“Single Fbk” (0) - 1 Encoder“Dual S/P Chk” (1) - 2 Encoders with Speed and Position Discrepancy Checking“Dual Spd Chk” (2) - 2 Encoders with Speed Discrepancy Checking“Dual Pos Chk” (3) - 2 Encoders with Position Discrepancy CheckingDefault:Options:0 = “Single Fbk”0 = “Single Fbk”1 = “Dual S/P Chk”2 = “Dual Spd Chk”3 = “Dual Pos Chk”RW RealHOST GROUPSFeedback28 Fbk 1 TypeSelects the type of feedback for safety option 1.29 Fbk 1 UnitsSelects rotary or linear feedback for safety option 1.Default:Options:Default:Options:1 = “TTL”0 = “Sine/Cosine”1 = “TTL” (Incremental)0 = “Rev”0 = “Rev” (Rotary)1 = “mm” (Linear)RW RealRW Real30 Fbk 1 PolarityDefines the direction polarity for encoder 1.Default:Options:0 = “Normal”0 = “Normal” (Same as encoder)1 = “Reversed”RW Real31 Fbk 1 ResolutionCounts/Revolution.1…65,535 pulses/revolution or pulses/mm based on rotary or linear configurationdefined by P29 [Fbk 1 Units].Default: 1024Min/Max: 1 / 65,535RO RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-150 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type32 Fbk 1 Volt MonEncoder 1 voltage to be monitored.Default:Options:0 = Voltage not monitored0 = Voltage not monitored5 = 5V +/- 5%9 = 7…12V12 = 12V +/- 5%24 = 24V - 10%…24V + 5%RW Real33 Fbk 1 SpeedDisplays the output speed of encoder 1.Units based on rotary or linear configuration defined by P29 [Fbk 1 Units].Units:Min/Max:RPMmm/s-214,748,364.8 / 214,748,364.7 RPM-214,748,364.8 / 214,748,364.7 mm/sROReal34 Fbk 2 UnitsSelects rotary or linear feedback for safety option 2.Default:Options:0 = “Rev”0 = “Rev” (Rotary)1 = “mm” (Linear)RW Real35 Fbk 2 PolarityDefines the direction polarity for encoder 2.Default:Options:0 = “Normal”0 = “Normal” (Same as encoder)1 = “Reversed”RW Real36 Fbk 2 ResolutionCounts/Revolution.0…65,535 pulses/revolution or pulses/mm based on rotary or linear configurationdefined by P34 [Fbk 2 Units].Default: 0Min/Max: 1 / 65,535RORealHOST GROUPSFeedback37 Fbk 2 Volt MonEncoder 2 voltage to be monitored.38 Fbk 2 SpeedDisplays the output speed of encoder 2.Units based on rotary or linear configuration defined by P34 [Fbk 2 Units].Default:Options:Units:Min/Max:0 = Voltage not monitored0 = Voltage not monitored5 = 5V +/- 5%9 = 7…12V12 = 12V +/- 5%24 = 24V - 10%…24V + 5%RPMmm/s-214,748,364.8 / 214,748,364.7 RPM-214,748,364.8 / 214,748,364.7 mm/sRW RealRO Real39 Fbk Speed RatioDefines the ratio of the expected speed of encoder 2 divided by the expectedspeed of encoder 1.Ratio based on rotary or linear configuration defined by P29 [Fbk 1 Units].Default: 0.0000Min/Max: 0.0001 / 10,000.0RW Real40 Fbk Speed TolAcceptable difference in speed between P33 [Fbk 1 Speed] and P38 [Fbk 2Speed].Units are based on rotary or linear configuration defined by P29 [Fbk 1 Units].Units:Min/Max:RPMmm/s0 / 6553.5 RPM0 / 6553.5 mm/sRW Real41 Fbk Pos TolAcceptable difference in position between encoder 1 and encoder 2.Units are based on rotary or linear configuration defined by P29 [Fbk 1 Units].Units:Default:Min/Max:Degmm00 / 65,535 deg0 / 65,535 mmRW Real42 Direction MonDefines the allowable direction if Safe Direction Monitoring is enabled.“Pos Always” (1) – Positive always“Neg Always” (2) – Negative always“Pos in SLS” (3) – Positive during safe limited speed monitoring“Neg in SLS” (4) – Negative during safe limited speed monitoringDefault:Options:0 = “Disabled”0 = “Disabled”1 = “Pos Always”2 = “Neg Always”3 = “Pos in SLS”4 = “Neg in SLS”RW Real43 Direction TolThe position limit in encoder units tolerated in the wrong direction when SafeDirection Monitoring is active.Units are based on rotary or linear configuration defined by P29 [Fbk 1 Units].Units:Default:Min/Max:Degmm100 / 65,535 deg0 / 65,535 mmRW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-151FileGroupNameNo. Description44 Safe Stop InputConfiguration for Safe Stop input (SS_In).“2NC” (1) – Dual-channel equivalent“2 NC 3s” (2) – Dual-channel equivalent 3 s“1 NO + 1 NC” (3) – Dual-channel complementary“1 NO + 1 NC 3s” (4) – Dual-channel complementary 3 s“2 OSSD” (5) – Dual-channel SS equivalent“1 NC” (6) – Single channel equivalent45 Safe Stop TypeSafe operating stop type selection. This defines the type of Safe Stop that isperformed if the Safe Stop function is initiated by a stop type condition.“Torque Off” (0) – Safe Torque Off With Standstill Checking“Torque Off NoCk” (3) – Safe Torque Off Without Standstill CheckingValuesRead-WriteData TypeDefault:Options:1 = “2NC”0 = “Not used”1 = “2NC”2 = “2 NC 3s”3 = “1 NO + 1 NC”4 = “1 NO + 1 NC 3s”5 = “2 OSSD”6 = “1 NC”RW RealDefault:Options:0 = “Torque Off”0 = “Torque Off”1 = “Safe Stop 1”2 = “Safe Stop 2”3 = “Torque Off NoCk”RW RealHOST GROUPSStop46 Stop Mon DelayDefines the monitoring delay between the request and the Max Stop Time whenthe request for a Safe Stop 1 or a Safe Stop 2 is initiated by an SS_In input ON toOFF transition.If the Safe Stop Type is Safe Torque Off With or Without Standstill SpeedChecking, the Stop Monitor Delay must be 0 or a Invalid Configuration Faultoccurs.47 Max Stop TimeDefines the maximum stop delay time that is used when the Safe Stop function isinitiated by a stop type condition.Units: SecsDefault: 0Min/Max: 0 / 6553.5Units: SecsDefault: 0Min/Max: 0 / 6553.5RW RealRW Real48 Standstill SpeedDefines the speed limit that is used to declare motion as stopped.Units are based on rotary or linear configuration defined by P29 [Fbk 1 Units].Units:Default:Min/Max:RPMmm/s0.0010.001/ 65.535 RPM000/ 65.535 mm/sRW Real49 Standstill PosDefines the position limit window in encoder 1 degrees or mm that will betolerated after a safe stop condition has been detected.Degrees (360° = 1 revolution) or mm based on rotary or linear configurationdefined by P29 [Fbk 1 Units].50 Decel Ref SpeedDetermines deceleration rate to monitor for Safe Stop 1 or Safe Stop 2.Units are based on rotary or linear configuration defined by encoder 1 feedbackconfiguration, P29 [Fbk 1 Units].Units:Default:Min/Max:Degmm100 / 65,535 deg0 / 65.535 mmRW RealUnits:Default:Min/Max:RPMmm/s00 / 65,535 RPM0 / 65,535 mm/sRW Real51 Stop Decel TolThis is the acceptable tolerance above the deceleration rate set by the Decel RefSpeed parameter.Units: %Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 100RW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-152 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNameNo. Description52 Lim Speed InputConfiguration for Safe Limited Speed input (SLS_In).“2NC” (1) – Dual-channel equivalent“2 NC 3s” (2) – Dual-channel equivalent 3 s“1 NO + 1 NC” (3) – Dual-channel complementary“1 NO + 1 NC 3s” (4) – Dual-channel complementary 3 s“2 OSSD” (5) – Dual-channel SS equivalent“1 NC” (6) – Single channel equivalent53 LimSpd Mon DelayDefines the Safe Limited Speed Monitoring Delay between the SLS_In ON toOFF transition and the initiation of the Safe Limited Speed (SLS) or SafeMaximum Speed (SMS) monitoring.54 Enable SW InputConfiguration for the Enabling Switch input (ESM_In).“2NC” (1) – Dual-channel equivalent“2 NC 3s” (2) – Dual-channel equivalent 3 s“1 NO + 1 NC” (3) – Dual-channel complementary“1 NO + 1 NC 3s” (4) – Dual-channel complementary 3 s“2 OSSD” (5) – Dual-channel SS equivalent“1 NC” (6) – Single channel equivalentValuesRead-WriteData TypeDefault:Options:0 = “Not used”0 = “Not used”1 = “2NC”2 = “2 NC 3s”3 = “1 NO + 1 NC”4 = “1 NO + 1 NC 3s”5 = “2 OSSD”6 = “1 NC”RW RealHOST GROUPSLimited SpeedUnits: SecsDefault: 0Min/Max: 0 / 6553.5Default:Options:0 = “Not used”0 = “Not used”1 = “2NC”2 = “2 NC 3s”3 = “1 NO + 1 NC”4 = “1 NO + 1 NC 3s”5 = “2 OSSD”6 = “1 NC”RW RealRW Real55 Safe Speed LimitDefines the speed limit that will be monitored in Safe Limited Speed (SLS) mode.Units are based on rotary or linear configuration defined by P29 [Fbk 1 Units].Units:Default:Min/Max:RPMmm/s00 / 6553.5 RPM0 / 6553.5 mm/sRW Real56 Speed HysteresisProvides hysteresis for SLS_Out output when Safe Limited Speed monitoring isactive.Units: %Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 100RW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-153FileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type57 Door Out TypeDefines the lock and unlock state for door control output (DC_Out).When Door Out Type equals power to release, DC_Out is OFF in the lock stateand ON in the unlock state.When Door Out Type equals power to lock, DC_Out is ON in the lock state andOFF in the unlock state.The first and middle units of a multi-axis system must be configured as cascading(2).Default:Options:0 = “Pwr to Rel”0 = “Pwr to Rel”1 = “Pwr to Lock”2 = “2 Ch Sourcing”RW RealHOST GROUPSDoor Control58 DM InputConfiguration for the Door Monitor input (DM_In).“2NC” (1) – Dual-channel equivalent“2 NC 3s” (2) – Dual-channel equivalent 3 s“1 NO + 1 NC” (3) – Dual-channel complementary“1 NO + 1 NC 3s” (4) – Dual-channel complementary 3 s“2 OSSD” (5) – Dual-channel SS equivalent“1 NC” (6) – Single channel equivalent59 Lock Mon EnableLock Monitoring can only be enabled when the speed monitoring safety option isa single unit or as the first unit in a multi-axis system (Cascaded Config equals 0or 3).Default:Options:Default:Options:0 = “Not used”0 = “Not used”1 = “2NC”2 = “2 NC 3s”3 = “1 NO + 1 NC”4 = “1 NO + 1 NC 3s”5 = “2 OSSD”6 = “1 NC”0 = “Disable”0 = “Disable”1 = “Enable”RW RealRW Real60 Lock Mon InputConfiguration for the Lock Monitor input (LM_In).“2NC” (1) – Dual-channel equivalent“2 NC 3s” (2) – Dual-channel equivalent 3 s“1 NO + 1 NC” (3) – Dual-channel complementary“1 NO + 1 NC 3s” (4) – Dual-channel complementary 3 s“2 OSSD” (5) – Dual-channel SS equivalent“1 NC” (6) – Single channel equivalentDefault:Options:0 = “Not used”0 = “Not used”1 = “2NC”2 = “2 NC 3s”3 = “1 NO + 1 NC”4 = “1 NO + 1 NC 3s”5 = “2 OSSD”6 = “1 NC”RW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-154 Programming and ParametersFileGroupHOST GROUPSMax SpeedNameNo. Description61 Max Speed EnableEnable Safe Maximum Speed Monitoring.62 Safe Max SpeedDefines the maximum speed limit that will be tolerated if Safe Maximum Speedmonitoring is enabled.ValuesDefault:Options:Units:Default:Min/Max:63 Max Spd Stop TypDefault:Defines the safe stop type that will be initiated in the event of a SMS Speed Fault. Options:“Torque Off” (0) – Safe Torque Off With Standstill Checking“Safe Stp Typ” (1) – Safe Torque Off Without Standstill Checking64 Max Accel EnableEnable Safe Maximum Acceleration Monitoring.65 Safe Accel LimitDefines the Safe Maximum Acceleration Limit, relative to encoder 1, for which thesystem is being monitored.Units are based on rotary or linear configuration defined by P29 [Fbk 1 Units].66 Max Acc Stop TypDefines the safe stop type that will be initiated in the event of an AccelerationFault.“Torque Off” (0) – Safe Torque Off With Standstill Checking“Safe Stp Typ” (1) – Safe Torque Off Without Standstill CheckingDefault:Options:Units:Default:Min/Max:Default:Options:0 = “Disable”0 = “Disable”1 = “Enable”RPMmm/s00 / 65,535 RPM0 / 65,535 mm/s0 = “Torque Off”0 = “Torque Off”1 = “Safe Stp Typ”0 = “Disable”0 = “Disable”1 = “Enable”Read-WriteData TypeRW RealRW RealRW RealRW RealRev/s 2RW Realmm/s 200 / 65,535 rev/s 20 / 65,535 mm/s 20 = “Torque Off”0 = “Torque Off”1 = “Safe Stp Typ”RW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-155FileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type67 Fault StatusFault StatusBit-encoded faults.OptionsReservedReservedReservedFbk 2 V FltFbk 1 V FltESM Mon FltESM In FltLock Mon FltLM In FltDC Out FltDoor Mon FltDM In FltDir FltAccel FltSMS Spd FltSLS Spd FltSLS Out FltSLS In FltMov in StopStop Spd FltDecel FltSS Out FltSS In FltDual Fbk PosDual Fbk SpdFbk 2 FltFbk 1 FltReset PwrUpMP Out FltInvalid CfgCore ErrorCombined FltDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0HOST GROUPSFaultsBit 0 “Combined Flt” – Combined Fault StatusBit 1 “Core Error” – Reserved for Core ErrorBit 2 “Invalid Cfg” – Invalid Configuration FaultBit 3 “MP Out Flt” – MP Out FaultBit 4 “Reset PwrUp” – Reset On at PwrUp FaultBit 5 “Fbk 1 Flt” – Feedback 1 FaultBit 6 “Fbk 2 Flt” – Feedback 2 FaultBit 7 “Dual Fbk Spd” – Dual FB Speed FaultBit 8 “Dual Fbk Pos” – Dual FB Position FaultBit 9 “SS In Flt” – SS_In FaultBit 10 “SS Out Flt” – SS_Out FaultBit 11 “Decel Flt” – Deceleration FaultBit 12 “Stop Spd Flt” – Stop Speed FaultBit 13 “Mov in Stop” – Motion After Stopped FaultBit 14 “SLS In Flt” – SLS_In FaultBit 15 “SLS Out Flt” – SLS_Out FaultBit 16 “SLS Spd Flt” – SLS_Speed FaultBit 17 “SMS Spd Flt” – SMS_Speed FaultBit 18 “Accel Flt” – Acceleration FaultBit 19 “Dir Flt” – Direction FaultBit 20 “DM In Flt” – DM_In FaultBit 21 “Door Mon Flt” – Door Monitoring FaultBit 22 “DC Out Flt” – DC_Out FaultBit 23 “LM In Flt” – LM_In FaultBit 24 “Lock Mon Flt” – Lock Monitoring FaultBit 25 “ESM In Flt” – ESM_In FaultBit 26 “ESM Mon Flt” – ESM Monitoring FaultBit 27 “Fbk 1 V Flt” – Encoder 1 Voltage FaultBit 28 “Fbk 2 V Flt” – Encoder 2 Voltage FaultPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-156 Programming and ParametersFileGroupValuesRead-WriteData TypeNameNo. Description68 Guard StatusGuard StatusOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedWait No StopWait SS CycWait ResetReset InESM In ProgESM InLM InDM In ProgDM InDC OutDC LockSDM In ProgSMA In ProgSMS In ProgSLS OutSLS In ProgSLS ReqSLS InSS OutSS StoppedSS DecelSS In ProgSS ReqSS InMP OutConfig LockStatusOKDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0HOST GROUPSFaultsBit 0 “StatusOK” – 0 = Fault; 1 = OKBit 1 “Config Lock” – Configuration_Lock: 0 = Unlock; 1 = LockBit 2 “MP Out” – MP_Out_Value: 0 = Off; 1 = OnBit 3 “SS In” – SS_In_Value: 0 = Off; 1 = OnBit 4 “SS Req” – SS_Request_Status: 0 = Inactive; 1 = ActiveBit 5 “SS In Prog” – SS_In_Progress: 0 = Inactive; 1 = ActiveBit 6 “SS Decel” – SS_Decelerating_Status: 0 = Inactive; 1 = ActiveBit 7 “SS Stopped” – SS_Axis_Stopped_Status: 0 = Inactive; 1 = ActiveBit 8 “SS Out” – SS_Output_Value: 0 = Off; 1 = OnBit 9 “SLS In” – SLS_In_Value: 0 = Off; 1 = OnBit 10 “SLS Req” – SLS_Request_Status: 0 = Inactive; 1 = ActiveBit 11 “SLS In Prog” – SLS_In_Progress: 0 = Inactive; 1 = ActiveBit 12 “SLS Out” – SLS_Output_Value: 0 = Off; 1 = OnBit 13 “SMS In Prog” – SMS_In_Progress: 0 = Inactive; 1 = ActiveBit 14 “SMA In Prog” – SMA_In_Progress: 0 = Inactive; 1 = ActiveBit 15 “SDM In Prog” – SDM_In_Progress: 0 = Inactive; 1 = ActiveBit 16 “DC Lock” – DC_Lock_Status: 0 = Lock; 1 = UnlockBit 17 “DC Out” – DC_Out_Value: 0 = Off; 1 = OnBit 18 “DM In” – DM_In_Value: 0 = Off; 1 = OnBit 19 “DM In Prog” – DM_In_Progress: 0 = Inactive; 1 = ActiveBit 20 “LM In” – LM_In_Value: 0 = Off; 1 = OnBit 21 “ESM In” – ESM_In_Value: 0 = Off; 1 = OnBit 22 “ESM In Prog” – ESM_In_Progress: 0 = Inactive; 1 = ActiveBit 23 “Reset In” – Reset_In_Value: 0 = Off; 1 = OnBit 24 “Wait Reset” – Waiting_for_SS_Reset: 0 = Inactive; 1 = ActiveBit 25 “Wait SS Cyc” – Waiting_for_Cycle_SS_In: 0 = Inactive; 1 = ActiveBit 26 “Wait No Stop” – Waiting_for_Stop_Request_Removal: 0 = Inactive; 1 = ActivePowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-157FileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type69 IO Diag StatusIndicates present state of I/O used for diagnostics.Important: When the safety option is not in the Run mode. this parameter is not updated.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedMP Out Ch 1MP Out Ch 0Stop CmdSLS CmdReservedReset InLM In Ch 1LM In Ch 0DC Out Ch 1DC Out Ch 0DM In Ch 1DM In Ch 0ESM In Ch 1ESM In Ch 0SLS Out Ch 1SLS Out Ch 0SLS In Ch 1SLS In Ch 0SS Out Ch 1SS Out Ch 0SS In Ch 1SS In Ch 0Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Open1 = ClosedHOST GROUPSFaultsBit 0 “SS In Ch 0” – SS_in_ch_0 statusBit 1 “SS In Ch 1” – SS_in_ch_1 statusBit 2 “SS Out Ch 0” – SS_out_ch_0 statusBit 3 “SS Out Ch 1” – SS_out_ch_1 statusBit 4 “SLS In Ch 0” – SLS_in_ch_0 statusBit 5 “SLS In Ch 1” – SLS_in_ch_1 statusBit 6 “SLS Out Ch 0” – SLS_out_ch_0 statusBit 7 “SLS Out Ch 1” – SLS_out_ch_1 statusBit 8 “ESM In Ch 0” – ESM_in_ch_0 statusBit 9 “ESM In Ch 1” – ESM_in_ch_1 statusBit 10 “DM In Ch 0” – DM_in_ch_0 statusBit 11 “DM In Ch 1” – DM_in_ch_1 statusBit 12 “DC Out Ch 0” – DC_out_ch_0 statusBit 13 “DC Out Ch 1” – DC_out_ch_1 statusBit 14 “LM In Ch 0” – LM_in_ch_0 statusBit 15 “LM In Ch 1” – LM_in_ch_1 statusBit 16 “Reset In” – Reset_In statusBit 17 “Reserved”Bit 18 “SLS Cmd” – SLS_command statusBit 19 “Stop Cmd” – Stop_command statusBit 20 “MP Out Ch 0” – MP_Out_Ch_0 statusBit 21 “MP Out Ch 1” – MP_Out_Ch_1 statusPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-158 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData TypeHOST GROUPSFaults70 Config Flt CodeConfiguration Fault Code.0 = No Fault1 = Password Required (Password Req)2 = P21 [Safety Mode] value not legal based on P20 [Cascaded Config] value.3 = P57 [Door Out Type] value not legal based on P20 [Cascaded Config] value.4 = P46 [Stop Mon Delay] value not legal based on P45 [Safe Stop Type] value.5 = P50 [Decel Ref Speed] value not legal based on P31 [Fbk 1 Resolution]value.6 = P48 [Standstill Speed] value not legal based on P20 [Cascaded Config]value.7 = P53 [LimSpd Mon Delay] value not legal based on P21 [Safety Mode] value.8 = P55 [Safe Speed Limit] value not legal based on P21 [Safety Mode] and P31[Fbk 1 Resolution] value.9 = P56 [Speed Hysteresis] value not legal based on P21 [Safety Mode] value.10 = P62 [Safe Max Speed] value not legal based on P31 [Fbk 1 Resolution]value.11 = P42 [Direction Mon] value not legal based on P21 [Safety Mode] value.12 = P59 [Lock Mon Enable] value not legal based on P21 [Safety Mode] value.13 = P36 [Fbk 2 Resolution] value not legal based on P27 [Fbk Mode] value.14 = P35 [Fbk 2 Polarity] value not legal based on P27 [Fbk Mode] value.15 = P39 [Fbk Speed Ratio] value not legal based on P27 [Fbk Mode] value.16 = P41 [Fbk Pos Tol] value not legal based on P27 [Fbk Mode] value.17 = P40 [Fbk Speed Tol] value not legal based on P27 [Fbk Mode] value.18 = P44 [Safe Stop In Typ] value not legal based on P21 [Safety Mode] value.19 = P52 [Lim Spd In Typ] value not legal based on P21 [Safety Mode] value.20 = P58 [DM Input Type] value not legal based on P20 [Cascaded Config] andP21 [Safety Mode] value.21 = P54 [Enable SW In Typ] value not legal based on P21 [Safety Mode] value.22 = P60 [Lock Mon In Type] value not legal based on P21 [Safety Mode] valueand P59 [Lock Mon Enable] value.23 = Illegal P20 [Cascaded Config] value.24 = Illegal P22 [Reset Type] value.25 = Reserved26 = Illegal P45 [Safe Stop Type] value.27 = Illegal P51 [Stop Decel Tol] value.28 = Illegal P27 [Fbk Mode] value.29 = Illegal P28 [Fbk 1 Type] value.30 = Illegal P31 [Fbk 1 Resolution] value.31 = Illegal P32 [Fbk1 Volt Mon] value.32 = Illegal P37 [Fbk 2 Volt Mon] value.33 = Illegal P24 [OverSpd Response] value.34 = Reserved36 = Unknown error (Unknown Err).Default:Options:RW Real72 SS Out ModeDefines whether the SS_Out output is pulse-tested.If pulse-testing is turned off for any output, the SIL, Category, and PL rating isreduced for the entire PowerFlex safety system.73 SLS Out ModeDefines whether the SLS_Out output is pulse-tested.If pulse-testing is turned off for any output, the SIL, Category, and PL rating isreduced for the entire PowerFlex safety system.74 Door Out ModeDefines whether the DC_Out output is pulse-tested.If pulse-testing is turned off for any output, the SIL, Category, and PL rating isreduced for the entire PowerFlex safety system.Default:Options:0 = “Pulse test”0 = “Pulse test”1 = “No pulse test”RW RealDefault:Options:0 = “Pulse test”0 = “Pulse test”1 = “No pulse test”RW RealDefault:Options:0 = “Pulse test”0 = “Pulse test”1 = “No pulse test”RW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-159Single Incremental EncoderModule ParametersFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type1 Encoder CfgEncoder ConfigureConfigures the position direction, speed calculation method, signal type and active encoder channels.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedDirectionSingle EndedInv Home InEdge ModeA Chan OnlyZ Chan EnblDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueHOST GROUPSBit 0 “Z Channel Enbl” – Configures the Channel Z to be used and monitored for Phase Loss. A value of 0 = the Z channel will be ignored.Bit 1 “A Chan Only” – Configures the module to use only the A channel, and ignore the B channel. In this mode, direction cannot be determined, andthe position counter will always count up.Bit 2 “Edge Mode” – Configure the module to use AB edge time data for speed calculation rather than accumulated count.Bit 3 “Inv Home In” – Configures the home input to be inverted. 1 = inverted, 0 = not invertedBit 4 “Single Ended” – Configure when the A Quad B encoder has single ended signals. In this mode, Phase Loss detection is disabled. 0 =Differential, 1 = Single EndedBit 5 “Direction” – Inverts the position count up/down associated with a given rotation direction internally. 1 = invert, 0 = do not invert2 Encoder PPREncoder Pulses Per RevolutionConfigures the encoder module for the Pulses Per Revolution (Encoder Lines) ofthe A Quad B Encoder.3 Fdbk Loss CfgFeedback Loss ConfigureConfigures how the drive reacts to an error status condition for the feedback.4 Encoder FeedbackEncoder FeedbackDisplays the position feedback value of the encoder. This should be used as asource for the main control (Port 0) Feedback Select.Default: 1024Min/Max: 2 / 20000Default:Options:3 = “FltCoastStop”0 = “Ignore”1 = “Alarm”2 = “Flt Minor”3 = “FltCoastStop”Default: 0Min/Max: –/+2147483647RW RealRW RealRORealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-160 Programming and ParametersFileGroupValuesRead-WriteData TypeNameNo. Description5 Encoder StatusEncoder StatusStatus information for the Incremental Encoder ModuleOptionsDirectionHomMrk EventHomMrk ArmedHomeIn EventHomeIn ArmedHome InputInv Home InMarker EventZ Not InputZ InputB Not InputB InputA Not InputA InputA Chan OnlyZ Chan EnblDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueHOST GROUPSBit 0 “Z Chan Enbl” – State of the corresponding bit in the [Encoder Cfg] parameter.Bit 1 “A Chan Only” – State of the corresponding bit in the [Encoder Cfg] parameter.Bit 2 “A Input” – State of encoder A input signal.Bit 3 “A Not Input” – State of encoder A Not input signal.Bit 4 “B Input” – State of encoder B input signal.Bit 5 “B Not Input” – State of encoder B Not input signal.Bit 6 “Z Input” – State of encoder Z input signal.Bit 7 “Z Not Input” – State of encoder Z Not input signal.Bit 8 “Marker Event” – When channel Z (marker pulse) is used, indicates that a marker pulse is detected. Automatically cleared in the homing routineor due to clearing of encoder faults.Bit 9 “Inv Home In” – State of the corresponding bit in the [Encoder Cfg] parameter. When set, the home input signal will be inverted.Bit 10 “Home Input” – Active state of the Home Input signal. This status bit gets inverted if the “Inv Home In” bit is enabled.Bit 11 “HomeIn Armed” – Indicates that the homing logic is configured to latch the encoder position upon the next transition of the home input.Bit 12 “HomeIn Event” – Indicates that the homing logic has latched the encoder position in response to a transition of the home input.Bit 13 “HomMrk Armed” – Indicates that the homing logic is configured to latch the encoder position upon the next marker (Z channel) pulse.Bit 14 “HomMrk Event” – Indicates that the homing logic has latched the encoder position in response to a marker (Z channel) pulse.Bit 15 “Direction” – State of the corresponding bit in the [Encoder Cfg] parameter.6 Error StatusError StatusStatus information that will result in a feedback loss condition.OptionsSI Comm LossReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedQuad LossPhase LossOpen WireDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueBit 0 “Open Wire” – Indicates that an input signal (A, B or Z) is in the same state as its complement (A Not, B Not, Z Not). For open wire detection towork, the encoder signals must be differential (not single ended). The Z channel is only checked when enabled. -- see [Encoder Cfg].Bit 1 “Phase Loss” – Indicates that more than 30 phase loss (open wire) events have occurred over an 8msec time period. The same restrictionsapply as on [Encoder Cfg] Bit 0.Bit 2 “Quad Loss” – Quadrature loss events occur when simultaneous edge transitions occur on both the A and B encoder channels. Indicates thatmore than 10 quad loss events over a 10 msec time period are detected. Only valid when both A and B channels are used (not 'A Chan Only' in[Encoder Cfg]).Bit 15 “SI Comm Loss” – Indicates a communication loss between the main control board and the encoder module over the Serial Interfacebackplane.7 Phase Loss CountPhase Loss CountDisplays the active value of the encoder module's phase loss counter hardwareregister. Values in this register accumulated over 8 msec are used to detectPhase Loss errors.8 Quad Loss CountDisplays the active value of the encoder module's quad loss counter hardwareregister. Values in this register accumulated over 8 msec are used to detect QuadLoss errors.Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 127Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 15RORORealRealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-161Dual Incremental EncoderModule ParametersFileGroupRead-WriteData TypeNo.NameDescriptionValues1 Enc 0 CfgEncoder 0 ConfigureConfigures the position direction, speed calculation method, signal type and active encoder channels used for Encoder 0 (primary encoder).OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedDirectionSingle EndedReservedEdge ModeA Chan OnlyZ Chan EnblDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueHOST GROUPSEncoder 0Bit 0 “Z Channel Enbl” – Configures the Channel Z to be used and monitored for Phase Loss. A value of 0 = the Z channel will be ignored.Bit 1 “A Chan Only” – Configures the module to use only the A channel, and ignore the B channel. In this mode, direction cannot be determined, andthe position counter will always count up.Bit 2 “Edge Mode” – Configure the module to use AB edge time data for speed calculation rather than accumulated count.Bit 4 “Single Ended” – Configure when the A Quad B encoder has single ended signals. In this mode, Phase Loss detection is disabled. 0 =Differential, 1 = Single EndedBit 5 “Direction” – Inverts the position count up/down associated with a given rotation direction internally. 1 = invert, 0 = do not invert2 Enc 0 PPREncoder 0 Pulses Per RevolutionConfigures the encoder module's primary input (Encoder 0) for the Pulses PerRevolution (Encoder Lines) of the A Quad B Encoder.3 Enc 0 FB Lss CfgEncoder 0 Feedback Loss ConfigureConfigures how the drive reacts to an error status condition for Encoder 0(primary encoder).4 Enc 0 FBEncoder 0 FeedbackDisplays the position feedback value of Encoder 0 (primary encoder). This shouldbe used as a source for the main control (Port 0) Feedback Select.Default: 1024Min/Max: 2 / 20000Default:Options:3 = “FltCoastStop”0 = “Ignore”1 = “Alarm”2 = “Flt Minor”3 = “FltCoastStop”Default: 0Min/Max: –/+2147483647RW RealRW RealRORealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-162 Programming and ParametersFileGroupValuesRead-WriteData TypeNameNo. Description5 Enc 0 StsEncoder 0 StatusStatus information for Encoder 0.OptionsDirectionHomMrk EventHomMrk ArmedHomeIn EventHomeIn ArmedHome InputInv Home InMarker EventZ Not InputZ InputB Not InputB InputA Not InputA InputA Chan OnlyZ Chan EnblDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueHOST GROUPSEncoder 0Bit 0 “Z Chan Enbl” – State of the corresponding bit in the [Enc 0 Cfg] parameter.Bit 1 “A Chan Only” – State of the corresponding bit in the [Enc 0 Cfg] parameter.Bit 2 “A Input” – State of encoder A input signal.Bit 3 “A Not Input” – State of encoder A Not input signal.Bit 4 “B Input” – State of encoder B input signal.Bit 5 “B Not Input” – State of encoder B Not input signal.Bit 6 “Z Input” – State of encoder Z input signal.Bit 7 “Z Not Input” – State of encoder Z Not input signal.Bit 8 “Marker Event” – When channel Z (marker pulse) is used, indicates that a marker pulse is detected. Automatically cleared in the homing routineor due to clearing of encoder faults.Bit 9 “Inv Home In” – State of the corresponding bit in the [Enc 0 Cfg] parameter. When set, the home input signal will be inverted.Bit 10 “Home Input” – Active state of the Home Input signal. This status bit gets inverted if the “Inv Home In” bit is enabled.Bit 11 “HomeIn Armed” – Indicates that the homing logic is configured to latch the encoder position upon the next transition of the home input.Bit 12 “HomeIn Event” – Indicates that the homing logic has latched the encoder position in response to a transition of the home input.Bit 13 “HomMrk Armed” – Indicates that the homing logic is configured to latch the encoder position upon the next marker (Z channel) pulse.Bit 14 “HomMrk Event” – Indicates that the homing logic has latched the encoder position in response to a marker (Z channel) pulse.Bit 15 “Direction” – State of the corresponding bit in the [Enc 0 Cfg] parameter.6 Enc 0 Error StsEncoder 0 Error StatusStatus information that will result in a feedback loss condition for Encoder 0.OptionsSI Comm LossReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedQuad LossPhase LossOpen WireDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueBit 0 “Open Wire” – Indicates that an input signal (A, B or Z) is in the same state as its complement (A Not, B Not, Z Not). For open wire detection towork, the encoder signals must be differential (not single ended). The Z channel is only checked when enabled.Bit 1 “Phase Loss” – Indicates that more than 30 phase loss (open wire) events have occurred over an 8msec time period. The same restrictionsapply as on [Enc 0 Cfg] Bit 0 “Z Chan Enbl.”Bit 2 “Quad Loss” – Quadrature loss events occur when simultaneous edge transitions occur on both the A and B encoder channels. Indicates thatmore than 10 quad loss events over a 10 msec time period are detected. Only valid when both A and B channels are used (not 'A Chan Only' in [Enc0 Cfg]).Bit 15 “SI Comm Loss” – Indicates a communication loss between the main control board and the encoder module over the Serial Interfacebackplane.7 Enc 0 PhsLss CntEncoder 0 Phase Loss CountDisplays the active value of the encoder module's Encoder 0 phase loss counterhardware register. Values in this register accumulated over 8 msec are used todetect Phase Loss errors.8 Enc 0 QuadLssCntEncoder 0 Quad Loss CountDisplays the active value of the encoder module's Encoder 0 quad loss counterhardware register. Values in this register accumulated over 8 msec are used todetect Quad Loss errors.Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 127Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 15RORORealRealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-163FileGroupRead-WriteData TypeNo.NameDescriptionValues11 Enc 1 CfgEncoder 1 ConfigureConfigures the position direction, speed calculation method, signal type and active encoder channels used for Encoder 1 (secondary encoder).OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedDirectionSingle EndedReservedEdge ModeA Chan OnlyZ Chan EnblDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueHOST GROUPSEncoder 1Bit 0 “Z Channel Enbl” – Configures the Channel Z to be used and monitored for Phase Loss. A value of 0 = the Z channel will be ignored.Bit 1 “A Chan Only” – Configures the module to use only the A channel, and ignore the B channel. In this mode, direction cannot be determined, andthe position counter will always count up.Bit 2 “Edge Mode” – Configure the module to use AB edge time data for speed calculation rather than accumulated count.Bit 4 “Single Ended” – Configure when the A Quad B encoder has single ended signals. In this mode, Phase Loss detection is disabled. 0 =Differential, 1 = Single EndedBit 5 “Direction” – Inverts the position count up/down associated with a given rotation direction internally. 1 = invert, 0 = do not invert12 Enc 1 PPREncoder 1 Pulses Per RevolutionConfigures the encoder module's secondary input (Encoder 1) for the Pulses PerRevolution (Encoder Lines) of the A Quad B Encoder.13 Enc 1 FB Lss CfgEncoder 1 Feedback LossConfigures how the drive reacts to an error status condition for Encoder 1(secondary encoder).14 Enc 1 FBEncoder 1 FeedbackDisplays the position feedback value of Encoder 1 (secondary encoder). Thisshould be used as a source for the main control (Port 0) Feedback Select.Default: 1024Min/Max: 2 / 20000Default: 3 = “FltCoastStop”Min/Max: 0 = “Ignore”1 = “Alarm”2 = “Flt Minor“3 = “FltCoastStop“Default: 0Min/Max: –/+2147483647RW RealRW RealRORealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-164 Programming and ParametersFileGroupValuesRead-WriteData TypeNameNo. Description15 Enc 1 StsEncoder 1 StatusStatus information for Encoder 1OptionsDirectionHomMrk EventHomMrk ArmedHomeIn EventHomeIn ArmedHome InputInv Home InMarker EventZ Not InputZ InputB Not InputB InputA Not InputA InputA Chan OnlyZ Chan EnblDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueHOST GROUPSEncoder 1Bit 0 “Z Chan Enbl” – State of the corresponding bit in the [Enc 1 Cfg] parameter.Bit 1 “A Chan Only” – State of the corresponding bit in the [Enc 1 Cfg] parameter.Bit 2 “A Input” – State of encoder A input signal.Bit 3 “A Not Input” – State of encoder A Not input signal.Bit 4 “B Input” – State of encoder B input signal.Bit 5 “B Not Input” – State of encoder B Not input signal.Bit 6 “Z Input” – State of encoder Z input signal.Bit 7 “Z Not Input” – State of encoder Z Not input signal.Bit 8 “Marker Event” – When channel Z (marker pulse) is used, indicates that a marker pulse is detected. Automatically cleared in the homing routineor due to clearing of encoder faults.Bit 9 “Inv Home In” – State of the corresponding bit in the [Enc 1 Cfg] parameter. When set, the home input signal will be inverted.Bit 10 “Home Input” – Active state of the Home Input signal. This status bit gets inverted if the “Inv Home In” bit is enabled.Bit 11 “HomeIn Armed” – Indicates that the homing logic is configured to latch the encoder position upon the next transition of the home input.Bit 12 “HomeIn Event” – Indicates that the homing logic has latched the encoder position in response to a transition of the home input.Bit 13 “HomMrk Armed” – Indicates that the homing logic is configured to latch the encoder position upon the next marker (Z channel) pulse.Bit 14 “HomMrk Event” – Indicates that the homing logic has latched the encoder position in response to a marker (Z channel) pulse.Bit 15 “Direction” – State of the corresponding bit in the [Enc 1 Cfg] parameter.16 Enc 1 Error StsEncoder 1 Error StatusStatus information that will result in a feedback loss condition for Encoder 1.OptionsSI Comm LossReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedQuad LossPhase LossOpen WireDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueBit 0 “Open Wire” – Indicates that an input signal (A, B or Z) is in the same state as its complement (A Not, B Not, Z Not). For open wire detection towork, the encoder signals must be differential (not single ended). The Z channel is only checked when enabled.Bit 1 “Phase Loss” – Indicates that more than 30 phase loss (open wire) events have occurred over an 8msec time period. The same restrictionsapply as on [Enc 1 Cfg] bit 0.Bit 2 “Quad Loss” – Quadrature loss events occur when simultaneous edge transitions occur on both the A and B encoder channels. Indicates thatmore than 10 quad loss events over a 10 msec time period are detected. Only valid when both A and B channels are used (not “A Chan Only” in [Enc1 Cfg]).Bit 15 “SI Comm Loss” – Indicates a communication loss between the main control board and the encoder module over the Serial Interfacebackplane.17 Enc 1 PhsLss CntEncoder 1 Phase Loss CountDisplays the active value of the encoder module's Encoder 1 phase loss counterhardware register. Values in this register accumulated over 8 msec are used todetect Phase Loss errors.18 Enc 1 QuadLssCntEncoder 1 Quad Loss CountDisplays the active value of the encoder module's Encoder 1 quad loss counterhardware register. Values in this register accumulated over 8 msec are used todetect Quad Loss errors.Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 127Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 15RORORealRealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-165FileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type20 Homing CfgHoming ConfigureConfigures options for the homing function. Common to both encoders.HOST GROUPSHoming CfgOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedInv Home InDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Not Inverted1 = InvertedBit 0 “Inv Home In” – Inverts the home input signal.FileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type21 Module StsModule StatusEncoder module status information (common to both encoders).HOST GROUPSModule StatusOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedSafetyVoltHiSafety ModeDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Cleared1 = SetBit 0 “Safety Mode” – Indicates that the dip switch on the dual encoder module is configured to place its feedback signals on the SI backplane for useby the Safe Speed Monitor module. If multiple dual encoder modules are present, only one dual encoder can be configured for Safety Mode. 0 =Safety Mode Off. 1 = Safety Mode On.Bit 1 “SafetyVoltHi” – Indicates the status (configured by a jumper on the module) of the safety feedback voltage mode. 0 = 5V safety feedback mode,1 = 12V safety feedback mode.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-166 Programming and ParametersUniversal Feedback ModuleParametersFileGroupNameNo. Description1 Module StsModule StatusShows error and alarm information of the Feedback Option module.ValuesRead-WriteData TypeOptionsDPI ReadySec SafetyPri SafetyReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedInitializingFB0FB1 CflctReservedReservedSafety CflctEncOut CflctReservedReservedFirmware ErrHardware ErrReservedCfg AlarmFB1 AlarmFB0 AlarmReservedSystem ErrorFB1 ErrorFB0 ErrorReservedAlarm Type 2Alarm Type 1Module ErrorDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = False1 = TrueHOST GROUPSModuleBit 0 “Module Error” – Indicates that the Feedback Option module has any error. This bit is set if at least one of the bits “FB0 Error”, “FB1 Error”, or“System Error” is set.Bit 1 “Alarm Type 1” – Indicates that there is any alarm of type 1 active on the Feedback Option module. Bits 8…10 indicate what kind of alarm isactive.Bit 2 “Alarm Type 2” – Indicates that there is any alarm of type 2 active on the Feedback Option module. Bits 20 and 21 indicate what kind of alarm isactive.Bit 4 “FB0 Error” – Indicates that Feedback 0 has an error. This bit is set if any Feedback 0 error bit in P10 [FB0 Sts] is set. If this bit is set, the bit“Module Error” is also set.Bit 5 “FB1 Error” – Indicates that Feedback 1 has an error. This bit is set if any Feedback 1 error bit in P10 [FB1 Sts] is set. If this bit is set, the bit“Module Error” is also set.Bit 6 “System Error” – Indicates that there is a feedback independent error on the Feedback Option module. Bits 12 and 13 show the type of theSystem Error. If this bit is set, the bit “Module Error” is also set.Bit 8 “FB0 Alarm” – Indicates that Feedback 0 has an alarm This bit is set if there is an alarm in the Feedback 0 encoder. If this bit is set, the bit“Alarm Type 1” is also set.Bit 9 “FB1 Alarm” – Indicates that Feedback 1 has an alarm This bit is set if there is an alarm in the Feedback 1 encoder. If this bit is set, the bit“Alarm Type 1” is also set.Bit 10 “Cfg Alarm” – Indicates that there is a feedback independent alarm on the Feedback Option module. Bits 16 and 17 show the type of the CfgAlarm. If this bit is set, Bit 1 “Alarm Type 1” is also set.Bit 12 “Hardware Err” – Indicates that there is a Hardware Error on the Feedback Option module. If this bit is set, Bit 6 “System Error” is also set.Bit 13 “Firmware Err” – Indicates that there is a Firmware Error on the Feedback Option module. A Firmware Error occurs if the Hardware and thedownloaded Firmware are not compatible. If this bit is set, Bit 6 “System Error” is also set.Bit 16 “EncOut Cflct” – If set, there is one of the following problems with the Encoder Output:• The selection in P80 [Enc Out Sel] is not possible since the required pins on the terminal blocks are already used for Feedback 0 or 1 according toP6 [FB0 Device Sel] and P36 [FB1 Device Sel].• P80 [Enc Out Sel] is set to “Sine Cosine” and there is no signal connected to the pins 1-4 of the Terminal Block 1.• P80 [Enc Out Sel] is set to “Sine Cosine”, the value of [FBX IncAndSC PPR] is not a power of two, and the parameter P84 [Enc Out Z PPR] is notset to 0 “1 ZPulse”. This is not allowed.• P80 [Enc Out Sel] is set to “Channel X” or “Channel Y” and there is no encoder connected to that channel.• P80 [Enc Out Sel] is set to “Channel X” or “Channel Y” and there is a linear encoder connected to this channel. If this bit is set, Bit 10 “Cfg Alarm”is also set.Bit 17 “Safety Cflct” – If set, the Safety DIP switches are in an invalid position. If this bit is set, Bit 10 “Cfg Alarm” is also set.Bit 20 “FB0FB1 Cflct” – If set, the combination of the feedback selection done with the parameters P6 [FB0 Device Sel] and P36 [FB1 Device Sel] isinvalid, i.e. both feedbacks have Sin-Cos-Signals (There is only place for one set of Sin-Cos-Signals on the Terminal Blocks). If this bit is set, Bit 2“Alarm Type 2” is also set.Bit 21 “Initializing” – Indicates that the Universal Feedback State Machine is in the Initialize State. This Type 2 alarm makes sure that the motorcannot be started during the initialization state. If this bit is set, the bit “Alarm Type 2” is also set.Bit 29 “Pri Safety” – Indicates that the UFB is used as primary safety module.Bit 30 “Sec Safety” – Indicates that the UFB is used as secondary safety module.Bit 31 “DPI Ready” – This bit tells the MCB if the UFB is ready for DPI communication.2 Module Err ResetModule Error ResetSelects the module reset type.Default:Options:0 = “Ready”0 = “Ready”1 = “Clr FB Intlz”2 = “Clear Errors”3 = “FB Initlz”RW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-167FileHOST GROUPSGroupFeedback 0NameNo. Description5 FB0 PositionFeedback 0 PositionDisplays the position value from the feedback 0 device.6 FB0 Device SelFeedback 0 Device SelectSpecifies the encoder type for the feedback 0 device.ValuesDefault: 0Min/Max: 2147483648 / 2147483647Default:Options:0 = “None”0 = “None”1 = “EnDat SC”2 = “Hiperface SC”3 = “BiSS SC”4 = “SSI SC”5 = “EnDat FD ChX”6 = “EnDat FD ChY”7 = “BiSS FD ChX'8 = “BiSS FD ChY”9 = “Reserved”10 = “Reserved”11 = “SinCos Only”12 = “Inc A B Z”13 = “Inc SC”14 = “LinTempo ChX”15 = “LinTempo ChY”16 = “LinStahl ChX”17 = “LinStahl ChY”18 = “LinSSI ChX”19 = “LinSSI ChY”Read-WriteData TypeRO 32-bitIntegerRW Real7 FB0 IdentifyFeedback 0 IdentifyDisplays the used encoder type for the feedback 0 device, e.g. Multi turn, rotary encoder with EnDat 2.1 interface including SIN/COS incrementalsignals.OptionsReservedStahlTemposonicSSIBiSSHiperfaceEnDat 2p2EnDat 2p1IncrementalFull DigitalSin CosEnh ResolMulti TurnSingle TurnLinearRotaryDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueBit 0 “Rotary” – Rotary encoderBit 1 “Linear” – Linear encoder; e.g. Temposonic and StahlBit 2 “Single Turn” – Single turn absolute encoderBit 3 “Multi Turn” – Multiturn absolute encoderBit 4 “Enh Resol” – High resolution encoder. This bit is set if there are more than 24 bits resolution (full digital encoders) or the PPR is greater than orequal to 16384. If this bit is set, bit 1 “24-bit Resol” in parameter [FB0 Cfg] should also be set.Bit 5 “Sin Cos” – SinCos encoderBit 6 “Full Digital” – Full digital encoderBit 7 “Incremental” – A Quad B encoderBit 8 “EnDat 2p1” – Heidenhain EnDat 2.1 command setBit 9 “EnDat 2p2” – Heidenhain EnDat 2.2 command setBit 10 “Hiperface” – Hiperface InterfaceBit 11 “BiSS” – BiSS interfaceBit 12 “SSI” – SSI interfaceBit 13 “Temposonic” – Temposonic linear encoderBit 14 “Stahl” – Stahl linear encoderPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-168 Programming and ParametersFileGroupRead-WriteData TypeNameNo. DescriptionValues8 FB0 CfgFeedback 0 ConfigurationConfigure the position direction, position data format, as well as the baud rate for the serial communication interface for the feedback 0 device.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedSC QuadrantFD Low Baud24-bit ResolDirectionDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueHOST GROUPSFeedback 0Bit 0 “Direction” – Inverts the position direction internally.Bit 1 “24-bit Resol” – If set, the data format of [FB0 Position] is set to 8/24 (8 bit resolution, 24 bits position within one revolution). Otherwise, the dataformat is set to 12/20. It only makes sense to set this bit if the bit “Enh Resol” in parameter [FB0 Identify] is set.Bit 2 “FD Low Baud” – Reduces the communication baud rate from the default setting for the connected encoder with a serial communicationchannel.Bit 3 “SC Quadrant” – Reserved for future use.9 FB0 Loss CfgFeedback 0 Loss ConfigurationConfigures how the drive reacts to an error status condition on the feedback 0device.10 FB0 StsFeedback 0 StatusShows feedback specific errors and alarms for the feedback 0 device.OptionsReservedReservedReservedEncoder AlmReservedUnsupp EncPhase LossQuad LossOpen WireSC AmplitudeSpplyVltRngDiagnosticCommTimeoutMsg ChecksumEncoder ErrDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0Default:Options:0 = Condition False1 = Condition True3 = “FltCoastStop”0 = “Ignore”1 = “Alarm”2 = “Flt Minor”3 = “FltCoastStop”RW 32-bitIntegerBit 0 “Encoder Err” – When asserted, there is an Encoder Error.Bit 1 “Msg Checksum” – When asserted, the module has experienced a checksum error while attempting to communicate to an encoder via the serialcommunication channel.Bit 2 “Timeout” – When asserted, the module has experienced a time out condition while attempting to communicate to the encoder via the serialcommunication channel.Bit 3 “Comm” – When asserted, there was an error (except Checksum and Time Out) while attempting to communicate to an encoder via the serialcommunication channel.Bit 4 “Diagnostic” – When asserted, the module has experienced a diagnostic test failure on power up.Bit 5 “SpplyVltRng” – When asserted, the voltage source to the encoder is out of range.Bit 6 “SC Amplitude” – When asserted, the module detected that the encoder signal amplitude is out of tolerance.Bit 7 “Open Wire” – When asserted, the module has detected an open wire.Bit 8 “Quad Loss” – Indicates that there is a signal quadrature error.Bit 9 “Phase Loss” – Indicates that an A or B signal of an A Quad B Incremental encoder is disconnected.Bit 10 “Unsupp Enc” – Indicates that the connected encoder is not supported.Bit 12 “Encoder Alm” – When asserted, there is an Encoder Alarm.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-169FileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type15 FB0 IncAndSC PPRFeedback 0 Incremental and Sine Cosine Pulses Per RevolutionIndicates the Pulses Per Revolution (Encoder Lines) of the SinCos or A Quad Bencoder for the feedback 0 device.For the following selections, PPR is automatically read from the encoder:• EnDat SC• BiSS SC (not manually configured)• Hiperface SCFor the following selections, PPR has to be entered by the user:• BiSS SC, Manually configured• Gen SinCos• A Quad BUnits: PPRDefault: 1024Min/Max: 1 / 100000RW 32-bitInteger16 FB0 Inc CfgFeedback 0 Incremental ConfigurationConfigures Incremental Feedback for the feedback 0 device.HOST GROUPSFeedback 0OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedSingle EndedReservedEdge ModeA Chan OnlyZ Chan EnblDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueBit 0 “Z Chan Enbl” – When set, Channel Z is also monitored for Phase Loss. When cleared, Channel Z is ignored for Phase Loss detection.Only used if [FB0 Device Sel] = “Inc A B Z”.Bit 1 “A Chan Only” – When set, logic monitors only channel A. When clear, logic monitors both A and B.Bit 2 “Edge Mode” – When set, speed calc uses AB edge data. When clear, speed calc does not use AB edge data.Bit 4 “Single Ended” – This bit has to be set if the connected A Quad B encoder has single ended signals. For these encoders, the Phase Lossdetection is switched off.17 FB0 Inc StsFeedback 0 Incremental StatusDisplays Incremental Feedback status for the feedback 0 device.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedZ Not InputZ InputB Not InputB InputA Not InputA InputA Chan OnlyZ Chan EnblDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueBit 0 “Z Chan Enbl” – Indicates that Channel Z is monitored for Phase Loss. Only used if [FB0 Device Sel] = “Inc A B Z”.Bit 1 “A Chan Only” – Indicates only A channel is monitored, B channel not used.Bit 2 “A Input” – State of encoder A input signalBit 3 “A Not Input” – State of encoder A Not input signalBit 4 “B Input” – State of encoder B input signalBit 5 “B Not Input” – State of encoder B Not input signalBit 6 “Z Input” – State of encoder Z input signalBit 7 “Z Not Input” – State of encoder Z Not input signalPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-170 Programming and ParametersFileGroupRead-WriteData TypeNameNo. DescriptionValues20 FB0 SSI CfgFeedback 0 SSI ConfigurationConfigures the communication to a SSI encoder for the feedback 0 device. Transmission format: [MSB...Position...LSB], [Error Bit]*, [Parity Bit]*.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedDblWordQueryErr Bit EnblGray CodeReservedParity BitDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueHOST GROUPSFeedback 0Bit 0 “Parity Bit” – If set, SSI encoder has to support a parity bit (even parity).Bit 2 “Gray Code” – Enables the gray to binary conversion of the position.Bit 3 “Err Bit Enbl” – If set, there is an error bit transmitted by the encoder.Bit 4 “DblWordQuery” – If set, a Double Word Query is executed at startup which means that the same position is transmitted twice by the encoder. Ifthe two positions are not identical, the “Comm” error bit in [FB0 Sts] is set. This bit only needs to be cleared if the encoder does not support DoubleWord Query and it does not send zeros instead of the second position (which it actually should according to the SSI specification).21 FB0 SSI ResolFeedback 0 SSI ResolutionConfigures the number of bits for the position within one revolution (resolution) ofthe SSI encoder for the feedback 0 device.22 FB0 SSI TurnsFeedback 0 SSI TurnsConfigures the number of bits for the revolutions of the SSI encoder for thefeedback 0 device.25 FB0 Lin CPRFeedback 0 Linear Encoder Counts Per RevolutionSpecifies the counts per motor revolution for a linear encoder for the feedback 0device.26 FB0 Lin Upd RateFeedback Linear Update RateSets the sample rate for the linear channel for the feedback 0 device.27 FB0 LinStahl StsFeedback 0 Linear Stahl StatusDisplays the error status of the linear Stahl encoder for the feedback 0 device.Units: BitsDefault: 13Min/Max: 8 / 32Units: BitsDefault: 12Min/Max: 0 / 16Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 4294967295Default:Options:2 = “1.5 ms”0 = “0.5 ms”1 = “1.0 ms”2 = “1.5 ms“3 = “2.0 ms“RW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerOptionsReservedNo PositionReservedROM ErrorEPROM ErrorRAM ErrorRead Head 2Read Head 1ReservedReservedReservedOutOfRailErrReservedReservedOutOfRailAlmOptics AlarmDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False e1 = Condition TrueBit 0 “Optics Alarm” – Displays an alarm when fiber optics require cleaning.Bit 1 “OutOfRailAlm” – Indicates that the read encoder count is at the maximum value (524,287).Bit 4 “OutOfRailErr” – Indicates that there is no more room between the read head and the rail.Bit 8 “Read Head 1” – Indicates that the read head must be cleaned or installed correctly.Bit 9 “Read Head 2” – Indicates that the read head must be cleaned or installed correctly.Bit 10 “RAM Error” – Indicates a RAM error. Reading head needs to be repaired.Bit 11 “EPROM Error” – Indicates an EPROM error. Reading head needs to be repaired.Bit 12 “ROM Error” – Indicates a ROM error. Reading head needs to be repaired.Bit 14 “No Position” – Indicates that no position value was available. Only happens after power on or reset.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-171FileHOST GROUPSGroupFeedback 1NameNo. Description35 FB1 PositionFeedback 1 PositionDisplays the position value from the feedback 1 device.36 FB1 Device SelFeedback 1 Device SelectSpecifies the encoder type for the feedback 1 device.ValuesDefault: 0Min/Max: 2147483648 / 2147483647Default:Options:0 = “None”0 = “None”1 = “EnDat SC”2 = “Hiperface SC”3 = “BiSS SC”4 = “SSI SC”5 = “EnDat FD ChX”6 = “EnDat FD ChY”7 = “BiSS FD ChX”8 = “BiSS FD ChY”9 = “Reserved”10 = “Reserved”11 = “SinCos Only”12 = “Inc A B Z”13 = “Inc SC”14 = “LinTempo ChX”15 = “LimTempo ChY”16 = “LinStahl ChX”17 = “LinStahl ChY”18 = “LinSSI ChX”19 = “LinSSI ChY”Read-WriteData TypeRO 32-bitIntegerRW Real37 FB1 IdentifyFeedback 1 IdentifyDisplays the used encoder type for the feedback 1 device, e.g. Multi turn, rotary encoder with EnDat 2.1 interface including SIN/COS incrementalsignals.OptionsReservedStahlTemposonicSSIBiSSHiperfaceEnDat 2p2EnDat 2p1IncrementalFull DigitalSin CosEnh ResolMulti TurnSingle TurnLinearRotaryDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueBit 0 “Rotary” – Rotary encoderBit 1 “Linear” – Linear encoder; e.g. Temposonic and StahlBit 2 “Single Turn” – Single turn absolute encoderBit 3 “Multi Turn” – Multiturn absolute encoderBit 4 “Enh Resol” – High resolution encoder. This bit is set if there are more than 24 bits resolution (full digital encoders) or the PPR is greater than orequal to 16384. If this bit is set, bit 1 “24-bit Resol” in parameter [FB1 Cfg] should also be set.Bit 5 “Sin Cos” – SinCos encoderBit 6 “Full Digital” – Full digital encoderBit 7 “Incremental” – A Quad B encoderBit 8 “EnDat 2p1” – Heidenhain EnDat 2.1 command setBit 9 “EnDat 2p2” – Heidenhain EnDat 2.2 command setBit 10 “Hiperface” – Hiperface InterfaceBit 11 “BiSS” – BiSS interfaceBit 12 “SSI” – SSI interfaceBit 13 “Temposonic” – Temposonic linear encoderBit 14 “Stahl” – Stahl linear encoderPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-172 Programming and ParametersFileGroupRead-WriteData TypeNameNo. DescriptionValues38 FB1 CfgFeedback 1 ConfigurationConfigure the position direction, position data format, as well as the baud rate for the serial communication interface for the feedback 1 device.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedSC QuadrantFD Low Baud24-bit ResolDirectionDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueHOST GROUPSFeedback 1Bit 0 “Direction” – Inverts the position direction internally.Bit 1 “24-bit Resol” – If set, the data format of the parameter [FB1 Position] is set to 8/24 (8 bit resolution, 24 bits position within one revolution).Otherwise, the data format is set to 12/20. It only makes sense to set this bit if the bit “Enh Resol” in parameter [FB1 Identify] is set.Bit 2 “FD Low Baud” – Reduces the communication baud rate from the default setting for the connected encoder with a serial communicationchannel.Bit 3 “SC Quadrant” – Reserved for future use.39 FB1 Loss CfgFeedback 1 Loss ConfigurationConfigures how the drive reacts to an error status condition on the feedback 1device.40 FB1 StsFeedback 1 StatusShows feedback specific errors and alarms for the feedback 1 device.OptionsReservedReservedReservedEncoder AlmReservedUnsupp EncPhase LossQuad LossOpen WireSC AmplitudeSpplyVltRngDiagnosticCommTimeoutMsg ChecksumEncoder ErrDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0Default:Options:0 = Condition False1 = Condition True3 = “FltCoastStop”0 = “Ignore”1 = “Alarm”2 = “Flt Minor”3 = “FltCoastStop”RW 32-bitIntegerBit 0 “Encoder Err” – When asserted, there is an Encoder Error.Bit 1 “Msg Checksum” – When asserted, the module has experienced a checksum error while attempting to communicate to an encoder via the serialcommunication channel.Bit 2 “Timeout” – When asserted, the module has experienced a time out condition while attempting to communicate to the encoder via the serialcommunication channel.Bit 3 “Comm” – When asserted, there was an error (except Checksum and Time Out) while attempting to communicate to an encoder via the serialcommunication channel.Bit 4 “Diagnostic” – When asserted, the module has experienced a diagnostic test failure on power up.Bit 5 “SpplyVltRng” – When asserted, the voltage source to the encoder is out of range.Bit 6 “SC Amplitude” – When asserted, the module detected that the encoder signal amplitude is out of tolerance.Bit 7 “Open Wire” – When asserted, the module has detected an open wire.Bit 8 “Quad Loss” – Indicates that there is a signal quadrature error.Bit 9 “Phase Loss” – Indicates that an A or B signal of an A Quad B Incremental encoder is disconnected.Bit 10 “Unsupp Enc” – Indicates that the connected encoder is not supported.Bit 12 “Encoder Alm” – When asserted, there is an Encoder Alarm.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-173FileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type45 FB1 IncAndSC PPRFeedback 1 Incremental and Sine Cosine Pulses Per RevolutionIndicates the Pulses Per Revolution (Encoder Lines) of the SinCos or A Quad Bencoder for the feedback 1 device.For the following selections, PPR is automatically read from the encoder:• EnDat SC• BiSS SC (not manually configured)• Hiperface SCFor the following selections, PPR has to be entered by the user:• BiSS SC, Manually configured• Gen SinCos• A Quad BUnits: PDRDefault: 1024Min/Max: 1 / 100000RW 32-bitInteger46 FB1 Inc CfgFeedback 1 Incremental ConfigurationConfigures Incremental Feedback for the feedback 1 device.HOST GROUPSFeedback 1OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedSingle EndedReservedEdge ModeA Chan OnlyZ Chan EnblDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueBit 0 “Z Chan Enbl” – When set, Channel Z is also monitored for Phase Loss. When cleared, Channel Z is ignored for Phase Loss detection.Only used if [FB1 Device Sel] = “Inc A B Z”.Bit 1 “A Chan Only” – When set, logic monitors only channel A. When clear, logic monitors both A and B.Bit 2 “Edge Mode” – When set, speed calc uses AB edge data. When clear, speed calc does not use AB edge data.Bit 4 “Single Ended” – This bit has to be set if the connected A Quad B encoder has single ended signals. For these encoders, the Phase Lossdetection is switched off.47 FB1 Inc StsFeedback 1 Incremental StatusDisplays Incremental Feedback status for the feedback 1 device.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedZ Not InputZ InputB Not InputB InputA Not InputA InputA Chan OnlyZ Chan EnblDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueBit 0 “Z Chan Enbl” – Indicates that Channel Z is monitored for Phase Loss. Only used if [FB1 Device Sel] = “Inc A B Z”.Bit 1 “A Chan Only” – Indicates only A channel is monitored, B channel not used.Bit 2 “A Input” – State of encoder A input signalBit 3 “A Not Input” – State of encoder A Not input signalBit 4 “B Input” – State of encoder B input signalBit 5 “B Not Input” – State of encoder B Not input signalBit 6 “Z Input” – State of encoder Z input signalBit 7 “Z Not Input” – State of encoder Z Not input signalPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-174 Programming and ParametersFileGroupRead-WriteData TypeNameNo. DescriptionValues50 FB1 SSI CfgFeedback 1 SSI ConfigurationConfigures the communication to a SSI encoder for the feedback 1 device. Transmission format: [MSB...Position...LSB], [Error Bit]*, [Parity Bit]*.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedDblWordQueryErr Bit EnblGray CodeReservedParity BitDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueHOST GROUPSFeedback 1Bit 0 “Parity Bit” – If set, SSI encoder has to support a parity bit (even parity).Bit 2 “Gray Code” – Enables the gray to binary conversion of the position.Bit 3 “Err Bit Enbl” – If set, there is an error bit transmitted by the encoder.Bit 4 “DblWordQuery” – If set, a Double Word Query is executed at startup which means that the same position is transmitted twice by the encoder. Ifthe two positions are not identical, the “Comm” error bit in [FB1 Sts] is set. This bit only needs to be cleared if the encoder does not support DoubleWord Query and it does not send zeros instead of the second position (which it actually should according to the SSI specification).51 FB1 SSI ResolFeedback 1 SSI ResolutionConfigures the number of bits for the position within one revolution (resolution) ofthe SSI encoder for the feedback 1 device.52 FB1 SSI TurnsFeedback 1 SSI TurnsConfigures the number of bits for the revolutions of the SSI encoder for thefeedback 1 device.55 FB1 Lin CPRFeedback 1 Linear Encoder Counts Per RevolutionSpecifies the counts per motor revolution for a linear encoder for the feedback 1device.56 FB1 Lin Upd RateFeedback Linear Update RateSets the sample rate for the linear channel for the feedback 1 device.57 FB1 LinStahl StsFeedback 1 Linear Stahl StatusDisplays the error status of the linear Stahl encoder for the feedback 1 device.Units: BitsDefault: 13Min/Max: 8 / 32Units: BitsDefault: 12Min/Max: 0 / 16Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 4294967295Default:Options:2 = “1.5 ms”0 = “0.5 ms”1 = “1.0 ms”2 = “1.5 ms”3 = “2.0 ms”RW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerOptionsReservedNo PositionReservedROM ErrorEPROM ErrorRAM ErrorRead Head 2Read Head 1ReservedReservedReservedOutOfRailErrReservedReservedOutOfRailAlmOptics AlarmDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueBit 0 “Optics Alarm” – Displays an alarm when fiber optics require cleaning.Bit 1 “OutOfRailAlm” – Indicates that the read encoder count is at the maximum value (524,287).Bit 4 “OutOfRailErr” – Indicates that there is no more room between the read head and the rail.Bit 8 “Read Head 1” – Indicates that the read head must be cleaned or installed correctly.Bit 9 “Read Head 2” – Indicates that the read head must be cleaned or installed correctly.Bit 10 “RAM Error” – Indicates a RAM error. Reading head needs to be repaired.Bit 11 “EPROM Error” – Indicates an EPROM error. Reading head needs to be repaired.Bit 12 “ROM Error” – Indicates a ROM error. Reading head needs to be repaired.Bit 14 “No Position” – Indicates that no position value was available. Only happens after power on or reset.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-175FileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type80 Enc Out SelEncoder Output SelectSelects the Encoder Output. If the feedback 0 or 1 device is configured as AQuad B Z or Hall Sensor, then this parameter has to be set to None. Otherwise,there is an Encoder Output Alarm (Bit 16 of [Module Sts]).Default:Options:0 = “None”0 = “None”1 = “Reserved”2 = “Sine Cosine”3 = “Channel X”4 = “Channel Y”RW 32-bitInteger81 Enc Out ModeEncoder Output ModeConfigures the Encoder Output type.Default:Options:0 = “A Quad B”0 = “A Quad B”1 = “Inv A Quad B”RW 32-bitIntegerHOST GROUPSEncoder Out82 Enc Out FD PPREncoder Output PPRSpecifies the encoder output PPR for the simulated encoder mode ([Enc Out Sel]= “Virtual Master” or “Channel X” or “Channel Y”). In the emulated encoder mode,the SIN/COS signals PPR defines the encoder output PPR.83 Enc Out Z OffsetEncoder Output Z OffsetConfigures the offset of the Z pulse for the emulated/simulated encoder output.The marker offset is specified within one revolution.Default:Options:1 = “1024 PPR”0 = “512 PPR”1 = “1024 PPR”2 = “2048 PPR”3 = “4096 PPR”Units: PPRDefault: 0Min/Max: 0 / 100000RW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitInteger84 Enc Out Z PPREncoder Output Z PPRConfigures the number of Z-Pulses per revolution.Default:Options:0 = “1 Z-Pulse”0 = “1 Z-Pulse”1 = “2 Z-Pulses”2 = “4 Z-Pulses”3 = “8 Z-Pulses”4 = “16 Z-Pulses”5 = “32 Z-Pulses”RW 32-bitIntegerFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type90 Rgsn ArmRegistration ArmSelects Registration Latches to be used.OptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedArm Latch 10Arm Latch 9Arm Latch 8Arm Latch 7Arm Latch 6Arm Latch 5Arm Latch 4Arm Latch 3Arm Latch 2Arm Latch 1Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueHOST GROUPSRegistration91 Rgsn In 0 FilterRegistration Input 0 FilterConfigures a digital filter for the registration input 0. This filter can be used toreject spurious noise. The filter works by waiting a programmed time beforedeciding that the signal is valid. This waiting imposes a mandatory delay in theregistration signal. The filter delay is programmable in increments of 100nanoseconds from 0 (or no delay) up to 1500 nanoseconds.Default:Options:0 = “0 ns”0 = “0 ns”1 = “100 ns”2 = “200 ns”3 = “300 ns”4 = “400 ns”5 = “500 ns”6 = “600 ns”7 = “700 ns”8 = “800 ns”9 = “900 ns”10 = “1000 ns”11 = “1100 ns”12 = “1200 ns”13 = “1300 ns”14 = “1400 ns”15 = “1500 ns”RW RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-176 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData Type92 Rgsn In 1 FilterRegistration Input 1 FilterConfigures a digital filter for the registration input 1. This filter can be used toreject spurious noise. The filter works by waiting a programmed time beforedeciding that the signal is valid. This waiting imposes a mandatory delay in theregistration signal. The filter delay is programmable in increments of 100nanoseconds from 0 (or no delay) up to 1500 nanoseconds.Default:Options:0 = “0 ns”0 = “0 ns”1 = “100 ns”2 = “200 ns”3 = “300 ns”4 = “400 ns”5 = “500 ns”6 = “600 ns”7 = “700 ns”8 = “800 ns”9 = “900 ns”10 = “1000 ns”11 = “1100 ns”12 = “1200 ns”13 = “1300 ns”14 = “1400 ns”15 = “1500 ns”RW RealHOST GROUPSRegistration93 Rgsn HmIn FilterRegistration Home Input FilterConfigures a digital filter for the home input. This filter can be used to rejectspurious noise. The filter works by waiting a programmed time before decidingthat the signal is valid. This waiting imposes a mandatory delay in the registrationsignal. The filter delay is programmable in increments of 100 nanoseconds from 0(or no delay) up to 1500 nanoseconds.Default:Options:0 = “0 ns”0 = “0 ns”1 = “100 ns”2 = “200 ns”3 = “300 ns”4 = “400 ns”5 = “500 ns”6 = “600 ns”7 = “700 ns”8 = “800 ns”9 = “900 ns”10 = “1000 ns”11 = “1100 ns”12 = “1200 ns”13 = “1300 ns”14 = “1400 ns”15 = “1500 ns”RW Real94 Rgsn StsRegistration StatusStatus of the configured registration events.OptionsHome InputRgsn Input 1Rgsn Input 0ReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedLatch10FoundLatch10ArmedLatch9 FoundLatch9 ArmedLatch8 FoundLatch8 ArmedLatch7 FoundLatch7 ArmedLatch6 FoundLatch6 ArmedLatch5 FoundLatch5 ArmedLatch4 FoundLatch4 ArmedLatch3 FoundLatch3 ArmedLatch2 FoundLatch2 ArmedLatch1 FoundLatch1 ArmedDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = False1 = TruePowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-177FileGroupValuesRead-WriteData TypeNo.100103106109112115118121124127NameDescriptionRgsn Latch1 CfgRgsn Latch2 CfgRgsn Latch3 CfgRgsn Latch4 CfgRgsn Latch5 CfgRgsn Latch6 CfgRgsn Latch7 CfgRgsn Latch8 CfgRgsn Latch9 CfgRgsn Latch10 CfgRegistration Latch X ConfigureConfigures Registration Latch 1OptionsReservedStg2EdgeFallStg2EdgeRiseReservedStg2 In b1Stg2 In b0Logic Sel b1Logic Sel b0Stg1EdgeFallStg1EdgeRiseReservedStg1 In b1Stg1 In b0Rev CaptureFwd CaptureChannel SelDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition False1 = Condition TrueHOST GROUPSRegistrationBit 0 “Channel Sel” – Channel select (FB0 or FB1).Bit 1 “Fwd Capture” – Direction select forward.Bit 2 “Rev Capture” – Direction select reverse.Bit 3 “Stg1 In b0” – Latch stage 1 input selection b0Bit 4 “Stg1 In b1” – Latch stage 1 input selection b1Bit 6 “Stg1EdgeRise” – Latch stage 1 edge/level select: Rising edge or high levelBit 7 “Stg1EdgeFall” – Latch stage 1 edge/level select: Falling edge or low levelBit 8 “Logic Sel b0” – Trigger stage combination logicBit 9 “Logic Sel b1” – Trigger stage combination logicBit 10 “Stg2 In b0” – Latch stage 2 input selection b0Bit 11 “Stg2 In b1” – Latch stage 2 input selection b1Bit 13 “Stg2EdgeRise” – Latch stage 2 edge/level select: Rising edge or high levelBit 14 “Stg2EdgeFall” – Latch stage 2 edge/level select: Falling edge or low level101104107110113116119122125128Rgsn Latch1 PsnRgsn Latch2 PsnRgsn Latch3 PsnRgsn Latch4 PsnRgsn Latch5 PsnRgsn Latch6 PsnRgsn Latch7 PsnRgsn Latch8 PsnRgsn Latch9 PsnRgsn Latch10 PsnRegistration Latch X PositionPosition Captured during the Registration Event for Latch X.Rgsn Latch1 TimeRgsn Latch2 TimeRgsn Latch3 TimeRgsn Latch4 TimeRgsn Latch5 TimeRgsn Latch6 TimeRgsn Latch7 TimeRgsn Latch8 TimeRgsn Latch9 TimeRgsn Latch10 TimeRegistration Latch X TimeTime Captured when the Registration Event occurred for Latch X.Default: 0Min/Max: 2147483648 / 2147483647RO 32-bitInteger102105108111114117120123126129Units: CntDefault: 0Min/Max: 0 / 4294967295RO 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-178 Programming and ParametersEmbedded EtherNet/IPParametersFileGroupHOST GROUPSNo.1Thru1617Thru32NameDescription755 DL From Net 01755 DL From Net 16Datalinks From Network 01…16Sets the port number and parameter number to which the selected Datalinksshould connect. Each selected port/parameter will be written with data receivedfrom the network. These are parameters written by the controller (outputs fromthe controller).If setting the value manually, the parameter value = (10000 x port number) +(destination parameter number). For example, suppose you want to use P1 [DLFrom Net 01] to write to Parameter 1 of an optional encoder module plugged intodrive Port 5. The value for P1 [DL From Net 01] would be 50001 [(10000 x 5) + 1].ValuesDefault: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999755 DL To Net 01Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999755 DL To Net 16Datalinks To Network 01…16Sets the port number and parameter number to which the selected Datalinksshould connect. Each selected port/parameter will be read and their valuestransmitted over the network to the controller. These are parameters read by thecontroller (inputs to the controller).If setting the value manually, the parameter value = (10000 x port number) +(origination parameter number). For example, suppose you want to use P17 [DLTo Net 01] to read Parameter 01 of an optional I/O module plugged into drive Port4. The value for P17 [DL To Net 01] would be 40001 [(10000 x 4) + 1].33 755 Port NumberPort numberDisplays the drive port to which the embedded EtherNet/IP adapter is dedicated.This is always Port 13.Default:Value:34 755 DLs From Net ActDefault: 0Datalinks From Network ActualDisplays the number of actual controller-to- drive Datalinks that the driveis using based on the I/O connection opened by the controller.Min/Max: 0 / 1635 755 DLs To Net ActDatalinks To Network ActualDisplays the number of actual drive-to- controller Datalinks that thecontroller is using based on the I/O connection opened by the controller.36 755 BOOTPBOOTPConfigures the adapter to use BOOTP so that you can set its IPaddress, subnet mask, and gateway address with a BOOTP server.When this parameter is disabled, you must use the adapter parametersto set these addressing functions.37 755 Net Addr SrcNetwork Address SourceDisplays the source from which the adapter node address is taken. This will beswitches, Parameters 40…43 [IP Addr Cfg x], or BOOTP. It is determined by thesettings of the octet switches on the adapter. See Establishing A Connection WithEtherNet/IP on page 2-5 for details.1313Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 16Default:Options:Default:Options:1 = “Enabled”0 = “Disabled”1 = “Enable”0 = “Switches”0 = “Switches”1 = “Parameters”2 = “BOOTP”Read-WriteData TypeRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerRO RealRO RealRO RealRW RealRO RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-179FileGroupNo.38394041NameDescription755 IP Addr Cfg 1755 IP Addr Cfg 2755 IP Addr Cfg 3755 IP Addr Cfg 4IP Address Configure 1…4Sets the bytes in the IP address.255 . 255 . 255 . 255ValuesDefault: 0Min/Max: 0 / 255Read-WriteData TypeRW 32-bitInteger42434445[IP Addr Cfg 1][IP Addr Cfg 2][IP Addr Cfg 3]Set with Octet Switch onDrive Main Control BoardImportant: To set the IP address using these parameters, P36 [BOOTP] must beset to “0” (Disabled).755755755Subnet Cfg 1Subnet Cfg 2Subnet Cfg 3Subnet Cfg 4755Subnet Configure 1…4Sets the bytes of the subnet mask.255 . 255 . 255 . 255Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 255RW 32-bitInteger[Subnet Cfg 1][Subnet Cfg 2][Subnet Cfg 3]HOST GROUPS46474849Important: To set the subnet mask using these parameters, P36 [BOOTP] mustbe set to “0” (Disabled).755755755[Subnet Cfg 4]Gateway Cfg 1Gateway Cfg 2Gateway Cfg 3Gateway Cfg 4755Gateway Configure 1…4Sets the bytes of the gateway address.Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 255RW Real255 . 255 . 255 . 255[Gateway Cfg 1][Gateway Cfg 2][Gateway Cfg 3][Gateway Cfg 4]Important: To set the gateway address using these parameters, P36 [BOOTP]must be set to “0” (Disabled).50 755 Net Rate CfgNetwork Rate ConfigureSets the network data rate at which the adapter communicates. (Updates P51[Net Rate Act] after a reset.)51 755 Net Rate ActNetwork Rate ActualDisplays the actual network data rate used by the adapter.Default:Options:Default:Options:0 = “Autodetect”0 = “Autodetect”1 = “10Mbps Full”2 = “10Mbps Half”3 = “100Mbps Full”4 = “100Mbps Half”0 = “No Link”0 = “No Link”1 = “10Mbps Full”2 = “10Mbps Half”3 = “100Mbps Full”4 = “100Mbps Half”5 = “Dup IP Addr”RW 32-bitIntegerRO 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-180 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNameNo. Description52 755 Web EnableWeb EnabledEnables/disables the adapter web page features.53 755 Web FeaturesWeb FeaturesEnables/disables the Web-configurable e-mail notification feature.ValuesDefault:Options:1 = “Enabled”0 = “Disabled”1 = “Enabled”Read-WriteData TypeRW 32-bitIntegerOptionsReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedE-mail CfgDefault 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Disabled1 = Enabled54 755 Comm Flt ActionDefault:Communication Fault ActionOptions:Sets the action that the adapter and drive will take if the adapter detectsthat I/O communications have been disrupted. This setting is effectiveonly if I/O that controls the drive is transmitted through the adapter.0 = “Fault”0 = “Fault”1 = “Stop”2 = “Zero Data”3 = “Hold Last”4 = “Send Flt Cfg”RW 32-bitIntegerHOST GROUPS!55 755 Idle Flt ActionATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. P54 [Comm Flt Action] lets you determine theaction of the adapter and connected drive if I/O communications are disrupted. By default, this parameterfaults the drive. You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run. Precautions should be taken toensure that the setting of this parameter does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage. Whencommissioning the drive, verify that your system responds correctly to various situations (for example, adisconnected cable).Idle Fault ActionSets the action that the adapter and drive will take if the adapter detects that thecontroller is in program mode or faulted. This setting is effective only if I/O thatcontrols the drive is transmitted through the adapter.Default:Options:0 = “Fault”0 = “Fault”1 = “Stop”2 = “Zero Data”3 = “Hold Last”4 = “Send Flt Cfg”RW 32-bitInteger!ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. P55 [Idle Flt Action] lets you determine theaction of the adapter and connected drive when the controller is idle. By default, this parameter faults thedrive. You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run. Precautions should be taken to ensure thatthe setting of this parameter does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage. When commissioning thedrive, verify that your system responds correctly to various situations (for example, a controller in idle state).56 755 Peer Flt ActionPeer Fault ActionSets the action that the adapter and drive will take if the adapter detects that PeerI/O communications have been disrupted. This setting is effective only if I/O istransmitted through the adapter.Default:Options:0 = “Fault”0 = “Fault”1 = “Stop”2 = “Zero Data”3 = “Hold Last”4 = “Send Flt Cfg”RW 32-bitInteger!ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. P56 [Peer Flt Action] lets you determine theaction of the adapter and connected drive if the adapter is unable to communicate with the designated peer.By default, this parameter faults the drive. You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run.Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create a risk of injury orequipment damage. When commissioning the drive, verify that your system responds correctly to varioussituations (for example, a disconnected cable).PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-181FileGroupNameNo. Description57 755 Msg Flt ActionMessage Fault ActionSets the action that the adapter and drive will take if the adapter detects thatexplicit messaging, only when used for drive control via PCCC and the CIPRegister Object, has been disrupted.ValuesDefault:Options:0 = “Fault”0 = “Fault”1 = “Stop”2 = “Zero Data”3 = “Hold Last”4 = “Send Flt Cfg”Read-WriteData TypeRW 32-bitInteger!ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. P57 [Msg Flt Action] lets you determine theaction of the adapter and connected drive if explicit messaging for drive control is disrupted. By default, thisparameter faults the drive. You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run. Precautions should betaken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage. Whencommissioning the drive, verify that your system responds correctly to various situations (for example, adisconnected cable).HOST GROUPS58 755 Flt Cfg LogicDefault:Fault Configure LogicSets the Logic Command data that is sent to the drive if any of the following is Min/Max:true:• P54 [Comm Flt Action] is set to 4 “Send Flt Cfg” and I/O communications aredisrupted.• P55 [Idle Flt Action] is set to 4 “Send Flt Cfg” and the controller is idle.• P56 [Peer Flt Action] is set to 4 “Send Flt Cfg” and Peer I/O communicationsare disrupted.• P57 [Msg Flt Action] is set to 4 “Send Flt Cfg” and explicit messaging for drivecontrol is disrupted.The bit definitions in the Logic Command word for PowerFlex 750-Series drivesare shown in Appendix A.59 755 Flt Cfg RefFault Configure ReferenceSets the Reference data that is sent to the drive if any of the following is true:• P54 [Comm Flt Action] is set to 4 “Send Flt Cfg” and I/O communications aredisrupted.• P55 [Idle Flt Action] is set to 4 “Send Flt Cfg” and the controller is idle.• P56 [Peer Flt Action] is set to 4 “Send Flt Cfg” and Peer I/O communicationsare disrupted.• P57 [Msg Flt Action] is set to 4 “Send Flt Cfg” and explicit messaging for drivecontrol is disrupted.60Thru750000 0000 0000 00000000 0000 0000 00000000 0000 0000 00000000 0000 0000 00001111 1111 1111 11111111 1111 1111 1111755755Flt Cfg DL 01Flt Cfg DL 16Default:Min/Max:00 / 4294967295Fault Configure DeviceLogixSets the data that is sent to the Datalink in the drive if any of the following is true:• P54 [Comm Flt Action] is set to 4 “Send Flt Cfg” and I/O communications aredisrupted.• P55 [Idle Flt Action] is set to 4 “Send Flt Cfg” and the controller is idle.• P56 [Peer Flt Action] is set to 4 “Send Flt Cfg” and Peer I/O communicationsare disrupted.• P57 [Msg Flt Action] is set to 4 “Send Flt Cfg” and explicit messaging for drivecontrol is disrupted.76 755 DLs Fr Peer CfgDatalinks From Peer ConfigureSets the number of network-to-drive Datalinks (parameters) that are used forpeer I/O. The Datalinks being used are allocated from the end of the list. Forexample, if this parameter's value is set to 3, Datalinks 14…16 are allocated forthe three selected Datalinks. The Datalinks allocated for peer I/O cannot overlapwith other assigned DL From Net 01…16 parameters.77 755 DLs Fr Peer ActDatalinks From Peer ActionDisplays the value of P76 [DLs Fr Peer Cfg] at the time the drive was reset. Thisis the number of actual peer-to-drive Datalinks that the drive is expecting.RW RealDefault: 0RW RealMin/Max: –/+3.40282 x 10 38Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 16Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 16RW RealRW RealRO RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-182 Programming and ParametersFileGroupNameNo. Description78 755 Logic Src CfgLogic Source ConfigureControls which of the peer-to-drive Datalinks contain the Logic Command for thedrive.79 755 Ref Src CfgReference Source ConfigureControls which of the peer-to-drive Datalinks contain the Reference for the drive.80 755 Fr Peer Timeout81828384From Peer TimeoutSets the timeout for a Peer I/O connection. If the time is reached without theadapter receiving (consuming) a message, the adapter will respond with theaction specified in P56 [Peer Flt Action].In an adapter receiving (consuming) Peer I/O, the value of this parameter must begreater than the product of the value of P89 [To Peer Period] in the adaptertransmitting (producing) Peer I/O multiplied by the value of P90 [To Peer Skip] inthe adapter transmitting (producing) Peer I/O.755755755Fr Peer Addr 1Fr Peer Addr 2Fr Peer Addr 3Fr Peer Addr 4755From Peer Address 1…4Sets the bytes in the IP address that specifies the device from which the adapterreceives (consumes) Peer I/O data.255 . 255 . 255 . 255ValuesDefault: 0Min/Max: 0 / 16Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 16Units: SecsDefault: 10.00Min/Max: 0.01 / 10.00Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 255Read-WriteData TypeRW RealRW RealRW RealRW RealHOST GROUPS[Peer Inp Addr 1][Peer Inp Addr 2][Peer Inp Addr 3][Peer Inp Addr 4]Important: The Peer Inp Addr must be on the same subnet as the embeddedEtherNet/IP adapter.Changes to these parameters are ignored when P85 [Fr Peer Enable] is “1” (On).85 755 Fr Peer EnableFrom Peer EnableControls whether Peer I/O input is operating. A value of 0 “Off” turns off Peer I/Oinput. A value of 1 “Cmd/Ref” overrides the settings in Parameters P76 [DLs FrPeer Cfg], P78 [Logic Src Cfg], and P79 [Ref Src Cfg] and automatically usespeer Datalink 01 as the drive's present Logic Command and peer Datalink 02 asthe drive's Reference. A value of 2 “Custom” enables peer I/O input using theDatalink count and settings provided by the user.86 755 Fr Peer StatusFrom Peer StatusDisplays the status of the consumed Peer I/O input connection.87 755 DLs To Peer CfgDatalinks To Peer ConfigureSets the number of drive-to-network Datalinks (parameters) that are used forPeer I/O. The Datalinks being used are allocated from the end of the list. Forexample, if this parameter's value is set to 3, Datalinks 14…16 are allocated forthe three selected Datalinks. The Datalinks allocated for this cannot overlap withother assigned DL To Net 01…16 parameters.88 755 DLs To Peer ActDatalinks To Peer ActionDisplays the value of P87 [DLs To Peer Cfg] at the time the drive was reset. Thisis the number of actual drive-to-peer Datalinks that the drive is expecting.Default:Options:Default:Options:Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 16Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 160 = “Off”0 = “Off”1 = “Cmd/Ref”2 = “Custom”0 = “Off”0 = “Off”1 = “Waiting”2 = “Running”3 = “Faulted”RW 32-bitIntegerRO 32-bitIntegerRW RealRO RealPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Programming and Parameters 3-183FileGroupHOST GROUPSNameNo. Description89 755 To Peer PeriodTo Peer PeriodSets the minimum time that an adapter will wait when transmitting data to a peer.Important: Changes to this parameter are ignored when P91 [To Peer Enable] is0 “Off.”90 755 To Peer SkipTo Peer SkipSets the maximum time that an adapter will wait when transmitting data to a peer.The value of P89 [To Peer Period] is multiplied by the value of this parameter toset the time.Important: Changes to this parameter are ignored when P91 [To Peer Enable] is0 “Off.”91 755 To Peer EnableTo Peer EnableControls whether Peer I/O output is operating. A value of 0 “Off” turns off Peer I/Ooutput. A value of 1 “Cmd/Ref” overrides the settings in Parameters P31 [DL ToNet 15], P32 [DL To Net 16], P76 [DLs Fr Peer Cfg], and P77 [DLs Fr Peer Act],and automatically sends the drive's present Logic Command (as Datalink 01) andReference (as Datalink 02). A value of 2 “Custom” enables Peer I/O output usingthe Datalink count and settings provided by the user.ValuesUnits: SecsDefault: 10.00Min/Max: 0.01 / 10.00Default: 1Min/Max: 1 / 16Default:Options:0 = “Off”0 = “Off”1 = “Cmd/Ref”2 = “Custom”Read-WriteData TypeRW RealRW RealRW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

3-184 Programming and ParametersNotes:PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Chapter 4TroubleshootingThis chapter provides information to guide through troubleshootingPowerFlex 750-Series faults and alarms.For information on...See pageFaults, Alarms and Configurable Conditions 4-1Drive Status Indicators 4-2Manually Clearing Faults 4-3Drive Fault and Alarm Descriptions 4-4Common Symptoms and Corrective Actions 4-20Faults, Alarms andConfigurable ConditionsA fault is a condition that stops the drive. There are three types of faults.TypeDescriptionAuto Reset Run When this type of fault occurs, and P348 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is set to a value greaterthan “0,” a user-configurable timer, P349 [Auto Rstrt Delay] begins. When the timerreaches zero, the drive attempts to automatically reset the fault. If the condition thatcaused the fault is no longer present, the fault will be reset and the drive will berestarted. “Auto Reset Run” faults are identified by “Y” in the “Auto Reset” column inTable 4.C on page 4-4.Resettable This type of fault can be cleared. Resettable faults are identified by “ResettableFault” in the “Type” column in Table 4.C.Non-Resettable This type of fault normally requires drive or motor repair. The cause of the fault mustbe corrected before the fault can be cleared. The fault will be reset on power upafter repair. Non-Resettable faults are identified by “Non-Reset Fault” in the “Type”column in Table 4.C.An alarm is a condition that, if left unaddressed, may stop the drive ifrunning or prevent starting of the drive. There are two types of alarms.TypeAlarm 1Alarm 2DescriptionAlarms of type 1 indicate that a condition exists. Type 1 alarms are userconfigurable.Alarms of type 2 indicate that a configuration error exists and the drive cannot bestarted. Type 2 alarms are non-configurable.User configurable conditions can be enabled as an alarm or fault.TypeConfigurableDescriptionEvent action is enabled/disabled by the parameter identified in the “ConfigurationParameter” column of Table 4.C.Options“Ignore” (0) – No action.“Alarm” (1) – Type 1 alarm indicated.“Flt Minor” (2) – Minor fault indicated. If running, drive continues to run. Enablewith P950 [Minor Flt Config]. If not enabled, acts like a major fault.“FltCoastStop” (3) – Major fault indicated. Coast to Stop.“Flt RampStop” (4) – Major fault indicated. Ramp to Stop.“Flt CL Stop” (5) – Major fault indicated. Current Limit Stop.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

87 94 5 612 0387 94 5 6132 04-2 TroubleshootingDrive Status IndicatorsThe condition or state of the drive is constantly monitored and is indicatedthrough the LEDs and/or the HIM (if present).PowerFlex 753PowerFlex 755Table 4.A PowerFlex 753 Drive Status Indicator DescriptionsName Color State DescriptionSTS Green Flashing Drive ready but not running, and no faults are present.(Status)Steady Drive running, no faults are present.Yellow Flashing Drive is not running, a type 2 (non-configurable) alarm conditionexists and the drive cannot be started.Steady Drive is not running, a type 1 alarm condition exists. The drive can bestarted.Red Flashing A major fault has occurred. Drive will stop. Drive cannot be starteduntil fault condition is cleared.Steady A non-resettable fault has occurred.Red / Flashing A minor fault has occurred. When running, the drive continues to run.Yellow Alternately System is brought to a stop under system control. Fault must becleared to continue. Use parameter 950 [Minor Flt Config] to enable.If not enabled, acts like a major fault.Yellow / Flashing When running, a type 1 alarm exists.Green AlternatelyGreen /RedFlashingAlternatelyDrive is flash updating.Table 4.B PowerFlex 755 Drive Status Indicator DescriptionsName Color State DescriptionSTS Green Flashing Drive ready but not running, and no faults are present.(Status)Steady Drive running, no faults are present.Yellow Flashing Drive is not running, a type 2 (non-configurable) alarm conditionexists and the drive cannot be started.Steady Drive is not running, a type 1 alarm condition exists. The drive can bestarted.Red Flashing A major fault has occurred. Drive will stop. Drive cannot be starteduntil fault condition is cleared.Steady A non-resettable fault has occurred.Red / Flashing A minor fault has occurred. When running, the drive continues to run.Yellow Alternately System is brought to a stop under system control. Fault must becleared to continue. Use parameter 950 [Minor Flt Config] to enable.If not enabled, acts like a major fault.Yellow / Flashing When running, a type 1 alarm exists.Green AlternatelyGreen / Flashing Drive is flash updating.Red AlternatelyENET Unlit Off Adapter and/or network is not powered, adapter is not properlyconnected to the network, or adapter needs an IP address.Red Flashing An EtherNet/IP connection has timed out.Steady Adapter failed the duplicate IP address detection test.Red / Flashing Adapter is performing a self-test.Green AlternatelyGreen Flashing Adapter is properly connected but is not communicating with anydevices on the network.Steady Adapter is properly connected and communicating on the network.LINK Unlit Off Adapter is not powered or is not transmitting on the network.Green Flashing Adapter is properly connected and transmitting data packets on thenetwork.Steady Adapter is properly connected but is not transmitting on the network.Important: The Status Indicator LEDs on the HIM cradle do not indicate the current status of an installedCommunication Adapter option. If an optional Communication Adapter is installed, refer to thatoption’s user manual for a description of LED location and indication.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Troubleshooting 4-3HIM IndicationFault Display ScreenThe pop-up Fault Display screen automatically appears when a faultcondition for the Host Drive or any connected peripheral is detected. Thepop-up Fault Display screen flashes to alert that a fault condition exists.This screen displays the:• Fault Code number (See Fault and Alarm Display Codes on page 4-4.)• Fault description• Elapsed time (in hh:mm:ss format) from fault detectionFigure 4.1 Pop-Up/Flashing Fault Display ScreenESCStopped0.00 Hz– – FAULTED – –Fault Code 81Port 1 DPI LossElapsed Time 01:26:37AUTOFCLRSoft Key FunctionsLabel Name DescriptionESC Escape Reverts back to the previous screen without clearing the fault.CLR Clear Removes the pop-up Fault Display screen from the displayand clears the fault.Single Function KeyKey Name DescriptionStopRemoves the pop-up Fault Display screen from the displayand clears the fault.Manually Clearing FaultsStep1. Press the “Clear” soft key to acknowledge the fault. The fault information will beremoved so that you can use the HIM.2. Address the condition that caused the fault.The cause must be corrected before the fault can be cleared.3. After corrective action has been taken, clear the fault by one of these methods:• Press Stop (if running the drive will stop)• Cycle drive power• Select the “Clear” soft key on the HIM Diagnostic folder Faults menu.Key(s)CLRPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

4-4 TroubleshootingFault and Alarm DisplayCodesEvent numbers for PowerFlex 750-Series faults and alarms are displayed inone of three formats.• Port 00 (Host Drive) displays the event number only. For example, Fault3 “Power Loss” is displayed as:Fault Code 3.• Ports 01 through 09 use the format PEEE, indicating port number (P) andevent number (EEE). For example, Fault 1 “Analog In Loss” on an I/Omodule installed in Port 4 is displayed as:Fault Code 4001.• Ports 10 through 14 use the format PPEEE, indicating port number (PP)and event number (EEE). For example, Fault 37 “Net IO Timeout” onPort 14 is displayed as:Fault Code 14037.Drive Fault and AlarmDescriptionsThe table below contains a list of drive-specific faults and alarms, the typeof fault or alarm, the action taken when the drive faults, the parameter usedto configure the fault or alarm (if applicable), and a description and action(where applicable).EventNo. Fault/Alarm Text TypeFaultActionConfigurationParameter0 No Entry2 Auxiliary Input Resettable CoastFault3 Power Loss Configurable P449[Power Loss Actn]4 UnderVoltage Configurable P460[UnderVltg Action]Table 4.C Drive Fault and Alarm Types, Descriptions and ActionsAutoResetYYDescription/Action(s)An auxiliary input interlock is open.The DC bus voltage remained below the P451/P454 [PwrLoss X Level] of nominal for longer than the timeprogrammed in P452/P455 [Pwr Loss X Time].If the bus voltage, P11 [DC Bus Volts] falls below the valueset in P461 [UnderVltg Level] an undervoltage conditionexists.5 OverVoltage Resettable Coast Y The DC bus voltage exceeded the maximum value.Fault7 Motor Overload Configurable P410Y An internal electronic overload trip has occurred.[Motor OL Actn]8 Heatsink OvrTemp ResettableFaultCoast Y The heatsink temperature has exceeded 100% of the drivetemperature.9 Trnsistr OvrTemp ResettableFaultCoast Y The output transistors have exceeded the maximumoperating temperature.10 DynBrake OvrTemp Alarm 1 The dynamic brake resistor has exceeded its maximumoperating temperature.12 HW OverCurrent ResettableFaultCoast Y The drive output current has exceeded the hardware currentlimit.13 Ground Fault ResettableFaultCoast Y A current path to earth ground greater than 25% of driverating has occurred.14 Ground Warning Configurable The ground current has exceeded the level set in P467[Ground Warn Lvl].15 Load Loss Configurable P441[Load Loss Action]The output torque current is below the value programmed inP442 [Load Loss Level] for a time period greater than thetime programmed in P443 [Load Loss Time].17 Input Phase Loss Configurable P462[InPhase LossActn]The DC bus ripple has exceeded a preset level.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Troubleshooting 4-5EventFault ConfigurationNo. Fault/Alarm Text Type Action Parameter18 Motor PTC Trip Configurable P250[PTC Config]20 TorqPrv Spd Band Resettable CoastFault21 Output PhaseLoss Configurable P444[OutPhaseLossActn]24 Decel Inhibit Configurable P409[Dec Inhibit Actn]25 OverSpeed Limit ResettableFaultDescription/Action(s)Motor PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) overtemperature.The difference between P2 [Commanded SpdRef] and P3[Mtr Vel Fdbk] has exceeded the level programmed in P1105[Speed Dev Band] for a time period greater than the timeprogrammed in P1106 [SpdBand Intgrtr].The current in one or more phases has been lost or remainsbelow a preset level.The drive is not following a commanded decelerationbecause it is attempting to limit the bus voltage.Coast Y The motor operating speed exceeds the limit set by themaximum speed setting P524 [Overspeed Limit]. Forforward motor rotation, this limit is P520 [Max Fwd Speed] +P524 [Overspeed Limit]. For reverse motor rotation, this limitis P521 [Max Rev Speed] - P524 [Overspeed Limit]. Whenflux vector control modes are selected in P35 [Motor CtrlMode] the motor operating speed is determined by P131[Active Vel Fdbk]. For all other non-flux vector controlmodes, the motor operating speed is determined by P1[Output Frequency].26 Brake Slipped Alarm 1 The encoder movement has exceeded the level in P1110[Brk Slip Count] after the brake was set and the brake slipmaneuver is controlling the drive. (Drive is active.)Alarm 2The encoder movement has exceeded the level in P1110[Brk Slip Count] after the brake was set and the brake slipmaneuver is finished. (Drive is stopped.)27 Torq Prove Cflct Alarm 2 When P1100 [Trq Prove Cfg] is enabled, P35 [Motor CtrlMode], P125 [Pri Vel Fdbk Sel] and P135 [Mtr Psn Fdbk Sel]must be properly set. If these parameters point to afeedback module, the module parameters must also beproperly set.28 TrqProv EnclsCfg Alarm 2 Encoderless TorqProve has been enabled but user has notread and understood application concerns of encoderlessoperation. Read the “Attention” on page C-4 relating to theuse of TorqProve with no encoder.29 Analog In Loss Configurable 263Analog input has a lost signal.[Anlg In0 LssActn]33 AuRsts Exhausted ResettableFaultCoastThe drive unsuccessfully attempted to reset a fault andresume running for the programmed number of tries.36 SW OverCurrent ResettableFaultCoast Y The drive output current has exceeded the 1 ms currentrating. This rating is greater than the 3 second current ratingand less than the hardware overcurrent fault level. It istypically 200…250% of the drive continuous rating.CoastA phase to ground fault has been detected between thedrive and motor in this phase.3839Phase U to GndPhase V to GndResettableFault40 Phase W to Gnd41 Phase UV Short Resettable CoastExcessive current has been detected between these two42 Phase VW Short Faultoutput terminals.43 Phase WU Short44 Phase UNot ToGnd Resettable CoastA phase to ground fault has been detected between the45 Phase VNot ToGnd Faultdrive and motor in this phase.46 Phase WNot ToGnd48 Params Defaulted Resettable CoastThe drive was commanded to write default values.Fault49 Drive Powerup – A Power Up Marker in the Fault Queue indicating that thedrive power cycled.51 Clr Fault Queue – Indication that the fault queue has been cleared.55 Crtl Bd Overtemp ResettableFaultCoastAutoResetThe temperature sensor on the main control board detectedexcessive heat. See product temperature requirement.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

4-6 TroubleshootingEventFault Configuration AutoNo. Fault/Alarm Text Type Action Parameter Reset Description/Action(s)58 Module Defaulted Resettable CoastThe module was commanded to write default values.Fault59 Invalid Code Resettable CoastInternal error.Fault61 Shear Pin 1 Configurable P435[Shear Pin 1 Actn]Y The programmed value in P436 [Shear Pin1 Level] has beenexceeded.62 Shear Pin 2 Configurable P438[Shear Pin 2 Actn]Y The programmed value in P439 [Shear Pin2 Level] has beenexceeded.64 Drive OverLoad Alarm 1 Y P940 [Drive OL Count] has exceeded 50% but is less than100%.ResettableFaultCoastP940 [Drive OL Count] has exceeded 100%. Reduce themechanical load on the drive.67 Pump Off Alarm 1 Pump Off condition has been detected.71 Port 1 Adapter Resettable CoastThe DPI communications option has a fault.72 Port 2 Adapter FaultSee device event queue.73 Port 3 Adapter74 Port 4 Adapter75 Port 5 Adapter76 Port 6 Adapter77 IR Volts Range Alarm 2 The default for P70 [Autotune] is 1 “Calculate” and the valuecalculated from the motor nameplate values returned avalue for P73 [IR Voltage Drop] which is not in the range ofacceptable values.ResettableFaultCoastP70 [Autotune] is set to 2 “Static Tune” or 3 “Rotate Tune”and the value measured by the Autotune procedure for P73[IR Voltage Drop] is not in the range of acceptable values.78 FluxAmpsRef Rang Alarm 2 The default for P70 [Autotune] is 1 “Calculate” and the valuefor flux amps determined by the Autotune procedureexceeds the value programmed in P26 [Motor NP Amps].ResettableFaultCoastP70 [Autotune] is set to 2 “Static Tune” or 3 “Rotate Tune”and the value for flux amps measured by the Autotuneprocedure exceeds the value programmed in P26 [Motor NPAmps].The motor did not come up to speed in the allotted timeduring Autotune.The Autotune function was manually canceled or a faultoccurred.79 Excessive Load ResettableFaultCoast80 AutoTune Aborted Resettable CoastFault81 Port 1 DPI Loss Resettable CoastThe DPI port stopped communicating.82 Port 2 DPI Loss FaultCheck connections and drive grounding.83 Port 3 DPI Loss84 Port 4 DPI Loss85 Port 5 DPI Loss86 Port 6 DPI Loss87 IXo VoltageRange Alarm 2 The default for P70 [Autotune] is 1 “Calculate” and thevoltage calculated for motor inductive impedance exceeds25% of the value of P25 [Motor NP Volts].ResettableFaultCoast91 Pri VelFdbk Loss Configurable Note: See optionmodule for configparameter number93 Hw Enable Check ResettableFaultCoastP70 [Autotune] is set to 2 “Static Tune” or 3 “Rotate Tune”and the voltage measured for motor inductive impedanceexceeds 25% of the value of P25 [Motor NP Volts].A Feedback Loss has been detected for the source of P134[Aux Vel Feedback]. This could be due to a problemdetected by the feedback option module selected by P125[Pri Vel Fdbk Sel] or due to a loss in communication betweenthe feedback option module and main control board. Thesource of primary velocity feedback must be configured notto fault if the feedback loss switchover feature is used.Hardware enable is disabled (jumper installed) but indicatesnot enabled.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Troubleshooting 4-7EventFault ConfigurationNo. Fault/Alarm Text Type Action Parameter94 Alt VelFdbk Loss Configurable Note: See optionmodule for configparameter numberDescription/Action(s)A Feedback Loss has been detected for the source of P128[Alt Vel Fdbk Sel]. This could be due to a problem detectedby the feedback option module selected by P128 [Alt VelFdbk Sel] or due to a loss in communication between thefeedback option module and main control board.95 Aux VelFdbk Loss Configurable A Feedback Loss has been detected for the source of P132[Aux Vel Fdbk Sel]. This could be due to a problem detectedby the feedback option module selected by P132 [Aux VelFdbk Sel] or due to a loss in communication between thefeedback option module and main control board.96 PositionFdbkLoss Configurable A Feedback Loss has been detected for the source of P847[Psn Fdbk]. This could be due to a problem detected by thefeedback option module selected by P135 [Mtr Psn FdbkSel] or due to a loss in communication between thefeedback option module and main control board.97 Auto Tach Switch ResettableFault100 Parameter Chksum ResettableFault104 Pwr Brd Checksum Non-ResetFault106 Incompat MCB-PB Non-ResetFault107 Replaced MCB-PB ResettableFault108 Anlg Cal Chksum Non-ResetFaultCoastCoastCoastCoastCoastIndication that either of the two following conditions exists.• Tach switch has occurred and alternate feedback devicehas failed.• Tach switch has not occurred, Auto Tach Switch Option isenabled and both primary and alternate devices havefailed.The checksum read from the non-volatile storage does notmatch the checksum calculated. Data set to default value.The checksum read from the non-volatile storage does notmatch the checksum calculated. Data set to default value.The main control board did not recognize the powerstructure. Flash with newer Application version.The main control board was moved to a different powerstructure. Data set to default values.The checksum read from the analog calibration data doesnot match the checksum calculated. Replace main controlboard.Power structure ID invalid. Flash with newer Applicationversion.Power structure needs newer Application version. Flash withnewer Application version.Internal data error.111 PwrBd Invalid ID Non-ResetFaultCoast112 PwrBd App MinVer Resettable CoastFault113 Tracking DataErr Resettable CoastFault115 PwrDn Table Full Resettable CoastInternal data error.Fault116 PwrDnEntry2Large Resettable CoastInternal data error.Fault117 PwrDn Data Chksm Resettable CoastInternal data error.Fault118 PwrBd PwrDn Chks Resettable CoastInternal data error.Fault124 App ID Changed Resettable CoastApplication Firmware changed. Verify Application version.Fault125 Using Backup App Resettable CoastApplication did not flash correctly. Reflash.Fault134 Start On PowerUp Alarm 1 When P345 [Start At PowerUp] is enabled, an alarm will beset for the time programmed in P346 [PowerUp Delay].137 Ext Prechrg Err Configurable P323The seal contact on the external precharge contactor has[Prchrg Err Cfg]opened (as signalled by P190 [DI Prchrg Seal]) while the138 Precharge Open ResettableFault141 Autn Enc Angle ResettableFaultCoastCoastAutoResetdrive was running (PWM was active).The internal precharge was commanded to open while thedrive was running (PWM was active). The internal fault latchwill be automatically cleared when PWM is disabled.P78 [Encdrlss AngComp] is out of range.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

4-8 TroubleshootingEventNo. Fault/Alarm Text TypeFaultActionConfigurationParameterAutoReset Description/Action(s)142 Autn Spd Rstrct ResettableFaultCoastFrequency limit settings are preventing the drive fromreaching a suitable speed during an Inertia Tune test.143 Autotune CurReg ResettableFaultCoastCalculated values for P96 [VCL Cur Reg Kp] and/or P97[VCL Cur Reg Ki] are out of range.144 Autotune Inertia ResettableFaultCoastResults from the Inertia Tune test out of range for P76 [TotalInertia].145 Autotune Travel ResettableFaultCoastWhen P77 [Inertia Test Lmt] is set, the Inertia Tune test wasprevented from reaching a suitable speed to run the test.152 No Stop Source Resettable CoastLast stop source has been removed.Fault155 Bipolar Conflict Alarm 2 P308 [Direction Mode] is set to 1 “Bipolar” or 2 “Rev Disable”and one or more digital input is enabled for direction control.157 DigIn Cfg B Alarm 2 Digital input conflict. Correct Digital Input configuration.158 DigIn Cfg C Alarm 2 Digital input conflict. Correct Digital Input configuration.161 Sleep Cfg Alarm 2 There is a Sleep/Wake configuration error. With Sleep WakeMode = Direct, possible causes include:Drive is stopped and Wake Level < Sleep Level.Stop=CF, Run, Run Fwd, or Run Rev is not configured inDigital Input functions.162 Waking Alarm 2 The Wake timer is counting toward a value that will start thedrive.168 HeatSinkUnderTmp ResettableFaultHeatsink temperature sensor is reporting a value below-18.7 °C (-1.66 °F) or the sensor feedback circuit is open.169 PWM Freq Reduced Alarm 1 The PWM Frequency has been reduced from the value setin P38 [PWM Frequency] due to excessive IGBT junctiontemperatures.170 CurLimit Reduced Alarm 1 The current limit value has been reduced from the value setin P422/423 [Current Limit X] due to excessive IGBT junctiontemperatures or P940 [Drive OL Count] = 95%.171 Adj Vltg Ref Alarm 1 Invalid adjustable voltage reference selection conflict.177 Profiling Active Alarm 1 The Profile/Indexer is active.178 Homing Active Alarm 1 The Homing function is active.179 Home Not Set Alarm 1 The Home position was not set before profile operation.185 Freq Conflict Alarm 2 Indicates that the values of P520 [Max Fwd Speed] andP521 [Max Rev Speed] are in conflict with the value of P63[Break Frequency].186 VHz Neg Slope Alarm 2 Indicates that the V/Hz curve segment resulted in a negativeV/Hz slope.187 VHz Boost Limit Alarm 2 Indication that one of the two following conditions exists.• P60 [Start/Acc Boost] and P61 [Run Boost] are greaterthan P25 [Motor NP Volts] x 0.25 when P65 [VHz Curve]= 0 “Custom V/Hz.”• P61 [Run Boost] is greater than P25 [Motor NP Volts] x0.25 when P65 [VHz Curve] = 1 “Fan/Pump.”190 PM FV Pri Fdbk Alarm 2 Indicates a control mode and primary feedback deviceconfiguration error. P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode] is set to a fluxvector “FV” control mode, P125 [Pri Vel Fdbk Sel] is set to137 (port 0, P137 [Open Loop Fdbk]).191 PM FV Alt Fdbk Alarm 2 Indicates a control mode and alternate feedback deviceconfiguration error. P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode] is set to a fluxvector “FV” control mode, P635 [Spd Options Ctrl] is set tobit 7 “Auto Tach SW,” P125 [Pri Vel Fdbk Sel] is set to 137(port 0, P137 [Open Loop Fdbk]).192 Fwd Spd Lim Cfg Alarm 2 The forward speed reference is out of range.Verify the settings of P38 [PWM Frequency] and P520 [MaxFwd Speed]. Lower carrier frequencies reduce the outputfrequency range.Verify that P522 [Min Fwd Speed] is less than P520 [MaxFwd Speed].PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Troubleshooting 4-9EventFault Configuration AutoNo. Fault/Alarm Text Type Action Parameter Reset Description/Action(s)193 Rev Spd Lim Cfg Alarm 2 The reverse speed reference is out of range.Verify the settings of P38 [PWM Frequency] and P521 [MaxRev Speed]. Lower carrier frequencies reduce the outputfrequency range.Verify that P523 [Min Rev Speed] is less than P521 [MaxRev Speed].203 Port 13 Adapter ResettableFaultCoastThe embedded EtherNet/IP adapter has a fault. SeeEtherNet event queue.204 Port 14 Adapter Resettable CoastThe DeviceLogix adapter has a fault.Fault205 DPI TransportErr Alarm 1 A DPI Communication Error has occurred.210 HW En Jumper Out ResettableFaultCoastA Safety Option module is present and Jumper J1 ENABLEis removed. Install the jumper.211 Safety Brd Fault ResettableFaultCoastA Safety option module has indicated a fault. Verify thatJumper J1 ENABLE is installed. Reset or power cycle drive.212 Safety JumperOut ResettableFaultCoastJumper J2 SAFETY is not installed and a Safety optionmodule is not present. Install the jumper.213 Safety Jumper In ResettableFaultCoastJumper J2 SAFETY is installed and a Safety option moduleis present. Remove the jumper.214 SafetyPortCnflct Alarm 2 Allowable number of safety options exceeded.224 Port 4 Comm Loss Resettable CoastThe device at the port has stopped communicating with the225 Port 5 Comm Loss Faultmain control board.226 Port 6 Comm LossVerify that the device is present and functional.Verify network connections.227 Port 7 Comm LossVerify options installed in ports 4…8 are seated in the port228 Port 8 Comm Lossand secured with mounting screws.229 Port 9 Comm Loss230 Port10 Comm Loss231 Port11 Comm Loss232 Port12 Comm Loss233 Port13 Comm Loss234 Port14 Comm Loss244 Port 4 Cfg Alarm 2 The main control board does not have the correct option in245 Port 5 Cfgthe port.246 Port 6 CfgOption may not be compatible with product or MCB firmwareneeds to be updated to support it. Option my have to be247 Port 7 Cfgmoved or removed, accept option configuration change.248 Port 8 Cfg249 Port 9 Cfg250 Port 10 Cfg251 Port 11 Cfg252 Port 12 Cfg253 Port 13 Cfg254 Port 14 Cfg264265Port 4 ChecksumPort 5 ChecksumResettableFault266 Port 6 Checksum267 Port 7 Checksum268 Port 8 Checksum269 Port 9 Checksum270 Port10 Checksum271 Port11 Checksum272 Port12 Checksum273 Port13 Checksum274 Port14 ChecksumCoastA option module storage checksum failed.Option data has been set to default values.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

4-10 TroubleshootingEventFault ConfigurationNo. Fault/Alarm Text Type Action Parameter291 HS Fan Life Configurable P493[HSFan EventActn]292 In Fan Life Configurable P500[InFan EventActn]293 MtrBrng Life Configurable P506[MtrBrngEventActn]294 MtrBrng Lube Configurable P510[MtrLubeEventActn]295 MachBrng Life Configurable P515[MtrBrngEventActn]296 MachBrng Lube Configurable P519[MchLubeEventActn]307 Port7InvalidCard Non-Reset CoastFault308 Port8InvalidCard Non-Reset CoastFault313 ENet Checksum Resettable CoastFault314 DLX Checksum Resettable CoastFault14037 Net IO Timeout Configurable P52[DLX Prog Cond]Description/Action(s)Predictive maintenance function has reached the eventlevel. Perform maintenance.Option not valid in that port. Remove option module.Ethernet/IP storage checksum failed. Data set to defaultvalues.DeviceLogix storage checksum failed. Data set to defaultvalues.DeviceLogix has been disabled.Important: Fault and Alarm event numbers between 3000 and 13999 are generated by a module installed in aport. Refer to Fault and Alarm Display Codes on page 4-4 for an explanation. For event numbersthat fall between 13000 and 13999, refer to the PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet/IPAdapter User Manual, publication 750COM-UM001 for descriptions.AutoResetTable 4.D Drive Fault and Alarm Cross Reference By NameFault/Alarm Text Number Fault/Alarm Text NumberAlt VelFdbk Loss 94 Port 1 Adapter 71App ID Changed 124 Port 1 DPI Loss 81AuRsts Exhausted 33 Port 13 Adapter 203Autn Enc Angle 141 Port 14 Adapter 204Autn Spd Rstrct 142 Port 2 Adapter 72Auto Tach Switch 97 Port 2 DPI Loss 82AutoTune Aborted 80 Port 3 Adapter 73Autotune CurReg 143 Port 3 DPI Loss 83Autotune Inertia 144 Port 4 Adapter 74Autotune Travel 145 Port 4 Checksum 264Aux VelFdbk Loss 95 Port 4 Comm Loss 224Auxiliary Input 2 Port 4 Config 244Bipolar Conflict 155 Port 4 DPI Loss 84Brake Slipped 26 Port 5 Adapter 75Crtl Bd Overtemp 55 Port 5 Checksum 265CurLimit Reduced 170 Port 5 Comm Loss 225Decel Inhibit 24 Port 5 Config 245DigIn Cnfg B 157 Port 5 DPI Loss 85DigIn Cnfg C 158 Port 6 Adapter 76DLX Checksum 314 Port 6 Checksum 266DPI TransportErr 205 Port 6 Comm Loss 226Drive OverLoad 64 Port 6 Config 246Drive Powerup 49 Port 6 DPI Loss 86DynBrake OvrTemp 10 Port 7 Checksum 267ENet Checksum 313 Port 7 Comm Loss 227PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Troubleshooting 4-11Fault/Alarm Text Number Fault/Alarm Text NumberExcessive Load 79 Port 7 Config 247Ext Prechrg Err 137 Port 8 Checksum 268Flt QueueCleared 51 Port 8 Comm Loss 228FluxAmpsRef Rang 78 Port 8 Config 248Fwd Spd Lim Cnfg 192 Port 9 Checksum 269Ground Fault 13 Port 9 Comm Loss 229Ground Warning 14 Port 9 Config 249Heatsink OvrTemp 8 Port7InvalidCard 307HeatSinkUnderTmp 168 Port8InvalidCard 308Home Not Set 179 PositionFdbkLoss 96Homing Active 178 Power Loss 3HS Fan Life 291 Precharge Open 138Hw Enable Check 93 Prev Maint Reset 290HW Enbl Jmpr Out 210 Pri VelFdbk Loss 91HW OverCurrent 12 Profiling Active 177In Fan Life 292 PWM Freq Reduced 169Incompat MCB-PB 106 Pwr Brd Checksum 104Input Phase Loss 17 PwrBd App MinVer 112IR Volts Range 77 PwrBd Invalid ID 111IXo VoltageRange 87 PwrBd PwrDn Chks 118Load Loss 15 PwrDn Data Chksm 117MachBrng Life 295 PwrDn Table Full 115MachBrng Lube 296 PwrDnEntry2Large 116MaxFreq Conflict 185 Replaced MCB-PB 107Module Defaulted 58 Rev Spd Lim Cnfg 193Motor Overload 7 Safety Brd Fault 211MtrBrng Life 293 Safety Jmpr Out 212MtrBrng Lube 294 Safety Jumper In 213Output PhaseLoss 21 SafetyPortCnflct 214OverSpeed Limit 25 Shear Pin 1 61OverVoltage 5 Shear Pin 2 62OW Torq Level 66 Sleep Config 161OW TqLvl Timeout 65 Start On PowerUp 134Parameter Chksum 100 SW OverCurrent 36Params Defaulted 48 Torq Prove Cflct 27Phase U to Grnd 38 TorqPrv Spd Band 20Phase UNegToGrnd 44 TP Encls Config 28Phase UV Short 41 Tracking DataErr 113Phase V to Grnd 39 Trnsistr OvrTemp 9Phase VNegToGrnd 45 TrqMode Incompat 184Phase VW Short 42 UnderVoltage 4Phase W to Grnd 40 Using Backup App 125Phase WNegToGrnd 46 Vel Fbk Sel Err 189Phase WU Short 43 VHz Boost Limit 187PM FV Alt Fdbk 191 VHz Curve Incomp 188PM FV Pri Fdbk 190 VHz Neg Slope 186Waking 162PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

4-12 TroubleshootingI/O Faults and AlarmsThe table below contains a list of I/O-specific faults and alarms, the type offault or alarm, the action taken when the drive faults, the parameter used toconfigure the fault or alarm (if applicable), and a description and action(where applicable).Table 4.E I/O Fault and Alarm Types, Descriptions and ActionsEventFault Configuration AutoNo. (1) Fault/Alarm Text Type Action Parameter Reset Description/Action(s)xx000 No Entryxx001 Analog In Loss Configurable P53/P63Analog input has a lost signal.[Anlg InX LssActn]xx002 Motor PTC Trip Configurable P40Motor PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) over[PTC Cfg]temperature.xx005 Relay0 Life Configurable P106Predictive maintenance.[RO0 LifeEvntActn]xx006 Relay1 Life Configurable P116Predictive maintenance.[RO1 LifeEvntActn]xx010 Anlg Cal Chksum Non-Reset CoastThe checksum read from the analog calibration data doesFaultnot match the checksum calculated. Replace option module.xx058 Module Defaulted Fault Coast Module was commanded to write default values.(1) xx indicates the port number. Refer to Fault and Alarm Display Codes on page 4-4 for an explanation.Safe Torque Off FaultThe table below lists the safe torque off-specific fault, the action taken whenthe drive faults, and its description.Table 4.F Safe Torque Fault and Alarm Types, Descriptions and ActionsEventNo. (1) Fault/Alarm Text TypeFaultActionConfigurationParameterAutoReset Description/Action(s)xx000 No Entryxx058 Module Defaulted Fault Coast Module was commanded to write default values.(1) xx indicates the port number. Refer to Fault and Alarm Display Codes on page 4-4 for an explanation.Single Incremental EncoderFaults and AlarmsThe table below contains a list of encoder-specific faults and alarms, thetype of fault or alarm, the action taken when the drive faults, the parameterused to configure the fault or alarm (if applicable), and a description andaction (where applicable).Table 4.G Single Incremental Encoder Fault and Alarm Types, Descriptions andActionsEventFault Configuration AutoNo. (1) Fault/Alarm Text Type Action Parameter Reset Description/Action(s)xx000 Open Wire Configurable P3The encoder module has detected an input signal (A, B, or[Fdbk Loss Cfg]Z) in the same state as its complement (A Not, B Not, or ZNot). For open wire detection to work, the encoder signalsmust be differential (not single ended). The Z channel is onlychecked when enabled. See P1 [Encoder Cfg].xx001 Phase Loss Configurable P3More than 30 phase loss (open wire) events have occurred[Fdbk Loss Cfg]over an 8 millisecond time period. The same restrictions asfor Open Wire detection apply.xx002 Quadrature Loss Configurable P3Quadrature loss events occur when simultaneous edge[Fdbk Loss Cfg]transitions occur on both the A and B encoder channels.This fault will occur when more than 10 quad loss eventsover a 10 millisecond time period are detected. Only validwhen both A and B channels are used (not Bit 1 “A ChanOnly”) in P1 [Encoder Cfg].xx058 Module Defaulted Fault Coast Module was commanded to write default values.(1) xx indicates the port number. Refer to Fault and Alarm Display Codes on page 4-4 for an explanation.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Troubleshooting 4-13Dual Incremental EncoderFaults and AlarmsThe table below contains a list of encoder-specific faults and alarms, thetype of fault or alarm, the action taken when the drive faults, the parameterused to configure the fault or alarm (if applicable), and a description andaction (where applicable).Table 4.H Dual Incremental Encoder Fault and Alarm Types, Descriptions andActionsEventNo. (1) Fault/Alarm Text TypeFaultActionConfigurationParameterAutoReset Description/Action(s)xx000 Enc0 Open Wire Configurable P3[Enc 0 FB Lss Cfg]The dual encoder module has detected an encoder 0 inputsignal (A, B, or Z) in the same state as its complement (ANot, B Not, or Z Not). For open wire detection to work, theencoder signals must be differential (not single ended). TheZ channel is only checked when enabled. See P1 [Enc 0Cfg].xx001 Enc0 Phase Loss Configurable P3[Enc 0 FB Lss Cfg]More than 30 encoder 0 phase loss (open wire) events haveoccurred over an 8 millisecond time period. The samerestrictions as for Enc0 Open Wire detection apply.xx002 Enc0 Quad Loss Configurable P3[Enc 0 FB Lss Cfg]Encoder 0 Quadrature loss events occur when simultaneousedge transitions occur on both the A and B channels ofencoder 0. This fault will occur when more than 10 quad lossevents over a 10 millisecond time period are detected. Onlyvalid when both A and B channels are used (not Bit 1 “AChan Only”) in P1 [Enc 0 Cfg].xx030 Enc1 Open Wire Configurable P13[Enc 1 FB Lss Cfg]The dual encoder module has detected an encoder 1 inputsignal (A, B, or Z) in the same state as its complement (ANot, B Not, or Z Not). For open wire detection to work, theencoder signals must be differential (not single ended). TheZ channel is only checked when enabled. See P11 [Enc 1Cfg].xx031 Enc1 Phase Loss Configurable P13[Enc 1 FB Lss Cfg]More than 30 encoder 1 phase loss (open wire) events haveoccurred over an 8 millisecond time period. The samerestrictions as for Enc1 Open Wire detection apply.xx032 Enc1 Quad Loss Configurable P13[Enc 1 FB Lss Cfg]Encoder 1 Quadrature loss events occur when simultaneousedge transitions occur on both the A and B channels ofencoder 1. This fault will occur when more than 10 quad lossevents over a 10 millisecond time period are detected. Onlyvalid when both A and B channels are used (not Bit 1 “AChan Only”) in P11 [Enc 1 Cfg].xx058 Module Defaulted Fault Coast Module was commanded to write default values.(1) xx indicates the port number. Refer to Fault and Alarm Display Codes on page 4-4 for an explanation.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

4-14 TroubleshootingUniversal Feedback Faultsand AlarmsThe table below contains a list of universal feedback-specific faults andalarms, the type of fault or alarm, the action taken when the drive faults, theparameter used to configure the fault or alarm (if applicable), and adescription and action (where applicable).Table 4.I Universal Feedback Fault and Alarm Types, Descriptions and ActionsEventNo. (1) Fault/Alarm Text TypeFaultActionConfigurationParamxx000 LightSrc Err Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx001 Ch0 SigAmp Err Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx002 Ch0 PsnVal Err Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx003 Ch0 OverVolt Err Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx004 Ch0 UndVolt Err Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx005 Ch0 OverCur Err Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx006 Ch0 Battery Err Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx009 Ch0 AnalSig Err Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx010 Ch0 IntOfst Err Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx011 Ch0 DataTabl Err Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx012 Ch0 AnalLim Err Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx013 Ch0 Int I2C Err Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx014 Ch0 IntChksm Err Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx015 Ch0 PrgmResetErr Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx016 Ch0 CntOvrflwErr Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx017 Ch0 Parity Err Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx018 Ch0 Chksum Err Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx019 Ch0 InvCmd Err Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx020 Ch0 SendSize Err Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx021 Ch0 CmdArgmt Err Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx022 Ch0 InvWrtAdrErr Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx023 Ch0 AccCode Err Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx024 Ch0 FieldSizeErr Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]AutoResetDescriptionError reported by Heidenhain Encoder on Channel 0 withEnDat Interface - Light source failureError reported by Heidenhain Encoder on Channel 0 withEnDat Interface -Signal amplitude errorError reported by Heidenhain Encoder on Channel 0 withEnDat Interface - Position value errorError reported by Heidenhain Encoder on Channel 0 withEnDat Interface - Overvoltage errorError reported by Heidenhain Encoder on Channel 0 withEnDat Interface - Undervoltage errorError reported by Heidenhain Encoder on Channel 0 withEnDat Interface - Overcurrent errorError reported by Heidenhain Encoder on Channel 0 withEnDat Interface - Battery emptyError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 withHiperface Interface - Analog signals outside specificationError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 withHiperface Interface - Faulty internal angular offsetError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 withHiperface Interface - Data field partitioning table damagedError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 withHiperface Interface - Analog limit values not availableError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 withHiperface Interface - Internal I2C bus not operationalError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 withHiperface Interface - Internal checksum errorError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 withHiperface Interface - Encoder reset occurred as a result ofprogram monitoringError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 withHiperface Interface - Counter overflowError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 withHiperface Interface - Parity errorError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 withHiperface Interface - Checksum of the data transmitted isincorrectError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 withHiperface Interface - Unknown command codeError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 withHiperface Interface - Number of data transmitted is incorrectError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 withHiperface Interface - Command argument transmitted is notallowedError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 withHiperface Interface - The selected data field must not bewritten to (invalid write address)Error reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 withHiperface Interface - Incorrect access codeError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 withHiperface Interface - Size of data field stated cannot bechangedPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Troubleshooting 4-15EventFault ConfigurationNo. (1) Fault/Alarm Text Type Action Paramxx025 Ch0 Address Err Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx026 Ch0 FieldAcc Err Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx028 Ch0 SiTurnPsnErr Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx029 Ch0 MulTrnPsnErr Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx036 Ch0 AnalVal Err Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx037 Ch0 SendCurr Err Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx038 Ch0 EncTemp Err Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx039 Ch0 Speed Err Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]DescriptionError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 withHiperface Interface - Word address stated is outside datafieldError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 withHiperface Interface - Access to non-existent data fieldError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 withHiperface Interface - Single turn position unreliableError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 withHiperface Interface - Multiple turn position unreliableError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 withHiperface Interface - Analog value error (process data)Error reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 withHiperface Interface - Transmitter current critical (dirt, brokentransmitter)Error reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 withHiperface Interface - Encoder temperature criticalError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 withHiperface Interface - Speed too high, no position formationpossibleError reported by a Encoder on Channel 0 with BiSSInterface - An error bit of the BiSS Single Cycle Data is setError reported by a Encoder on Channel 0 with BiSSInterface - LED current out of control rangeError reported by a Encoder on Channel 0 with BiSSInterface - External multiturn errorError reported by a Encoder on Channel 0 with BiSSInterface - Position code error (single step error)Error reported by a Encoder on Channel 0 with BiSSInterface - failure configuring interfaceError reported by a Encoder on Channel 0 with BiSSInterface - Position data not validError reported by a Encoder on Channel 0 with BiSSInterface - Serial interface failureError reported by a Encoder on Channel 0 with BiSSInterface - External failure over NERRError reported by a Encoder on Channel 0 with BiSSInterface - Temperature out of defined rangexx040 Ch0 General Err Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx046 Ch0 LED Curr Err Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx047 Ch0 ExMulTurnErr Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx048 Ch0 PsnCode Err Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx049 Ch0 Config Err Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx050 Ch0 PsnVal Err Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx051 Ch0 SerialComErr Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx052 Ch0 Ext Failure Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx053 Ch0 Temp Exc Err Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx058 Module Defaulted Fault Coast Parameter values for this encoder have been reset to theirdefault settings.xx064 Ch0 OutOfRailErr Configurable P9Error reported by a linear Stahl encoder on Channel 0 - Rail[FB0 Loss Cfg]is no longer present between the read headxx068 Ch0 Read Head 1 Configurable P9Error reported by a linear Stahl encoder on Channel 0 -[FB0 Loss Cfg]Indicates that the read head must be cleaned or installedxx069 Ch0 Read Head 2 Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx070 Ch0 RAM Error Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx071 Ch0 EPROM Error Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx072 Ch0 ROM Error Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx074 Ch0 No Position Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]AutoResetcorrectlyError reported by a linear Stahl encoder on Channel 0 -Indicates that the read head must be cleaned or installedcorrectlyError reported by a linear Stahl encoder on Channel 0 -Indicates a RAM error. Reading head needs to be repairedError reported by a linear Stahl encoder on Channel 0 -Indicates a EPROM error. Reading head needs to berepairedError reported by a linear Stahl encoder on Channel 0 -Indicates a ROM error. Reading head needs to be repairedError reported by a linear Stahl encoder on Channel 0 -Indicates that no position value was available - only possiblefollowing powerup or resetPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

4-16 TroubleshootingEventFault ConfigurationNo. (1) Fault/Alarm Text Type Action Paramxx081 Ch0 Msg Cheksum Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx082 Ch0 Timeout Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx083 Ch0 Comm Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx084 Ch0 Diagnostic Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx085 Ch0 SpplyVltgRng Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx086 Ch0 SC Amplitude Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx087 Ch0 Open Wire Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx088 Ch0 Quad Loss Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx089 Ch0 Phase Loss Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx090 Ch0 Unsupp Enc Configurable P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx100 Ch0 FreqExc Alm Alarm 1 P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx101 Ch0 TempExc Alm Alarm 1 P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx102 Ch0 LightLim Alm Alarm 1 P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx103 Ch0 Battery Alm Alarm 1 P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx104 Ch0 RefPoint Alm Alarm 1 P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx108 Ch0 General Alm Alarm 1 P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx115 Ch0 Optics Alarm Alarm 1 P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx116 Ch0 OutOfRailAlm Alarm 1 P9[FB0 Loss Cfg]xx200 Ch1 LightSrc Err Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx201 Ch1 SigAmp Err Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx202 Ch1 PsnVal Err Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx203 Ch1 OverVolt Err Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx204 Ch1 UndVolt Err Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx205 Ch1 OverCur Err Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx206 Ch1 Battery Err Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx209 Ch1 AnalSig Err Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]AutoResetDescriptionIndicates the option card has detected a serialcommunications checksum error while attempting tocommunicate with the encoder on channel 0.Indicates the option card has detected a serialcommunications timeout error while attempting tocommunicate with the encoder on channel 0.Indicates the option card has detected a serialcommunications error (other than checksum or timeout)while attempting to communicate with the encoder onchannel 0.Indicates the option card has detected a powerup diagnostictest failure for encoder channel 0.Indicates that the voltage source to the encoder 0 is out ofrange.Indicates that the encoder 0 signal amplitude is out oftolerance.Indicates that an open wire condition has been detected forencoder 0.Indicates that a signal quadrature error has been detectedfor encoder 0Indicates that an A or B signal of an A quad B incrementalencoder on Channel 0 is disconnected.Indicates that the connected encoder on Channel 0 is notsupportedAlarm reported by Heidenhain Encoder on Channel 0 withEnDat Interface - Frequency exceeded warningAlarm reported by Heidenhain Encoder on Channel 0 withEnDat Interface - Temperature exceeded warningAlarm reported by Heidenhain Encoder on Channel 0 withEnDat Interface - Limit of light control reserve reachedAlarm reported by Heidenhain Encoder on Channel 0 withEnDat Interface - Battery warningAlarm reported by Heidenhain Encoder on Channel 0 withEnDat Interface - Reference point not reachedAlarm reported by a Encoder on Channel 0 with BiSSInterface - A warning bit of the BiSS Single Cycle Data is setAlarm reported by a linear Stahl encoder on Channel 0 -Displays an alarm when the Stahl optical system requirescleaningAlarm reported by a linear Stahl encoder on Channel 0 -Indicates that the read encoder count is at the maximumvalue (524287)Error reported by Heidenhain Encoder on Channel 1 withEnDat Interface - Light source failureError reported by Heidenhain Encoder on Channel 1 withEnDat Interface -Signal amplitude errorError reported by Heidenhain Encoder on Channel 1 withEnDat Interface - Position value errorError reported by Heidenhain Encoder on Channel 1 withEnDat Interface - Overvoltage errorError reported by Heidenhain Encoder on Channel 1 withEnDat Interface - Undervoltage errorError reported by Heidenhain Encoder on Channel 1 withEnDat Interface - Overcurrent errorError reported by Heidenhain Encoder on Channel 1 withEnDat Interface - Battery emptyError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 1 withHiperface Interface - Analog signals outside specificationPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Troubleshooting 4-17EventFault ConfigurationNo. (1) Fault/Alarm Text Type Action Paramxx210 Ch1 IntOfst Err Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx211 Ch1 DataTabl Err Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx212 Ch1 AnalLim Err Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx213 Ch1 Int I2C Err Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx214 Ch1 IntChksm Err Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx215 Ch1 PrgmResetErr Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx216 Ch1 CntOvrflwErr Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx217 Ch1 Parity Err Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx218 Ch1 Chksum Err Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx219 Ch1 InvCmd Err Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx220 Ch1 SendSize Err Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx221 Ch1 CmdArgmt Err Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx222 Ch1 InvWrtAdrErr Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx223 Ch1 AccCode Err Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx224 Ch1 FieldSizeErr Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx225 Ch1 Address Err Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx226 Ch1 FieldAcc Err Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx228 Ch1 SiTurnPsnErr Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx229 Ch1 MulTrnPsnErr Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx236 Ch1 AnalVal Err Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx237 Ch1 SendCurr Err Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx238 Ch1 EncTemp Err Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx239 Ch1 Speed Err Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx240 Ch1 General Err Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx246 Ch1 LED Curr Err Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]AutoResetDescriptionError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 1 withHiperface Interface - Faulty internal angular offsetError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 1 withHiperface Interface - Data field partitioning table damagedError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 1 withHiperface Interface - Analog limit values not availableError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 1 withHiperface Interface - Internal I2C bus not operationalError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 1 withHiperface Interface - Internal checksum errorError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 1 withHiperface Interface - Encoder reset occurred as a result ofprogram monitoringError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 1 withHiperface Interface - Counter overflowError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 1 withHiperface Interface - Parity errorError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 1 withHiperface Interface - Checksum of the data transmitted isincorrectError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 1 withHiperface Interface - Unknown command codeError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 1 withHiperface Interface - Number of data transmitted is incorrectError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 1 withHiperface Interface - Command argument transmitted is notallowedError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 1 withHiperface Interface - The selected data field must not bewritten to (invalid write address)Error reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 1 withHiperface Interface - Incorrect access codeError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 1 withHiperface Interface - Size of data field stated cannot bechangedError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 1 withHiperface Interface - Word address stated is outside datafieldError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 1 withHiperface Interface - Access to non-existent data fieldError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 1 withHiperface Interface - Single turn position unreliableError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 1 withHiperface Interface - Multiple turn position unreliableError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 1 withHiperface Interface - Analog value error (process data)Error reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 1 withHiperface Interface - Transmitter current critical (dirt, brokentransmitter)Error reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 1 withHiperface Interface - Encoder temperature criticalError reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 1 withHiperface Interface - Speed too high, no position formationpossibleError reported by a Encoder on Channel 1 with BiSSInterface - An error bit of the BiSS Single Cycle Data is setError reported by a Encoder on Channel 1 with BiSSInterface - LED current out of control rangePowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

4-18 TroubleshootingEventFault ConfigurationNo. (1) Fault/Alarm Text Type Action Paramxx247 Ch1 ExMulTurnErr Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx248 Ch1 PsnCode Err Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx249 Ch1 Config Err Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx250 Ch1 PsnVal Err Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx251 Ch1 SerialComErr Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx252 Ch1 Ext Failure Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx253 Ch1 Temp Exc Err Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx256 Ch1 OutOfRailErr Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx260 Ch1 Read Head 1 Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx261 Ch1 Read Head 2 Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx262 Ch1 RAM Error Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx263 Ch1 EPROM Error Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx264 Ch1 ROM Error Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx266 Ch1 No Position Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx281 Ch1 Msg Cheksum Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx282 Ch1 Timeout Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx283 Ch1 Comm Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx284 Ch1 Diagnostic Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx285 Ch1 SpplyVltgRng Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx286 Ch1 SC Amplitude Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx287 Ch1 Open Wire Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx288 Ch1 Quad Loss Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx289 Ch1 Phase Loss Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx290 Ch1 Unsupp Enc Configurable P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx300 Ch1 FreqExc Alm Alarm 1 P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]AutoResetDescriptionError reported by a Encoder on Channel 1 with BiSSInterface - External multiturn errorError reported by a Encoder on Channel 1 with BiSSInterface - Position code error (single step error)Error reported by a Encoder on Channel 1 with BiSSInterface - failure configuring interfaceError reported by a Encoder on Channel 1 with BiSSInterface - Position data not validError reported by a Encoder on Channel 1 with BiSSInterface - Serial interface failureError reported by a Encoder on Channel 1 with BiSSInterface - External failure over NERRError reported by a Encoder on Channel 1 with BiSSInterface - Temperature out of defined rangeError reported by a linear Stahl encoder on Channel 1 - Railis no longer present between the read headError reported by a linear Stahl encoder on Channel 1 -Indicates that the read head must be cleaned or installedcorrectlyError reported by a linear Stahl encoder on Channel 1 -Indicates that the read head must be cleaned or installedcorrectlyError reported by a linear Stahl encoder on Channel 1 -Indicates a RAM error. Reading head needs to be repairedError reported by a linear Stahl encoder on Channel 1 -Indicates a EPROM error. Reading head needs to berepairedError reported by a linear Stahl encoder on Channel 1 -Indicates a ROM error. Reading head needs to be repairedError reported by a linear Stahl encoder on Channel 1 -Indicates that no position value was available - only possiblefollowing powerup or resetIndicates the option card has detected a serialcommunications checksum error while attempting tocommunicate with the encoder on channel 1.Indicates the option card has detected a serialcommunications timeout error while attempting tocommunicate with the encoder on channel 1.Indicates the option card has detected a serialcommunications error (other than checksum or timeout)while attempting to communicate with the encoder onchannel 1.Indicates the option card has detected a powerup diagnostictest failure for encoder channel 1.Indicates that the voltage source to the encoder 1 is out ofrange.Indicates that the encoder 1 signal amplitude is out oftolerance.Indicates that an open wire condition has been detected forencoder 1.Indicates that a signal quadrature error has been detectedfor encoder 1Indicates that an A or B signal of an A quad B incrementalencoder on Channel 1 is disconnected.Indicates that the connected encoder on Channel 1 is notsupportedAlarm reported by Heidenhain Encoder on Channel 1 withEnDat Interface - Frequency exceeded warningPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Troubleshooting 4-19EventFault ConfigurationNo. (1) Fault/Alarm Text Type Action Paramxx301 Ch1 TempExc Alm Alarm 1 P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx302 Ch1 LightLim Alm Alarm 1 P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx303 Ch1 Battery Alm Alarm 1 P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx304 Ch1 RefPoint Alm Alarm 1 P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx308 Ch1 General Alm Alarm 1 P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx315 Ch1 Optics Alarm Alarm 1 P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx316 Ch1 OutOfRailAlm Alarm 1 P39[FB1 Loss Cfg]xx412 Hardware Err Configurable EitherP9 [FB0 Loss Cfg] orP39 [FB1 Loss Cfg]xx413 Firmware Err Configurable EitherP9 [FB0 Loss Cfg] orP39 [FB1 Loss Cfg]xx416 EncOut Cflct Alarm 1 EitherP9 [FB0 Loss Cfg] orP39 [FB1 Loss Cfg]xx417 Safety Cflct Alarm 1 EitherP9 [FB0 Loss Cfg] orP39 [FB1 Loss Cfg]DescriptionAlarm reported by Heidenhain Encoder on Channel 1 withEnDat Interface - Temperature exceeded warningAlarm reported by Heidenhain Encoder on Channel 1 withEnDat Interface - Limit of light control reserve reachedAlarm reported by Heidenhain Encoder on Channel 1 withEnDat Interface - Battery warningAlarm reported by Heidenhain Encoder on Channel 1 withEnDat Interface - Reference point not reachedAlarm reported by a Encoder on Channel 1 with BiSSInterface - A warning bit of the BiSS Single Cycle Data is setAlarm reported by a linear Stahl encoder on Channel 1 -Displays an alarm when the Stahl optical system requirescleaningAlarm reported by a linear Stahl encoder on Channel 1 -Indicates that the read encoder count is at the maximumvalue (524287)Indicates that there is a Hardware Error on the FeedbackOption module.Indicates that there is a Firmware Error on the FeedbackOption module. A Firmware Error occurs if the Hardwareand the downloaded Firmware are not compatible.Indicates that there is one of the following problems with theEncoder Output:• The selection in the P80 [Enc Out Sel] is not possiblesince the required pins on the terminal blocks are alreadyused for Feedback 0 or 1 according to P6 [FB0 DeviceSel] and P36 [FB1 Device Sel].• P80 [Enc Out Sel] is set to 2 “Sine Cosine” and there is nosignal connected to the pins 1…4 of TB 1.• P80 [Enc Out Sel] is set to 2 “Sine Cosine,” the value ofP15/45 [FBX IncAndSC PPR] is not a power of two, andP84 [EncOut Z PPR] is not set to 0 “1 ZPulse.” This is notallowed.• P80 [Enc Out Sel] is set to 3 “Channel X” or 4 “Channel Y”and there is no encoder connected to that channel.• P80 [Enc Out Sel] is set to 3 “Channel X” or 4 “Channel Y”and there is a linear encoder connected to this channel.Indicates that the Safety DIP switches are in an invalidposition.xx420 FB0FB1 Cflct Alarm 2 Indicates that the combination of the feedback selectiondone with P6 [FB0 Device Sel] and P36 [FB1 Device Sel] isinvalid, i.e. both feedbacks have Sin-Cos-Signals (There isonly place for one set of Sin-Cos-Signals on the TerminalBlocks). The drive cannot be started until this configurationconflict is resolved.xx421 Initializing Alarm 2 Indicates that the Universal Feedback State Machine is inthe Initialize State. This Type 2 alarm makes sure that themotor cannot be started during this.(1) xx indicates the port number. Refer to Fault and Alarm Display Codes on page 4-4 for an explanation.AutoResetPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

4-20 TroubleshootingCommon Symptoms andCorrective ActionsDrive does not Start from Start or Run Inputs wired to the terminal block.Cause(s) Indication Corrective ActionDrive is FaultedFlashing redstatus lightClear fault.• Press Stop• Cycle power• “Clear Faults” on the HIMDiagnostic menu.Incorrect input wiring. See page 1-38 for None Wire inputs correctly.wiring examples.• 2 wire control requires Run, Run Forward,Run Reverse or Jog input.• 3 wire control requires Start and Stopinputs.• Verify 24 Volt Common is connected toDigital Input Common.Incorrect digital input programming. None Configure input function.• Mutually exclusive choices have been Flashing yellow Resolve input function conflicts.made (i.e., Jog and Jog Forward). status light and• 2 wire and 3 wire programming may be “DigIn Cnfg B”conflicting.or• Start configured without a Stop “DigIn Cnfg C”configured.indication onLCD HIM.P936 [DriveStatus 2] showstype 2 alarm(s).Terminal block does not have control. None Check P324 [Logic Mask].Drive does not Start from HIM.Cause(s) Indication Corrective ActionDrive is configured for 2 wire levelcontrol.None Change P150 [Digital In Conf] to correctcontrol function.Another device has Manual control. NonePort does not have control. None Change P324 [Logic Mask] to enable correctport.Drive does not respond to changes in speed command.Cause(s) Indication Corrective ActionNo value is coming from the sourceof the command.Incorrect reference source hasbeen programmed.Incorrect Reference source isbeing selected via remote device ordigital inputs.LCD HIM StatusLine indicates“At Speed” andoutput is 0 Hz.1. If the source is an analog input, checkwiring and use a meter to check forpresence of signal.2. Check P2 [Commanded SpdRef] for correctsource. (See page 3-19)None 3. Check P545 [Spd Ref A Sel] for the sourceof the speed reference. (See page 3-64)4. Reprogram P545 [Spd Ref A Sel] for correctsource. (See page 3-64)None 5. Check P935 [Drive Status 1], page 3-101,bits 12 and 13 for unexpected sourceselections.6. Check P220 [Digital In Sts], page 3-35 tosee if inputs are selecting an alternatesource.7. Check configuration of P173-175 [DI SpeedSel X] functionsPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Troubleshooting 4-21Motor and/or drive will not accelerate to commanded speed.Cause(s) Indication Corrective ActionAcceleration time is excessive. None Reprogram P535/536 [Accel Time X]. (Seepage 3-63)Excess load or short accelerationtimes force the drive into currentlimit, slowing or stoppingacceleration.Speed command source or value isnot as expected.Programming is preventing thedrive output from exceedinglimiting values.Motor operation is unstable.NoneNoneNoneDrive will not reverse motor direction.Stopping the drive results in a Decel Inhibit fault.Check P935 [Drive Status 1], bit 27 to see ifthe drive is in Current Limit. (See page 3-101)Remove excess load or reprogram P535/536[Accel Time X].(See page 3-63)Check for the proper Speed Command usingSteps 1 through 7 above.Check P520 [Max Fwd Speed], P521 [MaxRev Speed] (See page 3-62) and P37[Maximum Freq] (See page 3-21) to assurethat speed is not limited by programming.Cause(s) Indication Corrective ActionMotor data was incorrectly entered None 1. Correctly enter motor nameplate data.or Autotune was not performed.2. Perform “Static Tune” or “Rotate Tune”Autotune procedure. See P70 [Autotune] onpage 3-24Cause(s) Indication Corrective ActionDigital input is not selected forreversing control.None Check that the DI Reversing function iscorrectly configured.Digital input is incorrectly wired. None Check digital input wiring.Direction mode parameter isincorrectly programmed.None Reprogram P308 [Direction Mode], page 3-43for analog “Bipolar” or digital “Unipolar” control.Motor wiring is improperly phased None Switch two motor leads.for reverse.A bipolar analog speed commandinput is incorrectly wired or signal isabsent.None 1. Use meter to check that an analog inputvoltage is present.2. Check bipolar analog signal wiring.Positive voltage commands forward direction.Negative voltage commands reverse direction.Cause(s) Indication Corrective ActionThe bus regulation feature is Decel Inhibit 1. Reprogram parameters 372/373 [Bus Regenabled and is halting deceleration fault screen. Mode X] to eliminate any “Adjust Freq”due to excessive bus voltage. LCD Status Line selection.Excess bus voltage is normally due indicatesto excessive regenerated energy or “Faulted”.unstable AC line input voltages.Internal timer has halted driveoperation.2. Disable bus regulation (parameters 372/373[Bus Reg Mode X]) and add a dynamicbrake.3. Correct AC input line instability or add anisolation transformer.4. Reset drive.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

4-22 TroubleshootingTechnical Support OptionsWhat You Need When You Call Tech SupportWhen you contact Technical Support, please be prepared to provide thefollowing information:• Order number• Product catalog number and drives series number (if applicable)• Product serial number• Firmware revision level• Fault code listed in P951 [Last Fault Code]• Installed options and port assignmentsAlso be prepared with:• A description of your application• A detailed description of the problem• A brief history of the drive installation– First-time installation, product has not been running– Established installation, product has been runningThe data contained in the following parameters will help in initialtroubleshooting of a faulted drive. You can use the table below to record thedata provided in each parameter listed.Parameter(s) Name Description Parameter Data956 Fault Frequency Captures and displays the output speed of drive at time of last fault.957 Fault Amps Captures and displays motor amps at time of last fault.958 Fault Bus Volts Captures and displays the DC bus voltage of drive at time of last fault.954 Status1 at Fault Captures and displays [Drive Status 1] bit pattern at time of last fault.955 Status2 at Fault Captures and displays [Drive Status 2] bit pattern at time of last fault.962 AlarmA at Fault Captures and displays [Alarm Status A] bit pattern at time of last fault.963 AlarmB at Fault Captures and displays [Alarm Status B] bit pattern at time of last fault.951 Last Fault Code A code that represents the fault that tripped the drive.Technical Support WizardsIf you are connected to a drive via DriveExplorer or DriveExecutive,you can run a Tech Support wizard to gather information that will helpdiagnose problems with your drive and/or peripheral device. Theinformation gathered by the wizard is saved as a text file and can be emailedto your remote technical support contact.To run a Tech Support wizard in DriveExplorer, select Wizards from theActions menu. In DriveExecutive, select Wizards from the Tools menu. Or,click the button. Follow the prompts to complete the wizard.Important: The Tech Support wizard cannot be accessed when the ControlBar is launched.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Appendix ASupplemental Drive InformationSpecificationsCategory PowerFlex 755Certifications Listed to UL508C and CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 14-05...TUVRheinlandProduct Safety..TUVRheinlandN223EPRIGOST-RRoHSEWCProduction inspectedEN 61800-5-1Bauart geprüftFunctionalSafetyType approvedIn conformity with the following European Directives:EMC Directive (2004/108/EC)Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC)Standards applied:EN 61800-3:2004EN 61800-5-1:2007TÜV RheinlandStandards applied:EN 61800-3:2004EN 61800-5-1:2007EN ISO 13849-1:2008EN ISO 13849-2:2003EN 61800-5-2:2007EN 61508 PARTS 1-7:2000EN 62061:2005EN 60204-1:2006Australian Communications and Media AuthorityIn conformity with the following:Radiocommunications Act: 1992Radiocommunications Standard: 2008Radiocommunications Labelling Notice: 2008Standards applied:EN 61800-3:2004Electric Power Research InstituteCertified compliant with the following standards:SEMI F47IEC 61000-4-34Russian GOST-R Certificate no.POCC US.ME92.H00040Compliant with the European "Restriction of Hazardous Substances"DirectiveCategory SpecificationProtection Drive 380/400 480V 500V 600V 690VAC Input Overvoltage Trip: 576V AC 576V ACAC Input Undervoltage Trip: 250V AC 300V ACBus Overvoltage Trip: 815V DC 815V DCBus Undervoltage Shutoff: 200V DC 200V DCNominal Bus Voltage (Full Load): 540V DC 648V DCDrive Overcurrent TripSoftware Overcurrent Trip:Hardware Overcurrent Trip:Instantaneous Current Limit:Calculated value, 105% of motor rated to 200% of drive rated105% of 3 sec. rating (158…210%)143% of 3 sec. rating (215…287%)Line transients:up to 6000 volts peak per IEEE C62.41-1991Control Logic Noise Immunity: Showering arc transients up to 1500V peakPower Ride-Thru:15 milliseconds at full loadLogic Control Ride-Thru:0.5 seconds minimum, 2 seconds typicalGround Fault Trip:Phase-to-ground on drive outputShort Circuit Trip:Phase-to-phase on drive outputPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

A-2 Supplemental Drive InformationCategory SpecificationEnvironment Altitude:Maximum Surrounding AirTemperature without De-ratingIP20, NEMA/UL Open Type:IP00, NEMA/UL Open Type:IP20, NEMA/UL Type 1 (w/Hood):IP20, NEMA/UL Type 1 (w/Label):Flange Mount –Front:IP20, NEMA/UL Open Type:IP00, NEMA/UL Open Type:Back/Heat Sink:IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4XStand-alone/Wall Mount –IP54, NEMA/UL Type 12Storage Temperature (all const.):Atmosphere:Relative Humidity:Shock - OperatingShock - Packaged for ShipmentVibration - OperatingVibration - Packaged for ShipmentSinusoidal Loose Load:1000 m (3300 ft) max. without derating0…50 °C (32…122 °F)0…50 °C (32…122 °F)0…40 °C (32…104 °F)0…40 °C (32…104 °F)0…50 °C (32…122 °F)0…50 °C (32…122 °F)0…40 °C (32…104 °F)Frames 2…5, All RatingsFrames 6…7, All RatingsFrames 2…5, All RatingsFrames 6…7, All RatingsFrames 2…5, All RatingsFrames 6…7, All RatingsAll Frames, All Ratings0…40 °C (32…104 °F) All Frames, All Ratings–40…70 °C (–40…158 °F)Important: Drive must not be installed in an area where theambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas,vapors or dust. If the drive is not going to be installed for aperiod of time, it must be stored in an area where it will not beexposed to a corrosive atmosphere.5…95% non-condensingFrame 2…6: 15 g peak for 11 ms duration (±1.0 ms)Frame 7: 10 g peak for 11 ms duration (±1.0 ms)Frame 2: 381 mm (15 in.) drop heightFrame 3…4: 330 mm (13 in.) drop heightFrame 5: 305 mm (12 in.) drop heightFrame 6…7: Meets International Safe Transit Association(ISTA) test procedure 2BFrame 2: 1.000 mm (0.040 in.) displacement, 2 g peakFrame 3…5: 1.000 mm (0.040 in.) displacement, 1.5 g peakFrame 6…7: 1.000 mm (0.040 in.) displacement, 1 g peakFrame 2…5: 20.0 mm (0.8 in.) peak to peak, 2…5.186 Hz;1.1 g peak from 5.186…20 HzFrame 6…7: Meets ISTA 2B packaging standardsRandom Secured:Frame 2…5: Frequency (Hz) PSD (g 2 /Hz)1 0.000054 0.0116 0.0140 0.00180 0.001200 0.00001Frame 6…7 Meets International Safe Transit Association(ISTA) test procedure 2BSound: Frame Fan Speed Sound Note: Sound pressureLevel level is measured at 2meters.Surrounding EnvironmentPollution DegreePollution Degree 1 & 2:Pollution Degree 3 & 4:(See page A-7 for descriptions ofeach pollution degree rating.)2 50 CFM 63 dB3 80 CFM 64 dB4 160 CFM 72 dB5 260 CFM 77 dB6 252 CFM 73 dB7 252 CFM 74 dBAll enclosures acceptable.Enclosure that meets or exceeds IP54, NEMA/UL Type 12required.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Supplemental Drive Information A-3Category SpecificationElectrical AC Input Voltage Tolerance: See page C-1 for full power and operating range.Frequency Tolerance:47-63 Hz.Input Phases:Three-phase input provides full rating for all drives.Single-phase operation provides up to 50% of rated current.DC Input Voltage Tolerance: –/+ 10% of Nominal Bus Voltage (above)Displacement Power Factor: 0.98 across entire speed range.DC Link Inductance: ≥ 5%Efficiency:97.5% at rated amps, nominal line volts.Maximum Short Circuit Rating: 200,000 Amps RMS symmetrical.Actual Short Circuit Rating: Determined by AIC rating of installed fuse/circuit breaker.Maximum Drive to Motor Power Recommended not greater than 2:1 ratio.RatioControl Method: Sine coded PWM with programmable carrier frequency.Ratings apply to all drives. The drive can be supplied as 6pulse.Carrier Frequency:Default Settings:Drive Frames 2…4: 4 kHzDrive Frames 5…7: 2 kHzSettings:Drive Frames 2…6: 2, 4, 8, 12 kHzDrive Frame 7: 2, 4, 8 kHzOutput Voltage Range:0 to rated motor voltageOutput Frequency Range: 0…325 Hz @ 2 kHz carrier0…650 Hz @ 4 kHz carrierFrequency AccuracyDigital Input:Analog Input:Within ±0.01% of set output frequency.Within ±0.4% of maximum output frequency.Frequency Control:Speed regulation - with Slip Compensation0.5% of base speed across 40:1 speed range40:1 operating rangeSpeed Control:Speed regulation - without feedback0.1% of base speed across 120:1 speed range120:1 operating range50 rad/sec bandwidthSpeed regulation - with feedback0.001% of base speed across 100:1 speed range1000:1 operating range190 rad/sec bandwidthTorque Regulation:Torque Regulation - without feedback±5%, 600 rad/sec bandwidthTorque Regulation - with feedback±2%, 2500 rad/sec bandwidthSelectable Motor Control: Standard V/Hz with full custom capability.Sensorless Vector with full tuning.Flux Vector with and without a feedback device.Induction and Permanent magnet motor control.Stop Modes:Multiple programmable stop modes including - Ramp, Coast,DC-Brake, Ramp-to-Hold, Fast Braking, and Current LimitStop.Accel/Decel:Two independently programmable accel and decel times.Each time may be programmed from 0 to 3600 seconds in 0.1second increments.S Curve TimeAdjustable from 0 to 100% of ramp time (normal duty rating).Intermittent Overload:110% Overload capability for up to 1 minute150% Overload capability for up to 3 secondsCurrent Limit Capability:Proactive Current Limit programmable from 20 to 160% ofrated output current. Independently programmableproportional and integral gain.Electronic Motor OverloadProtection:Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response. Complieswith N.E.C. Article 430. U.L. File E59272, volume 12.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

A-4 Supplemental Drive InformationPorts and DevicesConnectors, embedded devices, and installed option modules such as I/O,communication adapters, and DeviceLogix, have unique port numberassignments. Connectors and embedded devices have fixed port numbersthat cannot be changed. Option modules are assigned a port number wheninstalled.Figure A.1 Drive Device Ports070800140405061301020302Port Device Description00 Host Drive Fixed port for the drive.01 HIM Fixed port at HIM cradle connector.Splitter cable connector provides Port 01 when HIM cradleconnector is unused.02 DPI Port Handheld or Remote HIM connection.Splitter cable connection.03 Splitter Cable Connects to DPI Port 02.Provides Port 02 and Port 03.04…08 Option Modules Available ports for option modules. Refer to the I/O Wiring section,beginning on page 1-28, for each option’s port recommendations.(Ports 07 and 08 PowerFlex 755 drives only.)09…12 Reserved for future use.13 EtherNet/IP Fixed port for embedded EtherNet/IP (PowerFlex 755 drives only).14 DeviceLogix Fixed port for embedded DeviceLogix (PowerFlex 755 drives only).PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Supplemental Drive Information A-5Watts LossTable A.A 400 Volt Ratings - Watts LossFrame (1)ND kW External Watts Internal Watts Total Watts2 0.75 16 55 711.5 26 57 832.2 39 58 974.0 75 64 1395.5 108 70 1787.5 161 80 24111 225 86 3113 15 300 103 40318.5 362 115 47722 505 126 6314 30 487 130 61737 615 147 7625 45 705 162 86755 928 201 11296 75 1239 319 155890 1381 300 1681110 1893 381 2274132 2449 502 29517 160 2566 461 3027200 3322 586 3908250 3922 743 4665(1)Enclosure codes F and N only.Table A.B 480 Volt Ratings - Watts LossFrame (1)ND Hp External Watts Internal Watts Total Watts2 1.0 17 60 772.0 27 61 883.0 41 63 1045.0 71 68 1397.5 108 74 18210 149 81 23015 237 91 3283 20 273 101 37425 368 115 48330 503 126 6294 40 422 125 54750 559 144 7035 60 646 158 80475 855 189 10446 100 1109 299 1408125 1299 294 1593150 1718 358 2076200 2384 492 28767 250 2704 491 3195300 3409 606 4015350 3604 683 4287(1)Enclosure codes F and N only.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

A-6 Supplemental Drive InformationMinimum Dynamic Brake ResistanceTable A.C 400 Volt Ratings - Minimum ResistanceFrame ND kW Minimum Resistance Maximum DB Current2 0.75 31.6 251.5 31.6 252.2 31.6 254.0 31.6 255.5 31.6 257.5 31.6 2511 22.6 34.93 15 31.6 2518.5 31.6 2522 16.6 47.64 30 15.8 5037 15.8 505 37 (IP54, NEMA/UL Type 12) 7.9 10045 7.9 10055 7.9 1006 55 (IP54, NEMA/UL Type 12) 3.3 239.475 3.3 239.490 3.3 239.4110 3.3 239.4132 3.3 239.47 132 (IP54, NEMA/UL Type 12) 2.4 329160 2.4 329200 2.4 329250 1.65 478.8Table A.D 480 Volt Ratings - Minimum ResistanceFrame ND Hp Minimum Resistance Maximum DB Current2 1.0 31.6 252.0 31.6 253.0 31.6 255.0 31.6 257.5 31.6 2510 31.6 2515 22.6 34.93 20 31.6 2525 31.6 2530 16.6 47.64 40 15.8 5050 15.8 505 50 (IP54, NEMA/UL Type 12) 7.9 10060 7.9 10075 7.9 1006 75 (IP54, NEMA/UL Type 12) 3.3 239.4100 3.3 239.4125 3.3 239.4150 3.3 239.4200 3.3 239.47 200 (IP54, NEMA/UL Type 12) 2.4 329250 2.4 329300 2.4 329350 1.65 478.8PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Supplemental Drive Information A-7Pollution Degree Ratings According to EN 61800-5-1PollutionDegree Description1 No pollution or only dry, non-conductive pollution occurs. The pollution has no influence.2 Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs. Occasionally, however, a temporaryconductivity caused by condensation is to be expected, when the drive is out ofoperation.3 Conductive pollution or dry non-conductive pollution occurs, which becomes conductivedue to condensation, which is to be expected.4 The pollution generates persistent conductivity caused, for example by conductive dust orrain or snow.Drive Enclosure RatingsEnclosureFront Side RatingTypeFrames(Cat. No.Position 6)InstalledAccessory Kit Enclosure Type2, 3, 4, 5 N None IP20NEMA/UL Open TypeNEMA Type 1 IP20NEMA/UL Type 1Flange IP20NEMA/UL Type 1F None IP20NEMA/UL Open TypeG None IP54NEMA/UL Type 126, 7 N None IP00NEMA/UL Open TypeNEMA Type 1 IP20NEMA/UL Type 1NEMA Type 4X IP00Flange NEMA/UL Open TypeG None IP54NEMA/UL Type 12Back Side/Heat Sink RatingPollutionDegree Enclosure Type1, 2 IP20NEMA/UL Open Type1, 2 IP20NEMA/UL Type 11, 2 IP20NEMA/UL Type 11, 2 IP66NEMA/UL Type 4X1, 2, 3, 4 IP54NEMA/UL Type 121, 2 IP00NEMA/UL Open Type Kit1, 2 IP20NEMA/UL Type 11, 2 IP66NEMA/UL Type 4X1, 2, 3, 4 IP54NEMA/UL Type 12PollutionDegree1, 21, 21, 21, 2, 3, 41, 2, 3, 41, 21, 21, 2, 3, 41, 2, 3, 4PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

A-8 Supplemental Drive InformationCommunicationConfigurations20-COMM-* Network Adapter CompatibilitySome 20-COMM adapters can be used with PowerFlex 750-Series drives.See page 1-49 for more information.Typical Programmable Controller ConfigurationsImportant: If block transfers are programmed to continuously writeinformation to the drive, care must be taken to properly formatthe block transfer. If attribute 10 is selected for the blocktransfer, values will be written only to RAM and will not besaved by the drive. This is the preferred attribute for continuoustransfers. If attribute 9 is selected, each program scan willcomplete a write to the drives non-volatile memory (EEprom).Since the EEprom has a fixed number of allowed writes,continuous block transfers will quickly damage the EEprom.Do Not assign attribute 9 to continuous block transfers. Refer tothe individual communications adapter User Manual foradditional details.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Supplemental Drive Information A-9Logic Command/Status WordsTable A.E Logic Command WordLogic Bits31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Command Descriptionx Normal Stop 0 = Not Normal Stop1 = Normal Stopx (1)Start 0 = Not Start1 = Startx (2)Jog 1 0 = Not Jog 1 (Par. 556)1 = Jog 1x (3)Clear Fault 0 = Not Clear Fault1 = Clear Faultx x Unipolar Direction 00 = No Command01 = Forward Command10 = Reverse Command11 = Hold Direction Controlx Manual 0 = Not Manual1 = ManualxReservedx x Accel Time 00 = No Command01 = Use Accel Time 1 (Par. 535)10 = Use Accel Time 2 (Par. 536)11 = Use Present Timex x Decel Time 00 = No Command01 = Use Decel Time 1 (Par. 537)10 = Use Decel Time 2 (Par. 538)11 = Use Present Timex Ref Select 1 000 = No Commandxxxxxxxxxxxxx Ref Select 2x Ref Select 3001 = Ref A Select (Par. 545)010 = Ref B Select (Par. 550)011 = Preset 3 (Par. 573)100 = Preset 4 (Par. 574)101 = Preset 5 (Par. 575)110 = Preset 6 (Par. 576)111 = Preset 7 (Par. 577)xReservedx Coast Stop 0 = Not Coast to Stop1 = Coast to Stopx Current Limit Stop 0 = Not Current Limit Stop1 = Current Limit Stopx (4)Run 0 = Not Run1 = Runx (2)Jog 2 0 = Not Jog 2 (Par. 557)1 = Jog 2ReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReserved(1) A Not Stop condition (logic bit 0 = 0) must first be present before a 1 = Start condition will start the drive.(2) A Not Stop condition (logic bit 0 = 0) must first be present before a 1 = Jog 1/Jog 2 condition will jog the drive. A transition to a “0” will stop the drive.(3) To perform this command, the value must switch from “0” to “1.”(4)A Not Stop condition (logic bit 0 = 0) must first be present before a 1 = Run condition will run the drive. A transition to a “0” will stop the drive.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

A-10 Supplemental Drive InformationTable A.F Logic Status WordLogic Bits31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Command Descriptionx Run Ready 0 = Not Ready to Run1 = Ready to Runx Active 0 = Not Active1 = Activex Command Direction 0 = Reverse1 = Forwardx Actual Direction 0 = Reverse1 = Forwardx Accelerating 0 = Not Accelerating1 = Acceleratingx Decelerating 0 = Not Decelerating1 = Deceleratingx Alarm 0 = No Alarm (Par. 959 & 960)1 = Alarmx Fault 0 = No Fault (Par. 952 & 953)1 = Faultx At Setpt Spd 0 = Not at Setpoint Speed1 = At Setpoint Speedx Manual 0 = Manual Mode Not Active1 = Manual Mode Activex Spd Ref ID 0 00000 = Reservedx Spd Ref ID 1x Spd Ref ID 2x Spd Ref ID 3x Spd Ref ID 400001 = Auto Ref A (par. 545)00010 = Auto Ref B (Par. 550)00011 = Auto Preset Speed 3 (Par. 573)00100 = Auto Preset Speed 4 (Par. 574)00101 = Auto Preset Speed 5 (Par. 575)00110 = Auto Preset Speed 6 (Par. 576)00111 = Auto Preset Speed 7 (Par. 577)01000 = Reserved01001 = Reserved01010 = Reserved01011 = Reserved01100 = Reserved01101 = Reserved01110 = Reserved01111 = Reserved10000 = Man Port 010001 = Man Port 110010 = Man Port 210011 = Man Port 310100 = Man Port 410101 = Man Port 510110 = Man Port 610111 = Reserved11000 = Reserved11001 = Reserved11010 = Reserved11011 = Reserved11100 = Reserved11101 = Man Port 13 (Emb. ENET)11110 = Man Port 14 (Drive Logix)11111 = Alternate Man Ref SelxReservedx Running 0 = Not Running1 = Runningx Jogging 0 = Not Jogging (Par. 556 & 557)1 = Joggingx Stopping 0 = Not Stopping1 = Stoppingx DC Brake 0 = Not DC Brake1 = DC Brakex DB Active 0 = Not Dynamic Brake Active1 = Dynamic Brake Activex Speed Mode 0 = Not Speed Mode (Par. 309)1 = Speed Modex Position Mode 0 = Not Position Mode (Par. 309)1 = Position Modex Torque Mode 0 = Not Torque Mode (Par. 309)1 = Torque Modex At Zero Speed 0 = Not at Zero Speed1 =At Zero Speedx At Home 0 = Not at Home1 = At Homex At Limit 0 = Not at Limit1 = At Limitx Current Limit 0 = Not at Current Limit1 = At Current Limitx Bus Freq Reg 0 = Not Bus Freq Reg1 = Bus Freq Regx Enable On 0 = Not Enable On1 = Enable Onx Motor Overload 0 = Not Motor Overload1 = Motor Overloadx Regen 0 = Not Regen1= RegenPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Supplemental Drive Information A-11Output DevicesCommon mode cores are internal to the drive.Drive, Fuse & CircuitBreaker RatingsTable A.H and Table A.I provide drive ratings (including continuous, 1minute and 3 second) and recommended AC line input fuse and circuitbreaker information. Sizes listed are the recommended sizes based on 40degree C and the U.S. N.E.C. Other country, state or local codes mayrequire different ratings.Refer to Table A.G which describes input device requirements based onphysical installation choice.Frames2, 3, 4, 56, 7Table A.G Input Device RequirementsEnclosureCatalog Code Enclosure Type Installation Type UL Certification RequiredIP20NInstalled in a non-ventilatedNEMA/UL Open TypeAll devices in Tables A.H andcabinet. Heat sink is inside orA.I are acceptable.FFlangeoutside of cabinet.NIP20NEMA/UL Open TypeFGNGFlangeIP54NEMA/UL Type 12IP00NEMA/UL Open TypeIP54NEMA/UL Type 12Installed outside of cabinetusing NEMA Type 1 kit or in aventilated cabinet.Installed inside or outside ofany cabinet.Installed in any cabinet.Heat sink is inside or outsideof cabinet.Installed outside of cabinetusing NEMA Type 1 kit.Installed inside or outside ofany cabinet.Devices in Tables A.H and A.Iexcluding time delay fuses andmaximum value for non-timedelay fuses.All devices in Tables A.H andA.I are acceptable.All devices in Tables A.H andA.I are acceptable.All devices in Tables A.H andA.I are acceptable.UL Certification NotRequiredAll devices in Tables A.H andA.I are acceptable.FusingIf fuses are chosen as the desired protection method, refer to therecommended types listed below. If available amp ratings do not match thetables provided, the closest fuse rating that exceeds the drive rating shouldbe chosen.• IEC – BS88 (British Standard) Parts 1 & 2 (1) , EN60269-1, Parts 1 & 2,type gG or equivalent should be used.• UL – UL Class T, J or L should be used.Circuit BreakersThe “non-fuse” listings in the following tables include both circuit breakers(inverse time or instantaneous trip). If one of these is chosen as the desiredprotection method, the following requirements apply.• IEC and UL – Both types of devices are acceptable for IEC and ULinstallations.(1) Typical designations include, but may not be limited to the following; Parts 1 & 2: AC, AD, BC, BD, CD, DD, ED, EFS, EF, FF, FG,GF, GG, GH.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

A-12 Supplemental Drive InformationTable A.H 400 Volt AC Input Protection DevicesContinuousOutputAmpsDrive Sized For NormalDutyCatalogNumberOutputOverloadAmpsDrive Sized For HeavyDutyCatalogNumberOutputOverloadAmpsInputQuantities AC Input Protection DevicesContinuousAC InputDual ElementTime DelayFuseApplied140M Motor Starter with Adjustable CurrentRating (1)(x = F or G) 60 sec 3 sec (x = F or G) 60 sec 3 sec kVA Amps Min (3) Max (4) Min (3) Max (4) Range (7) (8)kW Amps400 Volt AC Input 540 Volt DC Input0.75 kW 2 2.1 20x…C2P1 3.1 3.7 20x…C2P1 3.1 3.7 1.2 1.7 3 6 3 8 15 3 M-C2E-B25 M-D8E-B25 1.1 2.1 JKS-61.5 kW 2 3.5 20x…C3P5 5.2 6.3 20x…C3P5 5.2 6.3 1.9 2.8 6 7 6 12 15 7 M-C2E-B40 M-D8E-B40 2.0 3.7 JKS-82.2 kW 2 5 20x…C5P0 7.5 9.0 20x…C5P0 7.5 9.0 3.1 4.5 6 10 6 20 20 7 M-C2E-B63 M-D8E-B63 2.9 5.3 JKS-104.0 kW 2 8.7 20x…C8P7 13.0 15.6 20x…C8P7 13.0 15.6 5.4 7.8 10 17.5 10 30 30 15 M-C2E-C10 M-D8E-C10 M-F8E-C10 5.0 9.3 HSJ15Non-TimeDelay FuseFrame (2)250 kW 7 456 20x…C456 501.6 684.0 309.5 446.7 600 1000 600 1800 1300 600 281.9 522.0 Bussman 170M6613Notes:(1)“Applied Rating” refers to the motor that will be connected to the drive. For example, a “C015 drive” can be used in Normal Duty mode on a 7.5 kW motor, or in Heavy Duty mode on a 5.5 kW motor. The drive can beprogrammed for either mode. Wiring and fuses can be sized based on the programmed mode. For any given drive catalog number, Normal Duty mode provides higher continuous current but smaller overload current withrespect to Heavy Duty mode. See parameter 306 [Duty Rating].(2)Enclosure codes F and N only. See Table A.J for frame sizes of other enclosure types.(3) Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping.(4) Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection. For US NEC, minimum size is 125% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum.(5) Circuit Breaker - inverse time breaker. For US NEC, minimum size is 125% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum.(6) Recommended Motor circuit protector - Instantaneous trip circuit breaker. The trip setting should be set to the input current of the drive and should be sized for the continuous current of the system.(7)Bulletin 140M with adjustable current range should have the current trip set to the minimum range that the device will not trip.(8) Manual Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller. 480Y/277V and 600Y/347V AC Input.CircuitBreakerMaxSize (5)MotorCircuitProtector(6)InputQuantitiesDC InputProtectionContinuous DCInput Non-Time DelayFuse5.5 kW 2 11.5 20x…C011 17.2 20.7 20x…C011 17.2 20.7 7.4 10.7 15 25 15 45 45 15 M-C2E-C16 M-D8E-C16 M-F8E-C16 6.8 12.6 HSJ207.5 kW 2 15.4 20x…C015 16.9 23.1 20x…C022 24.2 33.0 10.1 14.6 20 30 20 60 60 20 M-C2E-C20 M-D8E-C20 M-F8E-C20 9.2 17.0 HSJ2511 kW 2 22 20x…C022 24.2 33.0 20x…C030 33.0 45.0 14.6 21.1 30 45 30 80 80 30 M-C2E-C25 M-D8E-C25 M-F8E-C25 13.3 24.6 HSJ4015 kW 3 30 20x…C030 33.0 45.0 20x…C037 45.0 55.5 19.9 28.7 40 60 40 120 100 50 M-F8E-C32 18.1 33.6 HSJ5018.5 kW 3 37 20x…C037 40.7 55.5 20x…C043 55.5 66.6 24.5 35.4 45 80 45 125 110 50 M-F8E-C45 22.3 41.4 HSJ7022 kW 3 43 20x…C043 47.3 64.5 20x…C060 66.0 90.0 28.5 41.2 55 90 55 150 120 60 26.0 48.1 HSJ9030 kW 4 60 20x…C060 66.0 90.0 20x…C072 90.0 108.0 39.8 57.4 75 125 75 225 180 100 36.2 67.1 HSJ10037 kW 4 72 20x…C072 79.2 108.0 20x…C085 108.0 129.6 48.9 70.5 90 150 90 275 200 100 44.5 82.4 HSJ12545 kW 5 85 20x…C085 93.5 127.5 20x…C104 127.5 156.0 57.7 83.3 110 175 110 325 250 150 52.5 97.3 HSJ15055 kW 5 104 20x…C104 114.4 156.0 20x…C140 156.0 210.0 71.3 102.9 130 225 130 400 300 150 64.9 120.2 HSJ17575 kW 6 140 20x…C140 154.0 210.0 20x…C170 210.0 255.0 95.0 137.2 175 300 175 550 400 250 86.5 160.3 HSJ25090 kW 6 170 20x…C170 187.0 255.0 20x…C205 255.0 307.5 115.4 166.5 225 375 225 600 500 250 105.1 194.6 HSJ350110 kW 6 205 20x…C205 225.5 307.5 20x…C260 307.5 390.0 139.1 200.8 275 450 275 600 600 400 126.7 234.7 HSJ350132 kW 6 260 20x…C260 286.0 390.0 20x…C302 390.0 468.0 176.5 254.7 325 575 325 750 700 400 160.7 297.7 HSJ400160 kW 7 302 20x…C302 332.2 453.0 20x…C367 453.0 550.5 205.0 295.9 400 675 400 900 900 600 186.7 345.7 Bussman 170M6608200 kW 7 367 20x…C367 403.7 550.5 20x…C456 550.5 684.0 249.1 359.5 475 800 475 1000 1100 600 226.9 420.2 Bussman 170M6612PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Supplemental Drive Information A-13Table A.I 480 Volt AC Input Protection DevicesContinuousOutputAmpsDrive Sized For NormalDutyCatalogNumberOutputOverloadAmpsDrive Sized For HeavyDutyCatalogNumberOutputOverloadAmpsInputQuantities AC Input Protection DevicesContinuousAC InputDual ElementTime DelayFuseAppliedRating (1)140M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current(x = F or G) 60 sec 3 sec (x = F or G) 60 sec 3 sec kVA Amps Min (3) Max (4) Min (3) Max (4) Range (7) (8)kW Amps480 Volt AC Input 650 Volt DC Input1.0 Hp 2 2.1 20x…D2P1 3.1 3.7 20x…D2P1 3.1 3.7 1.3 1.6 2 6 2 8 15 3 M-C2E-B25 M-D8E-B25 1.2 1.9 JKS-62.0 Hp 2 3.4 20x…D3P4 5.1 6.1 20x…D3P4 5.1 6.1 2.2 2.6 4 7 4 12 15 7 M-C2E-B40 M-D8E-B40 1.9 3.0 JKS-6Frame (2)(1) “Applied Rating” refers to the motor that will be connected to the drive. For example, a “D014 drive” can be used in Normal Duty mode on a 10 Hp motor, or in Heavy Duty mode on a 7.5 Hp motor. The drive can beprogrammed for either mode. Wiring and fuses can be sized based on the programmed mode. For any given drive catalog number, Normal Duty mode provides higher continuous current but smaller overload current withrespect to Heavy Duty mode. See parameter 306 [Duty Rating].(2)Enclosure codes F and N only. See Table A.J for frame sizes of other enclosure types.(3) Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping.(4)Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection. For US NEC, minimum size is 125% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum.(5) Circuit Breaker - inverse time breaker. For US NEC, minimum size is 125% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum.(6)Recommended Motor circuit protector - Instantaneous trip circuit breaker. The trip setting should be set to the input current of the drive and should be sized for the continuous current of the system.(7) Bulletin 140M with adjustable current range should have the current trip set to the minimum range that the device will not trip.(8) Manual Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller. 480Y/277V and 600Y/347V AC Input.Non-TimeDelay FuseCircuitBreakerMaxSize (5)MotorCircuitProtector(6)InputQuantitiesDC InputProtectionContinuous DCInput Non-Time DelayFuse3.0 Hp 2 5 20x…D5P0 7.5 9.0 20x…D5P0 7.5 9.0 3.2 3.9 6 10 6 20 20 7 M-C2E-B63 M-D8E-B63 2.9 4.5 JKS-105.0 Hp 2 8 20x…D8P0 12.0 14.4 20x…D8P0 12.0 14.4 5.7 6.9 10 17.5 10 30 30 15 M-C2E-C10 M-D8E-C10 M-F8E-C10 5.2 8.1 HSJ157.5 Hp 2 11 20x…D011 16.5 19.8 20x…D011 16.5 19.8 7.9 9.5 12 20 12 40 40 15 M-C2E-C16 M-D8E-C16 M-F8E-C16 CMN-2500 7.2 11.1 HSJ2010 Hp 2 14 20x…D014 15.4 21.0 20x…D022 24.2 33.0 10.4 12.5 20 30 20 55 50 20 M-C2E-C16 M-D8E-C16 M-F8E-C16 CMN-4000 9.5 14.7 HSJ3015 Hp 2 22 20x…D022 24.2 33.0 20x…D027 33.0 40.5 16.6 19.9 30 50 30 80 80 30 M-C2E-C25 M-D8E-C25 M-F8E-C25 CMN-4000 15.1 23.3 HSJ4020 Hp 3 27 20x…D027 29.7 40.5 20x…D034 40.5 51.0 20.6 24.8 35 60 35 100 100 50 M-F8E-C32 CMN-4000 18.8 28.9 HSJ5025 Hp 3 34 20x…D034 37.4 51.0 20x…D040 51.0 61.2 25.9 31.2 45 75 45 125 100 50 M-F8E-C45 CMN-6300 23.6 36.4 HSJ6030 Hp 3 40 20x…D040 44.0 60.0 20x…D052 60.0 78.0 30.5 36.7 50 90 50 150 120 50 M-F8E-C45 CMN-9000 27.8 42.9 HSJ8040 Hp 4 52 20x…D052 57.2 78.0 20x…D065 78.0 97.5 39.7 47.7 65 110 65 200 150 70 CMN-9000 36.1 55.7 HSJ9050 Hp 4 65 20x…D065 71.5 97.5 20x…D077 97.5 117.0 49.6 59.6 90 125 90 250 175 100 CMN-9000 45.1 69.7 HSJ10060 Hp 5 77 20x…D077 84.7 115.5 20x…D096 115.5 144.0 60.1 72.3 100 170 100 300 225 100 54.7 84.5 HSJ15075 Hp 5 96 20x…D096 105.6 144.0 20x…D125 144.0 187.5 74.9 90.1 125 200 125 375 275 125 68.3 105.3 HSJ175100 Hp 6 125 20x…D125 137.5 187.5 20x…D156 187.5 234.0 97.6 117.4 175 275 175 500 375 250 88.9 137.1 HSJ200125 Hp 6 156 20x…D156 171.6 234.0 20x…D186 234.0 280.8 121.8 146.5 200 350 200 600 450 250 110.9 171.2 HSJ300150 Hp 6 186 20x…D186 204.6 279.0 20x…D248 279.0 372.0 145.2 174.6 250 400 250 600 550 250 132.2 204.1 HSJ400200 Hp 6 248 20x…D248 272.8 372.0 20x…D302 372.0 453.0 193.6 232.8 325 550 325 700 700 400 176.3 272.1 HSJ400250 Hp 7 302 20x…D302 332.2 453.0 20x…D361 453.0 543.6 235.7 283.5 400 675 400 900 900 600 214.7 331.3 Bussman 170M6608300 Hp 7 361 20x…D361 397.1 541.5 20x…D415 541.5 649.8 281.8 338.9 475 800 475 1000 1000 600 256.6 396.1 Bussman 170M6612350 Hp 7 415 20x…D415 456.5 622.5 323.9 389.6 525 900 525 1200 1200 600 295.0 455.3 Bussman 170M6612Notes:PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

A-14 Supplemental Drive InformationDimensionsTable A.J Frame/Rating Cross-Reference400V AC Input 480V AC Input Frame SizeCatalogNumberNormal DutykW OutputHeavy DutykW OutputCatalogNumberNormal DutyHp OutputHeavy DutyHp OutputEnclosure CodeN F G20x…C2P1 0.75 0.75 20x…D2P1 1 120x…C3P5 1.5 1.5 20x…D3P4 2 220x…C5P0 2.2 2.2 20x…D5P0 3 320x…C8P7 4 4 20x…D8P0 5 52 2 220x…C011 5.5 5.5 20x…D011 7.5 7.520x…C015 7.5 5.5 20x…D014 10 7.520x…C022 11 7.5 20x…D022 15 1020x…C030 15 11 20x…D027 20 1520x…C037 18.5 15 20x…D034 25 203 3 320x…C043 22 18.5 20x…D040 30 2520x…C060 30 22 20x…D052 40 3044 420x…C072 37 30 20x…D065 50 40520x…C085 45 37 20x…D077 60 505 520x…C104 55 45 20x…D096 75 6020x…C140 75 55 20x…D125 100 75620x…C170 90 75 20x…D156 125 100620x…C205 110 90 20x…D186 150 12520x…C260 132 110 20x…D248 200 150N/A20x…C302 160 132 20x…D302 250 20020x…C367 200 160 20x…D361 300 2507720x…C456 250 200 20x…D415 350 300PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Supplemental Drive Information A-15Figure A.2 IP20, NEMA/UL Open Type, Frame 2134.5(5.30)100.0(3.94)6.4 (0.25)14.3 (0.56)212.0(8.35)424.2(16.70)404.2(15.91)Figure A.3 Flange Mount, Frame 2206.2(8.12)212.0(8.35)481.8(18.97)94.2 (3.71)19.2 (0.76)188.3 (7.41)169.2 (6.66)14x: Ø3.50(Ø0.138)460.6(18.13)395.3(15.56)285.3(11.23)175.3(6.90)399.60 +1.80/-0.00(15.7 +0.1/-0.0)63.7(2.51)65.3(2.57)30.2(1.19)128.00 +1.80/-0.00(5.0 +0.1/-0.0)30.5(1.20)Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches).Important: Must use mounting hardware supplied to meet enclosure rating.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

A-16 Supplemental Drive InformationFigure A.4 IP54, NEMA/UL Type 12, Frame 2215.3(8.48)100.0(3.94)6.4 (0.25)14.3 (0.56)222.2(8.75)543.2(21.39)528.2(20.80)88.1 (3.47)85.7 (3.37)65.1 (2.56)44.5 (1.75)42.1 (1.66)2x: Ø22.0(Ø0.87)3x: Ø29.0(Ø1.14)179.4(7.06) 146.4(5.76) 109.4(4.31)Figure A.5 IP20, NEMA/UL Open Type, Frame 3190.0(7.48)158.0(6.22)6.4 (0.25)14.3 (0.56)212.0(8.35)454.0(17.87)435.0(17.13)Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches).PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Supplemental Drive Information A-17Figure A.6 Flange Mount, Frame 3260.0(10.24)212.0(8.35)515.0(20.28)120.3 (4.74)32.3 (1.27)240.5 (9.47)208.3 (8.20)16x: Ø3.50(Ø0.138)495.5(19.51)84.6(3.33)457.8(18.02)352.8(13.89)434.00 +1.80/-0.00(17.087 +0.070/-0.000)247.8(9.76)142.8(5.62)4x: 5.00R(0.197R)37.8(1.48)30.75(1.211)179.00 +1.80/-0.00(7.047 +0.070/-0.000)30.75(1.211)Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches).Important: Must use mounting hardware supplied to meet enclosure rating.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

A-18 Supplemental Drive InformationFigure A.7 IP54, NEMA/UL Type 12, Frame 3268.0(10.55)158.0(6.22)185.5(7.30)6.4 (0.25)14.3 (0.56)220.1(8.67)551.0(21.69)533.0(20.98)92.8 (3.65)62.3 (2.45)49.8 (1.96)135.8 (5.35)123.3 (4.85)3x: Ø22.2(Ø0.87)2x: Ø43.7(Ø1.72)183.5(7.22)136.5(5.37)Figure A.8 IP20, NEMA/UL Open Type, Frame 4194.0(7.64)222.0(8.74)6.4 (0.25)14.3 (0.56)212.0(8.35)474.0(18.66)455.0(17.91)202.0(7.95)Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches).PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Supplemental Drive Information A-19Figure A.9 Flange Mount, Frame 4292.0(11.50)211.9(8.34)535.0(21.06)48.25 (1.900)136.25 (5.364)272.50 (10.728)224.25 (8.829)16x: Ø3.50(Ø0.138)515.50(20.295)84.5(3.33)477.75(18.809)367.75(14.478)454.00 +1.80/-0.00(17.874 +0.070/-0.000)257.75(10.148)147.75(5.817)4x: 5.00R(0.197R)37.75(1.486)30.75(1.211)211.00 +1.80/-0.00(8.307 +0.070/-0.000)30.75(1.211)Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches).Important: Must use mounting hardware supplied to meet enclosure rating.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

A-20 Supplemental Drive InformationFigure A.10 IP54, NEMA/UL Type 12, Frame 4300.0(11.81)194.0(7.64)217.5(8.56)6.4 (0.25)14.3 (0.56)220.1(8.67)571.0(22.48)553.0(21.77)108.8 (4.28)76.8 (3.02)51.8 (2.04)165.8 (6.53)140.8 (5.54)3x: Ø22.2(Ø0.87)182.0(7.17)136.5(5.37)2x: Ø43.7(Ø1.72)Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches).PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Supplemental Drive Information A-21Figure A.11 IP20, NEMA/UL Open Type, Frame 5238.0(9.37)270.0(10.63)6.4 (0.25)14.3 (0.56)212.0(8.35)550.0(21.65)531.0(20.91)Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches).PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

A-22 Supplemental Drive InformationFigure A.12 Flange Mount, Frame 5340.0(13.39)211.9(8.34)611.0(24.06)120.25 (4.734)40.25 (1.585)200.25 (7.884)320.50 (12.618)280.25 (11.033)22x: Ø3.50(Ø0.138)591.50(23.287)550.75(21.683)84.5(3.33)465.75(18.337)380.75(14.990)531.0 +1.8/-0.0(20.91 +0.07/-0.00)295.75(11.644)210.75(8.297)125.75(4.951)4x: 5.00R(0.197R)40.75(1.604)30.75(1.211)259.0 +1.8/-0.0(10.20 +0.07/-0.00)30.25(1.191)Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches).Important: Must use mounting hardware supplied to meet enclosure rating.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Supplemental Drive Information A-23Figure A.13 IP54, NEMA/UL Type 12, Frame 5348.0(13.70)238.0(9.37)265.5(10.45)6.4 (0.25)14.3 (0.56)220.1(8.67)647.0(25.47)629.0(24.76)6.4(0.25)92.8 (3.65)52.8 (2.08)212.8 (8.38)172.8 (6.80)132.8 (5.23)3x: Ø22.2(Ø0.87)181.9(7.16)141.9(5.59)2x: Ø50.0(Ø1.97)Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches).PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

A-24 Supplemental Drive InformationFigure A.14 NEMA/UL Type 1 Kit Frames 2…5 (Frame 4 Shown)ABDimensions are in millimeters and (inches).DFrame A B C D2 222.2 (8.75) 497.1 (19.57) 117.7 (4.63) 38.0 (1.50)3 223.1 (8.78) 530.1 (20.87) 154.7 (6.09) 38.0 (1.50)4 222.7 (8.77) 564.4 (22.22) 154.7 (6.09) 40.0 (1.57)5 222.7 (8.77) 665.4 (26.20) 155.0 (6.10) 55.0 (2.17)Important: NEMA Type 1 Kits (20-750-NEMA-Fx) do not change themounting dimensions.CPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Supplemental Drive Information A-25Figure A.15 NEMA/UL Type 1 Frames 2…5 Bottom View Dimensions89.7 (3.53)87.0 (3.43)67.5 (2.66)48.0 (1.89)45.3 (1.78)5x: Ø22.0(Ø0.87)95.0 (3.74)65.0 (2.56)60.0 (2.36)130.0 (5.12)125.0 (4.92)5x: Ø22.2(Ø0.87)171.6(6.76) 137.6(5.42) 94.6(3.72)2x: Ø29.0(Ø1.14)168.7(6.64)156.7(6.17)118.7(4.67)2x: Ø43.7(Ø1.72)Frame 2 Frame 3110.8 (4.36)76.8 (3.02)62.8 (2.47)158.8 (6.25)144.8 (5.70)5x: Ø22.2(Ø0.87)90.0 (3.54)69.0 (2.72)201.0 (7.91)180.0 (7.09)135.0 (5.31)5x: Ø22.2(Ø0.87)187.0(7.36)168.7(6.64)118.7(4.67)2x: Ø43.7(Ø1.72)187.0(7.36)173.0(6.81)123.0(4.84)2x: Ø50.0(Ø1.97)Frame 4 Frame 5Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches).PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

A-26 Supplemental Drive InformationFigure A.16 EMC Plate Kit Frames 2…5 (Frame 4 Shown)ACBEFDDimensions are in millimeters and (inches).Frame A B C D E F2 134.5 (5.30) 485.9 (19.13) 424.2 (16.70) 61.7 (2.43) 43.5 (1.71) 79.5 (3.13)3 190.0 (7.48) 514.0 (20.24) 454.0 (17.87) 60.0 (2.36) 74.0 (2.91) 116.0 (4.57)4 222.0 (8.74) 533.7 (21.01) 474.0 (18.66) 59.7 (2.35) 84.0 (3.31) 138.0 (5.43)5 270.0 (10.63) 609.7 (24.00) 550.0 (21.65) 59.7 (2.35) 77.8 (3.06) 191.8 (7.55)Important: EMC Kits (20-750-EMC-Fx) do not change the mountingdimensions. Refer to the PowerFlex 750-Series EMC Plate andCore(s) Installation Instructions, publication 750-IN006, fordetailed information on kit installation.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Supplemental Drive Information A-27Figure A.17 IP00, NEMA/UL Open Type, Frame 6308.0(12.13)208.4(8.20)346.4(13.64)665.5(26.20)644.0(25.35)6.4 (0.25)254.0(10.00)283.0(11.14)ø14.5 (0.57)ø6.5 (0.26)14.5 (0.57)623.0(24.53)609.0(23.98)Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches).PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

A-28 Supplemental Drive InformationFigure A.18 Flange Mount, Frame 6308.0(12.13)208.4(8.20)346.4(13.64)665.5(26.20)91.0 (3.58)58.5 (2.30)26.0 (1.02)284.0 (11.18)258.0 (10.16)225.5 (8.88)193.0 (7.60)24x: Ø6.4(Ø0.25)624.0(24.57)600.0(23.62)562.0(22.13)138.0(5.43)462.0(18.19)561.0 +2.0/-1.5(22.09 +0.08/-0.06)362.0(14.25)262.0(10.31)162.0(6.38)62.0(2.44) 268.0 +2.0/-1.531.524.0(10.60 +0.08/-0.06)(1.24)(0.94) 8.0(0.30)Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches).Important: Must use Flange Adapter kit (20-750-FLNG4-F6) to meetenclosure rating.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Supplemental Drive Information A-29Figure A.19 NEMA/UL Type 1 Kit Frame 6308.0(12.13)346.7(13.65)945.1(37.21)Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches).Important: NEMA Type 1 Kit (20-750-NEMA-F6) does not change themounting dimensions.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

A-30 Supplemental Drive InformationFigure A.20 IP54, NEMA/UL Type 12, Frame 6609.4(23.99)558.8(22.00)464.7(18.30)1298.3(51.11)1238.3(48.75)10.5 (0.41)ø22.0 (0.87)1058.1(41.66)Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches).PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Supplemental Drive Information A-31Figure A.21 IP00, NEMA/UL Open Type, Frame 7430.0(16.93)207.9(8.19)349.6(13.76)875.0(34.45)875.0(34.45)8.5 (0.33)330.0(12.99)380.0(14.96)ø16.0 (0.63)ø8.5 (0.33)25.0 (0.98)838.0(32.99)825.0(32.48)PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

A-32 Supplemental Drive InformationFigure A.22 Flange Mount, Frame 7430.0(16.93)208.4(8.20)875.0(34.45)138.0(5.43)50.38 (1.98)403.00 (15.87)352.63 (13.88)251.88 (9.92)151.13 (5.95)32x: Ø7.0(Ø0.28)812.0(31.97)784.0(30.87)744.8(29.32)666.4(26.24)588.0(23.15)768.0(30.24)509.6(20.06)431.2(16.98)352.8(13.89)274.4(10.80)196.0(7.72)117.6(4.63)39.2(1.54)28.0(1.10)8.0(0.31)387.0(15.24)8.0(0.31)PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches).Important: Must use Flange Adapter kit (20-750-FLNG4-F7) to meetenclosure rating.

Supplemental Drive Information A-33Figure A.23 NEMA/UL Type 1, Frame 7430.0(16.93)380.0(14.96)1271.0(50.04)1221.0(48.07)881.8(34.72)825.0(32.48)8.5 (0.33)ø16.0 (0.63)339.2(13.35)389.2(15.32)20.5(0.81)389.0(15.31)430.0(16.93)561.0(22.08)Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches).PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

A-34 Supplemental Drive InformationFigure A.24 IP54, NEMA/UL Type 12, Frame 7609.6(24.00)558.8(22.00)464.8(18.30)1614.0(63.54)1543.1(60.75)10.5 (0.41)ø22.0 (0.87)1058.4(41.67)Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches).PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Appendix BControl Block DiagramsList of PowerFlex 753Control Block DiagramsFlow diagrams on the following pages illustrate the PowerFlex 753 drivecontrol algorithms.For Information on …See Page...Flux Vector Overview B-3VF, SV Overview B-4Speed/Position Feedback B-5Speed Control - Reference Overview B-6Speed Control - Reference (1) B-7Speed Control - Reference (2) B-8Speed Control - Reference (3) B-9Speed Control - Reference (4) B-10Speed Control - Reference (5) B-11Speed Control - Regulator (FV) B-12Position Control - Reference B-13Position Control - Regulator B-14Position Control - Aux Functions B-15Position Control - Homing B-16Torque Control - Overview B-17Torque Control - Reference Scale & Trim B-18Torque Control - Torque B-19Torque Control - Current B-20Process Control (1) B-21Process Control (2) B-22MOP Control B-23Inputs & Outputs - Digital B-24Inputs & Outputs - Analog B-25Control Logic B-26Inverter Overload IT B-27PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

B-2 Control Block DiagramsDiagram Conventions andDefinitionsDefinitions of the Per Unit system:1.0 PU Position = Distance traveled / 1sec at Base Spd1.0 PU Speed = Base Speed of the Motor1.0 PU Torque = Base Torque of the Motor* Notes, Important:Symbol Legend:DriveOption ModuleParametersParametersRequires port number.Read Only ParameterRead / Write ParameterRead Only Parameter with Bit EnumerationRead / Write Parameter with Bit Enumeration(1) These diagrams are for reference only and maynot accurately reflect all logical control signals;actual functionality is implied by the approximateddiagrams. Accuracy of these diagrams is notguaranteed.Provides additional information( ) = Enumerated Parameter[ ] = Page and Coordinateex. 3A2 = pg 3, Column A, Row 2= Constant value‘d’= Prefix refers to Diagnostic Item Numberex. d33 = Diagnostic Item 33PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Control Block Diagrams B-3Flux Vector OverviewPosition Control (pages: 11-14)FeedbackOptionCardsMtr Psn Fdbk Sel135PositionFdbkSelectionPsn Fdbk847ΔΔUser HomePsn 738HomingPositionPresetInitΣ 836 Psn ActualProportional ChannelIntegration ChannelPowerFlex 753Flux Vector OverviewPTP SetpointPTP RefSel775++ +Speed Control – Regulator (page: 10)Active VelFdbkFinal Speed Ref597131Speed Reg KpLead/LagFilter645PI Regulator620Lead/LagFilterSReg Output660( Psn Reg Spd Out )780Psn DirectStpt766defaultPt-Pt RefSelectiondefaultActv SpTqPsMode313PsnPTPPsn RefSelect765Direct RefSelectionPTP Command784Psn DirectRef767Pt-PtPositionPlannerSpdPosPTP Reference776Actv SpTqPsMode313PositionModeSelectionPsn SelectedRef722Δ[ N ][ D ]Gear RatPsn Reg Kp839Psn Reg Ki838Psn Ref EGROutΣ 815PIRegulatorSpeedLimit /NotchFilterPsnRegSpd OutLead/LagFilter843Max Fwd Speed520Limit521Max Rev SpeedDroop RPMat FLAPositionOffset++Speed Reg KiSpeed Reg BW647636( Scaled Spd Ref )( Spd Comp Out )Speed Control – Reference (pages: 4-7,9)Speed Ref A Sel545Speed Ref B Sel550TrmPct RefA Sel608TrmPct RefB Sel612Trim Ref A Sel600Trim Ref B Sel604Preset Speed 1Preset Speed 2Preset Speed 3Preset Speed 4571572573574SpeedRefTrimPctRefTrimRefSpeed RefSelection&LimitsSelected Spd Ref592PID Output Sel1079PID SpeedExclusiveSelectionJog Speed 1Jog Speed 2556557783Ramped Spd RefJoggingSelectionΔPTP SpeedFwdRefActv SpTqPsMode313LinearRamp &S CurveSpeed FFSelection594Lead/LagFilterΣ 723PsnCommand( Spd Reg Out )Torque Control (pages: 15-18)Actv SpTqPsMode313 Torque StepSpeed Comp Sel 665686Speed/Torque/Speed Comp 667Trq Ref A Sel+Position +Speed675ModeTorqueComp OutSelectionTrq Ref B Sel RefSelection680+++ X + 685PID TorqueTrim / ExclSelected Trq RefSelectionPID SpeedTrimSelection555Speed RefScale1079PID Output SelNotchFilterLimited Trq Ref690LimitTorqueLimitGenerationE 1FOCPerm Magn& VectorControlCurrentProcessingMotorPreset Speed 5 5751079Preset Speed 6 576Preset Speed 7 577PID Output SelGearLoadE 2Process Control (pages: 19,20)( PID Output Meter )PID Output MeterPID Ref MeterPID1093PID Ref Sel 1067 Reference 1090SelectionPID Fdbk Meter PID Regulator( PID Output Meter )PIDPID Fdbk Sel 1072 Feedback 1091Selection LimitPID LPPID Prop Gain 10861084Filter BWPID Int Time1087PID Deriv Time1088PF753 Rev1.001g, PF753 Block Diagram Overview - FV 1x+PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

B-4 Control Block DiagramsVF, SV OverviewPowerFlex 753VF (V/Hz), SV OverviewSpeed Control – Reference (pages: 4-6,8,9)Speed Ref A Sel545Speed Ref B Sel550TrmPct RefA Sel608TrmPct RefB Sel612Trim Ref A Sel600Trim Ref B Sel604Preset Speed 1Preset Speed 2Preset Speed 3Preset Speed 4Preset Speed 5Preset Speed 6Preset Speed 7571572573574575576577SpeedRefTrimPctRefTrimRefSpeed RefSelection&Limits+Selected Spd Ref5921079PID SpeedExclusiveSelectionPID Output Sel 1079556Jog Speed 1557Jog Speed 2PID Output SelPID SpeedTrimSelectionJoggingSelectionRamped Spd RefLinearRamp &S Curve594Speed Contol – Trim Regulator (page: 9)Final Speed RefActive Vel Fdbk597VHzSV Spd Reg KpVHzSV Spd Reg Ki131663664PI RegulatorVHzSVSpdTrimRegSlip RPM at FLA 621+ + + -++( Freq Adder )DroopOutputFrequency1( Ramp Input Ref )+V/Hz623CurrentProcessingMotorProcess Control (pages: 19,20)( PID Output Meter )PIDPID Ref Sel 1067 ReferenceSelectionPID Fdbk Sel 1072PID Ref Meter1090PID Fdbk Meter PID RegulatorPIDFeedback 1091Selection LimitPID Output Meter1093PID Prop Gain10861084PID LPFilter BWPID Int Time1087PID Deriv Time1088x( Motor Speed Ref )Droop RPM atFLA620( Ramp Rate )Bus/CurrentLimiter(Freq Ramp)Max Fwd SpeedMax Rev SpeedOverspeed LimitSlipComp+520521524LimitLimitSpeedTrim RegSelectionPF753 Rev1.001g, PF753 Block Diagram Overview - VF(V/Hz), SV 2PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Control Block Diagrams B-5Speed/Position FeedbackA BC DE FG HI1Pri Vel FdbkFltr126Spd Options Cntl(Auto Tach SW)635 7Fdbk LossDetect936 5Drive Status 2(FdbkLoss SwO)Speed/Posit Fdbk2Pri Vel Fdbk SelPri VelFdbkSource125ParameterSelectionPrimaryVelocity FdbkProcessingAlt Vel FdbkFltr129Pri Vel Feedback1270Active Vel Fdbk131DisplayFilteringTo Spd Reg[9B4], [10A3], [18B3]Mtr Vel Fdbk3Alt VelFdbkSourceParameterSelectionAlternateVelocity FdbkProcessingAlt Vel Feedback1301Alt Vel Fdbk Sel128345From Spd Ref[9D3]Final Speed Ref597VF or SV &Open LoopFrom Torq Ctrl Current[18E2]Control Mode/Feedback Mode***INTERNAL CONDITION ONLY***Limited Trq Ref690Total Inertia76Motor SimulatorVirtual EncoderVirtual Enc EPR141Slip RPM at FLA6211Open LoopVirtual Encoder[9I4]Output Frequency5Torque Cur FdbkVirtual Enc EPR141Open Loop Fdbk137Simulator Fdbk138Mtr Psn Fdbk SelMtr PsnFdbkSourceAux Vel Fdbk Sel135Aux VelFdbkSource132ParameterSelectionParameterSelectionPsn Fdbk847Aux Vel FdbkFltr133Aux VelocityFdbkProcessingTo Posit Ref,Posit Reg, PositionHoming[12A4], [14C4]Aux Vel Feedback134To Spd Ref[5A3]6PF753 Rev1.001g, PF753 Block Diagram Fdbk 3PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

B-6 Control Block DiagramsSpeed Control - Reference OverviewA BC DE FG HI1Speed Reference SelectionSpd RefCommandSpeed Control – Reference OverviewSpd Ref ATrim Ref ATrim % Ref A+Ref AAutoSpeed Reference Control2Spd Ref BTrim Ref BTrim % Ref B+Presets 3-7 AutoENet Spd RefDPI Ports 1-6 ManualRef BAuto+Jogging/LimitedSelected Spd Ref Oil Pump/DirectionLimitSpd RefSkipAutotune/SwitchHoming/ModeControlBandsOverridesLimitFromPI Regulator(Exclusive Mode)FiberApp.Speed RefStop3Vector Speed Control4FluxVectorVector Ramp S-CurveLinearRamp &S CurveRampedVel RefVel RefFilterFromPt-Pt ProfileGeneratorFromPI Regulator(Trim Mode)SpeedCompxSpeed RefScaleLimitMax SpeedMotor Spd RefVelocity RegRef56VF or SVRateSelectLinearRamp &S CurveV/F Ramp S-CurveFromPI Regulator(Trim Mode)RampedSpeed RefDroopFromPositionRegulatorLimitMax SpeedsPos RegOutputFilterFromVelocity TrimRegulatorFromSlip CompV/F Speed ControlLimitMax Speed +Overspeed LimitSpeed FeedbackVector Ramp StatusF/F Ramp StatusFrequencyRefSpeedStatusStatusPF753 Rev1.001g, PF753 Block Diagram Spd Ref Overview 4PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Control Block Diagrams B-7Speed Control - Reference (1)A BC DE FG HI1Disabled (0)Spd Ref A Stpt546Speed Ref A Sel545* Note: Analog Hi, Loscaling only used whenAnalog Input is selected‘d’ Prefix Refers to Diagnostic Item Number (ex. d33) – Reference Symbol LegendTrmPct RefA SelTrim Ref A SelSpeed Control – Reference (1)Speed Units(Hz / RPM)300930 Speed Ref Source616 SpdTrimPrcRefSrc617 Spd Trim Source591 Spd Ref Sel Sts234Preset Speed 1Preset Speed 2Preset Speed 3Preset Speed 4Preset Speed 5Preset Speed 6Preset Speed 7MOP Reference[21F3]Aux Vel Feedback[3H5]Port 1 ReferencePort 2 ReferencePort 3 ReferencePort 4 ReferencePort 5 ReferencePort 6 ReferenceOption Ports:Analog, EtherNet,DeviceLogixSpd Ref A AnlgHi547571572573574575576577558134871872873874875876*ParameterSelectionDefaultxDisabled (0)TrimPct RefA StptPort 1 ReferencePort 2 ReferencePort 3 ReferencePort 4 ReferencePort 5 ReferencePort 6 ReferenceAnlg In1 PortVal(option port)Anlg In2 PortVal(option port)TrmPct RefA AnHiTrmPct RefA AnLo610611609871872873874875876*608DefaultParameterSelectionxDisabled (0)Trim Ref A Stpt 601Port 1 ReferencePort 2 ReferencePort 3 ReferencePort 4 ReferencePort 5 ReferencePort 6 ReferenceAnlg In1 PortVal(option port)Anlg In2 PortVal(option port)Trim RefA AnlgHiTrim RefA AnlgLo602603871872873874875876*600DefaultParameterSelection[24H3]Drive Logic Rslt 879 6 14 13 12+573574575576577871872873874ManRefSel 2RefSel 1RefSel 0Drive Status 1 935 9 14 13 12 11 10Man Ref Ref Ref Ref RefBit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0( Ref A Auto )( Ref B Auto )( Preset3 Auto )( Preset4 Auto )( Preset5 Auto )( Preset6 Auto )( Preset7 Auto )( DPI Prt1 Man )( DPI Prt2 Man )( DPI Prt3 Man )( DPI Prt4 Man )Spd Ref Command0123456717181920d7ToSpd Ref (2)[6A1]Spd Ref A AnlgLo 548Speed Ref A Mult875 ( DPI Prt5 Man )549876 ( DPI Prt6 Man )212256Disabled (0)Spd Ref B Stpt 551Spd Ref B AnlgHiSpd Ref B AnlgLo552553Other Ref SourcesSpeed Ref B Sel 550Speed Ref B Mult*ParameterSelection554TrimPct RefB StptTrmPct RefB AnHiTrmPct RefB AnLoDisabled (0)x613614615Other Ref Sources* ParameterSelectionTrmPct RefB Sel 612xTrim Ref B StptTrim RefB AnlgHiTrim RefB AnlgLoDisabled (0)605606607Other Ref Sources* ParameterSelectionTrim Ref B Sel 604+DI ManRefAnlgHiDI ManRefAnlgLoAlt ManRef AnHiAlt ManRef AnLo564565*DI Man Ref Sel329330*Alt Man Ref SelParameterSelection563ParameterSelection328( Int ENet Man )( DevLogix Man )( DI Man Sel )( Alt Man Sel )29301631PF753 Rev1.001g, PF753 Block Diagram Spd Ref (1) 5PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

B-8 Control Block DiagramsSpeed Control - Reference (2)A BC DE FG HI12Position Control – Add Speed Reference Option[17D5] Actv SpTqPs Mode313FromPositionSpd Ref (1)(> 5)[5I2]PID ControlNon-position(

Control Block Diagrams B-9Speed Control - Reference (3)123[6H4]A BC DE FG HILimited Spd Ref593Skip Speed 1Skip Speed 2Skip Speed 3Skip Speed BandSkip Bands526527528529Skip Bands10935 17Drive Status 1(Jogging)Speed ControlSync Time1122SyncSpeedChangeFiber ControlFiber StatusFiber ApplicationP JumpMax TraverseTraverse IncTraverse Dec11201121Traverse/P-Jump1126112511231124CommandedSpdRef2Drive Status 1(Stopping)001935 18Not Stoppingand ActiveStoppingor Not ActiveStart/StopDrive Status 1(Running)935 16936 9Drive Status 2(Autotuning)[24H3][24H3]OR010Drive Logic Rslt(Accel Time 1, 2)Spd Options Ctrl(Ramp Disable) 635 1Accel Time 1Accel Time 2Spd Options Ctrl(Ramp Hold)Decel Time 1 537Decel Time 2 538Drive Logic Rslt879 10 11(Decel Time 1, 2)Jog Acc Dec TimeS Curve Accel, Decel 540Speed Control – Reference (3)Flux VectorVector Ramp and Rate Select(StpNoSCrvAcc)879 89635 2635 05355361,00,11,00,1539541RampS CurveRamped Spd Ref594[20C2]40596Speed RateRefRamped RefSpeed Comp SelNot UsedRate Ref2Speed Comp66501ddtSpeed Comp Gain 666Speed Comp OutSpeedComp667Spd FFFrom Posit Ref[11I5]Final Speed Ref LimitsFiltered Spd Ref595SpdRef FltrGainSpd Ref FilterSpd Ref Fltr BW590588589Speed Ref Filter(kn * s)+ wns + wnLead Lag56FromProcess Ctrl[20E3]1093PID Output Meter02≠21079PID Output Sel(Speed Trim)PI Speed Trim001935 17Drive Status 1(Jogging)555Spd Ref ScaleXFrom Posit Reg[12I5]Position Reg OutputPsnReg Spd Out843001935 17Drive Status 1(Jogging)Max Fwd Speed 520Max Rev Speed 521Max Speed LimitLimitAt Limit Status(MaxSpeed Lmt)945 2Spd Ref AfterFinal Limit[9A2]PF753 Rev1.001g, PF753 Block Diagram Spd Ref (3) - FV 7PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

B-10 Control Block DiagramsSpeed Control - Reference (4)A BC DE FG HI123Limited Spd Ref[6H4]593Skip Speed 1Skip Speed 2Skip Speed 3Skip SpeedBandSkip Bands526527528529Skip Bands10935 17Drive Status 1(Jogging)Sync Time1122SyncSpeedChangeFiber ControlFiber StatusFiber ApplicationP JumpMax TraverseTraverse IncTraverse Dec11201121Traverse/P-Jump1126112511231124CommandedSpdRef2Drive Status 1(Stopping)001935 18Not Stoppingand ActiveStoppingor Not ActiveStart/StopDrive Status 1(Running)935 16936 9Drive Status 2(Autotuning)OR010[24H3][24H3]Ramp Input[9E4]Drive Logic Rslt(Accel Time 1, 2)Drive Logic Rslt(Decel Time 1, 2)Accel Time 1Accel Time 2Speed Control – Reference (4)VF (V/Hz), SVV/F Ramp and Rate SelectSpd Options Ctrl(Ramp Disable) 635 1(StpNoSCrvAcc)879 8Decel Time 1Decel Time 2879 10Spd Options Ctrl(Ramp Hold)535536Jog Acc Dec TimeS Curve Accel, Decel 540911635 2635 05375381,00,11,00,1539541RampS CurveRampedSpd Ref594[9A2], [20C2]Ramp RatePreviousScan[9E4][9E5]Speed ControlFinal Speed Ref Limits4Max SpeedLimitsPI Speed TrimMax Fwd Speed 520Max Rev Speed 521LimitSpd Ref AfterFinal Limit[9A2]5FromProcess Ctrl[20E3]1093PID Output Meter02≠21079PID Output Sel(Speed Trim)001935 17Drive Status 1(Jogging)6PF753 Rev1.001g, PF753 Block Diagram Spd Ref (4) - VF(V/Hz), SV 8PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Control Block Diagrams B-11Speed Control - Reference (5)A BC DE FG HI1Speed Control – Reference (5)Spd Ref AfterFinal Limit[7I5] OR [8H4]Motor Cntl Mode35Flux Vector(3)Final Speed Ref597To Spd Reg[10A3]VelocityRegulatorTorqueReferenceTorque RefMotor Control ObjectTorqueControl234594Ramped Spd Ref[8G2]Filtered (100 R/S)Iq Feedback (pu)RPM1[NP Spd]HzVF or SV(0-2,7,8)1 *Poles[NP Freq] 120620 Droop RPM at FLAFrom Fdbk[3F2]Slip Comp BWXActive Vel Fdbk622131LimitMax Fwd/RevSpeed LimitLimit663PIORRPM6211[NP Spd]VHzSV Spd Reg KpLimit664VHzSV Spd Reg KiVF, SV Speed RegulatorAt Limit Status(MaxSpeed Lmt)945 2XSlip RPM at FLA1.5Hz1 *Poles[NP Freq] 120Speed Fdbkwith SensorFinal Speed Ref597 To Fdbk[3B5]0VHzSVSpdTrimReg623(Max Fwd/Rev +Overspeed Limit)Speed LimitLimitRamp Input[8E2]Ramp Rate[8I1]Motor FreqTo Ramp Integrator[8G1]Interrupt TimeScalingLimitedSpeed AdderAt Limit Status945 3 (OverSpd Lmt)Hz RPM[NP Freq] [NP Spd]*Poles120XSpeed to FreqScalingXX1Speed to Freq ScalingLimitedFreq Adder(Hz)SelectedFreq Ref(Hz)Ramp Rate(Motor CtrlInterrupt)(Hz / Sec)MotorFreq(Hz)Bus/CurrentLimiter(Freq Ramp)Freq Integral(Hz)LimitLimitOutputFrequency1[3D5],[19E4],[19H3]5Iq Feedback (pu)Slip RPM at FLA621LPFRPM1[NP Spd]Hz1 *Poles[NP Freq] 120XOpen LoopSpeed Fdbk1Speed Sensor Type***INTERNAL CONDITION ONLY***PreviousRamped Spd Ref[8I2]ReversePrevention(Max Fwd/Rev +Overspeed Limit)Freq LimitFreq Limit High (Hz)Freq Limit Low (Hz)6PF753 Rev1.001g, PF753 Block Diagram Spd Ref (5) 9PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

B-12 Control Block DiagramsSpeed Control - Regulator (FV)A BC DE FG HI1*set param 636/648 = 0to manually adjustparam 645/649 & 647/650636648653Speed Reg BWAlt Speed Reg BWSpd Loop DampingSpeed Control – RegulatorFlux Vector76Total InertiaInAdp LdObs Mode27040,234FromSpdRef[9C2]FromFdbk[3F2]Final Speed Ref597SReg FB FltrGainSReg FB Fltr BWActive Vel Fdbk131SReg FB Fltr Sel637638639SpdRegAntiBckup(kn * s)+ wns + wnLead Lag643nffFeedFwdSpeed Error641-+ + + kp + - + Filter+Set=1 Stage, 2 nd OrderP Gain+10%ksClear=2 Stage LPasssSpd Options Cntl-10%635 05640(SpdErrFilter)Speed Reg Kp* 645ServoLck LimitSpd Err Filt BW* 644Alt Speed Reg Kp* 649Filtered SpdFdbkAltSpdErr FltrBW* 651ki+Servo Lock Gain 642-sHold / ResetI GainAt Limit Status 945654PTP PsnRefStatus( PTP Int Hold)7202Speed Reg Ki*Alt Speed Reg Ki*647650655Spd Reg Pos Lmt656LimitSpd Reg Neg LmtSpd RegInt Out***INTERNAL CONDITION ONLY***At Limit Status(Spd Reg Lmt)945 4SReg OutFltr Sel(kn * s)+ wns + wnLead Lag658657SReg OutFltrGain659SReg OutFltrBWSpeed SensorTypeSensorlessFilter1 st OrderLPass710InertAdaptFltrBW*SReg Output660To Torq Ctrl[17B2]Spd Options Ctrl(SpdRegIntRes)(SpdRegIntHld)(Jog No Integ)635 346Droop RPMat FLA620DroopPreset5SReg Trq Preset 652Selected Trq Ref685[17E2]Actv SpTqPs Mode 313Bumpless[17D5]6PF753 Rev1.001g, PF753 Block Diagram Spd Reg - Flux Vector 10PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Control Block Diagrams B-13Position Control - ReferenceA BC DE FG HI1Position Control – ReferencePosition Mode SelectionActv SpTqPs Mode[17D5]313Zero Torque0Pt-Pt Position PlannerSpeed Reg1234PTP Control770 0PTP Ref Sel 775PTP Setpoint780Other RefSourcesDI Indx StepDI Indx StepRevDI Indx StepPrstPt-Pt Position Reference & Interpreter4ParameterSelectionVel Override5 Ref Pause772773774Intgrtr HoldPTPRef Scale778XPTPControlAbsolutePositionMove770 1IndexPositionX779PTP Index PresetPTPControl770 23PTP Mode[ N ][ D ]Gear RatAbsolutePTP EGRMult/Div789790Index01Reverse MovePreset PsnAbsolute Immediate2771Actv SpTqPs ModePsnPTP313[17D5]PTPCommand784[14G3]777PTP Feedback785786781782PTP Fwd Vel LmtPTP Rev Vel LmtPTP Accel TimePTP Decel Time788 PTP Vel OverrideS Curve787PTP S CurvePTP PsnRefStatus720 ZeroFFSpdRef∑0123Ref CompletePTP Int HoldSpdFFRef EnPTP SpeedFwdRef783776PTPReferenceTorque RegSLAT MinSLAT MaxSumPsn PTPPsn Direct2345710Psn SelectedRef722To PositReg[12A1]Direct Position Reference Selection0≠0,1,2,3,4,5Psn RefSelect7650Spd Ref0,1,2,3,4,5,105766Psn Direct StptOther RefSourcesParameterSelection767Psn Direct RefPsn PTP7Spd FFTo SpdRef[7G4]6PF753 Rev1.001g, PF753 Block Diagram Posit Ref 11PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

B-14 Control Block DiagramsPosition Control - RegulatorA BC DE FG HI1234FromPosit Ref[11I4]Psn Fdbk847Psn SelectedRef722Psn Offset 1 Sel 820Psn Offset 1821Other RefSourcesParameterSelectionPsn Offset 2 Sel 822Psn Offset 2823Other RefSourcesHoming[14F3][3H4]ParameterSelectionPosition Control(Zero Psn)4721XzeroPreset++2 721Pos Fdbk ScalingZeroPosition725ReRefPosition Control(OffsetReRef)ΔΔEGR is skipped whenPoint to Point Positioncontrol is active.Position Reference OffsetPsnActual836Σ824Psn Offset Vel01Electronic Gear RatioPsn EGR MultPsn EGR Div721 3+ -816817Rate LimΣΣ[ N ][ D ]Gear RatPosition Control(OffsetVel En)Psn Error835[13D3]CalibConst815+ +Calib+ + - Const -ΣΔPsn Ref EGR OutPI Regulator839kpP GainPsn Reg KpΣkisI GainPsn Command723Position Control721 012345ReservedIntgrtr EnOffset ReRefOffsetVel EnZero PsnIntgrtr Hold6 Reserved7 Reserved8 Reserved9 Reserved10 Add Spd RefLimitPsnReg IntgrlOut842Psn Reg StatusPsn Reg Status724 0++123 Integ Lmt Lo4567891011OffsetIntgrtrOffset ReRefPsn IntgrtrInteg Lmt HiSpd Lmt LoSpd Lmt HiPsn Reg ActvIntgrtr HoldReservedReservedInPsn DetectPosition Control – RegulatorLimitSpeed LimitsPsn Reg Status724 5724 6844PReg Pos Spd Lmt845PReg Neg Spd LmtParameter initializations performed withPosition Regulator INACTIVE1. If Zero Psn [P721 Bit 04] is set, PsnActual [P836] is loaded withPsn Fdbk [P847] – Zero Position[P725].2. Else, if Homing function is enabled,Psn Actual [P836] is loaded withPsn Fdbk [P847] .3. Else, Psn Command [P723] andPsn Ref EGR Out [P815] are loadedwith Psn Actual [P836]Spd Lmt LoSpd Lmt HiNotch FilterIIRNotch831PsnNtchFltrDepth830PsnNtchFltrFreq5Δ838Psn Reg Ki840841724 3724 4Integ Lmt LoInteg Lmt HiPReg Pos Int LmtPReg Neg Int LmtOutput Filter(kn * s)+ wns + wnPsnModesPsnRegSpd Out8436&DroopInv84615Psn Reg Droop721 Intgrtr Enbl721 Intgrtr HoldPosition ControlPsn Out FltrGainPsn Out Fltr Sel833Psn Out Fltr BW832Lead Lag834Spd/TrqModes0313To Spd Ref[7E5]Actv SpTqPsMode[17D5]PF753 Rev1.001g, PF753 Block Diagram Posit Reg 12PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Control Block Diagrams B-15Position Control - Aux FunctionsA BC DE FG HI1Position Control – Aux Functions2In Position DetectPsn Reg StatusPsn Error 835724 11 InPsn Detect[12D3]3In Position DetectIn Pos Psn Band726In Pos Psn Dwell727456PF753 Rev1.001g, PF753 Block Diagram Posit Aux 13PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

B-16 Control Block DiagramsPosition Control - HomingA BC DE FG HI1Position Control – HomingAlarm Status B960 8Homing Actv9 Not Home Set1. When Homing function is enabled,Psn Actual [P836] is loaded withPsn Fdbk [P847] .2Find Home SpeedFind Home Ramp735736SpeedPositionPTPCommandSpd RefTo Spd Ref[6G3]784[11E3]2. When Homing function is complete,Zero Position [P725] is loaded withActual Home Position [P737] - UserHome Position [P738].Then Psn Actual [P836] is loaded withPsn Fdbk [P847] - Zero Position[P725].3. When Position Redefine is enabled,Actual Home Position [P737] is loadedwith Psn Fdbk [P847] .3User Home PsnActual Home Psn738737-++-Zero PositionPsnActual725836To PsnRegulator[12B3]4Mtr Psn Fdbk SelMtr PsnFdbkSource135ParameterSelectionPsn Fdbk847Homing Control731 0 Find HomeHoming Status730 0 Home Request1 Home DI1 Home Enabled2 Home Marker2 Homing3 Return Home3 At Home455Psn RedefineHoming Alarm6Home DI Inv7 Hold At Home732 DI Find Home733 DI Redefine Psn6734 DI OL Home LimitPF753 Rev1.001g, PF753 Block Diagram Posit Homing 14PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Control Block Diagrams B-17Torque Control - OverviewA BC DE FG HI1Torque Control - Overview2Spd Reg PI OutInertia CompSpeedRegOutputTrimSelectTorque StepSpeed /Torque /PositionModeSelect+ +NotchFilterFilteredTorque RefTorqueLimitTeIqCalcCurrentLimitRateLimitTorqueCurrentRef3Torq Ref 1Torq Ref 2Torq TrimTorqueReferenceScaleandTrim4Drive Voltage andCurrent RatingsDC Bus VoltageBrake/Bus ConfigBusVoltageRegulatorRegen Power Limit+ +PwrCalcTePos Torque LimitTorqueLimitSelectCurrentLimitProcessingandSelectionNeg Torque Limit5Power, Torque, and Current Limit Reference Generation6PF753 Rev1.001g, PF753 Block Diagram Trq Ctrl Overview 15PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

B-18 Control Block DiagramsTorque Control - Reference Scale & TrimA BC DE FG HI1* Note: Analog Hi, Loscaling only used whenAnalog Input is selectedTorque Control – Reference Scale & Trim2Trq Ref B Sel6800.0( Disabled )Trq Ref B Stpt 681 ( Setpoint ) DefaultFrom DIO Option Card( Analog In 1 )From DIO Option Card ( Analog In 2 )ParameterSelectionTrq RefB AnlgHi 682Trq Ref A Sel 6753Trq RefB AnlgLo 683*Trq Ref A Stpt0.0( Disabled )676( Setpoint )Default4From DIO Option CardFrom DIO Option CardTrq RefA AnlgHiTrq RefA AnlgLo( Analog In 1 )( Analog In 2 )677678BitSource*ParameterSelectionDefault01PID Output Meter(PID Torque Trim)[20E5]10930PID Output Sel3,4Other10793 = Torque Excl4 = Torque TrimCommandedTrq45DI Torque StptA195ParameterSelectionTrq Ref B Mult684x0Other3+To Torq Ctrl,Process Ctrl[17B4], [19A4]Trq Ref A Mult 679xOther306PF753 Rev1.001g, PF753 Block Diagram Trq Ref 16PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Control Block Diagrams B-19Torque Control - TorqueA BC DE FG HI1Torque Control – Torque***INTERNAL CONDITION ONLY***23From Spd Reg[10I3]660SReg OutputLogic Ctrl State(Forced Spd)Min/Max Cntrl(Forced Spd)Torque 0Filtered Trq1Zero 0Selected+ +Trq RefRefSpeed Reg 0 0685 689+ +II21[10D5]RNotchTorq RegSLATMin31Min Notch Fltr Freq 687TorqueStep4686Notch Fltr Atten 688SLATMax MaxTo Torq CtrlCurrent[18B2]Sum5Commanded TrqFrom Torq Ref[16H4]44Psn P2P7Psn Direct105SpdTrqPsn Mode ASpdTrqPsn Mode BSpdTrqPsn Mode CSpdTrqPsn Mode D309310311312ABCDSelect0 00 11 01 1Actv SpTqPsMode313[10D5],[11D3],[11I1],[12H6]SelectLogicDrive Status 1935 21 22 23Torque ModePositionModeDI SpTqPs Sel 1 182SLAT Err Stpt 314Speed ModeDI SpTqPs Sel 0 181SLAT Dwell Time 315Mtr Option Cnfg6(Zero TrqStop)40 0 1 2(Trq ModeStop) (Trq ModeJog)PF753 Rev1.001g, PF753 Block Diagram Torque 17PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

B-20 Control Block DiagramsTorque Control - CurrentA BC DE FG HI1Torque Control – CurrentFlux VectorAt Limit Status 945 21222324Trq Pos Lmt 25Trq Neg Lmt 26Mtrng PwrLmt 27Regen PwrLmt 28Cur Lmt FVTherm RegLmtAt Limit StatusBusVltgFVLmtMtr Vltg Lkg945 1718TrqCurPosLmtTrqCurNegLmt2From TorqCtrl[17H2]Neg Torque Limit{Trq Pos Lmt}Filtered TrqRef689671LimitLimited TrqRef690[6C6]TeCalcIqLimitRate LimTorque Current RefFrom Fdbk[3F2]Active Vel Fdbk131Active NegTorque LimitActive PosTorque LimitFluxNegLimitPosLimit425Current Rate Lmt3Regen Power Lmt{Regen PwrLmt}{BusVltgFVLmt}Motor Power Lmt{Mtrng PwrLmt}426BusRegulator427++PwrTeCalc-1MaxMin-11Flux1FluxPos Torque Limit 670{Trq Neg Lmt}FluxFlux4Voltage Ref/Pk Torque Iq Current Limit{Mtr Vltg Lkg} LimitGenerationMinActive Iq Current LimitIs,IdFlux CurrentFdbkIqCalcIq,IdCalcIsFlux Vector(3)5Current Lmt Sel4216Current Lmt 1Current Lmt 2422423ParameterSelection{Cur Lmt FV}PowerUnitThermalProtection{Therm RegLmt}Thermal Mgr Current LimitVF or SV(0-2,7,8)Motor Ctrl Mode35424[25D2]Active Cur LmtPF753 Rev1.001g, PF753 Block Diagram Current 18PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Control Block Diagrams B-21Process Control (1)A BC DE FG HI123456[21F2][21F2]OptionPort:Analog InMOP Reference558PID Setpoint1070OptionPort:Analog InMOP Reference558PID Fdbk1077Commanded Trq[16H4] 4Torque Cur Fdbk5Output Current7Output Power9DefaultDefaultPID Ref Sel1067ParameterSelectionAnalog TypesFloat TypesPID Fdbk Sel1072DI PID HoldFloat TypesParameterSelectionAnalog TypesAnalog LossOptionPort:Digital In1921PID Ref PID RefAnlgHi AnlgLo1068 1069PID FdbkAnlgHiDrive InLimitScalePID FdbkAnlgLo1073 1074Scale1,23,41079PID Output SelParameterSelection≠ 0x1071PID RefMult1066 1PID Fdbk Mult≠ 0≠ 01078x107510761090PID RefMeter1065 10101PID FBLoss SpSelRampPID FdbkMeter1065 3PID FBLoss TqSelPID Hold1089 1PID Control(PID Hold)936 10PID Cfg(Ramp Ref)1089 0PID Status(PID Enabled)PID Status(PID Hold)[19G2]10910PID Cfg(Fdbk Sqrt)Drive Status 2(PID FB Loss)[20D5]PID DerivTime1088Z -1 OptionPort:Digital In-Parameter+kd-SPIDSelectionDeadbandPID Error1083Invert ErrorD GainMeter10860 010921+ -1-kpFilterError Deadband 1200%LimitLPassP Gain1066 3PID Control1084(PID InvError)PID LPFilter BW1089 1HoldPID Cfg (AntiPID Output Sel Windup)1079 1065 51AntiWindUp[9I4]Output FrequencyPer1HzUnitConvDI PID Enable191ki +Option+sPort:Digital InDrive Status 1I Gain(Stopping)ParameterSelection935 181081PID Control(PID Enable)11010664 1065PID Cfg(Stop Mode)PID Enable0191DI PID EnablePID Output Sel1079DI PID Invert1942 0935 16Drive Status 1(Running)PIDStopMode18 935 1093Drive Status 1 PID Output Meter(Stopping)1089 0PID Status(PID Enabled)[19H3]1087PID Int TimePID Prop GainPID Upper Limit1082PID Lower Limit193DI PID ResetPID Status(PID Hold)[19C5]Z -1LimitOptionPort:Digital In1Process Control (1)+ ++PID Control(PID Reset)2 1066≠ 0PID OutputMult1080PID Upper Limit10811082PID Lower Limit[24E5]PID Status(PID Enabled)1089 001ParameterSelectionxDriveInLimit10PID Status(PID In Limit)1089 3Limit[9I4]Output Frequency1PID Reset1089 2PID OutputMeter1093PerHzUnitConvPID Cfg(Preload Int)1065 3PID Output Sel1079PID Preload010851 15Vqs Command0,2,3,4,60.0Accel Conditional100.0PID Status(PID Reset)[20A2]PF753 Rev1.001g, PF753 Block Diagram Process Ctrl (1) 19PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

B-22 Control Block DiagramsProcess Control (2)A BC DE FG HIPID FBLoss SpSelPID Output Sel107511079Process Control (2)ParameterPID OutputSelectionMeter NotMOP ReferenceUsed558Float Types10930[21F2][19I2]Spd Ref A Stpt546 DefaultRamped Spd RefSpeed2Excl 1594To Spd Ref[6B2] [7G1] OR [8G2]Limited>0-1Spd RefNeg LimitPID Cfg11To Spd RefSpeed (Percent Ref) 593 [6H4][6B2]Excl6 1065SpeedTrim 2110XPos Limit000To Spd Ref (Trim)[7B5], [8A5]106532936 10PID Cfg(Zero Clamp)VoltExcl5PID FBLoss TqSelPID Voltage OutputMaximum Voltage107636Drive Status 2(PID FB Loss)[19C4]VoltTrim6X PID Voltage Trim OutputParameterSelectionMOP Reference4[21F2]Float Types558Trq Ref A Stpt676 DefaultPID Output SelTorq Ref A+Torq Ref B>0-1TorqueNeg LimitExcl31++107934 1Torque5Trim 410To Torq Ref[16G4]Pos Limit002 1065PID Cfg(Zero Clamp)6936 10Drive Status 2(PID FB Loss)[19C4]PF753 Rev1.001g, PF753 Block Diagram Process Ctrl (2) 20PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Control Block Diagrams B-23MOP ControlA BC DE FG HI1MOP ControlDI MOP Inc1772Option Port:Digital InParameterSelection MOPIncMOP High Limit561MOP Rate560CalcStep00+-0LimitMOP Reference558To Spd Ref, Process Ctrl[5A3], [19A2], [19A3], [20C2], [20C4]3Option Port:Digital InMOPDecReset / SaveParameterSelectionDI MOP Dec 178562MOP Low Limit0014559 1 933 3Save MOP Ref(At Stop)Start Inhibits(SW Coast Stp)00 1559 0933 115Save MOP Ref(At Pwr Down)Start Inhibits(Bus PreChg)6PF753 Rev1.001g, PF753 Block Diagram MOP 21PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

B-24 Control Block DiagramsInputs & Outputs - DigitalA BC DE FG HI1Inputs & Outputs – DigitalOption Module Parameters – Reference Symbol LegendOutputsRO0 Off Time15 Dig Out StsDig Out Invert5 0NC6 02InputsDig In Sts1 5 4 3 2 1 0Relay Out0SourceParameterSelection10RO0 SelInv01Timer14RO0 On TimeCommonNOIn5In4Relay Out1Transistor Out0SourceParameterSelectionDig Out InvertInv6 101RO1/TO0 Off Time25TimerDig Out Sts5 1ORNCCommon32024RO1/TO0 SelRO1/TO0 On TimeNOIn3*-1R2T (1-Relay / 2-Transistor) I/O Modules OnlyTO1 Off Time35Dig Out InvertIn26 2Dig Out Sts5 24In1Transistor Out10TimerSource NOParameterSelection301Inv34TO1 SelTO1 On TimeIn0Output Compare5ComRO0 LevelSourceRO0 LevelRO0 Level Sel11ParameterSelection12ABA≥BA

Control Block Diagrams B-25Inputs & Outputs - AnalogA BC DE FG HIInputs1Anlg In Loss StsAnlg In0 LssActn 5349 1Anlg In0 Value50Inputs & Outputs – Analog2VoltageCurrent++Anlg In Type45 0ADCIgnoreAlarmFlt ContinueFltCoastStopFlt RampStopLossDetection01234SquareRoot46 0Anlg In SqrtLossAnlg In0 Filt Gn 55Anlg In0 Filt BW(kn * s) + wns + wnLead Lag56V/mAPre ScaledValueAnlg In0 Hi51V/mAIn-LoHi-LoScaleV/mA52Anlg In0 LoScaledValueOption Module Parameters – Reference Symbol LegendFlt CL Stop53456VoltageCurrent++Anlg In Type45 1ADCHoldInputSet Input LoSet Input HiAnlg In1 LssActnAlarmFlt ContinueFltCoastStopFlt RampStopFlt CL StopHoldInputIgnoreSet Input LoSet Input Hi67863LossDetection012345678Anlg In Loss Sts49 2SquareRoot46 1Anlg In SqrtLossAnlg In1 Filt Gn 65Anlg In1 Filt BW(kn * s) + wns + wnLead Lag66Anlg In1 ValueV/mAPre ScaledValue60Anlg In1 Hi61V/mAIn-LoHi-LoScaleV/mA62Anlg In1 LoScaledValueAnlg Out0 Stpt 76Other Ref SourcesAnlg Out1 StptAnlg Out0 Sel 7586Other Ref SourcesParameterSelectionParameterSelectionAnlg Out1 Sel 85Anlg Out0 Data77Anlg Out1 Data87Abs71 0Anlg Out AbsAbs71 1Anlg Out AbsOutputsAnlg Out0 DataHi7879In-LoHi-LoScaleAnlg Out0 DataLoAnlg Out1 DataHi8889In-LoHi-LoScaleAnlg Out1 DataLoAnlg Out0 Hi80V/mA81V/mAAnlg Out0 LoAnlg Out1 Hi90V/mA91V/mAAnlg Out1 LoAnlg Out0 ValV/mA82Anlg Out1 Val92V/mAAnalog Out Type70 0DACAnalog Out Type70 1DAC++++VoltageCurrentVoltageCurrentPF753 Rev1.001g, PF753 Block Diagram Analog 23--------PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

B-26 Control Block DiagramsControl LogicA BC DE FG HI1Digital Inputs0Note:The following parameters are typically referencedwhen configuring or monitoring Control Logic;P933 [Start Inhibits]Control Logic1502DPI Port 1(Drv Mounted HIM)150888 Write Mask Cfg3DPI Port 2DPI Port 3150150Logic ParserTo Spd Ref[5G2], [6E3], [7F2],[7F3], [8F2], [8F3]Drive Logic Rslt8790DPI Port 4Mask EvaluationLogicOwner Logic Logic Evaluation15031DPI Port 54150DPI Port 65Embedded I/OPort 7DeviceLogixPort 1415015015324325326327MasksLogic MaskAuto MaskManual Cmd MaskManual Ref Mask885886887Masks Act StatusPort Mask ActLogic Mask ActWrite Mask Act919920921922923924925OwnersStop OwnerStart OwnerJog OwnerDir OwnerClear Flt OwnerManual OwnerRef Select OwnerBit00010203040506070809101112131415StopStartJog1Clear FaultsForwardReverseManualReservedAccel Time 1Accel Time 2Decel Time 1Decel Time 2SpdRef Sel 0SpdRef Sel 1SpdRef Sel 2ReservedBit16171819202122232425262728293031Coast StopCurrLim StopRunJog 2ReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReserved6PF753 Rev1.001g, PF753 Block Diagram Logic 24PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Control Block Diagrams B-27Inverter Overload ITA BC DE FG HI1Power DeviceCharacteristicsNTCPwr EE DataDuty CycleDrive OL Mode 420Inverter Overload (IT)Heatsink andJunction DegreeCalculator940 Drive OL Count941 IGBT Temp Pct942 IGBT Temp C943 Drive Temp Pct944 Drive Temp CInverter Overload IT‘d’ Prefix Refers to Diagnostic Item Number (ex. d33) – Reference Symbol Legend2PWM Frequency 38424 Active Cur Lmt [18G5]DC Bus Voltage11d14 Active PWM FreqOutput Current 7Alarm Status BCurrent Limit 1Current Limit 2Other Ref Sources3422423960 0 IGBT OTHeatsink OTDrive OLParameterSelectionCurLmt Reduc1456PWMFrq Reduc456Bus Reg Mode ABus Reg Mode BCurrent Limit Sel 421372373Bus Reg Lvl Cnfg 374Bus Reg Level 375Bus Reg Ki 380Bus Reg Kp 381Bus Limit Kp 376Bus Limit Kd 377Bus Limit ACR Ki 378Bus Limit ACR Kp 379*DB resistordc busDB Resistor Type 382DB Ext Ohms 383DB Ext Watts 384DB ExtPulseWatts 385Fault Status B953 2 Drive OL3 Heatsink OT4 Transistor OT5 SinkUnderTmp6 Excess Load12 DC Bus Memory* Note: Parameters arenot functional when anyof the FV motor controlmodes are selectedMtr OL Actv 410Mtr OL at Pwr Up 411Mtr OL Alarm Lvl 412Mtr OL Reset Lvl 415Motor OL FactorMotor NP Amps41326Mtr OL HertzX41450%MotorCurrent150%102%MotorCurrentMtr Over Load (I 2 T)1.0 - 2.0(1.025 Typ)60 (Hot)180 (Cold)right of curvetime (sec)MotorSpeed (Hz)416 MtrOL Reset Time418 Mtr OL Counts419 Motor OL Trip TimeAlarm Status A959 2Fault Status AMotor OL952 2 Motor OLPF753 Rev1.001g, PF753 Block Diagram Invert IT 25PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

B-28 Control Block DiagramsList of PowerFlex 755Control Block DiagramsFlow diagrams on the following pages illustrate the PowerFlex 755 drivecontrol algorithms.For Information on …See Page...Flux Vector Overview B-30VF, SV Overview B-31Speed/Position Feedback B-32Speed Control - Reference Overview B-33Speed Control - Reference (1) B-34Speed Control - Reference (2) B-35Speed Control - Reference (3) B-36Speed Control - Reference (4) B-37Speed Control - Reference (5) B-38Speed Control - Regulator (FOC) B-39Position Control - Reference B-40Position Control - Regulator B-41Position Control - Aux Function B-42Position Control - Phase Locked Loop B-43Position Control - Position CAM B-44Position Control - Profiler/Indexer B-45Position Control - Homing B-46Torque Control - Overview B-47Torque Control - Reference Scale & Trim B-48Torque Control - Torque B-49Torque Comtrol - Current B-50Torque Control - Inertia Adaption B-51Torque Control - Load Observer / Estimator B-52Process Control (1) B-53Process Control (2) B-54MOP Control B-55Inputs & Outputs - Digital B-56Inputs & Outputs - Analog B-57Control Logic B-58Inverter Overload IT B-59Diagnostic Tools B-60PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Control Block Diagrams B-29Diagram Conventions andDefinitionsDefinitions of the Per Unit system:1.0 PU Position = Distance traveled / 1sec at Base Spd1.0 PU Speed = Base Speed of the Motor1.0 PU Torque = Base Torque of the Motor* Notes, Important:Symbol Legend:DriveOption ModuleParametersParametersRequires port number.Read Only ParameterRead / Write ParameterRead Only Parameter with Bit EnumerationRead / Write Parameter with Bit Enumeration(1) These diagrams are for reference only and maynot accurately reflect all logical control signals;actual functionality is implied by the approximateddiagrams. Accuracy of these diagrams is notguaranteed.Provides additional information( ) = Enumerated Parameter[ ] = Page and Coordinateex. 3A2 = pg 3, Column A, Row 2= Constant value‘d’= Prefix refers to Diagnostic Item Numberex. d33 = Diagnostic Item 33PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

B-30 Control Block DiagramsFlux Vector OverviewPosition Control (pages: 11-17)135PositionFdbkSelectionPositionLoad FdbkSelectionMtr PsnFdbk SelPsn Fdbk847[ N ][ D ]Proportional ChannelIntegration ChannelPowerFlex 755Flux Vector Overview136( Spd Profiler Out )( Speed FF Ref )++ +Speed Control – Regulator (page: 10)Active VelFdbkFinal Speed Ref597131Speed Reg KpSpeed Reg KiSpeed Reg BWLead/LagFilter645647636PI Regulator620Lead/LagFilterSReg Output660( Psn Reg Spd Out )ProfilerSteps 1-16PTP RefSelPCAM PsnSelectPLL ExtSpd SelPLL PsnRef SelPsn RefSelectLoad PsnFdbkSel7751392799765Pt-PtPositionReferenceGear RatDirectPositionReferencePt-PtPositionSelectionPLLPlannerPCAMPlannerSpdPosPt-PtPositionPlannerSpdPosSpdPosPsn SelectedRefPositionModeSelection722[ N ][ D ]Gear RatPositionOffsetPsn Reg Kp839Psn Reg Ki838++PIRegulatorSpeedLimit /NotchFilterPsnRegSpd OutLead/LagFilter843Droop RPMat FLA( Scaled Spd Ref )( Spd Comp Out )Speed Control – Reference (pages: 4-7,9)Speed Ref A Sel545Speed Ref B Sel550TrmPct RefA Sel608TrmPct RefB Sel612Trim Ref A Sel600Trim Ref B Sel604Preset Speed 1Preset Speed 2Preset Speed 3Preset Speed 4796571572573574Actv SpTqPsModePos ProfilerSpd ProfilerSpeedRefTrimPctRefTrimRefSpeed RefSelection&Limits313Selected Spd Ref592PID Output Sel1079PTP Command784767Psn DirectRefPID SpeedExclusiveSelectionJog Speed 1Jog Speed 2Actv SpTqPsMode313SpeedProfilingSelection556557Actv SpTqPsMode313Ramped Spd RefJoggingSelectionActv SpTqPsMode313LinearRamp &S CurveSpeed FFSelection594Virtual EncoderLead/LagFilter( Spd Reg Out )Torque Control (pages: 18-23)Actv SpTqPsModeInertia CompMode 695313 Torque StepSpeed Comp Sel 665Inertia686Comp Out+Inertia Comp 699+Speed/Torque/Speed Comp 667Trq Ref A Sel+Position +Speed675ModeTorqueComp OutSelectionTrq Ref B Sel RefSelection680+++ X + 685PID TorqueTrim / ExclSelected Trq RefSelectionPID SpeedTrimSelection555Speed RefScaleMax Fwd Speed520Limit521Max Rev Speed1079PID Output SelNotchFilterInertiaAdaption-+ +LoadObserver/EstimatorLimited Trq Ref690LimitTorqueLimitGenerationE 1FOCPerm Magn& VectorControlCurrentProcessingMotorPreset Speed 5 5751079Preset Speed 6 576Preset Speed 7 577PID Output SelGearLoadE 2Process Control (pages: 24,25)( PID Output Meter )PID Output MeterPID Ref MeterPID1093PID Ref Sel 1067 Reference 1090SelectionPID Fdbk Meter PID Regulator( PID Output Meter )PIDPID Fdbk Sel 1072 Feedback 1091Selection LimitPID LPPID Prop Gain 10861084Filter BWPID Int Time1087PID Deriv Time1088PF755 Rev1.009c, 4/21/2009 Overview - FV 1x+PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Control Block Diagrams B-31VF, SV OverviewPowerFlex 755VF (V/Hz), SV OverviewSpeed Control – Reference (pages: 4-6,8,9)Speed Ref A Sel545Speed Ref B Sel550TrmPct RefA Sel608TrmPct RefB Sel612Trim Ref A Sel600Trim Ref B Sel604Preset Speed 1Preset Speed 2Preset Speed 3Preset Speed 4Preset Speed 5Preset Speed 6Preset Speed 7571572573574575576577SpeedRefTrimPctRefTrimRefSpeed RefSelection&Limits+Selected Spd Ref5921079PID SpeedExclusiveSelectionPID Output Sel 1079556Jog Speed 1557Jog Speed 2PID Output SelPID SpeedTrimSelectionJoggingSelectionRamped Spd RefLinearRamp &S Curve594Speed Contol – Trim Regulator (page: 9)Final Speed RefActive Vel Fdbk597VHzSV Spd Reg KpVHzSV Spd Reg Ki131663664PI RegulatorVHzSVSpdTrimRegSlip RPM at FLA 621+ + + -++( Freq Adder )DroopOutputFrequency1( Ramp Input Ref )+V/Hz623CurrentProcessingMotorProcess Control (pages: 24,25)( PID Output Meter )PIDPID Ref Sel 1067 ReferenceSelectionPID Fdbk Sel 1072PID Ref Meter1090PID Fdbk Meter PID RegulatorPIDFeedback 1091Selection LimitPID Output Meter1093PID Prop Gain10861084PID LPFilter BWPID Int Time1087PID Deriv Time1088x( Motor Speed Ref )Droop RPM atFLA620( Ramp Rate )Bus/CurrentLimiter(Freq Ramp)Max Fwd SpeedMax Rev SpeedOverspeed LimitSlipComp+520521524LimitLimitSpeedTrim RegSelectionPF755 Rev1.009c, 4/21/2009 Overview - VF(V/Hz), SV 2PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

B-32 Control Block DiagramsSpeed/Position FeedbackA BC DE FG HI1Pri Vel FdbkFltr126Spd Options Cntl(Auto Tach SW)635 7Fdbk LossDetect936 5Drive Status 2(FdbkLoss SwO)[22H2], [23H2]Speed/Posit Fdbk2Pri Vel Fdbk SelPri VelFdbkSource125ParameterSelectionPrimaryVelocity FdbkProcessingAlt Vel FdbkFltr129Pri Vel Feedback1270Active Vel Fdbk131DisplayFilteringTo Spd Reg[9B4], [10A3], [21B3]Mtr Vel Fdbk3Alt VelFdbkSourceParameterSelectionAlternateVelocity FdbkProcessingAlt Vel Feedback13013Alt Vel Fdbk Sel128PrimaryVelocity FdbkProcessingddtDerivative0Motor AccerlationFdbkTo InertiaAdaption, LoadObserver/Estimator[22G4], [23G4]709IA LdObs DelayAlternateVelocity FdbkProcessingddt1Derivative45From Spd Ref[9D3]Final Speed Ref597VF or SV &Open LoopFrom Torq Ctrl Current[21E2]Control Mode/Feedback Mode***INTERNAL CONDITION ONLY***Limited Trq Ref690Total Inertia76Motor SimulatorVirtual EncoderVirtual Enc EPR141Slip RPM at FLA6211Open LoopVirtual Encoder[9I4]Output Frequency5Torque Cur FdbkVirtual Enc EPR141Open Loop Fdbk137Simulator Fdbk138Mtr Psn Fdbk SelMtr PsnFdbkSourceAux Vel Fdbk Sel135Aux VelFdbkSource132ParameterSelectionParameterSelectionPsn Fdbk847Aux Vel FdbkFltr133Aux VelocityFdbkProcessingTo Posit Ref,Posit Reg[11C5], [12A4], [12A5]Aux Vel Feedback134To Spd Ref[5A3]6PF755 Rev1.009c, 4/21/2009 Fdbk 3PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Control Block Diagrams B-33Speed Control - Reference OverviewA BC DE FG HI1Speed Reference SelectionSpd RefCommandSpeed Control – Reference OverviewSpd Ref ATrim Ref ATrim % Ref A+Ref AAutoSpeed Reference Control2Spd Ref BTrim Ref BTrim % Ref B+Presets 3-7 AutoENet Spd RefDPI Ports 1-6 ManualRef BAuto+Profiling/LimitedJogging/Selected Spd Ref DirectionLimitSpd RefLift App/SkipSwitchAutotune/ModeControlBandsHoming/OverridesLimitFromPI Regulator(Exclusive Mode)Speed RefStop / TorqueProving3VirtualEncoderVector Speed ControlSpeedCompInertiaCompInertia CompTorque Ref4FluxVectorVector Ramp S-CurveLinearRamp &S CurveRampedVel RefVel RefFilterFromPt-Pt ProfileGeneratorFromPI Regulator(Trim Mode)xSpeed RefScaleLimitMax SpeedMotor Spd RefVelocity RegRef56VF or SVRateSelectLinearRamp &S CurveV/F Ramp S-CurveFromPI Regulator(Trim Mode)RampedSpeed RefDroopFromPositionRegulatorLimitMax SpeedsPos RegOutputFilterFromVelocity TrimRegulatorFromSlip CompV/F Speed ControlLimitMax Speed +Overspeed LimitSpeed FeedbackVector Ramp StatusF/F Ramp StatusFrequencyRefSpeedStatusStatusPF755 Rev1.009c, 4/21/2009 Spd Ref Overview 4PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

B-34 Control Block DiagramsSpeed Control - Reference (1)A BC DE FG HI1Disabled (0)Spd Ref A Stpt546Speed Ref A Sel545* Note: Analog Hi, Loscaling only used whenAnalog Input is selected‘d’ Prefix Refers to Diagnostic Item Number (ex. d33) – Reference Symbol LegendTrmPct RefA SelTrim Ref A SelSpeed Control – Reference (1)Speed Units(Hz / RPM)300930 Speed Ref Source616 SpdTrimPrcRefSrc617 Spd Trim Source591 Spd Ref Sel Sts234Preset Speed 1Preset Speed 2Preset Speed 3Preset Speed 4Preset Speed 5Preset Speed 6Preset Speed 7MOP Reference[26F3]Aux Vel Feedback[3H5]Port 1 ReferencePort 2 ReferencePort 3 ReferencePort 4 ReferencePort 5 ReferencePort 6 ReferenceOption Ports:Analog, EtherNet,DeviceLogixSpd Ref A AnlgHi547571572573574575576577558134871872873874875876*ParameterSelectionDefaultxDisabled (0)TrimPct RefA StptPort 1 ReferencePort 2 ReferencePort 3 ReferencePort 4 ReferencePort 5 ReferencePort 6 ReferenceAnlg In1 PortVal(option port)Anlg In2 PortVal(option port)TrmPct RefA AnHiTrmPct RefA AnLo610611609871872873874875876*608DefaultParameterSelectionxDisabled (0)Trim Ref A Stpt 601Port 1 ReferencePort 2 ReferencePort 3 ReferencePort 4 ReferencePort 5 ReferencePort 6 ReferenceAnlg In1 PortVal(option port)Anlg In2 PortVal(option port)Trim RefA AnlgHiTrim RefA AnlgLo602603871872873874875876*600DefaultParameterSelection[29H3]Drive Logic Rslt 879 6 14 13 12+573574575576577871872873874ManRefSel 2RefSel 1RefSel 0Drive Status 1 935 9 14 13 12 11 10Man Ref Ref Ref Ref RefBit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0( Ref A Auto )( Ref B Auto )( Preset3 Auto )( Preset4 Auto )( Preset5 Auto )( Preset6 Auto )( Preset7 Auto )( DPI Prt1 Man )( DPI Prt2 Man )( DPI Prt3 Man )( DPI Prt4 Man )Spd Ref Command0123456717181920d7ToSpd Ref (2)[6A1]Spd Ref A AnlgLo 548Speed Ref A Mult875 ( DPI Prt5 Man )549876 ( DPI Prt6 Man )212256Disabled (0)Spd Ref B Stpt 551Spd Ref B AnlgHiSpd Ref B AnlgLo552553Other Ref SourcesSpeed Ref B Sel 550Speed Ref B Mult*ParameterSelection554TrimPct RefB StptTrmPct RefB AnHiTrmPct RefB AnLoDisabled (0)x613614615Other Ref Sources* ParameterSelectionTrmPct RefB Sel 612xTrim Ref B StptTrim RefB AnlgHiTrim RefB AnlgLoDisabled (0)605606607Other Ref Sources* ParameterSelectionTrim Ref B Sel 604+DI ManRefAnlgHiDI ManRefAnlgLoAlt ManRef AnHiAlt ManRef AnLo564565*DI Man Ref Sel329330*Alt Man Ref SelParameterSelection563ParameterSelection328( Int ENet Man )( DevLogix Man )( DI Man Sel )( Alt Man Sel )29301631PF755 Rev1.009c, 4/21/2009 Spd Ref (1) 5PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Control Block Diagrams B-35Speed Control - Reference (2)A BC DE FG HI123[20D5]Position Control – Add Speed Reference OptionFromSpd Ref (1)Actv SpTqPs Mode313Selected SpdRefPosition1(>= 6) [5I2] 592Speed ProfilingJoggingLift App (Micro Positioning)PID ControlDrive Status 1Non-position(< 6)[25B2]OR[25E2]PI Speed Exclusive1066 0PID OutputMeter935 16Position Control(Add Spd Ref)721 1000PID EnableRunningSpeed Excl1079PID Output Sel = 11093&01Spd RefFrom Spd Profiler[16H2][20D5]Actv SpTqPs Mode≠6313Drive Status 1(Jogging)0935 176 Jog 1,0 11556xSpeed 1Profiler 557 0,1 Profile StatusJog1210 10PositionSpeed 2Mode11112Position0[29H3]0 879 2 19MicroPsnScalePctSpeedDrive LogicRsltJog1Jog2Speed Control – Reference (2)Trq Prove Status(Micro Psn)1103 20Spd RefFrom Homing[17H2]HomingHoming Status(Home Enabled)01730 1Direction Mode Control Autotune ControlLimit Switch Control Speed Ref Limits4BipolarDirection Mode3081Autotune0,170Spd Ref Sel Sts(Decel Lmt Sw)0Spd Ref Sel Sts(End Lmt Sw)591 13 591 140Max SpeedLimitsMin SpeedLimitsLimited Spd Ref5935(+1)(-1)0FowardCommandLogicUnipolFwdUnipolRevMax10XRev DisableUnipolar20AutotuneControl2, 3, 4101571 Preset Speed 1Max Fwd SpeedMax Rev SpeedInternal Load DependentMax Limit(Lift Application)5205211LimitLimitTo Spd Ref,Process Ctrl[7A2], [8A2], [25B2]Trq Prove Status(LoadTestActv)1103 5Min Fwd Speed6Min Rev Speed522523PF755 Rev1.009c, 4/21/2009 Spd Ref (2) 6PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

B-36 Control Block DiagramsSpeed Control - Reference (3)123[6H4]A BC DE FG HILimited Spd Ref593Skip Speed 1Skip Speed 2Skip Speed 3Skip Speed BandSkip Bands526527528529Skip Bands10935 17Drive Status 1(Jogging)Speed ControlCommandedSpdRef2Drive Status 1(Stopping)001935 18Not Stoppingand ActiveStoppingor Not ActiveStart/StopDrive Status 1(Running)935 16936 9Drive Status 2(Autotuning)OR010[29H3][29H3]Drive Logic Rslt(Accel Time 1, 2)Spd Options Ctrl(Ramp Disable) 635 1Accel Time 1Accel Time 2Spd Options Ctrl(Ramp Hold)Decel Time 1 537Decel Time 2 538Drive Logic Rslt879 10 11(Decel Time 1, 2)Jog Acc Dec TimeS Curve Accel, Decel 540Vector Ramp and Rate Select(StpNoSCrvAcc)879 89635 2635 05355361,00,11,00,1539541RampS CurveSpeed Control – Reference (3)Flux VectorRamped Spd Ref594Virtual Enc EPR(Edges Per Rev)141Virtual Encoder[25C2]Virtual EncoderOneScanDelayOneScanDelaySpd Options Ctrl(Delayed Ref)635 8Delayed Spd Ref13901Virtual Enc Psn142 [11C5]Virtual EncDelay140 [11C5]4700Inertia CompModeDisabled 00Int Ramp Ref 1Ext Ramped Ref596Speed Rate Ref695ddtddtInertia CompInertiaCompInert CompLPFBW697696698LPF76Inertia Acc GainInertia Dec GainInertia CompOut699Total Inertia0596Speed RateRefRamped RefSpeed Comp SelRate RefSpeed Comp6650123TorqFFTo TorqCtrl[20B2]Not Used2ddtSpeed Comp Gain 666Speed Comp OutSpeedComp667Spd FFFrom Posit Ref[11I5]Final Speed Ref LimitsFiltered Spd Ref595SpdRef FltrGainSpd Ref FilterSpd Ref Fltr BW590588589Speed Ref Filter(kn * s)+ wns + wnLead Lag56FromProcess Ctrl[25E3]1093PID Output Meter02≠21079PID Output Sel(Speed Trim)PI Speed Trim001935 17Drive Status 1(Jogging)555Spd Ref ScaleXFrom Posit Reg[12I5]Position Reg OutputPsnReg Spd Out843001935 17Drive Status 1(Jogging)Max Fwd Speed 520Max Rev Speed 521Max Speed LimitLimitAt Limit Status(MaxSpeed Lmt)945 2Spd Ref AfterFinal Limit[8A2]PF755 Rev1.009c, 4/21/2009 Spd Ref (3) - FV 7PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Control Block Diagrams B-37Speed Control - Reference (4)A BC DE FG HI123[6H4]Limited Spd Ref593Skip Speed 1Skip Speed 2Skip Speed 3Skip Speed BandSkip Bands526527528529Skip Bands10935 17Drive Status 1(Jogging)CommandedSpdRef2Drive Status 1(Stopping)001935 18Not Stoppingand ActiveStoppingor Not ActiveStart/StopDrive Status 1(Running)935 16936 9Drive Status 2(Autotuning)OR010[29H3][29H3]Ramp Input[9E4]Drive Logic Rslt(Accel Time 1, 2)Drive Logic Rslt(Decel Time 1, 2)V/F Ramp and Rate SelectSpd Options Ctrl(Ramp Disable) 635 1(StpNoSCrvAcc)Accel Time 1Accel Time 2879 8Decel Time 1Decel Time 2879 10Spd Options Ctrl(Ramp Hold)Jog Acc Dec TimeS Curve Accel, Decel 540911635 2635 05355365375381,00,11,00,1539541Speed Control – Reference (4)VF (V/Hz), SVRampS CurveRamped Spd Ref594[9A2], [25C2]Ramp RatePreviousScan[9E4][9E5]Speed ControlFinal Speed Ref Limits4Max SpeedLimitsPI Speed TrimMax Fwd Speed 520Max Rev Speed 521LimitSpd Ref AfterFinal Limit[8A2]5FromProcess Ctrl[25E3]1093PID Output Meter02≠21079PID Output Sel(Speed Trim)001935 17Drive Status 1(Jogging)6PF755 Rev1.009c, 4/21/2009 Spd Ref (4) - VF(V/Hz), SV 8PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

B-38 Control Block DiagramsSpeed Control - Reference (5)A BC DE FG HI1Speed Control – Reference (5)Spd Ref AfterFinal Limit[7I5] OR [8H4]Motor Cntl Mode35Flux Vector(3,6)Final Speed Ref597To Spd Reg[10A3]VelocityRegulatorTorqueReferenceTorque RefMotor Control ObjectTorqueControl234594Ramped Spd Ref[8G2]Filtered (100 R/S)Iq Feedback (pu)RPM1[NP Spd]HzVF or SV(0-2,4,5,7,8)1 *Poles[NP Freq] 120620 Droop RPM at FLAFrom Fdbk[3F2]Slip Comp BWXActive Vel Fdbk622131LimitMax Fwd/RevSpeed LimitLimit663PIORRPM6211[NP Spd]VHzSV Spd Reg KpLimit664VHzSV Spd Reg KiVF, SV Speed RegulatorAt Limit Status(MaxSpeed Lmt)945 2XSlip RPM at FLA1.5Hz1 *Poles[NP Freq] 120Speed Fdbkwith SensorFinal Speed Ref597 To Fdbk[3B5]0VHzSVSpdTrimReg623(Max Fwd/Rev +Overspeed Limit)Speed LimitLimitRamp Input[8E2]Ramp Rate[8I1]Motor FreqTo Ramp Integrator[8G1]Interrupt TimeScalingLimitedSpeed AdderAt Limit Status945 3 (OverSpd Lmt)Hz RPM[NP Freq] [NP Spd]*Poles120XSpeed to FreqScalingXX1Speed to Freq ScalingLimitedFreq Adder(Hz)SelectedFreq Ref(Hz)Ramp Rate(Motor CtrlInterrupt)(Hz / Sec)MotorFreq(Hz)Bus/CurrentLimiter(Freq Ramp)Freq Integral(Hz)LimitLimitOutputFrequency1[3D5],[24E4],[24H3]5Iq Feedback (pu)Slip RPM at FLA621LPFRPM1[NP Spd]Hz1 *Poles[NP Freq] 120XOpen LoopSpeed Fdbk1Speed Sensor Type***INTERNAL CONDITION ONLY***PreviousRamped Spd Ref[8I2]ReversePrevention(Max Fwd/Rev +Overspeed Limit)Freq LimitFreq Limit High (Hz)Freq Limit Low (Hz)6PF755 Rev1.009c, 4/21/2009 Spd Ref (5) 9PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Control Block Diagrams B-39Speed Control - Regulator (FOC)A BC DE FG HI1*set param 636/648 = 0to manually adjustparam 645/649 & 647/650636648653Speed Reg BWAlt Speed Reg BWSpd Loop DampingSpeed Control – RegulatorFlux Vector76Total InertiaInAdp LdObs Mode27040,234FromSpdRef[9C2]FromFdbk[3F2]Final Speed Ref597SReg FB FltrGainSReg FB Fltr BWActive Vel Fdbk131SReg FB Fltr Sel637638639SpdRegAntiBckup(kn * s)+ wns + wnLead Lag643nffFeedFwdSpeed Error641-+ + + kp + - + Filter+Set=1 Stage, 2 nd OrderP Gain+10%ksClear=2 Stage LPasssSpd Options Cntl-10%635 05640(SpdErrFilter)Speed Reg Kp* 645ServoLck LimitSpd Err Filt BW* 644Alt Speed Reg Kp* 649Filtered SpdFdbkAltSpdErr FltrBW* 651ki+Servo Lock Gain 642-sHold / ResetI GainAt Limit Status 945654PTP PsnRefStatus( PTP Int Hold)7202Speed Reg Ki*Alt Speed Reg Ki*647650655Spd Reg Pos Lmt656LimitSpd Reg Neg LmtSpd RegInt Out***INTERNAL CONDITION ONLY***At Limit Status(Spd Reg Lmt)945 4SReg OutFltr Sel(kn * s)+ wns + wnLead Lag658657SReg OutFltrGain659SReg OutFltrBWSpeed SensorTypeSensorlessFilter1 st OrderLPass710InertAdaptFltrBW*SReg Output660To Torq Ctrl[20B2]Spd Options Ctrl(SpdRegIntRes)(SpdRegIntHld)(Jog No Integ)635 346Droop RPMat FLA620DroopPreset5SReg Trq Preset 652Selected Trq Ref685[20E2]Actv SpTqPs Mode 313Bumpless[20D5]6PF755 Rev1.009c, 4/21/2009 Spd Reg - Flux Vector 10PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

B-40 Control Block DiagramsPosition Control - ReferenceA BC DE FG HI123456Step 1-16 Values 1234 1244 1384ProfilerStep 1-16 DwellStep 1-16 BatchStep 1-16 NextStep 1-16 ActionPTP ControlPTP Ref Sel 775PTP Setpoint780Other RefSources1235 1245 13851236 1246 13861237 1247 13871238 1248 1388DI Indx StepDI Indx StepRevDI Indx StepPrstProfiler Reference & InterpreterPTPRef ScaleProfileCommandPt-Pt Position Reference & Interpreter770 0 Vel Override4 Intgrtr Hold5 Ref PauseParameterSelection772773774778XPTPControlAbsolutePositionMove770 1IndexPositionX779PTP Index Preset1213 0-4Psn RefSelect8770 23PTP Mode765StrStepSel0-4Hold StepIndexReverse MovePreset Psn771Direct Position Reference Selection766140142847PTPControl10 Restart StepAbsoluteAbsolute ImmediatePsn Direct StptVirtual EncDelay[7H2]Virtual Enc Psn[7H2]Psn Fdbk[3H4]Other RefSources[ N ][ D ]Gear RatPTP EGRMult/Div789790012ParameterSelectionActv SpTqPs ModeProfilerPsnPTP313PTPCommand784PLL Ext Spd Sel 796PLL ExtSpd StptPLL PsnStptPCAM Psn Select 1392PCAMPsn Stpt797Other RefSourcesOther RefSources[20D5]800[16H3],[17H2]1393Other RefSourcesParameterSelectionParameterSelectionPLL Psn Ref Sel 799ParameterSelectionPCAM MainPt X 0...15PCAM MainPt Y 0...15767Psn Direct Ref777PTP FeedbackPosition Control – Reference785786781782Pt-Pt Position PlannerPTP Fwd Vel LmtPTP Rev Vel LmtPTP Accel TimePTP Decel Time788 PTP Vel OverridePCAM Planner14071408PLL PlannerPLLControlPCAMPlannerS Curve787PTP S Curve[15G2]PCAM Vel Out14721473PCAM Psn Out[15G2]1391 PCAM Mode1406 PCAM Main TypesPLL Speed Out[14H3]807PLL Enc Out809PLL Speed OutAdv[14H3]808PLL Enc Out Adv[14H4]810PTP PsnRefStatus720 ZeroFFSpdRef[14H4]∑0123Ref CompletePTP Int HoldSpdFFRef EnPTP SpeedFwdRef783776PTPReference0Position Mode Selection0Actv SpTqPs Mode[20D5]313Zero TorqueSpeed RegTorque RegSLAT MinSLAT MaxSumProfilerPsn PTPPsnCammingPsn PLLPsn Direct012345678910≠0,1,2,3,4,5Spd Ref0,1,2,3,4,5,10ProfilerPsn PTPPsnCammingPsn PLL6789Psn SelectedRef722To PositReg[12A1]Spd FFTo SpdRef[7G4]PF755 Rev1.009c, 4/21/2009 Posit Ref 11PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Control Block Diagrams B-41Position Control - RegulatorA BC DE FG HI123456FromPosit Ref[11I4]Psn Fdbk847Psn SelectedRef722Psn Offset 1 Sel 820Psn Offset 1821Other RefSourcesParameterSelectionPsn Offset 2 Sel 822Psn Offset 2823Other RefSources[3H4]ParameterSelectionPosition Control(Zero Psn)Load Psn FdbkSel 136Psn Fdbk847Other RefSources4[3H4]721ParameterSelectionXzeroPresetPsn Load ActualLdPsn Fdbk MultLdPsn Fdbk Div++2 721ZeroPosition725825826ReRefPosition Control(OffsetReRef)Pos Fdbk ScalingΔΔΔPosition Reference OffsetPsnActual837Σ836Σ[ N ][ D ]Gear Rat824Psn Offset Vel01Electronic Gear RatioPsn EGR MultPsn EGR Div721 3+ -Σ816817Rate LimΣ*[ N ][ D ]Gear RatPosition Control(OffsetVel En)Psn Error835[13D4]ΔCalibConst815+ +Calib+ + - Const -ΣPsn Ref EGR OutPI Regulator838839Psn Reg KikpP GainPsn Reg KpΣkisI GainPsn Command&723Position Control721 012345ReservedIntgrtr EnOffset ReRefOffsetVel EnZero PsnIntgrtr Hold6 PsnWtch1Arm7 PsnWatch1Dir8 PsnWtch2Arm9 PsnWatch2Dir10 Add Spd RefLimitPsnReg IntgrlOut840841Droop842Psn Reg Status724 3 Integ Lmt Lo724 4 Integ Lmt HiInvPReg Pos Int LmtPReg Neg Int Lmt84615Psn Reg Status724 0++Psn Reg Droop721 Intgrtr Enbl721 Intgrtr HoldPosition Control123 Integ Lmt Lo4567891011OffsetIntgrtrOffset ReRefPsn IntgrtrInteg Lmt HiSpd Lmt LoSpd Lmt HiPsn Reg ActvIntgrtr HoldPsnW1DetectPsnW2DetectInPsn DetectPosition Control – RegulatorLimitSpeed LimitsPsn Reg Status724 5724 6844PReg Pos Spd Lmt845PReg Neg Spd LmtPsn Out FltrGainOutput FilterPsn Out Fltr Sel833*Psn Out Fltr BW1. When Set Zero Psn [P721 Bit 04] isset, Psn Actual [P836] is loaded withPsn Fdbk [P847] – Zero Position[P725].2. When Homing function is enabled,Psn Actual [P836] is loaded withPsn Fdbk [P847] .3. When position control is inactive,Psn Command [P723], Psn Ref EGROut [P815], and Psn Load Actual[P837] are loaded with Psn Actual[P836]4. EGR is skipped when Point to PointPosition control is active (includedProfiler, PLL with PTP)832Spd Lmt LoSpd Lmt Hi(kn * s)+ wns + wnLead Lag834PsnModesSpd/TrqModes0Notch FilterIIRNotch831PsnNtchFltrDepth830PsnNtchFltrFreq313PsnRegSpd Out843To Spd Ref[7E5]Actv SpTqPsMode[20D5]PF755 Rev1.009c, 4/21/2009 Posit Reg 12PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

B-42 Control Block DiagramsPosition Control - Aux FunctionA BC DE FG HI1Position Control – Aux FunctionsPosition Watch 1 Position Watch 22Position Control721 67PsnWtch1ArmPsnWatch1DirPosition Control721 89PsnWtch2ArmPsnWatch2DirPsnWatch1 Stpt 747Psn Reg StatusPsnWatch2 Stpt 750Psn Reg StatusOther RefSourcesParameterSelectionPosition Watch 17249PsnW1DetectOther RefSourcesParameterSelectionPosition Watch 2724 10PsnW2Detect3PsnWatch1 Select 745746PsnWatch2 Select 748749PsnWatch1 DtctInPsnWatch2 DtctInIn Position Detect4Psn Reg StatusPsn Error 835724 11 InPsn Detect[12D3]In Position DetectIn Pos Psn Band726In Pos Psn Dwell72756PF755 Rev1.009c, 4/21/2009 Posit Aux 13PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Control Block Diagrams B-43Position Control - Phase Locked LoopA BC DE FG HI1Position Control – Phase Locked LoopPLL Control795 0PLL Enable1Velocity FF2 Ext Vel FF234PLL Ext Spd StptPLL Psn Stpt797Other RefSourcesPLL Ext Spd Sel 796800Other RefSourcesParameterSelectionParameterSelectionPLL Psn Ref Sel 799PLL Ext SpdScale798XX to VConv10PLL Control PLL Control PLL ControlPLL LPFilter BW795 2795 1795 3802ExtVel FF1VelocityFFAccelComp3 Accel Comp4 PCAM Enable5 PTP Enable6 Prof EnablePLL ControlPLL BW795 0 PLL EnableLPF80100100+ Loop+ +1VE- Filter0 0- Bit4 enables PCAM function with PLL.- Bit5 enables PTP function with PLL- Bit6 enables Profiler function with PLLCan not select multiple bits.PLL references must connect toappropriate outputs of the function.DelayDelay807808809810806PLL Speed Out[11F5]PLL Speed OutAdv[11F5]PLL Enc Out[11F5]PLL Enc Out Adv[11F5]PLL Psn Out Fltr[ ]EGR[ ]803PLL Virt Enc RPM5PLL EPR Input 804X X811PLL EPR OutputPLL Rvls Input 805 812 PLL Rvls Output6PF755 Rev1.009b, 3/6/2009 Posit PLL 14PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

B-44 Control Block DiagramsPosition Control - Position CAMA BC DE FG HI1Position Control – Position CAM2PCAM ScaleYSetPtOther RefSourcesPCAM Mode 1391 0 - Off1 - Single step2 - Continuous3 - Persistent1400ParameterSelectionPCAM ScaleY Sel 1399Y (slave)1473 PCAM Psn Out[11G4]Y-spanUnwindX 1472 PCAM Vel OutPCAM Psn Stpt 1393[11G3]3Other RefSourcesParameterSelectionX-spanX (master)PCAM Psn Select 1392Virtual EncoderPCAM Psn Ofst 1394ΔPCAM Scale X 139745PCAM PsnOfst EpsPCAM Slope BeginPCAM Slope EndPCAM Span XPCAM Span Y14031404139513961398PCAMMainPt X 0 1407 Pt Y 0 1408Pt X 15 1437 Pt Y 15 1438TypesEndPnt1406 0 - - 151405PCAMAuxProfile DefinitionPt X 1 1441 Pt Y 1 1442Pt X 15 1469 Pt Y 15 1470TypesEndPnt1440 x 1 - 151439PCAM VelScaleSP1402Other RefSourcesParameterSelectionPCAM VelScaleSel 1401PCAM StatusSingle ModeContins ModePersist ModeIn CamStartReverseX InReverseY OutAux Cam EnAlt Slope1471012345678DI PCAM StartPCAM ControlStartReverseX InReverseY OutAux Cam EnAlt SlopeOffset EnReref Psn InUnidirectionCndtnl Hold14741390012345678Offset En9Reref Psn In10Unidirection116Cndtnl Hold12PF755 Rev1.009c, 4/21/2009 Posit CAM 15PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Control Block Diagrams B-45Position Control - Profiler/IndexerA BC DE FG HI1TypeStep11230Step21240Step31250Step41260Step151370Step161380Speed/PositionPosition Control – Profiler/Indexer (1)2VelocityAccelDecelValueDwellBatchNextActionDig In123112321233123412351236123712381239124112421243124412451246124712481249125112521253125412551256125712581259126112621263126412651266126712681269137113721373137413751376137713781379138113821383138413851386138713881389Move TableTimeActv SpTqPs Mode0ProfilerOther313[20D5]Spd RefTo Spd Ref[6C3]PTPCommand784[11E2]Prof DI Invert 1217 0Hold Step345456789101112131415161718192021221 Abort StepProfile CommandProfile Status2 AbortProfileCounts Per Unit 12153 Vel OverrideProfVel Override 1216StrStepSel0StrStepSel1StrStepSel2StrStepSel3StrStepSel4Step1Step21218Step31219Step41220Step51221Step61222Step71223Step81224Step91225Step101226Step11Step12Step13Step14DI Hold StepDI Abort StepDI Abort ProfileDI Vel OverrideDI StrtStep Sel0DI StrtStep Sel1DI StrtStep Sel2DI StrtStep Sel3DI StrtStep Sel41213 0123456789101112Alarm Status B960 7 Profile ActvStrStepSel0StrStepSel1StartingStrStepSel2 Step(0-16)StrStepSel3StrStepSel4ReservedReservedReservedHold StepVel OverrideRestart StepHomeNotSetAlarmProf Run Alarm1210 012345678910111213141516171819Step Bit 01212 Units TraveledStep Bit 1CurrentStep Bit 2 Step(0-16)Step Bit 3Step Bit 4ReservedReservedReservedEnabledRunningPosition ModeDwellHoldingIn PositionCompleteStoppedResumeRestart StepVel OverrideHome Not Set23Step15624Step16PF755 Rev1.009c, 4/21/2009 Posit Profiler/Indexer (1) 16PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

B-46 Control Block DiagramsPosition Control - HomingA BC DE FG HI1Position Control – Profiler/Indexer (2) Position Control – HomingAlarm Status B960 8Homing Actv2Type = Position Absolute (Posit Abs)Action Posit Blend TimeBlendParamBlendDiginBlend(+/-) WaitDiginStep to Next EndVelocity Move vel N/A N/A N/A Move vel Move vel N/AAccel Move accel N/A N/A N/A Move accel Move accel N/ADecel Move decel N/A N/A N/A Move decel Move decel N/AValue AbsoluteTarget posN/A N/A N/A AbsoluteTarget posAbsoluteTarget posDwell N/A N/A N/A N/A Dwell Time Dwell Time DwellTimeBatch N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/ANext Next Step N/A N/A N/A Next Step Next Step N/ANext Step Condition Position > ValueN/A N/A N/A DigIntransition Position > Value RestartIndexerDigIn # N/A N/A N/A N/A Digin # N/A N/AN/AFind Home SpeedFind Home RampUser Home Psn735736738Speed9 Not Home SetPositionSpd RefTo Spd Ref[6G3]PTPCommand7843Type = Position Incremental (Posit Incr)Action Posit Blend TimeBlendParamBlendDiginBlend(+/-) WaitDiginStep to Next EndVelocity Move vel N/A N/A N/A Move vel Move vel N/AAccel Move accel N/A N/A N/A Move accel Move accel N/ADecel Move decel N/A N/A N/A Move decel Move decel N/AValue IncrementalTarget posN/A N/A N/A IncrementalTarget posIncrementalTarget posDwell N/A N/A N/A N/A Dwell Time Dwell Time DwellTimeBatch N/A N/A N/A N/A Batch # Batch # N/ANext Next Step N/A N/A N/A Next Step Next Step N/ANext StepConditionPosition >ValueN/A N/A N/A DigIntransitionPosition >ValueDigIn # N/A N/A N/A N/A Digin # N/A N/AN/ARestartIndexerHoming Control731 0 Find Home1 Home DI2 Home Marker3 Return Home4 Psn RedefineHoming Alarm5Homing Status730 0 Home Request1 Home Enabled2 Homing3 At Home[11E2]737 Actual Home Psn45Type = Speed ProfileAction Posit Blend Time Blend Param Blend Digin Blend (+/-) WaitDiginStep to Next EndVelocity Move vel Move vel Move vel Move Vel Move vel Move vel N/AAccel Move accel Move accel Move accel Move accel Move accel Move accel N/ADecel Move decel Move decel Move decel Move decel Move decel Move decel N/AValue Incremental Target posTotal Time Compare Param # (+/-)N/A Total Time Total Time N/ADwell N/A N/A CompareParam #Dwell Time Dwell Time Dwell Time DwellTimeBatch N/A N/A N/A Batch # Batch # Batch # N/ANext Next Step Next Step Next Step Next Step Next Step Next Step N/ANext StepConditionPosition >ValueTime >ValueParam[Value]Compare toParam[Dwell]Digin [Value]transitionDigintransitionTime >ValueDigIn # N/A N/A N/A Digin # Digin # N/A N/ARestartProfile6Home DI Inv7 Hold At Home732 DI Find Home733 DI Redefine Psn734 DI OL Home Limit6PF755 Rev1.009c, 4/21/2009 Posit Profiler/Indexer (2) 17PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Control Block Diagrams B-47Torque Control - OverviewA BC DE FG HI1Torque Control - Overview2Spd Reg PI OutInertia CompSpeedRegOutputTrimSelectTorque StepInertiaAdaptionSpeed /Torque /PositionModeSelect+ +NotchFilterFilteredTorque Ref+ - +TorqueLimitTeIqCalcCurrentLimitRateLimitTorqueCurrentRef3Torq Ref 1Torq Ref 2Torq TrimTorqueReferenceScaleandTrimLoadObserver/Estimator4Drive Voltage andCurrent RatingsDC Bus VoltageBrake/Bus ConfigBusVoltageRegulatorRegen Power Limit+ +PwrCalcTePos Torque LimitTorqueLimitSelectCurrentLimitProcessingandSelectionNeg Torque Limit5Power, Torque, and Current Limit Reference Generation6PF755 Rev1.009c, 4/21/2009 Trq Ctrl Overview 18PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

B-48 Control Block DiagramsTorque Control - Reference Scale & TrimA BC DE FG HI1* Note: Analog Hi, Loscaling only used whenAnalog Input is selectedTorque Control – Reference Scale & Trim2Trq Ref B Sel6800.0( Disabled )Trq Ref B Stpt 681 ( Setpoint ) DefaultFrom DIO Option Card( Analog In 1 )From DIO Option Card ( Analog In 2 )ParameterSelectionTrq RefB AnlgHi 682Trq Ref A Sel 6753Trq RefB AnlgLo 683*Trq Ref A Stpt0.0( Disabled )676( Setpoint )Default4From DIO Option CardFrom DIO Option CardTrq RefA AnlgHiTrq RefA AnlgLo( Analog In 1 )( Analog In 2 )677678BitSource*ParameterSelectionDefault01PID Output Meter(PID Torque Trim)[25E5]10930PID Output Sel3,4Other10793 = Torque Excl4 = Torque TrimCommandedTrq45DI Torque StptA195ParameterSelectionTrq Ref B Mult684x0Other3+To Torq Ctrl,Process Ctrl[20B4], [24A4]Trq Ref A Mult 679xOther306PF755 Rev1.009c, 4/21/2009 Trq Ref 19PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Control Block Diagrams B-49Torque Control - TorqueA BC DE FG HI1Torque Control – TorqueInertiaTrqAdd708 [22B4]InertiaAdaption1Total Inertia 76Motor AccelerationAdaptionFeedback 0 0DisabledInertia Adapt BW705***INTERNAL CONDITION ONLY***InertiaAdaptGain70623From Spd Ref[7C4]From Spd Reg[10I3]Inertia Comp Out699660SReg Output++InertiaLogic Ctrl State Min/Max Cntrl(Forced Spd) (Forced Spd)Zero 0SelectedTrq Ref+ +Speed Reg 0 0685 +-II21[10D5]RNotchTorq Reg SLATMin31Min Notch Fltr Freq 687TorqueStep4686Notch Fltr Atten 688SLATMax MaxLoad5EstimateSum [23C5] 707+Filtered TrqRef689To Torq CtrlCurrent[21B2],[22D2],[23D2]4From Torq Ref[19H4]Commanded Trq4ProfilerPsn P2P67Load20 0Total Inertia Motor AccelerationFeedback 76Observer/EstimatorDisabledLoadObserver5SpdTrqPsn Mode ASpdTrqPsn Mode BSpdTrqPsn Mode CSpdTrqPsn Mode D309310311312ABCDSelect0 00 11 01 1Psn CammingPsn PLLPsn Direct8910Actv SpTqPsMode313[6D2],[10D5],[11D2],[11I1],[12H5],[16H2]SelectLogicDrive Status 1935 21 22 23Load Observer BWTorque Mode711704InAdp LdObs ModePositionModeDI SpTqPs Sel 1 182SLAT Err Stpt 314Speed ModeDI SpTqPs Sel 0 181SLAT Dwell Time 315Mtr Option Cnfg6(Zero TrqStop)40 0 1 2(Trq ModeStop) (Trq ModeJog)PF755 Rev1.009c, 4/21/2009 Torque 20PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

B-50 Control Block DiagramsTorque Comtrol - CurrentA BC DE FG HI1Torque Control – CurrentFlux VectorAt Limit Status 945 21222324Trq Pos Lmt 25Trq Neg Lmt 26Mtrng PwrLmt 27Regen PwrLmt 28Cur Lmt FVTherm RegLmtAt Limit StatusBusVltgFVLmtMtr Vltg Lkg945 1718TrqCurPosLmtTrqCurNegLmt2Filtered TrqRefLimited TrqRefFrom Torq689690Ctrl[20H2] [6C6], [22E2],Limit[23E2]Neg Torque Limit 671{Trq Pos Lmt}TeCalcIqLimitRate LimTorque Current RefFrom Fdbk[3F2]Active Vel Fdbk131Active NegTorque LimitActive PosTorque LimitFluxNegLimitPosLimit425Current Rate Lmt3Regen Power Lmt{Regen PwrLmt}{BusVltgFVLmt}Motor Power Lmt{Mtrng PwrLmt}426BusRegulator427++PwrTeCalc-1MaxMin-11Flux1FluxPos Torque Limit 670{Trq Neg Lmt}FluxFlux4Voltage Ref/Pk Torque Iq Current Limit{Mtr Vltg Lkg} LimitGenerationMinActive Iq Current LimitIs,IdFlux CurrentFdbkIqCalcIq,IdCalcIsFlux Vector(3,6)5Current Lmt Sel4216Current Lmt 1Current Lmt 2422423ParameterSelection{Cur Lmt FV}PowerUnitThermalProtection{Therm RegLmt}Thermal Mgr Current LimitVF or SV(0-2,4,5,7,8)Motor Ctrl Mode35424[30D2]Active Cur LmtPF755 Rev1.009c, 4/21/2009 Current 21PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Control Block Diagrams B-51Torque Control - Inertia AdaptionA BC DE FG HI1Torque Control – Inertia Adaption23Notch FilterOutput[20H2]Pos Torque LimitNeg Torque LimitFilteredTrq Ref689670671TorqueLimitsLimitLimitedTrq Ref690[20E2]1Total InertiaSystem ModelPrimaryEncoderAlternateEncoderPositionIA LdObsDelay709PositionFIRFilterFIRFilterVelocityVelocityddtDerivativeddtDerivativeAccelAccelDrive Status 2(Fdbk Loss Sw0)01936 5[3E1]4708InertiaTrqAdd[20H1]InAdp LdObs Mode704InertiaAdaption1Else0FilterLPass705Inertia Adapt BWSpeed SensorTypeSensorlessElse10***INTERNAL CONDITION ONLY***XX706InertiaAdaptGain76Total InertiaMotor Acceleration FeedbackFrom Fdbk[3E3]Inertia Adaption56PF755 Rev1.009c, 4/21/2009 Trq Inertia Adaption 22PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

B-52 Control Block DiagramsTorque Control - Load Observer / EstimatorA BC DE FG HI1Torque Control – Load Observer / Estimator23Notch FilterOutput[20H2]Pos Torque LimitNeg Torque LimitFilteredTrq Ref689670671TorqueLimitsLimitLimitedTrq Ref690***INTERNAL CONDITION ONLY***[20E2]1Total InertiaSystem ModelPrimaryEncoderAlternateEncoderPositionIA LdObsDelay709PositionFIRFilterFIRFilterVelocityVelocityddtDerivativeddtDerivativeAccelAccelDrive Status 2(Fdbk Loss Sw0)01936 5[3E1]4InAdp LdObs Mode704LoadObserver2Else0Load Observer BW711FilterLPassSpeed SensorTypeSensorlessElse10XMotor Acceleration FeedbackFrom Fdbk[3E3]5LoadEstimate707[20G3]10 R/SFilterLPass76Total InertiaLoad Observer / Estimator6PF755 Rev1.009c, 4/21/2009 Trq Load Observer/Estimator 23PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Control Block Diagrams B-53Process Control (1)A BC DE FG HI123456[26F2][26F2]OptionPort:Analog InMOP Reference558PID Setpoint1070OptionPort:Analog InMOP Reference558PID Fdbk1077Commanded Trq[19H4] 4Torque Cur Fdbk5Output Current7Output Power9DefaultDefaultPID Ref Sel1067ParameterSelectionAnalog TypesFloat TypesPID Fdbk Sel1072DI PID HoldFloat TypesParameterSelectionAnalog TypesAnalog LossOptionPort:Digital In1921PID Ref PID RefAnlgHi AnlgLo1068 1069PID FdbkAnlgHiDrive InLimitScalePID FdbkAnlgLo1073 1074Scale1,23,41079PID Output SelParameterSelection≠ 0x1071PID RefMult1066 1PID Fdbk Mult≠ 0≠ 01078x107510761090PID RefMeter1065 10101PID FBLoss SpSelRampPID FdbkMeter1065 3PID FBLoss TqSelPID Hold1089 1PID Control(PID Hold)936 10PID Cfg(Ramp Ref)1089 0PID Status(PID Enabled)PID Status(PID Hold)[24G2]10910PID Cfg(Fdbk Sqrt)Drive Status 2(PID FB Loss)[25D5]PID DerivTime1088E -1 OptionPort:Digital In-Parameter+kd-SPIDSelectionDeadbandPID Error1083Invert ErrorD GainMeter10860 010921+ -1-kpFilterError Deadband 1200%LimitLPassP Gain1066 3PID Control1084(PID InvError)PID LPFilter BW1089 1HoldPID Cfg (AntiPID Output Sel Windup)1079 1065 51AntiWindUp[9I4]Output FrequencyPer1HzUnitConvDI PID Enable191ki +Option+sPort:Digital InDrive Status 1I Gain(Stopping)ParameterSelection935 181081PID Control(PID Enable)11010664 1065PID Cfg(Stop Mode)PID Enable0191DI PID EnablePID Output Sel1079DI PID Invert1942 0935 16Drive Status 1(Running)PIDStopMode18 935 1093Drive Status 1 PID Output Meter(Stopping)1089 0PID Status(PID Enabled)[24H3]1087PID Int TimePID Prop GainPID Upper Limit1082PID Lower Limit193DI PID ResetPID Status(PID Hold)[24C5]Z -1LimitOptionPort:Digital In1Process Control (1)+ ++PID Control(PID Reset)2 1066≠ 0PID OutputMult1080PID Upper Limit10811082PID Lower Limit[24E5]PID Status(PID Enabled)1089 001ParameterSelectionxDriveInLimit10PID Status(PID In Limit)1089 3Limit[9I4]Output Frequency1PID Reset1089 2PID OutputMeter1093PerHzUnitConvPID Cfg(Preload Int)1065 3PID Output Sel1079PID Preload010851 15Vqs Command0,2,3,4,60.0Accel Conditional100.0PID Status(PID Reset)[25A2]PF755 Rev1.009c, 4/21/2009 Process Ctrl (1) 24PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

B-54 Control Block DiagramsProcess Control (2)A BC DE FG HIPID FBLoss SpSelPID Output Sel107511079Process Control (2)ParameterPID OutputSelectionMeter NotMOP ReferenceUsed558Float Types10930[26F2][24I2]Spd Ref A Stpt546 DefaultRamped Spd RefSpeed2Excl 1594To Spd Ref[6B2] [7G1] OR [8G2]Limited>0-1Spd RefNeg LimitPID Cfg11To Spd RefSpeed (Percent Ref) 593 [6H4][6B2]Excl6 1065SpeedTrim 2110XPos Limit000To Spd Ref (Trim)[7B5], [8A5]106532936 10PID Cfg(Zero Clamp)VoltExcl5PID FBLoss TqSelPID Voltage OutputMaximum Voltage107636Drive Status 2(PID FB Loss)[24C4]VoltTrim6X PID Voltage Trim OutputParameterSelectionMOP Reference4[26F2]Float Types558Trq Ref A Stpt676 DefaultPID Output SelTorq Ref A+Torq Ref B>0-1TorqueNeg LimitExcl31++107934 1Torque5Trim 410To Torq Ref[19G4]Pos Limit002 1065PID Cfg(Zero Clamp)6936 10Drive Status 2(PID FB Loss)[24C4]PF755 Rev1.009c, 4/21/2009 Process Ctrl (2) 25PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Control Block Diagrams B-55MOP ControlA BC DE FG HI1MOP ControlDI MOP Inc1772Option Port:Digital InParameterSelection MOPIncMOP High Limit561MOP Rate560CalcStep00+-0LimitMOP Reference558To Spd Ref, Process Ctrl[5A3], [24A2], [24A3], [25C2], [25C4]3Option Port:Digital InMOPDecReset / SaveParameterSelectionDI MOP Dec 178562MOP Low Limit0014559 1 933 3Save MOP Ref(At Stop)Start Inhibits(SW Coast Stp)00 1559 0933 115Save MOP Ref(At Pwr Down)Start Inhibits(Bus PreChg)6PF755 Rev1.009c, 4/21/2009 MOP 26PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

B-56 Control Block DiagramsInputs & Outputs - DigitalA BC DE FG HI1Inputs & Outputs – DigitalOption Module Parameters – Reference Symbol LegendOutputsRO0 Off Time15 Dig Out StsDig Out Invert5 0NC6 02InputsDig In Sts1 5 4 3 2 1 0Relay Out0SourceParameterSelection10RO0 SelInv01Timer14RO0 On TimeCommonNOIn5In4Relay Out1Transistor Out0SourceParameterSelectionDig Out InvertInv6 101RO1/TO0 Off Time25TimerDig Out Sts5 1ORNCCommon32024RO1/TO0 SelRO1/TO0 On TimeNOIn3*-1R2T (1-Relay / 2-Transistor) I/O Modules OnlyTO1 Off Time35Dig Out InvertIn26 2Dig Out Sts5 24In1Transistor Out10TimerSource NOParameterSelection301Inv34TO1 SelTO1 On TimeIn0Output Compare5ComRO0 LevelSourceRO0 LevelRO0 Level Sel11ParameterSelection12ABA≥BA

Control Block Diagrams B-57Inputs & Outputs - AnalogA BC DE FG HIInputs1Anlg In Loss StsAnlg In0 LssActn 5349 1Anlg In0 Value50Inputs & Outputs – Analog2VoltageCurrent++Anlg In Type45 0ADCIgnoreAlarmFlt ContinueFltCoastStopFlt RampStopLossDetection01234SquareRoot46 0Anlg In SqrtLossAnlg In0 Filt Gn 55Anlg In0 Filt BW(kn * s) + wns + wnLead Lag56V/mAPre ScaledValueAnlg In0 Hi51V/mAIn-LoHi-LoScaleV/mA52Anlg In0 LoScaledValueOption Module Parameters – Reference Symbol LegendFlt CL Stop53456VoltageCurrent++Anlg In Type45 1ADCHoldInputSet Input LoSet Input HiAnlg In1 LssActnAlarmFlt ContinueFltCoastStopFlt RampStopFlt CL StopHoldInputIgnoreSet Input LoSet Input Hi67863LossDetection012345678Anlg In Loss Sts49 2SquareRoot46 1Anlg In SqrtLossAnlg In1 Filt Gn 65Anlg In1 Filt BW(kn * s) + wns + wnLead Lag66Anlg In1 ValueV/mAPre ScaledValue60Anlg In1 Hi61V/mAIn-LoHi-LoScaleV/mA62Anlg In1 LoScaledValueAnlg Out0 Stpt 76Other Ref SourcesAnlg Out1 StptAnlg Out0 Sel 7586Other Ref SourcesParameterSelectionParameterSelectionAnlg Out1 Sel 85Anlg Out0 Data77Anlg Out1 Data87Abs71 0Anlg Out AbsAbs71 1Anlg Out AbsOutputsAnlg Out0 DataHi7879In-LoHi-LoScaleAnlg Out0 DataLoAnlg Out1 DataHi8889In-LoHi-LoScaleAnlg Out1 DataLoAnlg Out0 Hi80V/mA81V/mAAnlg Out0 LoAnlg Out1 Hi90V/mA91V/mAAnlg Out1 LoAnlg Out0 ValV/mA82Anlg Out1 Val92V/mAAnalog Out Type70 0DACAnalog Out Type70 1DAC++++VoltageCurrentVoltageCurrentPF755 Rev1.009c, 4/21/2009 Analog 28--------PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

B-58 Control Block DiagramsControl LogicA BC DE FG HI1Digital Inputs0Note:The following parameters are typically referencedwhen configuring or monitoring Control Logic;P933 [Start Inhibits]Control Logic1502DPI Port 1(Drv Mounted HIM)150888 Write Mask Cfg3DPI Port 2DPI Port 3150150Logic ParserTo Spd Ref[5G2], [6E3], [7F2],[7F3], [8F2], [8F3]Drive Logic Rslt8790DPI Port 4Mask EvaluationLogicOwner Logic Logic Evaluation15031DPI Port 54150DPI Port 65Embedded EthernetPort 13DeviceLogixPort 1415015015324325326327MasksLogic MaskAuto MaskManual Cmd MaskManual Ref Mask885886887Masks Act StatusPort Mask ActLogic Mask ActWrite Mask Act919920921922923924925OwnersStop OwnerStart OwnerJog OwnerDir OwnerClear Flt OwnerManual OwnerRef Select OwnerBit00010203040506070809101112131415StopStartJog1Clear FaultsForwardReverseManualReservedAccel Time 1Accel Time 2Decel Time 1Decel Time 2SpdRef Sel 0SpdRef Sel 1SpdRef Sel 2ReservedBit16171819202122232425262728293031Coast StopCurrLim StopRunJog 2ReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReservedReserved6PF755 Rev1.009c, 4/21/2009 Logic 29PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Control Block Diagrams B-59Inverter Overload ITA BC DE FG HI1Power DeviceCharacteristicsNTCPwr EE DataDuty CycleDrive OL Mode 420Inverter Overload (IT)Heatsink andJunction DegreeCalculator940 Drive OL Count941 IGBT Temp Pct942 IGBT Temp C943 Drive Temp Pct944 Drive Temp CInverter Overload IT‘d’ Prefix Refers to Diagnostic Item Number (ex. d33) – Reference Symbol Legend2PWM Frequency 38424 Active Cur Lmt [21G5]DC Bus Voltage11d14 Active PWM FreqOutput Current 7Alarm Status BCurrent Limit 1Current Limit 2Other Ref Sources3422423960 0 IGBT OTHeatsink OTDrive OLParameterSelectionCurLmt Reduc1456PWMFrq Reduc456Bus Reg Mode ABus Reg Mode BCurrent Limit Sel 421372373Bus Reg Lvl Cnfg 374Bus Reg Level 375Bus Reg Ki 380Bus Reg Kp 381Bus Limit Kp 376Bus Limit Kd 377Bus Limit ACR Ki 378Bus Limit ACR Kp 379*DB resistordc busDB Resistor Type 382DB Ext Ohms 383DB Ext Watts 384DB ExtPulseWatts 385Fault Status B953 2 Drive OL3 Heatsink OT4 Transistor OT5 SinkUnderTmp6 Excess Load12 DC Bus Memory* Note: Parameters arenot functional when anyof the FV motor controlmodes are selectedMtr OL Actv 410Mtr OL at Pwr Up 411Mtr OL Alarm Lvl 412Mtr OL Reset Lvl 415Motor OL FactorMotor NP Amps41326Mtr OL HertzX41450%MotorCurrent150%102%MotorCurrentMtr Over Load (I 2 T)1.0 - 2.0(1.025 Typ)60 (Hot)180 (Cold)right of curvetime (sec)MotorSpeed (Hz)416 MtrOL Reset Time418 Mtr OL Counts419 Motor OL Trip TimeAlarm Status A959 2Fault Status AMotor OL952 2 Motor OLPF755 Rev1.009c, 4/21/2009 Invert IT 30PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

B-60 Control Block DiagramsDiagnostic Tools123456A BC DE FG HIDig SwReal SelBitSourced57TrendingTrend Auto OutTrend RateSetting d38 to a non-zero valuecauses Setting the d38 trend to a data non-zero to auto value playback causes at the the rate trend entered data to d41 auto play(milliseconds).back at the rate entered d41(milliseconds).Trend1 Pre SmplTrend Trace SelTrend MarkerParameterSelectionSw On Stpt RealSw Off Stpt Reald38d41d42d39d401) d42 selects the number of datapoints 1) d42 to selects store prior the to number the trend of datatrigger points (pre-trigger to store prior data). to the trendtrigger (pre-trigger data).2) d40 determines the marker valueplaced 2) d40 in determines the trend data the at marker the valuebeginning placed in of the the trend pre-trigger data at data the(trigger beginning point of – the d42 pre-trigger - 1). data(trigger point – d42 - 1).3) Pre-trigger data is located atnegative 3) Pre-trigger trace select data is (d39) located values atfrom negative [- d42] trace to -1 select (d39) valuesfrom [- d42] to -14) The trigger point data value islocated 4) The at trigger d39 pointer data value value 0 islocated at d39 pointer value 05) Post-trigger data is located inpositive 5) Post-trigger trace select data (d39) is located values inpositive trace select (d39) valuesfrom 0 to [+ d42]d59d58Trend CollectTrend Markerfrom 0 to [+ d42] Trend Trace Sel d3910TrendTrig A SelTrendTrig B SelDigital SwitchesBit To Numeric ConversionDig Sw Real Outd60Trigger ASource(numeric)d35Trigger BSource(numeric)d36Trend 1DataSource(numeric)d44Trend 1 In Seld40d37ParameterSelectionParameterSelectionDig SwDint SelRealRealBitSourced61>1023Sw On Stpt DintSw Off Stpt DintBuffer FullTrend 2Data0Source(numeric)ParameterSelection d45Diagnostic ToolsParameterSelectionSet [Trend Collect] to 1 to begin trend. 0 to stop. Toggle(0 1 0) to fill buffers with random sample (no trigger needed).Trend Out1 DIntd48Trend Out1 Reald49d63d62Trend 2 In SelNumeric Constantsd33 Trend Stpt Reald34 Trend Stpt DintSRSR10Dig Sw Dint Outd64Trend Status(Triggered)d43 1Trend Status(Complete)d43 0Trend 3Data0Source(numeric)ParameterSelection d461023NOTE:The change bit, Peak x Chng (where x = 1 or 2), is set TRUE if thepeak detect value changes, else the change bit is set FALSE.Change is also set to FALSE if the detector is in HOLD or SET.Trend Out2 DIntd50Trend Out2 Reald51Peak1 Cfg(Peak1 Peak)Peak 1Input DataSource(numeric)Peak2 Cfg(Peak2 Peak)Peak 2Input DataSource(numeric)Trend 3 In Sel1039 0Peak 1 Change(Peak1Change)Peak 2 Change (Peak2Change)d56 Trend State: 1=Enable Wait, 2=First Scan, 3=PreTrigger, 4=PostTrigger, 5=Disable Wait‘d’ Prefix Refers to Diagnostic Item Number (ex. d33) – Reference Symbol LegendPkDtct1 In Sel1037ParameterSelection1044 0PkDtct2 In Sel1042ParameterSelectionRealRealPeak Detect01023Peak Detect1040 0Peak Detect1045 0Trend Out3 DIntd52Trend Out3 Reald53Peak1 Cfg(Peak1 Hold)Peak2 Cfg(Peak2 Hold)Trend 4DataSource(numeric)ParameterSelection d47Trend 4 In SelononoffoffPeak1 Cfg(Peak1 Set)1039 1Peak2 Cfg(Peak2 Set)1044 1ParameterSelectionNumeric Constants103510361039 2Peak 1Preset DataSource(numeric)1044 2Peak 2Preset DataSource(numeric)PkDtct Stpt RealPkDtct Stpt Dint01023PeakDetect1 Out10411038 PkDtct1PresetSelParameterSelectionPeakDetect2 Out10461043ParameterSelectionPkDtct2PresetSelRealTrend Out4 DIntd54Trend Out4 Reald55RealPF755 Rev1.009c, 4/21/2009 Diag 31........................................PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Appendix CApplication NotesVoltage ToleranceDrive RatingNominal LineVoltageNominal MotorVoltageDrive Full PowerRangeDrive OperatingRange380…400 380 380 380…528 342…528400 400 400…528480 460 460…528Drive Full Power Range = Nominal Motor Voltage to Drive Rated Voltage + 10%.Rated current is available across the entire Drive Full Power RangeDrive Operating Range = Lowest Nominal Motor Voltage - 10% to Drive Rated Voltage + 10%.Drive Output is linearly derated when Actual Line Voltage is less thanthe Nominal Motor VoltageHp @ Motor (Drive Output)No DriveOutputDerated Power RangeFull Power RangeDrive Operating RangeNominal Motor Voltage -10%Nominal Motor VoltageActual Line Voltage (Drive Input)Drive Rated VoltageDrive Rated Voltage +10%Example:Calculate the maximum power of a 5 Hp, 460V motor connected to a 480Vrated drive supplied with 342V Actual Line Voltage input.• Actual Line Voltage / Nominal Motor Voltage = 74.3%• 74.3% × 5 HP = 3.7 HP• 74.3% × 60 Hz = 44.6 HzAt 342V Actual Line Voltage, the maximum power the 5 HP, 460V motorcan produce is 3.7 HP at 44.6 Hz.Hp @ Motor (Drive Output)5 Hp3.7 HpNo DriveOutput342V460VActual Line Voltage (Drive Input)480V528VPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

C-2 Application NotesExternal Brake Resistor!ATTENTION: The drive does not offer protection forexternally mounted brake resistors. A risk of fire exists ifexternal braking resistors are not protected. External resistorpackages must be self-protected from over temperature or acircuit equivalent to the one shown below must be supplied.Figure C.1 External Brake Resistor CircuitryThree-PhaseAC Input(Input Contactor) MR (L1)S (L2)T (L3)Power OffPower OnMMPower SourceDB Resistor ThermostatPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Application Notes C-3Lifting/Torque ProvingThe TorqProve feature of PowerFlex 750-Series drives is intended forapplications where proper coordination between motor control and amechanical brake is required. Prior to releasing a mechanical brake, thedrive will check motor output phase continuity and verify proper motorcontrol (torque proving). The drive will also verify that the mechanicalbrake has control of the load prior to releasing drive control (brake proving).After the drive sets the brake, motor movement is monitored to ensure thebrakes ability to hold the load.!ATTENTION: Loss of control in suspended load applicationscan cause personal injury and/or equipment damage. Loads mustalways be controlled by the drive or a mechanical brake.Parameters 1100…1113 are designed for lifting/torque provingapplications. It is the responsibility of the engineer and/or enduser to configure drive parameters, test any lifting functionalityand meet safety requirements in accordance with all applicablecodes and standards.TorqProve can be operated with an encoder or encoderless. See “Attention”on page C-4 prior to the use of TorqProve with no encoder.TorqProve functionality with an encoder includes:• Torque Proving (includes flux up and last torque measurement)• Brake Proving• Brake Slip (feature slowly lowers load if brake slips/fails)• Float Capability (ability to hold full torque at zero speed)• Micro-Positioning• Fast Stop• Speed Deviation Fault, Output Phase Loss Fault, Encoder Loss Fault.Encoderless TorqProve functionality includes:• Torque Proving (includes flux up and last torque measurement)• Micro-Positioning• Fast Stop• Speed Deviation Fault, Output Phase Loss Fault.Important: Brake Slip detection and Float capability (ability to hold load atzero speed) are not available in encoderless TorqProve.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

C-4 Application Notes!ATTENTION: User must read the following prior to the use ofTorqProve with no encoder.Encoderless TorqProve must be limited to lifting applicationswhere personal safety is not a concern. Encoders offer additionalprotection and must be used where personal safety is a concern.Encoderless TorqProve cannot hold a load at zero speed withouta mechanical brake and does not offer additional protection if thebrake slips/fails. Loss of control in suspended load applicationscan cause personal injury and/or equipment damage.It is the responsibility of the engineer and/or user to configuredrive parameters, test any lifting functionality and meet safetyrequirements in accordance with all applicable codes andstandards. If encoderless TorqProve is desired, the user mustcertify the safety of the application. To acknowledge that the enduser has read this “Attention” and properly certified theirencoderless application, bit 3 (“EnclsTrqProv”) of [Mtr OptionsCnfg], parameter 40 must be changed to a “1.” This will removeAlarm 28, “TP Encls Config” and allow bit 1 of Parameter 1100to be changed to a “1” enabling encoderless TorqProve.Tuning The Motor For Torque Prove ApplicationsIt is possible to use the Start-Up routine (See page 2-3) to tune the motor.However, it is recommended that the motor be disconnected from the hoist/crane equipment during the routine!ATTENTION: To guard against personal injury and/orequipment damage caused by unexpected brake release, verifythat the digital output used for brake connections and/orprogramming. The PowerFlex 750-Series drive will not controlthe mechanical brake until TorqProve is enabled. If the brakeis connected to a digital output, it could be released. If necessary,disconnect the digital output until wiring/programming canbe completed and verified.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Appendix DHuman Interface Module (HIM) OverviewComplete information about using the HIM (Catalog Numbers 20-HIM-A6and 20-HIM-C6S) to configure and monitor your drive is provided in theEnhanced PowerFlex 7-Class Human Interface Module (HIM) UserManual, publication 20HIM-UM001.LCD Display ElementsThe HIM display is divided into three zones:➊ Status Bar➋ Data Area➌ Soft Key LabelsFigure D.1 HIM Display ZonesStoppedAUTO0.00 HzFHost Drive240V 4.2ARev 3.002 Ser. A00ESC REF TEXT PAR#➊➋➌Status BarThe Status Bar provides information about the operating condition of theHost Drive.Figure D.2 Status Bar on the Display ScreenStopped0.00 HzAUTOFElementHost IconDescriptionA small image of the connected Host Drive.Stopped Status Text Indicates current Host Drive operating status.Text flashes when a fault is present.0.00 Hz Feedback Indicates drive output feedback (for example, Hz,RPM, amps, etc.)AUTO / MAN Mode Indication Indicates Auto or Manual HIM status. Alarm Indication Bell icon indicates that an alarm is present.F R Rotation Indication Indicates direction of Host Drive operation.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

D-2 Human Interface Module (HIM) OverviewSoft KeysUp to five dynamic soft keys (shown shaded in Figure D.3) may beavailable. A soft key changes its function/name based on the HIM screen ordata entry mode. When a soft key is active, its present function is shown onthe LCD screen in its corresponding Soft Key Label (item 3 in Figure D.1).Figure D.3 Soft KeysNavigation and NumberKeysThe five blue multi-function keys shown in Figure D.4 are used to scrollmenus/screens, perform corresponding functions displayed in the Data Area(item 2 in Figure D.1) or enter numeric values. The five gray number keys(0, 1, 3, 7, and 9) are used only to enter their respective numeric value.Figure D.4 Navigation and Number KeysKey Name Description2/Down Arrow • Enters the numeric value “2.”• Scrolls down to select an item.4/Left Arrow • Enters the numeric value “4.”• Scrolls left to select an item.5/Enter • Enters the numeric value “5.”• Displays the next level of a selected menu item.• Enters new values.• Performs intended actions.6/Right Arrow • Enters the numeric value “6.”• Scrolls right to select an item.8/Up Arrow • Enters the numeric value “8.”• Scrolls up to select an item.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Human Interface Module (HIM) Overview D-3Single Function KeysEach of the four single-function keys shown in Figure D.5 always performsonly its dedicated function.Figure D.5 Single Function KeysKey Name DescriptionStart Start the drive.FolderControl BarAccess parameters, diagnostics, memory functions, preferences,and other tasks such as Start-Up.Access jog, direction, auto/manual, and other control functions.StopUsed to stop the drive or clear a fault.This key is always active.Controlled by parameter 370 [Stop Mode A].PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

D-4 Human Interface Module (HIM) OverviewNavigate to Start-Up MenuUsing the HIM1. To access the Start-Up menu after the initial drive power-up, applypower to the drive.Upon a subsequent power up, the Status screen for Port 00 (Host Drive)is shown by default.Figure D.6 Status ScreenStoppedAUTO0.00 HzFHost Drive240V 4.2ARev 3.002 Ser. A00ESC REF PAR# TEXT2. Press the (Folders) key to access the Folder screen.Figure D.7 Folder Screen00ESCStopped0.00 HzDEV PARAMLinear ListFile-GroupChanged ParamsAUTOF3. Use the or key to scroll to the START UP folder screen.Figure D.8 Start Up Screen00ESCStopped0.00 HzAUTOFSTART UPBegin Start UpContinue Start Up4. Use the or key to select one of the start up options.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Human Interface Module (HIM) Overview D-5Select A Device1. Access the Status Screen.When the drive is powered up, the Status screen for Port 00 (Host Drive)is shown by default.Figure D.9 Status Screen Displaying Port 00 (Host Drive)StoppedAUTO0.00 HzFHost Drive240V 4.2ARev 3.002 Ser. A00ESC REF PAR# TEXT2. Use the or key to scroll to the desired port.Figure D.10 Status Screen Displaying Port 01 (HIM Installed In Cradle)StoppedAUTO0.00 HzF20-HIM-x6LCD HIMOperational01ESC REF PAR# TEXT3. Press the PAR# soft key or the (Folders) key to access parameters.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

D-6 Human Interface Module (HIM) OverviewSetting Factory DefaultsSetting PowerFlex 750-Series Drives to Factory Defaults1. Access the Status screen (Figure D.6).2. Use the or key to scroll to the Port 00 for the Host Drivewhose settings you want to reset to factory defaults.3. Press the key to display its last-viewed folder.4. Use the or key to scroll to the MEMORY folder.5. Use the or key to select Set Defaults.6. Press the (Enter) key to display the Set Defaults pop-up box.Figure D.11 Set Defaults Pop-Up Box for PowerFlex 750-Series DrivesStoppedAUTO0.00 HzFPort 00: Set DefaultsHost and Ports (Preferred)This Port OnlyESCINFO7. Use the or key to select the appropriate action.– Host and Ports (Preferred): Selects the Host device and all ports for afactory default action.– This Port Only: Selects only this port for a factory default action.TIP: For a description of a selected menu item, press the INFO soft key.8. Press the (Enter) key to display the warning pop-up box to resetdefaults.Figure D.12 Host and Ports (Preferred)Pop-Up BoxFigure D.13 This Port Only Pop-UpBoxStopped0.00 HzAUTOFWARNINGSets most parameters in theHost device and all ports tofactory defaults. Continue?ESCENTERStopped0.00 HzAUTOFWARNINGUse MOST to reset typical ▲settings on this port(preferred). Use ALL toreset all settings.▼ESC ALL MOSTPress the ENTER soft key to affirm and set mostparameters for the Host Drive and port devices tofactory defaults. In this case, refer to Table D.A forthe settings that will NOT be restored. Or pressthe ESC soft key to cancel.Press the MOST soft key to set MOST settingsfor the selected port device to factory defaults.In this case, refer to Table D.A for the settingsthat will NOT be restored. Press the ALL softkey to set ALL settings for the selected portdevice to factory defaults. Or press the ESCsoft key to cancel.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Human Interface Module (HIM) Overview D-7Table D.A Parameters Unaffected By Reset Option MostDeviceDrive Main Control BoardI/O ModuleIncremental Encoder ModulesSafe Speed Monitor ModuleUniversal Feedback ModuleEmbedded EtherNet/IPParameter300 [Speed Units]301 [Access Level]302 [Language]305 [Voltage Class]306 [Duty Rating]471 [PrdMntRst Enable]472 [Pred Maint Reset]105 [RO0 LifeEvntActn]NoneNoneNone36 [BOOTP]38 [IP Addr Cfg 1]…41 [IP Addr Cfg 4]42 [Subnet Cfg 1]…45 [Subnet Cfg 4]46 [Gateway Cfg 1]…49 [Gateway Cfg 4]50 [Net Rate Cfg]PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

D-8 Human Interface Module (HIM) OverviewSetting PowerFlex 750-Series Peripherals to Factory Defaults1. Access the Status screen (Figure D.6).2. Use the or key to scroll to the Port of the device whoseparameters you want to set to factory defaults (for example, Port 13,which is dedicated for the embedded EtherNet/IP communicationadapter on the main control board in PowerFlex 755 drives).3. Press the key to display its last-viewed folder.4. Use the or key to scroll to the MEMORY folder.5. Use the or key to select Set Defaults.6. Press the (Enter) key to display the Set Defaults pop-up box.Figure D.14 Set Defaults Pop-Up Box for PowerFlex 750-Series PeripheralsStopped0.00 HzPort xx: Set DefaultsThis Port OnlyAUTOFESCINFO– This Port Only: Selects only this port for a factory default action.TIP: For a description of a selected menu item, press the INFO soft key.7. Press the (Enter) key to display the warning pop-up box to resetdefaults.Figure D.15 Warning Pop-Up Box to Reset Factory DefaultsStopped0.00 HzAUTOFWARNINGUse MOST to reset typical ▲settings on this port(preferred). Use ALL toreset all settings.▼ESC ALL MOST8. Press the MOST soft key to set MOST settings for the selected portdevice to factory defaults. In this case, refer to the port device UserManuals for the settings that will NOT be restored. Press the ALL softkey to set ALL settings for the selected port device to factory defaults. Orpress the ESC soft key to cancel.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Human Interface Module (HIM) Overview D-9Setting PowerFlex 7-Class Drives/Peripherals to Factory Defaults1. Access the Status screen (Figure D.6).2. Use the or key to scroll to the Port of the device whoseparameters you want to set to factory defaults (for example, Port 00 forthe Host Drive).3. Press the key to display its last-viewed folder.4. Use the or key to scroll to the MEMORY folder.5. Use the or key to select Set Defaults.6. Press the (Enter) key to display the Set Defaults pop-up box.Figure D.16 Set Defaults Pop-Up BoxStopped0.00 HzWARNINGSets all parameters tofactory defaults. Continue?AUTOFESCENTER7. Press the ENTER soft key to affirm and set all device parameter values tofactory defaults. Or press the ESC soft key to cancel.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

D-10 Human Interface Module (HIM) OverviewNotes:PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Appendix EUniversal Feedback Encoder Option ModuleFor information on . . See page . .Specifications E-1Terminal Block Designations E-3Wiring Examples E-4SpecificationsImportant: The Universal Feedback Encoder can only be used withPowerFlex 755 drives.20-750-UFB-1Table E.A Universal Feedback Option Module LED IndicationLED Name Color State Description➊ Board Unlit Off Not powered.➊➋Green Flashing Initializing, not active.Communication lost, attempting to reconnect.Steady Operational, no faults are present.Red Flashing Module error.• Check P1 [Module Sts]Steady Normal operation.Module is booting.Fatal module error.• Cycle power• Flash update module firmware• Replace moduleYellow Flashing A type 2 alarm condition exists.• Check P1 [Module Sts]Steady A type 1 alarm condition exists.• Check P1 [Module Sts]Yellow / Flashing Module is flash updating.Green Alternately➋ DPI Unlit Off Not powered. Not communicating.Green Flashing Module is attempting to communicate with theDPI host.Steady • Properly connected and communicating.• Module is flash updating.Red Flashing Module is not communicating with the DPI host.Steady DPI communication failure such as invalid port.Yellow Flashing Normal operation.Steady Peripheral is connected to a SCANport productand does not support a SCANport compatibilitymode.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

E-2 Universal Feedback Encoder Option ModuleTable E.B Universal Feedback Option Module DIP Switch Settings (SafetyApplication)Safety Channel SelectionPrimary Safety ChannelTo connect feedback signals to the Primary Safety Channel, set:S1 sliders to ONS2 sliders to OFFS3 slider to ONDIP Switch SettingsS1 S2 S3Secondary Safety ChannelTo connect feedback signals to the Secondary Safety Channel, set:S1 sliders to OFFS2 sliders to ONS3 slider to ONS1 S2 S3Primary and Secondary Safety ChannelsTo connect feedback signals to both the Primary and Secondary SafetyChannels, set:S1 sliders to ONS2 sliders to ONS3 slider to ONS1 S2 S3Table E.C Universal Feedback Incremental AquadB EncoderConsiderationInputMaximum Cable Length:Maximum Input FrequencyDescriptionDifferential or Single Ended operation, Constant Current Sinkoperation ~10 mA3.5V DC minimum to 7.5V DC maximum sourcing 10 mAminimum high state voltage of 3.5V DCmaximum low state voltage of 0.4V DC30 m (100 ft) @ 5V, 183 m (600 ft) @ 12V250 kHzTable E.D Supported EncodersConsiderationHeidenhain(EnDat)SSIStegmann(Hiperface) BiSS Stahl (linear)Temposonics(linear)Encoder VoltageSupply5V @ 250 mA 10.5V @ 250 mA 10.5V @ 250 mA 10.5V @ 250 mA External Supplied24VExternal Supplied24VHigh-Resolution Sine/Cosine 1V P-P Sine/Cosine 1V P-P Sine/Cosine 1V P-P Sine/Cosine 1V P-P n/an/aSignalMaximum Cable 100 m 100 m 90 m 100 m 100 m 100 mLengthUpdate Rate (1) 102.4 μs 102.4 μs 102.4 μs 102.4 μs 0.5/1.0/1.5/2.0 ms 0.5/1.0/1.5/2.0 msMaximum InputFrequency163.8 kHz 163.8 kHz 163.8 kHz 163.8 kHz n/a n/a(1)The Universal Feedback Encoder Option Module will acquire the position with the update rates displayed.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Universal Feedback Encoder Option Module E-3Terminal BlockDesignationsTable E.E Universal Feedback Encoder Option Module TB1 Terminal DesignationsTerminal NameDescription-Sn +Sn -Sn Sine (–) Negative Sine signal-Cs +Cs +Sn Sine (+) Positive Sine signalIS OS-Xc +Xc -Cs Cosine (–) Negative Cosine signal-Xd +Xd +Cs Cosine (+) Positive Cosine signal-Hf +Hf5c +5Is Inner Shield Heidenhain inner shield terminal12c +12 Os Outer Shield Cable shield terminal-A A-Xc Channel X Clock (–) Negative clock terminal (Channel X)-B B-Z Z +Xc Channel X Clock (+) Positive clock terminal (Channel X)-Xd Channel X Data (–) Negative data terminal (Channel X)+Xd Channel X Data (+) Positive data terminal (Channel X)-Hf Heidenhain Supply Feedback (–) For incremental feedback applications,+Hf Heidenhain Supply Feedback (+) tie terminal -Hf to 5c and terminal +Hf to+5 for proper voltage regulation.5c Common +5V Common+5 +5 Volt DC Power Power supply for encoder 250 mA12c Common +12V Common+12 +12 Volt DC Power Power supply for encoder(10.5V @ 250 mA)-A Encoder A (NOT) Single channel or quadrature A input orA Encoder Aencoder output.-B Encoder B (NOT) Quadrature B input or encoder output.B Encoder B-Z Encoder Z (NOT) Pulse, marker or registration input orZ Encoder Zencoder output.Table E.F Universal Feedback Encoder Option Module TB2 Terminal Designations-Hm-R0-R1-Yc-Yd+Hm+R0+R1+Yc+YdTerminal NameDescription-Hm Home Input (–) 12V DC @ 9 mA to 24V DC @ 40 mA+Hm Home Input (+)-R0 Registration Input 0 (–) Positive and negative encoder+R0 Registration Input 0 (+) registration terminals.-R1 Registration Input 1 (–)12V DC @ 9 mA to 24V DC @ 40 mA+R1 Registration Input 1 (+)-Yc Channel Y Clock (–) Negative clock terminal (Channel Y)+Yc Channel Y Clock (+) Positive clock terminal (Channel Y)-Yd Channel Y Data (–) Negative data terminal (Channel Y)+Yd Channel Y Data (+) Positive data terminal (Channel Y)Important: Only one linear feedback device can be connected to the optionmodule. Wire the device to either Channel X on TB1 orChannel Y on TB2.Parameter AccessRefer to Select A Device on page D-5 for instructions on how to accessparameters on an option module.Parameter DescriptionsUniversal Feedback option module parameter descriptions begin on pagepage 3-166.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

E-4 Universal Feedback Encoder Option ModuleWiring ExamplesThe following table includes a list of motor, feedback device and cablewiring examples.If you are using this motor and/or feedback device… and this cable… See this wiring example…Heidenhain EnDat angle encoder (e.g., RCN729/829) with internal power supplied with encoder Figure E.1 on page E-5supplyHeidenhain EnDat angle encoder with external power supply supplied with encoder Figure E.2 on page E-5Heidenhain Non-EnDat rotary encoder with internal power supply PUR cable supplied with encoder Figure E.3 on page E-6Heidenhain EnDat rotary encoder (ECN 412 EnDat01) with internal power supplied with encoder Figure E.4 on page E-6supplyHeidenhain EnDat rotary encoder (ECN 412 EnDat01) with internal power PUR cable supplied with encoder Figure E.5 on page E-7supply460V MP series motor and Stegmann rotary encoder 2090-CDNFDMP-SXX Figure E.6 on page E-72090-XXNFMP-SXX Figure E.7 on page E-8Allen-Bradley 1326AB-BXXXX-M2L, -M2KXL, -S2l or -S2KXL motor and 2090-CDNFDMP-SXX Figure E.6 on page E-7Stegmann rotary encoder2090-XXNFMP-SXX Figure E.7 on page E-8230V MP series motor and a Stegmann rotary encoder 2090-UXNFDMP-SXX Figure E.8 on page E-82090-XXNFMP-SXX Figure E.9 on page E-9Stegmann rotary encoder 1326-CECU-XXL-XXX Figure E.10 on page E-9Pre-attached, shielded, twisted pair Figure E.11 on page E-10Shielded, twisted pair cable with an Figure E.12 on page E-108-pin Berg style connectorShielded, twisted pair cable with a Figure E.13 on page E-1110-pin MS style connectorShielded, twisted pair cable with a Figure E.14 on page E-1112-pin DIN style connector460V MP series motor and a rotary encoder 2090-CDNFDMP-SXX Figure E.15 on page E-122090-XXNFMP-SXX Figure E.15 on page E-12Allen-Bradley 1326AB-BXXXX-M2L, -S2l or -S2KXL motor and a rotary 2090-XXNFMP-SXX Figure E.15 on page E-12encoder230V MP series motor and a rotary encoder 2090-UXNFDMP-SXX Figure E.16 on page E-122090-XXNFMP-SXX Figure E.16 on page E-12Linear sensor MDI RG Connector Figure E.17 on page E-13P Integral Cable Figure E.17 on page E-13Registration sensor supplied with sensor Figure E.18 on page E-14Simulated Incremental encoder output customer supplied Figure E.19 on page E-15PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Universal Feedback Encoder Option Module E-5Figure E.1 Heidenhain EnDat Angle Encoder with Internal Power SupplyUniversal Feedback OptionModule TB1Heidenhain EnDatEncoder TB-Sn 1+Sn 2-Cs 3+Cs 4IS 5OS 6-Xc 7+Xc 8-Xd 9+Xd 10-Hf 11+Hf 125c 13+5 141516171819202122RD/BKBL/BKYL/BKGN/BKYLVIPKGYWHBLWH/GNBN/GNRD/BKBL/BKYL/BKGN/BKYLVIPKGYWHBLWH/GNBN/GN13 B-12 B+16 A-15 A+11 Inner ShldOuter Shld9 CLK/8 CLK17 DATA/14 DATA4 SUP_FDBK-1 SUP_FDBK+10 SUP_V-7 SUP_V+Note: Refer to Installation Instructions supplied with encoder for additional information.Figure E.2 Heidenhain EnDat Angle Encoder with External Power SupplyUniversal Feedback OptionModule TB1Heidenhain EnDatEncoder TB-Sn 1+Sn 2-Cs 3+Cs 4IS 5OS 6-Xc 7+Xc 8-Xd 9+Xd 10-Hf 11+Hf 125c 13+5 141516171819202122RD/BKBL/BKYL/BKGN/BKYLVIPKGYWHBLPower+Power-Sense+Sense-Power SupplyRD/BKBL/BKYL/BKGN/BKYLVIPKGYWHBLWH/GNBN/GN13 B-12 B+16 A-15 A+11 Inner ShldOuter Shld9 CLK/8 CLK17 DATA/14 DATA4 SUP_FDBK-1 SUP_FDBK+10 SUP_V-7 SUP_V+Notes: Refer to Installation Instructions supplied with encoder for additional information. The externalpower supply must be 3.6V to 5.25V, max. 350mA.TB1-14 (Power+) and TB1-13 (Power-) must not be connected to the encoder. The brown/green andwhite/green conductors must be connected to the external power supply. If the external power supplydoes not have sense connections, the supply feedback (sense) connections should still be made fromthe encoder to the universal board (TB1-11,12).PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

E-6 Universal Feedback Encoder Option ModuleFigure E.3 Heidenhain Non-EnDat Rotary Encoder with Internal Power SupplyUniversal Feedback OptionModule TB1Heidenhain Non-EnDatEncoder TB-Sn 1+Sn 2-Cs 3+Cs 4IS 5OS 6-Xc+Xc-Xd+Xd-Hf 11+Hf 125c 13+5 1412c+12RD/BKBL/BKYL/BKGN/BKWHBLWH/GnBL/GnRD/BKBL/BKYL/BKGN/BKWHBLWH/GNBN/GN18651121012B-B+A-A+Inner ShldOuter ShldCLK/CLKDATA/DATASUP_FDBK-SUP_FDBK+SUP_V-SUP_V+Note: Refer to Installation Instructions supplied with encoder for additional information.Figure E.4 Heidenhain EnDat Rotary Encoder (ECN 412 EnDat01) with InternalPower SupplyUniversal Feedback OptionModule TB1Heidenhain EnDatEncoder TB-Sn 1+Sn 2-Cs 3+Cs 4IS 5OS 6-Xc 7+Xc 8-Xd 9+Xd 10-Hf 11+Hf 125c 13+5 141516171819202122RD/BKBL/BKYL/BKGN/BKYLVIPKGYWHBLWH/GNBN/GNRD/BKBL/BKYL/BKGN/BKYLVIPKGYWHBLWH/GNBN/GN13 B-12 B+16 A-15 A+11 Inner ShldOuter Shld9 CLK/8 CLK17 DATA/14 DATA4 SUP_FDBK-1 SUP_FDBK+10 SUP_V-7 SUP_V+Note: Refer to Installation Instructions supplied with encoder for additional information.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Universal Feedback Encoder Option Module E-7Figure E.5 Heidenhain EnDat Rotary Encoder (ECN 412 EnDat01) with InternalPower SupplyUniversal Feedback OptionModule TB1Heidenhain EnDatEncoder TB-Sn 1+Sn 2-Cs 3+Cs 4IS 5OS 6-Xc 7+Xc 8-Xd 9+Xd 10-Hf 11+Hf 125c 13+5 141516171819202122RD/BKBL/BKYL/BKGN/BKYLVIPKGYWHBLWH/GNBN/GNRD/BKBL/BKYL/BKGN/BKYLVIPKGYWHBLWH/GNBN/GN13 B-12 B+16 A-15 A+11 Inner ShldOuter Shld9 CLK/8 CLK17 DATA/14 DATA4 SUP_FDBK-1 SUP_FDBK+10 SUP_V-7 SUP_V+Note: Refer to Installation Instructions supplied with encoder for additional information.Figure E.6 460V MP Series or Allen-Bradley 1326AB-BXXXX-M2L, -M2KXL, -S2l or-S2KXL Motor and a Stegmann Rotary Encoder connected via a 2090-CDNFDMP-SXXCableUniversal Feedback OptionModule TB1StegmannEncoder TB-Sn 1+Sn 2-Cs 3+Cs 4IS 5OS 6-Xc 7+Xc 8-Xd 9+Xd 10-Hf 11+Hf 125c 13+5 1412c 15+12 16171819202122BK/WHBKWH/RDRDWH/GNGNWH/ORORBUWH/BUBK/WHBKWH/RDRDWH/GNGNWH/ORORBUWH/BUBADCFEREFSIN+SINREFCOS+COSDATA- (RS485)DATA+ (RS485)SHIELDOVERALL SHIELDP POWER COMMONN POWERR TS+S TS-PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

E-8 Universal Feedback Encoder Option ModuleFigure E.7 460V MP Series or Allen-Bradley 1326AB-BXXXX-M2L, -M2KXL, -S2l or-S2KXL Motor and a Stegmann Rotary Encoder connected via a 2090-XXNFMP-SXXCableUniversal Feedback OptionModule TB1StegmannEncoder TB-Sn 1+Sn 2-Cs 3+Cs 4IS 5OS 6-Xc 7+Xc 8-Xd 9+Xd 10-Hf 11+Hf 125c 13+5 1412c 15+12 16171819202122BK/WHBKWH/RDRDWH/GNGNWH/GYORBK/WHBKWH/RDRDWH/GNGNWH/GYORBADCFEREFSIN+SINREFCOS+COSDATA- (RS485)DATA+ (RS485)SHIELDOVERALL SHIELDP POWER COMMONN POWERR TS+S TS-Note: The Thermal Switch cannot be accessed using the 2090-XXNFMP-SXX cable.Figure E.8 230V MP Series Motor and a Stegmann Rotary Encoder connected via a2090-UXNFDMP-SXX CableUniversal Feedback OptionModule TB1StegmannEncoder TB-Sn 1+Sn 2-Cs 3+Cs 4IS 5OS 6-Xc 7+Xc 8-Xd 9+Xd 10-Hf 11+Hf 125c 13+5 1412c 15+12 16171819202122BK/WHBKWH/RDRDWH/GNGNWH/GYGYBUWH/BUBK/WHBKWH/RDRDWH/GNGNWH/GYGYBUWH/BUBADCFEREFSIN+SINREFCOS+COSDATA- (RS485)DATA+ (RS485)SHIELDOVERALL SHIELDL POWER COMMONK POWERR TS+S TS-PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Universal Feedback Encoder Option Module E-9Figure E.9 230V MP Series Motor and a Stegmann Rotary Encoder connected via a2090-XXNFMP-SXX CableUniversal Feedback OptionModule TB1StegmannEncoder TB-Sn 1+Sn 2-Cs 3+Cs 4IS 5OS 6-Xc 7+Xc 8-Xd 9+Xd 10-Hf 11+Hf 125c 13+5 1412c 15+12 16171819202122BK/WHBKWH/RDRDWH/GNGNWH/GYGYBK/WHBKWH/RDRDWH/GNGNWH/GYGYBADCFEREFSIN+SINREFCOS+COSDATA- (RS485)DATA+ (RS485)SHIELDOVERALL SHIELDL POWER COMMONK POWERR TS+S TS-Note: The Thermal Switch cannot be accessed using the 2090-XXNFMP-SXX cable.Figure E.10 Stegmann Rotary Encoder connected via a 1326-CECU-XXL-XXX CableUniversal Feedback OptionModule TB1StegmannEncoder TB-Sn 1+Sn 2-Cs 3+Cs 4IS 5OS 6-Xc 7+Xc 8-Xd 9+Xd 10-Hf 11+Hf 125c 13+5 1412c 15+12 16171819202122BKRDBKBUGNBKWHBKBKRDBKBUGNBKWHBKCDEFHGIJREFSIN+SINREFCOS+COSDATA- (RS485)DATA+ (RS485)SHIELDOVERALL SHIELDB POWER COMMONA POWERPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

E-10 Universal Feedback Encoder Option ModuleFigure E.11 Stegmann Rotary Encoder connected via a Pre-Attached, Shielded,Twisted Pair CableUniversal Feedback OptionModule TB1StegmannEncoder TB-Sn 1+Sn 2-Cs 3+Cs 4IS 5OS 6-Xc 7+Xc 8-Xd 9+Xd 10-Hf 11+Hf 125c 13+5 1412c 15+12 16171819202122BNWHBKPKGNGYBURDBNWHBKPKGNGYBURD374865REFSIN+SINREFCOS+COSDATA- (RS485)DATA+ (RS485)2 POWER COMMON1 POWERFigure E.12 Stegmann Rotary Encoder Connected via a Shielded, Twisted PairCable with an 8-pin Berg Style ConnectorUniversal Feedback OptionModule TB1StegmannEncoder TB-Sn 1+Sn 2-Cs 3+Cs 4IS 5OS 6-Xc 7+Xc 8-Xd 9+Xd 10-Hf 11+Hf 125c 13+5 1412c 15+12 16171819202122BNWHBKPKGNGYBURDBNWHBKPKGNGYBURD374865REFSIN+SINREFCOS+COSDATA- (RS485)DATA+ (RS485)2 POWER COMMON1 POWERPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Universal Feedback Encoder Option Module E-11Figure E.13 Stegmann Rotary Encoder Connected via a Shielded, Twisted PairCable with a 10-pin MS Style ConnectorUniversal Feedback OptionModule TB1StegmannEncoder TB-Sn 1+Sn 2-Cs 3+Cs 4IS 5OS 6-Xc 7+Xc 8-Xd 9+Xd 10-Hf 11+Hf 125c 13+5 1412c 15+12 16171819202122BNWHBKPKGNGYBURDBNWHBKPKGNGYBURDCGDHFEJREFSIN+SINREFCOS+COSDATA- (RS485)DATA+ (RS485)OVERALL SHIELDB POWER COMMONA POWERIN/CFigure E.14 Stegmann Rotary Encoder Connected via a Shielded, Twisted PairCable with a 12-pin DIN Style ConnectorUniversal Feedback OptionModule TB1StegmannEncoder TB-Sn 1+Sn 2-Cs 3+Cs 4IS 5OS 6-Xc 7+Xc 8-Xd 9+Xd 10-Hf 11+Hf 125c 13+5 1412c 15+12 16171819202122BNWHBKPKGNGYBURDBNWHBKPKGNGYBURD65REFSIN+SIN1 REFCOS8 +COS11 N/C4 N/C3 N/C729DATA- (RS485)DATA+ (RS485)OVERALL SHIELD10 POWER COMMON12 POWERPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

E-12 Universal Feedback Encoder Option ModuleFigure E.15 460V MP Series Motor and a Rotary Encoder Connected via a2090-CDNFDMP-SXX or 2090-XXNFMP-SXX Cable or Allen-Bradley1326AB-BXXXX-M2L, -S2l or -S2KXL Motor and a Rotary Encoder Connected via a2090-XXNFMP-SXX CableUniversal Feedback OptionModule TB1RotaryEncoder TB-Sn 1+Sn 2-Cs 3+Cs 4IS 5OS 6-Xc 7+Xc 8-Xd 9+Xd 10-Hf 11+Hf 125c 13+5 1412c 15+12 16171819202122BK/WHBKWH/RDRDWH/GNGNWH/ORORBUWH/BUBK/WHBKWH/RDRDWH/GNGNWH/ORORBUWH/BUBADCFEREFSIN+SINREFCOS+COSDATA- (RS485)DATA+ (RS485)SHIELDOVERALL SHIELDP POWER COMMONN POWERR TS+S TS-Figure E.16 230V MP Series Motor and a Rotary Encoder Connected via a2090-UXNFDMP-SXX or 2090-XXNFMP-SXX CableUniversal Feedback OptionModule TB1RotaryEncoder TB-Sn 1+Sn 2-Cs 3+Cs 4IS 5OS 6-Xc 7+Xc 8-Xd 9+Xd 10-Hf 11+Hf 125c 13+5 1412c 15+12 16171819202122BK/WHBKWH/RDRDWH/GNGNWH/GYGYBUWH/BUBK/WHBKWH/RDRDWH/GNGNWH/GYGYBUWH/BUBADCFEREFSIN+SINREFCOS+COSDATA- (RS485)DATA+ (RS485)SHIELDOVERALL SHIELDL POWER COMMONK POWERR TS+S TS-PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Universal Feedback Encoder Option Module E-13Figure E.17 Linear Sensor with MDI RG Connector or P Integral CableUniversal Feedback OptionModule TB2-Hm 1+Hm 2-R0 3+R0 4-R1 5+R1 6-Yc 7+Yc 8-Yd 9+Yd 10Universal Feedback OptionModule TB1-Sn 1+Sn 2-Cs 3+Cs 4IS 5OS 6-Xc 7+Xc 8-Xd 9+Xd 10-Hf 11+Hf 125c 13+5 1412c 15+12 16171819202122GNYEPKGYRD or BNWH24V DC Power Supply+ Power- CommonYEGNPKGYRD or BNWH3412567Linear SensorTB(+) Clock(-) Clock(-) Data(+) Data+24V DCDC GroundN/CPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

E-14 Universal Feedback Encoder Option ModuleFigure E.18 Registration SensorUniversal Feedback OptionModule TB2-Hm 1+Hm 2-R0 3+R0 4-R1 5+R1 6-Yc 7+Yc 8-Yd 9+Yd 10Rotary RegistrationSensor+ PowerCommonLine RegistrationSensor+ PowerCommonUniversal Feedback OptionModule TB1-Sn 1+Sn 2-Cs 3+Cs 4IS 5OS 6-Xc 7+Xc 8-Xd 9+Xd 10-Hf 11+Hf 125c 13+5 1412c 15+12 16171819202122PowerCommonExternalPowerSupply12 or 24V DCPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Universal Feedback Encoder Option Module E-15Figure E.19 Simulated Incremental Encoder OutputUniversal Feedback OptionModule TB1-Sn 1+Sn 2-Cs 3+Cs 4IS 5OS 6-Xc 7+Xc 8-Xd 9+Xd 10-Hf 11+Hf 125c 13+5 1412c 15+12 16-A 17A 18-B 19B 20-Z 21Z 22Customer EquipmentPEPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

E-16 Universal Feedback Encoder Option ModuleNotes:PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Appendix FIncremental Encoder Option ModulesFor information on . . See page . .Specifications F-1Wiring Examples F-3SpecificationsSingle Incremental EncoderTable F.A Single Incremental Encoder Specifications20-750-ENC-1ConsiderationInputMaximum Cable LengthMaximum Input FrequencyDescriptionDifferential or Single Ended operation, Constant Current Sinkoperation ~10 mA5V DC minimum to 15V DC maximum sourcing 10 mAminimum high state voltage of 3.5V DCmaximum low state voltage of 0.4V DC30 m (100 ft) @ 5V, 183 m (600 ft) @ 12V250 kHzTable F.B TB1 Terminal DesignationsSdComABZ+24HmC125A-B-Z-24CHmParameter AccessRefer to Select A Device on page D-5 for instructions on how to accessparameters on an option module.Parameter DescriptionsTerminal NameDescriptionSd Shield Terminating point for wire shields when anEMC plate or conduit box is not installed.12 +12 Volt DC Power Power supply for encoder 250 mA.Com Common +12V and +5V Common5 +5 Volt DC Power Power supply for encoder 250 mA.A Encoder A Single channel or quadrature A input.A- Encoder A (NOT)B Encoder B Quadrature B input.B- Encoder B (NOT)Z Encoder Z Pulse, marker or registration input.Z- Encoder Z (NOT)+24 +24 Volt Power source for homing input.24C CommonHmC Homing Input Common Captures the AB edge counter.Hm Homing InputSingle Incremental Encoder option module parameter descriptions begin onpage page 3-159.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

F-2 Incremental Encoder Option ModulesDual Incremental Encoder20-750-DENC-1Table F.C Dual Incremental Encoder Jumper SettingsJumper Enabled Position Storage PositionP3 - Safety JumperEnables use withspeed monitoringP3safety option(20-750-S1).P3P4 - 12V JumperEnables use with 12volt supply in“Enabled” position and5 volt supply in“Storage” position.P4P4See Important statementon page 1-45.Table F.D Dual Incremental Encoder SpecificationsConsiderationInputMaximum Cable LengthMaximum Input FrequencyDescriptionDifferential or Single Ended operation, Constant Current Sinkoperation ~10 mA5V DC minimum to 15V DC maximum sourcing 10 mAminimum high state voltage of 3.5V DCmaximum low state voltage of 0.4V DC30 m (100 ft) @ 5V, 183 m (600 ft) @ 12V250 kHzTable F.E Dual Incremental Encoder Terminal DesignationsES0A0B0ZSdES1A1B1Z24HmEC0A-0B-0Z-SdEC1A-1B-1Z-24CHmCTerminal NameDescriptionES +12 or +5 Volt DC Power Power supply for Encoder 0, 250 mA.EC Common +12V and +5V Encoder 0, common0A Encoder 0: A Single channel or quadrature A input.0A- Encoder 0: A (NOT)0B Encoder 0: B Quadrature B input.0B- Encoder 0: B (NOT)0Z Encoder 0: Z Pulse, marker or registration input.0Z- Encoder 0: Z (NOT)Sd Encoder Shield Terminating point for wire shields when anSd Encoder ShieldEMC plate or conduit box is not installed.ES +12 or +5 Volt DC Power Power supply for Encoder 1, 250 mA.EC Common +12V and +5V Encoder 1, common1A Encoder 1: A Single channel or quadrature A input.1A- Encoder 1: A (NOT)1B Encoder 1: B Quadrature B input.1B- Encoder 1: B (NOT)1Z Encoder 1: Z Pulse, marker or registration input.1Z- Encoder 1: Z (NOT)24 +24 Volt Power source for homing input.24C CommonHm Homing Input Captures the AB edge counter.HmC Homing Input CommonPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Incremental Encoder Option Modules F-3Parameter AccessRefer to Select A Device on page D-5 for instructions on how to accessparameters on an option module.Parameter DescriptionsDual Incremental Encoder option module parameter descriptions begin onpage page 3-161.Wiring ExamplesSingle Incremental Encoder Option Module ConnectionsFigure F.1 Differential Dual Channel with Z ChannelSingle Incremental EncoderOption Module TBSh12VCom5VAA-BB-ZZ-+24V24VCHmCHmEncoder TBShieldEnc +12VEnc RetEnc +5VEnc A/Enc AEnc B/Enc BEnc Z/Enc ZFigure F.2 Differential Dual Channel without Z ChannelSingle Incremental EncoderOption Module TBSh12VCom5VAA-BB-ZZ-+24V24VCHmCHmEncoder TBShieldEnc +12VEnc RetEnc +5VEnc A/Enc AEnc B/Enc BEnc Z/Enc ZPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

F-4 Incremental Encoder Option ModulesFigure F.3 Differential Dual Channel with Z Channel with External Power SupplyCommon+EncoderPower SupplySingle Incremental EncoderOption Module TBShieldEncoder TBSh12VCom5VAA-BB-ZZ-+24V24VCHmCHmShieldEnc +12VEnc RetEnc +5VEnc A/Enc AEnc B/Enc BEnc Z/Enc ZFigure F.4 Single-Ended, Dual ChannelSingle Incremental EncoderOption Module TBSh12VCom5VAA-BB-ZZ-+24V24VCHmCHmEncoder TBShieldEnc +12VEnc RetEnc +5VEnc A/Enc AEnc B/Enc BEnc Z/Enc ZPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Incremental Encoder Option Modules F-5Dual Incremental Encoder Option Module ConnectionsFigure F.5 Differential Dual Channel with Z ChannelDual Incremental EncoderOption Module TBESEC0A0A-0B0B-0Z0Z-SdSdESEC1A1A-1B1B-1Z1Z-2424CHmHmCPrimaryEncoder TBEnc +12VEnc RetEnc A/Enc AEnc B/Enc BEnc Z/Enc ZShieldEnc +12VEnc RetEnc A/Enc AEnc B/Enc BEnc Z/Enc ZShieldSecondaryEncoder TBPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

F-6 Incremental Encoder Option ModulesNotes:PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Appendix GUsing DeviceLogixIntroductionDeviceLogix (DLX) is an embedded component located in Port 14 ofPowerFlex 750-Series drives. It is used to control outputs and manage statusinformation locally within the drive. It can function stand-alone orcomplimentary to supervisory control.DeviceLogix programming for PowerFlex 750-Series drives isaccomplished through a DeviceLogix Editor component ( icon), whichis incorporated in the following versions of drive software:Drive Software ToolPowerFlex 755 v1.xxPowerFlex 753 v1.xxPowerFlex 755 v2.xxDriveExplorer v6.01 (and higher) v6.02 (and higher)DriveTools SP / DriveExecutive v5.01 (and higher) v5.02 (and higher)DeviceLogix 5000 Drive Add-On Profiles v2.01 (and higher) v2.02 (and higher)Only the drive software tools listed above can be used to program theDeviceLogix component in PowerFlex 750-Series drives. OtherDeviceLogix Editors, such as RSNetWorx for DeviceNet, cannot be used.Note the following feature differences between the drive firmware releases:PowerFlex 753 v1.xxPowerFlex 755 v1.xxPowerFlex 755 v2.xxDeviceLogix Library Version 3 Version 4Maximum number of function blocks 90 225Program update time per number of blocks 5 ms (fixed): 1…45 blocks 5 ms (fixed): 1…45 blocksused10 ms (fixed): 46…90 blocks 10 ms (fixed): 46…90 blocks15 ms (fixed): 91…135 blocks20 ms (fixed): 136…180 blocks25 ms (fixed): 181…225 blocksVersion 3 of the DeviceLogix library introduced the following new features:• Analog instructions (compute, math, compare, etc.)• Multiple I/O enable line object support• Cut and Paste capability• Screen format retention• Online Help / Bit tool tipVersion 4 of the DeviceLogix library added the following new features:• Macro Block instruction – a custom function block element that containsother function blocks programmed by the user to perform a specifictask(s)• PID instructionPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

G-2 Using DeviceLogixNote: PowerFlex 755 v1.xxx drives can be flash updated to v2.xxx to takeadvantage of the new features in the Version 4 release of the DeviceLogixlibrary and the increased number of function blocks.The PowerFlex 750-Series DeviceLogix can provide basic logic capabilityfor applications that can allow a 5…25 ms scan time depending on programsize, plus the time it takes to update the I/O. It can be used in bothnetworked and stand-alone environments. It can also operate autonomous ofthe drive. For example, it can continue executing if the drive is faulted, ordisconnected from AC input power (requires PowerFlex 750-Series 24 VDCauxiliary power supply option, catalog number 20-750-APS).PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Using DeviceLogix G-3Parameters The following are the DeviceLogix parameters (located in Port 14).HOST GROUPSFileDigital Inputs Analog InputsAnalog Outputs GroupNo.1Thru14151617Thru30313233Thru48NameDescriptionDLX Out 01DLX Out 14Fourteen floating point outputs that can be controlled by the DeviceLogixprogram. These are typically mapped to a parameter to write its value. It can alsobe mapped to the Reference Command.DLX Out 15DLX Out 16Two unsigned 32-bit integer outputs that can be controlled by the DeviceLogixprogram. These are typically mapped to a parameter to write its value.DLX In 01DLX In 14Fourteen floating point inputs that can be read by the DeviceLogix program.These are typically mapped to a parameter to read its value. It can also bemapped to Common Feedback.DLX In 15DLX In 16Two unsigned 32-bit integer inputs that can be read by the DeviceLogix program.These are typically mapped to a parameter to read its value. It can also bemapped to Real Time Clock values.ValuesDefault: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999Default: 0Min/Max: 0 / 159999DLX DIP 01DLX DIP 16Sixteen digital inputs that can be read by the DeviceLogix program. These aretypically mapped to an input point in an I/O option module or to Logic Status bits.Default:Min/Max:0.000 / 159999.1549 DLX DigIn StsProvides the individual on/off status of the 16 DLX DIP's.OptionsDLX DIPVal16DLX DIPVal15DLX DIPVal14DLX DIPVal13DLX DIPVal12DLX DIPVal11DLX DIPVal10DLX DIPVal9DLX DIPVal8DLX DIPVal7DLX DIPVal6DLX DIPVal5DLX DIPVal4DLX DIPVal3DLX DIPVal2DLX DIPVal1Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition Off1 = Condition OnRead-WriteData TypeRW RealRW 32-bitIntegerRW RealRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitInteger50 DLX DigOut StsProvides the individual on/off status of the DLX Logic Command word bits.Status & CntlOptionsDLX CmdSts16DLX CmdSts15DLX CmdSts14DLX CmdSts13DLX CmdSts12DLX CmdSts11DLX CmdSts10DLX CmdSts9DLX CmdSts8DLX CmdSts7DLX CmdSts6DLX CmdSts5DLX CmdSts4DLX CmdSts3DLX CmdSts2DLX CmdSts1Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition Off1 = Condition On51 DLX DigOut Sts2Provides the individual on/off status of the 16 DLX DOPs.OptionsDLX DOPSts16DLX DOPSts15DLX DOPSts14DLX DOPSts13DLX DOPSts12DLX DOPSts11DLX DOPSts10DLX DOPSts9DLX DOPSts8DLX DOPSts7DLX DOPSts6DLX DOPSts5DLX DOPSts4DLX DOPSts3DLX DOPSts2DLX DOPSts1Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 = Condition Off1 = Condition OnPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

G-4 Using DeviceLogixFileGroupNo.NameDescriptionValuesRead-WriteData TypeStatus & Cntl52 DLX Prog CondDefines the action that will be taken when the DLX logic is disabled.“Fault” (0) – Drive is faulted and stopped.“Stop” (1) – Drive is stopped, but not faulted.“Zero Data” (2) – Output data sent to the drive from DLX is zeroed (does notcommand a stop).“Hold Last” (3) – Drive continues in its present state.53 DLX OperationContains both operation commands as well as status information.Default:Options:Default:Options:0 = “Fault”0 = “Fault”1 = “Stop”2 = “Zero Data”3 = “Hold Last”5 = “Logic Disabled”0 = “Enable Logic”1 = “Disable Logic”2 = “Reset Program”3 = “Save Program”4 = “Load Program”5 = “Logic Disabled”6 = “Logic Enabled”RW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitInteger54Thru69DLX Real SP1DLX Real SP16Sixteen 32-bit Real scratchpad registers for DLX program use.Default: 0Min/Max: –/+220000000RW Real70Thru77DLX DINT SP1DLX DINT SP8Eight 32-bit Integer scratchpad registers for DLX program use.Default: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647RW 32-bitIntegerHost Groups78Thru81DLX Bool SP1DLX Bool SP4Four 32-bit Boolean scratchpad registers (128 bits total) for DLX program use.Internal Regs82Thru8990Thru9798Thru101102Thru105OptionsBit 15Bit 14Bit 13Bit 12Bit 11Bit 10Bit 9Bit 8Bit 7Bit 6Bit 5Bit 4Bit 3Bit 2Bit 1Bit 0Bit 15Bit 14Bit 13Bit 12Bit 11Bit 10Bit 9Bit 8Bit 7Bit 6Bit 5Bit 4Bit 3Bit 2Bit 1Bit 0Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0DLX Real InSP1DLX Real InSP8Eight 32-bit Real scratchpad registers for DLX program input use.DLX Real OutSP1DLX Real OutSP8Eight 32-bit Real scratchpad registers for DLX program output use.DLX DINT InSP1DLX DINT InSP4Four 32-bit Integer scratchpad registers for DLX program input use.DLX DINT OutSP1DLX DINT OutSP4Four 32-bit Integer scratchpad registers for DLX program output use.Default: 0Min/Max: –/+220000000Default: 0Min/Max: –/+220000000Default: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647Default: 0Min/Max: –2147483648 / 21474836470 = Condition Off1 = Condition OnRW RealRW RealRW 32-bitIntegerRW 32-bitIntegerPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Using DeviceLogix G-5Function Block ElementsThe following function block elements are available:Bit and Analog I/O (1)ProcessFilterSelect/LimitStatisticalTimer/CounterCompareCompute/MathMove/LogicalMacro Block (2)(1) Bit and Analog I/O do not count against the Function Block total. Allother elements count, with each instance counting as one FunctionBlock.(2) Macro Blocks are created by the user. The selections will be empty untila Macro Block gets created. The icon text associated with each MacroBlock is also created by the user.The DeviceLogix Editor provides a graphical interface for configuringFunction Blocks to provide local control within the drive. DeviceLogixEditor navigation and programming basics is not covered in this manual.Refer to the DeviceLogix User Manual, publication RA-UM003A foradditional information. It can be found on the RA Literature Library website at: http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature.Bit and Analog I/O PointsThe DeviceLogix controller in Port 14 uses (48) bit inputs, (48) bit outputs,(24) analog inputs, and (17) analog outputs to interact with the other ports inthe drive (both drive and peripheral parameters).Bit InputsAvailable bit inputs to the DeviceLogix program include:Bit Inputs(16) Hardware Boolean Inputs• DIP1 to DIP 16(32) Network Boolean Inputs• Ready, Active, Alarm, Faulted, etc.DescriptionThese correlate with DeviceLogix Port 14 parameters P33 [DLX DIP01] to P48 [DLX DIP 16]These correlate with the DeviceLogix Logic Status word for the drive.Refer to page A-10 for details on the Logic Status word bits.Bit inputs are used to connect to real-world input devices (push buttons,photoeyes, etc.) that are wired to an I/O option module in the drive, monitordrive status, or to read a bit in a bit-enumerated parameter.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

G-6 Using DeviceLogixBit OutputsAvailable bit outputs from the DeviceLogix program include:Bit Outputs(16) Hardware Boolean Outputs• DOP1 to DOP 16(32) Network Boolean Outputs• Stop, Start, Jog1, Clear Faults, etc.DescriptionThese correlate with the bits in DeviceLogix Port 14 parameter P51[DLX DigOut Sts2]These correlate with the DeviceLogix Logic Command word for thedrive. Refer to page A-9 for details on the Logic Command word bits.These bits can also be monitored in DeviceLogix Port 14 parameterP50 [DLX DigOut Sts].Bit Outputs are used to connect to real-world output devices (pilot lights,relays, etc.) that are wired to an I/O option module in the drive, to directlycontrol the drive via Logic Command bits, or to write a bit in abit-enumerated parameter.Analog InputsAvailable analog inputs to the DeviceLogix program include:Analog Inputs(12) Hardware Analog Inputs• DLX Real InSP1 to DLX Real InSP8 (Real)• DLX DINT InSP1 to DLX DINT InSP4 (DINT)(17) Network Analog Inputs• Common Feedback (Real)• DLX In 01 to DLX In 14 (Real)• DLX In 15 to DLX In 16 (DINT)(7) Miscellaneous Analog Inputs• Real Time Clock dataDescriptionScratchpad registers for DLX program input use.The Common Feedback correlates with theFeedback word for the drive. The DLX In’scorrelate with DeviceLogix Port 14 parametersP17 [DLX In 01] to Pr.32 [DLX In 16]Year, Month, Day, DayofWeek, Hour, Minute, andSecond from the Real Time Clock in the driveAnalog Inputs are typically used to connect to real-world input devices(sensor, potentiometer, etc.) that are wired to an I/O option module in thedrive, monitor drive Feedback, read the real Time Clock, or to read a drive /peripheral parameter.Note: Hardware Analog Inputs are available in the PowerFlex 753 andv2.xxx (and higher) PowerFlex 755 drives.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Using DeviceLogix G-7Analog OutputsAvailable analog outputs from the DeviceLogix program include:Analog Outputs(12) Hardware Analog Outputs• DLX Real OutSP1 to DLX Real OutSP8 (Real)• DLX DINT OutSP1 to DLX DINT OutSP4 (DINT)(17) Network Analog Outputs• Reference Command (Real)• DLX Out 01 to DLX Out 14 (Real)• DLX Out 15 to DLX Out 16 (DINT)DescriptionScratchpad registers for DLX program output use.The Reference Command correlates with theReference word for the drive. The DLX Out’scorrelate with DeviceLogix Port 14 parameters P1[DLX Out 01] to Pr.16 [DLX Out 16]Analog Outputs are typically used to connect to real-world output devices(meter panel, valve, etc.) that are wired to an I/O option module in the drive,control the Reference to the drive, or to write a drive / peripheral parameter.Note: Hardware Analog Outputs are available in the PowerFlex 753 andv2.xxx (and higher) PowerFlex 755 drives.TipsData typesNote that different data types are supported by the DeviceLogix Analog In/Out parameters. For example, P17 [DLX In 01] is a Real whereas P32[DLX In 16] is a DINT. Be sure to assign a DLX In / Out to a parameter thathas the same data type.Function Block elements also support different data types. Click on theProperties Button in the upper right-hand corner of each element todisplay the Function Block’s properties. The Function Data Type fielddisplays the supported data types. Note that if Real DLX Ins are used with aFunction Block element configured for DINT (typical default), the fractionwill be truncated.PowerFlex 755 v1.xxx FirmwareDatalinks and internal DeviceLogix scratchpad registers (P54…P81)DLX In’s and DLX Out’s are Datalinks and can not be directly mapped toeach other or another Datalink, such as a Datalink in the Port 13 EmbeddedEthernet. Use the DeviceLogix internal scratchpad registers to pass databetween the Datalinks.Example 1 – Reading data from the networkA value from the network is input to DLX Real SP 1.DLX Real SP1 is read by DLX In 01 and can now be used as an AnalogInput in the DeviceLogix program.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

G-8 Using DeviceLogixDLX Real SP1 is the intermediary register that allows the two Datalinks towork together.Example 2 – Writing data to the networkThe DeviceLogix program controls an Analog Output value in DLX Out 01which is written to DLX Real SP2.The DLX Real SP2 value is output to the network.DLX Real SP2 is the intermediary register that allows the two Datalinks towork together.PowerFlex 753 (all) and PowerFlex 755 v2.xxx (and higher)Datalinks and internal DeviceLogix scratchpad registers (P82…P105)DLX In’s and DLX Out’s are Datalinks and can not be directly mapped toeach other or another Datalink, such as a Datalink in the Port 13 EmbeddedEthernet. Although the same method used with PowerFlex 755 v1.xxxfirmware can be employed, there is a more efficient method that does notrequire a DeviceLogix Datalink to be used.Example 1 – Reading data from the networkA value from the network is input to DLX Real InSP1.Drive Datalink Value753 Port 0 P895 [Data In A1] Port 14: DLX Real InSP1755 Port 13 P1 [DL From Net 01]DLX Real InSP1 can now be used as a Hardware Analog Input and useddirectly with a Function Block (a DeviceLogix Datalink is not required).PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Using DeviceLogix G-9Example 2 – Writing data to the networkThe DeviceLogix program controls an Analog Output value which iswritten to DLX Real OutSP1.Drive Datalink Value753 Port 0 P905 [Data Out A1] Port 14: DLX Real OutSP1755 Port 13 P17 [DL To Net 01]DLX Real OutSP1 can now be used as a Hardware Analog Output and useddirectly with a Function Block (a DeviceLogix Datalink is not required).Program ExamplesExample 1: Selector Switch OperationThis example demonstrates how a selector switch operation similar to thefeature in the PowerFlex 700S can be achieved through the embeddedDeviceLogix in the PowerFlex 750-Series drive. A Selector switch issimulated in the drive using a combination of inputs to produce multipleoutputs. Digital inputs in the drive are used to output configurable multiplepreset speeds (75 Hz, 85Hz, 95Hz, and 105Hz) to P571 [Preset Speed 1]. Itis assumed that the 750-Series drive has an I/O module installed in Port 4.The truth table below represents the inputs and outputs for a 4 positionselector switch.InputsOutputsInput 1 Input 2 Binary Output Selector SwitchOutput0 0 0 Output A0 1 1 Output B1 0 2 Output C1 1 3 Output DThe Logic Map below offers a high level explanation of how the aboveoutputs are achieved.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

G-10 Using DeviceLogixFigure G.1 Two Input Four Position Selector Switch Logic MapDigital Input 1Digital Input 2DLXDIP 1DLXDIP 200110110Output AOutput BOutput COutput DDLXOut 1Discrete Inputs in the Drive are used for Inputs 1 and Input 2. Output A, B,C, and D are linked to DeviceLogix Scratchpad Registers. This allowsfurther flexibility to modify the values of these outputs.The resulting output can be linked to a parameter and used in supportingdrive applications, such as configuring multiple preset speeds, point to pointpositioning, etc. In this example, it controls Preset Speed 1.Parameter ConfigurationThe following parameters are configured for this example:Port ParameterNo. Parameter Value Description14.1 DLX Out 01 Port 0:Preset Speed 114.33 DLX DIP 1 Port 4: Dig In Status.Input 1 Digital input 1 from SelectorSwitch14.34 DLX DIP 2 Port 4: Dig In Status.Input 2 Digital input 2 from SelectorSwitch14.17 DLX In 01 Port 14: DLX Real SP1 Output A14.18 DLX In 02 Port 14: DLX Real SP2 Output B14.19 DLX In 03 Port 14: DLX Real SP3 Output C14.20 DLX In 04 Port 14: DLX Real SP4 Output D14.54 DLX Real SP1 75.00 Output A Preset Speed14.55 DLX Real SP2 85.00 Output B Preset Speed14.56 DLX Real SP3 95.00 Output C Preset Speed14.57 DLX Real SP4 105.00 Output D Preset Speed0.571 Preset Speed 1 varies Resulting output from SelectorSwitchPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Using DeviceLogix G-11Functional Block ProgrammingThe Selector Switch Operation example consists of 14 blocks that areshown below.DIP 2DIP 10011 BNOTBoolean NotEnableInIn2 BORBoolean OrEnableInIn1In2111012 BNOTBoolean NotEnableInIn3 BANDBoolean AndEnableInIn1In24 BANDBoolean AndEnableInIn1In21 BANDBoolean AndEnableInIn1In211101010DevLogix In 0175.00000013 BANDBoolean AndEnableInIn111In2DevLogix In 0285.0000009 BANDBoolean AndEnableInIn110In2DevLogix In 0395.0000007 BANDBoolean AndEnableInIn110In2DevLogix In 04105.0000006 BNOTBoolean NotEnableInIn1114 SELSelectEnableInIn1In2SelectorIn10 SELSelectEnableInIn1In2SelectorIn8 SELSelectEnableInIn1In2SelectorIn5 SELSelectEnableInIn1In2SelectorIn175.00000010.00000010.00000010.000000DevLogix Out 0175.000000PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

G-12 Using DeviceLogixExample 2: Scale Block OperationThis example demonstrates how a scale block operation similar to thefeature in the PowerFlex 700VC can be achieved through the embeddedDeviceLogix in the PowerFlex 750-Series drive. A Scale Block scales aparameter value and the input of the block is linked to a parameter that isdesired to be scaled. The scale block also has both input and output highlimits and low limit parameters.Figure G.2 Scale Block High Level View1:14.551:14.18Scale In HiScale Out Hi1:14.201:14.571:14.17Scale In ValueScale Out Value1:14.11:14.561:14.19Scale 1 In LoScale Out Lo1:14.211:14.58Scale In Hi determines the high value for the input to the scale block.Scale Out Hi determines the corresponding high value for the output of thescale block.Scale In Low determines the low value for the input to the scale block.Scale Out Lo determines the corresponding low value for the output of thescale block.Scale Out Value of the block is then available for user to link to anyparameter that accepts links.Parameter ConfigurationThe following DeviceLogix parameters are configured for this example:Port ParameterNo. Parameter Value Description14.1 DLX Out 01 * Set this to where the ScaleOutput value should go *14.17 DLX In 01 * Set this to your Scale Inputvalue source *14.18 DLX In 02 Port 14: DLX Real SP2 Scale In Low14.19 DLX In 03 Port 14: DLX Real SP3 Scale In High14.20 DLX In 04 Port 14: DLX Real SP4 Scale Out Low14.21 DLX In 05 Port 14: DLX Real SP5 Scale Out High14.55 DLX Real SP2 0.0 Scale In Low value14.56 DLX Real SP3 1800.00 Scale In High value14.57 DLX Real SP4 0.000 Scale Out Low value14.58 DLX Real SP5 10.00 Scale Out High valuePowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Using DeviceLogix G-13Functional Block ProgrammingThe Scale Block Operation example consists of 12 blocks that are shownbelow.Scale In ValueDevLogix In 01Scale In HighDevLogix In 03DevLogix In 02Scale In LowScale Out HighDevLogix In 05DevLogix In 04Scale Out Low0.0000001800.0000000.0000000.0000000.000000Check if input is out of range1 GRTGreater Than (A>B)Scale In HighDevLogix In 03EnableInSourceA1800.000000SourceB3 LEQLess Than or Eql (A

G-14 Using DeviceLogixExample 3: Diverter OperationThis example demonstrates basic control logic to operate a diverter in aconveyor system. The diverter directs parts from an upstream conveyor toone of two downstream conveyors. It alternately sends ‘x’ parts down eachdownstream conveyor.SensorDiverterUpstream ConveyorDownstream ConveyorThe application consists of the following discrete I/O:Type Name DescriptionInputs Part Present Sensor Identifies that a part is presentOutputs Diverter Actuator Controls the diverter actuator to direct the flow of partsExample logic requirements:• If Part Present Sensor is ON, then increment the parts counter• If parts counter preset is reached, reset the counter and alternately set orreset the Diverter ActuatorParameter ConfigurationThe following parameters are configured for this example:Port ParameterNo. Parameter Value Description4.20 TO0 Select Port 14: DLX DigOut Sts2.DLX Output on I/O module in Port 4DOPSts014.33 DLX DIP 1 Port 4: Dig In Status.Input 1 Part Present Sensor input(I/O module in Port 4)14.51 DLX DigOut Sts2 Diverter Actuator outputFunctional Block ProgrammingThis example consists of 4 blocks that are shown below.Parts CounterFlip-Flop circuit1st time ON / 2nd time OFF on so onPart PresentPhotoeyeDIP 101 CTUCount UpEnableInCUEnable102 BANDBoolean AndEnableInIn1104 SETDSet DominantEnableInSet10Output to controlthe diverter0DOP 1ResetIn2Reset3 BANDBoolean AndEnableInIn1In210Because loop-back is performed,">>" is used to determine orderPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Using DeviceLogix G-15Example 4: Wet Well OperationThis example demonstrates how basic control logic can be used for simpleapplications. It is assumed that the PowerFlex 755 has an I/O moduleinstalled in Port 4.Figure G.3 Wet WellInflowCritical High Level SensorHigh Level SensorLow Level SensorOutflowThe application consists of the following discrete I/O:Type Name DescriptionInputs Fault Reset pushbutton Used to reset any faults or alarmsCritical High Level sensor Indicates a critically high level. It is normally a backup to the HighLevel sensor and is also used to detect if the High Level sensor isfaulty. When ON, the drive will operate at an even higher outputfrequency in case it is due to a high inflow.High Level sensor Indicates the well is at a high level and it is time to start pumping(normal operation). The drive operates at a ‘normal’ rate unless theCritical High Level was reached.Low Level sensor When OFF, it is used to indicate that the well is empty (as long asthe High and Critical High Level sensors are also OFF). The drivestops operating (end of pumping cycle).Outputs Sensor Fault pilot light Indicates that there is a problem with either the High Level or LowLevel sensorsToo Much Time Alarmpilot lightCritical High Faultflashing light / alarm hornIf the drive operates for more than the normal amount of time it takesto empty the well, there may be increased inflow or perhaps the LowLevel sensor is stuck ON. An alarm indication is made and the drivecontinues to operate.Indicates a critically high level that requires immediate attention.PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

G-16 Using DeviceLogixExample logic requirements:• If Critical High Level or High Level sensor is ON, then start the drive.– If Critical High Level sensor is ON, then switch to higher rate (90Hz)for the rest of the pumping cycle. Else run at the normal rate (60Hz)– Run until all three level sensors are OFF– Pump should run at least ‘x’ minutes at a minimum. If the Low Levelsensor fails, this prevents the High Level sensor from cycling thepump On/Off too quickly.• Annunciate a Sensor Fault condition– The Low Level sensor should never be OFF when either the HighLevel or Critical High Level sensors are ON– The High Level sensor should never be OFF when the Critical HighLevel sensor is ON– The Critical High Level sensor should never be ON when either theHigh Level or Low Level sensors are OFF• Annunciate a Critical High Level condition– The Critical High Level output should never be ON• Annunciate if pumping cycle time is longer than normal (‘y’ minutes)– Monitor the amount of time a pump cycle takes by timing how longthe drive is operating.– If greater than ‘y’ minutes, energize the Too Much Time Alarmoutput• Reset alarms / faults with a Reset pushbutton inputParameter ConfigurationThe following parameters are configured for this example.The following DeviceLogix parameters are configured for this example:Port ParameterNo. Parameter Value Description0.520 Max Fwd Speed 90.000.545 Speed Ref A Sel Port 0: Preset Speed 10.571 Preset Speed 1 60.00 Normal pumping rate (60Hz)0.573 Preset Speed 3 90.00 High speed pumping rate (90Hz)4.10 RO0 Select Port 14: DLX DigOut Sts2.DLX Sensor Fault outputDOPSts04.20 TO0 Select Port 14: DLX DigOut Sts2.DLX Critical High Level Fault outputDOPSts14.30 TO1 Select Port 14: DLX DigOut Sts2.DLX Too Much Time Alarm outputDOPSts214.33 DLX DIP 1 Port 4: Dig In Status.Input 1 Critical High Level Sensor input14.34 DLX DIP 2 Port 4: Dig In Status.Input 2 High Level Sensor input14.35 DLX DIP 3 Port 4: Dig In Status.Input 3 Low Level Sensor input14.36 DLX DIP 4 Port 4: Dig In Status.Input 4 Alarm / Fault Reset pushbuttoninputPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Using DeviceLogix G-17Functional Block ProgrammingThis example consists of 16 blocks that are shown below.Figure G.4 Control CircuitCONTROL CIRCUITCritical HighLevel SensorDIP 1High LevelSensorDIP 2Low LevelSensorDIP 3Active2 BANDBoolean AndEnableInIn1In2In3Minimum Pump Time3 TONRTimer On Delay with ResetEnableInTimerEnableReset1 BORBoolean OrEnableInIn1In24 BANDBoolean AndEnableInIn1In2Stop is momentarilyasserted ( 2 secs)5 PULRPulse Timer with ResetEnableInTimerEnableReset6 BANDBoolean AndEnableInIn1In27 SETDSet DominantEnableInSetReset8 SETDSet DominantEnableInSetResetStartRun at Normal RateSpdRef Sel 0Run at High RateSpdRef Sel 1StopPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

G-18 Using DeviceLogixFigure G.5 Fault/Alarm CircuitFAULT / ALARM CIRCUITLow LevelSensorDIP 3Critical HighLevel SensorDIP 1DIP 2High LevelSensorAllarm / FaultReset PBDIP 4Active9 BORBoolean OrEnableInIn1In215 TONRTimer On Delay with ResetEnableInTimerEnableReset10 BANDBoolean AndEnableInIn1In211 BANDBoolean AndEnableInIn1In214 SETDSet DominantEnableInSetReset16 SETDSet DominantEnableInSetReset12 BORBoolean OrEnableInIn1In2Critical HighLevel FaultDOP 2Too Much TimeAlarmDOP 313 SETDSet DominantEnableInSetResetSensor FaultDOP 1Example 5: Utilizing the Real Time ClockThis example demonstrates how to utilize the PowerFlex 750-Series driveReal Time Clock in a DeviceLogix program.Example logic requirements:• Run the drive Monday through Friday between 7:45AM and 5:15PMPowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Using DeviceLogix G-19Parameter ConfigurationThe following parameters are configured for this example:Port ParameterNo. Parameter Value Description0.545 Speed Ref A Sel Port 0: Preset Speed 10.571 Preset Speed 1 60.00 Operating speed of driveFunctional Block ProgrammingThis example consists of 15 blocks that are shown below.Day Of WeekHourMinute13091 GEQGrtr Than or Eql (A>=B)EnableInSourceASourceB2 LEQLess Than or Eql (A=B)EnableInSourceASourceB5 LESLess Than (A=B)EnableInSourceASourceB10 EQUEqualEnableInSourceASourceB11 LESLess Than (A

G-20 Using DeviceLogixNotes:PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Appendix HPermanent Magnet MotorsCompatible Allen-BradleyServo MotorsThe following table contains a list of specifications for Allen-Bradley servomotors compatible with PowerFlex 750-Series drives. This list primarilyincludes 460V rated MP and 1326 Series Allen-Bradley servo motors. Thisinformation is provided to help configure PowerFlex 750-Series drive withthe appropriate servo motor data. For information regarding compatibilityand configuration of any Allen-Bradley servo motors and third party PMmotors not listed here, contact Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support.Model NumberMotor NP Volts Motor NP Amps(line to line V rms) (A rms)Table H.A Motor Name Plate and Rating SpecificationsMotor NPHertz (Hz)Motor NP RPM(oper. rpm)Motor NPPower (kW)MotorPolesCurrent peak(A rms)System Cont.Stall Torque(N•m)MPL-B4530K 460 7.8 200.7 3010 2.60 8 19.1 8.25 4000MPL-B4560F 460 8.3 144.7 2170 3.20 8 25.5 14.10 3000MPL-B520K 460 8.1 208.0 3120 3.50 8 23.3 10.70 4000MPL-B540K 460 14.5 177.3 2660 5.40 8 42.4 19.40 4000MPL-B560F 460 14.5 130.7 1960 5.50 8 42.4 26.80 3000MPL-B580F 460 18.4 132.7 1990 7.10 8 66.5 34.00 3000MPL-B580J 460 22.6 148.0 2220 7.90 8 66.5 34.00 3800MPL-B640F 460 22.7 106.0 1590 6.11 8 46.0 36.70 3000MPL-B660F 460 27.2 81.3 1220 6.15 8 67.9 48.00 3000MPL-B680D 460 24.0 94.0 1410 9.30 8 66.5 62.80 2000MPL-B680F 460 33.9 79.3 1190 7.50 8 67.9 60.00 3000MPL-B860D 460 33.6 96.0 1440 12.50 8 67.5 83.10 2000MPL-B880C 460 33.6 72.7 1090 12.60 8 69.0 110.00 1500MPL-B880D 460 40.3 86.7 1300 15.00 8 113.2 110.00 2000MPL-B960B 460 29.7 62.0 930 12.70 8 63.6 130.00 1200MPL-B960C 460 38.9 76.0 1140 14.80 8 88.4 124.30 1500MPL-B960D 460 50.2 76.7 1150 15.00 8 102.5 124.30 2000MPL-B980B 460 31.8 59.3 890 15.02 8 70.7 162.70 1000MPL-B980C 460 48.2 67.3 1010 16.80 8 99.0 158.20 1500MPL-B980D 460 63.6 74.7 1120 18.60 8 141.4 158.20 2000Motor MaxRPM (rpm)MPG-B050-031 460 16.3 92.0 920 1.20 12 32.5 12.40 2510MPG-B110-031 460 12.9 112.0 1120 2.00 12 31.1 17.00 2420MPG-B110-091 460 10.6 184.0 1840 1.60 12 20.5 8.30 35001326AB-B515G 460 9.5 88.7 2660 2.90 4 28.5 10.40 50001326AB-B520F 460 8.8 70.3 2110 2.90 4 26.4 13.10 35001326AB-B530E 460 9.5 74.3 2230 4.20 4 28.5 18.00 30001326AB-B720E 460 17.5 70.0 2100 6.80 4 52.5 30.90 35001326AB-B720F 460 27.5 117.0 3510 11.70 4 66.5 31.80 50001326AB-B730E 460 22.8 78.3 2350 9.60 4 66.5 39.00 33501326AB-B740C 460 20.9 52.3 1570 8.70 4 62.7 53.00 22001326AB-B740E 460 32.0 79.7 2390 12.70 4 66.5 50.80 34001326AS-B630F 460 7.8 142.7 2140 2.40 8 18.5 10.70 45001326AS-B660E 460 11.8 100.7 1510 3.40 8 29.8 21.50 30001326AS-B690E 460 19.0 87.3 1310 5.00 8 41.3 36.40 30001326AS-B840E 460 21.2 79.3 1190 4.70 8 39.5 37.60 30001326AS-B860C 460 17.6 77.3 1160 6.00 8 44.4 49.30 20003050R-7 390 66.0 50.0 500 30.00 12 132.0 - 50011050R-7 390 218.0 50.0 500 110.00 12 436.0 - 500PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

H-2 Permanent Magnet MotorsNotes:PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

IndexNumerics20-COMM Carrier 1-49AAC InputCircuit Breakers A-11Line Fuses A-11AC Supply SourceConsiderations 1-8Impedance or Phase Grounded 1-8Unbalanced 1-8Ungrounded 1-8Agency Certification A-1Ai0 and Ai1 Jumpers 1-37AlarmsDrive Alarm Cross Reference 4-10Drive Alarm Descriptions 4-4Dual Incremental Encoder AlarmDescriptions 4-13I/O Alarm Descriptions 4-12Safe Speed Monitor Alarm Descriptions4-12Single Incremental Encoder AlarmDescriptions 4-12Types 4-1Universal Feedback Alarm Descriptions4-14Application Notes C-1Armored Cable 1-12Auxiliary Power Supply Module 1-46BBattery, Type 1-31, 1-33Block Diagrams B-1Brake Resistor 1-22Brake, Minimum Resistance A-6CCable Entry Plate SHLD Terminal 1-9Cable Length, Motor 1-13Cable Trays 1-13CablesArmored 1-12Insulation 1-11Separation 1-11Shielded 1-11Type 1-11Unshielded 1-11Cables, PowerShielded 1-12Unshielded 1-12Capacitors 1-23CE Conformity 1-50Clearances, Mounting 1-7Clock Battery 1-31, 1-33Common Mode Capacitors 1-8, 1-23Conduit 1-13Contactors, Input/Output 1-22Control Module, 755 1-31, 1-33Control Pod Access 1-29Controller, DriveLogix p-2Conventions p-3Cover, Opening 1-5DDevice Ports A-4Device Select D-5DeviceLogix G-1DeviceNet Module 1-47Dimensions A-14Display D-1Distribution Systems 1-23Impedance or Phase Grounded 1-8Unbalanced 1-8Ungrounded 1-8DPI Ports 2-2Drive Frame Sizes p-3, A-14Drive Ratings A-11DriveLogix Controller p-2Drives Technical Support p-2Dynamic Brake Resistance A-6Dynamic Brake Resistor 1-22Protecting C-2Dynamic Brake Setup 3-50EEMC Directive 1-50EMI/RFI Filter Grounding 1-10EtherNet/IP 2-5FFactory DefaultsDrive Parameters D-6Peripheral Parameters D-8PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Index-2FaultsDrive Fault Cross Reference 4-10Drive Fault Descriptions 4-4Dual Incremental Encoder FaultDescriptions 4-13I/O Fault Descriptions 4-12Safe Speed Monitor Fault Descriptions4-12Single Incremental Encoder FaultDescriptions 4-12Types 4-1Universal Feedback Fault Descriptions4-14Filter, RFI 1-10Frame Designations A-11Frame Sizes p-3Fuse Ratings A-11GGeneral Precautions p-4GroundingFilter 1-10Recommended Scheme 1-9Requirements 1-9Shields 1-9HHardware Enable Circuitry 1-34Heat, Watts Loss Tables A-5Human Interface ModuleDisplay Elements D-1Keys D-2Select a Device D-5Start-Up Menu D-4II/O Module 1-37I/O Wiring 1-28Input PowerConditioning 1-8Single-Phase 1-14Input/Output Contactors 1-22Installation/Wiring 1-1Interface Module D-1Selecting A Device D-5JJ1 Jumper 1-34J2 Jumper 1-35JumperAi0 and Ai1 1-37Drive Power, Configuration (PE-A andPE-B 1-23Drive Power, Frame 6 1-26Drive Power, Frame 7 1-27Drive Power, Frames 2…5 1-25Dual Incremental Encoder F-2Hardware Enable (J1) 1-34Safety Enable (J2) 1-35KKey PadFunction Keys D-3Navigation Keys D-2Soft Keys D-2LLEDs 2-4, 4-2Lifting the Drive 1-2MManual Conventions p-3Minimum Mounting Clearances 1-7Minimum Resistance A-6Mode Capacitors 1-23MotorCable Lengths 1-13Considerations 1-13Motor Name Plate and RatingSpecifications H-1MOVs 1-8, 1-23NNational Codes and Standards 1-11OOpening the Cover 1-5Option Modules20-COMM Carrier 1-49Auxiliary Power Supply 1-46DeviceNet 1-47I/O 1-37Incremental Encoders F-1Installation 1-36Safe Speed Monitor 1-45Safe Torque Off 1-44Universal Feedback Encoder E-1PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Index-3PParametersAdvanced View 3-5Basic View 3-3Cross Reference 3-131Defaults D-6, D-8Descriptions and Programming 3-1DeviceLogix G-3Drive Applications File 3-109Drive Cfg File 3-42Drive Communication File 3-95Drive Diagnostics File 3-100Drive Feedback & I/O File 3-28Drive Monitor File 3-19Drive Motor Control File 3-20Drive Position Control File 3-83Drive Protection File 3-54Drive Speed Control File 3-62Dual Incremental Encoder 3-161EtherNet 3-178Expert View 3-10I/O Module 3-137Linear List 3-19On Option Modules 3-15Organization 3-3Safe Speed Monitor Module 3-148Single Incremental Encoder 3-159Universal Feedback Module 3-166PE (Grounding) 1-9PE-A and PE-B Jumpers 1-23Permanent Magnet Motors H-1Plugs 1-21Pollution Degree Ratings A-7Ports and Devices A-4Ports, DPI 2-2PowerConditioning 1-8Jumper Screw Removal 1-25Jumper Wire Removal 1-26Jumpers 1-23Single-Phase 1-14Terminal Blocks 1-14Wiring 1-11Precautions, General p-4RRatings, Drive A-11RCD (Residual Current Detector) 1-8Real Time Clock Battery 1-31, 1-33Recommended Grounding Scheme 1-9Regenerative Power Units 1-23Reset Parameter ValuesDrive D-6Peripherals D-8Residual Current Detector 1-8Resistance, Minimum Values A-6Resistor, Brake 1-22RFI Filter 1-10SSafe Speed Monitor Module 1-45Safe Torque Off Module 1-44Safety Enable Circuitry 1-35Safety Ground 1-9Servo Motors H-1Shielded Cables, Power 1-12SHLD Terminal 1-9SpecificationsAgency Certification A-1Control A-3Drive Ratings A-11Electrical A-3Environment A-2Protection A-1Start Up 2-1Check List 2-1Menu 2-3Navigating To Menu D-4Status Indicators 2-4, 4-2Supply Source 1-8Support p-2TTechnical Support p-2Contacting 4-22Terminal BlocksLocation 1-15, 1-18Power 1-17, 1-20Wire Size, I/O 1-28Wire Size, Power 1-14THHN and THWN Wire Coatings 1-12Troubleshooting 4-1Common Symptoms 4-20PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

Index-4UUnbalanced/Ungrounded Supply 1-8Ungrounded Distribution Systems 1-23Unshielded Power Cables 1-12VVoltage Tolerance C-1WWatts Loss Tables A-5Weights 1-2WiringI/O 1-28Power 1-11PowerFlex 750-Series User Manual – Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009

U.S. Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support - Tel: (1) 262.512.8176, Fax: (1) 262.512.2222, Email: support@drives.ra.rockwell.com, Online: www.ab.com/support/abdriveswww.rockwellautomation.comPower, Control and Information Solutions HeadquartersAmericas: Rockwell Automation, 1201 South Second Street, Milwaukee, WI 53204 USA, Tel: (1) 414.382.2000, Fax: (1) 414.382.4444Europe/Middle East/Africa: Rockwell Automation, Vorstlaan/Boulevard du Souverain 36, 1170 Brussels, Belgium, Tel: (32) 2 663 0600, Fax: (32) 2 663 0640Asia Pacific: Rockwell Automation, Level 14, Core F, Cyberport 3, 100 Cyberport Road, Hong Kong, Tel: (852) 2887 4788, Fax: (852) 2508 1846Publication 750-UM001C-EN-P – September 2009Supersedes 750-UM001B-EN-P – June 2009Copyright © 2009 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in USA.